Autodesk Auto CAD 2011 User’s Guide Aug
User Manual: autodesk AutoCAD - 2011 - User’s Guide Free User Guide for Autodesk AutoCAD Software, Manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 2280
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
AutoCAD 2011 User’s Guide February 2010 © 2010 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, Algor, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backburner, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Fempro, Fire, Flame, Flare, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, Lustre, MatchMover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moldflow, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, MPA, MPA (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, Moldflow Plastics Insight, MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert, Mudbox, Multi-Master Editing, Navisworks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, Pipeplus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), Sparks, SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, ToolClip, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual LISP, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Published by: Autodesk, Inc. 111 McInnis Parkway San Rafael, CA 94903, USA Contents Part 1 Get Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Find the Information You Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Find Information Using InfoCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Overview of InfoCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Search For Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Access Subscription Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Receive Product Updates and Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Save and Access Favorite Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Specify InfoCenter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Search Topics in Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Learn the Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 View the Product Readme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Where to Find AutoCAD Express Tools Volumes 1-9 . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Join the Customer Involvement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Chapter 2 Get Information from Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Obtain General Drawing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Count Objects Within a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Part 2 The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 iii Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 The Application Menu . . . . . . . . . Search for Commands . . . . . . . Access Common Tools . . . . . . Browse Files . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Access Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . The Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the Ribbon . . . . . . Display and Organize the Ribbon . Customize the Ribbon . . . . . . Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 27 . 28 . 29 . 34 . 37 . 37 . 38 . 44 Other Tool Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Access the Classic Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Status Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Application Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Drawing Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Keytips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 The Command Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Enter Commands on the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Enter System Variables on the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window . . . . . . . . . 58 Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line . . . . . . 60 Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window . . . . . . . . . . 62 Shortcut Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images . . . . . . . . . . 69 Create and Use Command Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Change Tool Palette Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Control Tool Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Customize Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Organize Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Save and Share Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Overview of DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Understand the DesignCenter Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Access Content with DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Add Content with DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Retrieve Content from the Web with DesignCenter Online . . . 101 Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Set Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Set Up the Drawing Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Set Options for 3D Modeling with Perspective Projection . . . . 118 iv | Contents Switch Between Model Space and Layouts . Specify Application Fonts . . . . . . . . . . Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows . Control the Display of Toolbars . . . . . . . Create Task-Based Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . Save and Restore Interface Settings (Profiles) . . . Customize Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Play Back an Action Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrate and Specify Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 . 129 . 134 . 142 . 148 . 151 . 154 . 157 . 160 Part 3 Start and Save Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Chapter 6 Start a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Overview of Starting a New Drawing . . . . . . Specify Units and Unit Formats . . . . . . . . . Determine the Units of Measurement . . . Set the Unit Format Conventions . . . . . Use a Drawing Template File . . . . . . . . . . . Add Identifying Information to Drawings . . . . Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing . Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 . 167 . 167 . 170 . 171 . 174 . 176 Open or Save a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Open a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Part of a Large Drawing (Partial Load) . . . . . . Work with Multiple Open Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . Preview Open Drawings and Layouts . . . . . . . Switch Between Open Drawings . . . . . . . . . . Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing . Transfer Information between Open Drawings . . Save a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find a Drawing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Search Paths and File Locations . . . . . . . . . Chapter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 . 185 . 188 . 188 . 189 . 193 . 196 . 197 . 203 . 204 Repair, Restore, or Recover Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Repair a Damaged Drawing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Create and Restore Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Recover from a System Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Chapter 9 Maintain Standards in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Overview of CAD Standards . . . . . . . . Define Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Drawings for Standards Violations . Translate Layer Names and Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 . 220 . 222 . 229 Contents | v Part 4 Control the Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Chapter 10 Change Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Pan or Zoom a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pan and Zoom with the Aerial View Window . . . . . . . . Save and Restore Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control the 3D Projection Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Parallel and Perspective Views . . . . . . Define a Perspective Projection (DVIEW) . . . . . . . Define a Parallel Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choose Preset 3D Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define a 3D View with Coordinate Values or Angles . Change to a View of the XY Plane . . . . . . . . . . . Shade a Model and Use Edge Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model . . . . . . . Customize a Visual Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 . 240 . 243 . 247 . 247 . 248 . 251 . 253 . 253 . 255 . 257 . 257 . 261 . 277 Use Viewing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Specify 3D Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of 3D Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use 3D Navigation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . Walk and Fly Through a Drawing . . . . . . . . Create a 3D Dynamic View (DVIEW) . . . . . . Use ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ViewCube Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reorient the View of a Model with ViewCube . Change the UCS with ViewCube . . . . . . . . Navigate with SteeringWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of SteeringWheels . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define and Change Views with ShowMotion . . . . . Overview of ShowMotion . . . . . . . . . . . . Create and Modify Shots and Shot Sequences . Play Back a Shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define a 3D View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Camera Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Preview Animations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Motion Path Animations . . . . . . . . . . . . vi | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 . 285 . 287 . 290 . 293 . 295 . 295 . 299 . 301 . 308 . 310 . 311 . 314 . 316 . 323 . 340 . 340 . 342 . 346 . 348 . 349 . 350 . 351 . 356 . 359 Control a Camera Motion Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Specify Motion Path Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Record a Motion Path Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Use Navigation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Available Navigation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Reposition and Reorient the Navigation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Control the Display of Navigation Tools on the Navigation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Use 3Dconnexion 3D mouse to Navigate Views . . . . . . . . . 369 Chapter 12 Display Multiple Views in Model Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Set Model Space Viewports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Select and Use the Current Viewport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Save and Restore Model Tab Viewport Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . 378 Part 5 Organize Drawings and Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Chapter 13 Create Single-View Drawings (Model Space) . . . . . . . . . . 383 Quick Start for Model Space Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Draw, Scale, and Annotate in Model Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Chapter 14 Create Multiple-View Drawing Layouts (Paper Space) . . . . . 391 Quick Start for Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understand the Layout Process . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Model Space and Paper Space . . . . . . Work on the Model Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . Work on a Layout Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access Model Space from a Layout Viewport . Export a Layout to Model Space . . . . . . . . Create and Modify Layout Viewports . . . . . . . . Control Views in Layout Viewports . . . . . . . . . Scale Views in Layout Viewports . . . . . . . Control Visibility in Layout Viewports . . . . Scale Linetypes in Layout Viewports . . . . . Align Views in Layout Viewports . . . . . . . Rotate Views in Layout Viewports . . . . . . . Reuse Layouts and Layout Settings . . . . . . . . . Chapter 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 393 . 396 . 396 . 397 . 400 . 403 . 406 . 410 . 410 . 413 . 419 . 420 . 423 . 426 Work with Sheets in a Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Quick Start for Sheet Sets . . . . . Understand the Sheet Set Manager Create and Manage a Sheet Set . . Create a Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 433 . 435 . 436 Contents | vii Organize a Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create and Modify Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . Include Information with Sheets and Sheet Sets . Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets . . . . . . . . Use Sheet Sets in a Team . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 . 442 . 451 . 454 . 459 Part 6 Create and Modify Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Work with Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display and Change the Properties of Objects . . . . . . Copy Properties Between Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Layers to Manage Complexity . . . . . . . . . . . . Create and Name Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties . . . . . . . . Override Layer Properties in Viewports . . . . . . . . . . Filter and Sort the List of Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use New Layer Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reconcile New Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Layer States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Current Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Color of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Color Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Current Linetype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Linetype of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Linetype Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Linetypes on Short Segments and Polylines . . . Control Lineweights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Lineweights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Lineweights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Current Lineweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Lineweight of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . Control the Display Properties of Certain Objects . . . . . . . Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control the Transparency of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed . . . . . Control the Display of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 . 465 . 467 . 470 . 471 . 471 . 473 . 479 . 482 . 486 . 494 . 500 . 504 . 505 . 513 . 513 . 516 . 519 . 521 . 521 . 523 . 525 . 527 . 529 . 531 . 532 . 532 . 535 . 537 . 538 . 540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 . 543 . 545 . 547 Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems (UCS) . . . . . . . . . Overview of Coordinate Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter 2D Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter 3D Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understand the User Coordinate System (UCS) . . . . . . . Specify Workplanes in 3D (UCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assign User Coordinate System Orientations to Viewports . Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon . . Use Dynamic Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snap to Locations on Objects (Object Snaps) . . . . . . . . . . . Use Object Snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Object Snap Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Visual Aids for Object Snaps (AutoSnap) . . . . . . . . Override Object Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrict Cursor Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjust Grid and Grid Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Orthogonal Locking (Ortho Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lock an Angle for One Point (Angle) . . . . . . . . . . . . Combine or Offset Points and Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . Combine Coordinate Values (Coordinate Filters) . . . . . . Track to Points on Objects (Object Snap Tracking) . . . . . Track to Offset Point Locations (Tracking) . . . . . . . . . Specify Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter Direct Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset from Temporary Reference Points . . . . . . . . . . Specify Intervals on Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extract Geometric Information from Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations . . . . . . . Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information . . . . . . . Use a Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use the QuickCalc Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use the Command Prompt Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 . 549 . 552 . 556 . 561 . 566 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 585 . 585 . 588 . 589 . 590 . 593 . 593 . 600 . 601 . 605 . 606 . 606 . 608 . 612 . 613 . 613 . 614 . 615 . 620 . 620 . 621 . 627 . 627 . 642 Draw Geometric Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 Draw Linear Objects . . . . . . . . . . Draw Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw Polylines . . . . . . . . . . Draw Rectangles and Polygons . Draw Multiline Objects . . . . . Draw Freehand Sketches . . . . . Draw Curved Objects . . . . . . . . . Draw Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 . 647 . 649 . 654 . 657 . 661 . 663 . 663 . 668 Contents | ix Draw Polyline Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw Donuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw Helixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw Construction and Reference Geometry . Draw Reference Points . . . . . . . . . . Draw Construction Lines (and Rays) . . Create and Combine Areas (Regions) . . . . . Create Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 . 675 . 677 . 679 . 682 . 683 . 683 . 684 . 687 . 691 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 . 695 . 698 . 701 . 703 . 707 . 713 . 718 . 721 . 724 . 727 . 727 . 729 . 742 . 750 . 763 . 773 . 785 . 786 . 787 . 794 . 797 . 799 Add Constraints to Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Overview of Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constrain Objects Geometrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . Display and Verify Geometric Constraints . . . . . . Modify Objects with Geometric Constraints Applied . Infer Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constrain Distances and Angles between Objects . . . . . . x | Contents . . . . . . . . . . Change Existing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 Select Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Objects Individually . . . . . . . . . . Select Multiple Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Prevent Objects from Being Selected . . . . Select Objects by Properties . . . . . . . . . Customize Object Selection . . . . . . . . . Group Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Correct Mistakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Erase Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Windows Cut, Copy, and Paste . . . . . . . . Modify Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choose a Method to Modify Objects . . . . Edit Objects with Grips . . . . . . . . . . . Move or Rotate Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Copy, Offset, or Mirror Objects . . . . . . . Change the Size and Shape of Objects . . . Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects . . . . Modify Complex Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassociate Compound Objects (Explode) . Modify Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Helixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Multilines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 . 808 . 808 . 810 . 816 . 820 . 823 . 826 Overview of Dimensional Constraints . . . . . . . . . . Apply Dimensional Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control the Display of Dimensional Constraints . . . . . Modify Objects with Dimensional Constraints Applied . Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations . . . . . . . Overview of Formulas and Equations . . . . . . . . . . . Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager . . . . . Organize Parameters into Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826 . 829 . 834 . 836 . 840 . 841 . 842 . 847 Part 7 Define and Reference Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849 Chapter 21 Work with Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 Overview of Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings . . . . . . Overview of Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . Work With Action Parameters in Blocks . . . . Work With Constraint Parameters in Blocks . Remove Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 . 853 . 858 . 858 . 859 . 862 . 863 Create and Modify Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865 Define Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Blocks Within a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks . . . . . . . . Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks . Nest Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Block Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Tool Palettes to Organize Blocks . . . . . . . . . Create Construction Geometry Within a Block . . . . Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Block Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define Block Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extract Data from Block Attributes . . . . . . . . . . Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) . . . . . . . Modify Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify a Block Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify the Data in Block Attributes . . . . . . . . . . Modify a Block Attribute Definition . . . . . . . . . . Disassemble a Block Reference (Explode) . . . . . . . Chapter 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865 . 865 . 867 . 870 . 872 . 873 . 874 . 874 . 875 . 876 . 878 . 882 . 883 . 889 . 889 . 892 . 893 . 898 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) . . . . . . . . . . . 901 Overview of Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901 Quick Start to Creating Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902 Contents | xi Create and Edit Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the Block Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Custom Block Authoring Tools . . . . . . . . . . . Test Blocks Within the Block Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Dynamic Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Constraints to Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Constraints in Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . Define User Parameters in Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . Control Constrained Blocks with the Parameters Manager . Use a Block Properties Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identify Fully Constrained Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Action Parameters to Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Actions and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Parameters to Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Value Sets for Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Distance and Angle Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903 . 904 . 906 . 909 . 910 . 912 . 912 . 914 . 915 . 916 . 918 . 920 . 920 . 924 . 925 . 939 . 944 . 947 . 947 . 953 Part 8 Work with 3D Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959 Chapter 24 Create 3D Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961 Overview of 3D Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961 Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves . . . . . . . . . . . 966 Overview of Creating Solids and Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966 Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968 Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972 Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976 Create a Solid or Surface by Revolving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Create Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 Overview of Creating 3D Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 Create 3D Solid Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 Create a Polysolid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000 Create 3D Solids from Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002 Combine or Slice 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007 Check 3D Models for Interferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012 Create Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014 Overview of Creating Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014 Create Procedural Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019 Create NURBS Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031 Create Associative Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036 Create Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044 Overview of Creating Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044 xii | Contents Create 3D Mesh Primitives . . . . . . . Construct Meshes from Other Objects . Create Meshes by Conversion . . . . . Create Custom Mesh (Legacy) . . . . . Create Wireframe Models . . . . . . . . . . . Add 3D Thickness to Objects . . . . . . . . . Chapter 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049 . 1067 . 1074 . 1078 . 1083 . 1087 Modify 3D Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 Overview of Modifying 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . Use Gizmos to Modify Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Using Gizmos . . . . . . . . . . . . Use the Gizmos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scale 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Grips to Modify Solids and Surfaces . . . . . . . . Use 3D Subobject Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects . . . . . . . Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces . . . . . Modify 3D Subobjects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move, Rotate, and Scale 3D Subobjects . . . . . Modify Faces on 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Edges on 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Vertices on 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . Work with Complex 3D Solids and Surfaces . . . . . . Display Original Forms of Composite Solids . . . Modify Composite Solids and Surfaces . . . . . . Shell and Remove Redundancies in 3D Objects . Press or Pull Bounded Areas . . . . . . . . . . . Add Edges and Faces to Solids . . . . . . . . . . Modify Properties of 3D Solid, Surface, and Mesh . . . Modify Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Modifying Surfaces . . . . . . . . . Trim and Untrim Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . Extend a Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fillet a Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit NURBS Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analyze Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Mesh Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Modifying Meshes . . . . . . . . . Change Mesh Smoothness Levels . . . . . . . . Refine Mesh Objects or Subobjects . . . . . . . . Add Creases to Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Mesh Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create and Close Mesh Gaps . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for Working with Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 . 1093 . 1093 . 1095 . 1099 . 1102 . 1104 . 1109 . 1109 . 1112 . 1115 . 1119 . 1119 . 1122 . 1126 . 1131 . 1134 . 1134 . 1136 . 1138 . 1140 . 1142 . 1144 . 1149 . 1149 . 1151 . 1153 . 1154 . 1155 . 1158 . 1167 . 1168 . 1172 . 1176 . 1178 . 1181 . 1186 . 1189 Contents | xiii Chapter 26 Create Sections and 2D Drawings from 3D Models . . . . . . 1197 Work with Sections . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Section Objects . . . Create Section Objects . . . . . . Modify a Section View . . . . . . Save and Publish Section Objects Create a Flattened View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197 . 1197 . 1199 . 1204 . 1213 . 1218 Part 9 Annotate Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221 Chapter 27 Work with Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223 Overview of Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . Scale Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Scaling Annotations . . . . Set Annotation Scale . . . . . . . . . . . Create Annotative Objects . . . . . . . . Display Annotative Objects . . . . . . . Add and Modify Scale Representations . Set Orientation for Annotations . . . . . . . . Chapter 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223 . 1224 . 1225 . 1227 . 1229 . 1251 . 1253 . 1256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259 . 1267 . 1272 . 1272 . 1278 . 1280 . 1283 . 1285 . 1288 . 1289 . 1289 . 1290 . 1291 . 1293 . 1295 Notes and Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297 Overview of Notes and Labels . . Create Text . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Creating Text . Create Single-Line Text . . . Create Multiline Text . . . . xiv | Contents . . . . . . . . Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259 Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills . . . . . . . . . Specify Hatch and Fill Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control the Appearance of Hatches . . . . . . . . . Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill . . . . . . . . . Control the Hatch Origin Point . . . . . . . . Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns . . . . . . Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills . . Control the Display of Hatch Boundaries . . . Control the Draw Order of Hatches and Fills . Modify Hatches and Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Hatch Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Hatch Alignment, Scale, and Rotation . Reshape a Hatch or Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-create the Boundary of a Hatch or Fill . . . Create a Blank Area to Cover Objects . . . . . . . . Chapter 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297 . 1300 . 1300 . 1304 . 1308 Create and Edit Columns in Multiline Text . . . . Import Text from External Files . . . . . . . . . . Create Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Leader Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . Create and Modify Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Leader Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Content to a Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Fields in Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Hyperlinks in Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assign Text Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Text Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Text Obliquing Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Horizontal or Vertical Text Orientation . . . . Change Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Changing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Single-Line Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Multiline Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find and Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Text Scale and Justification . . . . . . . . Check Spelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use an Alternate Text Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Using an Alternate Text Editor . . . . Format Multiline Text in an Alternate Text Editor . Chapter 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331 . 1334 . 1336 . 1336 . 1338 . 1346 . 1348 . 1352 . 1352 . 1358 . 1361 . 1363 . 1363 . 1366 . 1373 . 1375 . 1376 . 1377 . 1377 . 1378 . 1380 . 1383 . 1385 . 1387 . 1391 . 1391 . 1392 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397 Create and Modify Tables . . . . Link a Table to External Data . . Work with Table Styles . . . . . Add Text and Blocks to Tables . Use Formulas in Table Cells . . Chapter 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397 . 1401 . 1404 . 1407 . 1412 Dimensions and Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417 Understand Basic Concepts of Dimensioning . . Overview of Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . Parts of a Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . Associative Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . Use Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Dimension Styles . . . . . . . Compare Dimension Styles and Variables . Control Dimension Geometry . . . . . . . Control Dimension Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417 . 1417 . 1420 . 1421 . 1424 . 1424 . 1425 . 1427 . 1437 Contents | xv Control Dimension Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Scale for Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Linear Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Radial Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Angular Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Ordinate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Arc Length Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Existing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify A Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply a New Dimension Style to Existing Dimensions . Override a Dimension Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Dimension Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Dimension Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Dimension Associativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Geometric Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Geometric Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datum Reference Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Projected Tolerance Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Composite Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448 . 1461 . 1464 . 1464 . 1472 . 1480 . 1483 . 1485 . 1486 . 1487 . 1500 . 1501 . 1504 . 1508 . 1511 . 1513 . 1513 . 1516 . 1516 . 1517 . 1518 Part 10 Plot and Publish Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521 Chapter 32 Prepare Drawings for Plotting and Publishing . . . . . . . . 1523 Quick Start to Saving Settings for Plotting and Publishing . Specify Page Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Page Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . Select a Printer or Plotter for a Layout . . . . . . . . . Select a Paper Size for a Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Plot Area of a Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjust the Plot Offset of a Layout . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Plot Scale for a Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Lineweight Scale for a Layout . . . . . . . . . Select a Plot Style Table for a Layout . . . . . . . . . . Set Shaded Viewport and Plot Options for a Layout . . Determine the Drawing Orientation of a Layout . . . Use the Layout Wizard to Specify Layout Settings . . . . . . Import PCP or PC2 Settings into a Layout . . . . . . . . . . Create and Use Named Page Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Named Page Setups with Sheet Sets . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523 . 1524 . 1524 . 1526 . 1527 . 1532 . 1533 . 1535 . 1536 . 1537 . 1540 . 1542 . 1543 . 1544 . 1545 . 1549 Plot Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1553 Quick Start to Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1553 xvi | Contents Overview of Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use a Page Setup to Specify Plot Settings . . . . . Select a Printer or Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify the Area to Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position the Drawing on the Paper . . . . . . . . Specify the Printable Area . . . . . . . . . Set the Position of the Plot . . . . . . . . Set Drawing Orientation . . . . . . . . . . Control How Objects Are Plotted . . . . . . . . Set Plot Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Shaded Viewport Options . . . . . . . Set Options for Plotted Objects . . . . . . . Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects . Use Color-Dependent Plot Style Tables . . Use Named Plot Style Tables . . . . . . . . Change Plot Style Settings . . . . . . . . . Preview a Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Files to Other Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot DWF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot DWFx Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot to DXB File Formats . . . . . . . . . . Plot to Raster File Formats . . . . . . . . . Plot Adobe PDF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Adobe PostScript Files . . . . . . . . . Create Plot Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1553 . 1558 . 1560 . 1561 . 1562 . 1565 . 1565 . 1566 . 1567 . 1568 . 1568 . 1571 . 1575 . 1579 . 1588 . 1589 . 1596 . 1608 . 1609 . 1609 . 1610 . 1612 . 1613 . 1615 . 1616 . 1618 Publish Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621 Overview of Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create and Modify a Drawing Set for Publishing . . Create a Paper or Plot File Drawing Set . . . . . . . . Publish an Electronic Drawing Set . . . . . . . . . . Publish a Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Republish a Drawing Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Electronic Drawing Sets with Autodesk Design Set Publish Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publish 3D DWF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print 3D Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621 . 1624 . 1628 . 1631 . 1636 . 1643 . 1645 . 1646 . 1652 . 1660 Part 11 Share Data Between Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663 Chapter 35 Reference Other Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665 Overview of Referenced Drawings (Xrefs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665 Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1668 Contents | xvii Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Paths to Referenced Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detach Referenced Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update and Bind Referenced Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nest and Overlay Referenced Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . Update Referenced Drawing Attachments . . . . . . . . . . Archive Drawings That Contain Referenced Drawings (Bind) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clip External References and Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Referenced Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit a Referenced Drawing in a Separate Window . . . . . . Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks . . Use the Working Set to Edit Referenced Drawings and Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Back Edited Referenced Drawings and Blocks . . . . . Edit Referenced Drawings and Blocks with Nesting, OLE, or Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolve Referenced Drawing Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolve Missing External References . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolve Circular External References . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolve Name Conflicts in External References . . . . . . . Track External Reference Operations (Log File) . . . . . . . Increase Performance with Large Referenced Drawings . . . . . . Overview of Demand Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unload Xrefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Demand Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Layer and Spatial Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Paths for Temporary Xref File Copies . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 36 . 1668 . 1674 . 1679 . 1680 . 1680 . 1682 . . . . . . 1685 . 1686 . 1691 . 1691 . 1692 . . 1696 . . 1698 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1700 . 1701 . 1701 . 1703 . 1704 . 1706 . 1709 . 1709 . 1710 . 1711 . 1712 . 1714 Link and Embed Data (OLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1717 Overview of Object Linking and Embedding . . . . . . . Import OLE Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Importing OLE Objects into Drawings . Link OLE Objects in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . Embed OLE Objects in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . Export OLE Objects from Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit OLE Objects in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1717 . 1720 . 1720 . 1721 . 1724 . 1727 . 1729 Work with Data in Other Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733 Import Other File Formats . . . . . . . . . Import Autodesk 3ds MAX Files . . . Import FBX Files . . . . . . . . . . . Import 3D Point Cloud Files . . . . . Import ACIS SAT Files . . . . . . . . Convert DXF and DXB Files to DWG xviii | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733 . 1733 . 1734 . 1735 . 1739 . 1740 Import MicroStation DGN Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Translation Mapping Setups . . . . . . . . . . . Insert WMF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attach Files as Underlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Underlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attach, Scale, and Detach Underlays . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Underlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage and Publish Drawings Containing Underlays . Attach Raster Image Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attach, Scale, and Detach Raster Images . . . . . . . . . Modify Raster Images and Image Boundaries . . . . . . Manage Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tune Raster Image Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Drawings to Other File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . Export DWF and DWFx Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export PDF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export FBX Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export MicroStation DGN Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export WMF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Raster Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export PostScript Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export ACIS SAT Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Stereolithography STL Files . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Drawings from Different Versions and Applications . . . Work with Drawings in Earlier Releases . . . . . . . . . Save Drawings to Previous Drawing File Formats . . . . Work with AutoCAD Drawings in AutoCAD LT . . . . . Work with Custom and Proxy Objects . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1741 . 1743 . 1747 . 1749 . 1749 . 1750 . 1760 . 1774 . 1781 . 1781 . 1783 . 1787 . 1794 . 1799 . 1802 . 1802 . 1804 . 1806 . 1807 . 1808 . 1811 . 1811 . 1813 . 1814 . 1815 . 1817 . 1817 . 1822 . 1825 . 1829 Extract Data from Drawings and Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . 1833 Overview of Data Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extract Data Using the Data Extraction Wizard . . . Start the Data Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . Select the Source for a Data Extraction . . . . . Select Objects for Data Extraction . . . . . . . Organize and Refine the Extracted Data . . . . Use Table Styles for Data Extraction Tables . . Link an Excel Spreadsheet to Access Data . . . . . . Output Extracted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Extracted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Updating Extracted Data . . . . . Update Extracted Data Manually . . . . . . . . Update Data Extraction Table Automatically . Modify a Data Extraction Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1833 . 1835 . 1838 . 1839 . 1841 . 1844 . 1850 . 1851 . 1855 . 1858 . 1858 . 1859 . 1861 . 1863 Contents | xix Detach a Data Extraction Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1866 Chapter 39 Access External Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1867 Overview of Using External Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access a Database from Within AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure a Database for Use with AutoCAD Drawings . . View Data in a Database Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Data in a Database Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link Database Records to Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Create and Edit Links and Link Templates . . . . . . . . . Identify and Select Existing Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find and Correct Link Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Link Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Labels to Display Database Information in the Drawing . . Create and Edit Labels and Label Templates . . . . . . . . Update Labels with New Values from the Database . . . . Use Queries to Filter Database Information . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Construct Simple Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use the Query Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use SQL Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combine Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save and Reuse Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Share Link and Label Templates and Queries with Other Users . Work with Links in Files from Earlier Releases . . . . . . . . . . Manage Files with Autodesk Vault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1867 . 1869 . 1869 . 1872 . 1877 . 1880 . 1880 . 1885 . 1888 . 1889 . 1891 . 1891 . 1896 . 1897 . 1897 . 1899 . 1903 . 1906 . 1907 . 1910 . 1912 . 1913 . 1917 Part 12 Collaborate with Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1919 Chapter 40 Protect and Sign Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1921 Drawing Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Encryption . . . . . . . . . Protect Drawings with Encryption . . . . View Password-Protected Drawings . . . Sign Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Digital Signatures . . . . . . Personally Sign Drawings . . . . . . . . . View Drawings with Digital Signatures . Chapter 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1921 . 1921 . 1922 . 1925 . 1927 . 1927 . 1929 . 1937 Use the Internet for Collaboration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1943 Get Started with Internet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1943 Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1944 Overview of Using Hyperlinks in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . 1944 xx | Contents Use a Hyperlink to Access a File or a Web Page . Use a Hyperlink to Create an Email Message . . Use Hyperlinks in Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use a Hyperlink to Start a New Drawing . . . . . Work with Drawing Files over the Internet . . . . . . Open and Save Drawing Files from the Internet . Share Drawing Files Internationally . . . . . . . Access Buzzsaw for Project Collaboration . . . . Work with Xrefs over the Internet . . . . . . . . Insert Content from a Website . . . . . . . . . . Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission . Review and Markup Files with Design Review . . . . . Use the Publish to Web Wizard to Create Web Pages . Use Autodesk Seek to Add and Share Drawings . . . . Chapter 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1945 . 1950 . 1951 . 1952 . 1953 . 1953 . 1958 . 1960 . 1967 . 1968 . 1971 . 1980 . 1982 . 1984 Use Markups for Design Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1987 Overview of Using Markups for Design Publish Drawings for Review . . . . . . Insert Markups . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Markups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Respond to Markups . . . . . . . . . . Republish a Markup Set . . . . . . . . . Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1987 . 1988 . 1989 . 1989 . 1994 . 1997 Part 13 Render Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1999 Chapter 43 Draw 2D Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2001 Set Isometric Grid and Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2001 Draw Isometric Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2003 Chapter 44 Add Lighting to Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2005 Overview of Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow . Illuminate a Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guidelines for Lighting . . . . . . . . . . Use Point Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Spotlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Weblights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Distant Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Shape to a Light . . . . . . . Adjust and Manipulate Lights . . . . . . . . . Control the Display of Lights . . . . . . Adjust Light Placement . . . . . . . . . . Control Light Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2005 . 2010 . 2012 . 2012 . 2015 . 2022 . 2028 . 2039 . 2041 . 2042 . 2043 . 2045 . 2049 Contents | xxi Sun and Sky Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incorporate Luminaire Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Lights in Drawings from Previous Versions of AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Drawings into 3ds Max or VIZ . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 45 . . . . 2063 . . . . 2064 Materials and Textures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2065 Overview of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create and Modify Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browse Material Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage and Organize Materials . . . . . . . . . Modify Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply Materials to Objects and Faces . . . . . . . . . Use Maps for Added Realism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Map Channels for Added Texture Realism . Understand Map Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Map Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjust Mapping On Objects and Faces . . . . . . Chapter 46 . . . . 2056 . . . . 2061 . . . . 2063 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2065 . 2066 . 2067 . 2071 . 2077 . 2080 . 2082 . 2082 . 2084 . 2084 . 2084 . 2087 . 2093 . 2098 Render 3D Objects for Realism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2101 Overview of Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare a Model for Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understand Face Normals and Hidden Surfaces . . . . Minimize Intersecting and Coplanar Faces . . . . . . Balance Mesh Density for Smooth Geometry . . . . . Set Up the Renderer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use the Render Settings Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Custom Render Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control the Rendering Environment . . . . . . . . . Basics of Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Render Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Render Views, Selected Objects, or Cropped Content . Set Output Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjust Sampling to Improve Image Quality . . . . . . Use Shadows in Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ray-traced Reflections and Refractions . . . . . . . . Benefits of Indirect Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . Final Gathering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendered Image Histories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2101 . 2103 . 2103 . 2106 . 2108 . 2111 . 2111 . 2113 . 2116 . 2119 . 2119 . 2121 . 2124 . 2126 . 2127 . 2130 . 2133 . 2133 . 2136 . 2138 . 2139 Save and Redisplay Rendered Images . . . . Save a Rendered Image . . . . . . . . Redisplay a Rendered Image . . . . . Save Copies of Rendered Images . . . Use Models with Other Applications . Update Legacy Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2142 . 2142 . 2144 . 2145 . 2145 . 2146 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2149 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2189 Contents | xxiii xxiv Part 1: Get Information 1 2 Find the Information You Need 1 There are various ways to find information about how to use this program, and multiple resources are available. This program is a powerful application with tools that help you work with a high level of efficiency and productivity. You install this software with the Installation wizard that starts automatically when you insert the product media. This application is often intuitive, but when you do need to look something up, you can save time and avoid frustration if you use the Help system to find information. The Help system is organized in a structured design that makes information easy to locate. Find Information Using InfoCenter You can use InfoCenter to search a variety of information sources with one query. You can also easily access product updates and announcements. Overview of InfoCenter You can use InfoCenter to search a variety of information sources with one query. You can also easily access product updates and announcements. You can use InfoCenter to: ■ Search for information through keywords (or by entering a phrase) ■ Access subscription services through Subscription Center panel ■ Access to product-related updates and announcements through Communication Center panel 3 ■ Access saved topics through Favorites panel ■ Access topics in Help To display the InfoCenter box in a collapsed state, click the arrow to its left. To browse search results ➤ On the panel for Search Results, Subscription Center, Communication Center, or Favorites, on the right side of the category header, do one of the following: ■ Click the Next button. ■ Click the Previous button. To rearrange the topics displayed on a panel 1 Display a panel by doing one of the following: ■ In the InfoCenter box, enter a keyword or phrase. Then press ENTER or click the Search button. ■ In the InfoCenter box, click the Communication Center button. ■ In the InfoCenter box, click the Favorites button. 2 Click and drag a category or group header to the desired position. Search For Information You can enter keywords or a phrase in the InfoCenter box to search for information. When you enter keywords or a phrase in the InfoCenter box, you search the contents of multiple Help resources as well as any additional documents that have been specified in the InfoCenter Settings dialog box or through the CAD Manager Control Utility. 4 | Chapter 1 Find the Information You Need When you enter keywords or a phrase in the InfoCenter box, you search the contents of multiple Help resources as well as any additional documents that have been specified in the InfoCenter Settings dialog box or through the CAD Manager Control Utility. Keyword searches produce better results. In case of a misspelled word, spelling suggestions are displayed on the panel. The results are displayed as links on the InfoCenter Search Results panel. Click a link to display the topic, article, or document. To keep Search Results, Subscription Center, Communication Center, and the Favorites panel expanded, click the push pin icon in the bottom-right corner of the panel. When you use InfoCenter to search for information, you can use the following special symbols in your query to refine or expand it. These symbols can be used alone or can be combined. Symbol Description * Replaces one or more characters when used at the beginning, middle, or end of a word. For example, “*lish”, “p*lish”, and “pub*” will all find “publish”. Also, “anno*” Search For Information | 5 Symbol Description will find “annotative”, “annotation”, “annoupdate”, “annoreset”, and so on. ? Replaces a single character. For example, “cop?” will find “copy”, but not “copybase”. ~ Adds grammatical form variations to a keyword when added at the beginning or end of a word. For example, “plotting~” will find “plots”, “plotted”, and so on. Also, “~plot” will find “preplot”, “replot”, and so on. When performing the exact phrase search, use double quotation marks (" ") to enclose words that must appear next to each other in the specified sequence. For example, enter "specify units of measurement" to find only topics with all those words in that order. You can also use the previously mentioned symbols in a text string that is enclosed in double quotation marks. See also: ■ Specify InfoCenter Settings on page 11 To search multiple sources for information 1 In the InfoCenter box, enter a keyword or phrase. 2 Click the Search button. To search a single location for information 1 In the InfoCenter box, enter a keyword or phrase. 2 Click the down arrow next to the Search button. 3 Select a location from the list to search. To add a location to search 1 In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button. 2 Click Add Search Location. 3 In the Add Search Location dialog box, specify a document or a file location to search. 4 Click Add. 6 | Chapter 1 Find the Information You Need Access Subscription Center You can click the Subscription Center button to display links to information about subscription services such as product enhancements, personalized web support from Autodesk technical experts, and self-paced e-Learning. To learn more about Autodesk subscription membership, visit http://www.autodesk.com/subscriptioncenter. Autodesk Subscription Services With Autodesk Subscription, you get the latest releases of Autodesk software, incremental product enhancements, personalized web support from Autodesk technical experts, and self-paced e-Learning. Subscription services are available to subscription members only (available in countries/regions where Autodesk subscriptions are offered). Click the Subscription Center button in the InfoCenter box to access the following options: ■ Create support request. Provides direct communication with Autodesk support technicians. You receive fast, complete answers to your installation, configuration, and troubleshooting questions. ■ View support request. Tracks and manages your questions and responses through Autodesk's support system. ■ Edit Subscription Center profile. Sets up and maintains your subscription membership. ■ View e-Learning catalog. Features interactive lessons organized into product catalogs. ■ e-Learning lessons. Provides e-Learning lessons. Each lesson is 15-30 minutes and features hands-on exercises, with an option to use a simulation instead of the software application. You can use an online evaluation tool that identifies gaps in skills, determines the lessons that will be most helpful, and keeps track of learning progress. Subscription Resources and Privacy Subscription resources provide interactive product features over the Internet. Each time you access subscription resources from Subscription Center in an Access Subscription Center | 7 Autodesk product, product information (such as the serial number, version, language, and the subscription contract ID) is sent to Autodesk for verification that your product is on subscription. Autodesk compiles statistics using the information sent to subscription resources to monitor how they are being used and how they can be improved. Autodesk maintains the information provided by or collected from you in accordance with Autodesk's published privacy policy, which is available at http://www.autodesk.com/privacy. Enable Subscription Resources The CAD Manager Control Utility can be used to turn Subscription Resources on and off in the program. To access the Subscription 1 In the InfoCenter box, click the Subscription Center button. 2 On the Subscription Center panel, under Subscription Center, click the subscription resource you want to access. NOTE Subscription Center is not available to all product users. If subscription resources are not available in your product, your product is not entitled to subscription benefits. Receive Product Updates and Announcements You can click the Communication Center button to display links to information about product updates and announcements, and may include links to RSS feeds. Overview of Communication Center To open Communication Center, click the Communication Center button in the InfoCenter box. 8 | Chapter 1 Find the Information You Need Communication Center provides the following types of announcements: ■ Autodesk Channels: Receive support information, product updates, and other announcements (including articles and tips). ■ CAD Manager Channel. Receive information (RSS feeds) published by your CAD manager. ■ RSS Feeds. Receive information from RSS feeds to which you subscribe. RSS feeds generally notify you when new content is posted. You are automatically subscribed to several default RSS feeds when you install the program. You can customize the items that display in the Communication Center panel. Communication Center Online Privacy Communication Center is an interactive feature that must be connected to the Internet in order to deliver content and information. Each time Communication Center is connected, it sends your information to Autodesk so that you receive the correct information. All information is sent anonymously to Autodesk to maintain your privacy. The following information is sent to Autodesk: ■ Product name (in which you are using Communication Center) ■ Product release number ■ Product language ■ Country/region (specified in the Communication Center settings) ■ Your subscription contract number (if you’re a subscription customer) Autodesk compiles statistics using the information sent from Communication Center to monitor how it is being used and how it can be improved. Autodesk maintains information provided by or collected from you in accordance with the company's published privacy policy, which is available on http://www.autodesk.com/privacy. See also: ■ Specify InfoCenter Settings on page 11 ■ Access Subscription Center on page 7 Receive Product Updates and Announcements | 9 Receive New Information Notifications Whenever new information is available, Communication Center notifies you by displaying a balloon message below the Communication Center button on the InfoCenter box. Click the link in the balloon message to open the article or announcement. If you don’t want to receive Communication Center notifications, in the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, turn off Balloon Notification. See also: ■ Specify InfoCenter Settings on page 11 Save and Access Favorite Topics You can click the Favorites button to display saved links to topics or web locations. Any link that displays on the Search Results panel, Subscription Center or Communication Center panel can be marked as a favorite. A link marked as a favorite displays a star icon on the Search Results panel, Subscription Center panel or the Communication Center panel. To display the InfoCenter Favorites panel ■ In the InfoCenter box, click the Favorites button. To save a link in InfoCenter as a favorite 1 Display a panel by doing one of the following: ■ In the InfoCenter box, enter a keyword or phrase. Then press ENTER or click the Search button. ■ In the InfoCenter box, click the Subscription Center button. ■ In the InfoCenter box, click the Communication Center button. 2 Click the star icon that is displayed next to the link that you want to save as a favorite. 10 | Chapter 1 Find the Information You Need To remove a favorite link from the InfoCenter Favorites panel 1 In the InfoCenter box, click the Favorites button to display the Favorites panel. 2 Click the star icon that is displayed next to the link that you want to remove from the Favorites panel. Specify InfoCenter Settings You can specify InfoCenter Search and Communication Center settings in the InfoCenter Settings dialog box. In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, you can specify the following settings: ■ General. Your current location, frequency for checking new online content and option to turn on or off animated transition effects for the InfoCenter panels. ■ Search Locations. Locations (documents, web locations, and files) to search for information, as well as the name that displays for each location and the number of results to display for each. Also, you can add or remove search locations. The Web Locations check box provides access to important information on the Autodesk website, including the Knowledge Base and discussion groups. When you add document locations, you can specify files on your local drive. NOTE User-specified CHM (compiled help) files must be located on your local drive. InfoCenter cannot search CHM files located on network drives. Specify InfoCenter Settings | 11 ■ Communication Center. Maximum age of the articles displayed on the Communication Center panel and the location and name of the CAD Manager Channel. ■ Autodesk Channels. Channels to display in the Communication Center panel as well as the number of articles to display for each channel. ■ Balloon Notification. Notifications for new product information, software updates, product support announcements, and Did You Know messages. Also, you can customize the transparency and the display time of the balloon. NOTE Did You Know messages displayed below the Communication Center button on the InfoCenter box provide Knowledge Base information and general instructional messages such as tips. You can click on the text or the Expand icon to expand the balloon to view the detailed information. ■ RSS Feeds. RSS feed subscriptions. You can add or remove RSS feeds. RSS feeds generally notify you when new content is posted. You can use the CAD Manager Control utility to specify InfoCenter Search and Communication Center settings. For more information about how to install and run the utility, see To install the CAD Manager Control utility on page 104. Click Help in the CAD Manager Control utility window for details about the settings you can control. To specify locations to search for information 1 In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button. 2 Click Search Settings. 3 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, Search Locations panel, in the right pane, select or clear the search locations you want to include or exclude when you search for information. 4 Click OK. To add new location to search for information 1 In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button. 2 Click Search Settings. 3 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, do one of the following: ■ On the Search Locations panel, in the right pane, click Add. 12 | Chapter 1 Find the Information You Need ■ On the Search Locations panel, in the right pane, right-click anywhere in the pane. Click Add. 4 In the Add Search Location dialog box, specify a file location to search. 5 Click Add. 6 Click OK. To remove a search location 1 In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button. 2 Click Search Settings. 3 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, do one of the following: ■ Select a location to remove, and then click Remove. ■ Right-click a search location. Click Remove. 4 In the InfoCenter - Remove Search Location dialog box, click Yes. 5 Click OK. To specify the CAD Manager Channel location and name 1 Click Start menu (Windows) ➤ All Programs (or Programs) ➤ Autodesk ➤ CAD Manager Tools ➤ CAD Manager Control Utility. 2 Select the product you want to modify. Click OK. 3 In the CAD Manager Control Utility window, InfoCenter tab, select the option to enable CAD Manager Channel. 4 Enter an appropriate feed under Feed Location. 5 Enter the display name for the CAD Manager and then click Apply. Click OK. 6 Restart AutoCAD. 7 In the upper right-side of the application, on the InfoCenter box, click the arrow next to the Search button. 8 Click Search Settings. Specify InfoCenter Settings | 13 9 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, in the left pane, click Communication Center. The CAD Manager Channel location and name are displayed. NOTE A green check mark is displayed if the channel can be located and a yellow warning sign is displayed if it cannot be located. To specify the channels to display in the Communication Center panel 1 In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button. 2 Click Search Settings. 3 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, in the left pane, click Autodesk Channels. 4 In the right pane, select or clear the channels you want to display in the Communication Center panel. 5 Click OK. To specify InfoCenter balloon notification settings 1 In the InfoCenter box, click the arrow next to the Search button. 2 Click Search Settings. 3 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, in the left pane, click Balloon Notification. 4 In the right pane, select or clear the options to turn balloon notification on or off. NOTE You can turn off the balloon notification for Did You Know messages in the InfoCenter Settings dialog box. 5 Select one of the following options to set the display time for the Did You Know messages: ■ Use Balloon Notification Display Time. Uses the display time specified in the InfoCenter Settings dialog box (Balloon Notification panel) for the Did You Know messages. This option is unavailable if the Did You Know messages option is cleared. ■ Display until Closed. Displays the Did You Know message until you click the Close button. 14 | Chapter 1 Find the Information You Need 6 Enter the number of seconds to set the length of time for balloon notifications to display. 7 Enter the transparency value of the balloon or set the value using the slider. 8 Click OK. To turn on the display of Did You Know hidden messages 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, System tab, under General Options, click the Hidden Message Settings button. 3 In the Hidden Message Settings dialog box, select the InfoCenter Did You Know Balloons option to turn on the display of all hidden messages. Click OK. 4 Click OK. To add an RSS feed to Communication Center 1 In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button. 2 Click Search Settings. 3 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, in the left pane, click RSS Feeds. 4 In the right pane, do one of the following: ■ Click Add. ■ Right-click anywhere in the right pane. Click Add. 5 In the Add RSS Feed dialog box, enter the location of the RSS feed you want to add. Click Add. 6 In the InfoCenter - RSS Feed Confirmation dialog box, click Close. 7 Click OK. To remove an RSS feed from Communication Center 1 In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button. 2 Click Search Settings. 3 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, in the left pane, click RSS Feeds. Specify InfoCenter Settings | 15 4 In the right pane, do one of the following: ■ Click Remove. ■ Right-click an RSS feed. Click Remove. 5 In the InfoCenter - Remove RSS Feed dialog box, click Yes. 6 Click OK. Search Topics in Help You can click the Help button to display topics in Help. You can get much more benefit from the Help system when you learn how to use it efficiently. You can quickly find general descriptions, procedures, details about dialog boxes and palettes, or definitions of terms. To display topics in Help ■ In the InfoCenter box, click the Help button. Learn the Product For the latest information about Autodesk training, visit http://www.autodesk.com/training or contact your local Autodesk office. New Features Workshop ----- The New Features Workshop introduces you to what's new in PRODNAME. Authorized Training Centers More than 1,200 ATC sites are available ----- worldwide to meet your needs for discipline-specific, locally based training. 16 | Chapter 1 Find the Information You Need Autodesk Official Training Courseware Autodesk Official Training Courseware (AOTC) is technical training material developed by ----- Autodesk. You can purchase AOTC from your local reseller or distributor, or you can order it online from the Autodesk Store. e-Learning Autodesk e-Learning for Autodesk Subscription ----- customers features interactive lessons organized into product catalogs. Autodesk Developer Network The Autodesk Developer (ADN) program provides ----- support for full-time, professional developers who want to build software based on Autodesk products. Consulting Autodesk Consulting provides services that help ----- set up processes and provide critical training that will help increase productivity so you can capitalize on the power of your products. Partner Products and Services Visit the Partner Products & Services page for a ----- list of resources available for your Autodesk product and your industry. View the Product Readme You can find late-breaking information about this software in the Readme. It is suggested that you read through the Readme for information about recommended hardware, updated installation instructions, and known software problems. ■ View the Readme View the Product Readme | 17 Where to Find AutoCAD Express Tools Volumes 1-9 AutoCAD Express Tools Volumes 1-9 contain a library of productivity tools designed to help you extend the power of AutoCAD. They are easy to use, easily integrated into your menus and toolbars, and cover a wide range of AutoCAD functions (including dimensioning, drawing, object selection, and object modification). AutoCAD Express Tools Volumes 1-9 are installed as a Typical installation of AutoCAD. If you do not want them installed, you must disable them during the AutoCAD installation by selecting the Express Tools option on the Select the Installation Type page. For more detailed information about using Express Tools, refer to the AutoCAD Express Tools Help system found on the Express menu (in the Classic Menu Bar on page 47). NOTE Express Tools are available in their original form, in English only, and are not supported. Double-byte characters are not supported. To verify if Express Tools are loaded ■ At the Command prompt, enter EXPRESSTOOLS to enable the tools. You can install the AutoCAD Express Tools as part of the AutoCAD installation, or you can add them later using Add or Remove Programs on the Control Panel. To access the Express Tools and their toolbars ■ To display the Express menu, enter EXPRESSMENU at the Command prompt. ■ To display the Express toolbars, right-click next to any docked toolbar. Click EXPRESS, and select an Express toolbar. Repeat these steps until all of the Express toolbars you want are displayed. TIP With the Express toolbars displayed, select a workspace and save it. The Express Tools toolbars will then always be included with that workspace. Join the Customer Involvement Program You are invited to help guide the direction of Autodesk design software. 18 | Chapter 1 Find the Information You Need If you participate in the Customer Involvement Program (CIP), specific information about how you use AutoCAD is forwarded to Autodesk. This information includes what features you use the most, problems that you encounter, and other information helpful to the future direction of the product. See the following links for more information. ■ Learn more about the Autodesk Customer Involvement Program: http://www.autodesk.com/cip ■ Read the Autodesk Privacy Statement: http://www.autodesk.com/cipprivacy When you join, you will be able to view reports that can help you optimize your use of AutoCAD. To turn the CIP on or off 1 On the InfoCenter toolbar, to the right of the Help button, click the drop-down arrow. 2 Click Customer Involvement Program. 3 In the Customer Involvement Program dialog box, select to start or stop participating. 4 Click OK. Join the Customer Involvement Program | 19 20 Get Information from Drawings 2 You can retrieve general information from a drawing including identifying information and the number of objects that it contains. There are types of information stored in a drawing that are not specific to objects within the drawing, but provide useful information to help you understand the behavior of the drawing, the settings of system variables, the number of objects, descriptive information, and so on. Obtain General Drawing Information You can retrieve general information about the drawing file and its settings. This information includes the following: ■ Custom descriptive information about the drawing (DWGPROPS) ■ General drawing settings (STATUS) ■ Amount of time spent in the drawing (TIME) This information can help you document a drawing, displays a variety of drawing settings such as the total number of objects in the drawing and the amount of free space on your disk drive, and the total amount of time spent in the drawing file. See also: ■ Enter System Variables on the Command Line on page 56 ■ Add Identifying Information to Drawings on page 174 ■ Extract Geometric Information from Objects on page 620 21 ■ Compare Dimension Styles and Variables on page 1425 Quick Reference Commands DWGPROPS Sets and displays the file properties of the current drawing. SETVAR Lists or changes the values of system variables. STATUS Displays drawing statistics, modes, and extents. TIME Displays the date and time statistics of a drawing. System Variables CDATE Stores the current date and time in decimal format. DATE Stores the current date and time in Modified Julian Date format. SAVENAME Displays the file name and directory path of the most recently saved drawing. Count Objects Within a Drawing You can count objects within a drawing using the QSELECT command. The QSELECT command displays the Quick Select dialog box, which allows you to create a selection set based on the filtering criteria. You can filter selection sets by property such as color or linetype, and by object type. Creating a selection set based on the filtering criteria in the Quick Select dialog box, allows you to count specified types of objects within a drawing. 22 | Chapter 2 Get Information from Drawings To count specified types of objects in a drawing 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Quick Select. 2 In the Quick Select dialog box, do one of the following: ■ In the Apply To List, select Entire Drawing. ■ Click the Select Objects button to select a group of objects. Press Enter. In the Apply To list, select Current selection. 3 In the Object Type list, select the type of object you want to count. 4 In the Properties list, select a property that belongs to the type of objects you want to count. 5 In the Operator list, select = Equals. 6 In the Value list, select the property value of the type of objects you want to count. 7 Click OK. The number of objects displays at the Command prompt. Quick Reference Commands QSELECT Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria. Count Objects Within a Drawing | 23 24 Part 2: The User Interface 25 26 Tools in the Application Window 3 Use the Application menu, Quick Access toolbar, and ribbon to access many frequently used commands. The Application Menu Click the application button to search for commands, as well as access tools to create, open, and publish a file. Search for Commands Perform a real-time search for commands on the Quick Access toolbar, in the application menu, and on the ribbon. The Search field displays at the top of the application menu. Search results can include menu commands, basic tooltips, and command prompt text strings. You can enter a search term in any language. 27 Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. Access Common Tools Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. 28 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window Click the application button to quickly ■ Create, open, or save a file ■ Audit, recover, and purge a file ■ Print or publish a file ■ Access the Options dialog box ■ Close AutoCAD NOTE You can also close AutoCAD by double-clicking the Application button. Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. Browse Files View, sort, and access supported files that you have recently opened. Recent Documents View the most recently used files with the Recent Documents list. Files display in the Recent Documents list with the most recently used file at the top by default. Browse Files | 29 Pinned Files You can keep a file listed regardless of files that you save later using the push pin button to the right. The file is displayed at the bottom of the list until you turn off the push pin button. Sort and Group Options Use the drop-down list at the top of the Recent Documents list to sort or group files by ■ File name ■ File size ■ File type ■ Date the files were last modified 30 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window To change the preview display options for recent documents 1 Click the Application menu and then, click Recent Documents. 2 Under the Search text box, click the Display Options menu. 3 Select a display option. NOTE The preview display option you choose remains in both the Recent Documents and Open Documents lists. To change the number of recent documents listed 1 Click Tools ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, click the Open and Save tab. 3 In the Application Menu ➤ Number of Recently Used Files text box, enter the number of recent documents to be listed. You can choose any number between 0 and 50. Browse Files | 31 Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. Currently Open Documents View only files that are currently open with the Open Documents list. Files display in the Open Documents list with the most recently opened file at the top. To make a file current, click the file in the list. 32 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window To change the preview display options for currently open documents 1 Click the Application menu and then, click Open Documents. 2 Under the Search text box, click the Display Options menu. 3 Select a display option. NOTE The preview display option you choose remains in both the Recent Documents and Open Documents quick menus. Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. Browse Files | 33 Preview Documents View a thumbnail of files in the Recent Documents and Open Documents lists. When you hover over a file in either of the lists, a preview of the file is displayed along with the following information: ■ Path where the file is stored ■ Date the file was last modified ■ Version of the product used to create the file ■ Name of the person who last saved the file ■ Name of the person who is currently editing the file You can also include a thumbnail of the file next to the files in the list. To change the file icon to a thumbnail preview, click the drop-down list at the top of the Recent Documents or Open Documents lists and choose small icons, large icons, small images, or large images. Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. Quick Access Toolbar Display frequently used tools with the Quick Access toolbar. 34 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window View Undo and Redo History The Quick Access toolbar displays options to undo and redo changes to your file. To undo or redo a less recent change, click the drop-down button to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Add Commands and Controls Add unlimited tools to the Quick Access toolbar. Tools that extend past the maximum length of the toolbar are displayed in a flyout button. Quick Access Toolbar | 35 To add a ribbon button to the Quick Access toolbar, right-click the button on the ribbon and click Add to Quick Access toolbar. Buttons are added to the right of the default commands on the Quick Access toolbar. Move the Quick Access Toolbar Place the Quick Access toolbar either above or below the ribbon using the Customization button. See also: ■ Quick Access Toolbars ■ Toolbars on page 48 To add a command to the Quick Access toolbar 1 Right-click the Quick Access toolbar. 2 Click Customize Quick Access Toolbar. 3 In the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor, drag a command from the Command list to the position you want it to be displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. For multiple commands, hold down CTRL and select the commands. 4 Click OK. 36 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window To remove a command from the Quick Access toolbar 1 Right-click the command you want to remove. 2 Click Remove from Quick Access Toolbar. Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. The Ribbon The ribbon is a palette that displays task-based tools and controls. Overview of the Ribbon The ribbon is displayed by default when you open a file, providing a compact palette of all of the tools necessary to create or modify your drawing. Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. RIBBON Opens the ribbon window. The Ribbon | 37 RIBBONCLOSE Closes the ribbon window. System Variables MTEXTTOOLBAR Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar. RIBBONCONTEXTSELECT Controls how ribbon contextual tabs are displayed when you single- or double-click an object. RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon property controls or a contextual tab. RIBBONDOCKEDHEIGHT Determines whether the horizontally docked ribbon is set to the height of the current tab or a predetermined height. RIBBONSELECTMODE Determines whether a pickfirst selection set remains selected after a ribbon contextual tab is invoked and the command is completed. RIBBONSTATE Indicates whether the ribbon palette is open or closed. TABLETOOLBAR Controls the display of the Table toolbar. Display and Organize the Ribbon The ribbon is displayed horizontally or vertically. The horizontal ribbon is displayed across the top of the file window. You can dock the vertical ribbon to the left or right of the file window. The vertical ribbon can also float in the file window or on a second monitor. 38 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window Ribbon Tabs and Panels The ribbon is composed of a series of panels, which are organized into tabs labeled by task. Ribbon panels contain many of the same tools and controls available in toolbars and dialog boxes. Some ribbon panels display a dialog box related to that panel. The dialog box launcher is denoted by an arrow icon, , in the lower-right corner of the panel. The dialog box launcher indicates that you can display a related dialog box. Display the related dialog box by clicking the dialog box launcher. To specify which ribbon tabs and panels are displayed, right-click the ribbon and, on the shortcut menu, click or clear the names of tabs or panels. Floating Panels If you pull a panel off of a ribbon tab and into the drawing area or onto another monitor, that panel floats where you placed it. The floating panel remains open until you return it to the ribbon, even if you switch ribbon tabs. Display and Organize the Ribbon | 39 Slideout Panels An arrow in the middle of a panel title, , indicates that you can slide out the panel to display additional tools and controls. Click on the title bar of an open panel to display the slideout panel. By default, a slideout panel automatically closes when you click another panel. To keep a panel expanded, click the push pin, , in the bottom-left corner of the slideout panel. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you select a particular type of object or execute some commands, a special contextual ribbon tab is displayed instead of a toolbar or dialog box. The contextual tab is closed when you end the command. Checkboxes Checkboxes allow you to toggle an option on or off. A third, indeterminate state occurs if the setting differes for multiple objects. 40 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window Radio Buttons Depending on the available space in the vertical or horizontal ribbon, radio buttons can collapse into a single button. A single radio button works as a toggle, allowing you to cycle through each item in the list, or as a split button, where the top half of the radio button is a toggle button and clicking on the arrow icon in the lower half displays a drop-down of all items in the list. Sliders When an option can be executed with varying intensity, the slider allows you to control the setting from lower to higher, or reverse. See also: ■ Create Task-Based Workspaces on page 148 Display and Organize the Ribbon | 41 To display the ribbon ■ Click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ Ribbon. NOTE The ribbon displays the ribbon panels associated with the workspace you used last. To display the ribbon panels associated with a specific workspace, click Tools menu ➤ Workspaces. To minimize the ribbon 1 The first button toggles the between the full ribbon state, the default ribbon state, and the minimize ribbon state. 2 The second drop-down button allows you to select the minimize ribbon state. These are the four minimize ribbon states: ■ Minimize to Tabs: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab titles are displayed. ■ Minimize to Panel Titles: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab and panel titles are displayed. ■ Minimize to Panel Buttons: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab titles and panel buttons are displayed. ■ Cycle Through All: Cycles through all four ribbon states in the order, full ribbon, minimize to panel buttons, minimize to panel titles, minimize to tabs. To display or hide a ribbon panel ■ Right-click anywhere inside the ribbon. Under Panels, select or unselect the name of a panel. NOTE In the 3D Modeling workspace, both the Home and Render tabs include additional panels that are turned off by default. 42 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. RIBBON Opens the ribbon window. RIBBONCLOSE Closes the ribbon window. System Variables MTEXTTOOLBAR Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar. RIBBONCONTEXTSELECT Controls how ribbon contextual tabs are displayed when you single- or double-click an object. RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon property controls or a contextual tab. RIBBONDOCKEDHEIGHT Determines whether the horizontally docked ribbon is set to the height of the current tab or a predetermined height. RIBBONSELECTMODE Determines whether a pickfirst selection set remains selected after a ribbon contextual tab is invoked and the command is completed. RIBBONSTATE Indicates whether the ribbon palette is open or closed. TABLETOOLBAR Controls the display of the Table toolbar. Display and Organize the Ribbon | 43 Customize the Ribbon You can customize the ribbon in the following ways: ■ You can create and modify ribbon panels using the Customize User Interface Editor. See Ribbon in the Customization Guide. ■ You can associate a customizable tool palette group with each tab on the ribbon. Right-click the ribbon tab to display a list of available tool palette groups. ■ You can change the order of ribbon tabs. Click the tab you want to move, drag it to the desired position, and release. ■ You can change the order of ribbon panels. Click the panel you want to move, drag it to the desired position, and release. ■ You can convert toolbars into ribbon panels using the Customize User Interface Editor. See Ribbon in the Customization Guide. See also: ■ Ribbon To associate a tool palette group with a ribbon tab 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface. 2 In the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor, Customize tab, in the Customizations Inpane, click the plus sign (+) next to the Workspaces node to expand it. 3 Select the workspace that has the ribbon tab for which you want to assign a tool palette group. 4 In the Workspace Contents pane, click the plus sign (+) next to the Ribbon Tabs node to expand it. 5 Select the ribbon tab that you want to assign a tool palette group. 6 In the Properties pane, in the ToolPalette Group box, click the down arrow and select the tool palette group you want to assign to the ribbon tab. 7 Click OK. 44 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window To display the tool palette group associated with a ribbon tab ■ Right-click a ribbon tab and click Show Related Tool Palette Group. Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. RIBBON Opens the ribbon window. RIBBONCLOSE Closes the ribbon window. System Variables MTEXTTOOLBAR Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar. RIBBONCONTEXTSELECT Controls how ribbon contextual tabs are displayed when you single- or double-click an object. RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon property controls or a contextual tab. RIBBONDOCKEDHEIGHT Determines whether the horizontally docked ribbon is set to the height of the current tab or a predetermined height. RIBBONSELECTMODE Determines whether a pickfirst selection set remains selected after a ribbon contextual tab is invoked and the command is completed. RIBBONSTATE Indicates whether the ribbon palette is open or closed. Customize the Ribbon | 45 TABLETOOLBAR Controls the display of the Table toolbar. 46 | Chapter 3 Tools in the Application Window Other Tool Locations 4 Use common tools in the classic menu bar, toolbars, tool palettes, status bars, shortcut menus, and Design Center to find more commands, settings, and modes. Access the Classic Menu Bar Display pull-down menus from the classic menu bar using one of several methods. You can also specify alternate menus. The classic menu bar can be displayed at the top of the drawing area. The classic menu bar is displayed by default in the AutoCAD Classic workspace. NOTE The classic menu bar is turned off by default in both the 2D Drafting and Annotation and 3D Modeling workspaces. 47 You can specify menus to display in the menu browser for all workspaces by customizing a CUIx file and loading it into the program. See also: ■ Create Task-Based Workspaces on page 148 ■ “Pull-down and Shortcut Menus” in the Customization Guide To display the classic menu bar ■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click the Customization drop-down menu ➤ Show Menu Bar. Quick Reference System Variables MENUBAR Controls the display of the menu bar. Toolbars Use buttons on toolbars to start commands, display flyout toolbars, and display tooltips. You can display or hide, dock, and resize toolbars. Toolbars contain buttons that start commands. When you move your mouse or pointing device over a toolbar button, the tooltip displays the name of the button. Buttons with a small black triangle in the lower-right corner are flyout toolbars that contain related commands. With the cursor over the icon, hold down the left button on your mouse until the flyout toolbar displays. The Quick Access toolbar at the top of the application window is displayed ® by default. This toolbar is like those found in Microsoft Office programs. It ® contains frequently used AutoCAD commands such as PLOT, UNDO, and REDO, as well as Microsoft Office standard commands such as New, Open, and Save. For more information about the Quick Access toolbar, see Quick Access Toolbar on page 34. NOTE You can turn a toolbar into a ribbon panel using the Customize User Interface dialog box. 48 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations Display or Hide, Dock, and Resize Toolbars You can display or hide toolbars, and you can save your selections as a workspace. You can also create your own toolbars. A toolbar displays as floating or docked. A floating toolbar displays anywhere in the drawing area, and you can drag a floating toolbar to a new location, resize it, or dock it. A docked toolbar is attached to any edge of the drawing area. A toolbar docked at the top edge of the drawing area is located below the ribbon. You can move a docked toolbar by dragging it to a new docking location. See also: ■ Create Task-Based Workspaces on page 148 ■ “Toolbars” in the Customization Guide ■ Ribbon in the Customization Guide To display a toolbar 1 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Toolbars. 2 Select a toolbar from the list. TIP You can also right-click any toolbar and select a toolbar from the shortcut menu. Quick Reference CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. System Variables TOOLTIPS Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user interface elements. Toolbars | 49 Status Bars The application and drawing status bars provide useful information and buttons for turning drawing tools on and off. Application Status Bar The application status bar displays the coordinate values of your cursor, drawing tools, and tools for Quick View and annotation scaling. You can view the drawing tool buttons as icons or text. You also can easily change the settings of snap, polar, osnap, and otrack from the shortcut menus of these drawing tools. You can preview and switch between open drawings and layouts in a drawing. You can also display tools for scaling annotations. With the Workspace button, you can switch workspaces. The lock button locks the current positions of the toolbars and windows. To expand the drawing display area, click the Clean Screen button. You can add or remove a button from the application status bar from the shortcut menu of the status bar. NOTE When the application status bar is turned off, the Clean Screen button is not displayed on the screen. 50 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations To control the display of icons and notifications in the status bar tray 1 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Status Bar. 2 In the Status Bar drop-down, click Tray Settings. 3 In the Tray Settings dialog box, select or clear the following display options: ■ Display Icons from Services. Displays the tray at the right end of the status bar and displays icons from services. When this option is cleared, the tray is not displayed. ■ Display Notifications from Services. Displays notifications from services such as Communications Center. When the Display Icons from Services option is cleared, this option is unavailable. 4 If Display Notifications from Services is selected, set a time for a notification to be displayed, or select Display Until Closed. 5 Click OK. To control the display of buttons on the status bar 1 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Status Bar. 2 In the Status Bar drop-down, select any button name to change the display. To control the display of cursor coordinates on the status bar 1 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Status Bar. 2 In the Status Bar drop-down, select or clear Cursor Coordinate Values. Quick Reference TRAYSETTINGS Controls the display of icons and notifications in the status bar tray. Application Status Bar | 51 System Variables STATUSBAR Controls the display of the application and drawing status bars. Drawing Status Bar The drawing status bar displays several tools for scaling annotations. Different tools display for model space and paper space. When the drawing status bar is turned on, it displays at the bottom of the drawing area. When the drawing status bar is turned off, the tools found on the drawing status bar are moved to the application status bar. When the drawing status bar is turned on, you can use the Drawing Status Bar menu to select which tool to display on the status bar. To turn the drawing status bar on or off ■ Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Drawing Status Bar. To control the display of buttons on the drawing status bar ■ Click the arrow to the right of the drawing status bar and select or clear any option name. Checked items are displayed on the drawing status bar. Quick Reference System Variables STATUSBAR Controls the display of the application and drawing status bars. 52 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations Keytips Use the keyboard to access the Application menu, Quick Access toolbar, and ribbon. Press the Alt key to display shortcut keys for common tools in the application window. When you select a keytip, more keytips are displayed for that tool. The Command Window Enter Commands on the Command Line You can enter a command by using the keyboard. Some commands also have abbreviated names called command aliases. Commands, system variables, options, messages, and prompts are displayed in a dockable and resizable window called the command window. The bottom line of the command window is called the command line. The command line displays the operation in progress and provides an inside view of exactly what the program is doing. Keytips | 53 To enter a command by using the keyboard, type the full command name on the command line and press Enter or Spacebar. NOTE When Dynamic Input is on and is set to display dynamic prompts, you can enter many commands in tooltips near the cursor. Some commands also have abbreviated names. For example, instead of entering line to start the LINE command, you can enter l. Abbreviated command names are called command aliases and are defined in the acad.pgp file. To define your own command aliases, see Create Command Aliases in the Customization Guide. To find a command, you can type a letter on the command line and press TAB to cycle through all the commands that begin with that letter. Press Enter or Spacebar. Restart a recently used command by right-clicking on the command line. Specify Command Options When you enter commands on the command line, you see either a set of options or a dialog box. For example, when you enter circle at the Command prompt, the following prompt is displayed: Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan, tan, radius)]: 54 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations You can specify the center point either by entering X,Y coordinate values or by using the pointing device to click a point on the screen. To choose a different option, enter the letters capitalized in one of the options in the brackets. You can enter uppercase or lowercase letters. For example, to choose the three-point option (3P), enter 3p. Execute Commands To execute commands, press Spacebar or Enter, or right-click your pointing device after entering command names or responses to prompts. The instructions in Help assume this step and do not specifically instruct you to press Enter after each entry. Repeat and Cancel Commands If you want to repeat a command that you have just used, press Enter or Spacebar, or right-click your pointing device at the Command prompt. You also can repeat a command by entering multiple, a space, and the command name, as shown in the following example: Command: multiple circle To cancel a command in progress, press ESC. Interrupt a Command with Another Command or System Variable Many commands can be used transparently: that is, they can be entered on the command line while you use another command. Transparent commands frequently change drawing settings or display , for example, GRID or ZOOM. In the Command Reference, transparent commands are designated by an apostrophe in front of the command name. To use a command transparently, click its toolbar button or enter an apostrophe (') before entering the command at any prompt. On the command line, double angle brackets (>>) precede prompts that are displayed for transparent commands. After you complete the transparent command, the original command resumes. In the following example, you turn on the dot grid and set it to one-unit intervals while you draw a line, and then you continue drawing the line. Command: line Specify first point: 'grid >>Specify grid spacing (X) or [ON/OFF/Snap/Aspect] <0.000>: 1 Resuming LINE command Specify first point: Enter Commands on the Command Line | 55 Commands that do not select objects, create new objects, or end the drawing session usually can be used transparently. Changes made in dialog boxes that you have opened transparently cannot take effect until the interrupted command has been executed. Similarly, if you reset a system variable transparently, the new value cannot take effect until you start the next command. See also: ■ “Keyboard Shortcuts” in the Customization Guide To copy a command you have recently used 1 Right-click on the command line. Click Recent Commands. 2 Click the command you want to use. Quick Reference MULTIPLE Repeats the next command until canceled. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. PASTECLIP Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing. System Variables CMDNAMES Displays the names of the active and transparent commands. Enter System Variables on the Command Line System variables are settings that control how certain commands work. They can turn on or turn off modes such as Snap, Grid, or Ortho. They can set default scales for hatch patterns. They can store information about the current drawing and about program configuration. Sometimes you use a system variable in order to change a setting. At other times you use a system variable to display the current status. 56 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations For example, the GRIDMODE system variable turns the dot grid display on and off when you change the value. In this case, the GRIDMODE system variable is functionally equivalent to the GRID command. DATE is a read-only system variable that stores the current date. You can display this value, but you cannot change it. Bitcode Variables Some system variables are controlled using bitcodes. With these system variables, you add values to specify a unique combination of behaviors. For example, the LOCKUI system variable provides the following bitcode values: 0 Toolbars and windows not locked 1 Docked toolbars locked 2 Docked or anchored windows locked 4 Floating toolbars locked 8 Floating windows locked Thus, if LOCKUI is set to 1 + 4 = 5, only docked and floating toolbars are locked; docked, anchored, and floating windows are not locked. NOTE You can examine or change a system variable's setting transparently, that is, while using another command; however, new values may not take effect until the interrupted command ends. To change the setting of a system variable 1 At the Command prompt, enter the system variable name. For example, enter gridmode to change the grid setting. 2 To change the status of GRIDMODE, enter 1 for on or 0 for off. To retain the current value of the system variable, press Enter. To see a complete list of system variables 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Set Variable.. 2 At the Variable Name prompt, enter ?. 3 At the Enter Variable(s) to List prompt, press Enter. Enter System Variables on the Command Line | 57 Quick Reference SETVAR Lists or changes the values of system variables. Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window You can edit text in the command window to correct or repeat commands. Use the standard keys: ■ Up, Down, Left Arrow, and Right Arrow ■ Insert, Delete ■ Page Up, Page Down ■ Home, End ■ Backspace You can repeat any command used in the current session by cycling through the commands in the command window with Up ArrowCtrl and Down Arrow and pressing Enter. By default, pressing Ctrl+C copies highlighted text to the Clipboard. Pressing Ctrl+V pastes text from the Clipboard to the text window or the command window. If you right-click in the command window or text window, a shortcut menu is displayed from which you can access the six most recently used commands, copy selected text or the entire command history, paste text, and access the Options dialog box. For most commands, a command line with two or three lines of previous prompts, called the command history, is sufficient for viewing and editing. To see more than one line of command history, you can scroll through the history or resize the command window by dragging its border. For commands with text output, such as LIST, you might need a larger command window, or you can press F2 to use the text window. Use the Text Window The text window is a window similar to the command window in which you can enter commands and view prompts and messages. The text window displays a complete command history for the current work session. Use the text window to view lengthy output of commands such as LIST, which displays 58 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations detailed information about objects you select. To move forward and backward in the command history, you can click the scroll arrows along the right edge of the window. Press SHIFT with a key to highlight text. For example, press SHIFT+HOME in the text window to highlight all text from the cursor location to the beginning of the line. To copy all the text in the text window to the Clipboard, use the COPYHIST command. To save commands to a log file, use the LOGFILEON command. See also: ■ Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window on page 62 ■ Use Dynamic Input on page 578 To close the text window ■ At the Command prompt, enter graphscr. NOTE You can also close the text window by pressing F2, or using the standard Windows controls. To copy text from the text window to the command line 1 If the text window is not displayed, click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Text Window. 2 Select the text you want to copy. 3 Right-click in the command window or text window. Click Paste to Command Line. The text is copied to the Clipboard and then pasted on the command line. After you press Enter, the commands are executed in sequence, like a script. You can also use Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V to copy and paste text. To display the text window ■ Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Text Window. Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window | 59 The text window is displayed in front of the drawing area. Quick Reference COPYCLIP Copies selected objects to the Clipboard. COPYHIST Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard. GRAPHSCR Switches from the text window to the drawing area. LOGFILEOFF Closes the text window log file opened by LOGFILEON. LOGFILEON Writes the text window contents to a file. PASTECLIP Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing. TEXTSCR Opens the text window. System Variables LOGFILEMODE Specifies whether the contents of the text window are written to a log file. LOGFILENAME Specifies the path and name of the text window log file for the current drawing. LOGFILEPATH Specifies the path for the text window log files for all drawings in a session. Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line You can display prompts on the command line instead of using a dialog box, or switch back again. This option is useful primarily when using scripts. 60 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations Some functions are available both on the command line and in a dialog box. In many cases, you can enter a hyphen before the command to suppress the dialog box and display prompts on the command line instead. For example, entering layer on the command line displays the Layer Properties Manager. Entering -layer on the command line displays the equivalent command line options. Suppressing the dialog box is useful for compatibility with earlier versions of AutoCAD® and for using script files. There may be slight differences between the options in the dialog box and those available on the command line. These system variables also affect the display of dialog boxes: ■ ATTDIA controls whether INSERT uses a dialog box for attribute value entry. ■ CMDNAMES displays the name (in English) of the currently active command and transparent command. ■ EXPERT controls whether certain warning dialog boxes are displayed. ■ FILEDIA controls the display of dialog boxes used with commands that read and write files. For example, if FILEDIA is set to 1, SAVEAS displays the Save Drawing As dialog box. If FILEDIA is set to 0, SAVEAS displays prompts on the command line. The procedures in this documentation assume that FILEDIA is set to 1. Even when FILEDIA is set to 0, you can display a file dialog box by entering a tilde (~) at the first prompt. FILEDIA and EXPERT are useful when you use scripts to run commands. To use the command line version of a command ■ For most commands, enter minus (-) in front of the command. ■ For dialog boxes that open and save files, set the FILEDIA system variable to 0. Quick Reference GRAPHSCR Switches from the text window to the drawing area. Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line | 61 System Variables ATTDIA Controls whether the INSERT command uses a dialog box for attribute value entry. CMDNAMES Displays the names of the active and transparent commands. EXPERT Controls whether certain prompts are issued. FILEDIA Suppresses display of file navigation dialog boxes. Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window Change the position and display of the command window to suit the way you work. Dock the Command Window By default, the command window is docked. The docked command window is the same width as the AutoCAD window. If text that is entered becomes longer than the width of the command line, the window pops up in front of the command line to show the full text of the line. Undock, or float, the command window by dragging it away from the docking region. The docking region is an edge of the AutoCAD application window that allows you to dock a toolbar, palette, or the command window. You can move the floating command window anywhere on the screen and resize its width and height with the pointing device. Dock a floating command window again by dragging it to the docking region of the AutoCAD window. Anchoring the Command Window The command window can be anchored on the left or right side of the AutoCAD window. By anchoring the command window it remains on screen, but in a minimized state, which allows you to bring it back up when needed. This also helps to increase the amount of visible drawing area. The command window must be floating before an anchoring side can be selected. To anchor 62 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations the command window make sure it is floating, and then right-click over its title bar and select either Anchor Left or Anchor Right. Resize the Command Window You can resize the command window vertically by dragging the splitter bar, which is located on the top edge of the window when it is docked on the bottom and at the bottom edge of the window when it is docked at the top. Hide the Command Window Hide and redisplay the command line by doing one of the following: ■ Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Command Line. ■ Click Tools menu ➤ Command Line. ■ Press Ctrl+9. When you hide the command line, you can still enter commands. However, some commands and system variables return values at the command line, so you may want to redisplay the command line in those instances. NOTE For information about display options (such as auto-hide or transparency) for dockable windows, see “Control the Display of Dockable Windows” in the topic Set Interface Options on page 109. To float the command window ■ Click the move handle (the double bars) on the left edge of the docked command window and drag the command window away from the docking region until it has a thick outline. Then drop it in the drawing area of the AutoCAD window. To make the floating command window transparent 1 In the floating Command window, click the Properties button and select Transparency. 2 In the Transparency dialog box, move the slider to the left to make the command window less transparent and to the right to make it more transparent. The range is from opaque to transparent. When the Turn Off Transparency for All Palettes option is selected, the command window cannot be made transparent. Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window | 63 To dock the command window ■ Click the title bar and drag the command window until it is over the top or bottom docking region of the AutoCAD window. When the command window becomes the same width as the AutoCAD window, release the mouse button to dock it. The docking region is an edge of the AutoCAD application window that allows you to dock a toolbar, palette, or the command window. ■ Right-click the title bar of the Command window, and select Allow Docking. NOTE You can control whether the command window docks by right-clicking the title bar of the command window and then clicking Allow docking. To resize the command window when it is docked 1 Position the cursor over the horizontal splitter bar so that the cursor appears as a double line and arrows. 2 Drag the splitter bar vertically until the command window is the size you want it to be. To hide the command window ■ Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Command Line. NOTE Some commands and system variables return values at the command line, so you may want to display the command line in those instances. To display the command line when it's hidden, press Ctrl+9. Alternate method: Quick Reference COMMANDLINE Displays the Command Line window. COMMANDLINEHIDE Hides the Command Line window. 64 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations System Variables PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. Shortcut Menus Display a shortcut menu for quick access to commands that are relevant to your current activity. You can display different shortcut menus when you right-click different areas of the screen. Shortcut menus typically include options to ■ Repeat the last command entered ■ Cancel the current command ■ Display a list of recent user input ■ Cut, copy, and paste from the Clipboard ■ Select a different command option ■ Display a dialog box, such as Options or Customize ■ Undo the last command entered You can customize right-click behavior to be time-sensitive, so that a quick right-click acts the same as pressing Enter, and a longer right-click displays a shortcut menu. Shortcut menus can be customized using a customization (CUIx) file. The main CUIx file is called acad.cuix by default. See also: ■ “Create Submenus” in the Customization Guide To display a shortcut menu 1 Move the cursor over an area, feature, or icon. 2 Right-click your mouse, or press the equivalent button on your pointing device. A shortcut menu relevant to the cursor location is displayed. If one or more objects are selected when you right-click in the drawing area, an Shortcut Menus | 65 editing-oriented shortcut menu is displayed. You can also display a shortcut menu during PAN or ZOOM. To turn off shortcut menus in the drawing area 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, under Windows Standard Behavior, clear Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area. 3 To control Default, Edit, and Command shortcut menus individually, select Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area. Right-Click Customization. 4 In the Right-Click Customization dialog box, under Default Mode or Edit Mode, select one of the following options to control what happens when you right-click in the drawing area and no command is in progress: ■ Repeat Last Command. Repeats the last command. Selecting this option turns off the Default and Edit shortcut menus. Right-clicking is the same as pressing Enter. ■ Shortcut Menu. Displays the Default or Edit shortcut menu. 5 Under Command Mode, select one of the following options to determine what happens when you right-click in the drawing area while a command is in progress: ■ Enter. Turns off the Command shortcut menu. Right-clicking is the same as pressing Enter. ■ Shortcut Menu: Always Enabled. Displays the Command shortcut menu. ■ Shortcut Menu: Enabled When Command Options Are Present. Displays the Command shortcut menu only when options are currently available in the Command prompt. In a Command prompt, options are enclosed in square brackets. If no options are available, right-clicking is the same as pressing Enter. In addition to turning the Default, Edit, and Command shortcut menus on and off, you can customize the options that are displayed on them. For example, you can add options to the Edit shortcut menu that are displayed only when circles are selected. To turn on time-sensitive right-click behavior 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 66 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations 2 In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, under Windows Standard Behavior, click Right-Click Customization. 3 In the Right-Click Customization dialog box, select Turn on Time-Sensitive Right-Click. You can specify the duration of the longer click. The default is 250 milliseconds 4 Click Apply & Close. 5 In the Options dialog box, click OK. To control the display of recent input 1 At the Command prompt, enter inputhistorymode. 2 Enter a sum of one or more of the following values: ■ 0. No history of recent input is displayed. ■ 1. History of recent input is displayed at the Command prompt with access through Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys. ■ 2. History of recent input for the current command is displayed in the shortcut menu. ■ 4. History of recent input for all commands in the current session is displayed in the shortcut menu. ■ 8. Markers for recent input of point locations are displayed in the drawing. The default value is 15. 3 (Optional) At the Command prompt, enter cmdinputhistorymax. 4 Enter a value to control how many unique values entered at a prompt are remembered and available to be displayed as recent input. Quick Reference COPYCLIP Copies selected objects to the Clipboard. COPYHIST Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard. Shortcut Menus | 67 CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. CUTCLIP Copies selected objects to the Clipboard and removes them from the drawing. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. PAN Moves the view planar to the screen. PASTECLIP Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. TRAYSETTINGS Controls the display of icons and notifications in the status bar tray. U Reverses the most recent operation. ZOOM Increases or decreases the magnification of the view in the current viewport. System Variables CMDINPUTHISTORYMAX Sets the maximum number of previous input values that are stored for a prompt in a command. INPUTHISTORYMODE Controls the content and location of the display of a history of user input. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. 68 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations SHORTCUTMENU Controls whether Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus are available in the drawing area. TRAYICONS Controls whether a tray is displayed on the status bar. TRAYNOTIFY Controls whether service notifications are displayed in the status bar tray. TRAYTIMEOUT Controls the length of time (in seconds) that service notifications are displayed. Tool Palettes Tool palettes are tabbed areas within the Tool Palettes window that provide an efficient method for organizing, sharing, and placing blocks, hatches, and other tools. Tool palettes can also contain custom tools provided by third-party developers. Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images You can create a tool by dragging objects from your drawing onto a tool palette. You can then use the new tool to create objects with the same properties as the object you dragged onto the tool palette. Tool palettes are tabbed areas within the Tool Palettes window. The items you add to a tool palette are called tools. You can create a tool by dragging any of the following, one at a time, onto your tool palette: ■ Geometric objects such as lines, circles, and polylines ■ Dimensions ■ Blocks ■ Hatches ■ Solid fills ■ Gradient fills ■ Raster images Tool Palettes | 69 ■ External references (xrefs) NOTE When you drag an object onto a tool palette, you can switch to a different tab by hovering over the tab for a few seconds. You can then use the new tool to create objects in your drawing with the same properties as the object you dragged to the tool palette. For example, if you drag a red circle with a lineweight of .05 mm from your drawing to your tool palette, the new tool creates a red circle with a lineweight of .05 mm. If you drag a block or xref to a tool palette, the new tool inserts the block or xref with the same properties into your drawing. When you drag a geometric object or a dimension onto a tool palette, the new tool is automatically created with an appropriate flyout. Dimension tool flyouts, for example, provide an assortment of dimension styles. Click the arrow on the right side of the tool icon on the tool palette to display the flyout. When you use a tool on a flyout, the object in the drawing has the same properties as the original tool on the tool palette. Insert Blocks and Attach References You can choose to be prompted for a rotation angle (starting from 0) when you click and place a block or xref. This option ignores the angle specified under Rotation in the Tool Properties dialog box. The rotation angle prompt does not display if you drag the block or xref, or if you enter rotate at the initial insertion Command prompt. Blocks that are placed by dragging from a tool palette must often be rotated or scaled after placement. You can use object snaps when dragging blocks from a tool palette; however, grid snap is suppressed during dragging. You can set an auxiliary scale for a block or a hatch tool to override the regular scale setting when you use the tool. (An auxiliary scale multiplies your current scale setting by the plot scale or the dimension scale.) Blocks dragged from a tool palette are automatically scaled according to the ratio of units in both the block and the current drawing. For example, if the current drawing uses meters as units and a block uses centimeters, the unit ratio is 1 m/100 cm. When you drag the block into the drawing, it is inserted at 1/100 scale. NOTE In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, the Source Content Units and Target Drawing Units settings are used when Drag-and-Drop Scale is set to Unitless, either in the source block or target drawing. 70 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations Update Block Definitions on Tool Palettes A block definition in your current drawing does not update automatically when you modify the block in the source drawing. To update a block definition in the current drawing, right-click the block tool on the tool palette and click Redefine on the shortcut menu. If the Redefine option is unavailable, then the block definition source is a drawing file rather than a block within a drawing file. To update a block definition that was created by inserting a drawing file, use DesignCenter. For more information, see Add Content with DesignCenter on page 97. NOTE If you move the source drawing file for a block tool to a different folder, then modify the tool that references it by right-clicking the tool and, in the Tool Properties dialog box, specifying the new source file folder. See also: ■ Control Tool Properties on page 78 ■ Customize Tool Palettes on page 83 ■ Create Task-Based Workspaces on page 148 ■ Add Content with DesignCenter on page 97 To open a block on a tool palette in the Block Editor 1 If the Tool Palettes window is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 On the block icon’s shortcut menu, click Block Editor. NOTE A block on a tool palette may reside in another drawing. The drawing that contains the block definition is opened in the Block Editor. To add or remove a tool flyout 1 On a tool palette, right-click the geometric object tool or the dimension tool whose flyout you want to add or remove. Click Properties. 2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, under Command, click in the Use Flyout box. Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images | 71 3 In the drop-down list, select Yes if you want to add a flyout, or select No if you want to remove one. 4 Click OK. NOTE If you remove the flyout from a tool but then add the flyout back, the image, name, and description (the tooltip) that displays on the tool palette for each tool on the flyout will not be accurate. To correct this, return the image, name, and description of the flyout tool to the default settings. See To change the image, name, and description of a flyout tool to the default settings. To customize a tool flyout 1 On a tool palette, right-click the geometric object tool or dimension tool whose flyout you want to customize. Click Properties. 2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, under Command, click in the Flyout Options box. Click the [...] button. 3 In the Flyout Options dialog box, select the tools that you want to show on the flyout. Click OK. (You must select at least one tool.) 4 In the Tool Properties dialog box, click OK. To be prompted for a rotation angle when placing a block or xref from a tool palette 1 In a tool palette, right-click a block or xref tool. Click Properties. 2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, under Insert, click Prompt for Rotation. 3 In the drop-down list, select Yes. 4 Click OK. NOTE This option ignores the angle specified under Rotation in the Tool Properties dialog box. The rotation angle prompt does not display if you drag the block or xref, or if you enter rotate at the initial insertion Command prompt. 72 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations Quick Reference CUSTOMIZE Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups. TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. TOOLPALETTESCLOSE Closes the Tool Palettes window. UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. System Variables INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. TPSTATE Indicates whether the Tool Palettes window is open or closed. Create and Use Command Tools You can create a tool on a tool palette that executes a single command or a string of commands. You can add frequently used commands to a tool palette. When the Customize dialog box is open, you can drag tools from a toolbar to a tool palette or you can drag tools from the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor to a tool palette. Once you add a command to a tool palette, you can click the tool to execute the command. For example, clicking a Save tool on a tool palette saves a drawing just as the Save button on the Standard toolbar does. Create and Use Command Tools | 73 You can also create a tool that executes a string of commands or customized ® commands, such as an AutoLISP routine, a VBA macro or application, or a script. NOTE Even though the tools on palettes can be clicked when the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor is displayed, the end results might be unpredictable. It is best to not use any of the tools on a palette while the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor is displayed. To create a command tool from a toolbar button 1 Make sure the toolbar that contains the command you want to add to the tool palette is displayed. If the required toolbar is not displayed, click Tools ➤ Toolbars and select another toolbar from the list. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes. NOTE Even though you won't make any changes in the Customize dialog box in this procedure, it must be displayed when you add command tools to a tool palette. 3 In the program, drag a command (button) from a toolbar to the tool palette and, without releasing the mouse button, move the cursor to the place on the tool palette where you want the tool. The black horizontal line indicates where the tool will be located. 4 Release the mouse button. 5 In the Customize dialog box, click Close. To create a command tool from the Customize User Interface 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface. If the CUI Editor is covering the Tool Palettes window, then move the CUI Editor to the side. 2 In the Command List pane, drag a command to the tool palette and, without releasing the mouse button, move the cursor to the place on the tool palette where you want the tool. 74 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations The black horizontal line indicates where the tool will be located. 3 Release the mouse button. 4 In the CUI Editor, click Close. To create a command tool that executes multiple or customized commands (advanced) 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the program, drag a command from a toolbar to the tool palette and, without releasing the mouse button, move the cursor to the place on the tool palette where you want the tool. 3 Release the mouse button. 4 On the tool palette, right-click the tool. Click Properties. 5 In the Tool Properties dialog box, change the name and description to an appropriate name and description for the string, AutoLISP routine, or script. 6 Under Command, in the Command String box, enter a string of commands or customized commands, such as an AutoLISP routine, a VBA macro or application, or a script. 7 Click OK. To use a command tool 1 On a tool palette, click the command tool that you want to use. 2 Follow any Command prompts that are shown. Quick Reference CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. CUSTOMIZE Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups. Create and Use Command Tools | 75 TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. TOOLPALETTESCLOSE Closes the Tool Palettes window. Change Tool Palette Settings The options and settings for tool palettes are accessible from shortcut menus that are displayed when you right-click in different areas of the Tool Palettes window. You can dock the Tool Palettes window on the right or left edge of the application window. Press the Ctrl key if you want to prevent docking as you move the Tool Palettes window. Tool palette settings are saved with your profile. These settings include ■ Allow Docking. Toggles the ability to dock or anchor palette windows. If this option is selected, a window can be docked when you drag it over a docking area at the side of a drawing. A docked window adheres to the side of the application window and causes the drawing area to be resized. Selecting this option also makes Anchor Right and Anchor Left available. ■ Anchor Left or Anchor Right. Attaches the palette to an anchor tab base at the left or right side of the drawing area. The palette rolls open and closed as the cursor moves across it. When an anchored palette is open, its content overlaps the drawing area. An anchored palette cannot be set to stay open. ■ Auto-hide. Controls the display of the palette when it is floating. When this option is selected, only the tool palette title bar is displayed when the cursor moves outside the tool palette. When this option is cleared, the palette stays open continuously. You can display the tool palette title bar as either icons or text from the shortcut menu of the title bar. ■ Transparency. Sets the transparency of the Tool Palettes window so it does not obscure objects under it. ■ Views. Changes the display style and size of the icons in a tool palette. 76 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations To change the rollover behavior of the Tool Palettes window ■ In the Tool Palettes window, at the top of the title bar, click the Auto-Hide button. NOTE Rollover behavior is available only when the Tool Palettes window is undocked. To change the transparency of the Tool Palettes window 1 In the Tool Palettes window, at the top of the title bar, click the Properties button. Click Transparency. 2 In the Transparency dialog box, adjust the level of transparency for the Tool Palettes window. Click OK. NOTE Transparency is available only when the Tool Palettes window is undocked. To change the icon display style in the Tool Palettes window 1 Right-click a blank area inside the Tool Palettes window. Click View Options. 2 In the View Options dialog box, click the icon display option that you want to set. You can also change the size of the icons. 3 Click the list box under Apply To, and then select either Current Tool Palette or All Tool Palettes. Change Tool Palette Settings | 77 4 Click OK. Quick Reference CUSTOMIZE Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups. TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. TOOLPALETTESCLOSE Closes the Tool Palettes window. System Variables PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. TPSTATE Indicates whether the Tool Palettes window is open or closed. Control Tool Properties You can change the properties of any tool on a tool palette. Once a tool is on a tool palette, you can change its properties. For example, you can change the insertion scale of a block or the angle of a hatch pattern. 78 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations To change tool properties, right-click on a tool, and then click Properties on the shortcut menu to display the Tool Properties dialog box. The Tool Properties dialog box has the following two categories of properties: ■ Insert or Pattern properties. Control object-specific properties such as scale, rotation, and angle. ■ General properties. Override the current drawing property settings such as layer, color, and linetype. You can expand and collapse the property categories by clicking the arrow buttons. Specify a Different Icon for a Tool You can replace the icon for a tool with an image that you specify. This is useful when the automatically generated icon is too cluttered to be easily recognizable. To replace the image, right-click the tool in the tool palette and click Specify Image on the shortcut menu. To restore the default image for a tool, right-click the tool and click Remove Specified Image. Update the Icon for a Tool The icon for a block, xref, or raster image in a tool palette is not automatically updated if its definition changes. If you change the definition for a block, Control Tool Properties | 79 xref, or raster image, you can update the icon by right-clicking the tool in the palette and clicking Update Tool Image. You must save the drawing before you can update the tool image. ™ Alternatively, you can delete the tool, and then replace it using DesignCenter . Specify Overrides for Tool Properties In some cases, you may want to assign specific property overrides to a tool. For example, you may want a hatch to be placed automatically on a pre-specified layer, regardless of the current layer setting. This feature can save you time and reduce errors by setting properties automatically when creating certain objects. The Tool Properties dialog box provides areas for each possible property override. Layer property overrides affect color, linetype, lineweight, plot style, and plot. Layer property overrides are resolved as follows: ■ If a layer is missing from the drawing, that layer is created automatically. ■ If a layer to which you are adding content is currently turned off or frozen, the layer is temporarily turned on or thawed. To display the properties of a tool on a tool palette 1 On a tool palette, right-click a tool. Click Properties. 2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, use the scroll bar to view all tool properties. You can resize the Tool Properties dialog box by dragging an edge, or you can expand and collapse the property categories by clicking the double arrow buttons. 3 Click OK. To change the property of a tool on a tool palette 1 On a tool palette, right-click a tool. Click Properties. 2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, click any property in the list of properties and specify the new value or setting. ■ Properties listed under the Insert or Pattern category control object-specific properties such as scale, rotation, and angle. 80 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations ■ Properties listed under the General category override the current drawing property settings such as layer, color, and linetype. ■ Auxiliary scale for a block or a hatch tool overrides the regular scale setting when the tool is used. (An auxiliary scale multiplies your current scale setting by the plot scale or the dimension scale.) You can resize the Tool Properties dialog box by dragging an edge, or you can expand and collapse the property categories by clicking the arrow buttons. 3 Click OK. NOTE If you specify an image, name, or description for a tool that has a flyout, that image, name, and description are displayed on the tool palette for each tool on the flyout. To return the flyout tool's image, name, and description to their default settings, leave the corresponding boxes blank in the Tool Properties dialog box. To refresh the image of a block tool on a tool palette 1 On a tool palette, right-click a tool. 2 Click Update Tool Image. NOTE You must save the drawing before you can update the tool image. To change the image of a tool on a tool palette 1 On a tool palette, right-click a tool. 2 On the shortcut menu, click Specify Image. 3 In the Select Image File dialog box, locate the image file you want to use. 4 Click Open to insert the new image. NOTE If you specify an image for a tool that has a flyout, that image is displayed on the tool palette for each tool on the flyout. To return the flyout tool images to their default images, see To change the image, name, and description of a flyout tool to the default settings. Control Tool Properties | 81 To change the image, name, and description of a flyout tool to the default settings 1 On a tool palette, right-click a tool. Click Properties. 2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, right-click in the image area. Click Delete Image. 3 Click in the Name box and delete the text. 4 Click in the Description box and delete the text. 5 Click OK. NOTE Leaving the Image, Name, and Description boxes blank in the Tool Properties dialog box will return the flyout tool's image, name, and description to their default settings. Quick Reference CUSTOMIZE Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups. TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. TOOLPALETTESCLOSE Closes the Tool Palettes window. TPNAVIGATE Displays a specified tool palette or palette group. System Variables PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. TPSTATE Indicates whether the Tool Palettes window is open or closed. 82 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations Customize Tool Palettes You can add tools to a tool palette with several methods. You can create new tool palettes using the Properties button on the title bar of the Tool Palettes window. Add tools to a tool palette with the following methods: ■ Drag any of the following onto your tool palette: geometric objects such as lines, circles, and polylines; dimensions; hatches; gradient fills; blocks; xrefs; raster images. ■ Drag drawings, blocks, and hatches from DesignCenter to the tool palette. Drawings that are added to a tool palette are inserted as blocks when dragged into the drawing. ■ Use the Customize dialog box to drag commands to a tool palette just as you might add them to a toolbar. ■ Use the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor to drag commands to a tool palette from the Command List pane. ■ Use Cut, Copy, and Paste to move or copy tools from one tool palette to another. ■ Manage tool palettes by creating new palettes from scratch, renaming, deleting or moving palettes with the shortcut menu. NOTE It is not recommended to create or rename tool palettes when the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor is displayed. ■ Create a tool palette tab with predetermined content by right-clicking a folder, a drawing file, or a block in the DesignCenter tree view, and then clicking Create Tool Palette on the shortcut menu. Customize Tool Palettes | 83 ■ You can associate a customizable tool palette group with each panel on the ribbon. Right-click the ribbon panel to display a list of available tool palette groups. NOTE If the source drawing file for a block, xref, or raster image tool is moved to a different folder, you must modify the tool that references it by right-clicking the tool and, in the Tool Properties dialog box, specifying the new source file folder. Rearranging Tools and Tool Palettes Once tools are placed on a tool palette, you can rearrange them by dragging them around or by sorting them. You can also add text and separator lines to tool palettes. You can move a tool palette tab up and down the list of tabs by using the tool palette shortcut menu or the Tool Palettes tab of the Customize dialog box. Similarly, you can delete tool palettes that you no longer need. Tool palettes that are deleted are lost unless they are first saved by exporting them to a file. You can control the path to your tool palettes on the Files tab in the Options dialog box. This path can be to a shared network location. 84 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations Read-Only Tool Palettes If a tool palette file is set with a read-only attribute, a lock icon is displayed in a lower corner of the tool palette. This indicates that you cannot modify the tool palette beyond changing its display settings and rearranging the icons. To apply a read-only attribute to a tool palette, right-click the tool palette (ATC) file in the following location: C:\documents and settings\ \application data\autodesk\AutoCAD 2011\r17.2\enu\support\ToolPalette\Palettes. On the shortcut menu, click Properties. On the General tab, select Read-only, and click OK. To create a tool palette 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the Tool Palettes window, at the top of the title bar, click the Properties button. Click New Palette. 3 In the text box, enter a name for the new palette. 4 If necessary, right-click over the tab and select Move Up or Move Down to change the order in which the tab appears in. To associate a tool palette group with a ribbon panel 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 On the ribbon, right-click a ribbon panel and click Tool Palette Group. 3 Click an available tool palette group from the list. 4 Click Tools menu ➤ Workspaces ➤ Save Current As. 5 In the Save Workspace dialog box, enter a name for the new workspace or select a name from the drop-down list. Click Save. To display the tool palette group associated with a ribbon panel ■ Right-click a ribbon panel and click Show Related Tool Palette Group. To add text to a tool palette 1 Right-click a blank area inside the Tool Palettes window. Click Add Text. Customize Tool Palettes | 85 2 In the text box, add the text you want to display in the window. 3 If necessary, drag the text to the appropriate location in the window. To add a separator line to a tool palette 1 Right-click a blank area inside the Tool Palettes window. Click Add Separator. 2 If necessary, drag the separator to the appropriate location in the window. Quick Reference CUSTOMIZE Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups. TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. TOOLPALETTESCLOSE Closes the Tool Palettes window. System Variables PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. TPSTATE Indicates whether the Tool Palettes window is open or closed. Organize Tool Palettes You can organize tool palettes into groups and specify which group of tool palettes is displayed. For example, if you have several tool palettes that contain hatch patterns, you can use the CUSTOMIZE command to create a new palette group called Hatch Patterns. You can then add all your tool palettes that contain hatch patterns to the Hatch Pattern group. When you set the Hatch Pattern group as the current group, only those tool palettes you've added to the group are displayed. 86 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations To create or remove a tool palette group 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the Customize dialog box, under Palette Groups, right-click on the lower, blank area. Click New Group. If there are no groups listed in the Palette Groups area, you can create a group by dragging a tool palette from the Tool Palettes area into the Palette Groups area. 3 Enter a name for the tool palette group. 4 Click Close. NOTE To delete a tool palette group, in the Customize dialog box, under Palette Groups, right-click the tool palette group you want to delete. Click Delete. To add a tool palette to a tool palette group 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the Customize dialog box, drag a tool palette from the Tool Palettes area into a group in the Palette Groups area. 3 Click Close. To display a tool palette group 1 Right-click on the title bar of a tool palette. 2 Click the name of the tool palette group that you want to display. To delete all tool palette groups 1 Right-click on the title bar of a tool palette. Click All Palettes. NOTE You must display all tool palettes so that no tool palette group is set as the current group. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes. Organize Tool Palettes | 87 3 In the Customize dialog box, under Palette Groups, right-click a tool palette group. Click Delete. 4 Repeat step 3 until all tool palette groups are deleted. 5 Click Close. To copy and paste a tool palette from one group to another 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the Customize dialog box, under Palette Groups, select the tool palette that you want to copy. 3 Press Ctrl while you drag the selected tool palette to another group. When you release the mouse button, a copy of the tool palette is displayed in the new location. 4 Click Close. To display all tool palettes ■ Right-click on the title bar of a tool palette. Click All Palettes. Quick Reference CUSTOMIZE Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups. TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. TOOLPALETTESCLOSE Closes the Tool Palettes window. TPNAVIGATE Displays a specified tool palette or palette group. 88 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations Save and Share Tool Palettes You can save and share a tool palette or tool palette group by exporting it or importing it as a file. You can save and share a tool palette by exporting it or importing it as a tool palette file. Tool palette files have an .xtp file extension. Similarly, you can save and share a tool palette group by exporting it or importing it as a palette group file. Tool palette files have an .xpg file extension. In some cases, when you export a customized tool palette, an image folder with the same name as the exported tool palette is automatically created in the same location as the XTP file. This image folder contains the icon images used on the exported tool palette. The folder is created when you export a tool palette that contains any of the following items: ■ User-created content tools ■ Command tools that contain user-specified (custom) tool palette icons (images) When you import a customized tool palette, this image folder must be in the same location as the imported XTP file in order for the icons to appear on the tool palette. Tool palettes can be used only in the version of AutoCAD in which they were created. For example, you cannot use a tool palette that was created in AutoCAD 2011 in AutoCAD 2005. The default path for tool palette files is set on the Files tab of the Options dialog box under Tool Palettes File Locations. Tool palette groups are saved in profiles. If you send tool palettes to someone who uses AutoCAD LT, note that some tools created in AutoCAD do not behave the same way or work in AutoCAD LT. Note the following limitations: ■ The color property of tools that use a color other than an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color convert to ByLayer in AutoCAD LT. ■ Gradient fill tools switch to hatch tools in AutoCAD LT. ■ Raster image tools do not work in AutoCAD LT. Save and Share Tool Palettes | 89 NOTE If a tool palette file is set with a read-only attribute, a lock icon is displayed in a lower corner of the tool palette. This indicates that you cannot modify the tool palette beyond changing its display settings and rearranging the icons. See also: ■ Save and Restore Interface Settings (Profiles) on page 151 To share a tool palette 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the Customize dialog box, under Palettes, right-click a tool palette. On the shortcut menu, click Export. 3 In the Export Palette dialog box, enter a file name and click Save. 4 Click Close. To share a tool palette group 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the Customize dialog box, under Palette Groups, right-click a tool palette group. Click Export. 3 In the Export Group dialog box, enter a file name and click Save. 4 Click Close. Quick Reference CUSTOMIZE Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups. TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. TOOLPALETTESCLOSE Closes the Tool Palettes window. 90 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations DesignCenter With DesignCenter, you can organize access to blocks, hatches, xrefs, and other drawing content. You can drag content from any source drawing to your current drawing. You can drag drawings, blocks, and hatches to a tool palette. Source drawings can be on your computer, on a network location, or on a website. In addition, if you have multiple drawings open, you can use DesignCenter to streamline your drawing process by copying and pasting other content, such as layer definitions, layouts, and text styles between drawings. Overview of DesignCenter With DesignCenter, you can ■ Browse for drawing content such as drawings or symbol libraries on your computer, on a networked drive, and on a web page ■ View definition tables for named objects such as blocks and layers in any drawing file and then insert, attach, or copy and paste the definitions into the current drawing ■ Update (redefine) a block definition ■ Create shortcuts to drawings, folders, and Internet locations that you access frequently ■ Add content such as xrefs, blocks, and hatches to a drawing ■ Open drawing files in a new window ■ Drag drawings, blocks, and hatches to a tool palette for convenient access Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. ADCNAVIGATE Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path. DesignCenter | 91 System Variables ADCSTATE Indicates whether the DesignCenter window is open or closed. Understand the DesignCenter Window You can control the size, location, and appearance of DesignCenter. The Organization of the DesignCenter Window The DesignCenter window is divided into the tree view on the left side and the content area on the right side. Use the tree view to browse sources of content and to display content in the content area. Use the content area to add items to a drawing or to a tool palette. Undocked, the DesignCenter window is displayed as shown. Below the content area, you can also display a preview or a description of a selected drawing, block, hatch pattern, or xref. A toolbar at the top of the window provides several options and operations. Control the Size, Location, and Appearance of DesignCenter You can control the size, location, and appearance of DesignCenter. Many of these options can be set by right-clicking and selecting an option on the shortcut menu. ■ Resize DesignCenter by dragging the bar between the content area and the tree view or by dragging an edge of the window. ■ Dock DesignCenter by dragging it over the right or left docking region of the application window until it snaps into the docked position. You can also dock the DesignCenter window by double-clicking its title bar. ■ Undock DesignCenter by dragging the area above the toolbar away from the docking region. Pressing Ctrl while dragging prevents docking. ■ Anchor DesignCenter by choosing Anchor Right or Anchor Left from the shortcut menu. An anchored DesignCenter window rolls open and closed as the cursor moves across it. When an anchored DesignCenter window is open, its content overlaps the drawing area. It cannot be set to stay open. ■ When DesignCenter is floating, use Auto-hide to set it to roll open and closed as the cursor moves across it. 92 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations The DesignCenter Toolbar The DesignCenter toolbar controls navigation and display of information in the tree view and the content area. For information about these buttons, see the ADCENTER command. The same navigation and display options are available on the shortcut menu. Right-click in the DesignCenter content area to display the menu. To change the DesignCenter rollover behavior 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 Right-click the DesignCenter title bar. Click Auto-hide. When the DesignCenter rollover option is turned on, the DesignCenter tree view and content area disappear when you move your cursor off the DesignCenter window, leaving only the title bar. When you move your cursor over the title bar, the DesignCenter window is restored. To prevent DesignCenter from docking 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 On the DesignCenter title bar, click Propert. Press Ctrl as you move your mouse. To display and hide the DesignCenter tree view 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 On the DesignCenter toolbar, click Tree View Toggle. Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. ADCNAVIGATE Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path. Understand the DesignCenter Window | 93 System Variables ADCSTATE Indicates whether the DesignCenter window is open or closed. Access Content with DesignCenter The tree view in the left portion of the DesignCenter window and the four DesignCenter tabs help you find and load content into the content area. Folders Tab The Folders tab displays a hierarchy of navigational icons, including ■ Networks and computers ■ Web addresses (URLs) ■ Computer drives ■ Folders ■ Drawings and related support files ■ Xrefs, layouts, hatch styles, and named objects, including blocks, layers, linetypes, text styles, dimension styles, table styles, multileader styles, and plot styles within a drawing Click an item in the tree view to display its contents in the content area. Click the plus (+) or minus (-) sign to display and hide additional levels in the hierarchy. You can also double-click an item to display deeper levels. Right-clicking in the tree view displays a shortcut menu with several related options. 94 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations Open Drawings, History, and DC Online Tabs The Open Drawings, History, and DC Online tabs provide alternate methods of locating content. ■ Open Drawings. Displays a list of the drawings that are currently open. Click a drawing file and then click one of the definition tables from the list to load the content into the content area. ■ History. Displays a list of files opened previously with DesignCenter. Double-click a drawing file from the list to navigate to the drawing file in the tree view of the Folders tab and to load the content into the content area. ■ DC Online. Provides content from the DesignCenter Online web page including blocks, symbol libraries, manufacturer's content, and online catalogs. NOTE The DesignCenter Online (DC Online tab) is disabled by default. You can enable it from the CAD Manager Control utility on page 104. Bookmark Frequently Used Content DesignCenter provides a solution to finding content that you need to access quickly on a regular basis. Both the tree view and the content area include options that activate a folder called Favorites. The Favorites folder can contain shortcuts to content on local or network drives as well as in Internet locations. When you select a drawing, folder, or another type of content and choose Add to Favorites, a shortcut to that item is added to the Favorites folder. The original file or folder doesn't actually move; in fact, all the shortcuts you create are stored in the Favorites folder. The shortcuts saved in the Favorites folder can ® be moved, copied, or deleted using Windows Explorer. To change the source of the content displayed in DesignCenter 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 On the DesignCenter window, click one of the following tabs: ■ Folders. Lists your local and network drives. ■ Open Drawings. Lists the drawings that are currently open. ■ History. Lists the last 20 locations accessed through DesignCenter. Access Content with DesignCenter | 95 ■ DC Online. Displays online content from the Web. NOTE The DesignCenter Online (DC Online tab) is disabled by default. You can enable it from the CAD Manager Control utility on page 104. To change the folder of the Home button in DesignCenter 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 In the DesignCenter tree view, navigate to the folder that you want to set as home. 3 Right-click on the folder. Click Set as Home. When you click the Home button, DesignCenter will automatically load this folder. To add items to the Favorites folder in DesignCenter 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 Right-click the item in the DesignCenter tree view or content area. Click Add to Favorites. To display the contents of the Favorites folder in DesignCenter 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 In DesignCenter, click the Favorites button. When you are working in the tree view, you can use the Folders tab to navigate to the Favorites folder. To organize your DesignCenter Favorites folder 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 In DesignCenter, click the Favorites button. 96 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations 3 Right-click the background in the content area. Click Organize Favorites. Your Autodesk Favorites folder is opened in a window. Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. ADCNAVIGATE Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path. System Variables ADCSTATE Indicates whether the DesignCenter window is open or closed. Add Content with DesignCenter The right portion of the DesignCenter window operates on the content displayed. Double-clicking an item in the content area displays successive levels of detail. For example, double-clicking a drawing image displays several icons, including an icon for blocks. Double-clicking the Blocks icon displays images of each block in the drawing. Add Content to a Drawing You can add content from the content area into your current drawing using several methods: ■ Drag an item to the graphics area of a drawing to add it using default settings, if any. ■ Right-click an item in the content area to display a shortcut menu with several options. ■ Double-click a block to display the Insert dialog box; double-click a hatch to display the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box. You can preview graphical content such as a drawing, xref, or block in the content area, and you can display a text description if available. Add Content with DesignCenter | 97 Update Block Definitions with DesignCenter Unlike xrefs, when the source file of a block definition is changed, block definitions in the drawings that contain that block are not automatically updated. With DesignCenter, you decide whether a block definition should be updated in the current drawing. The source file of a block definition can be a drawing file or a nested block in a symbol library drawing. From the shortcut menu displayed when you right-click a block or drawing file in the content area, click Redefine Only or Insert and Redefine to update the selected block. Open Drawings with DesignCenter With DesignCenter, you can open a drawing from the content area using the shortcut menu, pressing Ctrl while dragging a drawing, or dragging a drawing icon to any location outside the graphics area of a drawing area. The drawing name is added to the DesignCenter history list for quick access in future sessions. Add Items from DesignCenter to a Tool Palette You can add drawings, blocks, and hatches from DesignCenter to the current tool palette. ■ From the DesignCenter content area, you can drag one or more items to the current tool palette. ■ From the DesignCenter tree view, you can right-click and, from the shortcut menu, create a new tool palette from the current folder, drawing file, or block icon. When you add drawings to a tool palette, they are inserted as blocks when you drag them into the current drawing. NOTE You can select multiple blocks or hatches from the content area to add them to a tool palette. To create a tool palette containing DesignCenter content 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 98 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations 2 Do one of the following: ■ Right-click an item in the DesignCenter tree view. Click Create Tool Palette. The new tool palette contains the drawings, blocks, or hatches from the item you selected. ■ Right-click the background in the DesignCenter content area. Click Create Tool Palette. The new tool palette contains the drawings, blocks, or hatches from the DesignCenter content area. ■ Right-click a drawing in the DesignCenter tree view or content area. Click Create Tool Palette of Blocks. The new tool palette contains the blocks from the drawing you selected. You can drag additional drawings, blocks, or hatches from the DesignCenter content area to the tool palette. To load the content area from the DesignCenter Search dialog box 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 In DesignCenter, use one of the following methods: ■ Drag the item from the search results list into the content area. ■ Double-click the item in the search results list. ■ Right-click the item in the search results list. Click Load into Content Area. 3 In the DesignCenter content area, double-click the Blocks icon. To load the content area of DesignCenter with a symbol library 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 On the DesignCenter toolbar, click Home. 3 In the content area, double-click the symbol library drawing that you want to load into the DesignCenter and then double-click the Blocks icon. The symbol library you selected is loaded into the DesignCenter content area. Add Content with DesignCenter | 99 NOTE You can set your home folder to any folder that contains symbol library drawings. If your home folder is set to a different path, navigate to a folder that contains symbol library drawings and right-click on the folder. Click Set as Home. To load the content area of DesignCenter with hatch patterns 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 On the DesignCenter toolbar, click Search. 3 In the Search dialog box, click the Look For box. Click Hatch Pattern Files. 4 On the Hatch Pattern Files tab, in the Search for the Name box, enter *. 5 Click Search Now. 6 Double-click one of the hatch pattern files that was found. The hatch pattern file you selected is loaded into DesignCenter. To open a drawing from DesignCenter 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 In DesignCenter, do one of the following: ■ Right-click the drawing icon in the DesignCenter content area. Click Open in Application Window. ■ Press Ctrl and drag the drawing icon from the DesignCenter content area to the drawing area. ■ Drag the drawing icon from the DesignCenter content area to a location anywhere outside the drawing area of the application window. (If you drag the drawing icon into the drawing area, a block is created in the current drawing.) To update a block definition with DesignCenter 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 100 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations 2 Right-click a block in the DesignCenter content area. Click Redefine Only or Insert and Redefine. NOTE If the source of the block that you want to update is an entire drawing file rather than a block definition within a drawing file, right-click the drawing's icon in the DesignCenter content area. Click Insert as Block. To open a block from the DesignCenter window in the Block Editor 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 On the block icon’s shortcut menu, click Block Editor. Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. ADCNAVIGATE Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path. System Variables ADCSTATE Indicates whether the DesignCenter window is open or closed. Retrieve Content from the Web with DesignCenter Online DesignCenter Online provides access to pre-drawn content such as blocks, symbol libraries, manufacturers' content, and online catalogs. NOTE The DesignCenter Online (DC Online tab) is disabled by default. You can enable it from the CAD Manager Control utility on page 104. Overview of DesignCenter Online DesignCenter Online provides access to pre-drawn content such as blocks, symbol libraries, manufacturers' content, and online catalogs. This content Retrieve Content from the Web with DesignCenter Online | 101 can be used in common design applications to assist you in creating your drawings. To access DesignCenter Online, click the DC Online tab in DesignCenter. Once the DesignCenter Online window is open, you can browse, search, and download content to use in your drawing. NOTE The DesignCenter Online (DC Online tab) is disabled by default. You can enable it from the CAD Manager Control utility on page 104. In the DesignCenter Online window, two panes are displayed—a right pane and a left pane. The right pane is called the content area. The content area displays the items or folders that you selected in the left pane. The left pane can display one of the following four views: ■ Category Listing. Displays folders containing libraries of standard parts, manufacturer-specific content, and content aggregator websites. ■ Search. Searches for online content. You can query items with Boolean and multiple-word search strings. ■ Settings. Controls how many categories and items are displayed on each page in the content area as a result of a search or folder navigation. ■ Collections. Specifies the discipline-specific content types that are displayed in DesignCenter Online. You choose the view by clicking the heading at the top of the left pane. 102 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations Once you select a folder in the left pane, all of its content is loaded into the content area. You can select an item in the content area to load it into the preview area. Items can be downloaded by dragging them from the preview area into your drawing or tool palette, or by saving the items to your computer. NOTE If the DC Online tab is not available in DesignCenter and you want to access DesignCenter Online, see your network or CAD administrator. DesignCenter Online Privacy DesignCenter Online is an interactive feature that must be connected to the Internet to deliver content and information. Each time DesignCenter Online is connected, it sends information to Autodesk so that the correct information can be returned. All information is sent anonymously to maintain your privacy. The following information is sent to Autodesk: ■ Product Name. The name of the product in which you are using DesignCenter Online ■ Product Release Number. The version of the product ■ Product Language. The language version of your product ■ Random Number Identifier. DesignCenter Online assigns a random number identifier to each person who uses the feature. This identifier is used to retain your Collections and your Settings views each time DesignCenter Online is used. Autodesk compiles statistics using the information sent from DesignCenter Online to monitor how it is being used and how it can be improved. Autodesk will maintain information provided by or collected from you in accordance with Autodesk's published privacy policy, which is available on http://www.autodesk.com/privacy. Turn the DC Online Tab On or Off The CAD Manager Control utility turns the DC Online tab in DesignCenter on and off. Information about how to use the utility is available after you install the utility from the Installation Wizard by running the utility and clicking Help in the CAD Manager Control Utility window. Retrieve Content from the Web with DesignCenter Online | 103 To install the CAD Manager Control utility 1 Insert the product DVD, or the first CD, into your computer's drive. 2 In the Installation Wizard, click Install Tools And Utilities. 3 On the Welcome to the Installation wizard page, click Next. 4 Choose Autodesk CAD Manager Tools 4.0 on the Select the Products to Install page. Click Next. 5 Review the Autodesk software license agreement for your country or region. You must accept this agreement to procede with the installation. Choose your country or region, click I Accept, and then click Next. NOTE If you do not agree to the terms of the license and wish to terminate the installation, click Cancel. 6 On the Review - Configure - Install page, click Install if you want to accept the default install location. If you want the utility installed in a different installation path, click Configure, set the path and then click Configuration Complete and then Install. 7 Click Finish when the Installation Complete page is displayed. Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. Understand DesignCenter Online Content Types With DesignCenter Online, content is categorized into folders. In the DesignCenter Online folders, you can retrieve discipline-specific content. The content that you can retrieve includes the following: ■ Standard Parts. Generic standard parts that are commonly used in design. These parts include blocks for architectural, mechanical, and GIS applications. ■ Manufacturers. Blocks and 3D models that can be located and downloaded by clicking a link to a manufacturer's website. 104 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations ■ Aggregators. Lists of libraries from commercial catalog providers can be searched for parts and blocks. You use the Collections view to select the categories of online content that you want to display in the Category Listing view. NOTE The DesignCenter Online (DC Online tab) is disabled by default. You can enable it from the CAD Manager Control utility on page 104. To view online content folders in the Category Listing view ■ In DesignCenter Online, at the top of the left pane, click the heading, and then click Category Listing. The category folders are displayed in the left pane of the window. Retrieve Content from the Web You can download content from the Web and use it in your drawings. Browse for Content When you use the Category Listing view, you can click the folders in the left pane to view their contents. These folders may contain other folders. When you click a folder or an item inside a folder, the contents are displayed in the Content area. When you click a block, graphical and descriptive information about the block is displayed in the preview area. Search for Content When you search for online content with DesignCenter Online, you can query items with Boolean and multiple-word search strings in the Search view. You Retrieve Content from the Web with DesignCenter Online | 105 can access Search by clicking the magnifying glass or by choosing Search from the drop-down heading at the top of the left pane. Control the Number of Categories and Items in a Page By using the Settings view, you can control how many categories or items are displayed on each page in the content area as a result of a search or folder navigation. Collections You can choose the type of content to navigate and search. In the Collections pane, you can specify the content types that are displayed each time you open DesignCenter Online. For example, if you use architectural blocks in your drawings, you select collections that contain architectural items. Once you make your selection, categories that you specified are displayed. Download Content To download content from the Web, locate the folder containing the content that you want to use. Then, click a thumbnail image of the content in the content area. The content is displayed in the preview area along with information about the content. You can drag the block directly from the preview area into a drawing or tool palette, or you can save it to your computer to be used later. See also: ■ Use Autodesk Seek to Add and Share Drawings on page 1984 To search for content in DesignCenter Online 1 In DesignCenter Online, at the top of the left pane, click the heading, and then click Search. 2 In the Search view, enter a single word or multiple-word strings. NOTE The Need Help link provides more information about searches, including examples of Boolean searches. 106 | Chapter 4 Other Tool Locations To specify content collections 1 In DesignCenter Online, at the top of the left pane, click the heading, and then click Collections. 2 In the Collections view, click the check boxes of the collections that you want to use. 3 Click Update Collections. The categories that you have selected are displayed in the left pane. To download content to your computer 1 In DesignCenter Online, at the top of the left pane, click the heading, and then click Category Listing. 2 In the Category folders, click a content item. 3 In the Preview area, under the image of the content item, click Save This Symbol As. 4 In the Save As dialog box, specify the location on your computer and the file name. 5 Click Save. The content is downloaded to your computer. To download content to your drawing 1 In DesignCenter Online, at the top of the left pane, click the heading, and then click Category Listing. 2 In the Category folders, click a content item to display it in the Preview area. 3 Drag the image from the Preview area into your drawing or tool palette. Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. Retrieve Content from the Web with DesignCenter Online | 107 108 Customize the Drawing Environment 5 You can change many window and drawing environment settings in the Options dialog box. For example, you can change how often a drawing is automatically saved to a temporary file, and you can link the program to folders containing files you use frequently. You can create workspaces to set up a drawing environment that is specific to your drawing needs. Experiment with different settings until you create the drawing environment that best fits your needs. Set Interface Options You can adjust the application interface and drawing area to match the way you work. Set Up the Drawing Area You can adjust the color and display schemes used in the application and drawing windows, and control the behavior of general features such as zoom transitions. Many of the settings are available from shortcut menus and the Options dialog box. Some workspace elements, such as the presence and location of toolbars and palettes, can be specified and saved using the Customize User Interface dialog box. Some settings affect how you work in the drawing area: ■ Background Colors (Options dialog box, Display tab). You specify the background colors used in the layout and Model tabs and the color used for prompts and crosshairs. 109 ■ Color Scheme (Options dialog box, Display tab, Colors). You specify a dark or light color scheme for the overall user interface. The settings affect the window frame background, status bar, title bar, menu browser frame, toolbars, and palettes. ■ Background Colors (Options dialog box, Display tab, Colors). You specify the background colors used in model space, layouts, and the block editor. Background colors on the Model tab change to indicate whether you are working in a 2D design context, 3D modeling (parallel projection), or 3D modeling (perspective projection). ■ UCS Icon and Crosshairs Cursor (Options dialog box, 3D Modeling tab). You specify that the 3D display options and labels for the UCS icon can be set in the 3D Modeling tab of the Options dialog box. ■ Color Assignments for X, Y, and Z (Options dialog box, Display tab, Colors). In 3D views, any interface elements that are associated with the UCS X, Y, and Z axis use special color assignments. The X axis is colored or tinted red, the Y axis is green, and the Z axis is blue. These tints can be turned on or off in the Drawing Window Colors dialog box. ■ Clean Screen. You can expand the drawing display area to display only the menu bar, status bar, and command window with the clean screen button on the application status bar. Click the button again to restore the previous setup. ■ View Transitions. You can control whether view transitions are smooth or instantaneous when you pan, zoom, or change from one view to another (VTOPTIONS command). The default is a smooth transition. Tooltips Several types of tooltips provide pop-up information for interaction with toolbars, object snaps, and drafting operations. You can view tooltips in toolbars, the menu browser, the ribbon, and dialog boxes. Initially, a basic tooltip is displayed. If you continue to hover, the tooltip expands to display additional information. You can customize the display and content of a tooltip. See also: ■ Display Tab (Options Dialog Box) in the Command Reference ■ User Interface Customization in the Customization Guide 110 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment ■ Rollover Tooltips in the Customization Guide ■ Create Tooltips and Extended Help for Commands in the Customization Guide To set options 1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu, click Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, click a tab. 3 Set options as desired. 4 Do either or both of the following: ■ Click Apply to record the current options settings in the system registry. ■ Click OK to record the current options settings in the system registry and close the Options dialog box. To customize the colors of the application window elements 1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu, click Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Display tab, click Colors. 3 In the Drawing Window Colors dialog box, select context and then the interface element you want to change. 4 Select the color you want to use from the Color list. To specify a custom color, select Select Color from the Color list. 5 If you want to revert to the default colors, click Restore Current Element, Restore Current Context, or Restore All Contexts. 6 Click Apply and Close to record the current option settings in the system registry and close the dialog box. 7 Click OK to close the Options dialog box. To change the appearance of view transitions 1 At the Command prompt, enter vtoptions. Set Up the Drawing Area | 111 2 In the View Transitions dialog box, check one or more of the following options: ■ Enable Animation for Pan and Zoom. Makes a smooth view transition during panning and zooming. ■ Enable Animation When View Rotates. Makes a smooth view transition when the view angle is changed. ■ Enable Animation During Scripts. Makes a smooth view transition while a script is running. 3 Set the transition speed by moving the slider. 4 To preserve performance, set the minimum frames per second for showing smooth view transitions. When a smooth view transition cannot maintain this speed, an instant transition is used. 5 Click OK. To display hidden message dialogs 1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu, click Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, System tab, under General Options, click Hidden Messages Settings button. 3 The Hidden Message Settings dialog box is displayed. 4 Check the corresponding dialog name from the tree directory. 5 Click OK. To turn tooltips on or off 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Display tab, under Window Elements, click Show Tooltips. 3 Click OK. 112 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment Quick Reference Commands 3DCONFIG Sets options that affect 3D display performance. CLEANSCREENON Clears the screen of toolbars and dockable windows, excluding the command window. CLEANSCREENOFF Restores display of toolbars and dockable windows, excluding the command window. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. VTOPTIONS Displays a change in view as a smooth transition. System Variables APPLYGLOBALOPACITIES Applies transparency settings to all palettes. CALCINPUT Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes. CLEANSCREENSTATE Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off. CURSORSIZE Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. Set Up the Drawing Area | 113 EXTNAMES Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers) stored in definition tables. GLOBALOPACITY Controls transparency level for all palettes. GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. HELPPREFIX Sets the file path for the Help system. INSUNITS Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing. INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INTELLIGENTUPDATE Controls the graphics refresh rate. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEPERCENT Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file. LAYOUTREGENCTL Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs. 114 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment LOCALE Displays a code that indicates the current locale. LOCALROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were installed. LOCKUI Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as DesignCenter and the Properties palette. LOGFILEMODE Specifies whether the contents of the text window are written to a log file. LOGFILENAME Specifies the path and name of the text window log file for the current drawing. LOGFILEPATH Specifies the path for the text window log files for all drawings in a session. MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. OLEQUALITY Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects. OLESTARTUP Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads when plotting. OSNAPCOORD Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override running object snaps. PAPERUPDATE Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default for the plotter configuration file. Set Up the Drawing Area | 115 PALETTEOPAQUE Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default for the plotter configuration file. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing at the Select Objects prompt. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection. PSTYLEPOLICY Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. RASTERPREVIEW Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing. ROLLOVEROPACITY Controls the transparency of a palette while the cursor moves over the palette. ROLLOVERTIPS Controls the display of rollover tooltips in the application. 116 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment SAVEFILE Stores the current automatic save file name. SAVEFILEPATH Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current session. SAVETIME Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes. SPLINESEGS Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. TDUSRTIMER Stores the user-elapsed timer. TOOLTIPMERGE Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip. TOOLTIPS Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user interface elements. VISRETAIN Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. VTDURATION Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. Set Up the Drawing Area | 117 Set Options for 3D Modeling with Perspective Projection You can set specific display options when working with 3D models using perspective projection. Using the Options dialog box, you can specify the following options when your 3D model is set to use a perspective view: ■ Ground Plane (Options dialog box, Display tab, Colors). When perspective projection is turned on, the XY plane of the UCS displays as a ground plane with a gradient color. The ground plane displays a gradient from the ground horizon to the ground origin. ■ Sky (Options dialog box, Display tab, Colors). The area not covered by the ground plane is the sky, which displays a gradient color from the sky horizon to the sky zenith. ■ Underground (Options dialog box, Display tab, Colors). If the ground plane is viewed from below ground, the ground plane displays a gradient from the earth horizon to the earth azimuth. ■ Ground Plane Grid (Options dialog box, Display tab, Colors). When perspective projection is turned on, the grid displays as a ground plane grid. Colors are set for major grid lines, minor grid lines, and axis lines. 118 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment Quick Reference Commands 3DCONFIG Sets options that affect 3D display performance. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. System Variables APERTURE Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels. CALCINPUT Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes. CLEANSCREENSTATE Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off. CURSORSIZE Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size. DCTCUST Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary. DCTMAIN Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary. DEFPLSTYLE Specifies the default plot style for new objects in a drawing when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. Set Options for 3D Modeling with Perspective Projection | 119 EXTNAMES Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers) stored in definition tables. FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks. GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. INSUNITS Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing. INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INTELLIGENTUPDATE Controls the graphics refresh rate. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEPERCENT Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file. LAYOUTREGENCTL Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs. 120 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment LOCALE Displays a code that indicates the current locale. LOCALROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were installed. LOCKUI Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as DesignCenter and the Properties palette. LOGFILEMODE Specifies whether the contents of the text window are written to a log file. LOGFILENAME Specifies the path and name of the text window log file for the current drawing. LOGFILEPATH Specifies the path for the text window log files for all drawings in a session. MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. OLEQUALITY Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects. OLESTARTUP Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads when plotting. OSNAPCOORD Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override running object snaps. PAPERUPDATE Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default for the plotter configuration file. PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. Set Options for 3D Modeling with Perspective Projection | 121 PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing at the Select Objects prompt. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection. PSTYLEPOLICY Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. RASTERPREVIEW Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing. ROLLOVERTIPS Controls the display of rollover tooltips in the application. SAVEFILEPATH Stores the current automatic save file name. SAVEFILEPATH Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current session. 122 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment SAVETIME Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes. SPLINESEGS Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. TDUSRTIMER Stores the user-elapsed timer. TOOLTIPMERGE Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip. TOOLTIPS Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user interface elements. VISRETAIN Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. VTDURATION Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. Switch Between Model Space and Layouts You can control how you change between model space and one or more layouts. The classic interface provides a Model tab and one or more layout tabs. To optimize space in the drawing area, you can turn off these tabs and use the equivalent buttons on the status bar. The control to change between the two interface designs is included as an item on the Model and layout tab shortcut Switch Between Model Space and Layouts | 123 menu, and on the shortcut menu of the Model/Layout button on the status bar. NOTE Access to all shortcut menu options is available from the tabs only. To change the Model and layout tabs to status bar buttons ■ Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab. Click Hide Layout and Model Tabs. To turn on the Model and layout tabs ■ On the status bar, right-click the Model or layout button. Click Display Layout and Model Tabs. Quick Reference Commands DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. System Variables APERTURE Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels. CALCINPUT Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes. CLEANSCREENSTATE Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off. CURSORSIZE Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size. 124 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment DCTCUST Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary. DCTMAIN Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary. DEFPLSTYLE Specifies the default plot style for new objects in a drawing when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. EXTNAMES Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers) stored in definition tables. FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks. GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. INSUNITS Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing. INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. Switch Between Model Space and Layouts | 125 INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INTELLIGENTUPDATE Controls the graphics refresh rate. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEPERCENT Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file. LAYOUTREGENCTL Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs. LOCALE Displays a code that indicates the current locale. LOCALROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were installed. LOCKUI Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as DesignCenter and the Properties palette. LOGFILEMODE Specifies whether the contents of the text window are written to a log file. LOGFILENAME Specifies the path and name of the text window log file for the current drawing. LOGFILEPATH Specifies the path for the text window log files for all drawings in a session. MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. OLEQUALITY Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects. 126 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment OLESTARTUP Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads when plotting. OSNAPCOORD Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override running object snaps. PAPERUPDATE Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default for the plotter configuration file. PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing at the Select Objects prompt. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection. PSTYLEPOLICY Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. Switch Between Model Space and Layouts | 127 QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. RASTERPREVIEW Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing. ROLLOVERTIPS Controls the display of rollover tooltips in the application. SAVEFILEPATH Stores the current automatic save file name. SAVEFILEPATH Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current session. SAVETIME Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes. SPLINESEGS Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. TDUSRTIMER Stores the user-elapsed timer. TOOLTIPMERGE Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip. TOOLTIPS Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user interface elements. VISRETAIN Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. VTDURATION Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. 128 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. Specify Application Fonts Change the fonts used in the application window and in the text window. You can specify the font that is displayed in both the application and text windows. To change the application font, use the Options dialog box, Display tab. NOTE This setting does not affect the text in your drawings. To change the font displayed in the Command window 1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu, click Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Display tab, under Window Elements, click Fonts. 3 In the Command Line Window Font dialog box, select the appropriate Font, Font Style, and Size. An example of the current choices appears under Sample Command Line Font. 4 Click Apply & Close to record the current option settings in the system registry and close the dialog box. 5 In the Options dialog box, click OK. Quick Reference Commands OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. Specify Application Fonts | 129 System Variables APERTURE Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels. CALCINPUT Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes. CLEANSCREENSTATE Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off. CURSORSIZE Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size. DCTCUST Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary. DCTMAIN Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary. DEFPLSTYLE Specifies the default plot style for new objects in a drawing when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. EXTNAMES Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers) stored in definition tables. FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks. GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. 130 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. INSUNITS Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing. INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INTELLIGENTUPDATE Controls the graphics refresh rate. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEPERCENT Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file. LAYOUTREGENCTL Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs. LOCALE Displays a code that indicates the current locale. LOCALROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were installed. LOCKUI Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as DesignCenter and the Properties palette. LOGFILEMODE Specifies whether the contents of the text window are written to a log file. Specify Application Fonts | 131 LOGFILENAME Specifies the path and name of the text window log file for the current drawing. LOGFILEPATH Specifies the path for the text window log files for all drawings in a session. MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. OLEQUALITY Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects. OLESTARTUP Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads when plotting. OSNAPCOORD Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override running object snaps. PAPERUPDATE Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default for the plotter configuration file. PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing at the Select Objects prompt. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window. 132 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection. PSTYLEPOLICY Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. RASTERPREVIEW Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing. ROLLOVERTIPS Controls the display of rollover tooltips in the application. SAVEFILEPATH Stores the current automatic save file name. SAVEFILEPATH Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current session. SAVETIME Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes. SPLINESEGS Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. TDUSRTIMER Stores the user-elapsed timer. TOOLTIPMERGE Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip. Specify Application Fonts | 133 TOOLTIPS Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user interface elements. VISRETAIN Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. VTDURATION Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows Windows such as the ribbon, Properties palette, tool palettes, and DesignCenter can be docked, anchored, or floated. Settings for these and other options are often changed on a shortcut menu, available by right-clicking the title bar of the palette or window. ■ Resize. Drag an edge of the window to change its size. If the window has panes, drag the bar between panes to resize the panes. ■ Allow Docking. Select this option if you want to dock or anchor a dockable window. A docked window adheres to one side of the application window, causing the drawing area to be resized. ■ Anchor. Attach, or anchor, a dockable window or palette to the left or right side of the drawing area. An anchored window rolls open and closed as the cursor moves across it. When an anchored window is open, its content overlaps the drawing area. An anchored window cannot be set to stay open. The Allow Docking option must be selected before you can anchor a window. 134 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment ■ Auto-hide. A floating window rolls open and closes as the cursor moves across it. When this option is cleared, the window stays open continuously. Docked windows with auto-hide show up as a bar inside the application. ■ Transparency. Sets the degree of transparency for the window and on mouse over. The window becomes transparent so that it does not obscure objects under it. The window becomes more opaque when it is moused over. This option is not available for all windows. You can hide all the palettes at once with HIDEPALETTES and turn on all hidden palettes with SHOWPALETTES. NOTE If a palette has been turned back on manually and moved, it is not affected by SHOWPALETTES. To anchor a dockable window 1 At the top of the window or palette title bar, click the Propterties button. Click Allow Docking. 2 Click the Properties button again. Click Anchor Right or Anchor Left. Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows | 135 To float an anchored window Do one of the following: ■ At the top of the window or palette title bar, click the Properties button. Clear Allow Docking. ■ When the anchored window is open, drag the window title bar away from the anchor tab base. ■ Double-click the anchor tab. To dock a window or palette 1 At the top of the window or palette title bar, click the Properties button. Click Allow Docking. 2 Click and drag the window or palette to a docking location on the right or left side of the drawing area. 3 When the outline of the window is displayed in the docking area, release the button. NOTE To place a toolbar in a docking region without docking it, hold down the Ctrl key as you drag. To undock a window or palette Use one of the following methods: ■ At the top of the window or palette title bar, click the Properties button. Clear Allow Docking. ■ Double-click the double bars on the side or top of the window. ■ Position the cursor on the double bars at the top or side of the window, hold down the left button on your pointing device, and drag the window away from its docked location. To turn Auto-hide on or off for a floating palette or window ■ At the top of the window or palette title bar, click the Auto-hide button. If Auto-hide is selected, floating windows roll open and closed as the cursor moves across them. When this option is cleared, the full window stays open continuously. 136 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment NOTE This procedure applies to the Tool palette, DesignCenter, the Properties palette, and several other palettes. Quick Reference Commands DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. HIDEPALETTES Hides all currently displayed palettes, including the command window. LOGFILEOFF Closes the text window log file opened by LOGFILEON. LOGFILEON Writes the text window contents to a file. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. SHOWPALETTES Restores the display of hidden palettes. VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. VTOPTIONS Displays a change in view as a smooth transition. System Variables APERTURE Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels. CALCINPUT Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes. Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows | 137 CLEANSCREENSTATE Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off. CURSORSIZE Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size. DCTCUST Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary. DCTMAIN Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary. DEFPLSTYLE Specifies the default plot style for new objects in a drawing when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. EXTNAMES Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers) stored in definition tables. FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks. GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. 138 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment INSUNITS Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing. INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INTELLIGENTUPDATE Controls the graphics refresh rate. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEPERCENT Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file. LAYOUTREGENCTL Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs. LOCALE Displays a code that indicates the current locale. LOCALROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were installed. LOCKUI Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as DesignCenter and the Properties palette. LOGFILEMODE Specifies whether the contents of the text window are written to a log file. LOGFILENAME Specifies the path and name of the text window log file for the current drawing. LOGFILEPATH Specifies the path for the text window log files for all drawings in a session. Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows | 139 MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. OLEQUALITY Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects. OLESTARTUP Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads when plotting. OSNAPCOORD Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override running object snaps. PAPERUPDATE Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default for the plotter configuration file. PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing at the Select Objects prompt. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection. 140 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment PSTYLEPOLICY Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. RASTERPREVIEW Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing. ROLLOVERTIPS Controls the display of rollover tooltips in the application. SAVEFILEPATH Stores the current automatic save file name. SAVEFILEPATH Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current session. SAVETIME Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes. SPLINESEGS Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. TDUSRTIMER Stores the user-elapsed timer. TOOLTIPMERGE Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip. TOOLTIPS Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user interface elements. VISRETAIN Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows | 141 VTDURATION Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. Control the Display of Toolbars Similar to dockable windows, you can control the behavior of toolbars. To display or hide toolbars, right-click any toolbar to display a list of toolbars. A check mark next to a toolbar name indicates that it is displayed. Click a toolbar name in the list to display or clear the check mark. A toolbar can be docked or floating. A docked toolbar is attached to any edge of the drawing area. A toolbar docked at the top edge of the drawing area is located below the ribbon. Undock a toolbar by clicking the double bars and dragging it into the drawing area. You can click the title bar and drag it to a new location or dock it. Resize a floating toolbar by dragging an edge. Lock the Position of Toolbars and Dockable Windows Once you have arranged toolbars and docked, floating, or anchored windows the way you want them, you can lock their position. Locked toolbars and windows can still be opened and closed and items can be added and deleted. To unlock them temporarily, press and hold Ctrl. To lock the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows ■ Do one of the following: ■ Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Window Locking ➤ Floating Toolbars/Panels. ■ Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Window Locking ➤ Docked Toolbars/Panels. 142 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment ■ Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Window Locking ➤ Floating Windows. ■ Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Window Locking ➤ Docked Windows. A lock icon in the system tray indicates whether toolbars or dockable windows are locked. To unlock them temporarily, hold down Ctrl. Quick Reference Commands CLEANSCREENON Clears the screen of toolbars and dockable windows, excluding the command window. CLEANSCREENOFF Restores display of toolbars and dockable windows, excluding the command window. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. HIDEPALETTES Hides all currently displayed palettes, including the command window. LOGFILEOFF Closes the text window log file opened by LOGFILEON. LOGFILEON Writes the text window contents to a file. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. SHOWPALETTES Restores the display of hidden palettes. VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. Control the Display of Toolbars | 143 VTOPTIONS Displays a change in view as a smooth transition. System Variables APERTURE Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels. CALCINPUT Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes. CLEANSCREENSTATE Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off. CURSORSIZE Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size. DCTCUST Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary. DCTMAIN Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary. DEFPLSTYLE Specifies the default plot style for new objects in a drawing when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. EXTNAMES Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers) stored in definition tables. FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks. 144 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. INSUNITS Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing. INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INTELLIGENTUPDATE Controls the graphics refresh rate. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEPERCENT Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file. LAYOUTREGENCTL Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs. LOCALE Displays a code that indicates the current locale. LOCALROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were installed. LOCKUI Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as DesignCenter and the Properties palette. Control the Display of Toolbars | 145 LOGFILEMODE Specifies whether the contents of the text window are written to a log file. LOGFILENAME Specifies the path and name of the text window log file for the current drawing. LOGFILEPATH Specifies the path for the text window log files for all drawings in a session. MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. OLEQUALITY Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects. OLESTARTUP Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads when plotting. OSNAPCOORD Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override running object snaps. PAPERUPDATE Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default for the plotter configuration file. PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing at the Select Objects prompt. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. 146 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection. PSTYLEPOLICY Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. RASTERPREVIEW Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing. ROLLOVERTIPS Controls the display of rollover tooltips in the application. SAVEFILEPATH Stores the current automatic save file name. SAVEFILEPATH Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current session. SAVETIME Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes. SPLINESEGS Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. TDUSRTIMER Stores the user-elapsed timer. Control the Display of Toolbars | 147 TOOLTIPMERGE Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip. TOOLTIPS Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user interface elements. VISRETAIN Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. VTDURATION Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. Create Task-Based Workspaces Workspaces are sets of menus, toolbars, palettes, and ribbon control panels that are grouped and organized so that you can work in a custom, task-oriented drawing environment. When you use a workspace, only the menus, toolbars, and palettes that are relevant to a task are displayed. In addition, a workspace may automatically display the ribbon, a special palette with task-specific control panels. For more information about using the ribbon, see The Ribbon. You can easily switch between workspaces. The following task-based workspaces are already defined in the product: ■ 2D Drafting & Annotation ■ 3D Modeling ■ AutoCAD Classic 148 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment For example, when you create 3D models, you can use the 3D Modeling workspace that contains only 3D-related toolbars, menus, and palettes. Interface items that you do not need for 3D modeling are hidden, maximizing the screen area available for your work. When you make changes to your drawing display (such as moving, hiding, or displaying a toolbar or a tool palette group) and you want to preserve the display settings for future use, you can save the current settings to a workspace. Switch Workspaces You can switch to another workspace whenever you need to work on a different task from the Workspace icon on the status bar. NOTE Saved workspaces are also accessible from the Quick Access toolbar. Create or Change a Workspace You can create your own workspaces and modify the default workspaces. To create or change a workspace, use either of the following methods: ■ Display, hide, and rearrange your toolbars and windows, modify your ribbon settings, and then save the current workspace from t Workspaces icon in the status bar, Workspaces toolbar or the Window menu, or use the WORKSPACE command. ■ For more extensive changes, open the Customize User Interface dialog box to set up the workspace environment. You can control the display order of your saved workspaces and other options in the Workspace Settings dialog box. NOTE For more information about creating or modifying workspaces, and how toolbars and menus interact with workspaces, see Customize Workspaces in the Customization Guide. Select a Sample Workspace You can experiment with the sample workspace included with the product. This predefined workspace demonstrates how you might use a workspace to streamline your work tasks. You can find the sample workspace in the following location: :\Documents and Settings\ \Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD 2011\ \ \Support\acadSampleWorkspaces.cuix Create Task-Based Workspaces | 149 To use the sample workspace, you must first transfer it to your main customization (CUIx) file. To learn more about transferring a workspace, see Transfer and Migrate Customization in the Customization Guide. Workspaces and Profiles Workspaces work with and complement the control over your drawing environment that profiles provide. Workspaces control the display of menus, toolbars, and palettes in the drawing area. When you use or switch a workspace, you change the display of your drawing area. You manage your workspaces from the Customize User Interface dialog box. Profiles save environment settings including many of your user options, drafting settings, paths, and other values. Profiles are updated each time you make a change to an option, setting, or other value. You can manage your profiles from the Options dialog box. NOTE When you make changes to the drawing display, the changes are stored in your profile and are displayed the next time you launch the program, regardless of your workspace settings. The profile changes are not automatically saved to a workspace unless you select the Automatically Save Workspace Changes option in the Workspace Settings dialog box. To preserve profile settings in a workspace, click Save Current As from the shortcut menu of the workspace icon on the status bar. For more information about profiles, see Save and Restore Interface Settings (Profiles) on page 151. To switch workspaces 1 On the status bar, click Workspace Switching. 2 From the list of workspaces, select the workspace you want to switch to. The workspace with a check mark is your current workspace. To change workspace settings 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Workspaces ➤ Workspace Settings. 2 In the Workspace Settings dialog box, change workspace settings as needed. 3 Click OK. 150 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment To save a workspace 1 Tools ➤ Workspaces ➤ Save Current As. 2 In the Save Workspace dialog box, enter a name for the new workspace or select a name from the drop-down list. 3 Click Save. Quick Reference Commands WORKSPACE Creates, modifies, and saves workspaces and makes a workspace current. WSSAVE Saves a workspace. WSSETTINGS Sets options for workspaces. System Variables WSAUTOSAVE Saves changes you made to a workspace when you switch to another work space. WSCURRENT Returns the current workspace name at the Command prompt and sets a workspace to current. Save and Restore Interface Settings (Profiles) Profiles store drawing environment settings. You can create profiles for different users or projects, and you can share profiles by importing and exporting them as files. Profiles store settings such as the following: ■ Default search and project file paths ■ Template file locations Save and Restore Interface Settings (Profiles) | 151 ■ Initial folder specified in file navigation dialog boxes ■ Default linetype and hatch pattern files ■ Printer defaults Profile information is typically set on the Files tab of the Options dialog box, stored in the system registry, and can be exported to a text file (an ARG file). Use Profiles for Shared Computers or Different Projects Use the Profiles tab in the Options dialog box to create and save your drawing environment settings as a profile. If you share your workstation with other users who use the same login name, you can restore your options by making the profile current. You can also create and save profiles to use with different projects. By default, your current options are stored in a profile named < >. The current profile name, as well as the current drawing name, are displayed in the Options dialog box. Transfer Profiles between Computers Once you save a profile, you can export or import the ARG file to and from different computers. This is useful for copying, restoring, or standardizing project-oriented work environments over a network. If you make changes to your current profile during a work session and you want to save those changes in an ARG file, you must re-export the profile. When you export the profile with the current profile name, the ARG file is updated with the new settings. For more information about profiles, see OPTIONS in the Command Reference. Customize the Default Profile with Initial Setup When using Initial Setup, a new profile is created based on the profile named < >, or the current profile if < > does not exist. The new profile created is named Initial Setup Profile, and is assigned the industry or default drawing template selected from Initial Setup. For more information on Initial Setup, see Customize AutoCAD with Initial Setup in the Stand-Alone Installation Guide. To make a profile current 1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu, click Options. 152 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment 2 In the Options dialog box, Profiles tab, select the profile you want to make current. 3 Click Set Current. 4 Click OK. To save a profile 1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu, click Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Profiles tab, click Add to List. 3 In the Add Profiles dialog box, enter a Profile name and Description. 4 Click Apply & Close to record the current option settings in the system registry and close the dialog box. 5 Click OK. To make a profile current before starting the program 1 On the Windows desktop, right-click the program icon. Click Properties. 2 In the AutoCAD Properties dialog box, Shortcut tab, under Target, enter /p currentprofile after the current target directory. For example, to make the profile User12 current, enter the following in Target: "c:\Program Files\ \acad.exe"/p user12 3 Click OK. The profile name you enter is the current profile each time you start the program. Quick Reference Commands OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables CPROFILE Displays the name of the current profile. Save and Restore Interface Settings (Profiles) | 153 Customize Startup Command line switches can specify a separate startup routine for each project. You can use command line switches to specify several options when you start the program. For example, you can run a script, start with a specified drawing template, and display a specified view when a drawing is opened. With command line switches, you can also set up several program icons, each with different start-up options. Command line switches are parameters you can add to the acad.exe command ® ® line associated with a Microsoft Windows shortcut icon or the Windows Run dialog box. You can include several switches within a single command line. Valid switches are listed in the following table. /b Script name Designates a script to run after you start the program (b stands for batch process). Scripts can be used to set up drawing parameters in a new drawing file. An SCR file type is assumed. /t Template file name Creates a new drawing based on a template or prototype drawing. A DWT file type is assumed. /c Configuration folder Specifies the path for the hardware configuration file that you want to use. You can specify a directory or a particular file. A CFG file type is assumed. If you don't set the /c switch, the executable directory is searched and the ACADCFGW or ACADCFG environment variable is used as a way to define the configuration file and directory location. /v View name Designates a particular view of the drawing for display at startup. /ld ARX or DBX application Loads a specified ARX or DBX application. Use the following format: \ .ARX If the path or file name contains spaces, then the path or file name should be wrapped in 154 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment double quotes. If no path information is included, the program search path is used. /s Support folders Designates support folders other than the current folder. Drawing support files include text fonts, menus, AutoLISP files, linetypes, and hatch patterns. The maximum number of folders you can specify in the path is 15. Each folder name is delimited by semicolons. /r Default system pointing device Restores the default system pointing device. It creates a new configuration file (acad2010.cfg) and renames the previous configuration file to acad2010.bak. /nologo No AutoCAD logo screen Starts the program without first displaying the logo screen. /p User-defined registry profile for starting the program Specifies a user-defined registry profile for starting the program. The selected profile is in effect only for the current session of the program, unless you make another profile current in the Options dialog box during that session. You create or import profiles on the Profiles tab in the Options dialog box. With the /p switch, you can specify the name of a profile that is listed in the Options dialog box or the file name of an exported profile (ARG) file. If the profile does not exist, the current profile is used. /nohardware Disables hardware acceleration Disables hardware acceleration on startup. /nossm No Sheet Set Manager window Suppresses the display of the Sheet Set Manager window on startup. /set Sheet set Loads the named sheet set on startup. Use the following format: \ .DST Customize Startup | 155 /w Default workspace Designates which workspace in the loaded CUIx files should be restored on startup. /pl Background plotting/publishing Publishes a drawing set descriptions (DSD) file in the background. Use the following format: \ .DSD The syntax for using command line switches is "drive:pathname\acad.exe" ["drawingname"] [/switch "name"] When using a switch option, you must follow the switch with a space and then the name of a file, path, or view within quotation marks. For example, the following entry starts the program from a folder named AutoCAD 2011 with the drawing template arch1.dwt, restores a named view PLAN1, and executes a script file startup.scr. "d:\AutoCAD 2011\acad.exe”/t "d:\AutoCAD 2011\template\arch1" /v "plan1" /b "startup" The environment settings are resolved in the following way: ■ If you use a command line switch to specify an environment setting, the command line switch overrides the settings specified in either the Options dialog box or the environment variable. ■ If a command line switch is not set, the corresponding value set in the Options dialog box is used. ■ If neither a command line switch nor an Options value is set, the environment variable value is used. NOTE Command line switches and environment variables override values set in the Options dialog box for the current session only. They do not alter the system registry. To start the program with a command line switch 1 Right-click the program icon on the Windows desktop. Click Properties. 2 In the AutoCAD Properties dialog box, Shortcut tab, in the Target box, edit the parameters for the switch using the following syntax: "drive:pathname\acad.exe" ["drawing name"] [/switch "name"] 156 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment Valid switches are as follows: /b Script name (b stands for batch process) /t Template file name /c Configuration folder /v View name /s Support folders /r Default system pointing device /nologo No AutoCAD logo screen /nohardware Disables hardware acceleration /p User-defined registry profile /nossm No Sheet Set Manager window /set Sheet Set name /w Default workspace /pl Background plotting/publishing for a Drawing Set Descriptions (DSD) file For example, enter "d:\AutoCAD 2011\acad.exe" /t "d:\AutoCAD 2011\template\arch1" /v "plan1" /b "startup" 3 Click OK. Play Back an Action Macro After an action macro is recorded with the Action Recorder, you can play back the series of recorded commands and input values. You play back an action macro from the Action Recorder panel. You can also enter the name of the action macro at the Command prompt. As an action macro is played back, you might be paused for input or requested to respond to a message or requested to insert a base point. Play Back an Action Macro | 157 Based on the current action or request for user interaction in the action macro, an icon near the cursor is displayed to indicate when the action macro needs input in order to continue. A dialog box may be displayed where you enter a value or use the recorded value. As an action macro is played back, the series of commands are performed one after the other until playback is complete or an error is encountered. Some of the reasons for the playback to stop or fail are as follows: ■ Invalid command. The command that is defined in the action macro is unknown to AutoCAD. The action macro might have been recorded in a different product or contains custom commands or macros that are not loaded. ■ Empty selection. The current action expected a selection set of objects, but no objects were selected. ■ Macro cancelled. The Cancel button in one of the dialogs boxes was clicked. Location of Action Macros When you record an action macro, it is saved to the path defined by the system variable ACTRECPATH. For playback, paths are defined by the system variable ACTPATH. Both sets of paths are used when loading and playing back an action macro. In the Action Recorder Settings node on the Files tab of the Options dialog box, you can to set the paths used for both recording and reading action macro files. Record and Modify Action Macros Recording and modifying action macros is done with the Action Recorder panel on the ribbon. To learn how to record and modify action macros, see Record and Modify Action Macros in the Customization Guide. See also: ■ Record and Modify Action Macros To play back an action macro from the Action Recorder panel 1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Action Recorder panel. Click the down arrow next to the Action Macro list and select the action macro to play back. 158 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment 2 Click Play. 3 Follow any Command prompts and dialog boxes displayed to complete the action macro. To play back an action macro from the Command prompt ■ At the Command prompt, enter the name of the action macro that you want to play back and press Enter. For example, if the action macro command name is DRAWLINE, enter drawline at the Command prompt and press Enter. To provide user input during playback 1 Start the playback on an action macro. 2 Follow the prompts displayed at the Command prompt. To change the location used to search for recorded action macros 1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu, click Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, in the list of nodes, click the plus sign (+) next to Action Recorder Settings. 3 Click the plus sign (+) next to Additional Actions Reading File Locations, and specify a folder path. 4 Click OK Quick Reference Commands OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. RIBBON Opens the ribbon window. Play Back an Action Macro | 159 System Variables ACTPATH Specifies the additional paths to use when locating available action macros for playback. ACTRECPATH Specifies the path used to store new action macros. Migrate and Specify Initial Setup Migrating from an older release or getting started with AutoCAD for the first time present different challenges. Migrate Custom Settings allows you to copy your custom settings and files from a previous release of AutoCAD to the latest release, making it easier to start using the new release. Initial Setup helps you to perform some basic customization of AutoCAD. Migrate Custom Settings and Files One of the challenges when moving from a previous release of AutoCAD to the latest release is getting the new release to look and behave like the previous release. You can use Migrate Custom Settings and the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor to transfer many of your custom settings and files to the latest release. Initial Setup You can perform some basic customization of AutoCAD with Initial Setup which makes it easier to access specific tools and start a new drawing. Initial Setup is accessed from the Options dialog box. The following can be done with Initial Setup: ■ Specify an industry that best describes your work to help search for related content to use in drawings and companion products developed by partners. ■ Add task-based tools to your default workspace. ■ Specify a drawing template to use when creating new drawings. For more information on Initial Setup, see Customize AutoCAD with Initial Setup in the Stand-Alone Installation Guide. 160 | Chapter 5 Customize the Drawing Environment See also: ■ Migrate Custom Settings and Files from Previous Releases in the Stand-Alone Installation Guide ■ Basic Customization in the Customization Guide ■ User Interface Customization in the Customization Guide Migrate and Specify Initial Setup | 161 162 Part 3: Start and Save Drawings 163 164 Start a Drawing 6 All drawings start from either a default drawing template file or a custom drawing template file that you create. Drawing template files store default settings, styles, and additional data. Overview of Starting a New Drawing Before you start to draw, you need to decide what system of drawing units that you will use in the drawing, and then choose a drawing template file appropriate for those drawing units. Choose Drawing Units A drawing unit can equal one inch, one millimeter, or any other system of measurement. For more information about drawing units, see Determine the Units of Measurement on page 167. Choose a Drawing Template File When you start a new drawing, AutoCAD accesses a drawing template file to determine many default settings such as unit precision, dimension styles, layer names, a title block, and other settings. Many of the settings are based on whether the drawing template file is intended for use with a drawing created in inches, feet, millimeters,centimeters, or other unit of measurement. 165 Customize a Drawing Template File By customizing your own drawing template file, you save yourself a lot of work changing settings, and you also ensure that the settings are standardized. Choose a drawing template file Start a new drawing, choose a drawing template ----- file similar to what you need for your discipline and units of measurement. Specify units and precision ----- Specify a unit format and precision. Define various styles ----- Specify values and settings for text, dimensions, and other styles. Specify additional settings ----- Determine other settings, including layers, grid spacing, linetypes, and layouts. Save the drawing template file ----- Save the file in the Template folder using a DWT file extension. You can create several drawing template files for different projects, and you can choose one when you click New. 166 | Chapter 6 Start a Drawing Quick Reference Commands NEW Creates a new drawing. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. SAVEAS Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name. System Variables MEASUREMENT Controls whether the current drawing uses imperial or metric hatch pattern and linetype files. Specify Units and Unit Formats Before you start to draw, you decide on the units of measurement to be used in the drawing, and set the format, precision, and other conventions to be used in coordinates and distances. Determine the Units of Measurement Before you start to draw, you must decide what one drawing unit represents based on what you plan to draw. You can convert a drawing between systems of measurement by scaling it. Every object you create is measured in drawing units. Before you start to draw, you must decide what one drawing unit will represent based on what you plan to draw. Then you create your drawing at actual size with that convention. For example, the objects in the illustration might represent two buildings that are each 125 feet long, or a section of a mechanical part that is measured in millimeters. Specify Units and Unit Formats | 167 Convert Drawing Units If you start a drawing in one system of measurement (imperial or metric) and then want to switch to the other system, use SCALE to scale the model geometry by the appropriate conversion factor to obtain correct distances and dimensions. For example, to convert a drawing created in inches to centimeters, you scale the model geometry by a factor of 2.54. To convert from centimeters to inches, the scale factor is 1/2.54 or about 0.3937. See also: ■ Set the Scale for Dimensions on page 1461 To convert a drawing from inches to centimeters 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Scale. 2 At the Select Objects prompt, enter all. All objects in the drawing are selected for scaling. 3 Enter a base point of *0,0. Scaling will be relative to the world coordinate system origin and the location of the drawing origin will remain at the WCS origin. 4 Enter a scale factor of 2.54 (there are 2.54 centimeters per inch). All objects in the drawing are now 2.54 times larger, corresponding to the equivalent distance in centimeters. To convert a drawing from centimeters to inches 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Scale. 168 | Chapter 6 Start a Drawing 2 At the Select Objects prompt, enter all. All objects in the drawing are selected for scaling. 3 Enter a base point of *0,0. Scaling is performed relative to the world coordinate system origin, and the location of the drawing origin will remain at the WCS origin. 4 Enter a scale factor of 0.3937 (the inverse of 2.54 centimeters per inch). All objects in the drawing are now smaller, corresponding to the equivalent distance in inches. Quick Reference Commands UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. SCALE Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the same after scaling. System Variables LUNITS Sets linear units. LUPREC Sets the display precision for linear units and coordinates. MEASUREINIT Controls whether a drawing you start from scratch uses imperial or metric default settings. MEASUREMENT Controls whether the current drawing uses imperial or metric hatch pattern and linetype files. UNITMODE Controls the display format for units. Determine the Units of Measurement | 169 Set the Unit Format Conventions You can set the format and the number of decimal places to be used when you enter and display linear and angular units. Set Linear Units You can choose from several common conventions to represent the format and the precision of linear distances and coordinates displayed in the Properties palette, dynamic input, the status bar, and other locations. For example, here are three variations of dynamic input. Set Angular Units You can specify that positive values of angles are measured either clockwise or counterclockwise, and the direction of angle 0 (usually East or North). You can enter angles using grads, radians, or surveyor's units or using degrees, minutes, and seconds. If you use surveyor's angles when specifying polar coordinates, indicate whether the surveyor's angles are in the north, south, east, or west direction. For example, to enter the relative coordinates for a property line that is 72 feet, 8 inches long with a bearing of 45 degrees north, 20 minutes, 6 seconds east, enter @72'8" /\“:;?*|=‘ In many cases, the layer names you choose are dictated by corporate, industry, or client standards. The Layer Properties Manager sorts layers alphabetically by name. If you organize your own layer scheme, choose layer names carefully. Use common prefixes to name layers with related drawing components, you can use wild-card characters in layer name filters when you need to find those layers quickly. Create and Name Layers | 479 NOTE If you consistently use a specific layering scheme, you can set up a drawing template with layers, linetypes, and colors already assigned. For more information about creating templates, see Use a Drawing Template File on page 171. Copy Layers from Another Drawing ™ You can use DesignCenter to copy layers from any drawing to another by dragging. For example, you might have a drawing that contains all the standard layers needed for a project. You can create a new drawing and use DesignCenter to drag the predefined layers to the new drawing, which saves you time and ensures consistency between drawings. You can also drag layers or copy layers by double-clicking or by clicking Insert on the shortcut menu. NOTE You need to resolve duplicate layer names before you drag layers from DesignCenter. Select a Layer to Draw On As you draw, newly created objects are placed on the current layer. The current layer may be the default layer (0) or a layer you create and name yourself. You switch from one layer to another by making a different layer current; any subsequent objects you create are associated with the new current layer and use its color, linetype, and other properties. You cannot make a layer the current layer if it is frozen or if it is an xref-dependent layer. Remove Layers You can remove unused layers from your drawing with PURGE or by deleting the layer from the Layer Properties Manager. You can delete only unreferenced layers. Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers containing objects (including objects in block definitions), the current layer, and xref-dependent layers. WARNING Be careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards. To create a new layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties. 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the New Layer button. 480 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects A layer name, such as LAYER1, is automatically added to the layer list. 3 Enter a new layer name by typing over the highlighted layer name. 4 To change the properties, click icons. When you click Color, Linetype, Lineweight, or Plot Style, a dialog box is displayed. 5 (Optional) Click in the Description column and enter text. 6 Click OK. To remove an unused layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties. 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, select the layer. Click the Delete Layer button. Layers that have objects assigned to them cannot be removed until those objects are reassigned to a different layer or are deleted. Layers 0 and DEFPOINTS and the current layer cannot be removed. 3 Click OK. To purge all unused layers 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Drawing Utilities panel ➤ Purge. The Purge dialog box displays a tree view of object types with items that can be purged (removed from the drawing). 2 To purge unreferenced layers, use one of the following methods: ■ To purge all unreferenced layers, select Layers. ■ To purge specific layers, double-click Layers to expand the tree view. Select the layers to be purged. 3 If the item you want to purge is not listed, select View Items You Cannot Purge, select the layer, and read the explanation. 4 You are prompted to confirm each item in the list. If you do not want to confirm each purge, clear the Confirm Each Item to Be Purged option. Create and Name Layers | 481 5 Click Purge. 6 To confirm the purging of each item, respond to the prompt by choosing Yes or No, or Yes to All if more than one item is selected. 7 Click Close. Quick Reference CLASSICLAYER Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LAYERPALETTE Opens the modeless Layer Properties Manager. PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. CLAYER Sets the current layer. LAYERDLGMODE Sets the flavor of the Layer Properties Manager that is defined for the use of the LAYER command. Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties You can change the name of a layer and any of its properties, including color and linetype, and you can reassign objects from one layer to another. Because everything in your drawing is associated with a layer, it's likely that in the course of planning and creating a drawing, you'll need to change what you place on a layer or how you view the layers in combination. You can ■ Reassign objects from one layer to another. ■ Change the name of a layer. ■ Change the default color, linetype, or other properties of the layer. 482 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects Reassigning an object to a different layer is useful if you create an object on the wrong layer or decide to change your layer organization. Unless the color, linetype, or other properties of the object have been set explicitly, an object that you reassign to a different layer will acquire the properties of that layer. You can change layer properties in the Layer Properties Manager and in the Layer control on the Layers toolbar. Click the icons to change settings. Layer names and colors can be changed only in the Layer Properties Manager, not the Layer control. Undo Changes to Layer Settings You can use Layer Previous to undo changes you make to layer settings. For example, if you freeze several layers and change some of the geometry in a drawing, and then want to thaw the frozen layers, you can do this with a single command without affecting the geometry changes. In another example, if you changed the color and linetype of several layers but later decide you prefer the old properties, you can use Layer Previous to undo the changes and restore the original layer settings. When you use Layer Previous, it undoes the most recent change or set of changes made using either the Layer control or the Layer Properties Manager. Every change you make to layer settings is tracked and can be undone with Layer Previous. You can use LAYERPMODE to suspend layer property tracking when you don't need it, such as when you run large scripts. There is a modest performance gain in turning off Layer Previous tracking. Layer Previous does not undo the following changes: ■ Renamed layers. If you rename a layer and change its properties, Layer Previous restores the original properties but not the original layer name. ■ Deleted layers. If you delete or purge a layer, using Layer Previous does not restore it. ■ Added layers. If you add a new layer to a drawing, using Layer Previous does not remove it. Changes in the Layer Properties Manager can be grouped by enabling Combine Layer Property Change option in User Preferences tab in the Options dialog box. Layer creation and deletion will be tracked in the Undo list as unique items. To change the layer of one or more objects 1 Select the objects whose layer you want to change. Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties | 483 2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 3 In the Layer Properties Manager, select the layer that you want to assign to the objects. 4 Press ESC to remove selection. To change the default linetype assigned to a layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers Panel ➤ Layer Properties . 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, select the linetype for the layer you want to change. 3 In the Select Linetype dialog box, if the linetype you need is not displayed, click Load and use one of the following methods: ■ In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, select one or more linetypes to load. Click OK to return to the Select Linetype dialog box. ■ In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, click File to open additional linetype definition (LIN) files. Select one or more linetypes to load. Click OK to return to the Select Linetype dialog box. 4 Select the linetype you want to use. Click OK to return to the Layer Properties Manager. 5 Click OK. To rename a layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, select a layer. Click the name or press F2. 3 Enter a new name. 4 Click OK. 484 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects To rename more than one layer 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Drawing Utilities panel ➤ Rename. 2 In the Rename dialog box, in the Named Objects list, select Layers. 3 In Old Name, enter the old name, using wild-card characters; for example, enter stairs$*. 4 In Rename To, enter the new name using wild-card characters; for example, enter s_*. Results for this example are as follows: the layers STAIR$LEVEL-1, STAIR$LEVEL-2, STAIR$LEVEL-3 are renamed S_LEVEL-1, S_LEVEL-2, S_LEVEL-3. 5 Click OK. Quick Reference CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects. CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. CLASSICLAYER Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LAYERP Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings. LAYERPALETTE Opens the modeless Layer Properties Manager. LAYERPMODE Turns on and off the tracking of changes made to layer settings. Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties | 485 PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. RENAME Changes the names assigned to items such as layers and dimension styles. SETBYLAYER Changes the property overrides of selected objects to ByLayer. CLAYER Sets the current layer. LAYERDLGMODE Sets the flavor of the Layer Properties Manager that is defined for the use of the LAYER command. LAYERMANAGERSTATE Indicates whether the Layer Properties Manager is open or closed. SETBYLAYERMODE Controls which properties are selected for the SETBYLAYER command. Override Layer Properties in Viewports You can display objects differently by setting property overrides for color, linetype, lineweight, transparency, and plot style and apply them to individual layout viewports. Using property overrides is an efficient way for displaying objects with different property settings in individual viewports without changing their ByLayer or ByBlock properties. For example, objects can be made to display more prominently by changing their color. Because layer property overrides do not change the layer’s global properties, you can have objects display differently in various viewports without having to create duplicate geometry or use xrefs that have different layer settings. 486 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects Property override settings for color and lineweight were set on the Wiring layer for the viewport on the left. Notice the wiring is a different color and lineweight than in the right viewport. When the Layer Properties Manager is accessed from a layout tab, five columns for layer property overrides are displayed ■ VP Color ■ VP Linetype ■ VP Lineweight ■ VP Transparency ■ VP Plot Style (available only in named-plot style drawings) When a property override is set for a layer, a Viewport Overrides filter is automatically created in the Layer Properties Manager. Override Layer Properties in Viewports | 487 If you do not want to display or plot property overrides, set the VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE system variable to 0. Objects will display and plot with their global layer properties. NOTE Property overrides can still be set even when VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE is set to 0. Property overrides that are on xref layers are not retained when the VISRETAIN system variable is set to 0. Viewport Property Overrides and Visual Styles Layer property overrides for color, linetype, and lineweights are displayed in viewports regardless of the visual style that is current. Although plot style overrides can be set when the visual style is set to Conceptual or Realistic style, they are not displayed or plotted. Identify Layers with Property Overrides Layers containing property overrides are identifiable in the Layer Properties Manager when accessed from a layout tab. You can see which layers have overrides by the following: ■ A background color displays for each layer name, override and corresponding global property setting. ■ A tooltip displays property override information when the cursor is placed over the status icon for the layer containing overrides. ■ A different icon displays in the Status column. ■ A predefined filter named Viewport Overrides is displayed in the tree view where all layers with viewport overrides are listed. Layers that are assigned property overrides are also identifiable outside of the Layer Properties Manager. Other areas of the user interface that indicate which layers are assigned property overrides are as follows: ■ Layers toolbar. A background color displays behind layer names for the current viewport. For color overrides, the override color is displayed instead of the global color. ■ Properties toolbar. Displays ByLayer (VP) and a background color for layers or objects that are assigned property overrides. Override properties are displayed for color, linetype, and lineweight instead of global properties. 488 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects ■ Layers panel on the ribbon. A background color displays behind the layer names in the Layer drop-down list. Override properties are displayed for color, linetype, and lineweight instead of global properties. ■ Properties panel on the ribbon. A background color displays behind the color, linetype, lineweight, and plot style controls. Override properties are displayed for color, linetype, and lineweight instead of global properties. ■ Properties palette. Displays ByLayer (VP) and a background color for layers or objects that are assigned property overrides. Override properties are displayed for color, linetype, and lineweight instead of global properties. NOTE The background color for viewport overrides can be changed in the Layer Settings dialog box. Property overrides that are set on the Lighting layer for the current viewport are indicated by a blue background color. Identify Viewports with Layer Property Overrides Use the VPLAYEROVERRIDES system variable to check if the current viewport contains layer property overrides. When VPLAYEROVERRIDES is equal to 1, the viewport contains overrides. You can also use the Properties palette to determine if a viewport contains overrides. The Properties palette displays a Layer Property Overrides field. The value that displays is the same as the setting for VPLAYEROVERRIDES. Override Layer Properties in Viewports | 489 Remove Layer Property Overrides When you right-click a layer in the Layer Properties Manager, a shortcut menu is displayed that lists options for removing property overrides. You can remove ■ A single property override from the selected layer for the selected viewport or for all selected viewports ■ All property overrides from the selected layer for the selected viewport or for all selected viewports ■ All property overrides from all layers in the selected viewport or for all selected viewports NOTE Another method for removing property overrides is to use the shortcut menu when you right-click the border of the selected viewport or viewports. You can remove viewport overrides for all layers for that viewport. To assign property overrides for the current layout viewport 1 On the layout tab, double-click inside a viewport to make it current. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 3 In the Layer Properties Manager, select the global properties to override in the VP Color, VP Linetype, VP Lineweight, and VP Plot Style columns. To remove an override from a layer for the current layout viewport 1 On the layout tab, double-click inside a viewport to make it current. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 3 In the Layer Properties Manager, right-click the property override on the layer you want to remove. 4 Click Remove Viewport Overrides For ➤ Property Override (Color, Linetype, Lineweight, Plot Style) ➤ In Current Viewport Only. To remove an override from a layer for all layout viewports 1 On the layout tab, double-click inside a viewport to make it current. 490 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects 2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 3 In the Layer Properties Manager, right-click the property override on the layer to remove. 4 Click Remove Viewport Overrides For ➤ Property Override (Color, Linetype, Lineweight, Plot Style) ➤ In All Viewports. To remove all overrides from a layer for the current layout viewport 1 On the layout tab, double-click inside a viewport to make it current. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 3 In the Layer Properties Manager, right-click the layer. 4 Click Remove Viewport Overrides For ➤ Selected Layers ➤ In Current Viewport Only. To remove all overrides for all layout viewports 1 Click a layout tab. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 3 In the Layer Properties Manager, select the Viewport Overrides filter. 4 Right-click on any layer. Click Remove Viewport Overrides For ➤ All Layers ➤ In All Viewports. To check if the current layout viewport contains layer property overrides 1 Double-click within a viewport to make it current. 2 At the Command prompt, enter vplayeroverrides. If VPLAYEROVERRIDES displays 1, the selected viewport contains layer viewport overrides. If 0 is displayed, no overrides are found. Override Layer Properties in Viewports | 491 To control the transparency of objects or layout viewports on a layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties. 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, enter a value between 0 and 90 in the Transparency or VP Transparency columns for each layer you want to make transparent. NOTE The VP Transparency column is only available when a Layout tab is active. 3 Press Enter. To not display or plot layer viewport overrides 1 At the Command prompt, enter vplayeroverridesmode. 2 Enter 0. To change the background color for property overrides 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click Settings. 3 In the Layer Settings dialog box, select a color for the viewport override background color. 4 Click OK. To save layer viewport overrides in a layer state 1 On a layout tab, double-click in a viewport to make it active. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer States Manager 3 In the Layer States Manager, click New. 4 In the New Layer State to Save dialog box, enter a name for the new layer state, or select a name from the list. (Optional) Add a description. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Close to exit the Layer State Manager. 492 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects Quick Reference CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. CLASSICLAYER Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LAYERP Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings. LAYERPALETTE Opens the modeless Layer Properties Manager. LAYERPMODE Turns on and off the tracking of changes made to layer settings. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. RENAME Changes the names assigned to items such as layers and dimension styles. CLAYER Sets the current layer. LAYERDLGMODE Sets the flavor of the Layer Properties Manager that is defined for the use of the LAYER command. VPLAYEROVERRIDES Indicates if there are any layers with viewport (VP) property overrides for the current layout viewport. Override Layer Properties in Viewports | 493 VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE Controls whether layer property overrides for layout viewports are displayed and plotted. Filter and Sort the List of Layers You can control which layer names are listed in the Layer Properties Manager and sort them by name or by property, such as color or visibility. A layer filter limits the display of layer names in the Layer Properties Manager and in the Layer control on the Layers toolbar. In a large drawing, you can use layer filters to display only the layers you need to work with. There are two kinds of layer filters ■ Layer property filter Includes layers that have names or other properties in common. For example, you can define a filter that includes all layers that are red and whose names include the letters mech. ■ Layer group filter Includes the layers that are put into the filter when you define it, regardless of their names or properties. Selected layers can be added from the layer list by dragging them to the filter. The tree view in the Layer Properties Manager displays default layer filters and any named filters that you create and save in the current drawing. The icon next to a layer filter indicates the type of filter. Five default filters are displayed ■ All. Displays all the layers in the current drawing. (Filter is always displayed.) ■ All Used. Displays all the layers on which objects in the current drawing are drawn. (Filter is always displayed.) ■ Xref. If xrefs are attached to the drawing, displays all the layers being referenced from other drawings. ■ Viewport Overrides. If there are layers with overrides for the current viewport, displays all layers containing property overrides. ■ Unreconciled New Layers. If new layers were added since the drawing was last opened, saved, reloaded, or plotted, displays a list of new unreconciled layers. See Reconcile New Layers on page 504 for more information. NOTE The default filters cannot be renamed, edited, or deleted. 494 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects Once you have named and defined a layer filter, you can select it in the tree view to display the layers in the list view. You can also apply the filter to the Layers toolbar, so that the Layer control displays only the layers in the current filter. When you select a filter in the tree view and right-click, options on the shortcut menu can be used to delete, rename, or modify filters. For example, you can convert a layer property filter to a layer group filter. You can also change a property of all layers in a filter. The Isolate Group option turns off all layers in the drawing that are not in the selected filter. Define a Layer Property Filter A layer property filter is defined in the Layer Filter Properties dialog box, where you select any of the following properties you want to include in the filter definition: ■ Layer names, colors, linetypes, lineweights, and plot styles ■ Whether layers are in use ■ Whether layers are turned on or off ■ Whether layers are frozen or thawed in the active viewport or all viewports ■ Whether layers are locked or unlocked ■ Whether layers are set to be plotted You use wild-card characters to filter layers by name. For example, if you want to display only layers that start with the letters mech, you can enter mech*. See “Wild-Card Characters” for a complete list. The layers in a layer property filter may change as the properties of the layers change. For example, if you define a layer property filter named Site that includes all layers with the letters site in the name and a CONTINUOUS linetype, and then you change the linetype of some of those layers, the layers with the new linetype are no longer part of the Site filter and are not displayed when you apply that filter. Layer property filters can be nested under other properties filters or under group filters. Define a Layer Group Filter A layer group filter includes only those layers that you explicitly assign to it. If the properties of the layers assigned to the filter change, the layers are still Filter and Sort the List of Layers | 495 part of the filter. Layer group filters can be nested only under other layer group filters. TIP Layers from the layer list can be included in a filter by clicking and dragging the selected layers to the filter. Invert a Layer Filter You can also invert a layer filter. For example, if all the site plan information in a drawing is contained in multiple layers that include the word site as part of the layer name, you can display all information except site plan information by first creating a filter definition that filters layers by name (*site*) and then using the Invert Filter option. Sort Layers Once you have created layers, you can sort them by name or other properties. In the Layer Properties Manager, click the column heading to sort layers by the property in that column. Layer names can be sorted in ascending or descending alphabetical order. Wild-Card Characters You can use wild-card characters to sort layers by name. Character Definition # (pound) Matches any numeric digit @ (at) Matches any alphabetic character . (period) Matches any nonalphanumeric character * (asterisk) Matches any string and can be used anywhere in the search string ? (question mark) Matches any single character; for example, ?BC matches ABC, 3BC, and so on ~ (tilde) Matches anything but the pattern; for example; ~*AB*matches all strings that don't contain AB [] Matches any one of the characters enclosed; for example, [AB]C matches AC and BC 496 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects Character Definition [~] Matches any character not enclosed; for example, [~AB]C matches XC but not AC [-] Specifies a range for a single character; for example, [A-G]C matches AC, BC, and so on to GC, but not HC ` (reverse quote) Reads the next character literally; for example, `~AB matches ~AB NOTE To filter on a layer name that contains a wild-card character, precede the character with a reverse quote (`) so that it is not interpreted as a wild-card character. See also: ■ Reconcile New Layers on page 504 To quickly filter the display of layers by name 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click in Search for Layer below the tree view. 3 (Optional) To limit your search, select a layer filter in the tree view. 4 Enter a string of characters, including wild-card characters. The list view displays all layers whose names match the string. For example, if you enter *mech*, all layers with the letters mech in their names are displayed. This quick filter is discarded when the Layer Properties Manager closes. To filter the display of layers by layer property 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the New Property Filter button. 3 In the Layer Filter Properties dialog box, enter a name for the filter. Filter and Sort the List of Layers | 497 4 Under Filter Definition, set the layer properties that you want to use to define the filter. ■ To filter by name, use wild-card characters. ■ To filter by property, click in the column for the property you want. Some properties display a dialog box when you click the [...] button. ■ To select more than one value for a property, right-click the row in the filter definition. Click Duplicate Row. Select another value for that property in the next row. For example, the definition for a filter that displays only layers that are on and are either yellow or red has two rows. The first row of the filter definition has the On icon and red. The second row has the On icon and yellow. 5 Click OK. To filter the display of layer names by selecting layers 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the New Group Filter button. A new layer group filter named GROUP FILTER1 is created in the tree view. 3 Enter a name for the filter. 4 In the tree view, click All or one of the other nodes to display layers in the list view. 5 In the list view, select the layers you want to add to the filter, and drag them to the filter name in the tree view. 6 Click OK. To nest a layer filter under another layer filter 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager tree view, select a layer filter. ■ A new layer property filter can be nested under a group filter or another property filter. 498 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects ■ A new layer group filter can be nested only under another group filter. 3 Right-click. Click New Properties Filter or New Group Filter. 4 Use one of the following methods: ■ For a new property filter, the Layer Properties Filter dialog box is displayed. Under Filter Definition, set the layer properties that you want to use to define the filter. Click OK. ■ For a new group filter, a filter is added to the tree view. Rename it, select the parent filter to display its layers in the list view, and drag layers from the list view to the new layer group filter. 5 Click OK. To sort the layer list in the Layer Properties Manager ■ Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties ■ In the Layer Properties Manager, click any column heading. To reverse the sorting order, click a second time. To remove a layer from a layer group filter 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager tree view, select a group filter. 3 Select the layer you want to remove. 4 Right-click in the list view. Click Remove from Group Filter. Quick Reference CLASSICLAYER Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. Filter and Sort the List of Layers | 499 LAYERPALETTE Opens the modeless Layer Properties Manager. LAYERDLGMODE Sets the flavor of the Layer Properties Manager that is defined for the use of the LAYER command. MAXSORT Sets the maximum number of symbol names or block names sorted by listing commands. Use New Layer Notification You can be notified when new layers are added to the drawing before certain tasks, such as plotting, saving, or restoring a layer state. It is important to be aware of new layers that have been added to a drawing or to an attached xref without your knowledge. You can avoid potential problems, such as plotting objects that were added to the drawing by the addition of a new layer. You can control when to evaluate a drawing for new layers. You can specify which commands, such as SAVE or PLOT, trigger the program to check the layer list and alert you of new layers. This can include new layers that have been added to attached xrefs. The LAYEREVAL and LAYERNOTIFY system variables work together to control whether the layer list is evaluated and when notification occurs. Both system variables are saved in the drawing so you have control over which drawings are checked for new layers. When a project is started, it may not be necessary to know when new layers have been created. For drawings that are nearing completion, it may be important to be aware if new information has been introduced into the drawing from the addition of new layers. The LAYEREVALCTL controls the overall Unreconciled New Layer filter list in the Layer Properties Manager which is evaluated for new layers. When the New Layer Notification is checked (LAYEREVALCTL = 1), the new layer notification feature is enabled and functions based on the LAYEREVAL and LAYERNOTIFY drawing system variables. There should be no filter (Unreconciled Layer filter) displayed when LAYEREVALCTL = 0. If one is currently displayed, it will be turned off. By default, LAYEREVAL is set to detect any new layers that have been added to attached xrefs but not in the drawing. LAYERNOTIFY is set to notify you 500 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects of new layers when opening the drawing, when loading, reloading, or attaching xrefs, or when restoring a layer state. To make changes to these settings, you can either use the system variables or the Layer Settings dialog box. When layer notification is turned on, an Unreconciled New Layers icon displays on the status bar. At that time, you can choose to view the new layers by right-clicking the icon and clicking the View Unreconciled New Layers link from the menu. When you click the link, the Layer Properties Manager opens, and the Unreconciled New Layers filter is automatically selected. All new layers that have been added to the drawing or attached xrefs are displayed in the list view. The new layers are unreconciled because they have not yet been reviewed. The process of manually marking them as reconciled removes them from the Unreconciled New Layers list. (See Reconcile New Layers on page 504 for more information.) Until you reconcile the layers, the notification bubble will display each time the command that triggered the notification is used. By using the LAYERNOTIFY system variable or the Layer Settings dialog box, you can turn off layer notification but still have the layer list evaluated for new layers. Although the notification bubble does not display, you can still check for new layers by right-clicking the alert icon on the status bar. From the shortcut menu, click the View Unreconciled New Layers option. New Layer Notification for Plotting When the PLOT command is set to display new layer notification in the Layer Settings dialog box, a dialog box is displayed instead of an icon on the status bar. A message informs you that there are new layers in the drawing since the layer list was last checked for new layers. Click Yes in the dialog box to view the new layer list in the Layer Properties Manager before plotting. Use New Layer Notification | 501 Saving a Template (DWT) File When saving a drawing as a template (DWT) file, you can choose to save the layers in the drawing as unreconciled or reconciled in the Template Options dialog box. By default, all layers are saved as unreconciled, so that when a new drawing is started using the template, a layer baseline is not yet created until the drawing is first saved as a DWG file. If the template file is saved with all layers as reconciled, a layer baseline is created. That means when new layers are added to the drawing that is created from the template file, any new layers that are created are unreconciled and a new layer notification will display when the drawing is first saved or plotted. Opening Multiple Drawings When opening multiple drawings at the same time, an alert displays for each drawing that contains new layers. This behavior occurs if layer notification is turned on and the OPEN command is specified in the LAYERNOTIFY system variable for each drawing. To set new layer notification on and off 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click Settings. 3 In the Layer Settings dialog box, click Evaluate New Layers Added to Drawing. 4 Click Notify When New Layers are Present. Select one or more options. 5 Click OK. 6 Click OK to exit the Layer Properties Manager. 502 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects To set when new layer notification is displayed 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click Settings. 3 In the Layer Settings dialog box, click Evaluate New Layers Added to Drawing. 4 Click Notify When New Layers are Present. 5 Select the commands that will cause the layer list to be evaluated for new layers. 6 Click OK. Quick Reference CLASSICLAYER Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LAYERPALETTE Opens the modeless Layer Properties Manager. LAYERDLGMODE Sets the flavor of the Layer Properties Manager that is defined for the use of the LAYER command. LAYEREVALCTL Controls the overall Unreconciled New Layer filter list in Layer Properties Manager which is evaluated for new layers. LAYERNOTIFY Specifies when an alert displays when unreconciled new layers are found. LAYEREVAL Specifies whether the layer list is evaluated for new layers when added to the drawing or to attached xrefs. Use New Layer Notification | 503 Reconcile New Layers Unreconciled layers are new layers that have been added to the drawing and have not yet been acknowledged by the user and manually marked as reconciled. Reconciling new layers is the process of manually reviewing new layers so that you can avoid potential errors before plotting your drawing or when restoring a layer state. Unreconciled layers are new layers that have been added to the drawing or to attached xrefs since the layer list was last evaluated. The layer list is checked for new layers when a command, such as PLOT is used. In new drawings, the layer baseline is created when the drawing is saved or plotted for the first time. When a new drawing is first saved, the layer baseline is created, and all layers present in the saved drawing are considered reconciled (not new). Layers that are added after a drawing is first saved are considered new unreconciled layers. NOTE The layer baseline is created when the LAYEREVAL system variable is set to 1 or 2. When a command that is set in the Layer Settings dialog box or LAYEREVAL system variable is used, the layer list is checked at that time and compared to the baseline. If there are new layers, notification will display and the Unreconciled New Layers filter is automatically created and activated in the Layer Properties Manager. Unreconciled layers become reconciled by right-clicking the layer and clicking the Reconcile Layer option. Once a layer has become reconciled, it is removed from the Unreconciled New Layers filter. After all new layers are reconciled, the Unreconciled New Layers filter is removed. NOTE You can reconcile multiple unreconciled layers at the same time. 504 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects Quick Reference CLASSICLAYER Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LAYERPALETTE Opens the modeless Layer Properties Manager. LAYERDLGMODE Sets the flavor of the Layer Properties Manager that is defined for the use of the LAYER command. LAYERNOTIFY Specifies when an alert displays when unreconciled new layers are found. LAYEREVAL Specifies whether the layer list is evaluated for new layers when added to the drawing or to attached xrefs. Work with Layer States You can save layer settings as named layer states. You can then restore, edit, import them from other drawings and files, and export them for use in other drawings. Save, Restore, and Edit Layer States You can save the current layer settings to a layer state, make changes to the layer state, and restore them to the drawing later. You can save the current layer settings in a drawing as a named layer state and restore them later. Saving layer settings is convenient if you need to return to particular settings for all layers during different stages in completing a drawing or for plotting. Save Layer Settings Layer settings include layer states, such as on or locked, and layer properties, such as color or linetype. In a named layer state, you can choose which layer Work with Layer States | 505 states and layer properties you want to restore later. For example, you can choose to restore only the Frozen/Thawed setting of the layers in a drawing, ignoring all other settings. When you restore that named layer state, all settings remain as they are currently set except whether each layer is frozen or thawed. Save Layer Property Override Settings When layers contain viewport property overrides, those settings are saved to a layer state when the viewport that contains overrides is active. If the layer state is saved from model space, any layer property override settings are not included. This is because only one value can be saved for each layer property in a layer state. If layer property overrides need to be saved in the layer state, make the viewport active on the layout tab and then save the layer state. Restore Layer Settings When you restore a layer state, the layer settings (layer states and layer properties) that were specified when the layer state was saved are restored. You can specify specific settings to restore in the Layer States Manager. The layer property settings that are not selected remain unchanged in the drawing. If the drawing contains layers that were added since a layer state was saved, you can add those layers. By editing the layer state and using the Select Layers to Add to Layer State dialog box you can select the layers you want to add to the layer state. NOTE To be notified when new layers are added to the drawing, use the LAYEREVAL and LAYERNOTIFY system variables. When restoring layer states, the following additional behaviors can occur ■ When restoring a layer state, the layer that was current when the layer state was saved is made current. If that layer no longer exists, the current layer does not change. ■ If a layout viewport is active when a layer state is restored, and the Visibility in Current VP restore option is selected, all layers that need to be visible in the viewport are turned on and thawed in model space. All layers that should not be visible in the viewport are set to VP Freeze in the current viewport and the model space visibility is unchanged. The Layers panel on the RIBBON contains controls for selecting and restoring saved layer states, including a button to access the Layer States Manager. The name of the last restored layer state is displayed in the Layers panel. When 506 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects the layers are modified so that the current layer state is no longer current, “Unsaved Layer State” is displayed instead of the name of the last restored layer state. Restore Property Override Settings When the Apply Properties as Viewport Overrides restore option is selected in the Layer States Manager, viewport overrides are restored to the viewport that is current at the time the layer state is restored. When a layer state is saved in model space and is restored in paper space, ■ You can choose whether color, linetype, lineweight, transparency, or plot style properties are restored as viewport overrides. ■ Viewport overrides are applied to the current layout viewport. ■ Layers that were turned off or frozen in model space are set to VP Freeze in the Layer Properties Manager for the active layout viewport. When a layer state is saved in paper space and is restored in model space, ■ Layer property overrides are restored as global layer properties in model space. ■ Layers that were frozen in a layout viewport are also frozen in model space. Edit Saved Layer Settings Using the Edit Layer State dialog box, you can modify the properties of each layer saved in a layer state. All properties other than the layer name can be edited. Properties for multiple layers can be changed at the same time. You can also add layers to a layer state through the Select Layers to Add to Layer State dialog box. For example, if new layers were added since the layer state was saved, you can add them and resave the layer state. To delete layers, use the Delete button in the Edit Layer State dialog box. Layer States in Xrefs When a drawing containing layer states is inserted in the host drawing, the xref layer states are displayed in the Layer States Manager. The layer states are listed by name and can be viewed in the Edit Layer State dialog box. When an xref containing layer states is attached to the host drawing, those layer states are also listed in the Layer States Manager. Although they can be Work with Layer States | 507 restored, they cannot be edited. Xref layer states are identifiable because the layer state name is preceded by the xref drawing’s name and separated by a double underscore symbol. (Example: Xref Name__Layer State Name.) When the xref is bound to the host drawing, layer states are identifiable by $0$ that displays between the xref name and layer state name. (Example: Xref Name$0$Layer State Name.) Layer states from nested xrefs are also included. Layer states from xrefs are removed from the host drawing when the xref is detached or unloaded. To save layer settings in a named layer state 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State. 2 In the Layer States drop-down list, click New Layer State. 3 In the New Layer State to Save dialog box, enter a name for the new layer state, or select a name from the list. 4 (Optional) Add a description. 5 Click Close. 6 In the Layer States Manager, select the layer properties to restore by default. 7 (Optional) Select the Turn Off New Layers Not Found in Layer State option. When this option is selected and you restore a named layer state, the drawing looks the same way it did when the named layer state was saved. 8 Click Close to exit the Layer States Manager. To restore a layer state 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State. 2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States. 3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, select a named layer state. 4 Click More to select any specific layer properties you want to restore. 5 Click Restore. To add layers to a layer state 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State. 508 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects 2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States. 3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, select the named layer state that you want to add layers to. 4 Click Edit. 5 In the Edit Layer State dialog box, click Add. 6 In the Select Layers to Add to Layer State dialog box, select the layers you want to add. 7 Click OK. 8 Click OK to exit the Edit Layer State dialog box. 9 Click Close to exit the Layer States Manager. To delete layers from a layer state 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State. 2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States. 3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, select the named layer state you want to delete layers from. 4 Click Edit. 5 In the Edit Layer State dialog box, select the layers to delete and click the Delete button. 6 Click OK. 7 Click OK to exit the Edit Layer State dialog box. 8 Click Close to exit the Layer States Manager. To include description and material properties to a layer state imported from a previous release 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State. 2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States. 3 In the Layer States Manager, select the layer state that was imported from a previous release. 4 Click Restore to restore the layer state. Work with Layer States | 509 5 Open the Layer States Manager. Click New. 6 In the New Layer State to Save dialog box, enter a new name for the layer state. In the Description field, enter descriptive text about the layer settings. 7 Click OK. 8 (Optional) Click Delete to remove the legacy layer state. 9 Click Close. Description and material properties are saved with the updated layer state. To select a layer state to restore 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State. 2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States. 3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, select the layer state you want to restore. 4 Click More and select any specific layer properties you want to restore. 5 Click Restore. The Layer States Manager closes. Quick Reference LAYERSTATE Saves, restores, and manages named layer states. LAYERNOTIFY Specifies when an alert displays when unreconciled new layers are found. LAYEREVAL Specifies whether the layer list is evaluated for new layers when added to the drawing or to attached xrefs. Import and Export Layer States You can import layer settings from other drawings and export layer states. 510 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects You can import layer states that are saved in drawing files (DWG, DWS, and DWT) and from layer state (LAS) files. When importing layer states from a drawing file, you can choose multiple layer states to import from the Select Layer States dialog box. When exporting layer states, they are created as LAS files. If the layer state is imported from a drawing and it contains a layer property, such as a linetype or plot style that is not loaded or available in the current drawing, that property is automatically imported from the source drawing. If the layer state is imported from an LAS file, and it contains linetype or plot style properties that do not exist in the drawing, a message is displayed notifying that the property could not be restored. NOTE When a layer state contains more than one property that cannot be restored from an LAS file, the message that displays only indicates the first property it encountered that cannot be restored. When importing a layer state from an LAS file or from another drawing that are duplicates of layer states in the current drawing, you can choose to overwrite the existing layer state or not import it. Layer states can be imported into a previous release of the program. Layer States from LMAN Layer states that were created using the LMAN Express Tool cannot be imported. A message is displayed that there are no layer states to import. You can access LMAN layer states in a drawing through the Layer States Manager. When the Layer States Manager is first opened in a drawing containing LMAN layer states, they are automatically converted to AutoCAD layer states. A dialog box displays the number of layer states that have been converted. When the current drawing does not contain any named layer states, the LMAN layer state names are retained. If the current drawing contains layer states, LMAN layer state names display with the prefix “LMAN” followed by the original layer state name. Work with Layer States | 511 To import saved layer settings from another drawing 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State. 2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States. 3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, click Import. 4 In the Import Layer State dialog box, select a file name with a .dwg, .dws, or .dwt file name extension. Click Open. 5 In the Select Layer States dialog box, select the layer states to import. Click OK. 6 To restore the named layer state now, select it in the Layer States Manager. and click Restore. Click Close to not restore it. If you restore the named layer state, the Layer States Manager closes. 7 Click Close to exit the Layer States Manager. To import saved layer settings from a layer state (LAS) file 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State. 2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States. 3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, click Import. 4 In the Import Layer State dialog box, select the LAS file you want to import layer states from. Click Open. 5 Click Yes to restore the named layer state now. Click No to add it to the Layer States Manager without restoring it. If you restore the named layer state, the Layer States Manager closes. 6 Click Close to exit the Layer States Manager. To export a saved layer state 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State. 2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States. 3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, select the named layer state (LAS) file you want to export. Click Export. 4 In the Export Layer State dialog box, specify where to export the layer state file. 512 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects 5 Click Save to exit the dialog box. 6 Click Close to exit the Layer States Manager. Quick Reference LAYERSTATE Saves, restores, and manages named layer states. LAYERNOTIFY Specifies when an alert displays when unreconciled new layers are found. LAYEREVAL Specifies whether the layer list is evaluated for new layers when added to the drawing or to attached xrefs. Work with Colors Color helps to group objects visually. You can assign colors to objects by layer or individually. Set the Current Color You can use color to help you identify objects visually. You can assign the color of an object either by layer or by specifying its color explicitly, independent of layer. Assigning colors by layer makes it easy to identify each layer within your drawing. Assigning colors explicitly provides additional distinctions between objects on the same layer. Color is also used as a way to indicate lineweight for color-dependent plotting. You can use a variety of color palettes when assigning color to objects, including ■ AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) ■ True Color , PANTONE ■ RAL™ Classic and RAL Design color books ■ DIC Color Guide ® ® ® Work with Colors | 513 ■ Colors from imported color books. ACI Colors ACI colors are the standard colors used in AutoCAD. Each color is identified by an ACI number, an integer from 1 through 255. Standard color names are available only for colors 1 through 7. The colors are assigned as follows: 1 Red, 2 Yellow, 3 Green, 4 Cyan, 5 Blue, 6 Magenta, 7 White/Black. True Colors True colors use 24-bit color definitions to display over 16 million colors. When specifying true colors, you can use either an RGB or HSL color model. With the RGB color model, you can specify the red, green, and blue components of the color; with the HSL color model, you can specify the hue, saturation, and luminance aspects of the color. Color Books This program includes several standard Pantone color books. You can also import other color books such as the DIC color guide or RAL color sets. Importing user-defined color books can further expand your available color selections. NOTE Pantone has provided new color definitions for Architectural & Interiors Cotton and Architectural & Interiors Paper color books. If you used these color books in releases prior to AutoCAD 2006, you may notice subtle changes in the colors. You install color books on your system by using the Files tab in the Options dialog box. Once a color book is loaded, you can select colors from the color book and apply them to objects in your drawings. All objects are created using the current color, which is displayed in the Color control on the Properties toolbar. You can also set the current color with the Color control or the Select Color dialog box. If the current color is set to BYLAYER, objects are created with the color assigned to the current layer. If you do not want the current color to be the color assigned to the current layer, you can specify a different color. If the current color is set to BYBLOCK, objects are created using color 7 (white or black) until the objects are grouped into a block. When the block is inserted into the drawing, it acquires the current color setting. 514 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects To set an ACI color for all new objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Object Color. 2 In the Object Color drop-down list, click a color to draw all new objects in that color, or click Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box and do one of the following: ■ On the Index Color tab, click a color or enter the color name or number in the Color box. ■ On the Index Color tab, click BYLAYER to draw new objects in the color assigned to the current layer. ■ On the Index Color tab, click BYBLOCK to draw new objects in the current color until they are grouped into a block. When the block is inserted into the drawing, the objects in the block acquire the current color setting. 3 Click OK. The Color control displays the current color. To set a true color for all new objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Object Color. 2 In the Object Color drop-down list. click Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box. 3 In the Select Color dialog box, True Color tab, do one of the following: ■ Select the HSL color model in the Color Model box. Specify a color by entering a color value in the Color box or by specifying values in the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance boxes. ■ Select the RGB color model in the Color Model box. Specify a color by entering a color value in the Color box or by specifying values in the Red, Green, and Blue boxes. 4 Click OK. The Color control displays the current color. Set the Current Color | 515 To set a color from a color book for all new objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Object Color. 2 In the Object Color drop-down list, click Select Color. 3 In the Select Color dialog box, Color Book tab, select a color book from the Color Book box. 4 Select a color by clicking on a color chip. To browse through the color book, use the up and down arrows on the color slider. 5 Click OK. The Color control displays the current color. Quick Reference COLOR Sets the color for new objects. CECOLOR Sets the color of new objects. Change the Color of an Object You can change the color of an object by reassigning it to another layer, by changing the color of the layer the object is on, or by specifying a color for the object explicitly. You have three choices for changing the color of an object: ■ Reassign the object to another layer with a different color. If an object's color is set to BYLAYER, and you reassign the object to a different layer, it acquires its color from the new layer. ■ Change the color assigned to the layer that the object is on. If an object's color is set to BYLAYER, it acquires the color of its layer. When you change the color assigned to a layer, all objects on that layer assigned the BYLAYER color are updated automatically. ■ Specify a color for an object to override the layer's color. You can specify the color of each object explicitly. If you want to override the 516 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects layer-determined color of an object with a different one, change an existing object's color from BYLAYER to a specific color, such as red. If you want to set a specific color for all subsequently created objects, change the current color setting on the Properties toolbar from BYLAYER to a specific color. See also: ■ Override Layer Properties in Viewports on page 486 To change the layer of an object 1 Select the objects whose layer you want to change. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties. 3 In the Layers Properties Manager, click the Layer control. 4 Select the layer that you want to assign to the objects. To change the color assigned to a layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties. 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the color you want to change. 3 In the Select Color dialog box, do one of the following: ■ On the Index tab, click a color or enter the ACI color number (1-255) or name in the Color box. Click OK. ■ On the True Color tab, select the HSL color model in the Color Model option and specify a color by entering a color value in the Color box or by specifying values in the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance boxes. Click OK. ■ On the Color Books tab, select a color book from the Color Book box; select a color by navigating the color book (using the up and down arrows) and clicking on a color chip. Click OK. 4 Click OK to close each dialog box. Change the Color of an Object | 517 To change the color of objects, overriding the layer's color 1 Select the objects whose color you want to change. 2 Click View tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Properties. Alternatively, you can right-click one of the objects and then, click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, select Color. An arrow is displayed in the right column. 4 Click the arrow and select a color from the list or click Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box. If you click Select Color, do one of the following: ■ On the Index tab, click a color or enter the ACI color number (1-255) or name in the Color box. ■ On the True Color tab, select the HSL color model in the Color Model option and specify a color by entering a color value in the Color box or by specifying values in the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance boxes. Click OK. ■ On the True Color tab, select the RGB color model in the Color Model box. Specify a color by entering a color value in the Color box or by specifying values in the Red, Green, and Blue boxes. ■ On the Color Books tab, select a color book from the Color Book box; select a color by navigating the color book (using the up and down arrows) and clicking on a color chip. Click OK. Quick Reference CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects. CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. COLOR Sets the color for new objects. 518 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. CECOLOR Sets the color of new objects. Use Color Books When assigning colors to objects, you can choose colors from color books that are loaded on your system. You can choose from a wide range of custom colors when using color books. Color books include third-party or user-defined files that contain named color swatches. These colors can be used to enhance presentation drawings as well as to optimize the variety of color used in your drawings. You can apply color book colors to objects in your drawings by using the Color Books tab in the Select Color dialog box. Install Color Books Color book files must contain an .acb file extension in order to be recognized by this program. To access color book colors from the Select Color dialog box, you must first copy your color book files to a specified color book location. On the Files tab of the Options dialog box, you can define the path where color book files are stored. Multiple locations can be defined for the color book path. These locations are saved in your user profile. After loading a color book on your system, to access the new colors, you need to close the Select Color dialog box and then open it again. The new color book is displayed in the Color Book drop-down list on the Color Books tab. Once you have loaded a color book, you can apply any colors that are defined in the book to objects in your drawing. Browse Color Books Color books are organized alphabetically into pages that you can browse through. A page holds up to ten colors. If the color book you are browsing through is not organized into pages, the colors are arranged into pages, with each page containing up to seven colors. To install a color book 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. Use Color Books | 519 2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, click Color Book Locations. 3 Click Add to add a color book location. 4 Enter the new location in the blank path box. 5 Click OK. To search for color swatches within a color book 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Object Color. 2 In the Object Color drop-down list, click Select Color. 3 In the Select Color dialog box, Color Books tab, select a color book from the Color Book drop-down list. You must first select any color swatch in the color book in order to activate the Color edit box. 4 Under Color, enter the number of the color swatch you would like to locate and press Tab. The Color edit box and the New color chip display the requested color or the color that is the closest match. 5 Click OK to apply the color. To change the default location of color book files 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, double-click Color Book Locations. 3 Select the following default color book location: C:\Program Files\[current AutoCAD release number]\support\color 4 Click the location name to edit the path. 5 Enter the new location in the path box. 6 Click OK. 520 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects To define multiple folders for the color book path 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, click Color Book Locations. 3 Click Add to add a color book location. 4 Enter the new location in the blank path box. 5 Click OK. Quick Reference CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects. CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. COLOR Sets the color for new objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. CECOLOR Sets the color of new objects. Work with Linetypes You can use linetypes to distinguish objects from one another visually and make your drawing easier to read. Overview of Linetypes A linetype is a repeating pattern of dashes, dots, and blank spaces displayed in a line or a curve. You assign linetypes to objects either by layer or by specifying the linetype explicitly, independent of layers. Work with Linetypes | 521 In addition to choosing a linetype, you can set its scale to control the size of the dashes and spaces, and you can create your own custom linetypes. NOTE These linetypes should not be confused with the hardware linetypes provided by some plotters. The two types of dashed lines produce similar results. Do not use both types at the same time, however, because the results can be unpredictable. Some linetype definitions include text and symbols. You can define a custom linetype that will orient the imbedded text to keep it readable automatically. For more information about controlling text in linetypes, see Text in Custom Linetypes. See also: ■ “Custom Linetypes” in the Customization Guide Quick Reference LINETYPE Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. REVERSE Reverses the vertices of selected lines, polylines, splines, and helixes, which is useful for linetypes with included text, or wide polylines with differing beginning and ending widths. 522 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects Load Linetypes At the start of a project, you load the linetypes that are required for the project so that they are available when you need them. If you want to know what linetypes are already available, you can display a list of linetypes that are loaded in the drawing or stored in an LIN (linetype definition) file. This program includes the linetype definition files acad.lin and acadiso.lin. Which linetype file is appropriate depends on whether you use imperial or metric measurements. ■ For imperial units, use the acad.lin file. ■ For metric measurements, use the acadiso.lin file. Both linetype definition files contain several complex linetypes. If you select a linetype whose name begins with ACAD_ISO, you can use the ISO pen-width option when you plot. You can remove unreferenced linetype information with PURGE or by deleting the linetype from the Linetype Manager. BYBLOCK, BYLAYER, and CONTINUOUS linetypes cannot be removed. To load a linetype 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype. 2 In the Linetype drop-down list, click Other. Then, in the Linetype Manager dialog box, click Load. 3 In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, select a linetype. Click OK. If the linetype you need is not listed, click File. In the Select Linetype File dialog box, select an LIN file whose linetypes you want to list and click. The dialog box displays the linetype definitions stored in the selected LIN file. Select a linetype. Click OK. You can hold down Ctrl to select several linetypes or SHIFT to select a range of linetypes. 4 Click OK. Load Linetypes | 523 To list the linetypes loaded in the current drawing 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype. 2 Click anywhere outside the box to close it. To list the linetypes in a linetype definition file 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype. 2 In the Linetype drop-down list, click Other. Then, in the Linetype Manager dialog box, click Load. 3 In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, click File. 4 In the Select Linetype File dialog box, select an LIN (linetype definition) file whose linetypes you want to lit. Click Open. The dialog box displays the linetype definitions stored in the selected LIN file. 5 In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, click Cancel. 6 Click Cancel to close the Linetype Manager. To unload an unused linetype 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype. 2 In the Linetype drop-down list, click Other. Then, in the Linetype Manager dialog box, select a linetype. Click Delete. The selected linetype is unloaded. Certain linetypes cannot be unloaded: BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, CONTINUOUS, and any linetypes currently in use. To purge an unused linetype 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Drawing Utilities panel ➤ Purge. The Purge dialog box displays a tree view of object types with items that can be purged. 524 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects 2 To purge unreferenced linetypes, use one of the following methods: ■ To purge all unreferenced linetypes, select Linetypes. ■ To purge specific linetypes, double-click Linetypes to expand the tree view. Then select the linetypes to be purged. If the item you want to purge is not listed, select View Items You Cannot Purge. 3 You are prompted to confirm each item in the list. If you do not want to confirm each purge, clear the Confirm Each Item to Be Purged option. 4 Click Purge. To confirm the purging of each item, respond to the prompt by choosing Yes or No, or Yes to All if more than one item is selected. 5 Click Close. Quick Reference LINETYPE Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. RENAME Changes the names assigned to items such as layers and dimension styles. MEASUREINIT Controls whether a drawing you start from scratch uses imperial or metric default settings. MEASUREMENT Controls whether the current drawing uses imperial or metric hatch pattern and linetype files. Set the Current Linetype All objects are created using the current linetype, which is displayed in the Linetype control on the Properties toolbar. Set the Current Linetype | 525 You can also set the current linetype with the Linetype control. If the current linetype is set to BYLAYER, objects are created with the linetype assigned to the current layer. If the current linetype is set to BYBLOCK, objects are created using the CONTINUOUS linetype until the objects are grouped into a block. When the block is inserted into the drawing, those objects acquire the current linetype setting. If you do not want the current linetype to be the linetype assigned to the current layer, you can specify a different linetype explicitly. The program does not display the linetype of certain objects: text, points, viewports, hatches, and blocks. To set the linetype for all new objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype. 2 In the Linetype drop-down list, click Other. Then, in the Linetype Manager dialog box, click Load. You can hold down Ctrl to select several linetypes or SHIFT to select a range of linetypes. 3 In the Linetype Manager dialog box, do one of the following: ■ Select a linetype and select Current to draw all new objects with that linetype. ■ Select BYLAYER to draw new objects in the linetype assigned to the current layer. ■ Select BYBLOCK to draw new objects in the current linetype until they are grouped into a block. When the block is inserted into a drawing, the objects in the block acquire the current linetype setting. 4 Click OK. NOTE The Linetype control displays the current linetype. If the linetype you want to use is already loaded, you can click the Linetype control and click the linetype to make it current. 526 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects To change the linetype assigned to a layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties. 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, select the linetype name you want to change. 3 In the Select Linetype dialog box, select the linetype you want. Click OK. 4 Click OK again. Quick Reference LINETYPE Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. CELTYPE Sets the linetype of new objects. Change the Linetype of an Object You can change the linetype of an object by reassigning it to another layer, by changing the linetype of the layer the object is on, or by specifying a linetype for the object explicitly. You have three choices for changing the linetype of an object: ■ Reassign the object to another layer with a different linetype. If an object's linetype is set to BYLAYER, and you reassign the object to a different layer, it acquires its linetype from the new layer. ■ Change the linetype assigned to the layer that the object is on. If an object's linetype is set to BYLAYER, it acquires the linetype of its layer. When you change the linetype assigned to a layer, all objects on that layer assigned the BYLAYER linetype are updated automatically. ■ Specify a linetype for an object to override the layer's linetype. You can specify the linetype of each object explicitly. If you want to override the layer-determined linetype of an object with a different one, change an existing object's linetype from BYLAYER to a specific linetype, such as DASHED. Change the Linetype of an Object | 527 If you want to set a specific linetype for all subsequently created objects, change the current linetype setting on the Properties toolbar from BYLAYER to a specific linetype. See also: ■ Override Layer Properties in Viewports on page 486 To change the default linetype assigned to a layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties. 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, select the linetype name you want to change. 3 In the Select Linetype dialog box, select a linetype. If the linetype you need is not listed, click Load. Select a linetype and click OK, or click File to open additional linetype definition (LIN) files. 4 Click OK to exit each dialog box. To change the linetype of an object, overriding the layer's linetype 1 Select the objects whose linetype you want to change. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 3 On the Properties palette, click the Linetype control. 4 Choose the linetype that you want to assign to the objects. 528 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects Quick Reference CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects. CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LINETYPE Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Control Linetype Scale You can use the same linetype at different scales by changing the linetype scale factor either globally or individually for each object. By default, both global and individual linetype scales are set to 1.0. The smaller the scale, the more repetitions of the pattern are generated per drawing unit. For example, with a setting of 0.5, two repetitions of the pattern in the linetype definition are displayed for each drawing unit. Short line segments that cannot display one full linetype pattern are displayed as continuous. You can use a smaller linetype scale for lines that are too short to display even one dash sequence. The Linetype Manager displays the Global Scale Factor and Current Object Scale. ■ The Global Scale Factor value controls the LTSCALE system variable, which changes the linetype scale globally for both new and existing objects. ■ The Current Object Scale value controls the CELTSCALE system variable, which sets the linetype scale for new objects. The CELTSCALE value is multiplied by the LTSCALE value to get the displayed linetype scale. You can easily change linetype scales in your drawing either individually or globally. Control Linetype Scale | 529 In a layout, you can adjust the scaling of linetypes in different viewports with PSLTSCALE. To change the linetype scale of selected objects 1 Select the objects whose linetype scale you want to change. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. Alternatively, right-click one of the objects. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, select Linetype Scale and enter the new value. To set the linetype scale for new objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype. 2 In the Linetype drop-down list, select Other. 3 In the Linetype Manager, click Show Details to expand the dialog box. 4 Enter a new value for Current Object Scale. 5 Click OK. To change linetype scale globally 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype. 2 In the Linetype Manager, click Show Details to expand the dialog box. 3 Enter a new value for Global Scale Factor. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference LINETYPE Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. 530 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects CELTSCALE Sets the current object linetype scaling factor. LTSCALE PSLTSCALE Controls the linetype scaling of objects displayed in paper space viewports. Display Linetypes on Short Segments and Polylines You can center the pattern of a linetype on each segment of a polyline, and you can control how the linetype is displayed on short segments. If a line is too short to hold even one dash sequence, the result is a continuous line between the endpoints, as shown below. You can accommodate short segments by using a smaller value for their individual linetype scales. For more information, see Control Linetype Scale on page 529. For polylines, you can specify whether a linetype pattern is centered on each segment or is continuous across vertices throughout the entire length of the polyline. You do this by setting the PLINEGEN system variable. To set the linetype display for all new polylines 1 At the Command prompt, enter plinegen. Display Linetypes on Short Segments and Polylines | 531 2 Enter 1 to make the linetype pattern continue throughout the entire length of two-dimensional polylines, or enter 0 to center the linetype pattern on each segment. To change the linetype display of existing polylines 1 Select the polyline whose linetype display you want to change. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, click Linetype Generation and select Enabled or Disabled. Quick Reference PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. PLINEGEN Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices of a 2D polyline. Control Lineweights You can control the thickness of an object’s lines in both the drawing display and plotting. Overview of Lineweights Lineweights are width values that are assigned to graphical objects as well as some types of text. Using lineweights, you can create heavy and thin lines to show cuts in sections, depth in elevations, dimension lines and tick marks, and differences in details. For example, by assigning varying lineweights to different layers, you can easily differentiate between new, existing, and demolition construction. Lineweights are not displayed unless the LWT button on the status bar is selected. TrueType fonts, raster images, points, and solid fills (2D solids) cannot display lineweight. Wide polylines show lineweights only when displayed outside of 532 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects the plan view. You can export drawings to other applications or cut objects to the Clipboard and retain lineweight information. In model space, lineweights are displayed in pixels and do not change when zoomed in or out. Thus, you should not use lineweights to represent the exact width of an object in model space. For example, if you want to draw an object with a real-world width of 0.5 inches, do not use a lineweight; instead, use a polyline with a width of 0.5 inches to represent the object. You can also plot objects in your drawing with custom lineweight values. Use the Plot Style Table Editor to adjust the fixed lineweight values to plot at a new value. Lineweight Scale in Drawings Objects with a lineweight are plotted with the exact width of the assigned lineweight value. The standard settings for these values include BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and Default. They are displayed in either inches or millimeters, with millimeters being the default. All layers are initially set to 0.25 mm, controlled by the LWDEFAULT system variable. A lineweight value of 0.025 mm or less is displayed as one pixel in model space and is plotted at the thinnest lineweight available on the specified plotting device. Lineweight values that you enter at the Command prompt are rounded to the nearest predefined value. You set the lineweight units and the default value in the Lineweight Settings dialog box. You can access the Lineweight Settings dialog box by using the LWEIGHT command, by right-clicking the LWT button on the status bar and choosing Settings, or by choosing Lineweight Settings on the User Preferences tab in the Options dialog box. See also: ■ Draw Polylines on page 649 To assign width to polylines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline. 2 Specify the start point for the first segment in the polyline. 3 Enter w (width). 4 Enter a value for the width at the start of the line segment. Overview of Lineweights | 533 5 Enter a value for the width at the end of the line segment. 6 Specify the endpoint of the first segment of the polyline. 7 Enter w to specify different widths for the next segment, or press Enter to end the command. To assign a lineweight to a layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties. 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, select a layer. Click the lineweight associated with that layer. 3 In the Lineweight dialog box, select a lineweight from the list. 4 Click OK to close each dialog box. To set the display scale of lineweights on the Model tab 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Lineweight. 2 In the Lineweight drop-down list, select Lineweight Settings. 3 In the Lineweight Settings dialog box, under Adjust Display Scale, move the slider to change the scale. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference LWEIGHT Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units. PLINE Creates a 2D polyline. LWDEFAULT Sets the value for the default lineweight. 534 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects LWDISPLAY Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed. LWUNITS Controls whether lineweight units are displayed in inches or millimeters. Display Lineweights Lineweights can be turned on and off in a drawing, and are displayed differently in model space than in a paper space layout. ■ In model space, a 0-value lineweight is displayed as one pixel, and other lineweights use a pixel width proportional to their real-unit value. ■ In a paper space layout, lineweights are displayed in the exact plotting width. Regeneration time increases with lineweights that are represented by more than one pixel. Turn off the display of lineweights to optimize performance of the program. You can turn the display of lineweights on or off by clicking LWT on the status bar. This setting does not affect the plotting of lineweights. Display Lineweights in Model Space Lineweight display in model space does not change with the zoom factor. For example, a lineweight value that is represented by a width of four pixels is always displayed using four pixels regardless of how far you zoom in. If you want the lineweights on objects to appear thicker or thinner on the Model tab, use LWEIGHT to set their display scale. Changing the display scale does not affect the lineweight plotting value. In model space, weighted lines that are joined form a beveled joint with no end caps. You can use plot styles to apply different joins and endcap styles to objects with lineweights. NOTE Different styles of endcaps and joins of objects with lineweight are displayed only in a full plot preview. Display Lineweights | 535 Display Lineweights in Layouts In layouts and plot preview, lineweights are displayed in real-world units, and lineweight display changes with the zoom factor. You can control lineweight plotting and scaling in your drawing in the Plot dialog box, Plot Settings tab. To display or hide lineweights Use one of the following methods: ■ Click LWT on the status bar. ■ Select or clear Display Lineweight in the Lineweight Settings dialog box. ■ Set the LWDISPLAY system variable to 0 or 1. Quick Reference LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LWEIGHT Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units. PEDIT Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. PLINE Creates a 2D polyline. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. LWDEFAULT Sets the value for the default lineweight. LWDISPLAY Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed. LWUNITS Controls whether lineweight units are displayed in inches or millimeters. PLINEWID Stores the default polyline width. 536 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects Set the Current Lineweight The current lineweight is the lineweight used for any objects you draw until you make another lineweight current. All objects are created using the current lineweight, which is displayed in the Lineweight control on the Properties toolbar. You can also set the current lineweight with the Lineweight control. If the current lineweight is set to BYLAYER, objects are created with the lineweight assigned to the current layer. If the current lineweight is set to BYBLOCK, objects are created using the default lineweight setting until the objects are grouped into a block. When the block is inserted into the drawing, it acquires the current lineweight setting. If you do not want the current lineweight to be the lineweight assigned to the current layer, you can specify a different lineweight explicitly. Objects in drawings created in an earlier release of AutoCAD are assigned the lineweight value of BYLAYER, and all layers are set to DEFAULT. Lineweight assigned to objects is displayed as a solid fill drawn in the object's assigned color. To make a lineweight current for creating objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Lineweight. 2 In the Lineweight drop-down list, select Lineweight Settings. 3 In the Lineweight Settings dialog box, select a lineweight. 4 Click OK. NOTE To display the lineweight at its current setting, the Display Lineweight option must be selected in the Display Lineweight dialog box. Quick Reference LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LWEIGHT Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units. Set the Current Lineweight | 537 PEDIT Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. PLINE Creates a 2D polyline. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. LWDEFAULT Sets the value for the default lineweight. LWDISPLAY Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed. LWUNITS Controls whether lineweight units are displayed in inches or millimeters. PLINEWID Stores the default polyline width. Change the Lineweight of an Object You can change the lineweight of an object by reassigning it to another layer, by changing the lineweight of the layer the object is on, or by specifying a lineweight for the object explicitly. You have three choices for changing the lineweight of an object: ■ Reassign the object to another layer with a different lineweight. If an object's lineweight is set to BYLAYER, and you reassign the object to a different layer, it acquires its lineweight from the new layer. ■ Change the lineweight assigned to the layer that the object is on. If an object's lineweight is set to BYLAYER, it acquires the lineweight of its layer. When you change the lineweight assigned to a layer, all objects on that layer assigned the BYLAYER lineweight are updated automatically. ■ Specify a lineweight for an object to override the layer's lineweight. You can specify the lineweight of each object explicitly. If you want to override the layer-determined lineweight of an object with a different one, change an existing object's lineweight from BYLAYER to a specific lineweight. 538 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects If you want to set a specific lineweight for all subsequently created objects, change the current lineweight setting on the Properties toolbar from BYLAYER to a specific lineweight. See also: ■ Override Layer Properties in Viewports on page 486 To change the line width of a polyline, donut, rectangle, or polygon 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Polyline. 2 Select one or more polyline objects. 3 Enter w (Width) and enter a new width for all segments. 4 Press Enter to end the command. Quick Reference LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LWEIGHT Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units. PEDIT Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. PLINE Creates a 2D polyline. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. LWDEFAULT Sets the value for the default lineweight. LWDISPLAY Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed. Change the Lineweight of an Object | 539 LWUNITS Controls whether lineweight units are displayed in inches or millimeters. PLINEWID Stores the default polyline width. Control the Display Properties of Certain Objects You can control how overlapping objects and certain other objects are displayed and plotted. Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text You can simplify the display of certain kinds of objects in order to speed performance. Display performance is improved when wide polylines and donuts, solid-filled polygons (two-dimensional solids), hatches, gradient fills, and text are displayed in simplified form. Simplified display also increases the speed of creating test plots. Turn Off Solid Fill When you turn off Fill mode, wide polylines, solid-filled polygons, gradient fill, and hatches are displayed in outline form. Except for patterned hatches and gradient fills, solid fill is automatically turned off for hidden view and nonplan views in three dimensions. Use Quick Text When you turn on Quick Text mode in drawings that contain a lot of text using complex fonts, only a rectangular frame defining the text is displayed or plotted. 540 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects Turn Off Lineweights Any lineweight width that is represented by more than one pixel may slow down performance. If you want to improve display performance, turn lineweights off. You can turn lineweights on and off by choosing the LWT button on the status bar or by using the Lineweight Settings dialog box. Lineweights are always plotted at their real-world value whether their display is turned on or off. Update the Display New objects automatically use the current settings for displays of solid fill and text. Except for lineweights, to update the display of existing objects using these settings, you must use REGEN. See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity on page 473 ■ Display Lineweights on page 535 ■ Use TrueType Fonts on page 1367 To turn the display of solid fill on or off 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Display tab, under Display Performance, select Apply Solid Fill. A check mark indicates that Fill mode is on. 3 Click OK. 4 To display your changes, click View menu ➤ Regen. Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text | 541 To turn the display of text on or off 1 Click Tools ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Display tab, under Display Performance, select Show Text Boundary Frame Only. The check mark indicates that text is displayed as a rectangular frame. 3 Click OK. 4 To display your changes, click View menu ➤ Regen. To turn lineweights on or off 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Lineweight. 2 In the Lineweight drop-down list, select Lineweight Settings. 3 In the Lineweight Settings dialog box, select or clear Display Lineweight. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference DSETTINGS Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes, Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties. FILL Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, 2D solids, and wide polylines. LWEIGHT Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units. QTEXT Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects. REGEN Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport. 542 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. LWDISPLAY Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed. QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. Control the Transparency of Objects You can control the transparency level of objects and layers. Set the transparency level of selected objects or layers to enhance drawings or reduce the visibility of areas that are included for reference only. Control the Transparency of Objects | 543 Transparency can be set to ByLayer, ByBlock, or to a specific value. no transparent objects selected objects 75% transparent IMPORTANT For perfomance reasons, plotting transparency is disabled by default. To plot transparent objects, check the Plot Transparency option in either the Plot dialog box or the Page Setup dialog box. To control the transparency level of objects 1 Select the objects whose transparency level you want to change. 2 On the Home tab ➤ Properties panel, drag the Transparency slider, or enter a value from 0 to 90 in the Trasparency box. 3 Press Esc to set the transparency level and clear the selection. TIP You can also control the transparency level from the Properties palette by double clicking an object. Double clicking hatches or fills displays the Hatch Editor ribbon contextual tab, which contains a transparency control for these objects. 544 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects Quick Reference CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects. -LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. CETRANSPARENCY Sets the transparency level for new objects. TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY Controls whether the object transparency is displayed. Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed You can control which overlapping objects appear to be on top. Generally, overlapping objects such as text, wide polylines, and solid-filled polygons are displayed in the order they are created: newly created objects in front of existing objects. You can use DRAWORDER to change the draw order (which is the display and plotting order) of any objects. TEXTTOFRONT changes the draw order of all text and dimensions in the drawing. HATCHTOBACK changes the draw order of hatches and gradient and solid fills in the drawing. NOTE Overlapping objects cannot be controlled between model space and paper space. They can be controlled only within the same space. Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed | 545 To change the draw order of overlapping objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Draw Order drop-down list. 2 From the draw order drop down list, click one of the options. 3 Select the object(s) whose draw order you want to modify and press Enter. 4 Select the reference object(s) and press Enter. (This step is necessary only for the Bring Above Objects and Send Under Objects options.) Quick Reference DRAWORDER Changes the draw order of images and other objects. HATCHTOBACK Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other objects. QSELECT Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria. REGEN Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport. SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set. TEXTTOFRONT Brings text and dimensions in front of all other objects in the drawing. WBLOCK Writes objects or a block to a new drawing file. DRAWORDERCTL Controls the default display behavior of overlapping objects when they are created or edited. HPDRAWORDER Controls the draw order of hatches and fills. 546 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects SORTENTS Controls object sorting in support of draw order for several operations. Control the Display of Objects Control the display of objects by isolating or hiding a selection set. Use ISOLATEOBJECTS and HIDEOBJECTS to create a temporary drawing view with selected objects isolated or hidden. This saves you the time of having to track objects across layers. If you isolate objects, only the isolated objects appear in the view. A light bulb icon on the status bar indicates when one or more objects are isolated or hidden. To redisplay objects, use UNISOLATEOBJECTS. When you close and reopen the drawing, all previously hidden objects are displayed. Use the OBJECTISOLATIONMODE system variable to control whether objects remain hidden between drawing sessions. To isolate objects 1 Select the objects you want to isolate. 2 Right-click in the drawing area and select Isolate ➤ Isolate Objects. Only the selected objects are displayed. All other objects are hidden. 3 To redisplay hidden objects, right-click in the drawing area and select Isolate ➤ End Object Isolation. To hide objects 1 Select the objects you want to hide. 2 Right-click in the drawing area and select Isolate ➤ Hide Objects. The selected objects are hidden. 3 To redisplay hidden objects, right-click in the drawing area and select Isolate ➤ End Object Isolation. To keep objects hidden or isolated between drawing sessions 1 Before hiding or isolating objects, set OBJECTISOLATIONMODE to 1. 2 Hide or isolate objects in your drawing. When you save, close, and reopen your drawing, the selected objects remain hidden or isolated. Control the Display of Objects | 547 Quick Reference HIDEOBJECTS Hides selected objects. ISOLATEOBJECTS Displays selected objects across layers; unselected objects are hidden. UNISOLATEOBJECTS Displays previously hidden objects. OBJECTISOLATIONMODE Controls whether hidden objects remain hidden between drawing sessions. 548 | Chapter 16 Control the Properties of Objects Use Precision Tools 17 You can use a variety of precision drawing tools to help you produce accurate drawings quickly and without performing tedious calculations. Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems (UCS) For precise coordinate input, you can use several coordinate system entry methods. You can also use a movable coordinate system, the user coordinate system (UCS), for convenient coordinate entry and to establish workplanes. Overview of Coordinate Entry When a command prompts you for a point, you can use the pointing device to specify a point, or you can enter a coordinate value at the Command prompt. When dynamic input is on, you can enter coordinate values in tooltips near the cursor. You can enter two-dimensional coordinates as either Cartesian (X,Y) or polar coordinates. Cartesian and Polar Coordinates A Cartesian coordinate system has three axes, X, Y, and Z. When you enter coordinate values, you indicate a point's distance (in units) and its direction (+ or -) along the X, Y, and Z axes relative to the coordinate system origin (0,0,0). In 2D, you specify points on the XY plane, also called the workplane. The workplane is similar to a flat sheet of grid paper. The X value of a Cartesian coordinate specifies horizontal distance, and the Y value specifies vertical distance. The origin point (0,0) indicates where the two axes intersect. Polar coordinates use a distance and an angle to locate a point. With both Cartesian and polar coordinates, you can enter absolute coordinates based on the origin (0,0), or relative coordinates based on the last point specified. 549 Another method of entering a relative coordinate is by moving the cursor to specify a direction and then entering a distance directly. This method is called direct distance entry. You can enter coordinates in scientific, decimal, engineering, architectural, or fractional notation. You can enter angles in grads, radians, surveyor's units, or degrees, minutes, and seconds. The UNITS command controls unit format. Display Coordinates on the Status Bar The current cursor location is displayed as a coordinate value on the status bar. There are three types of coordinate display: static, dynamic, and distance and angle. ■ Static display. Updates only when you specify a point. ■ Dynamic display. Updates as you move the cursor. ■ Distance and angle display. Updates the relative distance (distance Specify the radius of the hole Coordinate filters work only when the program prompts you for a point. If you try to use a coordinate filter at the Command prompt, you see an error message. Example: Use of Coordinate Filters in 3D This example shows how to use coordinate filters to create a point object at the center (centroid) of a 3D object. Hidden lines have been removed for clarity. The X value of the new point is extracted from the first location specified, the Y value from the second location, and the Z value from the third. The three values are combined to form the coordinate values of the new point. Command: point Point: .x of mid of select object (1) (need YZ): .y of mid of select object (2) (need Z): mid of select object (3) To use coordinate filters to specify a point in 2D 1 At the prompt for a point, enter a coordinate filter (.x or .y). For example, enter .x to specify the X value first. 2 To extract the first coordinate value, specify a point. For example, if you entered .x in step 1, the X value is extracted from this point. Combine Coordinate Values (Coordinate Filters) | 607 3 To extract the next coordinate value, specify a different point. The new point location combines the coordinate values extracted from the points you specified in steps 2 and 3. NOTE Instead of specifying a point in steps 2 or 3, you can enter a numeric value. To use coordinate filters to specify a point in 3D 1 At the prompt for a point, enter a coordinate filter (.x, .y, .z, .xy, .xz, or .yz). For example, enter .x to specify the X value first. 2 To extract the specified coordinate value(s), specify a point. For example, if you entered .x in step 1, the X value is extracted from this point. 3 At the prompt for the remaining coordinates, do one of the following: ■ Extract the remaining coordinate values by specifying a point. ■ Enter another coordinate filter and return to step 2. For example, if you entered .x in step 1, specify a second point to extract the Y and Z coordinates simultaneously, or enter .y or .z to specify Y and Z values separately. The new point location combines the coordinate values extracted from the points specified in steps 2 and 3. NOTE Instead of specifying a point in steps 2 or 3, you can enter a numeric value. Quick Reference Coordinate Filters (Command Modifier) Combines X, Y, and Z values from different points to specify a single point. Track to Points on Objects (Object Snap Tracking) You can draw objects at specific angles or in specific relationship to other objects along specified directions called alignment paths. ™ AutoTrack helps you draw objects at specific angles or in specific relationships to other objects. When you turn on AutoTrack, temporary alignment paths 608 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools help you create objects at precise positions and angles. AutoTrack includes two tracking options: polar tracking and object snap tracking. You can toggle AutoTrack on and off with the Polar and Otrack buttons on the status bar. Use temporary override keys to turn object snap tracking on and off or to turn off all snapping and tracking. See the keyboard illustration in Override Object Snap Settings on page 590. Object snap tracking works in conjunction with object snaps. You must set an object snap before you can track from an object's snap point. Object Snap Tracking Use object snap tracking to track along alignment paths that are based on object snap points. Acquired points display a small plus sign (+), and you can acquire up to seven tracking points at a time. After you acquire a point, horizontal, vertical, or polar alignment paths relative to the point are displayed as you move the cursor over their drawing paths. For example, you can select a point along a path based on an object endpoint or midpoint or an intersection between objects. NOTE You can track Perpendicular or Tangent object snap from the last picked point in a command even if the object snap tracking is off. In the following illustration, the Endpoint object snap is on. You start a line by clicking its start point (1), move the cursor over another line's endpoint (2) to acquire it, and then move the cursor along the horizontal alignment path to locate the endpoint you want for the line you are drawing (3). Change Object Snap Tracking Settings By default, object snap tracking is set to orthogonal. Alignment paths are displayed at 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees from acquired object points. However, you can use polar tracking angles instead. For object snap tracking, object points are automatically acquired. However, you can choose to acquire points only when you press Shift. Track to Points on Objects (Object Snap Tracking) | 609 Change Alignment Path Display You can change how AutoTrack displays alignment paths, and you can change how object points are acquired for object snap tracking. By default, alignment paths stretch to the end of the drawing window. You can change their display to abbreviated lengths, or no length. Tips for Using Object Snap Tracking As you use AutoTrack (polar tracking and object snap tracking), you will discover techniques that make specific design tasks easier. Here are a few you might try. ■ Use Perpendicular, End, and Mid object snaps with object snap tracking to draw to points that are perpendicular to the end and midpoints of objects. ■ Use the Tangent and End object snaps with object snap tracking to draw to points that are tangent to the endpoints of arcs. ■ Use object snap tracking with temporary tracking points. At a point prompt, enter tt, then specify a temporary tracking point. A small + appears at the point. As you move your cursor, AutoTrack alignment paths are displayed relative to the temporary point. To remove the point, move the cursor back over the +. ■ After you acquire an object snap point, use direct distance to specify points at precise distances along alignment paths from the acquired object snap point. To specify a point prompt, select an object snap, move the cursor to display an alignment path, then enter a distance at the Command prompt. NOTE The direct distance entry method is not available while you are using the temporary override key for object snap tracking. ■ Use the Automatic and Shift to Acquire options set on the Drafting tab of the Options dialog box to manage point acquisition. Point acquisition is set to Automatic by default. When working in close quarters, press Shift to temporarily avoid acquiring a point. To turn on and turn off object snap tracking ■ Press F11, or click 610 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools on the status bar. To turn object snap tracking on and off temporarily, hold down the F11 key while you work. To change AutoTrack settings 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Drafting tab, under AutoTrack Settings, select or clear the following alignment path display options: ■ Display Polar Tracking Vector. Controls alignment path display for object snap tracking. When cleared, no polar tracking path is displayed. ■ Display Full Screen Tracking Vector. Controls alignment path display for object snap tracking. When cleared, an alignment path is displayed only from the object snap point to the cursor. ■ Display AutoTrack Tooltip. Controls the display of AutoTrack tooltips. Tooltips tell you the type of object snap (for object snap tracking), alignment angle, and distance from the previous point. 3 Under Alignment Point Acquisition, select a method for acquiring object points for object snap tracking: ■ Automatic. Acquires object points automatically. If you select this option, you can press Shift to not acquire an object point ■ Shift to Acquire. Acquires object points only when you press Shift while the cursor is over an object snap point. Quick Reference DSETTINGS Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes, Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. AUTOSNAP Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet. Track to Points on Objects (Object Snap Tracking) | 611 POLARMODE Controls settings for polar and object snap tracking. TRACKPATH Controls the display of polar and object snap tracking alignment paths. Track to Offset Point Locations (Tracking) You can use tracking to specify a point by offsetting vertically and horizontally from a series of temporary points. You can use the tracking method whenever you are prompted for a point. Tracking uses the pointing device to specify a point by offsetting vertically and horizontally from a series of temporary points. When you start tracking and specify an initial reference point, the next reference point is constrained to a path that extends vertically or horizontally from that point. The direction of the offset is indicated by the rubber-band line. You change the direction of the offset by moving the cursor through the reference point. You can track as many points as you need. Typically, you use tracking in combination with object snaps or direct distance entry. For example, you can use tracking to find the center point of a rectangle without using construction lines. Start tracking, and specify the midpoint of a horizontal line. Drag the cursor vertically and specify the midpoint of a vertical line (2). Press Enter to accept the point (3) at the center of the rectangle. To use tracking to specify a point 1 Start a command, such as the LINE command. 2 Hold down Shift and right-click in the drawing area. Click Tracking. 3 Specify a point. 4 Move the cursor directly up, down, left, or right until you see the rubber-band line. The direction of movement affects the tracking direction. Notice that if you move the cursor from left to right, you must then move it directly over the last point specified in order to move it up or down. 5 Specify a second point. 6 Press Enter to end tracking. The start point of the line snaps to the imaginary intersection of the vertical and horizontal paths extending from the points you specified. 612 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools The position is determined by the direction in which you moved the cursor after specifying the first point. Quick Reference TRACKING (Command Modifier) Locates a point from a series of temporary points. Specify Distances When specifying a point, you can enter distances, offsets, and measured intervals. Enter Direct Distances You can specify a point by moving the cursor to indicate a direction and then entering the distance. To specify a line length quickly, without entering coordinate values, you can specify a point by moving the cursor to indicate a direction and then entering the distance from the first point. You can enter calculated distances from the QuickCalc calculator. For more information, see Use the QuickCalc Calculator on page 627. You can use direct distance entry to specify points for all commands requiring more than one point. When Ortho mode or polar tracking is on, this method is an efficient way to draw lines of specified length and direction, and to move or copy objects. NOTE The direct distance entry method is not available while you are using the temporary override keys for Ortho mode, object snap tracking, or polar tracking. See also: ■ Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap on page 601 ■ Lock an Angle for One Point (Angle) on page 605 Specify Distances | 613 To draw a line using direct distance entry 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line. 2 Specify the first point and then, move the pointing device until the rubber-band line extends at the same angle as the line you want to draw. 3 Enter a distance at the Command prompt. The line is drawn at the length and angle you specified. Quick Reference LINE Creates straight line segments. Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier) Locates the next point at a specified distance in the direction of your cursor. Offset from Temporary Reference Points You can establish a temporary reference point as a base point for offsetting subsequent points. The From command modifier establishes a temporary reference point as a base point for offsetting subsequent points. The From method does not constrain the cursor to orthogonal movement. The From method usually is used in combination with object snaps. To offset a point from a temporary reference point 1 At a prompt for a point, enter from. Alternately, press Shift and right-click to display the object snap menu, and then choose From. 2 If you want to offset from a location on an existing object, specify an object snap method. Then select the object snap point. 3 Enter a relative coordinate (i.e. @1,1). 614 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools Quick Reference FROM (Command Modifier) Locates a point offset from a reference point within a command. Specify Intervals on Objects You can mark off equal distances along objects. Overview of Specifying Intervals on Objects Provides a high-level overview of two options for marking off equal distances along objects. Sometimes you need to create points or insert symbols (blocks) at intervals on an object. You can ■ Specify the length of the segments (MEASURE) ■ Specify the number of equal segments (DIVIDE) You can measure or divide lines, arcs, splines, circles, ellipses, and polylines. With both methods, you can identify the intervals by inserting either a point or a block. By specifying points, you can use the Node object snap to align other objects at intervals on the measured or divided object. By specifying blocks, you can create precise geometric constructions or insert custom markers. The blocks can rotate at each insertion point. You cannot insert a block unless it has already been defined within the drawing. Variable attributes within the block are not included when you insert the block references. The points or blocks you draw using MEASURE or DIVIDE are placed in a selection set. Therefore, if you want to edit them immediately, you can use the Previous option of SELECT. See also: ■ Work with Blocks on page 851 Specify Intervals on Objects | 615 Quick Reference BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. DDPTYPE Specifies the display style and size of point objects. DIVIDE Creates evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object. MEASURE Creates point objects or blocks at measured intervals along the length or perimeter of an object. WBLOCK Writes objects or a block to a new drawing file. PDMODE Controls how point objects are displayed. PDSIZE Sets the display size for point objects. Specify Measured Intervals on Objects You can mark off equal lengths from one end of a selected object. You can use MEASURE to mark an object at specified intervals. You can mark the intervals with either points or blocks. The last segment of a measured object may be shorter than the interval you specify. The starting point for measurements or divisions varies with the object type. For lines or open polylines, the starting point is the endpoint closest to the selection point. For closed polylines, it is the polyline start point. For circles, it is at the angle from the center point that is equivalent to the current snap angle. For example, if the snap angle is 0, the circle starts at the three o'clock position and continues counterclockwise. If the point marker is displayed as a single dot (the default setting), you may not be able to see the measured intervals. You can change the style of the point markers using several methods. To change the point style in a dialog 616 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools box, you can use DDPTYPE. Alternately, click Format menu ➤ Point Style. The PDMODE system variable also controls the appearance of point markers. For example, you can change the value to make points appear as crosses.PDSIZE controls the size of point objects. To insert points at measured intervals on an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point drop-down ➤ Measure. 2 Select a line, arc, spline, circle, ellipse, or polyline. 3 Enter an interval length, or specify points to indicate a length. Points are placed on the object at the specified intervals. To insert blocks at measured intervals on an object 1 If necessary, create the block you want to insert. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point drop-down ➤ Measure. 3 Select a line, arc, spline, circle, ellipse, or polyline. 4 Enter b (Block). 5 Enter the name of the block you want to insert. 6 Enter y to align the blocks with the measured object. Enter n to use a rotation angle of 0 degrees. 7 Enter an interval length, or specify points to indicate a length. Blocks are inserted on the object at the specified intervals. Quick Reference BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. DDPTYPE Specifies the display style and size of point objects. Specify Intervals on Objects | 617 MEASURE Creates point objects or blocks at measured intervals along the length or perimeter of an object. PDMODE Controls how point objects are displayed. PDSIZE Sets the display size for point objects. Divide an Object into Equal Segments You can divide a selected object into a specified number of equal lengths. You can create points or insert blocks on an object at a specific number of equal intervals. This operation does not actually break an object into individual objects; it only identifies the location of the divisions so that you can use them as geometric reference points. The starting point for measurements or divisions varies with the object type. For lines or open polylines, the starting point is the endpoint closest to the selection point. For closed polylines, it is the polyline start point. For circles, it is at the angle from the center point that is equivalent to the current snap angle. For example, if the snap angle is 0, the circle starts at the three o'clock position and continues counterclockwise. If the point marker is displayed as a single dot (the default setting), you may not be able to see the segments. You can change the style of the point markers using several methods. To change the point style in a dialog box, you can use DDPTYPE. Alternately, click Format menu ➤ Point Style. The PDMODE system variable also controls the appearance of point markers. For example, you can change the value to make points appear as crosses. PDSIZE controls the size of point objects. 618 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools To insert points to mark equal segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point drop-down ➤ Divide. 2 Select a line, circle, ellipse, polyline, arc, or spline. 3 Enter the number of segments you want. A point is placed between each segment. To insert blocks to mark equal segments on an object 1 If necessary, create the block you want to insert. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point drop-down ➤ Divide. 3 Select a line, arc, circle, ellipse, polyline, or spline. 4 Enter b (Block). 5 Enter the name of the block you want to insert. 6 Enter y to align the blocks with the divided object. Enter n to use a rotation angle of 0 degrees. 7 Enter the number of segments you want. Quick Reference BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. DDPTYPE Specifies the display style and size of point objects. DIVIDE Creates evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object. WBLOCK Writes objects or a block to a new drawing file. Specify Intervals on Objects | 619 PDMODE Controls how point objects are displayed. PDSIZE Sets the display size for point objects. Extract Geometric Information from Objects The inquiry and calculation commands can provide information about objects in your drawing and do useful calculations. Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations You can obtain information about the relation between two specified points or multiple points; for example, the distance between points or their angle in the XY plane. To determine the relation between points, you can display the ■ Distance between them ■ Angle between the points in the XY plane ■ Angle of the points from the XY plane ■ Delta, or changed, X, Y, and Z distances between them The ID command lists the X, Y, and Z coordinate values of a specified point. See also: ■ Overview of Coordinate Entry on page 549 620 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools To calculate the distance and angle between two points 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Distance. 2 Specify a first and second point for the distance you want to calculate. 3 Press Enter. The distance displays at the Command prompt in the current units format. To calculate the distance and angle between multiple points 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Distance. 2 For the distance you want to calculate, specify a first and second point. 3 For the distance you want to calculate, specify the next point or points. 4 Press Enter. The distance displays at the Command prompt in the current units format. Quick Reference DIST Measures the distance and angle between two points. ID Displays the UCS coordinate values of a specified location. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. DISTANCE Stores the distance computed by the DIST command. Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information You can obtain the area, perimeter, and mass properties defined by selected objects or a sequence of points. Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information | 621 You can calculate the area and perimeter of a sequence of points. You can also obtain the area, perimeter, and mass properties of any of several types of objects. TIP A fast way to calculate an area bounded by several objects in 2D is to use the BOUNDARY command. With BOUNDARY, you can pick a point within the area to create a closed polyline or region. You can then use the Properties palette or the LIST command to find the area and perimeter of the polyline or region. Use Commands to Calculate Area With the MEASUREGEOM and AREA commands, you can specify a series of points or select an object to calculate area. If you need to calculate the combined area of multiple objects, you can keep a running total as you add or subtract one area at a time from the selection set. You cannot use window selection or crossing selection to select objects. Total area and perimeter are saved in the AREA and PERIMETER system variables. In addition to area, with the MEASUREGEOM command, you can obtain geometric information from objects such as distance, radius, angle, and volume. Define an Area You can measure an arbitrary closed region defined by the points you specify. The points must lie on a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. Calculate the Area, Perimeter, or Circumference of an Object You can calculate the enclosed area and perimeter or circumference of circles, ellipses, polylines, polygons, regions, and AutoCAD 3D solids. The information displayed depends on the type of object selected: ■ Circles. Area and circumference display. 622 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools ■ Ellipses, closed polylines, polygons, planar closed spline curves, and regions. Area and perimeter display. For wide polylines, this area is defined by the center of the width. ■ Open objects such as open spline curves and open polylines. Area and length display. Area is calculated as though a straight line connects the start point and endpoint. ■ AutoCAD 3D solids. Total 3D area for the object displays. Example: How Various Areas Are Calculated Combined Areas Calculate Combined Areas You can calculate the total area of multiple areas by specifying points or by selecting objects. For example, you can measure the total area of selected rooms in a floor plan. Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information | 623 Subtract Areas from Combined Areas You can subtract more than one area from a combined area as you calculate. For example, if you have calculated the area of a floor plan, you can subtract the area of a room. Example: Subtraction of Areas from a Calculation In the following example, the closed polyline represents a metal plate with two large holes. The area of the polyline is first calculated and then the area of each hole is subtracted. The area and perimeter or circumference of each object displays, with a running total after each step. The Command prompt sequence is Command: area Specify first corner point or [Object/Add/Subtract]: a Specify first corner point or [Object/Subtract]: o (ADD mode) Select objects: Select the polyline (1) Area = 0.34, Perimeter = 2.71 Total area = 0.34 (ADD mode) Select objects: Press Enter Specify first corner point or [Object/Subtract]: s Specify first corner point or [Object/Add]: o (SUBTRACT mode) Select objects: Select the lower circle (2) Area = 0.02, Circumference = 0.46 Total area = 0.32 (SUBTRACT mode) Select objects: Select the upper circle (3) Area = 0.02, Circumference = 0.46 Total area = 0.30 (SUBTRACT mode) Select circle or polyline: Press Enter Specify first corner point or [Object/Add]: Press Enter You can also use REGION to convert the plate and the holes to regions, subtract the holes, and then use the Properties palette or the LIST command to find the area of the plate. TIP Use the QuickCalc calculator to convert from one system of area units to another. For more information, see Use the QuickCalc Calculator on page 627. 624 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools Calculate Mass Properties With the MASSPROP command, you can analyze 3D solids and 2D regions for their mass properties including volume, area, moments of inertia, center of gravity, and so on. In addition, the result of the computations can be saved to a text file. See also: ■ Create and Combine Areas (Regions) on page 687 ■ Overview of Object Properties on page 465 To calculate an area you define 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Area. 2 Specify points in a sequence that define the perimeter of the area you want to measure. Press Enter. The first and last points connect to form a closed area. The area and perimeter display in the current units format. To calculate the area of an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Area. 2 At the Command prompt, enter o (Object). 3 Select an object. The area and perimeter of the selected object display in the current units format. To add an area as you calculate 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Area. 2 Enter a (Add). 3 Do one of the following: ■ Specify points to define the area you want to add. Press Enter. ■ Enter o (Object) and select the objects you want to add. Each new area and a running total of all areas displays in the current units format. 4 Press Enter twice to end the command. Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information | 625 To subtract an area as you calculate 1 While a combined area displays, enter s (Subtract). 2 Do one of the following: ■ Specify points to define the area you want to subtract. Press Enter. ■ Enter o (Object) and select the objects you want to subtract. The running total of all areas updates and displays as you define new areas. 3 Press Enter to end the command. Quick Reference AREA LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MASSPROP Calculates the mass properties of regions or 3D solids. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. QUICKCALC Opens the QuickCalc calculator. UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. AREA PERIMETER Stores the last perimeter value computed by the AREA or LIST command. 626 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools Use a Calculator You can access a calculator function as you work with the program. You can use either the QuickCalc calculator interface or the Command prompt calculator. Use the QuickCalc Calculator With the QuickCalc calculator, an interface that looks and functions like a hand-held calculator, you can perform mathematical, scientific, and geometric calculations, convert units of measurement, manipulate the properties of objects, and evaluate expressions. Overview of QuickCalc The QuickCalc calculator includes basic features similar to most standard mathematical calculators. In addition, QuickCalc has features specific to AutoCAD such as geometric functions, a Units Conversion area, and a Variables area. Unlike most calculators, QuickCalc is an expression builder. For greater flexibility, it does not immediately calculate an answer when you click a function. Instead, you compose an expression that you can easily edit and, when you are finished, you click the equal sign (=) or press Enter. Later, you can retrieve the expression from the History area, modify it, and recalculate the results. With QuickCalc, you can ■ Perform mathematical and trigonometric calculations ■ Access and review previously entered calculations for re-evaluation ■ Use the calculator with the Properties palette to modify object properties ■ Convert units of measurement ■ Perform geometric calculations related to specific objects ■ Copy and paste values and expressions to and from the Properties palette and the Command prompt ■ Perform computations on mixed numbers (fractions), and feet and inches ■ Define, store, and use calculator variables Use a Calculator | 627 ■ Use geometric functions from the CAL command Change QuickCalc Size and Appearance Click the More/Less button on the calculator and only the Input box and History area are displayed. You can use the expand/collapse arrows to open and close areas. You can also control the size, location, and appearance of QuickCalc. See Set Interface Options on page 109. Quick Reference QUICKCALC Opens the QuickCalc calculator. 628 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools QCCLOSE Closes the QuickCalc calculator. QCSTATE Indicates whether the QuickCalc calculator is open or closed. Access QuickCalc and Understand Its Behavior Use QuickCalc directly as you would with a desktop calculator, or use it transparently within a command or the Properties palette. There are three ways to work with QuickCalc within the program: ■ Directly from the Tools menu, the Standard toolbar, a shortcut menu, or the Command prompt ■ Transparently during a command from a shortcut menu or the Command prompt ■ Transparently from the Properties palette The method that you choose depends on how you are using QuickCalc. Use QuickCalc Directly When you work directly with QuickCalc, you can perform calculations and unit conversions just as you would with a desktop calculator. You can use the Windows clipboard (Ctrl+C, Ctrl+V) to transfer the results of your calculations to other parts of the program or to external programs. Calculations that you perform directly do not affect or change anything in your drawing. You can access QuickCalc directly in the following ways: ■ Click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ QuickCalc. ■ On the Standard toolbar, click the QuickCalc button. ■ In the drawing editor (with no command active), right-click and click QuickCalc. ■ At the Command prompt, enter quickcalc. ■ At the Command prompt, enter qc. Use the QuickCalc Calculator | 629 Use QuickCalc Transparently from Within a Command During a command, you can access QuickCalc transparently in the following ways: ■ Right-click to display the shortcut menu. Click QuickCalc. ■ At the Command prompt, enter quickcalc. ■ At the Command prompt, enter qc. Calculations that you transfer to the Command prompt affect the drawing. For example, if you are drawing a line with the LINE command and you pass an expression to the Command prompt from the calculator, the next point of the line uses the results, which might be a distance or coordinate value. In QuickCalc, you click the Apply button to pass the value to the drawing based on that expression. NOTE When using QuickCalc transparently to calculate a value for direct distance entry, Apply transfers the value to the Command prompt. To use the value, position the crosshairs to determine the direction and then press Enter. Use QuickCalc Transparently from the Properties Palette When you want to modify properties and apply evaluated expressions to objects in your drawing, you can access QuickCalc transparently from the Properties palette. Use the following method: ■ Click any box in the Properties palette that contains a numeric value. Then click the QuickCalc button that appears in the box. ■ After calculating a value, transfer the result to the Properties palette by clicking the Apply button. The object or drawing property is modified and the changes are displayed in the drawing. Calculate Mathematical Expressions in a Dialog Box You can also enter and evaluate mathematical expressions in a dialog box using the following format: =expression . NOTE To evaluate expressions in a dialog box, make sure the system variable, CALCINPUT, is set to 1. 630 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools To use the QuickCalc calculator Do one of the following: ■ Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ QuickCalc. ■ Right-click the drawing area to display a shortcut menu. Click QuickCalc. To use the QuickCalc calculator within a command Do one of the following: ■ At the Command prompt, enter 'quickcalc or 'qc. ■ Right-click to display a shortcut menu. Click QuickCalc. To use the QuickCalc calculator with the Properties palette 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 2 Open the Properties palette. 3 Click one or more objects. 4 Click a box with a numeric property. 5 Click the QuickCalc button in the box. Quick Reference QUICKCALC Opens the QuickCalc calculator. QCCLOSE Closes the QuickCalc calculator. Enter, Evaluate, and Retrieve Expressions Enter expressions in QuickCalc using standard mathematical rules of precedence; review and retrieve computations from the History area; and understand the rules for using imperial units: length, area, and volume. Use the QuickCalc Calculator | 631 QuickCalc evaluates expressions according to the following standard mathematical rules of precedence: ■ Expressions in parentheses first, starting with the innermost set ■ Operators in standard order: exponents first, multiplication and division second, and addition and subtraction last ■ Operators of equal precedence from left to right The Input box of the calculator is where you enter and retrieve expressions. With QuickCalc, there are two ways you can enter data in the Input box. You can either enter expressions using the QuickCalc Number Pad buttons, or you can use the computer keyboard or numeric keypad. To use the computer numeric keypad, you must have NUMLOCK on. To evaluate an expression, click the equal (=) sign on the QuickCalc Number Pad, or press Enter on the computer keyboard. Understand the Syntax of Expressions The syntax for QuickCalc expressions and Command prompt calculator expressions is identical. For example, to perform an operation on the vector or coordinates 5,2,0, you enter [5,2,0] in the Input box. You can use the GETVAR function to read the value of a system variable. The syntax is getvar(variable_name) For more information see CAL. Use the History Area The History area keeps an ongoing record of calculations, similar to the paper tape in a physical desk calculator. You can use the History area to review previous operations and pass them back to the Input box for re-evaluation with different parameters. Rules for Displaying and Handling Units QuickCalc adheres to the following rules: ■ Results of calculations are always expressed in decimal format unless a distance is entered in feet and inches 632 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools ■ Angular values entered in the Input box are assumed to be degrees regardless of the settings in the Drawing Units dialog box. To specify radians, grads, and degrees, append an r, g, or d after the angle value. ■ Results of angular calculations are always expressed in degrees with full AutoCAD precision. When the drawing units are set to architectural units, the calculator displays the results of calculations of imperial units in the architectural format and rounds to the display precision (LUPREC) specified in the drawing. The results for all other calculations display in decimal format with full precision. You can separate feet, inches, and fractional inches with a dash, a space, or nothing. You can use any of the following syntax cases to enter valid feet-inch formatted values: ■ 5' or 60" ■ 5'-9" or 5' 9" or 5'9" ■ 5'-1/2" or 5' 1/2" or 5'1/2" ■ 5'-9-1/2" or 5' 9-1/2" or 5'9-1/2" ■ 5'-9 1/2" or 5' 9 1/2" or 5'9 1/2" To designate inches for linear calculations, entering double quotes (") is optional. For example, instead of entering 5'9-1/2", you could enter 5'9-1/2. WARNING With imperial units, QuickCalc interprets a minus or a dash (-) as a unit separator rather than a subtraction operation. To specify subtraction, include at least one space before or after the minus sign. For example, to subtract 9" from 5', enter 5' -9" rather than 5'-9". You can use QuickCalc to calculate square feet and cubic feet. To enter square or cubic feet, you must enter units using these abbreviations: ■ sq. ft. or sq ft ■ cu. ft. or cu ft Convert Decimal Units into Imperial Units For distance measurements, enter an inches sign (") after the number in the results display. For example, if the computed distance is 15, enter " after the 15, press Enter or click = and the result displays in imperial units as 1'-3". Use the QuickCalc Calculator | 633 For computed results, enter the initial values in feet (') and inches (") to display the results in feet and inches. For example: ■ 5 * 6 = 30 ■ 5" * 6 = 2'-6" ■ 5" * 6" = 30 sq. in. ■ 5" * 0'-6" = 0.208333333 sq. ft. To change the font color of values or expressions in the QuickCalc History area 1 Right-click in the History area. Click either Value Font Color or Expression Font Color. 2 In the Color dialog box, click a Basic Color or click Define Custom Colors. With Define Custom Colors, you can select a custom color and add it to Custom Colors. 3 Click OK. The colors you selected for values and expressions in the History area are displayed. To modify a property in the Properties palette with QuickCalc 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 2 Select an object. NOTE If QuickCalc is displayed on your desktop when you work with the Properties palette, it is temporarily hidden while you use the modal calculator from within the Properties palette. 3 In the Geometry section of the Properties palette, click on the value of a property. A small calculator icon is displayed to the right of the value. NOTE Only properties that are displayed with a white background can be changed. 4 Click the calculator icon. 634 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools QuickCalc opens and displays the current value of the object in the Input box. 5 Perform a calculation on the displayed value and click the equal sign (=) button. The new value is displayed in the Input box. 6 Click Apply. NOTE The Apply button is only available for editable number-based properties. The calculator closes and the new value is displayed in the Properties palette. The object is modified in the drawing. To obtain X, Y, Z coordinate values for a point using QuickCalc 1 NOTE The QuickCalc toolbar Get Coordinates button uses the cur function. On the QuickCalc toolbar, click the Get Coordinates button. QuickCalc temporarily closes and you are prompted to specify a point. 2 In the drawing, click a point. QuickCalc opens and displays the coordinate values of the point in the Input box. To measure the distance between two points using QuickCalc 1 NOTE The QuickCalc toolbar Distance Between Two Points button uses the dist(p1,p2) function. On the QuickCalc toolbar, click the Distance Between Two Points button. QuickCalc temporarily closes and you are prompted to specify two points. 2 In the drawing, click the first point and then the second point. QuickCalc opens and displays the value of the distance between the two points in the Input box. To get the angle of a line defined by two points using QuickCalc 1 NOTE The QuickCalc toolbar Angle of Line Defined by Two Points button uses the ang(p1,p2) function. Use the QuickCalc Calculator | 635 On the QuickCalc toolbar, click the Angle of Line Defined by Two Points button. QuickCalc temporarily closes and you are prompted to specify two points. 2 Enter the coordinate values for the first point and then the second point. QuickCalc opens and appends the value of the angle between the two points to the end of any value or expression already present in the Input box. To get the intersection of a line defined by four points using QuickCalc 1 NOTE The QuickCalc Intersection of Two Lines Defined by Four Points button uses the ill(p1,p2,p3,p4) function. On the QuickCalc toolbar, click the Intersection of Two Lines Defined by Four Points button. QuickCalc temporarily closes and you are prompted to specify four points. 2 Enter the coordinate values for the first point of line one, then the second point of line one. Next, enter the coordinate values for the first point of line two, then the second point of line two. QuickCalc opens and appends the value of the evaluated expression to the end of any value or expression already present in the Input box. Quick Reference QUICKCALC Opens the QuickCalc calculator. QCCLOSE Closes the QuickCalc calculator. Convert Units of Measurement In the Units Conversion area of QuickCalc, you can obtain equivalent values for different units of measurement. Unit conversions are available for length, area, volume, and angular values. Based on which unit type you select, you can then select a list of units to convert from and a list of units to convert to. 636 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools The Value to Convert box automatically displays the value from the Input box. You can also enter a different value. The results of the units conversion displays in the Converted Value box. You can paste this result to the Input box by clicking the QuickCalc icon in the Converted Value box. NOTE In the Value to Convert box, enter decimal values without units. To convert units of measurement with QuickCalc 1 In the Units Conversion area, select a unit category on the Units Type list. 2 In the Convert From list, select the type of unit you are converting from. 3 In the Convert To list, select the type of unit you are converting to. 4 In the Value to Convert box, enter the value you want to convert. Press Enter. The converted value is displayed in the Converted Value box. To copy a unit conversion result to the Input box of QuickCalc ■ On the Units Conversion title bar, click the Return Conversion Value to Input Area button. The converted value is displayed in the Input box. To convert radians to degrees using QuickCalc 1 On the Number Pad, enter a value in radians. 2 In the Scientific area, click the r2d button. 3 On the Number Pad, click the equal (=) sign. The conversion is displayed in the Input box. To convert degrees to radians using QuickCalc 1 On the Number Pad, enter a value in degrees. Use the QuickCalc Calculator | 637 2 In the Scientific area, click the d2r button. 3 On the Number Pad, click the equal (=) sign. The conversion is displayed in the Input box. Quick Reference QUICKCALC Opens the QuickCalc calculator. QCCLOSE Closes the QuickCalc calculator. Create and Use Calculator Variables The Variables area of QuickCalc stores calculator variables that you can access as needed. Calculator variables can either be constants or functions. You can use the Variables area to define, store, and retrieve calculator variables. Calculator variables can either be constants (coordinates/vectors, real numbers, and integers) or functions. In the Variables area, you can ■ Click a calculator variable to display information such as value, type, and description in the Details box at the bottom of the Variables area. ■ Double-click a calculator variable to load it into the QuickCalc Input box. Additional operations are available on the shortcut menus in the Variables area. Create New Calculator Variables You can create new calculator variables using the shortcut menus in the Variables area. When defining new calculator variables in the Variable Definition dialog box, the following rules apply: ■ Constants. Any expression entered in the Value or Expression text entry box is evaluated before the calculator variable is stored. Calculator variables that are defined as constants are available “globally.” You can access and use global constants in different drawings and sessions. 638 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools ■ Functions. Any expression entered in the Value or Expression text entry box is stored as text. Functions are evaluated when used in the QuickCalc Input box. Create Global Constants You can use one of the following methods to create global constants: ■ Enter an expression in the Input box using the format $variable_name=value. For example, to define the golden ratio to 8 decimal places as a global constant called Phi, enter $Phi=1.61803399 in the Input box. ■ Click the New Variable button in the Variables area title bar. In the Variables Definition dialog box, click Constant and fill in the other boxes. ■ Right-click the Variables area. Click New Variable. Access Global Constants You can access global constants and pass them to the Input box of the QuickCalc as follows: ■ Double-click a variable in the Variables area of QuickCalc. ■ Click a variable from the list of calculator variables, and click the Return Variable to Input Area button. ■ Enter a dollar sign ($) followed by the variable name, and press Enter. To use a global constant in a text or numeric entry box in a window or dialog box, use the syntax: =$variable_name followed by pressing the END key. For example, to use the previously mentioned global variable, Phi, enter =$Phi and press the END key. NOTE In QuickCalc, only constants can be directly referred to by their global variable names in the text or numeric entry boxes in windows and dialog boxes. Use Shortcut Functions Several sample calculator variables have been predefined and stored in the Shortcut Functions category. These are geometric expressions that combine Use the QuickCalc Calculator | 639 CAL functions with the Endpoint Snap mode. The following table describes the predefined variables that are available in the Variables area of the calculator. Variable Shortcut For Description dee dist(end,end) Distance between two endpoints ille ill(end,end,end) Intersection of two lines defined by four endpoints mee (end+end)/2 Midpoint between two endpoints nee nor(end,end) Unit vector in the XY plane and normal to two endpoints rad rad Radius of a selected circle, arc, or polyline arc vee vee(end,end) Vector from two endpoints vee1 vec1(end,end) Unit vector from two endpoints You can easily modify these calculator variables or create your own. For more information, see the CAL command. Organize Variables into Categories You can organize calculator variables in the Variables area under several categories. This results in a one-level tree structure. The Shortcut Functions category has already been created and contains several functions. Use the shortcut menu in the Variables area to create, rename, or delete variable categories. To use a predefined variable in a QuickCalc expression 1 In the Variables area, click the variable you want to use. 2 On the QuickCalc Variables title bar, click the Return Variable to Input Area button. The variable is displayed in the Input box as part of your expression. To create a new variable in QuickCalc 1 On the QuickCalc Variables title bar, click the New Variable button. 640 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools 2 In the Variable Definition dialog box, under Variable Type, select Constant or Function. 3 In the Variable Definition dialog box, under Variable Properties Name, enter a name for the variable. Variable names cannot contain spaces or special characters. NOTE When referencing this variable from the Input box, the variable name must begin with the dollar sign ($) to differentiate it from local LISP variables. 4 Under Variable Properties Group With, click New. 5 In the Category Definition dialog box, under Category Properties Name, enter a name for the new category. 6 Under Description, enter a description for the new category. Click OK. 7 In the Variable Definition dialog box, under Value or Expression, enter a value or expression for the new variable. 8 Under Description, enter a description of the new variable. Click OK. The new variable is now displayed in the Variables area. To edit a variable in QuickCalc 1 In the Variables area, click the variable you want to edit. 2 On the QuickCalc Variables title bar, click the Edit Variable button. 3 In the Variable Definition dialog box, make the edits to the variable. Click OK. To delete a variable in QuickCalc 1 In the Variables area, click the variable you want to delete. 2 On the QuickCalc Variables title bar, click the Delete button. To create a new global constant in the Input box of QuickCalc ■ In the Input box of QuickCalc, enter the following syntax: $variable_name=value. For example, you could center $Phi=1.618 NOTE Global variables are not case-sensitive. Use the QuickCalc Calculator | 641 QuickCalc adds the global constant to the list of variables in the Variables area. To access a global constant from dialog box or window ■ In any text or numeric entry box, enter an expression using the syntax: =$variable_name followed by pressing the END key. To evaluate mathematical expressions in a dialog box 1 If necessary, set the CALCINPUT system variable to 1. 2 In a dialog box, in an area where you can enter a numeric value, enter a mathematical expression in the following format: =expression (for example, =5+3). 3 Press Alt+Enter on the keyboard. The expression is evaluated and its value is displayed. Quick Reference QCCLOSE Closes the QuickCalc calculator. QUICKCALC Opens the QuickCalc calculator. CALCINPUT Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes. Use the Command Prompt Calculator By entering an expression in the Command prompt calculator, you can quickly solve a mathematical problem or locate points in your drawing. The CAL command runs the 3D calculator utility to evaluate vector expressions (combining points, vectors, and numbers) and real and integer expressions. The calculator performs standard mathematical functions. It also contains a 642 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools set of specialized functions for calculations involving points, vectors, and AutoCAD geometry. With the CAL command, you can ■ Calculate a vector from two points, the length of a vector, a normal vector (perpendicular to the XY plane), or a point on a line ■ Calculate a distance, radius, or angle ■ Specify a point with the pointing device ■ Specify the last-specified point or intersection ■ Use object snaps as variables in an expression ■ Convert points between a UCS and the WCS ■ Filter the X, Y, and Z components of a vector ■ Rotate a point around an axis Evaluating Expressions CAL evaluates expressions according to standard mathematical rules of precedence. Mathematical operators in order of precedence Operator Operation () Groups expressions ^ Indicates numeric exponent *, / Multiplies and divides numbers +, - Adds and subtracts numbers Calculating Points You can use CAL whenever you need to calculate a point or a number within a command. For example, you enter (mid+cen)/2 to specify a point halfway between the midpoint of a line and the center of a circle. The following example uses CAL as a construction tool. It locates a center point for a new circle, and then calculates one fifth of the radius of an existing circle. Use the Command Prompt Calculator | 643 Here is the command prompr sequence: Command: circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: 'cal >> Expression: (mid+cen)/2 >> Select entity for MID snap: Select the notch line (1) >> Select entity for CEN snap: Select the large circle (2) Diameter/ : 'cal >> Expression: 1/5*rad >> Select circle, arc or polyline segment for RAD function: Select the large circle (3) Calculate Mathematical Expressions in a Dialog Box You can also enter and evaluate mathematical expressions in a dialog box using the following format: =expression . NOTE To evaluate expressions in a dialog box, make sure the system variable, CALCINPUT, is set to 1. To start the Command prompt calculator Do one of the following: ■ At the Command prompt, enter CAL. Then, enter a CAL expression. ■ At a prompt for a command in progress, enter ‘CAL to start the CAL command transparently. Then, enter a CAL expression to calculate a value for that prompt. Quick Reference CAL Evaluates mathematical and geometric expressions. 644 | Chapter 17 Use Precision Tools CALCINPUT Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes. Use the Command Prompt Calculator | 645 646 Draw Geometric Objects 18 You can create a range of objects, from simple lines and circles to spline curves, and ellipses. In general, you draw objects by specifying points with the pointing device or by entering coordinate values at the Command prompt. Draw Linear Objects A line, the most basic object, can be one segment or a series of connected segments. Draw Lines You can close a sequence of line segments so that the first and last segments are joined. You can assign properties to lines including color, linetype, and lineweight. For more information about properties, see Work with Object Properties on page 465. You specify the locations that define the endpoints of each line with precision. You can ■ Enter the coordinate values for an endpoint, using either absolute or relative coordinates ■ Specify an object snap relative to an existing object. For example, you can specify the center of a circle as one endpoint of the line ■ Turn grid snap on and snap to a location There are other methods for creating precise lines. A highly efficient technique is to offset a line from an existing line, and then trim or extend it to the desired length. 647 Use polyline objects instead of line objects if you want the segments to be connected as a single object. See also: ■ Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems (UCS) on page 549 ■ Use Object Snaps on page 585 ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap on page 593 ■ Draw Polylines on page 649 ■ Offset an Object on page 758 ■ Break and Join Objects on page 783 ■ Infer Geometric Constraints on page 823 To draw lines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line. 2 Specify the start point. You can use the pointing device or enter coordinate values at the Command prompt. 3 Complete the first line segment by specifying the endpoint. To undo the previous line segment during the LINE command, enter u or click Undo on the toolbar. 4 Specify the endpoints of any additional line segments. 5 Press Enter to end or c to close a series of line segments. To start a new line at the endpoint of the last line drawn, start the LINE command again and press Enter at the Specify Start Point prompt. Quick Reference Commands LINE Creates straight line segments. 648 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects RAY Creates a line that starts at a point and continues to infinity. XLINE Creates a line of infinite length. Draw Polylines A polyline is a connected sequence of segments created as a single object. You can create straight line segments, arc segments, or a combination of the two. Polylines are ideal for applications including the following: ■ Contour lines for topographic, isobaric, and other scientific applications ■ Wiring diagrams and printed cicuit board layouts ■ Process and piping diagrams ■ Extrusion profiles and extrusion paths for 3D solid modeling Polylines can be created with several commands including PLINE, RECTANG, POLYGON, DONUT, BOUNDARY, and REVCLOUD. All of these commands result in a LWPOLYLINE (lightweight polyline) object type. With the 3DPOLY command, you can create non-planar polylines that result in a POLYLINE object type. Fewer options are available with 3D polylines. After you create a polyline, you can edit it using grips or PEDIT. You can use EXPLODE to convert polylines to individual line and arc segments. NOTE You can convert a spline-fit polyline created with PEDIT into a true spline object with SPLINE. Draw Polylines | 649 Create Wide Polylines You can draw polylines of various widths by using the Width and Halfwidth options. You can set the width of individual segments and make them taper gradually from one width to another. These options become available after you specify a starting point for the polyline. The Width and Halfwidth options set the width of the next polyline segments you draw. Widths greater than zero produce wide lines, which are filled if Fill mode is on and outlined if Fill mode is off. Intersections of adjacent wide segments are usually beveled. However, nontangent arc segments, acute angles, or segments that use a dash-dot linetype are not beveled. Create Polylines from the Boundaries of Objects You can create a polyline from the boundaries of objects that form a closed area with BOUNDARY. A polyline created using this method is a separate object, distinct from the objects used to create it. To expedite the boundary selection process in large or complex drawings, you can specify a group of boundary candidates, called a boundary set. You create this set by selecting the objects you want to use define the boundary. See also: ■ Draw Rectangles and Polygons on page 654 ■ Modify Complex Objects on page 785 ■ Break and Join Objects on page 783 ■ Control Lineweights on page 532 650 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects ■ Infer Geometric Constraints on page 823 To draw a polyline with straight segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline. 2 Specify the first point of the polyline. 3 Specify the endpoint of the first polyline segment. 4 Continue specifying segment endpoints as needed. 5 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline. To start a new polyline at the endpoint of the last polyline drawn, start the PLINE command again and press Enter at the Specify Start Point prompt. To draw a line and arc combination polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline. 2 Specify the start point of the polyline segment. 3 Specify the endpoint of the polyline segment. ■ Switch to Arc mode by entering a (Arc) at the Command prompt. ■ Return to Line mode by entering L (Line). 4 Specify additional polyline segments as needed. 5 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline. To create a wide polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline. 2 Specify the start point of the line segment. 3 Enter w (Width). 4 Enter the starting width of the line segment. Draw Polylines | 651 5 Specify the ending width of the line segment using one of the following methods: ■ To create a line segment of equal width, press Enter. ■ To create a tapering line segment, enter a different width. 6 Specify the endpoint of the polyline segment. 7 Continue specifying segment endpoints as needed. 8 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline. To create a boundary polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary. 2 In the Boundary Creation dialog box, in the Object Type list, select Polyline. 3 Under Boundary Set, do one of the following: ■ To create a boundary set from all objects visible in the current viewport, select Current Viewport. Avoid this option for large, complex drawings. ■ To specify which objects to include in the boundary set, click New. Select the objects that you want to use to create the boundary. Using this option automatically selects the Existing Set option. 4 Click Pick Points. 5 Specify points within each area that you want to form a boundary polyline. This area must be totally enclosed; that is, there can be no gaps between enclosing objects. You can select more than one area. Click Island Detection if you want internal closed areas to be included in the boundary set. 6 Press Enter to create the boundary polyline and end the command. The command creates a polyline in the shape of the boundary. Because this polyline overlaps the objects used to create it, it may not be visible. However, you can move, copy, or modify it just as you can any other polyline. 652 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects Quick Reference Commands 3DPOLY Creates a 3D polyline. BOUNDARY Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area. EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. FILL Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, 2D solids, and wide polylines. PEDIT Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. PLINE Creates a 2D polyline. POLYGON Creates an equilateral closed polyline. RECTANG Creates a rectangular polyline. System Variables FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. HPBOUND Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY. PLINECONVERTMODE Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines. PLINEGEN Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices of a 2D polyline. Draw Polylines | 653 PLINETYPE Specifies whether optimized 2D polylines are used. PLINEWID Stores the default polyline width. Draw Rectangles and Polygons You can create rectangles and regular polygons quickly. Creating polygons is a simple way to draw equilateral triangles, squares, pentagons, hexagons, and so on. If necessary, you can use EXPLODE to convert the resulting polyline object into lines. Draw Rectangles Use RECTANG to create closed polylines in a rectangular shape. Draw Regular Polygons Use POLYGON to create closed polylines with between 3 and 1,024 equal-length sides. The following illustrations show polygons created using three methods. In each case, two points are specified. See also: ■ Draw Polylines on page 649 ■ Infer Geometric Constraints on page 823 654 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects To draw a circumscribed polygon 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polygon. 2 At the Command prompt, enter the number of sides. 3 Specify the center of the polygon (1). 4 Enter c to specify a polygon circumscribed about a circle. 5 Enter the radius length (2). To draw a polygon by specifying one edge 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polygon. 2 At the Command prompt, enter the number of sides. 3 Enter e (Edge). 4 Specify the start point for one polygon segment. 5 Specify the endpoint of the polygon segment. To draw an inscribed polygon 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polygon. 2 At the Command prompt, enter the number of sides. 3 Specify the center of the polygon. 4 Enter i to specify a polygon inscribed within a circle of specified points. 5 Enter the radius length. Draw Rectangles and Polygons | 655 To draw a rectangle 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Rectangle. 2 Specify the first corner of the rectangle. 3 Specify the other corner of the rectangle. Quick Reference Commands BOUNDARY Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area. EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. POLYGON Creates an equilateral closed polyline. RECTANG Creates a rectangular polyline. System Variables FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. HPBOUND Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY. PLINEWID Stores the default polyline width. POLYSIDES Sets the default number of sides for the POLYGON command. 656 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects SNAPANG Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current viewport relative to the current UCS. Draw Multiline Objects Multilines are composed of parallel lines, called elements. When you draw a multiline, you can use the STANDARD style, which has two elements, or specify a style that you created previously. You can also change the justification and scale of the multiline before you draw it. Multiline justification determines which side of the cursor that the multiline is drawn, or whether it is centered on the cursor. Multiline scale controls the overall width of the multiline using the current units. Multiline scale does not affect linetype scale. If you change the multiline scale, you might need to make equivalent changes to the linetype scale to prevent dots or dashes from being disproportionately sized. Create Multiline Styles You can create named styles for multilines to control the number of elements and the properties of each element. The properties of multilines include ■ The total number of elements and position of each element ■ The offset distance for each element from the middle of the multiline ■ The color and linetype of each element ■ The visibility of the lines, called joints, that appear at each vertex ■ The type of end caps that are used ■ The background fill color of the multiline Draw Multiline Objects | 657 Elements with a positive offset appear on one side of the middle of the multiline; elements with a negative offset appear on the other side of the middle of the multiline. See also: ■ Modify Multilines on page 799 To draw a multiline 1 Click Draw menu ➤ Multiline. 2 At the Command prompt, enter st to select a style. 3 To list available styles, enter the style name or enter ?. 4 To justify the multiline, enter j and select top, zero, or bottom justification. 5 To change the scale of the multiline, enter s and enter a new scale. Now draw the multiline. 6 Specify the starting point. 7 Specify a second point. 8 Specify additional points, or press Enter. If you specify three or more points, you can enter c to close the multiline. To create a multiline style 1 Click Format menu ➤ Multiline Style. 658 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects 2 In the Multiline Style dialog box, click New. 3 In the Create New Multiline Style dialog box, enter a name for the multiline style and select a multiline style from which to start. Click Continue. 4 In the New Multiline Style dialog box, select the parameters for the multiline style. You can also enter a description. Descriptions are optional and can be up to 255 characters, including spaces. Draw Multiline Objects | 659 5 Click OK. 6 In the Multiline Style dialog box, click Save to save the multiline style to a file (the default is acad.mln). You can save multiline styles to the same file. If you create more than one multiline style, save the current style before creating a new one or you lose the changes to the first style. Quick Reference Commands OFFSET Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves. MLINE Creates multiple parallel lines. MLSTYLE Creates, modifies, and manages multiline styles. 660 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects System Variables CMLSTYLE Sets the multiline style that governs the appearance of the multiline. Draw Freehand Sketches Sketching is useful for creating irregular boundaries or for tracing with a digitizer. Draw freehand sketches with the SKETCH command. Freehand sketches comprise many line segments that are converted into a line, polyline, or spline. For Splines, you can determine how closely the spline’s curve fits to the freehand sketch. For any sketch type, set the minimum length (increment) of the line segments. Small line segments allow greater accuracy, but they can greatly increase the drawing file size. Before sketching, check the CELTYPE system variable to make sure the current linetype is BYLAYER. When you sketch with dot or dash linetypes, smaller line segments can become invisible. Sketch in Tablet Mode You use Tablet mode with a digitizer. Sketching in Tablet mode is useful for such things as tracing map outlines from paper directly into a drawing. You cannot turn off Tablet mode while sketching. When Tablet mode is on, you can configure the program to map the paper drawing's coordinate system directly into the world coordinate system. Thus, there is a direct correlation between the coordinates where screen crosshairs appear, the coordinates on the tablet, and the coordinates in the original paper drawing. After configuring the program to match the coordinates of the paper drawing, you may find that the area shown on the screen is not the area you Draw Freehand Sketches | 661 need. To avoid this problem, use ZOOM to display the entire work area before you start to sketch. With some digitizers, you cannot select the menus while Tablet mode is on. See your digitizer documentation for details. To draw freehand sketches 1 At the Command prompt, enter sketch and press Enter. 2 Press Enter again to accept the last saved type, increment, and tolerance values. 3 Click in the drawing area to begin sketching. 4 As you move the pointing device, freehand line segments of the specified length are drawn. SKETCH does not accept coordinate input. During the command, freehand lines are displayed in a different color. 5 Click the endpoint to suspend sketching, allowing you to move around the screen without drawing. Click a new start point to resume drawing from the new cursor position. 6 Press Enter to complete the sketch. Quick Reference Commands SKETCH Creates a series of freehand line segments. System Variables DIGITIZER Identifies digitizers connected to the system. MAXTOUCHES SKETCHINC Sets the record increment for the SKETCH command. SKPOLY Determines whether the SKETCH command generates lines, polylines, or splines. 662 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects SKTOLERANCE Draw Curved Objects Curved objects are arcs, circles, polyline arcs, donuts, ellipses, and splines. Draw Arcs To create an arc, you can specify various combinations of center, endpoint, start point, radius, angle, chord length, and direction values. You can create arcs in several ways. With the exception of the first method, arcs are drawn counterclockwise from the start point to the endpoint. Draw Arcs by Specifying Three Points You can create an arc by specifying three points. In the following example, the start point of the arc snaps to the endpoint of a line. The second point of the arc snaps to the middle circle in the illustration. Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, Center, End You can create an arc using a start point, center, and a third point that determines the endpoint. The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius. The endpoint is determined by a line from the center that passes through the third point. The resulting arc is always created counterclockwise from the start point. Using different options, you can specify either the start point first or the center point first. Draw Curved Objects | 663 Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, Center, Angle You can create an arc using a start point, center, and an included angle. The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius. The other end of the arc is determined by specifying an included angle that uses the center of the arc as the vertex. The resulting arc is always created counterclockwise from the start point. Using different options, you can specify either the start point first or the center point first. The included angle determines the endpoint of the arc. Use the Start, End, Angle method when you know both endpoints but cannot snap to a center point. Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, Center, Length You can create an arc using a start point, center, and the length of a chord. The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius. The other end of the arc is determined by specifying the length of a chord 664 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects between the start point and the endpoint of the arc. The resulting arc is always created counterclockwise from the start point. Using different options, you can specify either the start point first or the center point first. The length of the chord of the arc determines the included angle. Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, End, Angle You can create an arc using a start point, endpoint, and an included angle. The included angle between the endpoints of the arc determines the center and the radius of the arc. Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, End, Direction You can create an arc using a start point, endpoint, and a tangent direction at the start point. The tangent direction can be specified either by locating a point on the desired tangent line, or by entering an angle. You can determine which endpoint controls the tangent by changing the order in which you specify the two endpoints. Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, End, Radius You can create an arc using a start point, endpoint, and a radius. The direction of the bulge of the arc is determined by the order in which you specify its endpoints. You can specify the radius either by entering it or by specifying a point at the desired radius distance. Draw Arcs | 665 Draw Contiguous Tangent Arcs and Lines Immediately after you create an arc, you can start a line that is tangent to the arc at an endpoint by starting the LINE command and pressing Enter at the Specify First Point prompt. You need to specify only the line length. Immediately after you create a line or an arc, you can start an arc that is tangent at an endpoint by starting the ARC command and pressing Enter at the Specify Start Point prompt. You need to specify only the endpoint of the new arc. See also: ■ Draw Polylines on page 649 ■ Break and Join Objects on page 783 To draw an arc by specifying three points 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Arc drop-down ➤ 3-Point. 2 Specify the start point. 3 Specify a point on the arc. 4 Specify the endpoint. 666 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects To draw an arc using a start point, a center point, and an endpoint 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Arc drop-down ➤ Start, Center, End. 2 Specify a start point. 3 Specify the center point. 4 Specify the endpoint. To continue an arc with a tangential line 1 Complete the arc. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line. 3 Press Enter at the first prompt. 4 Enter the length of the line and press Enter. To continue an arc with a tangential arc 1 Complete the arc. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Arc drop-down ➤ Continue. 3 Specify the second endpoint of the tangent arc. Quick Reference Commands ARC Creates an arc. LINE Creates straight line segments. OFFSET Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves. Draw Arcs | 667 VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. System Variables ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. LASTANGLE Stores the end angle of the last arc entered relative to the XY plane of the current UCS for the current space. WHIPARC Controls whether the display of circles and arcs is smooth. Draw Circles To create circles, you can specify various combinations of center, radius, diameter, points on the circumference, and points on other objects. You can create circles in several ways. The default method is to specify the center and the radius. Three other ways to draw a circle are shown in the illustration. Draw a Circle Tangent to Other Objects The tangent point is a point where an object touches another object without intersecting it. To create a circle that is tangent to other objects, select the objects and then specify the radius of the circle. In the illustrations below, the bold circle is the one being drawn, and points 1 and 2 select the objects to which it is tangent. 668 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects To create a circle tangent at three points, set running object snaps (OSNAP) to Tangent and use the three-point method to create the circle. See also: ■ Use Object Snaps on page 585 ■ Draw Isometric Circles on page 2003 To draw a circle by specifying a center point and radius or diameter 1 Do one of the following: ■ Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ Center, Radius. ■ Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ Center, Diameter. 2 Specify the center point. 3 Specify the radius or diameter. To create a circle tangent to two objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ Tan, Tan, Radius. The command starts Tangent object snap mode. 2 Select the first object to draw the circle tangent to. Draw Circles | 669 3 Select the second object to draw the circle tangent to. 4 Specify the radius of the circle. Quick Reference Commands CIRCLE Creates a circle. OFFSET Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves. System Variables CIRCLERAD Sets the default circle radius. WHIPARC Controls whether the display of circles and arcs is smooth. Draw Polyline Arcs A polyline is a connected sequence of line segments created as a single object. You can create straight line segments, arc segments, or a combination of the two. Multisegmented lines provide editing capabilities unavailable for single lines. For example, you can adjust their width and curvature. After you've created a polyline, you can edit it with PEDIT or use EXPLODE to convert it to individual line and arc segments. You can ■ Convert a spline-fit polyline into a true spline with SPLINE 670 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects ■ Use closed polylines to create a polygon ■ Create a polyline from the boundaries of overlapping objects Create Arc Polylines When you draw arc segments in a polyline, the first point of the arc is the endpoint of the previous segment. You can specify the angle, center point, direction, or radius of the arc. You can also complete the arc by specifying a second point and an endpoint. Create Closed Polylines You can draw a closed polyline to create a polygon. To close a polyline, specify the starting point of the last side of the object, enter c (Close), and press Enter. Create Wide Polylines You can draw polylines of various widths by using the Width and Halfwidth options. You can set the width of individual segments and make them taper gradually from one width to another. These options become available after you specify a starting point for the polyline. The Width and Halfwidth options set the width of the next polyline segments you draw. Zero (0) width produces a thin line. Widths greater than zero produce wide lines, which are filled if Fill mode is on and outlined if Fill mode is off. The Halfwidth option sets width by specifying the distance from the center of the wide polyline to an outside edge. Taper When you use the Width option, you are prompted for both a starting and an ending width. By entering different values, you can taper the polyline. The starting and ending points of wide polyline segments are in the center of the line. Intersections of adjacent wide segments are usually beveled. However, nontangent arc segments, acute angles, or segments that use a dash-dot linetype are not beveled. Draw Polyline Arcs | 671 Create Polylines from the Boundaries of Objects You can create a polyline from the boundaries of overlapping objects that form a closed area. A polyline created using the boundary method is a separate object, distinct from the objects used to create it. You can edit it using the same methods used to edit other polylines. To expedite the boundary selection process in large or complex drawings, you can specify a group of boundary candidates, called a boundary set. You create this set by selecting the objects you want to use to define the boundary. See also: ■ Modify Splines on page 794 ■ Modify Polylines on page 787 ■ Break and Join Objects on page 783 ■ Control Lineweights on page 532 ■ Infer Geometric Constraints on page 823 To draw a polyline with straight segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline. 2 Specify the first point of the polyline. 3 Specify the endpoint of the first polyline segment. 4 Continue specifying segment endpoints as needed. 5 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline. To start a new polyline at the endpoint of the last polyline drawn, start the PLINE command again and press Enter at the Specify Start Point prompt. 672 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects To draw a line and arc combination polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline. 2 Specify the start point of the polyline segment. 3 Specify the endpoint of the polyline segment. ■ Switch to Arc mode by entering a (Arc) at the Command prompt. ■ Return to Line mode by entering L (Line). 4 Specify additional polyline segments as needed. 5 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline. To create a wide polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline. 2 Specify the start point of the line segment. 3 Enter w (Width). 4 Enter the starting width of the line segment. 5 Specify the ending width of the line segment using one of the following methods: ■ To create a line segment of equal width, press Enter. ■ To create a tapering line segment, enter a different width. 6 Specify the endpoint of the polyline segment. 7 Continue specifying segment endpoints as needed. 8 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline. To create a boundary polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary. 2 In the Boundary Creation dialog box, in the Object Type list, select Polyline. Draw Polyline Arcs | 673 3 Under Boundary Set, do one of the following: ■ To create a boundary set from all objects visible in the current viewport, select Current Viewport in the list. Avoid this option for large, complex drawings. ■ To specify which objects to include in the boundary set, click New. Select the objects that you want to use to create the boundary. Choosing this option automatically selects the Existing Set option. 4 Click Pick Points. 5 Specify points within each area that you want to form a boundary polyline. This area must be totally enclosed; that is, there can be no gaps between enclosing objects. You can select more than one area. 6 Press Enter to create the boundary polyline and end the command. The command creates a polyline in the shape of the boundary. Because this polyline overlaps the objects used to create it, it may not be visible. However, you can move, copy, or modify it just as you can any other polyline. Quick Reference Commands 3DPOLY Creates a 3D polyline. BOUNDARY Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area. OFFSET Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves. PEDIT Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. PLINE Creates a 2D polyline. 674 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. System Variables FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. HPBOUND Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY. PLINECONVERTMODE Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines. PLINEGEN Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices of a 2D polyline. PLINETYPE Specifies whether optimized 2D polylines are used. PLINEWID Stores the default polyline width. Draw Donuts Donuts are filled rings or solid-filled circles that actually are closed polylines with width. To create a donut, you specify its inside and outside diameters and its center. You can continue creating multiple copies with the same diameter by specifying different center points. To create solid-filled circles, specify an inside diameter of 0. Draw Donuts | 675 To create a donut 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Donut. 2 Specify the inside diameter (1). 3 Specify the outside diameter (2). 4 Specify the center of the donut (3). 5 Specify the center point for another donut, or press Enter to complete the command. Quick Reference Commands DONUT Creates a filled circle or a wide ring. FILL Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, 2D solids, and wide polylines. System Variables DONUTID Sets the default for the inside diameter of a donut. DONUTOD Sets the default for the outside diameter of a donut. FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. 676 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects Draw Ellipses The shape of an ellipse is determined by two axes that define its length and width. The longer axis is called the major axis, and the shorter one is the minor axis. The illustrations below show two different ellipses created by specifying axis and distance. The third point specifies only a distance and does not necessarily designate the axis endpoint. If you are drawing on isometric planes to simulate 3D, you can use ellipses to represent isometric circles viewed from an oblique angle. First you need to turn on Isometric Snap in the Drafting Settings dialog box. See also: ■ Draw Isometric Circles on page 2003 ■ Break and Join Objects on page 783 To draw an isometric circle 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Drafting Settings. 2 In the Drafting Settings dialog box, Snap and Grid tab, under Snap Type and Style, click Isometric Snap. Click OK. Draw Ellipses | 677 3 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ellipse drop-down ➤ Axis, End. 4 Enter i (Isocircle). 5 Specify the center of the circle. 6 Specify the radius or diameter of the circle. To draw a true ellipse using endpoints and distance 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ellipse drop-down ➤ Axis, End. 2 Specify the first endpoint of the first axis (1). 3 Specify the second endpoint of the first axis (2). 4 Drag the pointing device away from the midpoint, and click to specify a distance (3) for half the length of the second axis. To draw an elliptical arc using start and end angles 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ellipse drop-down ➤ Elliptical Arc. 2 Specify endpoints for the first axis (1 and 2). 3 Specify a distance to define half the length of the second axis (3). 4 Specify the start angle (4). 5 Specify the end angle (5). 678 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects The elliptical arc is drawn counterclockwise between the start point and endpoint. Quick Reference Commands ELLIPSE Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc. System Variables ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. PELLIPSE Controls the ellipse type created with ELLIPSE. Draw Splines See also: ■ Modify Splines on page 794 ■ Break and Join Objects on page 783 ■ Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves on page 966 ■ Edit NURBS Surfaces on page 1155 ■ Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves on page 1157 A spline is a smooth curve that passes through or near a given set of points. Draw Splines | 679 The SPLINE command creates a type of curve known as a nonuniform rational B-spline (NURBS). A NURBS curve produces a smooth curve between control vertices or fit points. The spline on the left is drawn with fit points, and the spline on the right is drawn with control vertices. Close the spline so that the start and endpoints are coincident and tangent. Splines are a critical tool for creating NURBS surfaces for 3D modeling. You can revolve, loft, sweep, and extrude open and closed splines to create surface objects. NOTE Because periodic curves on page 2174 are not currently supported, 3D surfaces created from closed spines may kink when reshaped. Fit Points vs. Control Vertices There are different drawing options available depending on whether you use fit points or control vertices. ■ Fit Points (Interpolated) - Specify the knot parameterization and tolerance settings, but not the degree setting (a degree 3 spline is always created). ■ Control Vertices - You can specify the tolerance and degree settings, but not the knot parameterization. To draw a spline with control vertices 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Curves panel ➤ Spline CV. 2 Click in the drawing area to create the spline. 3 When you are done, press Enter. To draw a spline with fit points 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Curves panel ➤ Spline Knot. 2 Click in the drawing area to create the spline. 680 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects 3 When you are done, press Enter. To draw a spline in 2D workspace 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Spline. 2 Click in the drawing area to create the spline. 3 When you are done, press Enter. To convert a spline-fit polyline to a spline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Spline. 2 Enter o (Object). 3 Select a spline-fit polyline and press Enter. The selected object changes from a polyline to a spline. Quick Reference Commands PEDIT Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. PLINE Creates a 2D polyline. SPLINE Creates a smooth curve that passes through fit points or near control vertices. SPLINEDIT Edits a spline or spline-fit polyline. System Variables PLINECONVERTMODE Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines. Draw Splines | 681 Draw Helixes A helix is an open 2D or 3D spiral. You can use a helix as a path with the SWEEP command. For example, you might sweep a circle along a helix path to create a solid model of a spring. When you create a helix, you can specify the following: ■ Base radius ■ Top radius ■ Height ■ Number of turns ■ Turn height ■ Twist direction If you specify the same value for both the base radius and the top radius, then a cylindrical helix is created. By default, the top radius is set to the same value as the base radius. You cannot specify 0 for both the base radius and top radius. If you specify different values for the top radius and the base radius, then a conical helix is created. If you specify a height value of 0, then a flat, 2D spiral is created. NOTE A helix is a spline approximation of a real helix. Length values may not be completely accurate. However, when you use a helix as a sweep path, the resulting values will be accurate regardless of the approximation. See also: ■ Modify Helixes on page 797 ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping on page 972 To create a helix 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Helix. 2 Specify the center point for the base of the helix. 3 Specify the base radius. 682 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects 4 Specify the top radius or press Enter to specify the same value as the base radius. 5 Specify the height of the helix. Quick Reference Commands HELIX Creates a 2D spiral or 3D spring. Draw Construction and Reference Geometry Construction lines and reference points are temporary objects you create to help you draw accurately. Draw Reference Points Point objects are useful as nodes or reference geometry for object snaps and relative offsets. You can set the style of the points and their size relative to the screen or in absolute units. Changing the style of points ■ Makes them more visible and easier to differentiate from grid dots ■ Affects the display of all point objects in the drawing ■ Requires using REGEN to make the change visible To set point style and size 1 Click Format menu ➤ Point Style. 2 In the Point Style dialog box, select a point style. 3 In the Point Size box, specify a size, either relative to the screen or in absolute units. 4 Click OK. Draw Construction and Reference Geometry | 683 To create a point object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point drop-down ➤ Multiple Points. 2 Specify the point location. You can snap to a point using the Node object snap. Quick Reference Commands DDPTYPE Specifies the display style and size of point objects. POINT Creates a point object. System Variables PDMODE Controls how point objects are displayed. PDSIZE Sets the display size for point objects. Draw Construction Lines (and Rays) Lines that extend to infinity in one or both directions, known as rays and construction lines, respectively, can be used as references for creating other objects. For example, you can use construction lines to find the center of a triangle, prepare multiple views of the same item, or create temporary intersections to use for object snaps. Infinite lines do not change the total area of the drawing. Therefore, their infinite dimensions have no effect on zooming or viewpoints, and they are ignored by commands that display the drawing extents. You can move, rotate, and copy infinite lines just as you can move, rotate, and copy other objects. 684 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects You may want to create infinite lines on a construction line layer that can be frozen or turned off before plotting. Construction Lines A construction line () can be placed anywhere in three-dimensional space. You can specify its orientation in several ways. The default method for creating the line is the two-point method: you specify two points to define the orientation. The first point, the root, is the conceptual midpoint of the construction line, that is, the point snapped to by the Midpoint object snap. You can also create construction lines in several other ways. ■ Horizontal and Vertical. Create construction lines that pass through a point you specify and are parallel to the X or Y axis of the current UCS. ■ Angle. Creates a construction line in one of two ways. Either you select a reference line and then specify the angle of the construction line from that line, or you create a construction line at a specific angle to the horizontal axis by specifying an angle and then a point through which the construction line should pass. ■ Bisector. Creates a construction line that bisects an angle you specify. You specify the vertex and the lines that create the angle. ■ Offset. Creates a construction line parallel to a baseline you specify. You specify the offset distance, select the baseline, and then indicate on which side of the baseline to locate the construction line. Rays A ray is a line in three-dimensional space that starts at a point you specify and extends to infinity. Unlike construction lines, which extend in two directions, rays extend in only one direction. Using rays instead of construction lines can help reduce visual clutter. Like construction lines, rays are ignored by commands that display the drawing extents. Draw Construction Lines (and Rays) | 685 To create a construction line by specifying two points 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Construction Line. 2 Specify a point to define the root of the construction line. 3 Specify a second point through which the construction line should pass. 4 Continue to specify construction lines as needed. All subsequent xlines pass through the first point specified. 5 Press Enter to end the command. To create a ray 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ray. 2 Specify a starting point for the ray. 3 Specify a point through which the ray should pass. 4 Continue to specify points to create additional rays as needed. All subsequent rays pass through the first point specified. 5 Press Enter to end the command. 686 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects Quick Reference Commands RAY Creates a line that starts at a point and continues to infinity. XLINE Creates a line of infinite length. Create and Combine Areas (Regions) Regions are two-dimensional enclosed areas that have physical properties such as centroids or centers of mass. You can combine existing regions into a single, complex region to calculate area. You can create regions from objects that form closed loops. Loops can be combinations of lines, polylines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, and splines that enclose an area. Regions can be used for ■ Applying hatching and shading ■ Analyzing properties, such as area, using MASSPROP ■ Extracting design information, such as the centroid You can create regions out of multiple loops and out of open curves whose endpoints are connected and form loops. You cannot form regions from open objects that intersect to form a closed area: for example, intersecting arcs or self-intersecting curves. Create and Combine Areas (Regions) | 687 You can create regions using the REGION and BOUNDARY commands. You create composite regions by combining, subtracting, or finding the intersection of regions. Objects combined using UNION: Objects combined using SUBTRACT: Objects combined using INTERSECT: Invalid Boundaries When a boundary cannot be determined, it might be because the specified internal point is not within a fully enclosed area. Red circles are displayed around unconnected endpoints of the boundary to identify gaps in the boundary. 688 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects The red circles remain displayed even after you exit the REGION or BOUNDARY command. They are removed when you specify a closed boundary, or by using the REDRAW, REGEN, or REGENALL command. To define regions 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Region. 2 Select objects to create the region. These objects must each form an enclosed area, such as a circle or a closed polyline. 3 Press Enter. A message at the Command prompt indicates how many loops were detected and how many regions were created. To define regions by using boundaries 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary. 2 In the Boundary Creation dialog box, in the Object Type list, select Region. 3 Click Pick Points. 4 Specify a point in your drawing inside each closed area that you want to define as a region and press Enter. This point is known as the internal point. Create and Combine Areas (Regions) | 689 NOTE You can make a new boundary set to limit the objects used to determine the boundary. To combine regions by adding 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Union. 2 Select one region for the union. 3 Select another region. You can select regions to unite in any order. 4 Continue selecting regions or press Enter to end the command. The command converts the selected regions to a new combined region. To combine regions by subtracting 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Subtract. 2 Select one or more regions from which to subtract and press Enter. 3 Select the region to subtract and press Enter. The areas of the second regions you selected are subtracted from the areas of the first regions. To combine regions by finding intersections 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Intersect. 2 Select one region of the intersection. 3 Select another intersecting region. You can select regions in any order to find their intersection. 4 Continue selecting regions or press Enter to end the command. The command converts the selected regions to a new region defined by the intersection of the selected regions. 690 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects Quick Reference Commands BOUNDARY Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area. INTERSECT Creates a 3D solid, surface, or 2D region from overlapping solids, surfaces, or regions. MASSPROP Calculates the mass properties of regions or 3D solids. REGION Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object. SUBTRACT Combines selected 3D solids or 2D regions by subtraction. UNION Combines selected 3D solids, surfaces, or 2D regions by addition. System Variables DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted. Create Revision Clouds Revision clouds are polylines that consist of sequential arcs. They are used to call attention to parts of a drawing during the review stage. If you review or redline drawings, you can increase your productivity by using the Revision Cloud feature to highlight your markups. REVCLOUD creates a polyline of sequential arcs to form a cloud-shaped object. You can select a style for a revision cloud: Normal or Calligraphy. If you select Calligraphy, the revision cloud looks as if it was drawn with a calligraphy pen. You can create a revision cloud from scratch, or you can convert objects, such as a circle, ellipse, polyline, or spline, to a revision cloud. When you convert an object to a revision cloud, the original object is deleted if DELOBJ is set to 1 (the default). Create Revision Clouds | 691 You can set the minimum and maximum default values for the arc lengths of a revision cloud. When you draw a revision cloud, you can vary the size of the arcs by using pick points for the smaller arc segments. You can also edit the individual arc lengths and chord lengths of a revision cloud by adjusting the pick points. REVCLOUD stores the last used arc length as a multiple of the DIMSCALE system variable to provide consistency among drawings with different scale factors. Make sure that you can see the entire area to be outlined with REVCLOUD before you begin the command. REVCLOUD is not designed to support transparent and real-time panning and zooming. To create a revision cloud from scratch 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Revision Cloud. 2 At the Command prompt, specify a new minimum and maximum arc length or specify a revision cloud starting point. The default minimum and maximum arc lengths are set to 0.5000 units. The maximum arc length can be no more than three times the minimum arc length. 3 Guide the crosshairs along the cloud path. You can click pick points along the path if you want to vary the size of the arcs. 4 Press Enter at any time to stop drawing the revision cloud. To close the revision cloud, return to its starting point. To create revision clouds with a calligraphy pen style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Revision Cloud. 692 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects 2 At the Command prompt, enter style. 3 At the Command prompt, enter calligraphy. 4 Press Enter to save the calligraphy setting and to continue with the command, or press ESC to end the command. To convert an object to a revision cloud 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Revision Cloud. 2 At the Command prompt, specify a new minimum and maximum arc length or press Enter. The default minimum and maximum arc lengths are set to 0.5000 units. The maximum arc length can be no more than three times the minimum arc length. 3 Select the circle, ellipse, polyline, or spline that you want to convert to a revision cloud. To reverse the direction of the arcs, enter yes at the Command prompt and press Enter. 4 Press Enter to change the selected object to a revision cloud. To change the default values for arc lengths in a revision cloud 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Revision Cloud. 2 At the Command prompt, specify a new minimum arc length and press Enter. 3 At the Command prompt, specify a new maximum arc length and press Enter. The maximum arc length can be no more than three times the minimum arc length. 4 Press Enter to continue with the command or ESC to end the command. To edit the individual lengths of arcs or chords in a revision cloud 1 In your drawing, select the revision cloud you want to edit. Create Revision Clouds | 693 2 Move the pick points along the path of the revision cloud to change the arc lengths and chords. Quick Reference Commands REVCLOUD Creates a revision cloud using a polyline. System Variables DIMSCALE Sets the overall scale factor applied to dimensioning variables that specify sizes, distances, or offsets. DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted. 694 | Chapter 18 Draw Geometric Objects Change Existing Objects 19 You can select objects, view and edit object properties, and perform general and object-specific editing operations. Select Objects You have a wide range of options when you need to select objects for editing operations. Select Objects Individually At the Select Objects prompt, you can select one or more objects individually. Use the Pickbox Cursor When the square pickbox cursor is in position to select an object, the object is highlighted. Click to select the object. You can control the size of the pickbox in the Options dialog box, Selection tab. Select Objects Close Together It is difficult to select objects that are close together or lie directly on top of one another. The example shows two lines and a circle that lie within the pickbox. 695 If selection preview is turned on, you can cycle through the objects by rolling over the object on top to highlight it, and pressing and holding Shift and then pressing Spacebar continuously. When the required object is highlighted, left-click to select it. If selection preview is turned off, hold down Shift + Spacebar and click to cycle through these objects, one after the other, until the one you want is selected. Press Esc to turn off cycling. Remove Selection from Objects Remove objects from the current selection set by holding down Shift and selecting them again. See also: ■ Modify 3D Subobjects on page 1119 ■ Modify Composite Solids and Surfaces on page 1136 To select a single object 1 At the Select Objects prompt of any command, move the rectangular pickbox cursor so that the object that you want to select is highlighted. 2 Click the object. The object you selected is highlighted. 3 Press Enter to end object selection. NOTE If the PICKFIRST system variable is set to 1 (noun-verb selection), you can select objects before entering a command. To change the size of the pickbox cursor 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 On the Selection tab, under Pickbox Size, move the pickbox size slider until the pickbox is the size you want to use. 3 Click OK. To cycle through objects for selection 1 At the Select Objects prompt, hold down Shift + Spacebar. Click as near as possible to the object you want. 696 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects 2 Keep clicking until the object you want is highlighted. 3 Press Enter to select the object. NOTE If selection preview is turned on, you can cycle through the objects by rolling over the object on top to highlight it, and pressing and holding Shift and then pressing Spacebar continuously. When the required object is highlighted, left-click to select it. To remove selection from objects ■ Hold down Shift. Click the objects that you want removed from the selection set. Quick Reference PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set. 3DSELECTIONMODE Controls the selection precedence of both visually and physically overlapping objects when using 3D visual styles. HIGHLIGHT Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects selected with grips. LEGACYCTRLPICK Specifies the keys for selection cycling and the behavior for Ctrl+click. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing at the Select Objects prompt. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. Select Objects Individually | 697 PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. Select Multiple Objects At the Select Objects prompt, you can select many objects at the same time. Specify a Rectangular Selection Area Specify opposite corners to define a rectangular area. The background inside the area changes color and becomes transparent. The direction that you drag your cursor from the first point to the opposite corner determines which objects are selected. ■ Window selection. Drag your cursor from left to right to select only objects that are entirely enclosed by the rectangular area. ■ Crossing selection. Drag your cursor from right to left to select objects that the rectangular window encloses or crosses. 698 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects With a window selection, usually the entire object must be contained in the rectangular selection area. However, if an object with a noncontinuous (dashed) linetype is only partially visible in the viewport and all the visible vectors of the linetype can be enclosed within the selection window, the entire object is selected. Specify an Irregularly Shaped Selection Area Specify points to define an irregularly shaped area. Use window polygon selection to select objects entirely enclosed by the selection area. Use crossing polygon selection to select objects enclosed or crossed by the selection area. Specify a Selection Fence In a complex drawing, use a selection fence. A selection fence looks like a polyline and selects only the objects it passes through. The circuit board illustration shows a fence selecting several components. Use Other Selection Options You can see all selection options by entering ? at the Select Objects prompt. For a description of each of the selection options, see SELECT. Remove Selection from Multiple Objects You can enter r (Remove) at the Select Objects prompt and use any selection option to remove objects from the selection set. If you are using the Remove option and want to return to adding objects to the selection set, enter a (Add). Select Multiple Objects | 699 You can also remove objects from the current selection set by holding down Shift and selecting them again, or by holding down Shift and then clicking and dragging window or crossing selections. You can add and remove objects repeatedly from the selection set. To see a list of options at the Select Objects prompt ■ Enter ? at the Select Objects prompt. To select objects within an irregularly shaped area 1 At the Select Objects prompt, enter wp (Window Polygon). 2 Specify points that define an area entirely enclosing the objects you want to select. 3 Press Enter to close the polygon selection area and complete the selection. To select objects crossing an irregularly shaped area 1 At the Select Objects prompt, enter cp (Crossing Polygon). 2 Specify points that define an area that encloses or crosses the objects you want to select. 3 Press Enter to close the polygon selection area and complete the selection. To select objects with a fence 1 At the Select Objects prompt, enter f (Fence). 2 Specify points to create a fence that passes through the objects you want to select. 3 Press Enter to complete the selection. To remove several objects from the selection set 1 After selecting objects, at the Select Objects prompt, enter r (Remove). 2 Enter any selection option such as cp (Crossing Polygon) or f (Fence), and select the objects to be removed from the selection set. To return to adding objects to the selection set, enter a (Add). 700 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Quick Reference PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. QSELECT Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria. SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set. HIGHLIGHT Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects selected with grips. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing at the Select Objects prompt. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. PREVIEWEFFECT Specifies the visual effect used for previewing selection of objects. Prevent Objects from Being Selected You can prevent objects on specified layers from being selected and modified by locking those layers. Typically, you lock layers to prevent accidental editing of particular objects. Other operations are still possible when a layer is locked. For example, you can make a locked layer current, and you can add objects to it. You can also Prevent Objects from Being Selected | 701 use inquiry commands (such as LIST), use object snaps to specify points on objects on locked layers, and change the draw order of objects on locked layers. To help you differentiate between locked and unlocked layers, you can do the following: ■ Hover over an object to see whether a lock icon is displayed ■ Dim the objects on locked layers NOTE Grips are not displayed on objects that are on locked layers. To lock or unlock a layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties. 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the padlock for the layers that you want to lock. 3 Click OK. If the padlock is closed, the layer is locked and objects on that layer cannot be selected. To lock or unlock a layer by selecting an object on that layer 1 Click the Model tab. 2 Do either of the following: ■ Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Lock. ■ Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Unlock. 3 Select an object on the layer you want to lock or unlock. 702 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Quick Reference LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LAYISO Hides or locks all layers except those of the selected objects. LAYLCK Locks the layer of a selected object. LAYULK Unlocks the layer of a selected object. LAYLOCKFADECTL Controls the amount of fading for objects on locked layers. Select Objects by Properties Use object properties or object types to include objects in a selection set, or to exclude them. To quickly define a selection set based on specified filtering criteria, use ■ Quick Select (QSELECT) from the Properties palette to filter selection sets by property (such as color) and by object type ■ Object Selection Filters dialog box (FILTER) to filter selection sets by property and by object type ■ Select Similar (SELECTSIMILAR) to select similar objects of the same type based on specified matching properties If you added a feature classification to an object using Autodesk or a third-party application, you can select objects by classification property. With object selection filters, you can name and save filters for future use. With Quick Select or object selection filters, to filter your selection set based on color, linetype, or lineweight, consider whether these properties are set to BYLAYER for any objects in your drawing. For example, an object may appear red because its color is set to BYLAYER and the layer color is red. By default, objects of the same type are considered similar if they are on the same layer, and, for blocks and other referenced objects, have the same name. Select Objects by Properties | 703 Subobjects are only considered at the object level. For example, when a mesh vertex is selected, SELECTSIMILAR selects other mesh objects, not just the mesh vertices. ® NOTE If an application such as AutoCAD Map 3D was used to add a feature classification to an object, and the associated classification (XML) file is present, you can select objects by classification property. Specifically, you can select a classification in the Object Type box and a property in the Properties box. See also: ■ Customize Object Selection on page 707 ■ Work with Layers on page 471 To create a selection set using Quick Select 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Quick Select. 2 In the Quick Select dialog box, under Apply To, select Entire Drawing. 3 Under Object Type, select Multiple. 4 Under Properties, select Color. 5 Under Operator, select Equals. 6 Under Value, specify the color. 7 Under How to Apply, select Include in New Selection Set. 8 Click OK. To exclude objects from the selection set You can exclude objects from the current selection set by using the Exclude from New Selection Set option. In the following example, you exclude all circles with a radius greater than 1 from a set of objects already selected. 1 Select several objects. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Quick Select. 3 In the Quick Select dialog box, under Apply To, select Current Selection. 704 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects 4 Under Object Type, select Circle. 5 Under Properties, select Radius. 6 Under Operator, select Greater Than. 7 Under Value, enter 1. 8 Under How to Apply, select Exclude from New Selection Set. 9 Click OK. All circles with a radius greater than 1 are removed from the selection set. To append objects to the selection set You can use Quick Select to append objects to a current selection set. In the following example, you keep the current selection set and append all objects in the drawing that contain hyperlinks whose names begin with bld1_. 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Quick Select. 2 In the Quick Select dialog box, select Append to Current Selection Set. 3 In the Object Type box, select Multiple. 4 Under Properties, select Hyperlink. 5 Under Operator, select Wildcard Match. 6 Under Value, enter bld1_*. 7 Under How to Apply, select Include in New Selection Set. 8 Click OK. To name and save a filtered list 1 At the Command prompt, enter filter. 2 In the Object Selection Filters dialog box, under Select Filter, select a filter such as Line. 3 Click Add to List. 4 Under Save As, enter a filter name such as Linefilter. 5 Click Save As. Select Objects by Properties | 705 6 Click Apply. The filter is applied so you can select, in this case, only lines in the drawing. If you select objects with a selection, the filter is applied to all objects in the selection area. To use a named filter 1 At the Select Object prompt, enter 'filter. (The apostrophe makes it a transparent command.) 2 In the Object Selection Filters dialog box, under Select Filter, select the filter you want to use. Click Apply. 3 Use a crossing window to specify objects for selection. Only the objects selected by the crossing window that match the filter criteria are selected. To create a selection set of similar objects 1 Enter selectsimilar. 2 Enter se (settings). 3 In the Select Similar Settings dialog box, select the properties that must match for objects of the same type to be considered similar. If no properties are selected, objects of the same type are selected. 4 Click OK. 5 Select object(s) as the selection criteria. 6 Press Enter to select similar objects. Quick Reference FILTER Creates a list of requirements that an object must meet to be included in a selection set. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. 706 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects QSELECT Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria. SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set. SELECTSIMILAR Adds similar objects to the selection set based on selected objects. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing at the Select Objects prompt. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. SELECTSIMILARMODE Controls which properties must match for an object of the same type to be selected with SELECTSIMILAR. Customize Object Selection You can control several aspects of selecting objects, such as whether you enter a command first or select objects first, the size of the pickbox cursor, and how selected objects are displayed. For commands that use the Select Objects prompt, you can ■ Enter a command first, and then select objects ■ Select the objects first, and then enter a command Customize Object Selection | 707 You can also choose ■ Whether objects to be selected are previewed during selection ■ Whether selected objects are highlighted ■ How you define selection areas and how you create selection sets Select the Command First When you use an editing command, a Select Objects prompt is displayed and the crosshairs is replaced with a pickbox. You can respond to the Select Objects prompt in various ways: ■ Select objects one at a time. ■ Click an empty area. Drag the cursor to define a rectangular selection area. ■ Enter a selection option. Enter ? to display all selection options. ■ Combine selection methods. For example, to select most of the objects in the drawing area, select all objects and then remove the objects that you do not want selected. ■ Enter 'filter to use a named selection filter. The apostrophe runs the command transparently. Select Objects First You can use one of two methods to select objects before starting a command: ■ Use the SELECT command, and enter ? to display all selection options. All objects selected are put into the Previous selection set. To use the Previous selection set, enter p at the Select Objects prompt of any subsequent command. ■ When noun/verb selection is turned on, select objects at the Command prompt before entering a command such as MOVE, COPY, or ERASE. With this method, you can only select objects by clicking them individually or by using automatic selection. ■ Enter qselect to filter the selection. Then enter p at the Select Objects prompt of any subsequent command. 708 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Highlight Objects to Be Selected Objects are highlighted when the pickbox cursor rolls over them, providing a preview of which object will be selected when you click. When you specify an area to select multiple objects, the background of the area becomes transparent. These selection previewing effects are turned on by default. You can turn them off or change the appearance of selection previewing (Options dialog box, Selection tab). When the PICKBOX system variable is set to 0, selection previewing of objects is not available. Control the Appearance of Selected Objects By default, selected objects are displayed with dashed lines. You can increase program performance by setting the HIGHLIGHT system variable to 0. Turning off selection highlighting does not affect grips on selected objects. Set Up Default Selection Methods Options on the Selection tab of the Options dialog box control default selection methods: ■ Use selection previewing and selection area effects to preview selection. ■ Select objects before entering a command (noun-verb selection) or after entering a command. (PICKFIRST) ■ Press Shift to append objects to the selection set. (PICKADD) ■ Click and drag to create a selection window. Otherwise you must click twice to define the corners of a selection window. (PICKDRAG) ■ Start Window or Crossing selection automatically when you click an empty space. Otherwise, you must enter c or w to specify window crossing selection. (PICKAUTO) ■ Change the size of the pickbox. (PICKBOX) ■ Select all objects in a group when you select one object in that group. Customize Object Selection | 709 ■ Include the boundary in the selection set when you select a hatch. To change the size of the pickbox cursor 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, under Pickbox Size, move the slider until the pickbox is the size you want to use. 3 Click OK. To change object selection settings 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, make changes to the Selection Preview and Selection Modes areas and the pickbox size. 3 Click OK. To turn on or turn off selection previewing 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, select or clear options as follows: ■ Select the When a Command Is Active option to display the check mark. ■ Select the When No Command Is Active option to display the check mark. ■ Select both options to turn on selection preview whenever it is available. ■ Clear both options to turn off selection preview entirely. To change the appearance of selection previewing 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 710 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects 2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, click Visual Effect Settings. 3 In the Visual Effect Settings dialog box, select one of the following options: ■ Dash. Displays dashed lines. ■ Thicken. Displays thickened lines. ■ Both. Displays dashed and thickened lines. 4 Click OK to exit each dialog box. To exclude objects from selection previewing 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, click Visual Effect Settings. 3 In the Visual Effect Settings dialog box, click Advanced Options. 4 In the Advanced Preview Options dialog box, select any of the following options to exclude objects from selection previewing: ■ Exclude Objects on Locked Layers ■ Xrefs ■ Tables ■ Groups ■ Multiline Text ■ Hatches 5 Click OK to exit each dialog box. To change the appearance of the selection area 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, click Visual Effect Settings. Customize Object Selection | 711 3 In the Visual Effect Settings dialog box, change any of the following settings: ■ Indicate Selection Area. Select to display effects for selection areas. ■ Window Selection Color. Select a color, or click Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box. (WINDOWAREACOLOR system variable) ■ Crossing Selection Color. Select a color, or click Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box. (CROSSINGAREACOLOR system variable) ■ Selection Area Opacity. Use the slider to set transparency for selection areas. The lower the setting, the more transparent the area. A value of 100 makes the area opaque. (SELECTIONAREAOPACITY system variable) 4 Click OK to exit each dialog box. Quick Reference FILTER Creates a list of requirements that an object must meet to be included in a selection set. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. QSELECT Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria. CROSSINGAREACOLOR Controls the color of the selection area during crossing selection. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. HIGHLIGHT Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects selected with grips. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. 712 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing at the Select Objects prompt. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. PREVIEWEFFECT Specifies the visual effect used for previewing selection of objects. PREVIEWFILTER Excludes specified object types from selection previewing. SELECTIONAREA Controls the display of effects for selection areas. SELECTIONAREAOPACITY Controls the transparency of the selection area during window and crossing selection. SELECTIONPREVIEW Controls the display of selection previewing. WINDOWAREACOLOR Controls the color of the transparent selection area during window selection. Group Objects A group is a saved set of objects that you can select and edit together or separately as needed. Groups provide an easy way to combine drawing elements that you need to manipulate as a unit. Group Objects | 713 Overview of Groups A group is a saved set of objects that you can select and edit together or separately as needed. Groups provide an easy way to combine drawing elements that you need to manipulate as a unit. You can create them quickly and with a default name. TIP Groups are useful in associating 3D solids when you do not want to combine them with a Boolean operation. You can change the components of groups as you work by adding or removing objects. In some ways, groups resemble blocks, which provide another method of combining objects into a named set. For example, the groups you create are saved from session to session. However, you can edit individual objects in groups more easily than you can edit them in blocks, which must be exploded first. Unlike blocks, groups cannot be shared with other drawings. Quick Reference GROUP Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection. Create Groups In addition to choosing the objects that will become the members of a group, you can give the group a name and description. When you create a group, you can give the group a name and description. If you copy a group, the copy is given the default name Ax and is considered unnamed. Unnamed groups are not listed in the Object Grouping dialog box unless you select Include Unnamed. If you choose a member of a group that can be selected for inclusion in a new group, all members of the former group are included in the new group. The objects in your drawing can be members of more than one group, and groups themselves can be nested in other groups. You can ungroup a nested group to restore the original group configuration. 714 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Named groups are not maintained when you use a drawing as an external reference or insert it as a block. However, you can bind and then explode the external reference or explode the block to make the group available as an unnamed group. NOTE Avoid creating large groups containing hundreds or thousands of objects. A large group significantly degrades the performance of this program. To create a group 1 At the Command prompt, enter group. 2 In the Object Grouping dialog box, under Group Identification, enter a group name and a description. 3 In the Create Group area, click New. The dialog box closes temporarily. 4 Select objects and press Enter. 5 Click OK. Quick Reference GROUP Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection. Select Objects in Groups There are several methods for choosing a group, including selecting the group by name or selecting one of the members of the group. You can select groups by name at the Select Objects prompt. If the PICKSTYLE system variable is set to 1 or 3 and you select any member of a selectable group, all group members that meet the selection criteria are selected. You can also turn group selection on and off by pressing Ctrl+ H or Shift+Ctrl+A. All members of selectable groups are also selected when you use object selection cycling (for example, if you want to select an object that lies directly behind another object). Selecting an object that is a member of more than one selectable group selects all the members of all the groups that contain that Group Objects | 715 object. To select groups for editing with grips, use the pointing device to select the group at the Command prompt. To control whether all grouped objects can be selected individually Do one of the following: ■ At the Command prompt, enter pickstyle. Enter 1 to turn on group selection. Objects within groups can be selected as a group only, not individually. ■ At the Command prompt, enter pickstyle. Enter 0 to turn off group selection. Objects within groups can be selected individually only, not as a group. ■ At any time, turn group selection on and off by pressing either Ctrl+H or Ctrl+Shift+A. To control selectability for a specific group 1 At the Command prompt, enter group. 2 In the Object Grouping dialog box, under Group Name, click the group for which you want to change selectability. 3 Under Change Group, click Selectable. This changes whether objects within the group are either selectable as a group, subject to the PICKSTYLE system variable. If selectability is turned off, the objects in a group are selectable only as individual objects. At the top of the Object Grouping dialog box, under Selectable, each group displays its current status. 4 Click OK. To turn group selection on and off for all groups Quick Reference GROUP Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection. 716 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Edit Groups You can modify groups in a number of ways, including changing their membership, modifying their properties, revising the names and descriptions of groups, and removing them from the drawing. Edit Objects as a Group When group selection is turned on, you can move, copy, rotate, and modify groups just as you can modify individual objects. If you need to edit objects within a group, turn off group selection or use grips to edit individual objects. For more information, see Select Objects in Groups on page 715. In some circumstances, it is useful to control the order in which objects that belong to the same group are selected. For example, a custom routine that generates toolpaths for numerical control devices might depend on a series of contiguous objects in a specified order. You can reorder group members in two ways: either change the numerical position of individual members or ranges of group members, or reverse the order of all members. The first object in each group is number 0, not number 1. Change Group Components, Name, or Description With the Object Grouping dialog box, you can specify objects to be added to or removed from a group at any time. You can also revise a group's name or description. If deleting an object or removing it from a group leaves the group empty, the group remains defined but without any members. NOTE Exploding an object such as a block instance or hatch that belongs to a group does not automatically add the resulting components to any group. Remove Groups You can delete a group definition by using the “explode” option in the Object Grouping dialog box. This operation is not the same as exploding a block, hatch, or dimension. Objects that belonged to the exploded group remain in the drawing. As a result, the group is disbanded but the members are not changed in any other way. To delete a named group 1 At the Command prompt, enter group. Group Objects | 717 2 In the Object Grouping dialog box, select the group name from the list of groups. 3 Under Change Group, select Explode. 4 Click OK. The group is deleted. To reorder group members 1 At the Command prompt, enter group. 2 In the Object Grouping dialog box, under Change Group, click Re-Order. 3 In the Order Group dialog box, under Group Name, select the group to reorder. 4 To view the current order of this group, click Highlight. 5 In the Object Grouping dialog box, click Next or Previous to view the objects. Click OK when you have finished viewing the order of the objects. 6 In the Order Group dialog box, under Remove From Position, enter an object number. 7 Under Enter New Position Number for the Object, enter a new position. 8 Under Number of Objects, enter the object number or range of numbers to reorder. Click Re-Order. 9 Click OK to close each dialog box. Quick Reference GROUP Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection. Correct Mistakes You can backtrack your recent actions using one of several methods. 718 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Undo a Single Action The simplest method of backtracking is to use Undo on the Standard toolbar or the U command to undo a single action. Many commands include their own U (undo) option so that you can correct mistakes without leaving the command. When you are creating lines and polylines, for example, enter u to undo the last segment. NOTE By default, the UNDO command is set to combine consecutive pan and zoom commands into a single operation when you undo or redo. However, pan and zoom commands that are started from the menu are not combined, and always remain separate actions. Undo Several Actions at Once Use the Mark option of UNDO to mark an action as you work. You can then use the Back option of UNDO to undo all actions that occurred after the marked action. Use the Begin and End options of UNDO to define a set of actions to be treated as a group. You can also undo several actions at once with the Undo list on the Standard toolbar. Reverse the Effect of Undo You can reverse the effect of a single U or UNDO command by using REDO immediately after using U or UNDO. You can also redo several actions at once with the Redo list on the Standard toolbar. Erase Objects You can erase any object that you draw. If you accidentally erase the wrong object, you can use the UNDO command or the OOPS command to restore it. For more information, see Erase Objects on page 721. Cancel a Command You can cancel a command without completing it by pressing Esc. To undo the most recent action ■ Click Edit menu ➤ Undo. Correct Mistakes | 719 To undo a specific number of actions 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Undo list arrow. A list of actions that you can undo, starting with the most recent action, is displayed. 2 Drag to select the actions to undo. 3 Click to undo the selected actions. To redo an action ■ Click Edit menu ➤ Redo. Only the action immediately preceding an UNDO command can be reversed with REDO. You cannot use REDO to repeat another command. To redo a specific number of actions 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Redo list arrow. A list of undo actions that you can redo, starting with the most recent action, is displayed. 2 Drag to select the actions to redo. 3 Click to redo the selected actions. Quick Reference ERASE Removes objects from a drawing. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. OOPS Restores erased objects. REDO Reverses the effects of previous UNDO or U command. MREDO Reverses the effects of several previous UNDO or U commands. 720 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects U Reverses the most recent operation. UNDO Reverses the effect of commands. UNDOCTL Indicates the state of the Auto, Control, and Group options of the UNDO command. UNDOMARKS Stores the number of marks placed in the UNDO control stream by the Mark option. Erase Objects There are many ways to delete objects from your drawing and clean up the display. Remove Unused Definitions, Styles, and Objects You can remove unused named and unnamed objects with PURGE. Some of the unnamed objects you can purge include block definitions, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, and text styles. With PURGE you can also remove zero-length geometry and empty text objects. Clean Up the Display You can remove the plus-shaped markers called blips and stray pixels that may be left over from some editing operations from the display area. ■ To remove blips, use REDRAW. ■ To remove stray pixels, use REGEN. See also: ■ Correct Mistakes on page 718 To erase an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Erase. Erase Objects | 721 2 At the Select Objects prompt, use a selection method to select the objects to be erased or enter an option: ■ Enter L (Last) to erase the last object drawn. ■ Enter p (Previous) to erase the last selection set. ■ Enter all to erase all objects from the drawing. ■ Enter ? to see a list of all selection methods. 3 Press Enter to end the command. To restore the last erased object ■ At the Command prompt, enter oops. The last objects that were removed by ERASE, BLOCK, or WBLOCK are restored. To cut objects to the Clipboard 1 Select the objects you want to cut. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Cut. You can also press Ctrl+X. The objects are available to be pasted into other Windows applications. To remove plus-shaped marker blips ■ Click View menu ➤ Redraw. To purge an unused linetype 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Drawing Utilities panel ➤ Purge. The Purge dialog box displays a tree view of object types with items that can be purged. 2 To purge unreferenced linetypes, use one of the following methods: ■ To purge all unreferenced linetypes, select Linetypes. 722 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects ■ To purge specific linetypes, double-click Linetypes to expand the tree view. Then select the linetypes to be purged. If the item you want to purge is not listed, select View Items You Cannot Purge. 3 You are prompted to confirm each item in the list. If you do not want to confirm each purge, clear the Confirm Each Item to Be Purged option. 4 Click Purge. To confirm the purging of each item, respond to the prompt by choosing Yes or No, or Yes to All if more than one item is selected. 5 Click Close. To remove zero-length geometry and empty text objects 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Drawing Utilities panel ➤ Purge. The Purge dialog box displays. 2 Select Purge zero-length geometry and empty text objects. 3 Click Purge. 4 Click Close. Quick Reference CUTCLIP Copies selected objects to the Clipboard and removes them from the drawing. ERASE Removes objects from a drawing. OOPS Restores erased objects. PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. Erase Objects | 723 REDRAW Refreshes the display in the current viewport. REDRAWALL Refreshes the display in all viewports. REGEN Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport. UNDO Reverses the effect of commands. Use Windows Cut, Copy, and Paste When you want to use objects from a drawing file in another application, you can cut or copy these objects to the Clipboard and then paste them from the Clipboard into the other application. Cut Objects Cutting deletes selected objects from the drawing and stores them on the ® Clipboard. The objects are now available to be pasted into other Microsoft ® Windows documents. Copy Objects You can use the Clipboard to copy part or all of a drawing into a document created by another application. The objects are copied in vector format, which retains the high resolution in other applications. These objects are stored in WMF (Windows metafile) format in the Clipboard. The information stored in the Clipboard can then be embedded in the other document. Updating the original drawing does not update the copy embedded in the other application. Paste Objects Applications use different internal formats to store Clipboard information. When you copy objects to the Clipboard, information is stored in all available formats. When you paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing, the format that retains the most information is used. However, you can override this setting and convert pasted information to AutoCAD format. Because it is the easiest format to edit, the AutoCAD format is the preferred format for copying objects to and from AutoCAD. It retains all relevant object information, including block references and 3D aspects. 724 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects The Windows metafile (picture) format contains screen vector information, and files can be scaled and printed without losing resolution. Use this format to paste objects into Windows applications that support WMF files. Metafiles pasted into AutoCAD are of higher resolution than bitmapped images (BMP files) but are not as easily manipulated as AutoCAD objects. Bitmapped images are raster images consisting of a pattern of pixels and are commonly used by paint applications. The color of the object doesn't change when copied to the Clipboard. For example, white objects pasted onto a white background won't be visible. Use the WMFBKGND and WMFFOREGND system variables to control whether the background or foreground is transparent for metafile objects pasted into other applications. You can insert a linked or embedded object from the Clipboard into a drawing with PASTESPEC. If you convert pasted information to AutoCAD format, the object is inserted as a block reference. To edit the pasted information, explode the block reference into its component objects. When you convert a Windows metafile stored on the Clipboard to AutoCAD format, you may lose some scaling precision. To retain proper scaling, save objects in the original drawing as a block (WBLOCK), and then insert them into AutoCAD using INSERT. To cut objects to the Clipboard 1 Select the objects you want to cut. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Cut. You can also press Ctrl+X. The objects can be pasted into other Windows applications as well. To copy objects to the Clipboard 1 Select the objects you want to copy. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Copy Clip. You can also press Ctrl+C. To paste objects from the Clipboard ■ Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Paste. You can also press Ctrl+V. Use Windows Cut, Copy, and Paste | 725 The objects currently on the Clipboard are pasted into the drawing. To convert pasted information to drawing file format 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Paste Special. 2 In the Paste Special dialog box, select Paste. 3 From the list of formats, select Picture. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference COPYBASE Copies selected objects to the Clipboard along with a specified base point. COPYCLIP Copies selected objects to the Clipboard. CUTCLIP Copies selected objects to the Clipboard and removes them from the drawing. PASTEBLOCK Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing as a block. PASTECLIP Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing. PASTEORIG Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing using the original coordinates. PASTESPEC Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing and controls the format of the data. WMFIN Imports a Windows metafile. 726 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects WMFOPTS Sets options for WMFIN. WMFOUT Saves objects to a Windows metafile. OLEHIDE Controls the display and plotting of OLE objects. WMFBKGND Controls the background display when objects are inserted in Windows metafile (WMF) format. WMFFOREGND Controls the assignment of the foreground color when objects are inserted in Windows metafile (WMF) format. Modify Objects You can modify the size, shape, and location of objects. See also: ■ Work with Custom and Proxy Objects on page 1829 ■ Modify Existing Dimensions on page 1486 Choose a Method to Modify Objects Access object editing options using the following methods: Methods Descriptions Command line Enter a command and then select the objects to modify. Alternatively, select the objects first and then enter a command. Shortcut menu Select and right-click an object to display a shortcut menu with relevant editing options. Modify Objects | 727 Methods Descriptions Double-click Double-click an object to display the Properties palette or, in some cases, a dialog box or editor that is specific to that type of object. (You can specify the doubleclick action for each object type by customizing a CUIx file and loading it into the program.) Grips Control grip behavior with the following methods: ■ Grip Modes. Click a grip and rightclick to select one of the Grip modes (Stretch, Move, Rotate, Scale, or Mirror). ■ Multi-functional grip-editing options. Select a polyline, spline, or nonassociative polyline hatch object and hover over a grip to access additional options for reshaping the obejct. See also: ■ Change Text on page 1377 ■ Select Objects on page 695 ■ Modify Existing Dimensions on page 1486 ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects on page 467 ■ Work with Custom and Proxy Objects on page 1829 ■ “Double Click Actions” in the Customization Guide Quick Reference CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. 728 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set. DBLCLKEDIT Controls the double click editing behavior in the drawing area. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. Edit Objects with Grips Grips are displayed at strategic points on selected objects. Manipulate grips to modify objects. Use Grip Modes Grip modes control how an object behaves when manipulated with grips. Use Grip modes to stretch, move, scale, rotate, or mirror an object. To use a Grip mode, select a grip (base grip) to act as the base point for the action. (A selected grip is also called a hot grip.)Then press Enter or Spacebar to cycle through the Grip modes. You can also use shortcut keys or right-click to see all of the modes. Edit Objects with Grips | 729 NOTE Grips are not displayed on objects that are on locked layers. Stretch with Grips You can stretch an object by moving selected grips to new locations. Grips on text, block references, midpoints of lines, centers of circles, and point objects move the object rather than stretching it. This is an excellent method for moving block references and adjusting dimensions. NOTE When a 2D object lies on a plane other than the current UCS, the object is stretched on the plane on which it was created, not on the plane of the current UCS. Move with Grips You can move objects by the grip selected. Selected objects are highlighted and are moved the direction and distance of the next point location you specify. Scale with Grips You can scale selected objects relative to a base point. Increase the size of an object by dragging outward from the base grip and specifying a point location, or decrease the size by dragging inward. Alternatively, you can enter a value for relative scaling. Mirror with Grips You can mirror selected objects across a temporary mirror line. Turning Ortho on helps you specify a vertical or horizontal mirror line. 730 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Rotate with Grips You can rotate selected objects around a base point by dragging and specifying a point location. Alternatively, you can enter an angle value. This is an excellent method for rotating block references. Select and Modify Multiple Grips You can use more than one grip as the base grips for the action. When you select more than one grip (also called multiple hot grip selection), the shape of the object is kept intact between the selected grips. To select more than one grip, press and hold the Shift key, and then select the appropriate grips. Limit the Display of Grips to Improve Performance You can limit the maximum number of objects that display grips. For example, when a drawing contains hatch objects or polylines with many grips, selecting these objects can take a long time. The GRIPOBJLIMIT system variable suppresses the display of grips when the initial selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. If you add objects to the current selection set, the limit does not apply. NOTE Grips are not displayed on objects that are on locked layers. Work with Quadrant Grips For quadrant grips on circles and ellipses, distance is measured from the center point, not the selected grip. For example, in Stretch mode, you can select a quadrant grip to stretch a circle and then specify a distance at the Command prompt for the new radius. The distance is measured from the center of the circle, not the selected quadrant. If you select the center point to stretch the circle, the circle moves. See also: ■ Choose a Method to Modify Objects on page 727 ■ Modify Polylines on page 787 ■ Modify Hatches and Solid-Filled Areas ■ Use Dynamic Input on page 578 ■ Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings on page 858 Edit Objects with Grips | 731 To turn on grips 1 At the Command prompt, enter options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, select Enable Grips. 3 Click OK. To stretch an object using grips 1 Select the object to stretch. 2 Select a base grip on the object. The selected grip is highlighted, and Stretch, the default grip mode, is active. 3 Move the pointing device and click. The selected object is stretched as the grip moves. NOTE To copy the selected object while stretching, press and hold the Ctrl key. To stretch using more than one grip 1 Select several objects to stretch. 2 Hold down Shift and click several grips so that they are highlighted. 3 Release Shift and select a grip as the base grip by clicking the grip. The default grip mode, Stretch, is active. 4 Move the pointing device and click. The selected grips act in unison and the selected objects are stretched. To move objects using grips 1 Select the objects to move. 2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip. The selected grip is highlighted, and Stretch, the default grip mode, is active. 3 Cycle through the grip modes by pressing Enter until the grip mode Move appears. Alternatively, you can right-click to display a shortcut menu of modes and options. 732 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects 4 Move the pointing device and click. The selected objects are moved along with the grip. NOTE To copy the selected object while moving, press and hold the Ctrl key. To rotate objects using grips 1 Select the objects to rotate. 2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip. The selected grip is highlighted, and Stretch, the default grip mode, is active. 3 Cycle through the grip modes by pressing Enter until the grip mode Rotate appears. Alternatively, you can right-click to display shortcut menu modes and options. 4 Move the pointing device and click. The selected objects are rotated around the base grip. NOTE To copy the selected object while rotating, press and hold the Ctrl key. To scale objects using grips 1 Select the objects to scale. 2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip. The selected grip is highlighted, and Stretch, the default grip mode, is active. 3 Cycle through the grip modes by pressing Enter until the grip mode Scale appears. Alternatively, you can right-click to display shortcut menu modes and options. 4 Enter the scale factor or drag and click to specify a new scale. NOTE To copy the selected object while scaling, press and hold the Ctrl key. To mirror objects using grips 1 Select the objects to mirror. Edit Objects with Grips | 733 2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip. The selected grip is highlighted, and the default grip mode, Stretch, is active. 3 Cycle through the grip modes by pressing Enter until the grip mode Mirror appears. Alternatively, you can right-click to display shortcut menu modes and options. 4 Click to specify the second point of the mirror line. Turning on Ortho mode is often useful when mirroring objects. Quick Reference OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks. GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. GRIPCONTOUR Controls the color of the grip contour. GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPHOVER Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it. GRIPOBJLIMIT Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. 734 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects GRIPTIPS Controls the display of grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips. Modify Objects with Multi-Functional Grips Modify polylines, splines, and non-associative polyline hatch objects with multi-functional grips. Control the display of these grips with the GRIPS system variable. With multi-functional grips, you can ■ Modify the position, size, and orientation of objects. Use Grip modes on page 729 to move, rotate, scale, or mirror objects. ■ Reshape Objects. Use the multi-functional grip-editing options to edit vertices, fit points, control points, segment types, and tangent directions. To activate a multi-functional grip, select the grip, or hover over it and choose a multi-functional grip-editing option from the dynamic menu. Once a grip is active, change the grip behavior with the Hot Grip shortcut menu, or by cycling through options as follows: ■ Press Enter or Spacebar to cycle through the Grip modes ■ Press Ctrl to cycle through the multi-functional grip-editing options. NOTE If the object is constrained, the first Ctrl relaxes constraints. Control the access methods to multi-functional grips with the GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL system variable. To reshape an object with multi-functional grips 1 Select a polyline, spline, or non-associative polyline hatch object. 2 Hover the cursor over a multi-functional grip. 3 From the dynamic menu, click a multi-functional grip-editing option. 4 While manipulating the grip, press Ctrl to cycle through the other multi-functional grip-editing options. Edit Objects with Grips | 735 Quick Reference OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks. GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. GRIPCONTOUR Controls the color of the grip contour. GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPHOVER Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it. GRIPOBJLIMIT Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. GRIPTIPS Controls the display of grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips. GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL Specifies the access methods to multi-functional grips. Make Multiple Copies with Grips You can create multiple copies of objects as you modify them with any of the grip modes. 736 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects For example, by using the Copy option, you can rotate the selected objects, leaving copies at each location you specify with the pointing device. You can also make multiple copies by holding down Ctrl as you select the first point. For example, with the Stretch grip mode, you can stretch an object, such as a line, and then copy it to any point in the drawing area. Multiple copies continue being made until you turn off grips. NOTE When you use grips to make multiple copies of an object that contains multiple , only the current scale representation is copied. Define an Offset Snap or a Rotation Snap You can place multiple copies at regularly spaced intervals with an offset snap. The offset snap is defined by the distance between an object and the next copy. In the lighting layout below, the first copy of the light fixture symbol is placed at an offset of two units. All subsequent copies are then placed two units apart. If you hold down Ctrl while you select multiple copy points with the pointing device, the graphics cursor snaps to an offset point based on the last two points you selected. In the illustration below, the midpoint of line 1 is at coordinate 8,5. Based on that midpoint, line 2 was copied using the Ctrl key and Stretch grip mode; its midpoint is at 9,5. The third line snaps to an offset based on the coordinate values 10,5. Edit Objects with Grips | 737 Similarly, you can place multiple copies at angular intervals around a base grip with a rotation snap. The rotation snap is defined as the angle between an object and the next copy when you are using Rotate grip mode. Hold down Ctrl to use the rotation snap. To create copies in any grip mode 1 Select the objects to copy. 2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip. The selected grip is highlighted, and the default grip mode, Stretch, is active. 3 Cycle through the grip modes by pressing Enter until the grip mode you want appears. Alternatively, you can right-click to display shortcut menu modes and options. 4 Enter c (Copy) or press and hold the Ctrl key while you stretch, move, rotate, or scale. Copies continue being made until you turn off grips. 5 Enter or specify the additional input required for the current grip mode. 6 Turn off grips by pressing Enter, Spacebar, or Esc. 738 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects To create an offset snap for multiple copies using grips 1 Select the objects to copy. 2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip. The selected grip is highlighted, and the default grip mode, Stretch, is active. 3 Cycle through the grip modes by pressing Enter until the grip mode Move appears. Alternatively, you can right-click to display shortcut menu modes and options. 4 Enter c (Copy). 5 Move the cursor and click. The offset snap is the distance between the grip you selected and the location you specified for the copy. 6 Hold down Ctrl and place additional copies by specifying additional locations. These copies are created at the same offset snap distance as the last copy. 7 Turn off grips by pressing Enter, Spacebar, or Esc. To create a rotation snap for multiple rotated copies using grips 1 Select the objects to rotate. 2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip. The selected grip is highlighted, and the default grip mode, Stretch, is active. 3 Cycle through the grip modes by pressing Enter until the grip mode Rotate appears. Alternatively, you can right-click to display shortcut menu modes and options. 4 Enter c (Copy). 5 Move the pointing device and click. The rotation snap is the angle between the grip you selected and the location you specified for the copy. 6 Hold down Ctrl and place additional copies by specifying additional locations. Edit Objects with Grips | 739 These copies are created at the same rotation snap angle as the first copy. 7 Turn off grips by pressing Enter, Spacebar, or Esc. To mirror objects and retain the originals using grips 1 Select the objects to mirror. 2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip. The selected grip is highlighted, and the default grip mode, Stretch, is active. 3 Cycle through the grip modes by pressing Enter until the grip mode Mirror appears. Alternatively, you can right-click to display shortcut menu modes and options. 4 Hold down Ctrl (or enter c for Copy) to retain the original image, and specify the second point of the mirror line. Turning on Ortho mode is often useful when mirroring objects. 5 Turn off grips by pressing Enter, Spacebar, or Esc. Quick Reference OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks. GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. GRIPCONTOUR Controls the color of the grip contour. GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. 740 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. Control Grips in Blocks You can specify whether a block displays a single grip or multiple grips. You can specify whether a selected block reference displays a single grip at its insertion point or displays multiple grips associated with the objects grouped within the block. See also: ■ Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks on page 947 To turn grips within blocks on or off 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, select or clear Enable Grips Within Blocks. 3 Click OK. Quick Reference OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks. Edit Objects with Grips | 741 GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. GRIPCONTOUR Controls the color of the grip contour. GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. Move or Rotate Objects You can move objects to a different location, or change the orientation of objects by rotating them by an angle or to other objects. Move Objects You can move objects at a specified distance and direction from the originals. Use coordinates, grid snap, object snaps, and other tools to move objects with precision. Specify Distance with Two Points Move an object using the distance and direction specified by a base point followed by a second point. In this example, you move the block representing a window. Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Then select the object to be moved (1). Specify the base point for the move (2) followed by a second point (3). The object is moved the distance and direction of point 2 to point 3. 742 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Specify Distance with Relative Coordinates You can move an object using a relative distance by entering coordinate values for the first point and pressing Enter for the second point. The coordinate values are used as a relative displacement rather than the location of a base point. NOTE Do not include an @ sign as you normally would for relative coordinates, because relative coordinates are expected. To copy objects a specified distance, you can also use direct distance entry with Ortho mode and polar tracking. For more information, see Enter Direct Distances on page 613 Use a Stretch-Move You can also use STRETCH to move objects if all their endpoints lie entirely within the selection window. Turn on Ortho mode or polar tracking to move the objects at a specific angle. A practical example is moving a door in a wall. The door in the illustration is entirely within a crossing selection, while the wall lines are only partly within the crossing selection area. The result is that only the endpoints that lie within the crossing selection move. Move or Rotate Objects | 743 Use Alternate Methods You can use grips to move and copy objects quickly. See Edit Objects with Grips on page 729. You can also select objects and drag them to a new location; press Ctrl to make a copy. Using this method, you can drag objects between open drawings and other applications. If you drag with the right mouse button instead of the left, a shortcut menu is displayed. The menu options include Move Here, Copy Here, Paste as Block, and Cancel. See Embed OLE Objects in Drawings on page 1724. To move an object using two points 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 2 Select the objects to move. 3 Specify a base point for the move. 4 Specify a second point. The objects you selected are moved to a new location determined by the distance and direction between the first and second points. To move an object using a displacement 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 2 Select the object to move. 3 Enter the displacement in the form of a Cartesian, polar, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate value. Do not include the @ sign, because a relative coordinate is assumed. 4 At the prompt for the second point, press Enter. The coordinate values are used as a relative displacement rather than the location of a base point. The selected objects are moved to a new location determined by the relative coordinate values you enter. To move an object from model space to paper space (or vice versa) 1 Click a layout tab. 744 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects 2 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Change Space. 3 Select one or more objects to move. 4 Press Enter. The object is moved to the new space, and is scaled appropriately to the new space. To move by stretching 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Stretch. 2 Select the object by using crossing selection. The crossing selection must include at least one vertex or endpoint. Specify crossing selection by clicking, moving your pointing device from right to left, and clicking again. 3 Do one of the following: ■ Specify the base point for the move, and then specify a second point. ■ Enter the displacement in the form of a Cartesian, polar, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate value. Do not include the @ sign, because a relative coordinate is assumed. At the prompt for the second point of displacement, press Enter. Any objects with at least one vertex or endpoint included within the crossing selection are stretched. Any objects that are completely within the crossing selection are moved without being stretched. Quick Reference CHSPACE Moves objects between model space and paper space. MOVE Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Move or Rotate Objects | 745 STRETCH Stretches objects crossed by a selection window or polygon. Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier) Locates the next point at a specified distance in the direction of your cursor. Rotate Objects You can rotate objects in your drawing around a specified base point. To determine the angle of rotation, you can enter an angle value, drag using the cursor, or specify a reference angle to align to an absolute angle. Rotate an Object by a Specified Angle Enter a rotation angle value from 0 to 360 degrees. You can also enter values in radians, grads, or surveyor bearings. Entering a positive angle value rotates the objects counterclockwise or clockwise, depending on the Direction Control setting in the Drawing Units dialog box. Rotate an Object by Dragging Drag the object around the base point and specify a second point. Use Ortho mode, polar tracking, or object snaps for greater precision. For example, you can rotate the plan view of a house by selecting the objects (1), specifying a base point (2), and specifying an angle of rotation by dragging to another point (3). Rotate an Object to an Absolute Angle With the Reference option, you can rotate an object to align it to an absolute angle. For example, to rotate the part in the illustration so the diagonal edge rotates to 90 degrees, you select the objects to be rotated (1, 2), specify the base point 746 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects (3), and enter the Reference option. For the reference angle, specify the two endpoints of the diagonal line (4, 5). For the new angle, enter 90. Rotate an Object in 3D To rotate 3D objects, you can use either ROTATE or ROTATE3D. ■ With ROTATE, you can rotate objects around a specified base point. The axis of rotation passes through the base point and is parallel to the Z axis of the current UCS. ■ With ROTATE3D, you can specify the axis of rotation using either two points; an object; the X, Y, or Z axis; or the Z direction of the current view. See also: ■ Rotate Views in Layout Viewports on page 423 To rotate an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rotate. 2 Select the object to rotate. 3 Specify the base point for the rotation. 4 Do one of the following: ■ Enter the angle of rotation. ■ Drag the object around its base point and specify a point location to which you want to rotate the object. ■ Enter c to create a copy of the selected objects. ■ Enter r to rotate the selected objects from a specified reference angle to an absolute angle. Move or Rotate Objects | 747 To rotate an object to an absolute angle 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rotate. 2 Select the objects to rotate. 3 Specify the base point for the rotation. 4 Enter r (Reference). 5 Enter a reference angle value or specify two point locations. This determines an imaginary line that will be rotated to a new angle. 6 Enter the new angle, or specify a point. The value that you enter for the new angle is an absolute angle, not a relative value. Alternatively, if you specify a point, the reference angle will be rotated to that point. To rotate a 3D object around an axis 1 Click Modify menu ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Rotate 3D. 2 Select the object to rotate (1). 3 Specify the start point and endpoint of the axis about which the objects are to be rotated (2 and 3). The positive axis direction is from the start point to the end point, and the rotation follows the right-hand rule (see Understand the User Coordinate System in 3D on page 566). 4 Specify the angle of rotation. 748 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Quick Reference ROTATE Rotates objects around a base point. ROTATE3D Moves objects about a 3D axis. Align Objects You can move, rotate, or tilt an object so that it aligns with another object. In the following example, two pairs of points are used to align the piping in 2D using the ALIGN command. Endpoint object snaps align the pipes precisely. In 3D, use the 3DALIGN command to specify up to three points to define the source plane followed by up to three points to define the destination plane. ■ The first source point on an object, called the base point, is always moved to the first destination point. ■ Specifying a second point for either the source or the destination results in the selected objects being rotated. ■ A third point for either the source or the destination results in further rotation of the selected objects. TIP With 3D solid models, it is recommended that you turn on dynamic UCS to speed the selection of the destination plane. To align two objects in 2D 1 Click Modify menu ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Align. Move or Rotate Objects | 749 2 Select the objects that you want to align. 3 Specify a source point and then the corresponding destination point. To rotate the object, specify a second source point followed by a second destination point. 4 Press Enter to end the command. The selected objects are moved from the source point to the destination point, and second and third points, if you specify them, rotate, and tilt the selected objects. To align two objects in 3D 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ 3D Align. 2 Select the objects that you want to align. 3 Specify either one, two, or three source points and then the corresponding first, second, or third destination points. The first point is called the base point. The selected objects are moved from the source point to the destination point, and second and third points, if you specify them, rotate, and tilt the selected objects. Quick Reference 3DALIGN Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D. ALIGN Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D. UCSDETECT Controls whether dynamic UCS acquisition is active or not. Copy, Offset, or Mirror Objects You can create duplicates of objects in your drawing that are either identical or similar to selected objects. 750 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Copy Objects You can create duplicates of objects at a specified distance and direction from the originals. Use coordinates, grid snap, object snaps, and other tools to copy objects with precision. You can also use grips to move and copy objects quickly. See Edit Objects with Grips on page 729. Specify Distance with Two Points Copy an object using the distance and direction specified by a base point followed by a second point. In this example, you copy the block representing an electronic component. Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.Then select the original object to be copied. Specify the base point for the move (1) followed by a second point (2). The object is copied the distance and direction of point 1 to point 2. Specify Distance with Relative Coordinates Copy an object using a relative distance by entering coordinate values for the first point and pressing Enter for the second point. The coordinate values are used as a relative displacement rather than the location of a base point. NOTE Do not include an @ sign as you normally would for relative coordinates, because relative coordinates are expected. To copy objects a specified distance, you can also use direct distance entry with Ortho mode and polar tracking. For more information, see Enter Direct Distances on page 613. Copy, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 751 Create Multiple Copies The COPY command repeats automatically by default. To exit the command, press Enter. To change the default, use the COPYMODE system variable. Move and Copy Objects by Dragging You can also select objects and drag them to a new location using the left mouse button over one of the selected objects; press Ctrl to make a copy. Using this method, you can drag objects between open drawings and other applications. If you drag with the right mouse button instead of the left, a shortcut menu is displayed after you drag the objects. The menu options include Move Here, Copy Here, Paste as Block, and Cancel. For information about using object linking and embedding, see Embed OLE Objects in Drawings on page 1724. To copy an object using two points 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 2 Select the objects to copy. 3 Specify the base point. 4 Specify the second point. Press Enter. To create an object based on a selected object 1 Select the object on which to base the new object. 2 Right-click and select Add Selected. 3 Follow the prompts to create an object similar to the selected object. 752 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Quick Reference ADDSELECTED Creates a new object based on the object type and general properties of a selected object. COPY Copies objects a specified distance in a specified direction. COPYMODE Controls whether the COPY command repeats automatically. Create an Array of Objects You can create copies of objects in a rectangular or polar (circular) pattern called an array. For rectangular arrays, you control the number of rows and columns and the distance between each. For polar arrays, you control the number of copies of the object and whether the copies are rotated. To create many regularly spaced objects, arraying is faster than copying. Create Rectangular Arrays A rectangular array is built along a baseline defined by the current snap rotation angle. This angle is zero by default, so the rows and columns of a rectangular array are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y axes. The default angle 0 direction setting can be changed in UNITS. Copy, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 753 Create Polar Arrays When you create a polar array, the array is drawn counterclockwise or clockwise, depending on whether you enter a positive or a negative value for the angle to fill. The radius of the array is determined by the distance from the specified center point to a reference or base point on the last selected object. You can use the default reference point (usually an arbitrary point that coincides with a snap point), or you can specify a new base point to be used as the reference point. Array in 3D With 3DARRAY, you can create a rectangular array or a polar array of objects in 3D. In addition to specifying the number of columns (X direction) and rows (Y direction), you also specify the number of levels (Z direction). Limit the Size of Arrays If you specify a very large number of rows and columns for an array, it may take a long time to create the copies. By default, the number of array elements that can be generated by one command is limited to approximately 100,000. This limit is controlled by the MaxArray setting in the registry. You can change the limit by setting the MaxArray system registry variable using (setenv “MaxArray” “n”) where n is a number between 100 and 10000000 (ten million). NOTE When changing the value of MaxArray, you must enter MaxArray with the capitalization shown. 754 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects To create a rectangular array 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 2 In the Array dialog box, select Rectangular Array. 3 Click Select Objects. The Array dialog box closes. You are prompted for object selection. 4 Select the objects to be arrayed and press Enter. 5 In the Rows and Columns boxes, enter the number of rows and columns in the array. 6 Specify the horizontal and vertical spacing (offsets) between objects by using one of the following methods: ■ In the Row Offset and Column Offset boxes, enter the distance between rows and between columns. Adding a plus sign (+) or a minus sign (-) determines direction. ■ Click the Pick Both Offsets button to use the pointing device to specify the diagonal corners of a cell in the array. The cell determines the vertical and horizontal spacing of the rows and columns. ■ Click the Pick Row Offset or Pick Column Offset button to use the pointing device to specify the horizontal and vertical spacing. The example box displays the result. 7 To change the rotation angle of the array, enter the new angle next to Angle of Array. 8 The default angle 0 direction setting can also be changed in UNITS. 9 Click OK to create the array. To create a polar array 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 2 In the Array dialog box, select Polar Array. 3 Next to Center Point, do one of the following: ■ Enter an X value and a Y value for the center point of the polar array. Copy, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 755 ■ Click the Pick Center Point button. The Array dialog box closes and you are prompted for object selection. Use the pointing device to specify the center point of the polar array. 4 Click Select Objects. The Array dialog box closes and you are prompted for object selection. 5 Select the objects to be arrayed. 6 In the Method box, select one of the following methods: ■ Total Number of Items & Angle to Fill ■ Total Number of Items & Angle Between Items ■ Angle to Fill & Angle Between Items 7 Enter the number of items (including the original object), if available. 8 Use one of the following methods: ■ Enter the angle to fill and angle between items, if available. Angle to Fill specifies the distance to fill around the circumference of the array. Angle Between Items specifies the distance between each item. ■ Click the Pick Angle to Fill button and the Pick Angle Between Items button. Use the pointing device to specify the angle to fill and the angle between items. The example box displays the result. 9 You can set any of the following options: ■ To rotate the objects as they are arrayed, select Rotate Items As Copied. The example area displays the result. ■ To specify the X,Y base point, select More, clear the Set to Object's Default option and enter values in the X and Y boxes, or click the Pick Base Point button and use the pointing device to specify the point. 10 Click OK to create the array. To create a 3D rectangular array of objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ 3D Array. 2 Select the object to array (1). 756 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects 3 Specify Rectangular. 4 Enter the number of rows. 5 Enter the number of columns. 6 Enter the number of levels. 7 Specify the distance between rows. 8 Specify the distance between columns. 9 Specify the distance between levels. To create a 3D polar array of objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ 3D Array. 2 Select the object to array (1). 3 Specify Polar. 4 Enter the number of items to array. 5 Specify the angle that the arrayed objects are to fill. 6 Press Enter to rotate the objects as they are arrayed, or enter n to retain their orientation. 7 Specify the start point and endpoint of the axis about which the objects are to be rotated (2 and 3). Copy, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 757 Quick Reference 3DARRAY Creates a 3D matrix of objects in a rectangular or polar arrangement. ARRAY Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern. DSETTINGS Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes, Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties. UCS Manages user coordinate systems. UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. ANGBASE Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS. ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. SNAPANG Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current viewport relative to the current UCS. Offset an Object Offset an object to create a new object whose shape parallels the shape of the original object. 758 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects OFFSET creates a new object whose shape parallels the shape of a selected object. Offsetting a circle or an arc creates a larger or smaller circle or arc, depending on which side you specify for the offset. A highly effective drawing technique is to offset objects and then trim or extend their ends. You can offset ■ Lines ■ Arcs ■ Circles ■ Ellipses and elliptical arcs (resulting in an oval-shaped spline) ■ 2D polylines ■ Construction lines (xlines) and rays ■ Splines Special Cases for Offset Polylines and Splines 2D polylines and splines are trimmed automatically when the offset distance is larger than can otherwise be accommodated. Copy, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 759 Closed 2D polylines that are offset to create larger polylines result in potential gaps between segments. The OFFSETGAPTYPE system variable controls how these potential gaps are closed. To offset an object by specifying a distance 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Offset. 2 Specify the offset distance. You can enter a value or use the pointing device. 3 Select the object to offset. 4 Specify a point on the side where you want to place the new objects. 5 Select another object to offset, or press Enter to end the command. To offset an object through a point 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Offset. 2 Enter t (Through). 3 Select the object to offset. 4 Specify the through point. 5 Select another object to offset, or press Enter to end the command. 760 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Quick Reference OFFSET Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves. OFFSETDIST Sets the default offset distance. OFFSETGAPTYPE Controls how potential gaps between segments are treated when closed polylines are offset. Mirror Objects You can flip objects about a specified axis to create a symmetrical mirror image. Mirroring is useful for creating symmetrical objects because you can quickly draw half the object and then mirror it instead of drawing the entire object. You flip objects about an axis called a mirror line to create a mirror image. To specify this temporary mirror line, you enter two points. You can choose whether to erase or retain the original objects. By default, when you mirror text, hatches, attributes, and attribute definitions, they are not reversed or turned upside down in the mirror image. The text has the same alignment and justification as before the object was mirrored. If you do want text to be reversed, set the MIRRTEXT system variable to 1. Copy, Offset, or Mirror Objects | 761 MIRRTEXT affects text that is created with the TEXT, ATTDEF, or MTEXT commands; attribute definitions; and variable attributes. Text and constant attributes that are part of an inserted block are reversed when the block is mirrored regardless of the MIRRTEXT setting. MIRRHATCH affects hatch objects created with the GRADIENT or HATCH commands. Use the MIRRHATCH system variable control whether hatch pattern direction is mirrored or retained. Mirror in 3D With MIRROR3D, you can mirror objects across a specified mirroring plane. The mirroring plane can be one of the following: ■ The plane of a planar object ■ A plane parallel to the XY, YZ, or XZ plane of the current UCS that passes through a specified point ■ A plane defined by three specified points (2, 3, and 4) To mirror objects in 2D 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 2 Select the objects to mirror. 3 Specify the first point of the mirror line. 4 Specify the second point. 5 Press Enter to retain the original objects, or enter y to erase them. 762 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects To mirror objects in 3D 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ 3D Mirror. 2 Select the object to mirror. 3 Specify three points to define a mirroring plane. 4 Press Enter to retain the original objects, or enter y to delete them. Quick Reference MIRROR Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects. MIRROR3D Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects across a mirroring plane. MIRRHATCH Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns. MIRRTEXT Controls how MIRROR reflects text. Change the Size and Shape of Objects There are several methods for adjusting the lengths of existing objects relative to other objects, both symmetrically and asymmetrically. Trim or Extend Objects You can shorten or lengthen objects to meet the edges of other objects. This means you can first create an object such as a line and then later adjust it to fit exactly between other objects. Objects you select as cutting edges or boundary edges are not required to intersect the object being trimmed. You can trim or extend an object to a projected edge or to an extrapolated intersection; that is, where the objects would intersect if they were extended. Change the Size and Shape of Objects | 763 If you do not specify a boundary and press Enter at the Select Objects prompt, all displayed objects become potential boundaries. NOTE To select cutting edges or boundary edges that include blocks, you can use only the single selection, Crossing, Fence, and Select All options. Trim Objects You can trim objects so that they end precisely at boundary edges defined by other objects. For example, you can clean up the intersection of two walls smoothly by trimming. An object can be one of the cutting edges and one of the objects being trimmed. For example, in the illustrated light fixture, the circle is a cutting edge for the construction lines and is also being trimmed. When you trim several objects, the different selection methods can help you choose the current cutting edges and objects to trim. In the following example, the cutting edges are selected using crossing selection. 764 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects The following example uses the fence selection method to select a series of objects for trimming. You can trim objects to their nearest intersection with other objects. Instead of selecting cutting edges, you press Enter. Then, when you select the objects to trim, the nearest displayed objects act as cutting edges. In this example, the walls are trimmed so that they intersect smoothly. You can extend objects without leaving the TRIM command. Hold down Shift and select the objects to be extended. Extend Objects Extending operates the same way as trimming. You can extend objects so they end precisely at boundary edges defined by other objects. In this example, you extend the lines precisely to a circle, which is the boundary edge. You can trim objects without leaving the EXTEND command. Hold down Shift and select the objects to be trimmed. Change the Size and Shape of Objects | 765 Trim and Extend Wide Polylines 2D wide polylines trim and extend at their centerlines. The ends of wide polylines are always square. Trimming a wide polyline at an angle causes portions of the end to extend beyond the cutting edge If you trim or extend a tapered 2D polyline segment, the width of the extended end is corrected to continue the original taper to the new endpoint. If this correction gives the segment a negative ending width, the ending width is forced to 0. Trim and Extend Spline-Fit Polylines Trimming a spline-fit polyline removes the curve-fit information and changes the spline-fit segments into ordinary polyline segments. Extending a spline-fit polyline adds a new vertex to the control frame for the polyline. Trim or Extend in 3D You can trim or extend an object to any other object in 3D space, regardless of whether the objects are on the same plane or parallel to the cutting or boundary edges. In the TRIM and EXTEND commands, use the Project and Edge options to select one of three projections for trimming or extending: ■ The XY plane of the current UCS ■ The plane of the current view ■ True 3D, which is not a projection See also: ■ Break and Join Objects on page 783 766 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects To extend an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Extend. 2 Select the objects to serve as boundary edges. To select all displayed objects as potential boundary edges, press Enter without selecting any objects. 3 Select the objects to extend. To trim an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Trim. 2 Select the objects to serve as cutting edges. To select all displayed objects as potential cutting edges, press Enter without selecting any objects. 3 Select the objects to trim. To extend objects in 3D wireframe models 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Extend . 2 Select the boundary edge for extending (1). 3 Enter e (Edge). 4 Enter e (Extend). 5 Enter p (Project). 6 Enter u (UCS). 7 Select the object to extend (2). Change the Size and Shape of Objects | 767 To trim in 3D using the current view plane 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Trim . 2 Select the cutting edge for trimming (1). 3 Enter p (Project). 4 Enter v (View). 5 Select the object to trim (2). To trim objects in 3D wireframe models 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Trim 2 Select the cutting edges to use for trimming (1). 3 Enter p (Project). 4 Enter n (None). 5 Select the object to trim (2 and 3). 768 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects . Quick Reference BREAK Breaks the selected object between two points. EXTEND Extends objects to meet the edges of other objects. JOIN Joins similar objects to form a single, unbroken object. LENGTHEN Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. TRIM Trims objects to meet the edges of other objects. EDGEMODE Controls how the TRIM and EXTEND commands determine cutting and boundary edges. PROJMODE Sets the current Projection mode for trimming or extending. Resize or Reshape Objects You can resize objects to make them longer or shorter in only one direction or to make them proportionally larger or smaller. You can also stretch certain objects by moving an endpoint, vertex, or control point. Lengthen Objects With LENGTHEN, you can change the included angle of arcs and the length of the following objects: ■ Lines ■ Arcs Change the Size and Shape of Objects | 769 ■ Open polylines ■ Elliptical arcs ■ Open splines. The results are similar to extending and trimming. You can ■ Drag an object endpoint dynamically ■ Specify a new length or angle as a percentage of the total length or angle ■ Specify an incremental length or angle measured from an endpoint ■ Specify the object's total absolute length or included angle Stretch Objects With STRETCH, you relocate the endpoints of objects that lie across or within a crossing selection window. ■ Objects that are partially enclosed by a crossing window are stretched. ■ Objects that are completely enclosed within the crossing window, or that are selected individually, are moved rather than stretched. To stretch an object, you specify a base point and then a point of displacement. To stretch with precision, use object snaps, grid snaps, and relative coordinate entry. Scale Objects Using a Scale Factor With SCALE, you can make an object uniformly larger or smaller. To scale an object, you specify a base point and a scale factor. Alternatively, you can specify a length to be used as a scale factor based on the current drawing units. 770 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object. A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the object. Scaling changes the size of all dimensions of the selected object. A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object. A scale factor less than 1 shrinks the object. NOTE When you use the SCALE command with objects, the position or location of the object is scaled relative to the base point of the scale operation, but the size of the object is not changed. Scale Objects Using a Reference Distance You can also scale by reference. Scaling by reference uses an existing distance as a basis for the new size. To scale by reference, specify the current distance and then the new desired size. For example, if one side of an object is 4.8 units long and you want to expand it to 7.5 units, use 4.8 as the reference length. You can use the Reference option to scale an entire drawing. For example, use this option when the original drawing units need to be changed. Select all objects in the drawing. Then use Reference to select two points and specify the intended distance. All the objects in the drawing are scaled accordingly. See also: ■ Break and Join Objects on page 783 To stretch an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Stretch. 2 Select the object using a crossing window selection. The crossing window must include at least one vertex or endpoint. 3 Do one of the following: ■ Enter the displacement in the form of a relative Cartesian, polar, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate. Do not include the @ sign, because a relative coordinate is assumed. Press Enter at the prompt for the second point of displacement. Change the Size and Shape of Objects | 771 ■ Specify the base point for the stretch, and then specify a second point, to determine the distance and direction. Any objects with at least one vertex or endpoint included within the crossing window are stretched. Any objects that are completely within the crossing window, or selected individually, are moved without stretching. To scale an object by a scale factor 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Scale. 2 Select the object to scale. 3 Specify the base point. 4 Enter the scale factor or drag and click to specify a new scale. To scale an object by reference 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Scale. 2 Select the object to scale. 3 Select the base point. 4 Enter r (Reference). 5 Select the first and second reference points, or enter a value for the reference length. To change the length of an object by dragging 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Lengthen. 2 Enter dy (Dynamic Dragging mode). 3 Select the object you want to lengthen. 4 Drag the endpoint closest to the point of selection, and specify a new endpoint. The selected object is lengthened or shortened without changing its location or orientation. 772 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Quick Reference JOIN Joins similar objects to form a single, unbroken object. LENGTHEN Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs. PEDIT Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. SCALE Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the same after scaling. SPLINEDIT Edits a spline or spline-fit polyline. STRETCH Stretches objects crossed by a selection window or polygon. PLINECONVERTMODE Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines. Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects You can change objects to meet in rounded or flattened corners. You can also create or close gaps in objects. Create Fillets A fillet connects two objects with an arc that is tangent to the objects and has a specified radius. Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects | 773 An inside corner is called a fillet and an outside corner is called a round; you can create both using the FILLET command. You can fillet ■ Arcs ■ Circles ■ Ellipses and elliptical arcs ■ Lines ■ Polylines ■ Rays ■ Splines ■ Xlines ■ 3D solids FILLET can be used to round all corners on a polyline using a single command. NOTE Filleting a hatch boundary that was defined from line segments removes hatch associativity. If the hatch boundary was defined from a polyline, associativity is maintained. If both objects being filleted are on the same layer, the fillet arc is created on that layer. Otherwise, the fillet arc is created on the current layer. The layer affects object properties including color and linetype. Use the Multiple option to fillet more than one set of objects without leaving the command. Set the Fillet Radius The fillet radius is the radius of the arc that connects filleted objects. Changing the fillet radius affects subsequent fillets. If you set the fillet radius to 0, filleted objects are trimmed or extended until they intersect, but no arc is created. 774 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects You can hold down Shift while selecting the objects to override the current fillet radius with a value of 0. Trim and Extend Filleted Objects You can use the Trim option to specify whether the selected objects are trimmed or extended to the endpoints of the resulting arc or left unchanged. Control the Location of the Fillet Depending on the locations you specify, more than one possible fillet can exist between the selected objects. Compare the selection locations and resulting fillets in the illustrations. Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects | 775 Fillet Line and Polyline Combinations To fillet lines with polylines, each line or its extension must intersect one of the polyline line segments. If the Trim option is on, the filleted objects and the fillet arc join to form a single new polyline. Fillet an Entire Polyline You can fillet an entire polyline or remove fillets from an entire polyline. If you set a nonzero fillet radius, FILLET inserts fillet arcs at the vertex of each polyline segment that is long enough to accommodate the fillet radius. If two polyline line segments converge as they approach an arc segment that separates them, FILLET removes the arc segment and replaces it with a fillet arc. If you set the fillet radius to 0, no fillet arcs are inserted. If two polyline line segments are separated by one arc segment, FILLET removes that arc and extends the lines until they intersect. Fillet Parallel Lines You can fillet parallel lines, xlines, and rays. The current fillet radius temporarily adjusts to create an arc that is tangent to both objects and located in the plane common to both objects. 776 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects The first selected object must be a line or a ray, but the second object can be a line, an xline, or a ray. The fillet arc connects as shown in the illustration. Fillet Objects with Non-Zero Thickness in 3D You can fillet coplanar objects with extrusion directions not parallel to the Z axis of the current UCS. FILLET determines the extrusion direction for the fillet arc in 3D space closest to the direction of the Z axis of the current UCS. To set the fillet radius 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet. 2 Enter r (Radius). 3 Enter the fillet radius 4 Select the objects to fillet. To fillet two line segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet. 2 Select the first line. 3 Select the second line. To fillet without trimming 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet. 2 If necessary, enter t (Trim). Enter n (No Trim). 3 Select the objects to fillet. To fillet an entire polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet. 2 Enter p (Polyline). 3 Select the polyline. Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects | 777 To fillet multiple sets of objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet. 2 Enter m (Multiple). The main prompt is displayed. 3 Select the first line, or enter an option and complete the prompts for that option. Select the first line. 4 Select the second line. The main prompt is displayed again. 5 Select the first line for the next fillet, or press Enter or Esc to end the command. Quick Reference FILLET Rounds and fillets the edges of objects. FILLETRAD Stores the current fillet radius for 2D objects. TRIMMODE Controls whether selected edges for chamfers and fillets are trimmed. Create Chamfers A chamfer connects two objects to meet in a flattened or beveled corner. A chamfer connects two objects with an angled line. It is usually used to represent a beveled edge on a corner. You can chamfer ■ Lines ■ Polylines 778 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects ■ Rays ■ Xlines ■ 3D solids CHAMFER can be used to bevel all corners of a polyline using a single command. NOTE Chamfering a hatch boundary that was defined from line segments removes hatch associativity. If the hatch boundary was defined from a polyline, associativity is maintained. If both objects being chamfered are on the same layer, the chamfer line is created on that layer. Otherwise, the chamfer line is created on the current layer. The layer affects object properties including color and linetype. Use the Multiple option to chamfer more than one set of objects without leaving the command. Chamfer by Specifying Distances The chamfer distance is the amount each object is trimmed or extended to meet the chamfer line or to intersect the other. If both chamfer distances are 0, chamfering trims or extends the two objects until they intersect but does not create a chamfer line. You can hold down Shift while selecting the objects to override the current chamfer distances with a value of 0. In the following example, you set the chamfer distance to 0.5 for the first line and 0.25 for the second line. After you specify the chamfer distance, you select the two lines as shown. Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects | 779 Trim and Extend Chamfered Objects By default, objects are trimmed when chamfered, but you can use the Trim option to specify that they remain untrimmed. Chamfer by Specify Length and Angle You can chamfer two objects by specifying where on the first selected object the chamfer line starts, and then the angle the chamfer line forms with this object. In this example, you chamfer two lines so that the chamfer line starts 1.5 units from the intersection along the first line and forms an angle of 30 degrees with this line. Chamfer Polylines and Polyline Segments If the two objects you select for chamfering are segments of a polyline, they must be adjacent or separated by no more than one arc segment. If they are separated by an arc segment, as shown in the illustration, chamfering deletes the arc and replaces it with a chamfer line. 780 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Chamfer an Entire Polyline When you chamfer an entire polyline, each intersection is chamfered. For best results, keep the first and second chamfer distances equal. In this example, the chamfer distances are set to equal values. When you chamfer an entire polyline, only the segments that are long enough to accommodate the chamfer distance are chamfered. The polyline in the following illustration has some segments too short to be chamfered. To set chamfer distances 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer. 2 Enter d (Distances). 3 Enter the first chamfer distance. 4 Enter the second chamfer distance. 5 Select the lines for chamfering. Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects | 781 To chamfer two nonparallel line segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer. 2 Select the first line. 3 Select the second line. To chamfer by specifying chamfer length and angle 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer. 2 Enter a (Angle). 3 Enter the distance from the corner to be chamfered along the first line. 4 Enter the chamfer angle. 5 Select the first line. Then select the second line. To chamfer without trimming 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer. 2 Enter t (Trim Control). 3 Enter n (No Trim). 4 Select the objects to chamfer. To chamfer an entire polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer. 2 Enter p (Polyline). 3 Select the polyline. The polyline is chamfered using the current chamfer method and the default distances. To chamfer multiple sets of objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer. 2 Enter m (Multiple). The main prompt is displayed. 3 Select the first line, or enter an option and complete the prompts for that option and then select the first line. 782 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects 4 Select the second line. The main prompt is displayed again. 5 Select the first line for the next chamfer, or press Enter or Esc to end the command. Quick Reference CHAMFER Bevels the edges of objects. CHAMFERA Sets the first chamfer distance when CHAMMODE is set to 0. CHAMFERB Sets the second chamfer distance when CHAMMODE is set to 0. CHAMFERC Sets the chamfer length when CHAMMODE is set to 1. CHAMFERD Sets the chamfer angle when CHAMMODE is set to 1. CHAMMODE Sets the input method for CHAMFER TRIMMODE Controls whether selected edges for chamfers and fillets are trimmed. Break and Join Objects You can break an object into two objects with or without a gap between them. You can also join objects to make a single object. Break Objects Use BREAK to create a gap in an object, resulting in two objects with a gap between them. BREAK is often used to create space for block or text. Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects | 783 To break an object without creating a gap, specify both break points at the same location. The fastest way to do this is to enter @0,0 at the prompt for the second point. You can create breaks in most geometric objects except ■ Blocks ■ Dimensions ■ Mlines ■ Regions Join Objects Use JOIN to combine similar objects into a single object. You can also create complete circles and ellipses from arcs and elliptical arcs. You can join ■ Arcs ■ Elliptical arcs ■ Lines ■ Polylines ■ Splines The object to which you want to join similar objects is called a source object. Objects to be joined must be located in the same plane. Additional restrictions for each type of objects are described in the JOIN command. NOTE When joining two or more arcs (or elliptical arcs), the arcs are joined counterclockwise beginning from the source object. See also: ■ Modify Polylines on page 787 784 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects ■ Modify Complex Objects on page 785 To break an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Break. 2 Select the object to break. By default, the point at which you select the object is the first break point. To select a different pair of break points, enter f (First) and specify the first break point. 3 Specify the second break point. To break an object without creating a gap, enter @0,0 to specify the previous point. To join objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Join. 2 Select the source object to which you want to join objects. 3 Select one or more objects to join to the source object. Valid objects include arcs, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines, and splines. Additional restrictions for each type of objects are described in the JOIN command. Quick Reference BREAK Breaks the selected object between two points. JOIN Joins similar objects to form a single, unbroken object. Modify Complex Objects Additional editing operations are available for complex objects, such as blocks, dimensions, hatches, and polylines. Modify Complex Objects | 785 Disassociate Compound Objects (Explode) You can convert a compound object, such as a polyline, dimension, hatch, or block reference, into individual elements. You can explode a compound object, such as a polyline, dimension, hatch, or block reference, to convert it into individual elements. For example, exploding a polyline breaks it down to simple lines and arcs. Exploding a block reference or an associative dimension replaces it with copies of the objects that compose the block or dimension. Explode Dimensions and Hatches When you explode a dimension or a hatch, all associativity is lost and the dimension or hatch object is replaced by individual objects such as lines, text, points, and 2D solids. To explode dimensions automatically when you create them, set the DIMASSOC system variable to 0. Explode Polylines When you explode a polyline, any associated width information is discarded. The resulting lines and arcs follow the polyline's centerline. If you explode a block that contains a polyline, you need to explode the polyline separately. If you explode a donut, its width becomes 0. Explode Block References If you explode a block with attributes, the attribute values are lost, leaving only the attribute definitions. The colors and linetypes of objects in exploded block references can change. Explode External References An external reference (xref) is a drawing file linked (or attached) to another drawing. You cannot explode xrefs and their dependent blocks. To explode an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Explode. 2 Select the objects to be exploded. For most objects, exploding has no visible effect. 786 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Quick Reference EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. XPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. EXPLMODE Controls whether the EXPLODE command supports nonuniformly scaled (NUS) blocks. Modify Polylines Change the shape and display of polyline objects with polyline editing options. You can also join separate polylines. For example, modify polylines in several ways using PEDIT, the Properties palette, or grips. ■ Move, add, or delete individual vertices ■ Set a uniform width for the entire polyline or control the width of each segment ■ Create an approximation of a spline called a spline-fit polyline ■ Display noncontinuous linetypes with or without a dash before and after each vertex ■ Change the orientation of text in a polyline’s linetype by reversing its direction Modify Polylines with Multi-Functional Grips Polyline grips are multi-functional, providing context-sensitive options for reshaping the polyline. Polyline segments have additional multi-functional grips displayed at their midpoints. Control the display of these grips with the GRIPS system variable. Modify Polylines | 787 NOTE Multi-functional grips also support the standard Grip modes (Stretch, Move, Rotate, Scale, and Mirror). For information on working with multi-functional grips, see Modify Objects with Multi-Functional Grips on page 735. The multi-functional grip-editing options that are available for polylines depend on ■ The grip’s location (vertex or midpoint) ■ The segment type (line or arc) ■ The type of Polyline (standard, curve-fit, or spline-fit) Polyline multi-functional grip editing options Option Animation Stretch or Stretch Vertex. Specify a stretch point. Add Vertex. Specify a point for the new vertex. Remove Vertex. Delete the selected vertex. Convert to Arc. Specify the midpoint of a straight segment to convert it to an arc segment. Convert to Line. Specify the midpoint of an arc segment to convert into a straight segment. Tangent Direction. Manipulate the tangent directions to redefine the shape of a curve-fit polyline. Modify a Segment Within a Polyline To select individual segments (or subobjects) of a polyline, press Ctrl while clicking the segments. Use Grip modes and multi-functional grip-editing options to modify the polyline segments. The GRIPSUBOBJMODE system variable controls whether grips are automatically made hot when subobjects are selected. 788 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects You can modify the width of individual segments with the Properties palette. Changing any other property for a polyline segment affects the entire polyline. Modify Polylines with Coincident Grips Coincident grips are grips that are shared between multiple objects. When polyline objects sharing the same grip are selected together, multi-functional grip-editing options are not supported for the coincident grip. However, you can still edit the coincident grip using the standard Grip modes (Stretch, Move, Rotate, Scale, and Mirror). NOTE Multi-functional grip-editing options for coincident grips are supported when only one of the polyline objects is selected. Join Polyline Segments You can join a line, an arc, or another polyline to an open polyline if their ends connect or are close to each other. If the ends are not coincident but are within a distance that you can set, called the fuzz distance, the ends are joined by either trimming them, extending them, or connecting them with a new segment. Spline-fit polylines return to their original shape when joined. Polylines cannot be joined into a Y shape. If the properties of several objects being joined into a polyline differ, the resulting polyline inherits the properties of the first object that you selected. See also: ■ Choose a Method to Modify Objects on page 727 ■ Use Grip Modes on page 729 ■ Modify Objects with Multi-Functional Grips on page 735 ■ Overview of Constraints on page 803 Modify Polylines | 789 ■ Trim or Extend Objects on page 763 ■ Break and Join Objects on page 783 To modify a polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Polyline. 2 Select the polyline to modify. NOTE To select a single arc or line segment, press Ctrl while clicking the segment. 3 If the selected object is a spline, line, or an arc, the following prompt is displayed: Object selected is not a polyline. Do you want it to turn into one? : Enter y or n, or press Enter If you enter y, the object is converted into a single-segment 2D polyline that you can edit. Before the selected spline is converted to a polyline, the following prompt is displayed: Specify a precision <10>: Enter a new precision value or press Enter The PLINECONVERTMODE system variable determines whether the polylines are created with linear or arc segments. When the PEDITACCEPT system variable is set to 1, this prompt is suppressed, and the selected object is automatically converted to a polyline. 4 Edit the polyline by entering one or more of the following options: ■ Enter c (Close) to create a closed polyline. ■ Enter j (Join) to join contiguous lines, splines, arcs, or polylines. ■ Enter w (Width) to specify a new uniform width for the entire polyline. ■ Enter e (Edit Vertex) to edit a vertex. ■ Enter f (Fit) to create an arc-fit polyline, a smooth curve consisting of arcs joining each pair of vertices ■ Enter s (Spline) to create an approximation of a spline. 790 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects ■ Enter d (Decurve) to remove extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and to straighten all segments of the polyline. ■ Enter L (Ltype Gen) to generate the linetype in a continuous pattern through the vertices of the polyline. ■ Enter r (Reverse) to reverse the order of vertices of the polyline. ■ Enter u (Undo) to reverse actions back to the start of PEDIT. 5 Enter x (Exit) to end a command option. Press Enter to exit the PEDIT command. To reverse lines, polylines, splines, or helixes 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Reverse. 2 Select a line, polyline, spline, or helix to reverse. 3 Press Enter to end the command. To join polylines, splines, lines, and arcs into a single polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Polyline. 2 Select a polyline, spline, line, or arc to edit. If you selected a spline, line, or arc, press Enter to convert the selected object into a polyline. 3 Enter j (Join). 4 Select one or more polylines, splines, lines, or arcs that are located end to end. Each selected polyline, spline, line, or arc is now joined into a single polyline. 5 Press Enter to end the command. To delete a vertex in a polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Polyline. 2 Select a polyline. 3 Enter e (Edit vertex). Modify Polylines | 791 The first vertex is marked with an X. Use the Next option to move the X to the vertex preceding the one that you want to delete. 4 Enter s (Straighten). 5 Use the Next option to move the X to the vertex immediately following the one that you want to delete. 6 Enter g (Go). The vertex on the polyline is deleted. The vertices on either side of the deleted vertex are joined by a straight polyline segment. 7 Enter x (Exit) to end editing vertices. 8 Press Enter to end the command. To taper the width of individual polyline segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Polyline. 2 Select the polyline to edit. 3 Enter e (Edit Vertex). The first vertex is marked with an X. Move to the appropriate vertex with Next or Previous. 4 Enter w (Width). 5 Enter new starting and ending widths, and press Enter to move to the next vertex. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each segment. 6 Enter u (Undo) to reverse actions back to the start of PEDIT. 7 Enter x (Exit) to end editing vertices. 8 Press Enter to end the command. Quick Reference PEDIT Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. JOIN Joins similar objects to form a single, unbroken object. 792 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects REVERSE Reverses the vertices of selected lines, polylines, splines, and helixes, which is useful for linetypes with included text, or wide polylines with differing beginning and ending widths. GRIPS Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL Specifies the access methods to multi-functional grips. GRIPSUBOBJMODE Controls whether grips are automatically made hot when subobjects are selected. PEDITACCEPT Suppresses display of the Object Selected Is Not a Polyline prompt in PEDIT. PLINECONVERTMODE Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines. SPLINESEGS Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. SPLINETYPE Sets the type of curve generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. SURFTYPE Controls the type of surface-fitting to be performed by the Smooth option of the PEDIT command. SURFU Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the M direction and the U isolines density on surface objects. Modify Polylines | 793 SURFV Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the N direction and the V isolines density on surface objects. Modify Splines See also: ■ Draw Splines on page 679 ■ Break and Join Objects on page 783 ■ Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves on page 966 ■ Edit NURBS Surfaces on page 1155 ■ Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves on page 1157 Modify splines with multi-functional grips or with SPLINEDIT. Spline editing options are available through both multi-functional grips and SPLINEDIT. These options include add, remove, stretch, refine, and change the tangent direction. SPLINEDIT offers more editing options than the grips, but, to save time, the most commonly-used options are available in the grips. The grip editing options differ depending on whether the spline is displaying control vertices (CV’s) or fit points. The spline below displays fit point grips on the left, and CV grips on the right. To switch between the fit point grips and the CV grips, click the triangular grip. 794 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects In general, editing a spline with CVs allows you to reshape a small area of the curve, while editing the spline with fit points allows you to reshape the entire curve. Depending on the degree of the curve, the spline only changes through a given set of CVs and you can add more CVs to obtain greater control for a given area of the spline (the refine option). Mathematically, fit points affect the entire spline and force the curve to pass through specific points. To display the grip-editing options, hover over the CV and fit point grips, or select a grip and press Ctrl to cycle through the options. For more information, see Modify Objects with Multi-Functional Grips on page 735. Use Splines to Create 3D NURBS Surfaces Splines are one of the many 2D object types that can be lofted, extruded, swept, and revolved to create NURBS surfaces. Other 2D objects that can be used include lines, polylines, arcs, and circles. Splines, however, are the only 2D object customized to create NURBS surfaces. Because they allow you to adjust tolerance, degree, and tangency, they are better suited than other types of 2D profiles (line, plines, circles) for surface modeling. Modify Splines | 795 Many of the same commands used with NURBS surfaces, can also be used with CV splines. These include: ■ CVADD ■ CVREMOVE ■ CVREBUILD ■ CVSHOW ■ CVHIDE For more information, see Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves on page 966. NOTE Because periodic curves on page 2174 and surfaces on page 2174 are not currently supported, the objects may kink if they are reshaped. To convert a spline to a polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Spline. 2 Select the spline to convert. 3 Enter p to convert to Polyline. 4 Specify a precision value or press Enter to end the command. Quick Reference Commands CVSHOW Displays the control vertices for specified NURBS surfaces or curves. CVADD Adds control vertices to NURBS surfaces and splines. CVHIDE Turns off the display of control vertices for all NURBS surfaces and curves. CVREBUILD Rebuilds the shape of NURBS surfaces and curves. 796 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects CVREMOVE Removes control vertices from NURBS surfaces and curves. JOIN Joins similar objects to form a single, unbroken object. SPLINE Creates a smooth curve that passes through fit points or near control vertices. SPLINEDIT Edits a spline or spline-fit polyline. REVERSE Reverses the vertices of selected lines, polylines, splines, and helixes, which is useful for linetypes with included text, or wide polylines with differing beginning and ending widths. System Variables GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. PLINECONVERTMODE Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines. Modify Helixes You can use grips or the Properties palette to modify the shape and size of a helix. You can use the grips on a helix to change the following properties: ■ Start point ■ Base radius ■ Top radius ■ Height ■ Location Modify Helixes | 797 When you use a grip to change the base radius of a helix, the top radius scales to maintain the current ratio. Use the Properties palette to change the base radius independent of the top radius. You can use the Properties palette to change other helix properties, such as ■ Number of turns (Turns) ■ Turn height ■ Direction of the twist — clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW) With the Constrain property, you can specify that the Height, Turns, or Turn Height properties of the helix are constrained. The Constrain property affects how the helix changes when the Height, Turns, or Turn Height properties are changed either through the Properties palette or through grip editing. The table below shows the behavior of the helix depending on which property is constrained. Constrained property Property to change Height Turns Turn Height Effect on these helix properties Height Turns Turn Height Height Changed Fixed Changed Turns Fixed Changed Changed Turn Height Fixed Changed Changed Height Changed Fixed Changed Turns Fixed Changed Changed Turn Height Changed Fixed Changed Height Changed Changed Fixed Turns Changed Changed Fixed Turn Height Fixed Changed Changed See also: ■ Draw Helixes on page 682 798 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Quick Reference HELIX Creates a 2D spiral or 3D spring. Modify Multilines Multiline objects are composed of 1 to 16 parallel lines, called elements. To modify multilines or their elements, you can use common editing commands, a multiline editing command, and multiline styles. Special multiline editing features are available with the MLEDITcommand including the following: ■ Add or delete a vertex ■ Control the visibility of corner joints ■ Control the style of intersection with other multilines ■ Open or close gaps in a multiline object Add and Delete Multiline Vertices You can add or delete any vertex in a multiline. Edit Multiline Intersections If you have two multilines in a drawing, you can control the way they intersect. Multilines can intersect in a cross or a T shape, and the crosses or T shapes can be closed, open, or merged. Modify Multilines | 799 Edit Multiline Styles You can use MLSTYLE to edit multiline styles to change the properties of multiline elements or the end caps and background fill of subsequently created multilines. Multiline styles control the number of line elements in a multiline and the color, linetype, lineweight, and offset of each element. You can also modify the display of joints, end caps, and background fill. Multiline styles have the following limitations: ■ You cannot edit the element and multiline properties of the STANDARD multiline style or any multiline style already used in the drawing. ■ To edit an existing multiline style, you must do so before you draw any multilines in that style. NOTE If you use MLSTYLE to create a multiline style without saving it, and then select another style or create a new style, the first MLSTYLE properties are lost. To maintain the properties, save each multiline style to an MLN file before creating a new one. Use Common Editing Commands on Multilines You can use most of the common editing commands on multilines except ■ BREAK ■ CHAMFER ■ FILLET ■ LENGTHEN ■ OFFSET To perform these operations, first use EXPLODE to replace the multiline object with separate line objects. NOTE If you trim or extend a multiline object, only the first boundary object encountered determines the shape of the end of the multiline. A multiline cannot have a complex boundary at its endpoint. See also: ■ Draw Multiline Objects on page 657 800 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects To delete a vertex from a multiline 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Object ➤ Multiline. 2 In the Multiline Edit Tools dialog box, select Delete Vertex. 3 In the drawing, specify the vertex to delete. Press Enter. To create a closed cross intersection 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Object ➤ Multiline. 2 In the Multiline Edit Tools dialog box, select Closed Cross. 3 Select the multiline for the foreground. 4 Select the multiline for the background. The intersection is modified. You can continue selecting intersecting multilines to modify, or press Enter to end the command. Press Enter again to redisplay the Multiline Edit Tools dialog box. To edit a multiline style 1 Click Format menu ➤ Multiline Style. 2 In the Multiline Styles dialog box, select the style name from the list. Click Modify. 3 Click Element Properties. 4 In the Modify Multiline Styles dialog box, change the settings as needed. 5 Click OK. 6 In the Multiline Styles dialog box, click Save to save the changes to the style in the MLN file. 7 Click OK. Quick Reference MLEDIT Edits multiline intersections, breaks, and vertices. Modify Multilines | 801 MLSTYLE Creates, modifies, and manages multiline styles. 802 | Chapter 19 Change Existing Objects Add Constraints to Geometry 20 With parametric drawing, you can add constraints to geometry to ensure that the design conforms to specified requirements. Overview of Constraints Parametric drawing is a technology that is used for designing with constraints. Constraints are associations and restrictions applied to 2D geometry. There are two general types of constraints: ■ Geometric constraints control the relationships of objects with respect to each other ■ Dimensional constraints control the distance, length, angle, and radius values of objects The following illustration displays geometric and dimensional constraints using the default format and visibility. A blue cursor icon always displays when you move the cursor over an object that has constraints applied to it. 803 In the design phase of a project, constraints provide a way to enforce requirements when experimenting with different designs or when making changes. Changes made to objects can adjust other objects automatically, and restrict changes to distance and angle values. With constraints, you can ■ Maintain design specifications and requirements by constraining the geometry within a drawing ■ Apply multiple geometric constraints to objects instantly ■ Include formulas and equations within dimensional constraints ■ Make design changes quickly by changing the value of a variable BEST PRACTICE It is recommended that you first apply geometric constraints to determine the shape of a design, and then apply dimensional constraints to determine the size of objects in a design. Design Using Constraints When you are creating or changing a design, a drawing will be in one of three states: ■ Unconstrained. No constraints are applied to any geometry. ■ Underconstrained. Some constraints are applied to the geometry. ■ Fully constrained. All relevant geometric and dimensional constraints are applied to the geometry. A fully constrained set of objects also needs to include at least one Fix constraint to lock the location of the geometry. 804 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry Thus, there are two general methods for designing with constraints: ■ You can work in an underconstrained drawing and make changes as you go, using a combination of editing commands, grips, and adding or changing constraints. ■ You can create and fully constrain a drawing first, and then control the design exclusively by relaxing and replacing geometric constraints, and changing the values in dimensional constraints. The method that you choose depends on your design practices and the requirements of your discipline. NOTE The program prevents you from applying any constraints that result in an overconstrained condition. Use Constraints with Blocks and Xrefs You can apply constraints between ■ An object in the drawing and an object within a block reference ■ An object within a block reference and an object within a different block reference (not between objects within the same block reference) ■ The insertion point of an xref and an object or a block, but not to any objects within xrefs When you apply constraints to block references, the objects contained within the block are automatically available for selection. You do not need to press Ctrl for subobject selection. Adding constraints to a block reference can cause it to move or rotate as a result. NOTE Applying constraints to dynamic blocks suppresses the display of their dynamic grips. You can still change the values in a dynamic block using the Properties palette, but to redisplay the dynamic grips, the constraints must first be removed from the dynamic block. Constraints can be used in block definitions, resulting in dynamic blocks. You can control the size and shape of dynamic blocks directly from within the drawing. For more information, see Add Constraints to Dynamic Blocks on page 912. Overview of Constraints | 805 Remove or Relax Constraints There are two ways to cancel the effects of constraints when you need to make design changes: ■ Delete the constraints individually and later apply new constraints. While the cursor hovers over a geometric constraint icon, you can use the Delete key or the shortcut menu to delete the constraint. ■ Relax the constraints temporarily on selected objects to make the changes. With a grip selected or when you specify options during an editing command, tap the Ctrl key to alternate between relaxing constraints and maintaining constraints. Relaxed constraints are not maintained during editing. Constraints are restored automatically if possible when the editing process is complete. Constraints that are no longer valid are removed. NOTE The DELCONSTRAINT command deletes all geometric and dimensional constraints from an object. Quick Reference AUTOCONSTRAIN Applies geometric constraints to a selection set of objects based on orientation of the objects relative to one another. CONSTRAINTBAR Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. CONSTRAINTSETTINGS Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars. DCDISPLAY Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of objects. DELCONSTRAINT Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of objects. 806 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. GEOMCONSTRAINT Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. -PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. PARAMETERSCLOSE Closes the Parameters Manager palette. TEXTEDIT Edits a dimensional constraint, dimension, or text object. CCONSTRAINTFORM Controls whether annotational or dynamic constraints are applied to objects. CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when you select geometrically constrained drawings. CONSTRAINTBARMODE Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object. CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints. Overview of Constraints | 807 DIMCONSTRAINTICON Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints. DYNCONSTRAINTMODE Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are selected. PARAMETERCOPYMODE Controls how constraints and referenced user parameters are handled when constrained objects are copied between drawings, Model space and layouts, and block definitions. PARAMETERSSTATUS Indicates whether the Parameters Manager is displayed or hidden. Constrain Objects Geometrically Geometric constraints determine the relationships between 2D geometric objects or points on objects relative to each other. Overview of Geometric Constraints You can specify geometric constraints between 2D objects or points on objects. When you later edit the constrained geometry, the constraints are maintained. Thus, using geometric constraints, you have a method of including design requirements in your drawing. For example, in the illustration below, the following constraints are applied to the geometry. ■ Every endpoint is constrained to remain coincident with the endpoint of every adjacent object—these constraints are displayed as small blue squares ■ The vertical lines are constrained to remain parallel with each other and to remain equal to each other in length ■ The left vertical line is constrained to remain perpendicular to the horizontal line ■ The horizontal line is constrained to remain horizontal ■ The location of the circle and the horizontal line are constrained to remain fixed in space—these constraints are displayed as lock icons 808 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry NOTE The locked geometry is not associated to the other geometry without geometric constraints linked to it. The geometry is not fully constrained, however. Using grips, you can still change the radius of the arc, the diameter of the circle, the length of the horizontal line, and the length of the vertical lines. To specify these distances, you need to apply dimensional constraints. NOTE Constraints can be added to segments within a polyline as if they were separate objects. See also: ■ Overview of Dimensional Constraints on page 826 Quick Reference AUTOCONSTRAIN Applies geometric constraints to a selection set of objects based on orientation of the objects relative to one another. CONSTRAINTBAR Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. CONSTRAINTSETTINGS Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars. DELCONSTRAINT Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of objects. GEOMCONSTRAINT Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. Overview of Geometric Constraints | 809 LIST Displays property data for selected objects. CONSTRAINTBARMODE Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars. CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when you select geometrically constrained drawings. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object. CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints. Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints Geometric constraints associate geometric objects together, or specify a fixed location or angle. For example, you can specify that a line should always be perpendicular to another one, that an arc and a circle should always remain concentric, or that a line should always be tangent to an arc. 810 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry When you apply a constraint, two things occur: ■ The object that you select adjusts automatically to conform to the specified constraint ■ By default, a gray constraint icon displays near the constrained object as shown in the previous illustration, and a small blue glyph displays with your cursor when you move it over a constrained object Once applied, constraints permit only those changes to the geometry that do not violate the constraints. This provides a method for exploring design options or making design changes while maintaining the requirements and specifications of the design. NOTE The order in which you select two objects when you apply a constraint is important in some cases. Normally, the second object you select adjusts to the first object. For example, when you apply a perpendicular constraint, the second object you select will adjust to become perpendicular to the first. You can apply geometric constraints to 2D geometric objects only. Objects cannot be constrained between model space and paper space. Specify Constraint Points With some constraints, you specify constraint points on objects instead of selecting the objects. This behavior is similar to that of object snaps, but the locations are limited to endpoints, midpoints, center points, and insertion points. For example, a coincident constraint can restrict the location of the endpoint of one line to the endpoint of another line. The following glyph is displayed on the object as you roll over the object. Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints | 811 You use this glyph to confirm whether you are specifying the intended point to constrain. The fix, horizontal, and vertical constraint icons indicate whether the constraints are applied to an object or a point. Constraint Point Object Fix Horizontal Vertical The symmetric constraint icons indicate whether it identifying a symmetrical point or object, or the symmetrical line. Constraint Point Object Line Symmetric When rolling over any icon, the constraint point markers are displayed indicating the constrained points. You do not need to roll over the icon to identify the constraints that are applied to the points of the selected object. A different set of constraint bar icons are displayed when a horizontal or vertical constraint is not parallel or perpendicular with the current UCS. 812 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry Use Fix Constraints A fix constraint associates a constraint point on an object, or the object itself with a fixed location with respect to the World Coordinate System. It is often advisable to specify a fix constraint at an important geometric feature. This locks the location of that point or object, and prevents geometry from relocating when you make changes to the design. When you fix an object, the angle of a line, or the center of an arc or circle is also fixed. Apply Multiple Geometric Constraints You can apply multiple geometric constraints to objects either manually or automatically. When you want to apply all essential geometric constraints to a design automatically, you can use AUTOCONSTRAIN with the objects that you select in your drawing. This helps constrain the geometric shape of the design—depending on your design, there might be cases where you need to apply additional geometric constraints. AUTOCONSTRAIN also provides settings in which you can specify the following options: ■ What geometric constraints to apply ■ What order to apply geometric constraints ■ What tolerances are used to determine whether objects are horizontal, vertical, or touching NOTE Fix constraint is not applied with AUTOCONSTRAIN. You must apply the constraint individually. Equal constraint applied with AUTOCONSTRAIN resizes the selected arcs to the same radius only. It is not applied to the arc length. Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints | 813 To fully constrain the size and proportions of a design, you will later need to apply dimensional constraints. Remove Geometric Constraints A geometric constraint cannot be modified, but you can delete it and apply a different one. Several constraint options, including Delete, are available from the shortcut menu that is displayed when you right-click a constraint icon in the drawing. You can delete all constraints from a selection set in a single operation with DELCONSTRAINT. To set the order for applying multiple geometric constraints to an object 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ AutoConstrain. 2 At the Command prompt, enter s (Settings). 3 In the Constraint Settings dialog box, on the AutoConstrain tab, select a Constraint Type. 4 Click Move Up or Move Down. This changes the priority for a constraint when you use the AUTOCONSTRAIN command on an object. 5 Click OK. Quick Reference CONSTRAINTBAR Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. CONSTRAINTSETTINGS Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars. GCCOINCIDENT Constrains two points together or a point to a curve (or an extension of a curve). GCCOLLINEAR Causes two or more line segments to lie along the same line. 814 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry GCCONCENTRIC Constrains two arcs, circles, or ellipses to the same center point. GCEQUAL Resizes selected arcs and circles to the same radius, or selected lines to the same length. GCFIX Locks points and curves in position. GCHORIZONTAL Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the X axis of the current coordinate system. GCPARALLEL Causes selected lines to lie parallel to each other. GCPERPENDICULAR Causes selected lines to lie 90 degrees to one another. GCSMOOTH Constrains a spline to be contiguous and maintain G2 continuity with another spline, line, arc, or polyline. GCSYMMETRIC Causes selected objects to become symmetrically constrained about a selected line. GCTANGENT Constrains two curves to maintain a point of tangency to each other or their extensions. GCVERTICAL Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the Y axis of the current coordinate system. GEOMCONSTRAINT Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. CONSTRAINTBARMODE Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars. Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints | 815 CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when you select geometrically constrained drawings. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object. CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints. Display and Verify Geometric Constraints You can determine visually what objects are associated with any geometric constraint, or what constraints are associated with any object. Constraint icons provide information about how objects are constrained. A constraint bar displays one or more icons that represent the geometric constraints applied to an object. You can drag constraint bars when you need to move them out of the way, and you can also control whether they are displayed or hidden. Verify the Geometric Constraints on Objects You can confirm the association of geometric constraints with objects in two ways. ■ When you roll over a constraint icon on a constraint bar, the objects associated with that geometric constraint are highlighted. 816 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry ■ When you roll over an object that has geometric constraints applied to it, all constraint bars that are associated with the object are highlighted. These highlighting features simplify working with constraints especially when you have many constraints applied throughout a drawing. Control the Display of Constraint Bars Geometric constraints and constraint bars can be displayed or hidden, either individually or globally. You can do any of the following: ■ Display or hide all geometric constraints ■ Display or hide specified types of geometric constraints ■ Display or hide all geometric constraints associated with a selected object ■ Temporarily display the geometric constraints of the selected object Use the Constraint Settings dialog box to control the types of geometric constraints that are displayed or hidden on constraint bars. Display and Verify Geometric Constraints | 817 You can set the constraint bars to automatically and temporarily display when the constrained geometry is selected. When the geometry is no longer selected, the temporarily displayed constraint bars are hidden. Hiding geometric constraints is useful when you analyze a design and want to filter the display of geometric constraints. For example, you can choose to display the icons for Parallel constraints only. Next, you might choose to display the icons for Perpendicular constraints only. NOTE To reduce clutter, Coincident constraints display by default as small, light-blue squares. You can use an option in the Constraint Settings dialog box to turn them off if necessary. To display or hide a geometric constraint 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Show/Hide. 2 Select the constrained objects. 3 Press Enter. 4 Select one of following: ■ Show. Displays the geometric constraints. ■ Hide. Hides the geometric constraints. ■ Reset. Displays the geometric constraints and resets the contraint bar to the default position relative to the parameters they are associated with. To display all geometric constraints ➤ Click Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Show All. 818 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry To hide all geometric constraints ➤ Click Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Hide All. To change the constraint bar settings using the constraint bar shortcut menu 1 Select a constrained object. 2 Ensure that the constraint bar is visible for the selected object. 3 Right-click the constraint bar, and click Constraint Bar Settings. 4 In the Constraint Settings dialog box, on the Geometric tab, select or clear the appropriate check boxes. 5 Use the slider, or enter a value, to set the transparency level of constraint bars in the drawing. The default value is 50. 6 Click OK. Quick Reference GEOMCONSTRAINT Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. CONSTRAINTBAR Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. CONSTRAINTSETTINGS Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars. CONSTRAINTBARMODE Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars. CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when you select geometrically constrained drawings. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. Display and Verify Geometric Constraints | 819 CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object. CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints. Modify Objects with Geometric Constraints Applied You can edit constrained geometric objects with grips, editing commands, or by relaxing or applying geometric constraints. By definition, geometric constraints that are applied to geometric objects limit the editing actions that you perform on the objects. Modify Constrained Objects with Grips You can modify constrained geometry using grip editing modes. The geometry will maintain all applied constraints. For example, if a line object is constrained to remain tangent to a circle, you can rotate the line and change its length and endpoints, but the line or its extension will remain tangent to the circle. If the circle was an arc instead, the line or its extension would remain tangent to the arc or its extension. The results of modifying underconstrained objects are based on what constraints have already been applied and the object types involved. For example, if the Radius constraint had not been applied, the radius of the circle would have been modified instead of the tangent point of the line. 820 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry The CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE system variable determines the way an object behaves when constraints are applied or when grips are used to edit it. BEST PRACTICE You can limit unexpected changes by applying additional geometric or dimensional constraints. Common choices include coincident and fix constraints. Modify Constrained Objects with Editing Commands You can use editing commands such as MOVE, COPY, ROTATE, SCALE, and STRETCH to modify constrained geometry. The results maintain the constraints applied to the objects. NOTE The TRIM, EXTEND, BREAK, and JOIN commands in some circumstances can remove constraints. By default, if an editing command results in copying the constrained objects, the constraints applied to the original objects will also be duplicated. This behavior is controlled by the PARAMETERCOPYMODE system variable. Using the copying technique, you can save work by taking advantage of multiple instances of objects, bilateral symmetry, or radial symmetry. For information about temporarily relaxing constraints, see Overview of Constraints on page 803. To grip-edit constrained geometry 1 Select the constrained object. 2 Click the grips and drag it to edit the geometry. To turn a constraint off 1 Click the constrained object to select it. 2 Move your mouse over a grip. Modify Objects with Geometric Constraints Applied | 821 The grips are displayed in red to show that the object is selected. 3 Click the grip. 4 Press and release the Ctrl key. 5 Move the object. The object moves freely as it is no longer constrained. Constraint bars will no longer be displayed (if enabled) for the object, as the constraints are turned off. To delete a geometric constraint 1 Select a constrained object. 2 Ensure that the constraint bar is visible for the selected object. 3 Right-click the constraint bar. Click Delete. Constraint bars for the deleted constraint will no longer display for the object. To delete all geometric constraints from an object 1 Select a constrained object. 2 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Delete Constraint. NOTE All geometric and dimensional constraints are removed from the object. 3 Press Enter. Quick Reference GEOMCONSTRAINT Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. CONSTRAINTBAR Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. CONSTRAINTSETTINGS Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars. 822 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry CONSTRAINTBARMODE Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars. CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when you select geometrically constrained drawings. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object. CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints. Infer Geometric Constraints You can automatically apply geometric constraints while creating and editing geometric objects. Enabling Infer Constraints mode automatically applies constraints between the object you are creating or editing and the object or points associated with object snaps. Similar to the AUTOCONSTRAIN command, constraints are applied only if the objects meet the constraint conditions. Objects are not repositioned as a result of inferring constraints. With Infer Constraints turned on, the object snaps that you specify when creating geometry are used to infer geometric constraints. However, the following object snaps are not supported: Intersection, Apparent Intersection, Extension, and Quadrant. The following constraints cannot be inferred: ■ Fix ■ Smooth ■ Symmetric ■ Concentric ■ Equal Infer Geometric Constraints | 823 ■ Collinear Infer Constraints with Line and Polyline Certain object creation and editing commands can infer constraints regardless of the current object snap settings. LINE and PLINE commands infer coincident point-to-point constraints. The Close option infers a coincident constraint between the start point of the first line and the endpoint of the last line. Infer Constraints with Rectangle, Fillet, and Chamfer The RECTANG, FILLET, and CHAMFER commands infer constraints as follows: ■ RECTANG applies a pair of parallel constraints and a perpendicular constraint to the closed polyline. ■ FILLET applies tangent and coincident constraints between the newly created arc and the existing trimmed or extended pair of lines. ■ CHAMFER applies coincident contraints between the newly created line and the existing trimmed or extended pair of lines. The following commands are unaffected by the Infer Constraints setting: ■ SCALE ■ MIRROR ■ OFFSET ■ BREAK ■ TRIM ■ EXTEND ■ ARRAY Infer Constraints with Move, Copy, and Stretch When moving, copying, or stretching with the Infer Constraints on, you can apply coincident, perpendicular, parallel, or tangent constraints between the object being edited and the object being snapped to if the base point of the edited object is a valid constraint point of that object. 824 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry For example, if a line is stretched and snapped to an endpoint of another line, a coincident constraint is applied between the endpoints of the two lines. A vertical or horizontal constraint can be applied between objects when you move, copy, or stretch an object from a valid constraint point while object tracking vertically or horizontally along a valid constraint point on another object. See also: ■ Use Object Snaps on page 585 To turn on and off inferred constraints 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Constraint Settings, Geometric. 2 In the Constraint Settings dialog box, Geometric tab, click or clear Infer Geometric Constraints. 3 Click OK. NOTE Alternatively, you can click the Infer Constraints button on the Status bar. Quick Reference CHAMFER Bevels the edges of objects. CONSTRAINTSETTINGS Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars. DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. FILLET Rounds and fillets the edges of objects. LINE Creates straight line segments. Infer Geometric Constraints | 825 PLINE Creates a 2D polyline. RECTANG Creates a rectangular polyline. CONSTRAINTINFER Controls whether the geometric constraints are inferred while drawing and editing geometry. Constrain Distances and Angles between Objects You can control distances or angles between 2D geometric objects or points on objects applying dimensional constraints and specifying values. You can also constrain geometry with variables and equations. Overview of Dimensional Constraints Dimensional constraints control the size and proportions of a design. They can constrain the following: ■ Distances between objects, or between points on objects ■ Angles between objects, or between points on objects ■ Sizes of arcs and circles For example, the following illustration includes linear, aligned, angular, and diameter constraints. 826 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry If you change the value of a dimensional constraint, all the constraints on the object are evaluated, and the objects that are affected are updated automatically. Also, constraints can be added directly to segments within a polyline as if they were separate objects. NOTE The number of decimal places displayed in dimensional constraints is controlled by the LUPREC and AUPREC system variables. Compare Dimensional Constraints with Dimension Objects Dimensional constraints are different from dimension objects in the following ways: ■ Dimensional constraints are used in the design phase of a drawing, but dimensions are typically created in the documentation phase ■ Dimensional constraints drive the size or angle of objects, but dimensions are driven by objects ■ By default, dimensional constraints are not objects, display with only a single dimension style, maintain the same size during zoom operations, and are not plotted If you need to plot dimensional constraints or use dimension styles, you can change the form of a dimensional constraint from dynamic to annotational. See Apply Dimensional Constraints on page 829 for more detail. Define Variables and Equations With the Parameters Manager, you can define custom user variables that you can reference from within dimensional constraints and other user variables. The expressions that you define can include a variety of predefined functions and constants. Overview of Dimensional Constraints | 827 For more information about using variables and equations with constraints, see Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations on page 840 See also: ■ Overview of Geometric Constraints on page 808 Quick Reference DCDISPLAY Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of objects. DELCONSTRAINT Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of objects. DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. -PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. 828 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry PARAMETERSCLOSE Closes the Parameters Manager palette. TEXTEDIT Edits a dimensional constraint, dimension, or text object. CCONSTRAINTFORM Controls whether annotational or dynamic constraints are applied to objects. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object. CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints. DIMCONSTRAINTICON Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints. DYNCONSTRAINTMODE Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are selected. PARAMETERCOPYMODE Controls how constraints and referenced user parameters are handled when constrained objects are copied between drawings, Model space and layouts, and block definitions. PARAMETERSSTATUS Indicates whether the Parameters Manager is displayed or hidden. Apply Dimensional Constraints Dimensional constraints maintain specified distances and angles between geometric objects or points on objects. For example, you can specify that the length of a line should always remain at 6.00 units, that the vertical distance between two points be maintained at 1.00 unit, and that a circle should always remain at 1.00 unit in diameter. Apply Dimensional Constraints | 829 When you apply a dimensional constraint to an object, a constraint variable is automatically created for maintaining the constraint value. By default, these are assigned names such as d1 or dia1, but you can rename them in the Parameters Manager. Dimensional constraints can be created in one of the following forms: ■ Dynamic constraints ■ Annotational constraints The forms have different purposes. In addition, any dynamic or annotational constraint can be converted to a reference parameter. Dynamic Constraints By default, dimensional constraints are dynamic. They are ideal for normal parametric drawing and design tasks. Dynamic constraints have the following characteristics: ■ Maintain the same size when zooming in or out ■ Can easily be turned on or off globally in the drawing ■ Display using a fixed, predefined dimension style ■ Position the textual information automatically, and provide triangle grips with which you can change the value of a dimensional constraint ■ Do not display when the drawing is plotted If you need to control the dimension style of dynamic constraints, or if you need to plot dimensional constraints, use the Properties palette to change dynamic constraints to annotational constraints. 830 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry Annotational Constraints Annotational constraints are useful when you want dimensional constraints to have the following characteristics: ■ Change their size when zooming in or out ■ Display individually with layers ■ Display using the current dimension style ■ Provide grip capabilities that are similar to those on dimensions ■ Display when the drawing is plotted NOTE To display the text used in annotational constraints in the same format as used in dimensions, set the CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT system variable to 1. After plotting, you can use the Properties palette to convert annotational constraints back to dynamic constraints. Reference Parameters A reference parameter is a driven dimensional constraint, either dynamic or annotational. This means that it does not control the associated geometry, but rather reports a measurement similar to a dimension object. You use reference parameters as a convenient way to display measurements that you would otherwise have to calculate. For example, the width in the illustration is constrained by the diameter constraint, dia1, and the linear constraint, d1. The reference parameter, d2, displays the total width but does not constrain it. The textual information in reference parameters is always displayed within parentheses. Apply Dimensional Constraints | 831 You can set the Reference property in the Properties palette to convert a dynamic or annotational constraint to a reference parameter. NOTE You cannot change a reference parameter back to a dimensional constraint if doing so would overconstrain the geometry. To convert associative dimensions to dimensional constraints 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Convert. 2 Select the associative dimensions you want to convert. 3 Press Enter. To change the dimension name format 1 Select an annotational constraint, right-click in the drawing area, and click Dimension Name Format. 2 Select Value, Name, or Name and Expression. The Expression reflects the selected dimension name format. Quick Reference DCALIGNED Constrains the distance between two points on different objects. DCANGULAR Constrains the angle between line or polyline segments, the angle swept out by an arc or a polyline arc segment, or the angle between three points on objects. DCCONVERT Converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. DCDIAMETER Constrains the diameter of a circle or an arc. DCDISPLAY Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of objects. 832 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry DCFORM Specifies whether the dimensional constraint being created is dynamic or annotational. DCHORIZONTAL Constrains the X distance between points on an object, or between two points on different objects. DCLINEAR Creates a horizontal, vertical, or rotated constraint based on the locations of the extension line origins and the dimension line. DCRADIUS Constrains the radius of a circle or an arc. DCVERTICAL Constrains the Y distance between points on an object, or between two points on different objects. DELCONSTRAINT Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of objects. DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. -PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. PARAMETERSCLOSE Closes the Parameters Manager palette. TEXTEDIT Edits a dimensional constraint, dimension, or text object. Apply Dimensional Constraints | 833 CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object. CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints. DIMCONSTRAINTICON Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints. DYNCONSTRAINTMODE Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are selected. PARAMETERCOPYMODE Controls how constraints and referenced user parameters are handled when constrained objects are copied between drawings, Model space and layouts, and block definitions. PARAMETERSSTATUS Indicates whether the Parameters Manager is displayed or hidden. Control the Display of Dimensional Constraints You can display or hide dynamic and annotational constraints within a drawing. Display or Hide Dynamic Constraints You can hide all dynamic constraints to reduce clutter when you want to work with geometric constraints only, or when you need to continue other work in the drawing. You can turn on their display when needed from the ribbon or with the DCDISPLAY command. By default, if you select an object associated with a hidden dynamic constraint, all dynamic constraints associated with that object are temporarily displayed. You can display or hide the dynamic constraints for all objects or for a selection set. 834 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry Display or Hide Annotational Constraints You control the display of annotational constraints as you would with dimension objects—you assign them to a layer and turn the layer on or off as needed. You can also specify object properties for annotational constraints such as dimension style, color, and lineweight. To display or hide dynamic dimensional constraints 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Show/Hide. 2 Select the constrained objects. 3 Press Enter. 4 Select one of following: ■ Show. Displays the dimensional constraints. ■ Hide. Hides the dimensional constraints. Quick Reference DCDISPLAY Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of objects. DELCONSTRAINT Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of objects. DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. -PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. Control the Display of Dimensional Constraints | 835 PARAMETERSCLOSE Closes the Parameters Manager palette. TEXTEDIT Edits a dimensional constraint, dimension, or text object. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object. CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints. DIMCONSTRAINTICON Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints. DYNCONSTRAINTMODE Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are selected. PARAMETERCOPYMODE Controls how constraints and referenced user parameters are handled when constrained objects are copied between drawings, Model space and layouts, and block definitions. PARAMETERSSTATUS Indicates whether the Parameters Manager is displayed or hidden. Modify Objects with Dimensional Constraints Applied You can control lengths, distances, and angles of objects by changing constraint values, by manipulating dimensional constraints using grips, or by changing user variables or expressions associated with dimensional constraints. 836 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry Edit Dimensional Constraint Names, Values, and Expressions You can edit the names, values, and expressions that are associated with dimensional constraints using in-place editing: ■ Double-click the dimensional constraint, select the dimensional constraint and use the shortcut menu, or the TEXTEDIT command. ■ Open the Properties palette and select the dimensional constraint ■ Open the Parameters Manager and select the dimensional constraint either from the list or from within the drawing ■ Customize the Quick Properties palette to display several constraint properties You can reference other dimensional constraints by selecting them during an in-place editing operation. NOTE You cannot edit the Expression and Value properties for a reference parameter. Modify Dimensional Constraints Using Their Grips You can modify a constrained object either by using the triangular grips or the square grips on the associated dimensional constraint. The triangular grips on dimensional constraints provide a way of changing the constraint value while maintaining the constraint. For example, you can change the length of the diagonal line by using the triangular grips on the Aligned dimensional constraint. The diagonal line maintains its angle and the location of one of its endpoints. The square grip on dimensional constraints provides a way of changing the location of the text and other elements. Modify Objects with Dimensional Constraints Applied | 837 Dynamic dimensional constraints are more limited than annotational dimensional constraints in where the text can be located. NOTE Triangular grips are not available for dimensional constraints that reference other constraint variables in expressions. For information about temporarily relaxing constraints, see Overview of Constraints on page 803. To grip-edit a dimensional constraint 1 Select a constrained object. 2 Click the grips and drag to edit the geometry. To edit a dimensional constraint in-place 1 Double-click a dimensional constraint to display the in-place text editor. 2 Enter the new name, value, or expression (name=value). 3 Press Enter to confirm the change. To edit a dimensional constraint using the Properties palette 1 Select a dimensional constraint, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties. 2 Enter the new values for Name, Expression, and Description text boxes. To turn a dimensional constraint off 1 Click a constrained object in a drawing to select it. The grips are displayed on the object to show that it is selected. 838 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry 2 Move your cursor over a grip. The grip color turns red. 3 Click the grip. 4 Press and release the Ctrl key. 5 Move the object to the desired location. The constraint is relaxed for the object, and you should be able to move it. To edit the dimensions using the Parameters Manager palette 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager. 2 Double-click the variable you want to edit. 3 Press Tab to navigate across the columns. 4 Change the values in the appropriate column. NOTE You can modify only the Name, Expression, and Description columns. 5 Press Enter. Quick Reference DCDISPLAY Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of objects. DELCONSTRAINT Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of objects. DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. Modify Objects with Dimensional Constraints Applied | 839 PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. -PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. PARAMETERSCLOSE Closes the Parameters Manager palette. TEXTEDIT Edits a dimensional constraint, dimension, or text object. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object. CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints. DIMCONSTRAINTICON Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints. DYNCONSTRAINTMODE Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are selected. PARAMETERCOPYMODE Controls how constraints and referenced user parameters are handled when constrained objects are copied between drawings, Model space and layouts, and block definitions. PARAMETERSSTATUS Indicates whether the Parameters Manager is displayed or hidden. Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations You can control geometry using mathematical expressions that include the names of dimensional constraints, user variables, and functions. 840 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry Overview of Formulas and Equations Formulas and equations can be represented either as expressions within dimensional constraint parameters or by defining user variables. For example, the following illustration represents a design that constrains a circle to the center of the rectangle with an area equal to that of the rectangle. The Length and Width dimensional constraint parameters are set to constants. The d1 and d2 constraints are simple expressions that reference the Length and Width. The Radius dimensional constraint parameter is set to an expression that includes the square root function, parentheses to determine the precedence of operations, the Area user variable, the division operator, and the constant, PI. These parameters are all displayed in the Parameters Manager. As you can see, part of the equation for determining the area of the circle is included in the Radius dimensional constraint parameter and part was defined as a user variable. Alternatively, the entire expression, sqrt (Length * Width / PI), could have been assigned to the Radius dimensional constraint parameter, defined in a user variable, or some other combination. Overview of Formulas and Equations | 841 Protect Expressions in Dynamic Constraints When a dynamic dimensional constraint references one or more parameters, the prefix fx: is added to the name of the constraint. This prefix is displayed only in the drawing. Its purpose is to help you avoid accidentally overwriting parameters and formulas when the dimension name format is set to Value or Name, which suppresses the display of the parameters and formulas. Quick Reference DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. -PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager The Parameters Manager displays dimensional constraint parameters (both dynamic constraints and annotational constraints), reference parameters, and user variables. You can easily create, modify, and delete parameters from the Parameters Manager. The Parameters Manager supports the following operations: ■ Click the name of a dimensional constraint parameter to highlight the constraint in the drawing. ■ Double-click a name or expression to edit it. ■ Right-click and click Delete to remove a dimensional constraint parameter or user variable. ■ Click a column heading to sort the list of parameters by name, expression, or value. 842 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry Use Operators in Expressions Dimensional constraint parameters and user variables support the following operators within expressions: Operator Description + Addition - Subtraction or unary negation % Floating point modulo * Multiplication / Division ^ Exponentiation () Parenthesis, expression delimiter . Decimal separator NOTE With imperial units, the Parameters Manager interprets a minus or a dash (-) as a unit separator rather than a subtraction operation. To specify subtraction, include at least one space before or after the minus sign. For example, to subtract 9" from 5', enter 5' -9" rather than 5'-9". Understand Precedence in Expressions Expressions are evaluated according to the following standard mathematical rules of precedence: 1 Expressions in parentheses first, starting with the innermost set 2 Operators in standard order: (1) unary negation, (2) exponents, (3) multiplication and division, and (4) addition and subtraction 3 Operators of equal precedence from left to right Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager | 843 Functions Supported in Expressions The following functions are available for use in expressions: Function Syntax Cosine cos(expression) Sine sin(expression) Tangent tan(expression) Arc cosine acos(expression) Arc sine asin(expression) Arc tangent atan(expression) Hyperbolic cosine cosh(expression) Hyperbolic sine sinh(expression) Hyperbolic tangent tanh(expression) Arc hyperbolic cosine acosh(expression) Arc hyperbolic sine asinh(expression) Arc hyperbolic tangent atanh(expression) Square root sqrt(expression) Signum function (1,0,1) sign(expression) Round to nearest integer round(expression) Truncate decimal trunc(expression) Round down floor(expression) Round up ceil(expression) 844 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry Function Syntax Absolute value abs(expression) Largest element in array max(expression1;expression2) Smallest element in array min(expression1;expression2) Degrees to radians d2r(expression) Radians to degrees r2d(expression) Logarithm, base e ln(expression) Logarithm, base 10 log(expression) Exponent, base e exp(expression) Exponent, base 10 exp10(expression) Power function pow(expression1;expression2) Random decimal, 0-1 Random In addition to these functions, the constants Pi and e are also available for use in expressions. To reference a variable within an expression 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager. 2 Double-click the variable you want to reference. 3 Right-click the cell in the Name column, and click Copy. 4 Double-click the Expression column where you want to include the referenced variable. 5 Right-click the Expression column, and click Paste. Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager | 845 To include a function in an expression 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager. 2 Double-click the Expression column of the variable to which you want to add the function. 3 Right-click the Expression column, and click Expressions. 4 Select the function to insert it in the Expression column. To modify a user parameter 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager. 2 Double-click the columns of the variable you want to edit. 3 Change the values of the appropriate columns. NOTE You can modify only the Name, Expression, and Description columns. 4 Press Enter. To select a constrained object associated with a user parameter 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager. 2 Click the dimensional variable to view the associated object in the drawing. Quick Reference DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. 846 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry -PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. Organize Parameters into Groups Organize dimensional and user-defined parameters into groups, and control whether they are displayed in the Parameters Manager list. When many dimensional and user-defined parameters are defined in a drawing, it can be useful to use the Parameters Manager to create several parameter groups, and then assign the parameters to one or more of the groups with a simple drag and drop operation. The result lets you view one group of parameters at a time, organizing and limiting their display in the Parameters Manager. Thus, parameter groups are used as a display filter for the parameter list. Expanding the filter tree in the Parameters Manager displays all group filters created in the current space, Model space or a layout. There are two predefined filters displayed in the filter tree that cannot be edited: ■ All. Lists all parameters in the current space. ■ All Used in Expressions. Lists all parameters used in expressions or defined by an expression. When you use the Invert Filter option, it will display all the parameters not in the group instead of displaying only the parameters belonging to the group. Search For Parameters You can enter characters and wildcards such as * in the edit box of the Parameters Manager to search for parameters by name. This immediately filters the parameter list as you enter the characters. To create, modify, or delete a parameter group 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager. 2 In the Parameters Manager, you can do the following: ■ Create a parameter group. Click the Parameter Group button and specify a group name. ■ Rename a parameter group. Right-click the parameter group, choose Rename, and specify a new group name. Organize Parameters into Groups | 847 ■ Delete a parameter group. Right-click the parameter group and choose Delete. To add or remove parameters to or from parameter groups 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager. 2 In the Parameters Manager, you can do the following: ■ Add parameters to any user-defined parameter group. Select the parameters that you want to add to a parameter group. Drag and drop the selected parameters into a parameter group in the filter tree. A parameter can belong to multiple groups. ■ Remove parameters from a group. Select the parameters you want to remove. Right-click the selected parameters and choose Remove from Group Filter. Quick Reference PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. -PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. PARAMETERSCLOSE Closes the Parameters Manager palette. 848 | Chapter 20 Add Constraints to Geometry Part 7: Define and Reference Blocks 849 850 Work with Blocks 21 A block is one or more objects combined to create a single object. Blocks help you reuse objects in the same drawing or in other drawings. Overview of Blocks How Blocks Are Stored and Referenced Every drawing file has a block definition table that stores all block definitions, which consist of all information associated with the block. It is these block definitions that are referenced when you insert blocks in your drawing. Each rectangle below represents a separate drawing file and is divided into two parts: ■ The block definition table ■ The objects in the drawing 851 When you insert a block you are inserting a block reference. The information is not copied from the block definition to the drawing area. Instead, a link is established between the block reference and the block definition. Therefore, if the block definition is changed, all references are updated automatically. Use PURGE to remove unused block definitions from a drawing. Blocks and Layers A block can be composed of objects drawn on several layers with various colors, linetypes, and lineweight properties. Although a block is always inserted on the current layer, the block reference preserves information about the original layer, color, and linetype properties of the objects that are contained in the block. You can control whether objects in a block retain their original properties or inherit their properties from the current layer, color, linetype, or lineweight settings. Annotative Blocks You can also create blocks. For more information about creating and working with an annotative blocks, see Create Annotative Blocks and Attributes on page 1246. See also: ■ Scale Annotations on page 1224 Quick Reference BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. WBLOCK Writes objects or a block to a new drawing file. MAXSORT Sets the maximum number of symbol names or block names sorted by listing commands. 852 | Chapter 21 Work with Blocks Insert Blocks When you insert a block, you create a block reference and specify its location, scale, and rotation. Scale Block References You can specify the scale of a block reference using different X, Y, and Z values. A block that uses different drawing units than the units specified for the drawing is automatically scaled by a factor equivalent to the ratio between the two units. Edit Custom Properties If you insert a block reference that includes editable custom properties or attributes, you can change the values of these custom properties and attributes in the Properties palette while you insert the block. The block’s custom properties and attributes become editable in the Properties palette after the block is specified in one of the following ways: ■ In the Insert dialog box after clicking OK. ■ Using the -INSERT command after entering the block name. ■ Clicking a block tool on a tool palette. Insert a Drawing File as a Block When you insert an entire drawing file into another drawing, the drawing information is copied into the block table of the current drawing as a block definition. Subsequent insertions reference the block definition with different position, scale, and rotation settings, as shown in the following illustration. Insert Blocks | 853 Xrefs contained in a drawing you insert may not be displayed properly unless the xref was previously inserted or attached to the destination drawing. Insert Blocks from Tool Palettes You can insert blocks from tool palettes by dragging the block tool into the drawing or by clicking the block tool and then specifying an insertion point. You can choose to be prompted for a rotation angle (starting from 0) when you click and place the block. When you select this option, the angle that is specified under Rotation in the Tool Properties dialog box is ignored. The prompt for a rotation angle is not shown if you drag the block or xref or, if at the initial insertion Command prompt, you enter rotate. Blocks that are placed by dragging from a tool palette must often be rotated or scaled after they are placed. You can use object snaps when dragging blocks from a tool palette; however, grid snap is suppressed during dragging. When a block is dragged from a tool palette into a drawing, it is scaled automatically according to the ratio of units defined in the block and defined in the current drawing. For example, if the current drawing uses meters as its units and a block is defined using centimeters as its units, the ratio of the units is 1 m/100 cm. When the block is dragged into the drawing, it is inserted at 1/100 scale. NOTE In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, the Source Content Units and Target Drawing Units settings are used when Drag-and-Drop Scale is set to Unitless, either in the source block or target drawing. Insert Blocks from Block Libraries You can insert one or more block definitions from an existing drawing file into your current drawing file. Choose this method when retrieving blocks 854 | Chapter 21 Work with Blocks from block library drawings. A block library drawing contains block definitions of symbols with similar functions. These block definitions are stored together in a single drawing file for easy accessibility and management. Insert Blocks with DesignCenter Use DesignCenter to insert blocks from the current drawing or from another drawing. Drag and drop the block names for quick placement. Double-click the block names to specify the precise location, rotation, and scale of the blocks. See also: ■ Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks on page 867 ■ Overview of Blocks on page 851 ■ Create Block Libraries on page 873 ■ Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings on page 858 ■ Add Text and Blocks to Tables on page 1407 ■ Add Content with DesignCenter on page 97 ■ Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images on page 69 To insert a block defined in the current drawing 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Insert. 2 In the Insert dialog box, in the Name box, select a name from a list of block definitions. 3 If you want to use the pointing device to specify the insertion point, scale, and rotation, select Specify On-Screen. Otherwise, enter values in the Insertion Point, Scale, and Rotation boxes. Insert Blocks | 855 4 If you want the objects in the block to be inserted as individual objects instead of as a single block, select Explode. 5 Click OK. To insert a drawing file as a block by dragging 1 From Windows Explorer or any folder, drag the drawing file icon into the drawing area. When you release the button, you are prompted for an insertion point. 2 Specify the insertion point and scale and rotation values. To insert a block using DesignCenter 1 If DesignCenter is not already open, click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ DesignCenter. 2 Do one of the following to list the content you want to insert: ■ On the DesignCenter toolbar, click Tree View Toggle. Click the folder that contains the drawing you want to insert. ■ Click the icon of a drawing file displayed in the tree view. 3 Do one of the following to insert the content: ■ Drag the drawing file or block into your current drawing. Use this option when you want to insert blocks quickly and move or rotate the blocks to their precise locations later. ■ Double-click the drawing file or block that you want to insert into your current drawing. Use this option when you want to specify the exact placement, rotation, and scale of the block as you insert it. Use this option also when you want to update a block reference in your drawing from the original source drawing file. To change properties of a block as you insert it 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Insert. 3 In the Insert dialog box, in the Name box, select a name from a list of block definitions. 856 | Chapter 21 Work with Blocks 4 Select Specify On-Screen to use the pointing device to specify one or more of the following: ■ Insertion Point ■ Scale ■ Rotation 5 Click OK. 6 In the Properties palette, change the properties of the block (or dynamic block). Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. DIVIDE Creates evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. MEASURE Creates point objects or blocks at measured intervals along the length or perimeter of an object. ATTDIA Controls whether the INSERT command uses a dialog box for attribute value entry. INSNAME Sets a default block name for the INSERT command. INSUNITS Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing. INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. Insert Blocks | 857 INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings A dynamic block reference can be changed in a drawing while you work. Overview of Dynamic Blocks Dynamic block references contain grips or custom properties that change the way the reference is displayed in the drawing after it is inserted. For example, a dynamic block reference of a door can change size after you insert the block reference into your drawing. Dynamic blocks allow you to insert one block that can change shape, size, or configuration, instead of inserting one of many static block definitions. Work with Action Parameters Dynamic blocks that contain action parameters display grips that are associated with a point, object, or region in the block definition. When you edit the grip, an associated action is triggered that changes the way the block reference is displayed. You can hover over a grip to display a tooltip or prompt that explains the parameter related to the grip. The display of the tooltip is controlled by theGRIPTIPS system variable. 858 | Chapter 21 Work with Blocks Some dynamic blocks are defined so that geometry within the block can only be edited to certain sizes specified in the block definition. When you use a grip to edit the block reference, tick marks are displayed at the locations of valid values for the block reference. If you change a block property value to a value other than one specified in the definition, the parameter will adjust to the closest valid value. Quick Reference ATTSYNC Updates block references with new and changed attributes from a specified block definition. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. RESETBLOCK Resets one or more dynamic block references to the default values of the block definition. BTMARKDISPLAY Controls whether or not value set markers are displayed for dynamic block references. GRIPTIPS Controls the display of grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips. Work With Action Parameters in Blocks Use grips or the Properties palette to manipulate a block reference that contains action parameters. Use Grips to Change Blocks Containing Action Parameters You can manipulate a block that contains action parameters with custom grips. For example, when you drag the grip on the chair in the block reference below, the chair moves. Work With Action Parameters in Blocks | 859 The following table shows the different types of custom grips that can be included in a dynamic block. Grip Type How the Grip Can Be Manipulated in a Drawing Standard Within a plane in any direction Linear Back and forth in a defined direction or along an axis Rotation Around an axis Flip Clicked to flip the dynamic block reference Alignment Within a plane in any direction; when moved over an object, triggers the block reference to align with the object Lookup Clicked to display a list of items Work with Custom Properties When you select a dynamic block reference, custom properties are listed in the Properties palette under Custom. When you change the value of the custom property, the block reference is updated accordingly. 860 | Chapter 21 Work with Blocks Work With Lookup Grips A block reference that contains a lookup grip allows you to specify a preset value that changes the way the block reference is displayed. The new size is displayed in the Properties palette under Custom. Control Visibility of Block References A block definition can contain a visibility state grip, which determines several graphical representations of the same block reference. Work With Action Parameters in Blocks | 861 Reset a Block to Display Default Geometry When you reset a block reference, the block changes back to the default specified in the block definition. For example, you can make a block dynamic again if you non-uniformly scale or explode a dynamic block reference. Quick Reference RESETBLOCK Resets one or more dynamic block references to the default values of the block definition. GRIPDYNCOLOR Controls the color of custom grips for dynamic blocks. Work With Constraint Parameters in Blocks Use the Parameters Manager to manipulate a block reference that contains constraint parameters. Constraint parameters are authored with mathematical expressions that affect the geometry of the block reference. They display dynamic, editable custom properties that can be manipulated outside of the Block Editor, similar to action parameters. block reference with constraint (gray) and constraint parameter (blue, with grip) When you select a block reference that contains constraint parameters, the editable parameters are listed in the Parameters Manager. When you change the value of the parameter, the block reference is updated accordingly. 862 | Chapter 21 Work with Blocks Quick Reference PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. Remove Block Definitions To reduce the size of a drawing, you can remove unused block definitions. You can remove a block reference from your drawing by erasing it; however, the block definition remains in the drawing's block definition table. To remove unused block definitions and decrease the drawing size, use PURGE at any time in your drawing session. All references to a block must be erased before you can purge the block definition. See also: ■ Overview of Blocks on page 851 To remove a block definition 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Drawing Utilities panel ➤ Purge. The Purge dialog box displays a tree view of named objects that can be purged. 2 To purge blocks, use one of the following methods: ■ To purge all unreferenced blocks, select Blocks. To include nested blocks, select Purge Nested Items. ■ To purge specific blocks, double-click Blocks to expand the Block tree view. Select the blocks to be purged. If the item you want to purge is not listed, select View Items You Cannot Purge. 3 You are prompted to confirm each item in the list. If you do not want to confirm each purge, clear the Confirm Each Item to Be Purged option. 4 Click Purge. Remove Block Definitions | 863 To confirm the purging of each item, respond to the prompt by choosing Yes or No, or Yes to All if more than one item is selected. 5 Select more items to purge, or click Close. Quick Reference PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. 864 | Chapter 21 Work with Blocks Create and Modify Blocks 22 A block definition is a set of objects that are grouped together as one named object with a base point and unique properties. Define Blocks You create blocks by associating objects and giving them a name. Create Blocks Within a Drawing After you define a block in a drawing, you can insert a block reference in the drawing as many times as necessary. Use this method to create blocks quickly. Each block definition includes a block name, one or more objects, the coordinate values of the base point to be used for inserting the block, and any associated attribute data. The base point is used as a reference for positioning the block when you insert it. Suppose you specify that the base point is at the lower-left corner of an object in the block. Later, when you insert the block, you are prompted for an insertion point. The block base point is aligned at the insertion point you specified. The block definition in the illustration comprises a name, PLUG_VALVE, four lines, and a base point at the intersection of the two diagonal lines. For an explanation of the schematic representation shown, see Overview of Blocks on page 851. 865 The illustration shows a typical sequence for creating a block definition within a drawing. You can also use the Block Editor to create blocks that are saved within a drawing. See also: ■ Overview of the Block Editor on page 904 To define a block for the current drawing 1 Create the objects you want to use in the block definition. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create. 3 In the Block Definition dialog box, enter a block name in the Name box. 4 Under Objects, select Convert to Block. If you want the original objects used to create the block definition to remain in your drawing, make sure the Delete option is not selected. If this option is selected, the original objects are erased from the drawing. If necessary, you can use OOPS to restore them. 866 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks 5 Click Select Objects. 6 Use your pointing device to select the objects to be included in the block definition. Press Enter to complete object selection. 7 In the Block Definition dialog box under Base Point, specify the block insertion point using one of these methods. ■ Click Pick Point to specify a point using the pointing device. ■ Enter the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the point. 8 In the Description box, enter a description for the block definition. This description is displayed in DesignCenter™ (ADCENTER). 9 Click OK. The block is defined in the current drawing and can be inserted at any time. Quick Reference BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks You can create drawing files for the purpose of inserting them into other drawings as blocks. Individual drawing files are easy to create and manage as the source of block definitions. Collections of symbols can be stored as individual drawing files and grouped in folders. Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks | 867 Create a New Drawing File You have two methods for creating drawing files: ■ Create and save a complete drawing file using SAVE or SAVEAS. ■ Create and save only selected objects from your current drawing to a new drawing using EXPORT or WBLOCK. With either method, you create an ordinary drawing file that can be inserted as a block into any other drawing file. Using WBLOCK is recommended when you need to create several versions of a symbol as separate drawing files, or when you want to create a drawing file without leaving the current drawing. Change the Base Point of Drawings to Be Used as Blocks By default, the WCS (world coordinate system) origin (0,0,0) is used as the base point for drawing files inserted as blocks. You can change the base point by opening the original drawing and using BASE to specify a different base point for insertion. The next time you insert the block, the new base point is used. Update Changes in the Original Drawing If you change the original drawing after inserting it, the changes have no effect on the current drawing. If you expect the original drawing to change, and you want the changes to be reflected in the current drawing, you may want to attach it as an external reference instead of inserting it as a block. For more information about external references, see Reference Other Drawing Files on page 1665. Use Paper Space Objects in Blocks Objects in paper space are not included when you insert a drawing as a block. To transfer paper space objects to another drawing, make the objects into a block or save them in a separate drawing file, and then insert the block or drawing file into the other drawing. To create a new drawing file from selected objects 1 Open an existing drawing or create a new drawing. 2 At the Command prompt, enter wblock. 3 In the Write Block dialog box, select Objects. 868 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks If you want the original objects used to create the new drawing to remain in your drawing, make sure the Delete From Drawing option is not selected. If this option is selected, the original objects are erased from the drawing. If necessary, you can use OOPS to restore them. 4 Click Select Objects. 5 Use your pointing device to select the objects to be included in the new drawing. Press Enter to complete object selection. 6 In the Write Block dialog box under Base Point, specify the point to be the origin point (0,0,0) for the new drawing using one of these methods: ■ Click Specify Point to specify a point using the pointing device. ■ Enter the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the point. 7 Under Destination, enter a file name and path for the new drawing, or click the [...] button to display a standard file selection dialog box. 8 Click OK. A new drawing is created with the selected objects. To create a new drawing file from an existing block definition 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create. 2 In the Block Definition dialog box, in the Name box, select the block to modify. 3 In the Name box, enter a new name. 4 In the Description box, enter or modify the description for the new drawing file. Click OK. Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. BASE Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing. Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks | 869 BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. OOPS Restores erased objects. WBLOCK Writes objects or a block to a new drawing file. Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks Assign Color and Linetype Properties Generally when you insert a block, the color, linetype, and lineweight of objects in the block retain their original settings regardless of the current settings in the drawing. However, you can create blocks with objects that inherit the current color, linetype, and lineweight settings. These objects have floating properties. You have three choices for how the color, linetype, and lineweight properties of objects are treated when a block reference is inserted. ■ Objects in the block do not inherit color, linetype, and lineweight properties from the current settings. The properties of objects in the block do not change regardless of the current settings. For this choice, it is recommended that you set the color, linetype, and lineweight properties individually for each object in the block definition: do not use BYBLOCK or BYLAYER color, linetype, and lineweight settings when creating these objects. ■ Objects in the block inherit color, linetype, and lineweight properties from the color, linetype, and lineweight assigned to the current layer only. For this choice, before you create objects to be included in the block definition, set the current layer to 0, and set the current color, linetype, and lineweight to BYLAYER. 870 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks ■ Objects inherit color, linetype, and lineweight properties from the current color, linetype, and lineweight that you have set explicitly, that is, that you have set to override the color, linetype, or lineweight assigned to the current layer. If you have not explicitly set them, then these properties are inherited from the color, linetype, and lineweight assigned to the current layer. For this choice, before you create objects to be included in the block definition, set the current color or linetype to BYBLOCK. If you want objects in a Create objects on these Create objects with block to layers these properties Retain original properties Any but 0 (zero) Any but BYBLOCK or BYLAYER Inherit properties from the current layer 0 (zero) BYLAYER Inherit individual properties first, then layer properties Any BYBLOCK Floating properties also apply to nested blocks when the nested block references and the objects they contain use the settings required for floating properties. Change the Color and Linetype in a Block You can change the color and linetype of the objects within a block only if the objects in that block were created with floating properties. If a block was not created using objects with floating color and linetype properties, the only way to change these properties is to redefine the block. See also: ■ Control the Properties of Objects on page 465 Quick Reference COLOR Sets the color for new objects. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks | 871 LINETYPE Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Nest Blocks The only restriction on nested blocks is that you cannot insert blocks that reference themselves. You can apply geometric constraints and constraint parameters to nested objects in blocks. AutoCAD detects the nested entity or valid constraint point for the nested entity regardless of the nesting level of the object. NOTE Constraints can only be applied between nested objects in the block and objects in the drawing file, not between pairs of nested objects in the block reference. When a block definition is redefined, AutoCAD will re-evaluate the constraints between geometry in the drawing and the nested geometry in the block references. The drawing will then be updated appropriately. If a constraint cannot be resolved as a result of the change to the block definition, then the constraint is removed and an unresolved constraints message is displayed at the command line. 872 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks See also: ■ Add Constraints to Dynamic Blocks on page 912 Quick Reference BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. Create Block Libraries A block library is a collection of block definitions stored in a single drawing file. You can use block libraries supplied by Autodesk or other vendors or create your own. You can organize a set of related block definitions by creating the blocks in the same drawing file. Drawing files used this way are called block, or symbol, libraries. These block definitions can be inserted individually into any drawing that you are working on. Block library drawings are not different from other drawing files except in how they are used. When you use BLOCK to define each block definition in the block library drawing, you can include a short description of the block that can be viewed in DesignCenter. Optionally, you can also document each block definition by inserting it in the drawing area of the library drawing. In addition to the block geometry, you can include text that provides the block name, the date of creation, the date of the last modification, and any special instructions or conventions. This creates a visual index of the blocks in the block library drawing. Use DesignCenter to view and copy block definitions individually from block library drawings (or from any existing drawing) to your current drawing. DesignCenter does not overwrite an existing block definition in a drawing with one that comes from another drawing. Create Block Libraries | 873 To create a block library drawing 1 Begin a new drawing. 2 Define a block. 3 Repeat step 2 for as many related block definitions as you want to make. 4 Save the drawing using a name appropriate for a library drawing. These blocks can be inserted into any drawing using DesignCenter (ADCENTER). Quick Reference BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. Use Tool Palettes to Organize Blocks You can use tool palettes to organize blocks that are stored in one drawing file or separate drawing files. Once you've added a block tool to a tool palette, you can insert the block reference by dragging it from the tool palette to the drawing or by clicking and placing it in the drawing. For information about using tool palettes to organize and insert blocks, see Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images on page 69. Quick Reference TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. Create Construction Geometry Within a Block You can convert objects to construction geometry in the Block Editor. You can create construction geometry that will display within the Block Editor, but not in the drawing editor. In the example below, a symmetric constraint has been added to the block definition on the left. However, you may not want the line of symmetry to 874 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks be displayed when the block is inserted into your drawing. In the example on the right, the line of symmetry has been converted to a dashed line that will not display when the block is inserted into a drawing. You can add construction geometry (BCONSTRUCTION command) to the selection sets of legacy actions. The construction geometry is not affected by the visibility states. It is filtered from the selection set in the BVSTATE command when you add or remove geometry from a visibility state. NOTE When you explode a block containing construction geometry in previous versions of AutoCAD, the geometry is hidden in the drawing. See also: ■ Draw Construction and Reference Geometry on page 683 ■ Add Constraints to Geometry on page 803 Quick Reference BCONSTRUCTION Converts geometry into construction geometry. BVSTATE Creates, sets, or deletes a visibility state in a dynamic block. BLOCKTESTWINDOW Indicates whether or not a test block window is current. Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) You can attach information to blocks and later extract the information to create a bill of materials or other report. Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) | 875 Overview of Block Attributes An attribute is a label or tag that attaches data to a block. Examples of data that might be contained in an attribute are part numbers, prices, comments, and owners' names. The tag is equivalent to a column name in a database table. The following illustration shows a block with four attributes: type, manufacturer, model, and cost. The attributes in the illustration are single-line attributes. You can also create multiple-line attributes to store data such as addresses and descriptions. Attribute information extracted from a drawing can be used in a spreadsheet or database to produce a parts list or a bill of materials. You can associate more than one attribute with a block, provided that each attribute has a different tag. Attributes also can be "invisible." An invisible attribute is not displayed or plotted; however, the attribute information is stored in the drawing file and can be written to an extraction file for use in a database program. Whenever you insert a block that has a variable attribute, you are prompted to enter data to be stored with the block. Blocks can also use constant attributes, attributes whose values do not change. Constant attributes do not prompt you for a value when you insert the block. You can also create attributes. For more information about creating and working with an annotative attributes, see Create Annotative Blocks and Attributes on page 1246. See also: ■ Modify a Block Attribute Definition on page 893 876 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks ■ Modify the Data in Block Attributes on page 892 ■ Scale Annotations on page 1224 Quick Reference ATTDEF Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block. ATTDISP Controls the visibility overrides for all block attributes in a drawing. ATTEDIT Changes attribute information in a block. ATTIPEDIT Changes the textual content of an attribute within a block. DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. AFLAGS Sets options for attributes. ATTDIA Controls whether the INSERT command uses a dialog box for attribute value entry. ATTIPE Controls the display of the in-place editor used to create multiline attributes. ATTMODE Controls display of attributes. ATTMULTI Controls whether multiline attributes can be created. Overview of Block Attributes | 877 ATTREQ Controls whether INSERT uses default attribute settings during insertion of blocks. Define Block Attributes The characteristics include the tag, which is a name that identifies the attribute, the prompt displayed when you insert the block, value information, text formatting, location within the block, and any optional modes (Invisible, Constant, Verify, Preset, Lock Position, and Multiple Lines). If you plan to extract the attribute information for use in a parts list, you may want to keep a list of the attribute tags you have created. You will need this tag information later when you create the attribute template file. Choose Attribute Modes Attribute modes control the behavior of attributes in blocks. For example, you can control ■ Whether an attribute is visible or invisible in the drawing ■ Whether an attribute has a constant value, such as a part number ■ Whether the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block ■ Whether the attribute is a single-line attribute or a multiple-line attribute If an attribute has a constant value, you will not be prompted for its value when you insert the block. If an attribute has a variable value, such as the asset number of a computer, you will be prompted when you insert the block. Understand Single-Line and Multiple-Line Attributes There are several differences between single-line and multiple-line attributes. ■ Single-line attributes are limited to 255 characters from the user interface. ■ Multiple-line attributes provide more formatting options than single-line attributes. ■ When editing single-line and multiple line attributes, different editors are displayed. ■ Multiple line attributes display four grips similar to MTEXT objects, while single-line attributes display only one grip. 878 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks ■ When a drawing is saved to AutoCAD 2007 or earlier, a multiple-line attribute is converted to several single-line attributes, one for every line of text in the original multiple-line attribute. If the drawing file is opened in the current release, these single line attributes are automatically merged back into a multiple-line attribute. NOTE If a multiple-line attribute makes a round trip to an earlier release of AutoCAD, the differences between these two types of attributes might result in truncating very long lines of text and loss of formatting. However, before any characters are truncated, AutoCAD displays a dialog box that lets you cancel the operation. Correct Mistakes in Block Attribute Definitions If you make a mistake, you can use the Properties palette or DDEDIT to make limited changes to an attribute definition before it is associated with a block. If you need to make more extensive changes, delete the attribute definition and create a new one. Attach Attributes to Blocks After you create one or more attribute definitions, you attach the attributes to a block when you define or redefine that block. When you are prompted to select the objects to include in the block definition, include in the selection set any attributes you want to attach to the block. To use several attributes together, define them and then include them in the same block. For example, you can define attributes tagged "Type," "Manufacturer," “Model,” and “Cost,” and then include them in a block called CHAIR. Usually, the order of the attribute prompts is the same as the order in which you selected the attributes when you created the block. However, if you used crossing or window selection to select the attributes, the order of the prompts is the reverse of the order in which you created attributes. You can use the Block Attribute Manager to change the order in which you are prompted for attribute information when you insert the block reference. Define Block Attributes | 879 When you open a block definition in the Block Editor, you can use the Attribute Order dialog box to change the order in which you are prompted for attribute information when you insert the block reference. Use Attributes Without Attaching Them to Blocks Stand-alone attributes can also be created. Once attributes have been defined, and the drawing is saved, this drawing file can be inserted into another drawing. When the drawing is inserted, you are prompted for the attribute values. To create an attribute definition 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Define Attributes. 2 In the Attribute Definition dialog box, set the attribute modes and enter tag information, location, and text options. 3 (Optional) Under Text Settings, Boundary Width, specify a value. 4 (Optional) Click the Multiline In-Place Text Editor button to use the in-place text editor to format the attribute in the drawing. 5 Click OK. After creating the attribute definition, you can select it as an object while creating a block definition. If the attribute definition is incorporated into a block, whenever you insert the block, you are prompted with the text string you specified for the attribute. Each subsequent instance of the block can have a different value specified for the attribute. To edit an attribute definition before it is associated with a block 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Object ➤ Text. 2 Select the attribute to edit. 3 In the Edit Attribute Definition dialog box, specify the attribute tag, prompt, and default value. Then click OK. 880 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks To change the prompt order of attribute definitions 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Block Editor, select a block attribute. 3 Right-click in the Block Editor drawing area. 4 Click Attribute Order. 5 In the Attribute Order dialog box, select an attribute definition. 6 Click Move Up or Move Down to change the prompt order of the attribute definitions. 7 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the attribute definition list is in the desired order. 8 Click OK. Quick Reference ATTDEF Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block. ATTDISP Controls the visibility overrides for all block attributes in a drawing. BATTORDER Specifies the order of attributes for a block. DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. AFLAGS Sets options for attributes. ATTIPE Controls the display of the in-place editor used to create multiline attributes. Define Block Attributes | 881 ATTMULTI Controls whether multiline attributes can be created. Extract Data from Block Attributes Extracting attribute information is an easy way to produce a schedule or bill of materials directly from your drawing data. For example, a facilities drawing might contain blocks representing office equipment. If each block has attributes identifying the model and manufacturer of the equipment, you can generate a report that estimates the cost of the equipment. The Data Extraction wizard guides you through selecting drawings, block instances, and attributes. The wizard can also create a file with a .dxe file extension that contains all the settings for later reuse. Output to a Table If you extract attribute data to a table, the table is inserted in the current drawing and current space (model space or paper space) and on the current layer. When you update the table, the attribute information is extracted again and the data rows in the table are replaced. If you have included a title row or one or more header rows in the table, they are not replaced during the update. NOTE For access to shortcut menus in the drawing area that are needed for editing and updating tables, the Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area must be checked in the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab. Output to a File If you save the data to an external file, the comma-separated (CSV), tab-separated (TXT), Microsoft Excel (XLS), and Microsoft Access (MDB) file formats are available. When the characters period (.), comma (,), or pound sign (#) are written to an Excel or Access file, they are replaced with their Unicode representation. See also: ■ Extract Data from Drawings and Spreadsheets on page 1833 882 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks Quick Reference DATAEXTRACTION Extracts drawing data and merges data from an external source to a data extraction table or external file. DXEVAL Controls when update notification displays for data extraction tables. Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) You can extract attribute information from a drawing and create a separate text file for use with database software. This feature is useful for creating parts lists with information already entered in the drawing database. Extracting attribute information does not affect the drawing. To create a parts list ■ Create and edit an attribute definition ■ Enter values for the attributes as you insert the blocks ■ Create a template file and then extract attribute information to a text file To extract attribute information, you first create an attribute template file using any text processor, then generate the attribute extraction file using AutoCAD, and, finally, open the attribute extraction file in a database application. If you plan to extract the attribute information to a DXF (drawing interchange format) file, it is not necessary to first create an attribute template file. NOTE Make sure that the attribute extraction file does not have the same name as the attribute template file. Create an Attribute Extraction Template File Before you extract attribute information, you must create an ASCII template file to define the structure of the file that will contain the extracted attribute information. The template file contains information about the tag name, data type, field length, and number of decimal places associated with the information you want to extract. Each field in the template file extracts information from the block references in the drawing. Each line in the template file specifies one field to be written Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) | 883 to the attribute extraction file, including the name of the field, its character width, and its numerical precision. Each record in the attribute extraction file includes all the specified fields in the order given by the template file. The following template file includes the 15 possible fields. N means numeric, C means character, www means a 3 digit number for the total width of the field, and ddd means a 3 digit number representing how many numeric decimal places are to be displayed to the right of the decimal point. BL:NAME Cwww000 (Block name) BL:LEVEL Nwww000 (Block nesting level) BL:X Nwwwddd(X coordinate of block insertion point) BL:Y Nwwwddd(Y coordinate of block insertion point) BL:Z Nwwwddd(Z coordinate of block insertion point) BL:NUMBER Nwww000 (Block counter; the same for MINSERT) BL:HANDLE Cwww000 (Block handle; the same for MINSERT) BL:LAYER Cwww000 (Block insertion layer name) BL:ORIENT Nwwwddd(Block rotation angle) BL:XSCALE Nwwwddd(X scale factor) BL:YSCALE Nwwwddd(Y scale factor) BL:ZSCALE Nwwwddd(Z scale factor) BL:XEXTRUDE Nwwwddd(X component of block extrusion direction) BL:YEXTRUDE Nwwwddd(Y component of block extrusion direction) BL:ZEXTRUDE Nwwwddd(Z component of block extrusion direction) numericNwwwddd (Numeric attribute tag) characterCwww000 (Character attribute tag) The template file can include any or all of the BL:xxxxxxx field names listed, but must include at least one attribute tag field. The attribute tag fields determine which attributes, hence which blocks, are included in the attribute extraction file. If a block contains some, but not all, of the specified attributes, the values for the absent ones are filled with blanks or zeros, depending on whether the field is a character field or a numeric field. Comments should not be included in an attribute template file. The illustration and table show an example of the type of information you're likely to extract, including block name, manufacturer, model number, and cost. 884 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks Field (C)haracter or (N)umeric data Maximum field length Decimal places Block name C 040 000 Manufacturer C 006 000 Model C 015 000 Cost N 006 002 You can create any number of template files, depending on how you'll use the data. Each line of a template file specifies one field to be written in the attribute extraction file. Follow these additional guidelines: ■ Be sure to place a space between the attribute tag and the character or numeric data. Use SPACEBAR, not TAB, to enter the space. ■ Press Enter at the end of each line, including the last line. ■ Each attribute extraction template file must include at least one attribute tag field, but the same field can appear only once in the file. The following is a sample template file. BL:NAME C008000 (Block name, 8 characters) BL:X N007001 (X coordinate, format nnnnnn.d) BL:Y N007001 (Y coordinate, format nnnnnn.d) SUPPLIER C016000 (Manufacturer's name, 16 characters) MODEL C009000 (Model number, 9 characters) PRICE N009002 (Unit price, format nnnnnnnn.dd) Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) | 885 NOTE The format code for a numeric field includes the decimal point in the total field width. For example, the minimum field width to accommodate the number 249.95 would be 6 and would be represented as N006002. Character fields do not use the last three digits of the format code. Create an Attribute Extraction File After creating a template file, you can extract the attribute information using one of the following formats: ■ Comma-delimited format (CDF) ■ Space-delimited format (SDF) ■ Drawing interchange format (DXF) The CDF format produces a file containing one record for each block reference in a drawing. A comma separates the fields of each record, and single quotation marks enclose the character fields. Some database applications can read this format directly. The SDF format also produces a file containing one record for each block reference in a drawing. The fields of each record have a fixed width and employ neither field separators nor character-string delimiters. The dBASE III Copy . . . SDF operation also produces SDI-format files. The Append From... SDF operation can read a file in dBASE IV format, which user programs written in FORTRAN can easily process. DXF produces a subset of the drawing interchange format containing only block reference, attribute, and end-of-sequence objects. This option requires no attribute extraction template. The file extension .dxx distinguishes an extraction file in DXF format from normal DXF files. Use the Attribute Extraction File The attribute extraction file lists values and other information for the attribute tags you specified in the template file. If you specified a CDF format using the sample template, the output might appear as follows: 'DESK', 120.0, 49.5, 'ACME INDUST.', '51-793W', 379.95 'CHAIR', 122.0, 47.0, 'ACME INDUST.', '34-902A', 199.95 'DESK', -77.2, 40.0, 'TOP DRAWER INC.', 'X-52-44',249.95 886 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks By default, character fields are enclosed with single quotes (apostrophes). The default field delimiter is a comma. The following two template records can be used to override these defaults: C:QUOTE c (Character string delimiter) C:DELIM c (Field delimiter) The first nonblank character following the C:QUOTE or C:DELIM field name becomes the respective delimiter character. For example, if you want to enclose character strings with double quotes, include the following line in your attribute extraction template file: C:QUOTE " The quote delimiter must not be set to a character that can appear in a character field. Similarly, the field delimiter must not be set to a character that can appear in a numeric field. If you specified an SDF format using the sample template, the file might be similar to the following example. (NAME) (X) (Y) (SUPPLIER) (MODEL) (PRICE) DESK 120.0 49.5 ACME INDUST. 51-793W 379.95 CHAIR 122.0 47.0 ACME INDUST. 34-902A 199.95 DESK -77.2 40.0 TOP DRAWER INC. X-52-44 249.95 The order of the fields corresponds to the order of the fields in the template files. You can use these files in other applications, such as spreadsheets, and you can sort and manipulate the data as needed. For example, you can open an attribute extraction file in Microsoft Excel in which you can specify a separate column for each field. See the documentation for your spreadsheet program for information about how to use data from other applications. If you open the file in Notepad or another Windows text processor, you can paste the information back into the drawing as text. Nested Blocks The line BL:LEVEL in a template file reports the nesting level of a block reference. A block that is inserted in a drawing has a nesting level of 1. A block Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) | 887 reference that is part of (nested within) another block has a nesting level of 2, and so on. For a nested block reference, the X,Y, Z coordinate values, scale factors, extrusion direction, and rotation angle reflect the actual location, size, orientation, and rotation of the nested block in the world coordinate system. In some complex cases, nested block references cannot be correctly represented with only two scale factors and a rotation angle, for example, if a nested block reference is rotated in 3D. When this happens, the scale factors and rotation angle in the extracted file record are set to zero. Error Handling If a field is not wide enough for the data that is to be placed in it, the data is truncated and the following message is displayed: ** Field overflow in record This could happen, for example, if you have a BL:NAME field with a width of 8 characters and a block in your drawing has a name 10 characters long. To create an attribute extraction template file 1 Start Notepad. You can use any text editor or word processor that can save a text file in ASCII format. 2 Enter template information in Notepad. See Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) on page 883 for format information. 3 Save the file with a .txt file extension. To extract data about a specific tag, insert the tag name in place of the "numeric" or "character" fields. WARNING Do not use tab characters when constructing the template file with a word processor. If you use tab character alignment, the attribute information file is not created. To align the columns, insert ordinary spaces by pressing SPACEBAR. The use of tab characters may cause inconsistent alignment. To extract attribute information 1 At the Command prompt, enter attext. 2 In the Attribute Extraction dialog box, specify the appropriate file format: CDF, SDF, or DXF. 888 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks 3 Specify the objects to extract attributes from by choosing Select Objects. You can select a single block or multiple blocks in the drawing. 4 Specify the attribute template file to use by entering the file name or by choosing Template File and browsing. 5 Specify the output attribute information file by entering the file name or by choosing Output File and browsing. 6 Click OK. Quick Reference ATTEXT Extracts attribute data, informational text associated with a block, into a file. DATAEXTRACTION Extracts drawing data and merges data from an external source to a data extraction table or external file. Modify Blocks You can modify a block definition or a block reference already inserted in the drawing. Modify a Block Definition You can redefine block definitions in your current drawing. Redefining a block definition affects both previous and future insertions of the block in the current drawing and any associated attributes. There are two methods for redefining a block definition: ■ Modify the block definition in the current drawing. ■ Modify the block definition in the source drawing and reinsert it into the current drawing. The method you choose depends on whether you want to make changes in the current drawing only or in a source drawing also. Modify Blocks | 889 Modify a Block Definition in the Current Drawing To modify a block definition, follow the procedure to create a new block definition, but enter the name of the existing block definition. This replaces the existing block definition, and all the references to that block in the drawing are immediately updated to reflect the new definition. To save time, you can insert and explode an instance of the original block and then use the resulting objects in creating the new block definition. Update a Block Definition That Originated from a Drawing File Block definitions created in your current drawing by inserting a drawing file are not updated automatically when the original drawing is modified. You can use INSERT to update a block definition from the drawing file. Update a Block Definition That Originated from a Library Drawing (Advanced) DesignCenter™ does not overwrite an existing block definition in a drawing with one that comes from another drawing. To update a block definition that came from a library drawing, use WBLOCK to create a separate drawing file from the library drawing block. Then, use INSERT to overwrite the block definition in the drawing that uses the block. NOTE Block descriptions are stripped off when using INSERT. Use the Clipboard to copy and paste a block description displayed in the Block Definition dialog box from one block definition to another. Modify the Description of a Block To modify the DesignCenter description of a block definition, use BLOCK. You can also add descriptions to any number of existing blocks in the Block Definition dialog box. Redefine Block Attributes You can attach attributes to a block when you define or redefine that block. When you are prompted to select the objects to include in the block definition, include the desired attributes in the selection set. Redefining the attributes in the block definition has the following effects on block references that were previously inserted: ■ Constant attributes, which have a fixed value, are lost and replaced by any new constant attributes. 890 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks ■ Variable attributes remain unchanged, even if the new block definition has no attributes. ■ New attributes do not appear in the existing block references. See also: ■ Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) on page 875 ■ Modify Dynamic Block Definitions on page 910 To modify an existing block definition 1 Select the block to modify. 2 Right-click the block and click Properties on the shortcut menu. 3 In the Properties palette, select and modify X and Y position, scale, rotation values, or other properties. To update a block definition that originated from a drawing file 1 If DesignCenter is not already open, click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ DesignCenter. 2 In the tree view, click the folder that contains the drawing file from which the block originated. 3 In the content area (on the right side), right-click the drawing file. 4 On the shortcut menu, click Insert as Block. 5 In the Insert dialog box, click OK. 6 In the Block - Redefine Block dialog box, click Redefine Block. 7 Press ESC to exit the command. To modify a block description 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Object ➤ Block Description. 2 In the Block Definition dialog box, in the Name list, select the block for which you want to modify the block description. 3 In the Description box, enter or modify the description of the block. 4 Click OK. Modify a Block Definition | 891 5 In the Block - Redefine Block dialog box, click Redefine Block. Quick Reference BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Modify the Data in Block Attributes You can use any of the following methods to edit the values of attributes attached to a block: ■ Double-click the block to display the Enhanced Attributes Editor ■ Press Ctrl and double-click the attribute to display the in-place editor ■ Open the Properties palette and select the block You can also change the location of attributes in a block using grips. With multiple-line attributes, you can also move grips to resize the width of the text. NOTE If you press Ctrl and double-click an attribute that includes a hyperlink, the hyperlink opens the web page. To edit the attribute, use one of the other methods listed. See also: ■ Modify a Block Definition on page 889 To edit attribute data 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Objects ➤ Attribute ➤ Single. 892 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks 2 Select the block to edit. 3 In the Edit Attributes dialog box, retype the attribute information as necessary and click OK. Quick Reference ATTEDIT Changes attribute information in a block. ATTIPEDIT Changes the textual content of an attribute within a block. ATTSYNC Updates block references with new and changed attributes from a specified block definition. BATTMAN Manages the attributes for a selected block definition. EATTEDIT Edits attributes in a block reference. ATTIPE Controls the display of the in-place editor used to create multiline attributes. ATTMULTI Controls whether multiline attributes can be created. Modify a Block Attribute Definition You can modify attributes in block definitions with the Block Attribute Manager. For example, you can modify the following: ■ Properties that define how values are assigned to an attribute and whether or not the assigned value is visible in the drawing area ■ Properties that define how attribute text is displayed in the drawing ■ Properties that define the layer that the attribute is on and the attribute line's color, weight, and type Modify a Block Attribute Definition | 893 By default, attribute changes you make are applied to all existing block references in the current drawing. Changing the attribute properties of existing block references does not affect the values assigned to those blocks. For example, in a block containing an attribute whose tag is Cost and value is 19.99, the 19.99 value is unaffected if you change the tag from Cost to Unit Cost. Updating attributes with duplicate tag names can lead to unpredictable results. Use the Block Attribute Manager to find duplicate tags and change tag names. If constant attributes or nested attributed blocks are affected by your changes, use REGEN to update the display of those blocks in the drawing area. Change the Prompt Order for Attribute Values When you define a block, the order in which you select the attributes determines the order in which you are prompted for attribute information when you insert the block. You can use the Block Attribute Manager to change the order of prompts that request attribute values. Remove Block Attributes You can remove attributes from block definitions and from all existing block references in the current drawing. Attributes removed from existing block references do not disappear in the drawing area until you regenerate the drawing using REGEN. You cannot remove all attributes from a block; at least one attribute must remain. If you need to remove all attributes, redefine the block. Update Block References You can update attributes in all block references in the current drawing with changes you made to the block definition. For example, you may have used the Block Attribute Manager to modify attribute properties in several block definitions in your drawing but elected not to automatically update existing block references when you made the changes. Now that you are satisfied with the attribute changes you made, you can apply those changes to all blocks in the current drawing. You can also use ATTSYNC to update attribute properties in block references to match their block definition, or to update a block instance after you redefine a block attribute using BLOCK, -BLOCK, or BEDIT. Updating attribute properties in block references does not affect any values that have been assigned to those attributes. 894 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks Edit Attributes in a Block Reference You can select an attribute in a block reference and use the Properties palette to change its properties, or you can use the Enhanced Attribute Editor to modify all the attributes in a selected block reference. See also: ■ Define Block Attributes on page 878 ■ Modify a Block Definition on page 889 To edit attributes assigned to a block definition 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes. 2 In the Block Attribute Manager, select a block from the Block list, or click Select Block and select a block in the drawing area. 3 In the list of attributes, double-click the attribute you want to edit, or select the attribute and click Edit. 4 In the Edit Attribute dialog box, make the attribute changes you want, and then click OK. To specify whether changes are applied to existing block references 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes. 2 In the Block Attribute Manager, click Settings. 3 In the Settings dialog box, do one of the following: ■ To apply changes to existing block references, select the Apply Changes to Existing References option. ■ To apply changes only to new block insertions, clear the Apply Changes to Existing References option. 4 Click OK. Modify a Block Attribute Definition | 895 To highlight duplicate attribute tags in a block 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes. 2 In the Block Attribute Manager, click Settings. 3 In the Settings dialog box, select Emphasize Duplicate Tags. 4 Click OK. To change the prompt order for attribute values 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes. 2 In the Block Attribute Manager, select a block from the Block list, or click Select Block and select a block in the drawing area. For the selected block, attributes are listed in their prompt order. 3 To move an attribute up in the prompt order, select the attribute, and then click Move Up; to move an attribute down in the prompt order, select the attribute, and then click Move Down. NOTE The Move Up and Move Down buttons are unavailable for attributes with constant values (Mode=C). To remove an attribute from a block definition and all block references 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes. 2 In the Block Attribute Manager, select a block from the Block list, or click Select Block and select a block in the drawing area. 3 (Optional) If you do not want attributes removed from existing instances of the block, click Settings, and, in the Settings dialog box, clear Apply Changes to Existing References. 4 In the Block Attribute Manager, select an attribute from the attribute list, and then click Remove. Attributes removed from existing block instances do not disappear until you regenerate the drawing using REGEN. 896 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks To update existing block references with attributes you have modified 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes. 2 In the Block Attribute Manager, select a block from the Block list, or click Select Block and select a block in the drawing area. 3 Click Sync to update attributes you have changed in all block references for the selected block. To update the attributes in block references for a selected block definition 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Synchronize Attributes. 2 At the prompt, do one of the following: ■ Enter name, and then enter the name of the block whose block references you want to update. ■ Enter ? to view a list of blocks, and then enter name, followed by the name of the block. ■ Press Enter, and then use your pointing device to select a block in the drawing area. If you specify a block that does not exist, or if the block exists but does not contain attributes, an error message is displayed. Alternate 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit Single Attribute. 2 In the drawing area, select the block you want to edit. 3 In the Enhanced Attribute Editor, select the attribute you want to edit. You can change the attribute value or choose another tab and edit other attribute properties. 4 Make the attribute changes you want, and then do one of the following: ■ Click Apply to save your changes. The Enhanced Attribute Editor remains open. If you click Cancel later to exit the Enhanced Attribute Editor, attribute changes you made prior to choosing Apply are not reversed. Modify a Block Attribute Definition | 897 ■ Click OK to save your changes and close the Enhanced Attribute Editor. ■ Click Select Block to edit the attributes of a different block. If you made changes to the current block, but have not saved them, you are prompted to do so before selecting a new block. Quick Reference ATTIPEDIT Changes the textual content of an attribute within a block. ATTSYNC Updates block references with new and changed attributes from a specified block definition. BATTMAN Manages the attributes for a selected block definition. EATTEDIT Edits attributes in a block reference. ATTIPE Controls the display of the in-place editor used to create multiline attributes. ATTMULTI Controls whether multiline attributes can be created. Disassemble a Block Reference (Explode) If you need to modify one or more objects within a block separately, you can disassemble, or explode, the block reference into its component objects. After making the changes, you can ■ Create a new block definition ■ Redefine the existing block definition ■ Leave the component objects uncombined for other uses 898 | Chapter 22 Create and Modify Blocks When you explode a block reference, the block reference is disassembled into its component objects; however, the block definition still exists in the drawing for insertion later. You can automatically explode block references as you insert them by selecting the Explode option in the Insert dialog box. To control properties while you explode an object 1 Enter xplode. 2 Select the objects to be exploded. 3 If you selected more than one object, enter i to control properties for individual objects, or enter g to control properties for all the selected objects. 4 Enter an option for a property you want to change. The property is applied to the compound object and the prompt is redisplayed. 5 Enter another option, or enter e to explode the selected objects. The selected objects are exploded and the properties you specified are applied to the component objects. Quick Reference EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. XPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. Disassemble a Block Reference (Explode) | 899 900 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) 23 Instead of being a fixed part of a drawing, a dynamic block reference can be changed or manipulated as you work in a drawing. Overview of Dynamic Blocks Dynamic block definitions allow you to edit a block reference outside of the Block Editor. They contain rules, or parameters, for how to change the appearance of the block reference when it is inserted in the drawing. A dynamic block reference inserts one block that can be edited in several different ways. For example, instead of creating multiple interior door blocks of different sizes, you can create one resizable door block. You author dynamic blocks with either constraint parameters or action parameters. NOTE Using both constraint parameters and action parameters in the same block definition is not recommended. Constrain Block Definitions In a block definition, constraint parameters ■ Associate objects with one another ■ Restrict geometry or demensions Once the block is inserted into the drawing, the constraint parameters can be edited as properties by using the Properties Manager. 901 Add Actions and Parameters to Block Definitions In a block definition, actions and parameters provide rules for the behavior or a block once it is inserted into the drawing. Depending on the specified block geometry, or parameter, you can associate an action to that parameter. The parameter is represented as a grip in the drawing. When you edit the grip, the associated action determines what will change in the block reference. Just as with constraint parameters, action parameters can have editable properties that are changed using the Properties Manager. Quick Start to Creating Dynamic Blocks Plan the block content. Know how the block should change or move, and ----- what parts will depend on the others. Example: The block will be resizable, and after it is resized, additional geometry is displayed. Draw the block geometry in the drawing area or the Block Editor. Draw the geometry. Add parameters. NOTE If you will use visibility states to change ----- how geometry is displayed, you may not want to include all the geometry at this point. For more information, see Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block on page 953. Add either individual parameters or parameter ----- sets to define geometry that will be affected by an action or manipulation. Keep in mind the objects that will be dependent on one another. 902 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) Add actions. If you are working with action parameters on ----- page 925, if necessary, add actions to define what will happen to the geometry when it is manipulated. Define custom properties. Add properties that determine how the block is ----- displayed in the drawing area. Custom properties affect grips, labels, and preset values for block geometry. Test the block. On the ribbon, in the Block Editor contextual tab, ----- Open/Save panel, click Test Block to test the block before you save it. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. BTESTBLOCK Displays a window within the Block Editor to test a dynamic block. Create and Edit Dynamic Blocks The Block Editor provides tools for adding dynamic behavior to block definitions. Create and Edit Dynamic Blocks | 903 Overview of the Block Editor In the Block Editor, you can ■ Define a block ■ Add a geometric or dimensional constraint ■ Add an action parameter ■ Define attributes ■ Manage visibility states ■ Test and save the block definition UCS in the Block Editor Within the Block Editor, the origin of the UCS icon defines the base point for the block. You can change the base point for the block by moving the geometry relative to the origin of the UCS icon, or by adding a base point parameter. The UCS command is disabled in the Block Editor. Keep the following in mind: ■ While you can assign parameters to an existing 3D block definition, the block reference cannot be edited along the Z axis. ■ While you can add actions to a dynamic block that contains solid objects, you can't perform solid editing features within a dynamic block reference (for example, stretch a solid, move a hole within a solid, and so on). NOTE The Command window should be displayed in the Block Editor, as it displays prompts for many aspects of creating dynamic blocks. See also: ■ Define Block Attributes on page 878 To open an existing block definition in the Block Editor 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit. 2 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, do one of the following: ■ Select a block definition from the list. 904 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) ■ Select if the drawing is the block definition you want to open. 3 Click OK. To create a new block definition in the Block Editor 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create. 2 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, enter a name for the new block definition. Click OK. 3 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. NOTE This saves the block definition even if you have not added any objects in the Block Editor drawing area. 4 Click Close Block Editor. To open a drawing file saved as a block (not dynamic) in the Block Editor 1 Click the Application button, and click Open ➤ Drawing. 2 Open the drawing file that is saved as a block. 3 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit. 4 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, select . Click OK. To open a drawing file saved as a dynamic block in the Block Editor 1 Click the Application button, and click Open ➤ Drawing. 2 Open the drawing file that is saved as a block. An alert is displayed that states that the drawing file contains authoring elements. 3 In the alert dialog box, click Yes to open the drawing in the Block Editor. Overview of the Block Editor | 905 To view properties of a block definition in the Block Editor 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit. 2 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, do one of the following: ■ Select a block definition from the list. ■ Select if the drawing is the block definition you want to open. 3 Click OK. 4 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 5 In the Properties Palette window, under Block, view the properties of the block definition. Quick Reference BCLOSE Closes the Block Editor. BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. BLOCKEDITLOCK Disallows opening of the Block Editor and editing of dynamic block definitions. Create Custom Block Authoring Tools Use the Block Authoring palettes to create custom tools for authoring dynamic blocks. 906 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) Similar to tool palettes, you can also use these palettes to add parameters and actions to your dynamic block definition. Change Properties of Tools In the Tool Properties dialog box, you can change the following properties of custom tools: ■ Tool description ■ Parameter type ■ Associated action(s) ■ Key point on the parameter to which the action is tied (if applicable) ■ Tool palette image NOTE You cannot drag parameters and actions from the Block Editor onto a regular tool palette. Use Parameter Sets The Parameter Sets tab of the Block Authoring palettes allows you to add commonly paired parameters and actions to your dynamic block definition. When you first add a parameter set to your dynamic block definition, a yellow alert icon is displayed next to each action. This indicates that you need to associate a selection set with each action. You can double click the yellow alert icon (or use the BACTIONSET command) and follow the Command prompts to associate the action with a selection set. NOTE When you insert a lookup parameter set and double click the yellow alert icon, the Property Lookup Table dialog box is displayed. Lookup actions are associated with the data you add to this table, not a selection set. See also: ■ Add Parameters to Dynamic Blocks on page 924 ■ Overview of Actions on page 925 ■ Control Tool Properties on page 78 ■ Organize Tool Palettes on page 86 Create Custom Block Authoring Tools | 907 To make a copy of a parameter set 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, Under Block To Create or Edit, select a name from the list and then, click OK. 3 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Authoring Palettes. 4 In the Block Authoring Palettes window, Parameters Sets tab, right-click a parameter set. Click Copy. 5 Right-click anywhere on the palette to which you want to add the parameter set (except on a parameter set). Click Paste. To add or remove an action from a parameter set 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, Under Block To Create or Edit, select a name from the list and then, click OK. 3 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Authoring Palettes. 4 In the Block Authoring Palettes window, Parameters Sets tab, right-click a parameter set. Click Properties. 5 In the Tool Properties dialog box, under Parameter, click Actions, and then click the [...] button. 6 In the Add Actions dialog box, under Action Object to Add, select an action from the list. 7 Click either Add or Delete. 8 (Optional) Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add or remove additional actions. 9 Click OK. 10 In the Tool Properties dialog box, click OK. 908 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) Quick Reference BAUTHORPALETTE Opens the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor. BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE Closes the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor. BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. BLOCKEDITOR Indicates whether or not the Block Editor is open. Test Blocks Within the Block Editor Test your block definition before you save or exit the Block Editor. The test block window reflects the current block definition in the Block Editor. The test block window closes when you ■ Open a different block definition ■ Save the current block definition with a different name ■ Exit the Block Editor NOTE If you exit AutoCAD while in the Test Block window, you will not be prompted to save the file. Quick Reference BTESTBLOCK Displays a window within the Block Editor to test a dynamic block. BLOCKTESTWINDOW Indicates whether or not a test block window is current. Test Blocks Within the Block Editor | 909 Modify Dynamic Block Definitions Correct Errors in Action Parameters A yellow alert icon is displayed when ■ A parameter is not associated with an action ■ An action is not associated with a parameter or selection set To correct these errors, hover over the yellow alert icon until the tooltip displays a description of the problem. Then double-click the constraint and follow the prompts. Save Dynamic Blocks When you save a block definition, the current values of the geometry and parameters in the block become the default values for the block reference. The default visibility state for the block reference is the visibility state at the top of the list in the Manage Visibility States dialog box. NOTE If you click File menu ➤ Save while you are in the Block Editor, you will save the drawing but not the block definition. You must specifically save the block definition while you are in the Block Editor. To save a copy of the current block definition in the Block Editor under a new name 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block As. 3 In the Save Block As dialog box, enter a name for the new block definition. Click OK. 4 To save the block definition in the drawing, click File menu ➤ Save. 910 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) To save the current block definition as a new drawing file 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block As. 3 In the Save Block As dialog box, enter a name for the new block definition. 4 Select the Save Block Definition to Drawing File check box. Click OK. 5 In the Browse For Drawing File dialog box, click Save. Quick Reference BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BACTIONTOOL Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BACTIONSET Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic block definition. BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BCLOSE Closes the Block Editor. BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BGRIPSET Creates, deletes, or resets grips associated with a parameter. BPARAMETER Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition. Modify Dynamic Block Definitions | 911 BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. BSAVE Saves the current block definition. BSAVEAS Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name. BVSTATE Creates, sets, or deletes a visibility state in a dynamic block. Add Constraints to Dynamic Blocks You can add geometric and dimensional constraints to a dynamic block. Overview of Constraints in Dynamic Blocks When you add constraints to a dynamic block definition, you have the option of adding editable properties that control the parameters once they are inserted in a drawing. Geometric Constraints in Block Definitions You can add geometric constraints to blocks the same way you would to geometry outside of the Block Editor. Geometric constraints are available both on the ribbon and on the Block Authoring palettes. Dimensional Constraints in Block Definitions A dimensional constraint applied within the Block Editor using the BCPARAMETER command is called a constraint parameter. While you can use both dimensional constraints and constraint parameters in a block definition, only constraint parameters will display editable custom properties for that block reference. Constraint parameters contain parameter information that can be displayed or edited for the block reference. 912 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) The above block definition contains both a linear constraint and a horizontal constraint parameter. The horizontal constraint parameter includes a grip, while the linear constraint does not. The horizontal constraint parameter is also dynamic, while the linear constraint is not. See also: ■ Constrain Objects Geometrically on page 808 ■ Apply Dimensional Constraints on page 829 ■ Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks on page 939 ■ Associative Dimensions on page 1421 To convert a dimensional constraint into a constraint parameter 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Convert. 3 Select a dimensional constraint in the Block Editor or enter a constraint parameter type option in the command line. Quick Reference BCPARAMETER Applies constraint parameters to selected objects, or converts dimensional constraints to parameter constraints. DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. Overview of Constraints in Dynamic Blocks | 913 BCONSTATUSMODE Turns the constraint display status on and off and controls the shading of objects based on their constraint level. Define User Parameters in Dynamic Blocks You can control the geometry of constraint parameters with mathematical expressions. While you can insert both user variables and user parameters in the Block Editor, only user parameters are displayed as editable custom properties for a block reference. There are several types of user parameters. For more information, see Parameters Manager - Block Editor. NOTE User parameters can be exposed as custom properties of the block reference. If it does not define an equation, then the property can be edited. If it is an equation, then the property is read-only. See also: ■ Parameters Manager - Block Editor ■ Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations on page 840 ■ Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks on page 939 To create a new user parameter 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Block Table. 3 In the Block Properties Table dialog box, click New Properties. 4 In the New Parameter dialog box, specify a name and a value. Click OK. 914 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) Quick Reference BCPARAMETER Applies constraint parameters to selected objects, or converts dimensional constraints to parameter constraints. BTABLE Displays a dialog box to define variations of a block. DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. BCONSTATUSMODE Turns the constraint display status on and off and controls the shading of objects based on their constraint level. Control Constrained Blocks with the Parameters Manager The Parameters Manager allows you to display and edit constraints, user parameters, action parameters, and block attributes from within the Block Editor. Within the Block Editor, the Parameters Manager displays and controls the following categories: ■ Action Parameters ■ Dimensional Constraint Parameters ■ Reference Parameters ■ User Parameters ■ Attributes For each of the above categories, you can display and control the following: ■ Name ■ Expression ■ Value ■ Type Control Constrained Blocks with the Parameters Manager | 915 ■ Show or Hide Information ■ Display Order ■ Description For more information on the Parameters Manager in the Block Editor, see Parameters Manager - Block Editor. To display or hide additional columns in the Parameters Manager ■ In the Parameters Manager, right-click a column header and select or de-select a column name. Quick Reference PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. PARAMETERSCLOSE Closes the Parameters Manager palette. PARAMETERSSTATUS Indicates whether the Parameters Manager is displayed or hidden. Use a Block Properties Table You can define and control values for parameters and properties within a block definition using a Block Properties table. The Block Properties Table dialog box consists of a grid with parameters defining column headings and rows defining the different property set values. When selecting a block reference, it can be set to the values defined by one of the rows in the block properties table. 916 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) A table can include any of the following parameters and properties: ■ Action parameters ■ User parameters ■ Constraint parameters ■ Attributes NOTE Only one table is allowed in the block definition. You can restrict the property set for block references to only values defined by one of the rows of the table. You can also change individual properties of the reference so that the property set no longer matches one of the defined rows. To add parameter properties to a block table 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Block Editor, double-click a block properties table in the block definition. 3 In the Block Properties Table dialog box, click Add Properties. Use a Block Properties Table | 917 4 In the Add Parameter Properties dialog box, under the Parameter Properties list, select the parameter properties you want to add to the block table. Hold Ctrl to select more than one property. 5 Click OK. To check for errors in a block properties table 1 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Block Table. 2 In the Block Properties Table dialog box, click Audit. Quick Reference BCPARAMETER Applies constraint parameters to selected objects, or converts dimensional constraints to parameter constraints. BTABLE Displays a dialog box to define variations of a block. DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. BCONSTATUSMODE Turns the constraint display status on and off and controls the shading of objects based on their constraint level. Identify Fully Constrained Objects When an object is fully constrained, all relevant geometric and dimensional constraints are applied to the geometry. You should always fully constrain geometry in a dynamic block definition that contains constraints. If a block definition is not fully constrained, you may get unpredictable behavior when the block is inserted in a drawing. For more information on fully constrained objects, see Overview of Constraints on page 803. 918 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) Work with Fully Constrained Block Definitions You can identify fully constrained objects with the constrained status mode in the Block Editor. The BCONSTATUSMODE system variable allows you to switch between the constrained status modes. You can also use the ribbon to switch between modes while in the Block Editor. The constrained geometry is represented with different colors. For more information see the Block Editor Settings dialog box. NOTE A fully constrained block definition must contain at least one fixed geometric constraint. See also: ■ Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints on page 810 To identify the constrained objects 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Constraint Status. The constrained objects are represented with the constraint status colors specified in the Block Editor Settings dialog box. To specify color assignment for the constraint display status 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Block Editor Settings. 3 In the Block Editor Settings dialog box, under Constraint Status, specify colors for the following constrained objects: ■ Unconstrained ■ Partially Constrained ■ Fully Constrained ■ Improperly Constrained Identify Fully Constrained Objects | 919 4 Click OK. Quick Reference BESETTINGS Displays the Block Editor Settings dialog box. BCONSTATUSMODE Turns the constraint display status on and off and controls the shading of objects based on their constraint level. Add Action Parameters to Dynamic Blocks You can add actions and parameters to dynamic blocks to determine how a block should behave when it is inserted into a drawing. Overview of Actions and Parameters Parameters, actions, and their relationships (dependencies) are displayed in different ways in the Block Editor. You can specify settings for some of these elements. Actions An action displays its name and icon (a lightning bolt) in the Block Editor. Actions are grouped into bars, which display all actions associated with a parameter. 920 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) Hover the cursor over an action icon to display ■ The associated parameter ■ The associated selection set ■ Additional objects that belong to the action NOTE In order to use the BASSOCIATE command, you must first set BACTIONBARMODE to 0. Custom Tools You can create custom block authoring tools, which you access from the block authoring palettes. In order to preserve the default tools on the block authoring palettes, you should create a new palette for custom block authoring tools. You can then copy a parameter set tool from one of the existing palettes and paste the copy onto the new palette. Overview of Actions and Parameters | 921 Dependencies When you select a parameter, grip, or action in the Block Editor, its associated objects are highlighted. This is called dependency highlighting. You can turn dependency highlighting on or off. The following example shows how dependency highlighting creates a halo effect for the associated parameter (labeled Distance) and action (labeled Stretch) when you select the custom grip in the Block Editor. The following table details what is dependency highlighted when you select an element in the Block Editor. Selected object in the Block Editor Objects that are dependency highlighted Parameter Associated grips and actions Grip Associated parameter and actions Action Associated parameters, grips, and the selection set (geometry) To specify settings for parameters and actions in the Block Editor 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Dialog box launcher. 3 In the Block Editor Settings dialog box, set the desired options. 4 Click OK. To specify the text color for actions in the Block Editor 1 At the Command prompt, enter bactionbarmode. 2 Enter 0 to view legacy action objects. 922 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) 3 At the Command prompt, enter bactioncolor. 4 Enter one of the following values: ■ BYLAYER ■ BYBLOCK ■ An integer from 1 to 255. ■ A true color specified by three integers each ranging from 1 to 255 in the following format: RGB:000,000,000. 5 Press Enter. 6 At the Command prompt, enter regen to regenerate the drawing. Quick Reference BACTIONBAR Displays or hides action bars for a selection set of parameter objects. BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BESETTINGS Displays the Block Editor Settings dialog box. BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. REGEN Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport. BACTIONBARMODE Indicates whether the action bars or the legacy action objects are displayed in the Block Editor. BACTIONCOLOR Sets the text color of actions in the Block Editor. BDEPENDENCYHIGHLIGHT Controls whether or not dependent objects are dependency highlighted when a parameter, action, or grip is selected in the Block Editor. Overview of Actions and Parameters | 923 BGRIPOBJCOLOR Sets the color of grips in the Block Editor. BGRIPOBJSIZE Sets the display size of custom grips in the Block Editor relative to the screen display. BPARAMETERCOLOR Sets the color of parameters in the Block Editor. BPARAMETERFONT Sets the font used for parameters and actions in the Block Editor. BPARAMETERSIZE Sets the size of parameter text and features in the Block Editor relative to the screen display. BPTEXTHORIZONTAL Forces the text displayed for action parametes and constraint parameters in the Block Editor to be horizontal. BTMARKDISPLAY Controls whether or not value set markers are displayed for dynamic block references. BVMODE Controls how objects that are made invisible for the current visibility state are displayed in the Block Editor. Add Parameters to Dynamic Blocks Grips When you add a parameter to a dynamic block definition, grips are added to key points of the parameter. Key points are the parts of a parameter that you use to manipulate the block reference. For example, a linear parameter has key points at its base point and end point. You can manipulate the parameter distance from either key point. You can specify grip size and color for display in the Block Editor. This setting does not affect the size and color of the grips in a block reference. 924 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) See also: ■ Specify Value Sets for Dynamic Blocks on page 944 ■ Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks on page 939 ■ Extract Data from Block Attributes on page 882 ■ Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) on page 883 Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BPARAMETER Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition. BSAVE Saves the current block definition. Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks Actions define how the geometry of a dynamic block reference will move or change when the custom properties of the block reference are manipulated in a drawing. Overview of Actions In general, you associate an action with a parameter and the following: ■ Key point. The point on a parameter that drives the action. ■ Selection set. The geometry that will be affected by the action. Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks | 925 When you move the grip in the example above, only the geometry in the selection set is stretched. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BACTIONSET Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic block definition. BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Move Actions Move selected objects a specified distance and angle. Apply a Move Action to a Point Parameter A move action associated with a point parameter moves all objects in a selection set in any direction. The point parameter is the location of the grip for the move action in the block reference. 926 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) Apply a Move Action to a Linear Parameter A move action associated with a linear parameter moves all objects in a selection set only in the direction of the linear parameter. The parameter key point is the location of the grip in the block reference. Apply a Move Action to a Polar Parameter A move action associated with a polar parameter moves all objects in a selection set in any direction. In the block reference, the parameter key point is ■ The location of the move grip ■ The offset distance from the selected objects Applying a move action to a polar parameter gives the same result as applying a move action to a point parameter. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BACTIONSET Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic block definition. BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Scale Actions Scale selected objects relative to the base point specified by the action. Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks | 927 Apply a Scale Action to a Linear Parameter A scale action applied to a linear parameter scales the selected objects in the direction of the parameter. Apply a Scale Action to a Polar Parameter A scale action applied to a polar parameter scales the selected objects by the specified distance and angle. While the resulting geometry behaves in the same way as a scale action applied to a linear parameter, the way the grips are manipulated is different in the Properties palette. Apply a Scale Action to an XY Parameter A scale action applied to an XY parameter scales the selected objects only in the X and Y direction specified by the parameter. While the resulting geometry behaves in the same way as a scale action applied to a linear parameter, the way the grips are manipulated is different in the Properties palette. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BACTIONSET Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic block definition. BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. 928 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) Stretch Actions Move and stretch objects a specified distance in a specified direction relative to the base point specified by the action. Apply a Stretch Action to a Point Parameter A stretch action applied to a point parameter moves and stretches selected objects a specified distance in any direction. Apply a Stretch Action to a Linear or Polar Parameter A stretch action applied to a linear parameter moves and stretches selected objects a specified distance in the direction of the parameter. Apply a Stretch Action to an XY Parameter A stretch action applied to an XY parameter stretches the selected objects only in the X and Y direction specified by the parameter. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BACTIONSET Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic block definition. BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks | 929 Polar Stretch Actions Rotate, move, and stretch objects a specified angle and distance. Apply a Polar Stretch Action to a Polar Parameter A polar stretch action can only be applied to a polar parameter. Like the stretch action, selected objects stretch when this action is applied. However, a polar stretch action also allows you to stretch the objects at any angle. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BACTIONSET Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic block definition. BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Rotate Actions Rotate selected objects. A rotate action is always associated with a rotate parameter. Dependent and Independent Base Points When you apply a rotate action, you can choose to make the base point of the action dependent or independent of the parameter’s base point. 930 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BACTIONSET Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic block definition. BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Flip Actions Mirror selected objects in a dynamic block reference about a specified reflection line. A flip action is always associated with a flip parameter. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BACTIONSET Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic block definition. Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks | 931 BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Array Actions Copy and array objects in a rectangular pattern. Apply an Array Action to a Linear Parameter An array action applied to a linear parameter copies and arrays selected objects in a rectangular pattern along the parameter only. Apply an Array Action to a Polar Parameter An array action applied to a polar parameter copies and arrays selected objects in a rectangular pattern in any direction and angle. Apply an Array Action to an XY Parameter An array action applied to an XY parameter copies and arrays selected objects in a rectangular pattern only in the X and Y direction specified by the parameter. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BACTIONSET Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic block definition. 932 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Lookup Actions Lookup tables associate parameter values for the dynamic block reference with other specified data (for example, a model or part number). You can extract data from block references just as you would extract block attribute data. When the parameter values in a dynamic block reference match a row of input property values in the lookup table, the corresponding lookup property values are assigned to the block reference. These lookup properties and values are displayed in the Properties palette under Custom. Lookup tables support the following: ■ All numeric parameter properties (for example, distance and angles for point, linear, polar, XY, and rotation parameters) ■ Text string parameter properties (for example, flip and visibility parameter values) NOTE Constraint parameters cannot be added to a lookup table. Instead, you should use a Block Properties Table. For more information, see Use a Block Properties Table on page 916. Add Properties and Values to a Lookup Table The Property Lookup Table consists of input properties and lookup properties. ■ Input properties. Parameters. Each parameter can correspond to one column (except for lookup, alignment, and base point parameters). The parameter label is used as the property name. ■ Lookup properties. Lookup parameters. Each lookup parameter can correspond to one column. The lookup parameter label is used as the property name. Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks | 933 To add values to the cells in each column, click a cell and enter a value. If you defined a value set for an input property (parameter) in the table, a drop-down list of available values will display. Make sure to follow the guidelines in Specify Values for Lookup Tables on page 934. Custom Values In a lookup table that does not use value sets, parameter values that do not match a row of input property values from the lookup table are assigned the lookup property value that corresponds to . The default value is Custom. Enable Reverse Lookup A lookup property with reverse lookup enabled adds a lookup grip to the dynamic block reference. When you click this grip, a drop-down list of that column’s lookup values is displayed. The corresponding input property values of the selected list item are assigned to the block reference. To enable reverse lookup for a lookup property, each row in the lookup table must be unique. To check for errors and empty cells, in the Property Lookup Table dialog box, click the Audit button. You can also use the shortcut menu options to insert, delete, or reorder rows. Specify Values for Lookup Tables The following rules apply when you specify values in lookup tables: ■ Use a comma as the delimiter between values. ■ You can specify any number of unique values separated by commas. For example: 5,6,7 5.5,6.25 934 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) ■ To specify a range, use brackets [ ] to specify that the range includes the values separated by a comma, or use parentheses ( ) to specify that the range does not include the values separated by a comma. ■ For a continuous range, use a pair of values separated by a comma, enclosed in brackets or parentheses. For example: [3,10] specifies any value between 3 and 10, including 3 and 10 (3,10) specifies any value between 3 and 10, not including 3 and 10. ■ For an open-ended range, use one value with a comma, enclosed in brackets or parentheses. For example: [,5] specifies less than or equal to 5; (5,) specifies greater than 5. ■ Use no more than 256 characters in a table cell. ■ You can use architectural and mechanical unit syntax (for example, 15'1/4"). ■ If you enter a value in an invalid format, the value will be reset to the last value when you move to another cell in the table. See also: ■ Extract Data from Block Attributes on page 882 ■ Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) on page 883 To add a lookup action to a dynamic block definition 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Block Editor, in the Block Authoring Palettes window, Actions tab, click the Lookup Action tool. 3 In the Block Editor drawing area, select one or more lookup parameters to associate with the action. (You can associate only a lookup action with lookup parameters.) 4 Specify the location of the action. 5 In the Property Lookup Table dialog box, complete the table as necessary. 6 Click OK. Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks | 935 7 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 8 If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. To edit a lookup table while the action bars are displayed in the Block Editor 1 Hover the cursor over the lookup action icon. 2 Right-click and select Display Lookup Table. To display and add properties to a lookup table 1 In the Block Editor, double-click a lookup action in a dynamic block definition. 2 In the Property Lookup Table dialog box, click Add Properties. 3 In the Add Parameter Properties dialog box, in the bottom-left corner of the dialog box, click Add Input Properties or Add Lookup Properties. 4 In the Parameter Properties list, select the parameter properties you want to add to the lookup table. Hold Ctrl down to select more than one property. 5 Click OK. 6 In the Property Lookup Table dialog box, click an empty cell and do one of the following: ■ Select a value from the drop-down list. (A drop-down list only displays if a value set has been defined for the parameter.) ■ Enter a value. 7 Click OK. To allow or disallow reverse lookup 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Block Editor, double-click a lookup action in a dynamic block definition. 936 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) 3 In the Property Lookup Table dialog box, at the bottom of a Lookup Property column, do one of the following: ■ Click Read Only, and then select Allow Reverse Lookup from the list. ■ Click Allow Reverse Lookup, and then select Read Only from the list. NOTE You can only select Allow Reverse Lookup if you have entered data in the column. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. BPARAMETER Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition. Use Chained Actions Point, linear, polar, XY, and rotation parameters have a property called Chain Actions. This property affects the parameter behavior if the parameter is part of an action's selection set. For example, you might include a point parameter in the selection set of a stretch action that is associated with a linear parameter. When the linear parameter is edited in a block reference, its associated stretch action triggers a change in its selection set. Because the point parameter is included in the selection set, the point parameter is edited by the change in the linear parameter. The following example shows a block definition in the Block Editor. The point parameter (labeled Position) is included in the stretch action's selection set. Add Actions to Dynamic Blocks | 937 If the Chain Actions property for the point parameter is set to Yes, a change in the linear parameter will trigger the move action associated with the point parameter, just as if you edited the point parameter in the block reference through a grip or custom property. If the Chain Actions property is set to No, the point parameter's associated move action is not triggered by the changes to the linear parameter. Thus, the circle doesn't move. To specify the Chain Actions property for a point, linear, polar, XY, or rotation parameter 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 938 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) 2 In the Block Editor, click Tools menu ➤ Properties. The Properties palette is displayed. 3 In the Block Editor, select a point, linear, polar, XY, or rotation parameter. 4 In the Properties palette, under Misc, click Chain Actions. 5 On the drop-down list, select Yes or No. 6 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 7 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BPARAMETER Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks Control the way parameters are displayed using the Properties palette. Custom Properties In the Block Editor, you can specify properties for a parameter in a dynamic block definition. Some of these properties can be displayed as custom properties for the dynamic block reference when it is in a drawing. These properties are displayed under Custom in the Properties palette. Other parameter properties, such as Value Set properties and Chain Actions, define how the block reference will function in a drawing. Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks | 939 Assign Labels to Parameters When you select the dynamic block reference in a drawing, parameter labels are assigned to custom properties in the Properties palette. You can specify whether or not these custom properties are displayed for the block reference when it is selected in a drawing. These properties can also be extracted using the Attribute Extraction wizard. It is good practice to specify unique parameter labels within the block. Distance Multiplier Overrides Use the distance multiplier property to change a parameter value by a specified factor. For example, if you set the distance multiplier property to 2 for a stretch action, the associated geometry in the block reference would increase and double the distance of the grip movement. Angle Offset Overrides Use the angle offset property to increase or decrease the angle of a changed parameter value by a specified amount. For example, if you set the angle offset property of a move action to 90, the block reference would move 90 degrees beyond the angle value of the grip movement. List of Properties for Action Parameters The following properties are available to customize the way your action parameters behave. Property name Description Associated parameter ■ Angle Name ■ Point ■ Distance Name ■ Linear ■ Flip Name Defines a label for the parameter. Displayed in the drawing space of the Block Editor and the custom properties of the block reference when the grip is selected. ■ Polar ■ Hor Distance Name ■ XY ■ Rotation ■ Lookup Name ■ Flip ■ Position Name ■ Visibility ■ Ver Distance Name ■ Lookup ■ Visibility Name 940 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) Property name Description Associated parameter ■ Angle Description ■ Point ■ Distance Description ■ Linear ■ Polar ■ Flip Description Defines a description that will further explain the purpose of the parameter. The text string will display in the tooltip when the mouse pointer hovers over the position name. ■ XY ■ Hor Distance Description ■ Rotation ■ ■ Position Description Flip ■ Visibility ■ Lookup ■ Ver Distance Description ■ Visibility Description ■ Lookup Description ■ Base State Name ■ Flipped State Name In a Flip parameter, displays the label that will be displayed when the specified object is displayed as it was drawn (Base State) or as manipulated (Flipped State). Displayed in the custom properties of the block reference when the grip is selected. Flip Base Type In a Rotate action, specifies whether the base point for the rotation is dependent on the base point of the parameter or an independent base point that you specify in the block definition. Rotate Distance Type Specifies whether the distance applied to the move is the parameter's X value, Y value, or X an Y coordinate value from the parameter's base point. ■ Move ■ Stretch Specifies whether custom properties will be displayed in the Properties palette for the selected block reference. ■ Point ■ Linear ■ Polar Show Properties Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks | 941 Property name Description Associated parameter ■ XY ■ Rotate ■ Flip ■ Visibility ■ Lookup See also: ■ Define User Parameters in Dynamic Blocks on page 914 ■ Specify Value Sets for Dynamic Blocks on page 944 ■ Use Chained Actions on page 937 ■ Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks on page 947 ■ Extract Data from Block Attributes on page 882 To specify the display of custom properties in a dynamic block reference 1 Ensure that the Properties palette is displayed. If not, click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ Properties. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 3 In the Block Editor, select a parameter. 4 In the Properties palette, under Misc., click Show Properties. 5 On the drop-down list, do one of the following: ■ Select Yes to display custom properties for the block reference. ■ Select No to specify that the custom properties will not display for a block reference. 6 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 942 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) 7 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. To specify that dynamic block reference can be exploded 1 Open a block definition in the Block Editor 2 In the Block Editor, make sure nothing is selected. 3 In the Properties palette, under Block, click Allow Exploding. 4 On the drop-down list, select Yes or No. 5 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 6 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. To prevent non-uniform scaling in dynamic block reference 1 Open a block definition in the Block Editor 2 In the Block Editor, make sure nothing is selected. 3 In the Properties palette, under Block, click Scale Uniformly. 4 On the drop-down list, select Yes. 5 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 6 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BPARAMETER Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition. Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks | 943 PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Specify Value Sets for Dynamic Blocks A value set is a range or list of values specified for a parameter. These values can be displayed for the block reference as a drop-down list next to the parameter label under Custom in the Properties palette. When you define a value set for a parameter, the parameter is limited to these values when the block reference is manipulated in a drawing. For example, if you define a linear parameter in a block that represents a window to have a value set of 20, 40, and 60, the window can only be stretched to 20, 40, or 60 units. When you create a value list for a parameter, the value of the parameter as it exists in the definition is automatically added to the value set. This is the default value for the block reference when you insert it in a drawing. NOTE If you redefine the values in a value set after you've added the parameter properties to a lookup table, make sure to update the lookup table to match the new values in the value set. To add or remove a value set for a parameter 1 Ensure that the Properties palette is displayed. If not, click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ Properties. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 3 In the Block Editor, select a parameter. 4 In the Properties palette, under Value Set, click one of the following: ■ Ang Type 944 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) ■ Dist Type ■ Hor Type ■ Ver Type 5 On the drop-down list, select List. 6 In the Properties palette, under Value Set, click one of the following: ■ Ang Value List ■ Dist Value List ■ Hor Value List ■ Ver Value List 7 Click the [...] button. 8 In the Add Distance Value/Angle dialog box, enter one value or two or more values separated by commas, or to delete a value, select it from the list. 9 Click Add or Delete. 10 Click OK. 11 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 12 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. To specify an incremental value set for a linear, polar, XY, or rotation parameter 1 Ensure that the Properties palette is displayed. If not, click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ Properties. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 3 In the Block Editor, select a linear, polar, XY, or rotation parameter. 4 In the Properties palette, under Value Set, click Dist Type, Ang Type, Hor Type, or Ver Type. Specify Value Sets for Dynamic Blocks | 945 5 On the drop-down list, select Increment. 6 In the Properties palette, under Value Set, click Dist Increment, Ang Increment, Hor Increment, or Ver Increment, and then enter an incremental value for the parameter. 7 Click Dist Minimum, Ang Minimum, Hor Minimum, or Ver Minimum, and then enter a minimum value for the parameter. 8 Click Dist Maximum, Ang Maximum, Hor Maximum, or Ver Maximum, and then enter a maximum value for the parameter. 9 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 10 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. To specify minimum and maximum values for a linear, polar, XY, or rotation parameter 1 Ensure that the Properties palette is displayed. If not, click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ Properties. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 3 In the Block Editor, select a linear, polar, XY, or rotation parameter. 4 In the Properties palette, under Value Set, click Dist Minimum, Ang Minimum, Hor Minimum, or Ver Minimum, and then enter a minimum value for the parameter. 5 Click Dist Maximum, Ang Maximum, Hor Maximum, or Ver Maximum, and then enter a maximum value for the parameter. 6 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 7 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. 946 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BPARAMETER Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Specify Distance and Angle Values Action overrides are properties of actions that have no effect on the block reference until it is manipulated in a drawing. Use distance multiplier overrides with the following actions: ■ Move on page 926 ■ Stretch on page 929 ■ Polar Stretch on page 930 You can specify these action override properties by following the Command prompts when you add an action to a dynamic block definition. You can also specify these properties in the Properties palette when you select an action in the Block Editor. Quick Reference PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks Parameter Type Point Grip Type Actions You Can Associate with a Parameter Standard Move, Stretch Specify Distance and Angle Values | 947 Parameter Type Grip Type Actions You Can Associate with a Parameter Linear Linear Move, Scale, Stretch, Array Polar Standard Move, Scale, Stretch, Polar Stretch, Array, XY Standard Move, Scale, Stretch, Array Rotation Rotation Rotate Flip Flip Flip Alignment Alignment None (The action is implied and contained within the parameter.) Visibility Lookup None (The action is implied and controlled by visibility states.) Lookup Lookup Lookup Base Standard None When you add a parameter to a dynamic block definition, custom grips associated with key points of the parameter are automatically added to the block. All parameters (except the alignment parameter, which always displays one grip) have a property called Number of Grips. When you select a parameter in the Block Editor, the Number of Grips property is displayed in the Properties palette. This property allows you to specify, from a preset list, the number of grips you want to display for the parameter. 948 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) NOTE Parameters that are not associated with an action do not display grips. If you specify that a parameter has 0 grips, you can still edit the dynamic block reference through the Properties palette (if the block is defined that way). If a dynamic block definition contains visibility states on page 953 or a lookup table on page 933, you can define the block so that the only grip that is displayed is a lookup grip. When you click this grip on the block reference, a drop-down list is displayed. When you select an item from the list, the display of the block reference may change. Grips are automatically added at key points on the parameter. You can reposition a grip anywhere in the block space relative to its associated key point on the parameter. When you reposition a grip, it is still tied to the key point with which it is associated. NOTE Grips are not displayed for key points that are not associated with an action. The type of parameter you add to the dynamic block definition determines the type of grips that are added to the block.. Grip Type How the Grip Can Be Manipulated in a Drawing Associated Parameters Standard Within a plane in any direction Base, Point, Polar, and XY Linear Back and forth in a defined direction or along an axis Linear Rotation Around an axis Rotation Flip Click to flip the dynamic block reference Flip Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks | 949 Grip Type How the Grip Can Be Manipulated in a Drawing Associated Parameters Alignment Within a plane in any direction; when moved over an object, triggers the block reference to align with the object Alignment Lookup Click to display a list of items Visibility, Lookup Specify Tooltips on Grips Each of the dynamic block parameters has one or more description fields with the exception of the basepoint and alignment parameters. Paramet- Description er Point Position description Linear Distance description Polar Distance description, angle description XY Horizontal distance description, vertical distance description Rotation Angle description Flip Flip description Visibility Visibility description Lookup Lookup description Alignment Set to “Aligns block to object” Basepoint No special tooltip is required Specify Insertion Cycling for Grips in Dynamic Blocks Grips in dynamic blocks have a property called Cycling. When this property is set to Yes, the grip becomes an available insertion point for the dynamic 950 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) block reference. When you insert the dynamic block reference in a drawing, you can use the Ctrl key to cycle through the available grips to select which grip will be the insertion point for the block. To specify the number of custom grips displayed for a parameter in a dynamic block 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Block Editor, select a parameter. 3 On the Properties palette, under Misc, click Number of Grips, and then select the number of grips you want to display for the parameter. 4 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 5 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. To reposition a grip in a dynamic block definition 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Block Editor, select a custom grip (not the standard grip associated with the key point of the parameter). 3 Do one of the following to reposition the grip: ■ Drag the grip to another position in the block space. ■ On the Properties palette, under Geometry, enter values for the Base X and Base Y properties. (These values are relative to the base point of the parameter.) 4 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 5 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks | 951 To reset grips in a dynamic block definition to their default locations 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Block Editor, at the Command prompt, enter bgripset. 3 Select the grip for which you want to reset the grip position(s). 4 At the Command prompt, enter reposition. 5 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 6 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. To turn insertion cycling on or off for a custom grip in a dynamic block reference 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Block Editor, at the Command prompt, enter bcycleorder. 3 In the Insertion Cycling Order dialog box, select a grip from the list, and click Cycling to turn cycling on or off for the grip. (A check mark in the Cycling column indicates that cycling is turned on for the grip.) 4 Click OK. 5 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 6 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. To modify the insertion cycling order for custom grips in a dynamic block reference 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Block Editor, enter bcycleorder at the Command prompt. 952 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) 3 In the Insertion Cycling Order dialog box, select a grip from the list, and click Move Up or Move Down. (A check mark in the Cycling column indicates that cycling is turned on for the grip.) 4 Repeat step 2 until you are finished modifying the grip cycling order. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 7 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BCYCLEORDER Changes the cycling order of grips for a dynamic block reference. BGRIPSET Creates, deletes, or resets grips associated with a parameter. BPARAMETER Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition. GRIPTIPS Controls the display of grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips. Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block Using visibility states, you can create a block with different graphical representations. For example, you have the following four different weld symbols. Using visibility states, you can combine these weld symbols into a single dynamic block. Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block | 953 After you combine the geometry in the Block Editor, you add a visibility parameter. You can then create and name a different visibility state for each weld symbol (for example, WLD1, WLD2, WLD3, and WLD4). In the following example, the WLD1 visibility state is displayed in the Block Editor. The geometry that displays in a dimmed state is invisible for the WLD1 visibility state. The Block Editor contextual tab displays the name of the current visibility state. This area of the tool bar also provides several tools for working with visibility states. When you work with visibility states, you may or may not want to see the geometry that is invisible for a given state. Use the Visibility Mode button (BVMODE) to determine whether geometry is displayed. To create a new visibility state 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 954 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States. 3 In the Visibility States dialog box, click New. 4 In the New Visibility State dialog box, enter a name for the new visibility state. 5 Do one of the following: ■ Click Hide All Existing Objects in New State ■ Click Show All Existing Objects in New State ■ Click Leave Visibility of Existing Objects Unchanged in New State 6 Click OK. To make a visibility state current 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States. 3 Select the visibility state that you want to set as the current state. To rename or delete a visibility state 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States. 3 In the Visibility States dialog box, select a visibility state from the list. 4 Do one of the following: ■ Click Rename and enter a new name for the visibility state ■ Click Delete 5 Click OK. Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block | 955 To make objects visible or invisible in the current visibility state 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Do one of the following: ■ Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Make Visible. ■ Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Make Invisible. 3 In the drawing area, select the objects. Press Enter. 4 At the Command prompt, enter current. Press Enter. To make objects visible or invisible in all visibility states 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Block Editor drawing area, select the objects that you want to make visible in all visibility states. 3 Right-click in the drawing area and click one of the following: ■ Object Visibility ➤ Show For All States ■ Object Visibility ➤ Hide For All States To show or hide invisible geometry for visibility states 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility Mode. 956 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) To change the order of the visibility states list for a dynamic block reference 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States. 3 In the Visibility States dialog box, select a visibility state in the list. 4 Click Move Up or Move Down to change the order. 5 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the list of visibility states is in the desired order. 6 Click OK. To set the default visibility state for the dynamic block reference 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States. 3 In the Visibility States dialog box, select a visibility state in the list. 4 Click Move Up until the selected visibility state is at the top of the list. 5 Click OK. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BPARAMETER Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition. BVHIDE Makes objects invisible in the current visibility state or all visibility states in a dynamic block definition. Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block | 957 BVSHOW Makes objects visible in the current visibility state or all visibility states in a dynamic block definition. BVSTATE Creates, sets, or deletes a visibility state in a dynamic block. BVMODE Controls how objects that are made invisible for the current visibility state are displayed in the Block Editor. 958 | Chapter 23 Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) Part 8: Work with 3D Models 959 960 Create 3D Models 24 Use three-dimensional models to help you visualize and test your designs in 3D space. Overview of 3D Modeling AutoCAD 3D modeling allows you to create drawings using solid, surface, and mesh objects. Solid, surface, and mesh objects offer different functionality, that, when used together, offer a powerful suite of 3D modeling tools. For example, you can convert a primitive solid to a mesh to take advantage of mesh creasing and smoothing. You can then convert the model to a surface to take advantage of associativity and NURBS modeling. Solid Modeling A solid model is an enclosed 3D body that has properties such as mass, volume, center of gravity, and moments of inertia. Start with primitive solids such as cones, boxes, cylinders, and pyramids and modify and recombine them to create new shapes. Or draw a custom polysolid 961 extrusion and use various sweeping operations to create solids from 2D curves and lines. Surface Modeling A surface model is a thin shell that does not have mass or volume. AutoCAD offers two types of surfaces: procedural and NURBS. Use prodecural surfaces to take advantage of associative modling, and use NURBS surfaces to take advantage of sculpting with control vertices. A typical modeling workflow is to create a basic model using mesh, solids, and procedural surfaces, and then convert them to NURBS surfaces. This allows you to utilize not only the unique tools and primitive shapes offered by solids and meshes, but also the shaping capabilities provided by surfaces - associative modeling and NURBS modeling. You create surface models using some of the same tools that you use for solid models: sweeping, lofting, extruding, and revolving. You can also create surfaces by blending, patching, offsetting, filleting, and extending other surfaces. 962 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Mesh Modeling A mesh model consists of vertices, edges, and faces that use polygonal representation (including triangles and quads) to define a 3D shape. Unlike solid models, mesh has no mass properties. However, as with 3D solids, you can create primitive mesh forms such as boxes, cones, and pyramids, starting in AutoCAD 2010. You can then modify mesh models in ways that are not available for 3D solids or surfaces. For example you can apply creases, splits, and increasing levels of smoothness. You can drag mesh subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices) to deform the object. To achieve more granular results, you can refine the mesh in specific areas before modifying it. Use mesh models to provide the hiding, shading, and rendering capabilities of a solid model without the physical properties such as mass, moments of inertia, and so on. Advantages of 3D Modeling Modeling in 3D has several advantages. You can ■ View the model from any vantage point ■ Generate reliable standard and auxiliary 2D views automatically ■ Create sections and 2D drawings ■ Remove hidden lines and do realistic shading ■ Check interferences and perform engineering analysis ■ Add lighting and create realistic rendering ■ Navigate through the model Overview of 3D Modeling | 963 ■ Use the model to create an animation ■ Extract manufacturing data See also: ■ Enter 3D Coordinates on page 556 ■ Specify Workplanes in 3D (UCS) on page 566 ■ Use the Dynamic UCS with Solid Models on page 572 Quick Reference Commands BOX Creates a 3D solid box. CONE Creates a 3D solid cone. CONVTOMESH Converts 3D objects such as polygon meshes, surfaces, and solids to mesh objects. CONVTONURBS Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces. CONVTOSOLID Converts 3D meshes and polylines and circles with thickness to 3D solids. CONVTOSURFACE Converts objects to 3D surfaces. CYLINDER Creates a 3D solid cylinder. EXTRUDE Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object. 964 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models LOFT Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections. MESH Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid, sphere, wedge, or torus. POLYSOLID Creates a 3D wall-like polysolid. PLANESURF Creates a planar surface. PYRAMID Creates a 3D solid pyramid. REVOLVE Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping an object around an axis. SPHERE Creates a 3D solid sphere. SURFBLEND Creates a continuous blend surface between two existing surfaces. SURFNETWORK Creates a surface in the space between several curves in the U and V directions (including surface and solid edge subobjects). SURFOFFSET Creates a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface. SURFPATCH Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed loop. SWEEP Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject along a path. TORUS Creates a donut-shaped 3D solid. Overview of 3D Modeling | 965 UCS Manages user coordinate systems. WEDGE Creates a 3D solid wedge. System Variables DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted. PSOLWIDTH Controls the default width for a swept solid object created with the POLYSOLID command. PSOLHEIGHT Controls the default height for a swept solid object created with the POLYSOLID command. SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves Use lines and curves to extrude, sweep, loft, and revolve 3D solids, surfaces, and NURBS surfaces. Overview of Creating Solids and Surfaces Understand the differences between creating solids and surfaces with the EXTRUDE, SWEEP, LOFT, and REVOLVE commands. 966 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models See also: ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding on page 968 ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping on page 972 ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting on page 976 ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Revolving on page 980 Surfaces Vs. Solids When you extrude, sweep, loft, and revolve curves, you can create both solids and surfaces. Open curves always create surfaces, but closed curves can create either solids or surfaces depending on the situation. If you select a closed curve and click EXTRUDE, SWEEP, LOFT, and REVOLVE on the ribbon, you create: ■ A solid if the Solid tab is active. ■ A procedural surface if the Surface tab is active. ■ A NURBS surface if the Surface tab is active and the SURFACEMODELINGMODE system variable is set to NURBS. ■ An associative surface if the Surface tab is active and if surface associativity is on. In this illustration, the same profile creates a solid (left), a procedural surface (middle), and a NURBS surface (right). Overview of Creating Solids and Surfaces | 967 To create a surface when the Solid tab is active or a solid when the Surface tab is active, select the Mode option and select surface while you are creating the object. Geometry That Can Be Used As Profiles and Guide Curves The curves that you use as profile and guide curves when you extrude, sweep, loft, and revolve can be: ■ Open or closed ■ Planar or non-planar ■ Solid and surface edge subobjects ■ A single object (to extrude multiple lines, convert them to a single object with the JOIN command) ■ A single region (to extrude multiple regions, convert them to a single object with the REGION command) Create Associative Surfaces Surfaces can be associative while solids cannot. If surface associativity is on when a surface is created, it maintains a relationship with the curve from which it is was generated (even if the curve is the subobject of another solid or surface). If the curve is reshaped, the surface profile automatically updates. See Create Associative Surfaces on page 1036. NOTE To modify a surface that is associative, you must modify the generating curve and not the surface itself. If you reshape the surface, its link to the generating curve will be broken and the surface will lose associativity and become a generic surface. Deleting the Curves that Generate the Solid or Surface The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the curves that generate an object are automatically deleted after the solid or surface is created. However, if surface associativity is on, the DELOBJ setting is ignored and the generating curves are not deleted. Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding Create a 3D solid or surface by stretching curves into 3D space. 968 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models The EXTRUDE command creates a solid or surface that extends the shape of a curve. Open curves create surfaces and closed curves create solids or surfaces. See Overview of Creating Solids and Surfaces on page 966. Options for Extrusion When you extrude objects, you can specify any of the following options: ■ Mode. Sets whether the extrude creates a surface or a solid. ■ Specify a path for extrusion. With the Path option, create a solid or surface by specifying an object to be the path for the profile, or shape, of the extrusion. The extruded object starts from the plane of the profile and ends on a plane perpendicular to the path at the endpoint of the path. For best results, use object snaps to make sure that the path is on or within the boundary of the object being extruded. Extruding is different from sweeping. When you extrude a profile along a path, the profile follows the shape of the path, even if the path does not intersect the profile. Sweeping usually provides greater control and better results. Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding | 969 ■ Taper angle. Tapering the extrusion is useful for defining part that require a specific taper angle, such as a mold used to create metal products in a foundry. ■ Direction. With the Direction option, you can specify two points to set the length and direction of the extrusion. ■ Expression. Enter a mathematical expression to constrain the height of the extrusion. See Create Geometric Relationships between Associative Surfaces on page 1039. To extrude a NURBS surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ NURBS Creation. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Surface panel ➤ Extrude. 3 Select the objects or edge subobjects to extrude. 4 Specify the height. After the extrusion, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable. To extrude a solid 1 Click Solid tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Extrude. 2 Select the objects or edge subobjects to extrude. 3 Specify the height. After the extrusion, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable. To extrude a procedural surface along a path 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Extrude. 970 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models 2 Select the objects or edge subobjects to extrude. 3 At the Command prompt, enter p (Path). 4 Select the object or edge subobject to use as the path. After the extrusion, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable. Quick Reference Commands 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. BREP Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces. EXTRUDE Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object. JOIN Joins similar objects to form a single, unbroken object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. REGION Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object. System Variables 3DOSMODE Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps. DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted. Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding | 971 SOLIDHIST Controls the default history property setting for solid objects. SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces to increase performance. SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping Create a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a profile along a path. The SWEEP command creates a solid or surface by extending a profile shape (the object that is swept) along a specified path. When you sweep a profile along a path, the profile is moved and aligned normal (perpendicular) to the path. Open profiles create surfaces and closed curves create solids or surfaces. See Overview of Creating Solids and Surfaces on page 966. You can sweep more than one profile object along a path. Options for Sweeping When you extrude objects, you can specify any of the following options: ■ Mode. Sets whether the sweep creates a surface or a solid. ■ Alignment. If the profile is not on the same plane as the sweep path, specify how the profile aligns with the sweep path. 972 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models ■ Base Point. Specify a base point on the profile to sweep along the profile. ■ Scale. Specify a value that will change the size of the object from the beginning of the sweep to the end. Enter a mathematical expression to constrain the object scaling. See Create Geometric Relationships between Associative Surfaces on page 1039. ■ Twist. By entering a twist angle, the object rotates along the length of the profile. Enter a mathematical expression to constrain the object ‘s twist angle. See Create Geometric Relationships between Associative Surfaces on page 1039. Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping | 973 See also: ■ Create Associative Surfaces on page 1036 ■ Create Geometric Relationships between Associative Surfaces on page 1039 ■ Draw Splines on page 679 ■ Modify Splines on page 794 To create a solid by sweeping an object along a path 1 Click Solid tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Sweep. 2 Select objects to sweep. 3 Press Enter. 4 Select an object or edge subobject as a sweep path. After the sweep, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable. To create a surface by sweeping an object along a path 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Sweep. 2 Select objects to sweep. 3 Press Enter. 4 Select an object or edge subobject as a sweep path. 974 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models After the sweep, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable. Quick Reference Commands 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. BREP Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces. JOIN Joins similar objects to form a single, unbroken object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. REGION Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object. SWEEP Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject along a path. System Variables 3DOSMODE Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps. DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted. SOLIDHIST Controls the default history property setting for solid objects. Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping | 975 SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces to increase performance. SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting Create a 3D solid or surface by lofting a profile through a set of two or more cross-section profiles. The cross-section profiles define the shape of the resulting solid object. Cross-section profiles can be open or closed curves. Open curves create surfaces and closed curves create solids or surfaces. See Overview of Creating Solids and Surfaces on page 966. Options for Lofting ■ Mode. Sets whether the loft creates a surface or a solid. 976 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models ■ Cross-section profiles. Select a series of cross-section profiles to define the shape of the new 3D object. lofted objects with different cross-section settings As you create a lofted object, you can adjust its shape by specifying how the profile passes through the cross sections (for example, a sharp or smooth curve). You can also modify the settings later in the Properties dialog box. For more information, see Modify Properties of 3D Solid, Surface, and Mesh on page 1144. ■ Paths. Specify a path for the loft operation to obtain more control over the shape of the lofted object. For best results, start the path curve on the plane of the first cross section and end it on the plane of the last cross section. ■ Guide curves. Specify guide curves to match points on corresponding cross sections. This method prevents undesired results, such as wrinkles in the resulting 3D object. Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting | 977 Each guide curve must meet the following criteria: ■ Intersects each cross section ■ Starts on the first cross section ■ Ends on the last cross section See also: ■ Create Associative Surfaces on page 1036 ■ Create Geometric Relationships between Associative Surfaces on page 1039 ■ Draw Splines on page 679 ■ Modify Splines on page 794 To create a NURBS surface by lofting 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ NURBS Creation. 2 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Loft. 3 In the drawing area, select cross-section profiles and press Enter. (Select them in the order in which you want the new 3D object to pass through the cross sections.) After the loft operation, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable. To create a solid by lofting through a set of cross-section profiles 1 Click Solid tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Loft. 2 In the drawing area, select cross-section profiles and press Enter. (Select them in the order in which you want the new 3D object to pass through the cross sections.) 978 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models 3 Do one of the following: ■ Use cross-section profiles only. Press Enter again or enter c (Cross sections only). In the Loft Settings dialog box, modify the options to control the shape of the new object. Click the Preview Changes box to preview the changes as you make them. Click OK when finished. ■ Follow guide curves. Enter g (Guide curves). Select the guide curves and press Enter. ■ Follow a path. Enter p (Path). Select a path and press Enter. After the loft operation, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable. Quick Reference Commands 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. BREP Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces. JOIN Joins similar objects to form a single, unbroken object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. LOFT Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections. REGION Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object. Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting | 979 System Variables 3DOSMODE Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps. DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted. SOLIDHIST Controls the default history property setting for solid objects. SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces to increase performance. SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. Create a Solid or Surface by Revolving Create a 3D object by revolving curves about an axis. If the Surface tab is active, you will create a surface and if the Solid tab is active you will create a solid regardless of whether the curve is open or closed. See Overview of Creating Solids and Surfaces on page 966 for more information. When revolving a solid, you can only use a revolve angle of 360 degrees. Options for Revolving ■ Mode. Sets whether the revolve creates a surface or a solid. ■ Start Angle. Specifies an offset for the revolution from the plane of the object being revolved. ■ Reverse. Changes the direction of the revolve. 980 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models ■ Expression. Enter a formula or equation to specify the revolve angle. This option is only available if you are creating associative surfaces. See Create Geometric Relationships between Associative Surfaces on page 1039. See also: ■ Create Associative Surfaces on page 1036 ■ Draw Splines on page 679 ■ Modify Splines on page 794 To revolve objects about an axis to create a NURBS surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Revolve. 2 Select the objects or edge subobjects to revolve. 3 To specify the axis of revolution, specify one of the following: ■ The start and endpoint. Click to points on the screen to set the axis orientation. The axis points must be on one side of the revolved object. The positive axis direction extends from the start point to the endpoint. ■ The X, Y, or Z axis. Enter x, y, or z. ■ An object. Select a line, a linear edge of a polyline segment, or the linear edge of a surface or solid. 4 Specify the angle of revolution. To revolve objects about an axis to create a solid 1 Click Solid tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Revolve. 2 Select the objects or edge subobject to revolve. 3 To specify the axis of revolution, specify one of the following: ■ The start and endpoint. Click to points on the screen to set the axis orientation. The axis points must be on one side of the revolved object. The positive axis direction extends from the start point to the endpoint. ■ The X, Y, or Z axis. Enter x, y, or z. Create a Solid or Surface by Revolving | 981 ■ An object. Select a line, a linear edge of a polyline segment, or the linear edge of a surface or solid. 4 Press Enter. To create a solid the angle must be 360 degrees. If you enter a smaller angle of revolution, a surface is created instead of a solid. Quick Reference Commands 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. BREP Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces. JOIN Joins similar objects to form a single, unbroken object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. REGION Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object. REVOLVE Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping an object around an axis. System Variables 3DOSMODE Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps. DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted. 982 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models SOLIDHIST Controls the default history property setting for solid objects. SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces to increase performance. SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. Create Solids Create 3D solids from primitives or by combining or extending existing objects. Overview of Creating 3D Solids 3D solid objects often start as one of several basic shapes, or primitives, that you can then modify and recombine. A 3D solid can also be the result of extruding a 2D shape to follow a specified path in 3D space. About Solid Primitives You can create several basic 3D shapes, known as solid primitives: boxes, cones, cylinders, spheres, wedges, pyramids, and tori (donuts). Create Solids | 983 By combining primitive shapes, you can create more complex solids. For example, you can join two solids, subtract one from the other, or create a shape based on the intersection of their volumes. About Solids Based on Other Objects You can also create 3D solids from 2D geometry or other 3D objects. The following methods are available: ■ Sweep. Extends a 2D object along a path. ■ Extrusion. Extends the shape of a 2D object in a perpendicular direction into 3D space. ■ Revolve. Sweeps a 2D object around an axis. ■ Loft. Extends the contours of a shape between one or more open or closed objects. 984 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models ■ Slice. Divides a solid object into two separate 3D objects. ■ Sculpting Surfaces. Converts and trims a group of surfaces that enclose a watertight area into a solid. ■ Conversion. Converts mesh objects and planar objects with thickness into solids and surfaces. Quick Reference Commands BOX Creates a 3D solid box. CONE Creates a 3D solid cone. CONVTOSOLID Converts 3D meshes and polylines and circles with thickness to 3D solids. CONVTOSURFACE Converts objects to 3D surfaces. CYLINDER Creates a 3D solid cylinder. EXTRUDE Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object. INTERSECT Creates a 3D solid, surface, or 2D region from overlapping solids, surfaces, or regions. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. LOFT Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections. PYRAMID Creates a 3D solid pyramid. Overview of Creating 3D Solids | 985 REVOLVE Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping an object around an axis. SLICE Creates new 3D solids and surfaces by slicing, or dividing, existing objects. SUBTRACT Combines selected 3D solids or 2D regions by subtraction. SURFSCULPT Trims and combines surfaces that bound a watertight area to create a solid. SWEEP Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject along a path. TORUS Creates a donut-shaped 3D solid. UNION Combines selected 3D solids, surfaces, or 2D regions by addition. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. WEDGE Creates a 3D solid wedge. System Variables SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. FACETRES Adjusts the smoothness of shaded and rendered objects and objects with hidden lines removed. ISOLINES Specifies the number of contour lines per surface on objects. 986 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Create 3D Solid Primitives Start with standard shapes known as solid primitives to create boxes, cones, cylinders, spheres, tori (donuts), wedges, and pyramids. Create a Solid Box Create a rectangular or cubical solid box. The base of the box is always drawn parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS (workplane). Box Creation Options Use the following options to control the size and rotation of the boxes you create: ■ Create a cube. Use the Cube option of the BOX command to create a box with sides of equal length. ■ Specify rotation. Use the Cube or Length option if you want to set the rotation of the box in the XY plane. ■ Start from the center point. Use the Center Point option to create a box using a specified center point. To create a solid box based on two points and a height 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Box. 2 Specify the first corner of the base. 3 Specify the opposite corner of the base. Create 3D Solid Primitives | 987 4 Specify the height. To create a solid cube 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Box. 2 Specify the first corner, or enter c (Center) to specify the center point of the base. 3 At the Command prompt, enter c (Cube). Specify the length of the cube and a rotation angle. The length value sets both the width and height of the cube. Quick Reference Commands BOX Creates a 3D solid box. System Variables DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Create a Solid Wedge Create a solid wedge with rectangular or cubical faces. 988 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models The base of the wedge is drawn parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS with the sloped face opposite the first corner. The height of the wedge is parallel to the Z axis. Wedge Creation Options Use the following options to control the size and rotation of the wedges you create: ■ Create a wedge with sides of equal length. Use the Cube option of the WEDGE command. ■ Specify rotation. Use the Cube or Length option if you want to set the rotation of the wedge in the XY plane. ■ Start from the center point. Use the Center Point option to create a wedge using a specified center point. To create a solid wedge based on two points and a height 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Wedge. 2 Specify the first corner of the base. Create 3D Solid Primitives | 989 3 Specify the opposite corner of the base. 4 Specify the height of the wedge. To create a solid wedge with equal length, width, and height 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Wedge. 2 Specify the first corner or enter c (Center) to set the center point of the base. 3 At the Command prompt, enter c (Cube). Specify the length of the wedge and a rotation angle. The length value sets both the width and height of the wedge. Quick Reference Commands WEDGE Creates a 3D solid wedge. System Variables DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Create a Solid Cone Create a pointed or frustum of a cone with a circular or elliptical base. By default, the base of the cone lies on the XY plane of the current UCS. The height of the cone is parallel to the Z axis. 990 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Cone Creation Options Use the following options to control the size and rotation of the cones you create: ■ Set the height and orientation. Use the Axis Endpoint option of the CONE command. Use the Top Radius option to specify the axis endpoint as the point of the cone or the center of the top face. The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. ■ Create a frustum of a cone. Use the Top Radius option of the CONE command to create a frustum, which tapers to an elliptical or planar face. The Frustum tool is also available from the Modeling tab of the tool palette. You can also use grips to modify the tip of a cone and convert it to a flat face. ■ Specify circumference and base plane. The 3P (Three Points) option of the CONE command defines the size and plane of the base of the cone anywhere in 3D space. ■ Define the angle of the taper. To create a conical solid that requires a specific angle to define its sides, draw a 2D circle. Then use EXTRUDE and the Taper Angle option to taper the circle at an angle along the Z axis. This method, however, creates an extruded solid, not a true solid cone primitive. See also: ■ Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces on page 1115 To create a solid cone with a circular base 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cone. 2 Specify the center point of the base. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. Create 3D Solid Primitives | 991 4 Specify the height of the cone. To create a solid cone with an elliptical base 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cone. 2 At the Command prompt, enter e (Elliptical). 3 Specify the start point of first axis. 4 Specify the endpoint of the first axis. 5 Specify the endpoint (length and rotation) of the second axis. 6 Specify the height of the cone. To create a frustum of a solid cone 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cone. 2 Specify the center point of the base. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 4 At the Command prompt, enter t (Top radius). Specify the top radius. 5 Specify the height of the cone. To create a solid cone with the height and orientation specified by the axis endpoint 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cone. 2 Specify the center point of the base. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 4 At the Command prompt, enter a (Axis endpoint). Specify the endpoint and rotation of the cone. This endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. Quick Reference Commands CONE Creates a 3D solid cone. 992 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models System Variables DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Create a Solid Cylinder Create a solid cylinder with a circular or elliptical base. By default, the base of the cylinder lies on the XY plane of the current UCS. The height of the cylinder is parallel to the Z axis. Cylinder Creation Options Use the following options to control the size and rotation of the cylinders you create: ■ Set rotation. Use the Axis Endpoint option of the CYLINDER command to set the height and rotation of the cylinder. The center point of the top plane of the cylinder is the axis endpoint, which can be located anywhere in 3D space. ■ Use three points to define the base. Use the 3P (Three Points) option to define the base of the cylinder. You can set three points anywhere in 3D space. ■ Construct a cylindrical form with special detail, such as grooves. Create a closed polyline (PLINE to represent a 2D profile of the base. Use EXTRUDE to define the height along the Z axis. The resulting extruded solid is not a true solid cylinder primitive. Create 3D Solid Primitives | 993 To create a solid cylinder with a circular base 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cylinder. 2 Specify the center point of the base. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 4 Specify the height of the cylinder. To create a solid cylinder with an elliptical base 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cylinder. 2 At the Command prompt, enter e (Elliptical). 3 Specify the start point of the first axis. 4 Specify the endpoint of the first axis. 5 Specify the endpoint (length and rotation) of the second axis. 6 Specify the height of the cylinder. To create a solid cylinder with the height and rotation specified (axis endpoint) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cylinder. 2 Specify the center point of the base. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 4 At the Command prompt, enter a (Axis endpoint). Specify the axis endpoint of the cylinder. This endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. Quick Reference Commands CYLINDER Creates a 3D solid cylinder. 994 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models System Variables DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Create a Solid Sphere Create a solid sphere using one of several methods. When you start with the center point, the central axis of the sphere parallels the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Sphere Creation Options Use the following options to draw a sphere with the SPHERE command: ■ Specify three points to set the size and plane of the circumference or radius. Use the 3P (Three Points) option to define the size of the sphere anywhere in 3D space. The three points also define the plane of the circumference. ■ Specify two points to set the circumference or radius. Use the 2P (Two Points) option to define the size of the sphere anywhere in 3D space. The plane of the circumference matches the Z value of the first point. ■ Set the size and location of the sphere based on other objects. Use the Ttr (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) option to define a sphere that is tangent to two circles, arcs, lines, and some 3D objects. The tangency points are projected onto the current UCS. To create a solid sphere 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Sphere. Create 3D Solid Primitives | 995 2 Specify the center of the sphere. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the sphere. To create a solid sphere defined by three points 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Sphere. 2 At the Command prompt, enter 3p (Three Points). Specify the first point. 3 Specify the second point. 4 Specify the third point. Quick Reference Commands SPHERE Creates a 3D solid sphere. System Variables DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Create a Solid Pyramid Create a solid pyramid with up to 32 sides. 996 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models You can create a pyramid that tapers to a point, or create a frustum of a pyramid, which tapers to a planar face. Pyramid Creation Options Use the following options to control the size, shape, and rotation of the pyramids you create: ■ Set the number of sides. Use the Sides option of the PYRAMID command to set the number of sides for the pyramid. ■ Set the length of the edges. Use the Edges option to specify the dimension of the sides at the base. ■ Create a frustum of a pyramid. Use the Top Radius option to create a frustum, which tapers to a planar face. The frustum face is parallel to, and has the same number of sides as, the base. ■ Set the height and rotation of the pyramid. Use the Axis Endpoint option of the PYRAMID command to specify the height and rotation of the pyramid. This endpoint, or top of the pyramid, can be located anywhere in 3D space. To create a solid pyramid 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Pyramid. 2 At the Command prompt, enter s (Sides). Enter the number of sides to use. 3 Specify the center point of the base. Create 3D Solid Primitives | 997 4 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 5 Specify the height of the pyramid. To create a frustum of a solid pyramid 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Pyramid. 2 At the Command prompt, enter s (Sides). Enter the number of sides to use. 3 Specify the center point of the base. 4 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 5 Enter t (Top radius). Specify the radius of the planar face at the top of the pyramid. 6 Specify the height of the pyramid. Quick Reference Commands PYRAMID Creates a 3D solid pyramid. System Variables DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Create a Solid Torus Create a ring-shaped solid that resembles the inner tube of a tire. 998 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models A torus has two radius values. One value defines the tube. The other value defines the distance from the center of the torus to the center of the tube. By default, a torus is drawn parallel to and is bisected by the XY plane of the current UCS. A torus can be self-intersecting. A self-intersecting torus has no center hole because the radius of the tube is greater than the radius of the torus. Torus Creation Options Use the following options to control the size and rotation of the tori you create. ■ Set the size and plane of the circumference or radius. Use the 3P (Three Points) option to define the size of the torus anywhere in 3D space. The three points also define the plane of the circumference. Use this option to rotate the torus as you create it. ■ Set the circumference or radius. Use the 2P (Two Points) option to define the size of the torus anywhere in 3D space. The plane of the circumference matches the Z value of the first point. ■ Set the size and location of the torus based on other objects. Use the Ttr (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) option to define a torus that is tangent to two circles, arcs, lines, and some 3D objects. The tangency points are projected onto the current UCS. To create a solid torus 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Torus. 2 Specify the center of the torus. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the path that is swept by the torus tube. 4 Specify the radius or diameter of the tube. Create 3D Solid Primitives | 999 Quick Reference Commands TORUS Creates a donut-shaped 3D solid. System Variables DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Create a Polysolid Use the same techniques you use to create polylines to create a polysolid object. The POLYSOLID command provides a quick way to draw 3D walls. A polysolid is like an extruded, wide polyline. In fact, you can draw polysolids the same way that you draw a polyline, using both straight and curved segments. Unlike extruded polylines, which lose any width properties upon extrusion, polysolids retain the width of their line segments. You can also convert objects such as a line, 2D polyline, arc, or circle to a polysolid. Polysolids are displayed as swept solids in the Properties palette. 1000 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Polysolid Creation Options Use the following options to control the size and shape of the polysolids you create: ■ Create arced segments. Use the Arc option to add curved segments to the polysolid. The profile of a polysolid with curved segments remains perpendicular to the path. ■ Create a polysolid from a 2D object. Use the Object option to convert an object such as a polyline, circle, line, or arc to a polysolid. The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the path (a 2D object) is automatically deleted when you create a polysolid. ■ Close the gap between the first and last points. Use the Close option to create a connecting segment. ■ Set the height and width. Use the Height and Width options for the POLYSOLID command. The values you set are stored in the PSOLWIDTH and PSOLHEIGHT system variables. ■ Set where the object is drawn in relation to the specified points. Use the Justification option to place the path of the polysolid to the right, to the left, or down the center of the points you specify. To draw a polysolid 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Polysolid. 2 Specify a start point. 3 Specify the next point. To create a curved segment, at the Command prompt, enter a (Arc) and specify the next point. 4 Repeat step 3 to complete the desired solid. Create a Polysolid | 1001 5 Press Enter. To create a polysolid from an existing object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Polysolid. 2 At the Command prompt, enter o (Object). 3 Select a 2D object such as a line, polyline, arc, or circle. A 3D polysolid is created using the current height and width settings. The original 2D object is deleted or retained, depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable. Quick Reference Commands POLYSOLID Creates a 3D wall-like polysolid. System Variables DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted. PSOLHEIGHT Controls the default height for a swept solid object created with the POLYSOLID command. PSOLWIDTH Controls the default width for a swept solid object created with the POLYSOLID command. Create 3D Solids from Objects Convert existing objects to 3D solids. You can use several methods to convert objects in your drawing to 3D solids: ■ Convert surfaces and objects with Thickness to 3D Solids ■ Convert a group of surfaces to a 3D solid 1002 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models ■ Convert mesh to 3D solids ■ Thicken surfaces to convert them to 3D solids mesh and polyline with thickness converted to optimized 3D solids The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the objects you select are automatically deleted when the 3D object is created. Convert Surfaces and Objects with Thickness to 3D Solids You can convert different types of objects into extruded 3D solids with the CONVTOSOLID command. These objects include closed polylines and circles with thickness, as well as watertight meshes and surfaces. For a complete list of objects that can be converted using this method, see CONVTOSOLID. Convert a Group of Surfaces to a 3D Solid Use the SURFSCULPT command to convert a group of surfaces that enclose a water tight region to a 3D solid. Convert Mesh to 3D Solids When you convert mesh objects to 3D solids, the shape of the new solid object approximates, but does not exactly duplicate, the original mesh object. You can control the differentiation somewhat by specifying whether the result is smooth or faceted (SMOOTHMESHCONVERT). You can also specify whether the resulting faces are merged (optimized). Create 3D Solids from Objects | 1003 For example, if you convert a mesh box to a solid object, you have the following options (available on the Mesh Modeling ribbon): ■ Smoothed and optimized. Coplanar faces are merged into a single face. The overall shape of some faces can change. Edges of faces that are not coplanar are rounded. ■ Smoothed and not optimized. Each original mesh face is retained in the converted object. Edges of faces that are not coplanar are rounded. ■ Faceted and optimized. Coplanar faces are merged into a single, flat face. The overall shape of some faces can change. Edges of faces that are not coplanar are creased, or angular. ■ Faceted and not optimized. Each original mesh face is converted to a flat face. Edges of faces that are not coplanar are creased, or angular. 1004 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models You cannot convert the following types of mesh objects to a 3D solid: ■ Mesh with gaps between faces. Gizmo editing can sometimes result in gaps, or holes between the faces. In some cases, you can close the gaps by smoothing the mesh object. ■ Mesh that has self-intersecting boundaries. If you have modified a mesh object so that one or more faces intersect faces in the same object, you cannot convert it to a 3D solid. In some cases, mesh that is not eligible to be converted to a solid object can be converted to a surface. Thicken Surfaces to Convert Them to 3D Solids You can convert 3D surface objects to 3D solids with the THICKEN command. Grip editing is limited for objects that are created using this method. Create 3D Solids from Objects | 1005 To convert objects with thickness to extruded solids 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Convert to Solid. 2 Select one or more of the following types of objects and press Enter: ■ Uniform-width polylines with thickness ■ Closed, 0-width polylines with thickness ■ Circles with thickness To convert one or more surfaces to solids 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Thicken. 2 Select the surfaces you want to thicken. Press Enter. 3 Specify a thickness for the solid. Press Enter. To convert contiguous surfaces that enclose a volume to a 3D solid object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Sculpt. 2 Select surfaces that enclose a watertight region. A solid is created. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Convert to Solid. 4 Select the new compound object. To convert a mesh object to a 3D solid 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Convert Mesh panel ➤ Convert Options drop-down. 2 Specify one of the following conversion options: ■ Smooth, optimized. The resulting model is smoothed, with merged faces (SMOOTHMESHCONVERT = 0). ■ Smooth, not optimized. The resulting model is smooth, with the same number of faces as the original mesh object (SMOOTHMESHCONVERT = 1). 1006 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models ■ Faceted, optimized. The resulting model is angular, with merged, planar faces (SMOOTHMESHCONVERT = 2). ■ Faceted, not optimized. The resulting model is angular, with the same number of faces as the original mesh object (SMOOTHMESHCONVERT = 3). 3 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Convert Mesh panel ➤ Convert to Solid. 4 Select a mesh object that has no gaps or intersecting faces. Quick Reference Commands CONVTOSOLID Converts 3D meshes and polylines and circles with thickness to 3D solids. SURFSCULPT Trims and combines surfaces that bound a watertight area to create a solid. THICKEN Converts a surface into a 3D solid with a specified thickness. UNION Combines selected 3D solids, surfaces, or 2D regions by addition. System Variables DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted. SMOOTHMESHCONVERT Sets whether mesh objects that you convert to 3D solids or surfaces are smoothed or faceted, and whether their faces are merged. Combine or Slice 3D Objects Create new composite 3D objects or slice objects to divide them. Combine or Slice 3D Objects | 1007 Create Composite Objects Create composite 3D objects by combining, subtracting, or finding the intersecting mass of two or more 3D solids, surfaces, or regions. Composite solids are created from two or more solids, surfaces, or regions through any of the following commands: UNION, SUBTRACT, and INTERSECT. 3D solids record a history of how they were created. This history allows you to see the original forms that make up composite solids. For more information, see Display Original Forms of Composite Solids on page 1134. Methods for Creating Composite Objects Three methods are available for creating composite solids, surfaces, or regions: ■ Combine two or more objects. With UNION, you can combine the total volume of two or more objects. ■ Subtract one set of solids from another. With SUBTRACT, you can remove the common area of one set of solids from another. For example, you can use SUBTRACT to add holes to a mechanical part by subtracting cylinders from the object. ■ Find the common volume. With INTERSECT, you can create a composite solid from the common volume of two or more overlapping solids. INTERSECT removes the portions 1008 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models that do not overlap and creates a composite solid from the common volume. Create Composites from Mixed Object Types In addition to creating composite objects from the same object types, you can also create composites from mixed surfaces and solids. ■ Mixed intersections. Combining a solid and a surface through intersection results in a surface. ■ Mixed subtractions. Subtracting a 3D solid from a surface results in a surface. However, you cannot subtract a surface from a 3D solid object. ■ Mixed unions. You cannot create a union between 3D solid and surface objects. You cannot combine solids with mesh objects. However, you can convert them to 3D solids in order to combine them with solids. If a selection set of mixed objects contains regions, the regions are ignored. To combine objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Union. 2 Select the 3D solid, surface, or region objects to combine. Press Enter. To subtract objects from one another 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Subtract. 2 Select the 3D solid, surface, or region to subtract from. Press Enter. 3 Select the 3D solid, surface, or region to subtract. Press Enter. Combine or Slice 3D Objects | 1009 To create a compound object from the intersection with other objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Intersect. 2 Select the 3D solid, surface, or region to intersect. Press Enter. Quick Reference Commands INTERSECT Creates a 3D solid, surface, or 2D region from overlapping solids, surfaces, or regions. SUBTRACT Combines selected 3D solids or 2D regions by subtraction. UNION Combines selected 3D solids, surfaces, or 2D regions by addition. System Variables SHOWHIST Controls the Show History property for solids in a drawing. SOLIDHIST Controls the default history property setting for solid objects. Create 3D Solids by Slicing Create new 3D solids by slicing, or dividing, existing objects. When you use the SLICE command to slice a 3D solid, you can define the cutting plane in several ways. For example, you can specify three points, an axis, a surface, or a planar object to act as a cutting plane. You can retain one or both halves of the sliced object. 1010 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Sliced 3D solids do not retain a history of the original forms that created them. However, they do retain the layer and color properties of the original objects. For a complete list of objects that can be used for a slice operation, see SLICE. See also: ■ Create Sections and 2D Drawings from 3D Models on page 1197 To slice solids 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Slice. 2 Select the 3D solid or surface objects to slice. Press Enter. 3 Specify two points to define the cutting plane. 4 Specify which side to retain, or enter b (Both) to retain both sides. To slice solids with a planar object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Slice. 2 Select the 3D solid or surface objects to slice. Press Enter. 3 At the Command prompt, enter o (Object). Press Enter. 4 Select a circle, ellipse, arc, 2D spline, or 2D polyline to use as the cutting plane. 5 Specify which side to retain, or enter b (Both) to retain both sides. To slice solids or surfaces with a surface 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Slice. Combine or Slice 3D Objects | 1011 2 Select the 3D solid or surface objects to slice. Press Enter. 3 At the Command prompt, enter s (Surface). 4 Press Enter. 5 Select a surface to use as the cutting plane. 6 Specify which side to retain, or enter b (both) to retain both sides. Quick Reference Commands SLICE Creates new 3D solids and surfaces by slicing, or dividing, existing objects. Check 3D Models for Interferences Find areas where 3D solids or surfaces intersect or overlap. Use the INTERFERE command to check for areas of interference within a set of 3D solid or surface models. You can compare two sets of objects or check all 3D solids and surfaces in a drawing. Interference checking creates temporary solid or surface objects and highlights where the models intersect. If the selection set contains both 3D solids and surfaces, the resulting interference object is a surface. You cannot check interference for mesh objects. However, if you select mesh objects, you can choose to convert them to a solid or surface object and continue the operation. During the checking operation, you can use the Interference Checking dialog box to cycle through and zoom to interference objects. You can also specify whether to delete the temporary objects that are created during interference checking. 1012 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Methods for Checking Interference You can check interference using the following methods: ■ Define one selection set. Check the interference of all the 3D solids and surfaces in a single selection set. ■ Define two selection sets. Check the interference of the objects in the first set of objects against the objects in the second selection set. ■ Individually specify solids that are nested within blocks or xrefs. Individually select 3D solid or surface objects that are nested in blocks and external references (xrefs) and compare them against other objects in the selection set. To check for interferences within a solid model 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Interference Checking. 2 Select the first set of 3D solids and surfaces in the model. Press Enter. 3 Select the second set of 3D solids and surfaces in the model. Press Enter. The Interference Checking dialog box is displayed. The areas of interference are displayed as new, highlighted solid objects. 4 To cycle through the interference objects, in the Interference Checking dialog box, click Next and Previous. 5 To retain the new interference objects after you close the Interference Checking dialog box, clear Delete Interference Objects Created on Close. 6 Click Close. If Delete Interference Objects on Close is selected, the new interference objects are deleted. To change the display of interference objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Interference Checking. 2 Enter s (Settings). Press Enter. 3 In the Interference Settings dialog box, change any of the settings and click OK. Check 3D Models for Interferences | 1013 Quick Reference Commands INTERFERE Creates a temporary 3D solid from the interferences between two sets of selected 3D solids. System Variables INTERFERECOLOR Sets the color for interference objects. INTERFEREOBJVS Sets the visual style for interference objects. INTERFEREVPVS Specifies the visual style for the viewport during interference checking. Create Surfaces Create procedural surfaces and NURBS surfaces from curves or by combining or extending existing surfaces. Overview of Creating Surfaces Surface modeling provides the ability to edit multiple surfaces as an associative group or in a more free-form way. In addition to 3D solid and mesh objects, AutoCAD offer two type of surfaces: procedural and NURBS. ■ Procedural Surfaces can be associative, maintaining relationships with other objects so that they can be manipulated as a group. ■ NURBS Surfaces - are not associative. Instead, they have control vertices that allow you to sculpt shapes in a more natural way. Use procedural surfaces to take advantage of associative modeling, and use NURBS surfaces to take advantage of sculpting with control vertices. The illustration below shows a procedural surface on the left, and a NURBS surface on the right. 1014 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Choose a Surface Creation Method Create procedural and NURBS surfaces using the following methods: ■ Create surfaces from profiles on page 966. Create surfaces from profile shapes composed of lines and curves with EXTRUDE, LOFT, PLANESURF, REVOLVE, SURFNETWORK, and SWEEP. ■ Create surfaces from other surfaces on page 1020. Blend, patch, extend, fillet, and offset surfaces to create new surfaces (SURFBLEND, SURFPATCH, SURFEXTEND, SURFFILLET and SURFOFFSET). ■ Convert objects into procedural surfaces on page 1030. Convert existing solids (including composite objects), surfaces, and meshes into procedural surfaces (CONVTOSURFACE). ■ Convert procedural surfaces into NURBS surfaces on page 1031. Some objects cannot be converted directly to NURBS (for example, mesh objects). In that case, convert the object to a procedural surface and then convert it to a NURBS surface. (CONVTONURBS). Overview of Creating Surfaces | 1015 Understand Surface Continuity and Bulge Magnitude Surface continuity and bulge magnitude are properties that are frequently used when creating surfaces. When you create a new surface, you can specify the continuity and bulge magnitude with special grips. Continuity is a measure of how smoothly two curves or surfaces flow into each other. The type of continuity can be important if you need to export your surfaces to other applications. 1016 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Continuity types include the following: ■ G0 (Position). Measures location only. If the edge of each surface is collinear, the surfaces are positionally continuous (G0) at the edge curves. Note that two surfaces can meet at any angle and still have positional continuity. ■ G1 (Tangency). Includes both positional and tangential continuity (G0 + G1). With tangentially continuous surfaces, the end tangents match at the common edges. The two surfaces appear to be traveling in the same direction at the join, but they may have very different apparent “speeds” (or rates of change in direction, also called curvature). ■ G2 (Curvature). Includes positional, tangential, and curvature continuity (G0 + G1+G2). The two surfaces share the same curvature. Bulge magnitude is a measure of how much surface curves or “bulges” as it flows into another surface. Magnitude can be between 0 and 1 where 0 is flat and 1 curves the most. Set Surface Properties Before and After Creation Set defaults that control a variety of surface properties before and after you create the surface objects. ■ Surface Modeling System Variables. There are a number of system variables that are frequently used and changed during surface creation: SURFACEMODELINGMODE, SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY, SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG, SURFACEAUTOTRIM, and SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE. ■ Properties palette. Modifies properties for both the surface objects and their subobjects after they are created. For example, you can change the number of isolines in the U and V directions. Quick Reference Commands 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. ANALYSISZEBRA Projects stripes onto a 3D model to analyze surface continuity. Overview of Creating Surfaces | 1017 BREP Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces. CONVTONURBS Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces. CONVTOSURFACE Converts objects to 3D surfaces. EXTRUDE Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object. JOIN Joins similar objects to form a single, unbroken object. LOFT Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections. PLANESURF Creates a planar surface. REVOLVE Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping an object around an axis. SURFBLEND Creates a continuous blend surface between two existing surfaces. SURFNETWORK Creates a surface in the space between several curves in the U and V directions (including surface and solid edge subobjects). SURFOFFSET Creates a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface. SURFPATCH Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed loop. SWEEP Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject along a path. 1018 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. System Variables 3DOSMODE Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps. DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted. FACETRES Adjusts the smoothness of shaded and rendered objects and objects with hidden lines removed. ISOLINES Specifies the number of contour lines per surface on objects. SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces to increase performance. SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. Create Procedural Surfaces Create procedural surfaces by blending, patching, and offsetting existing surfaces or by converting 3D solids, meshes and other planar geometry. Create Procedural Surfaces | 1019 Create Surfaces from Other Surfaces There are many ways to create procedural surfaces from existing surfaces. These include blending, patching, and offsetting or creating network and planar surfaces. When you create procedural surfaces, use SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY to work with the surfaces as a group. Just as you can modify the face of a solid and have the entire solid update, when you modify a group of surfaces that are associative, all of the surfaces update accordingly. Create Planar Surfaces Create planar surfaces in the space between edge subobjects, splines and other 2D and 3D curves. Create planar surfaces with the PLANESURF command Planar surfaces can be created from multiple closed objects and the curves can be surface or solid edge subobjects. During creation, specify the tangency and bulge magnitude. See also: ■ Overview of Creating Surfaces on page 1014 To create a planar surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Planar. 2 Click and drag an area onscreen. 3 Hold Shift and press the mouse wheel to orbit and inspect the planar surface. Quick Reference Commands 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. 1020 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. PLANESURF Creates a planar surface. UCS Manages user coordinate systems. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. System Variables 3DOSMODE Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps. DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. Create Network Surfaces Create non-planar surfaces in the space between edge subobjects, splines and other 2D and 3D curves. Create Procedural Surfaces | 1021 Create non-planar, network surfaces with the SURFNETWORK command. Network surfaces are similar to lofted surfaces in that they are created in the space between several curves in the U and V directions. The curves can be surface or solid edge subobjects. When you create the surface you can specify the tangency and bulge magnitude of the surface edges. See also: ■ Overview of Creating Surfaces on page 1014 To create a network surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Network. 2 In the drawing area, select cross section curves in the first direction (U or V) and press Enter. 3 Select cross sections in the second direction and press Enter. Quick Reference Commands 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. SURFNETWORK Creates a surface in the space between several curves in the U and V directions (including surface and solid edge subobjects). UCS Manages user coordinate systems. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. 1022 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models System Variables 3DOSMODE Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps. DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. Blend a Surface Create a transition surface between two existing surfaces. Use SURFBLEND to create a new surface between existing surfaces and solids. When you blend surfaces together, specify the surface continuity and bulge magnitude for the start and end edges. See also: ■ Overview of Creating Surfaces on page 1014 To create a blend surface between a surface and a solid 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Blend. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Subobject panel ➤ Edges. NOTE If the drawing area is very busy, use the CULLINGOBJ and the CULLINGOBJSELECTION to further filter out unneeded objects. Create Procedural Surfaces | 1023 3 In the drawing area, select a surface edge subobject and a solid edge subobject. 4 Specify the continuity and bulge magnitude for each edge and press Enter. Quick Reference Commands 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. SURFBLEND Creates a continuous blend surface between two existing surfaces. UCS Manages user coordinate systems. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. System Variables 3DOSMODE Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps. CULLINGOBJ Controls whether 3D subobjects that are hidden from view can be highlighted or selected. CULLINGOBJSELECTION Controls whether 3D objects that are hidden from view can be highlighted or selected. 1024 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted. SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. Patch a Surface Create a surface by patching a closed surface or curve. Use SURFPATCH to create a surface inside a closed curve (such as a closed spline) that is another surface’s edge. You can also draw a guide curve to constrain the shape of the patch surface with the constrain geometry option. When you patch surfaces, specify the continuity and bulge magnitude. See also: ■ Overview of Creating Surfaces on page 1014 To patch the top of a closed surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Patch. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Subobject panel ➤ Edge. NOTE If the drawing area is very busy, use the CULLINGOBJ and the CULLINGOBJSELECTION to further filter out unneeded objects. 3 In the drawing area, select a surface edge subobject. 4 Specify the continuity and bulge magnitude and press Enter. Create Procedural Surfaces | 1025 Quick Reference Commands 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. SURFPATCH Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed loop. UCS Manages user coordinate systems. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. System Variables 3DOSMODE Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps. CULLINGOBJ Controls whether 3D subobjects that are hidden from view can be highlighted or selected. CULLINGOBJSELECTION Controls whether 3D objects that are hidden from view can be highlighted or selected. DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted. 1026 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. Offset a Surface Create a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface. With SURFOFFSET specify the offset distance and whether or not the offset surface maintains associativity with the original surface. You can also specify the offset distance with a mathematical expression. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations on page 840. Surface Offset Options When you offset a surface, you can do the following: ■ Change the offset direction with the Flip option ■ Offset in both directions to create two new surfaces Create Procedural Surfaces | 1027 ■ Create a solid between the offset surfaces ■ If you are offsetting more than one surface, you can specify whether the offset surfaces remain connected. ■ Enter an expression that will constrain the distance of the offset surface to the original surface. This option only appears if associativity is on. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations on page 840. See also: ■ Overview of Creating Surfaces on page 1014 To create a solid from an offset surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Offset. 2 In the drawing area, select a surface and press Enter. Arrows display to show the offset direction. 3 Enter s and press Enter. 1028 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models 4 Enter an offset distance and press Enter. The surface creates a parallel surface and connects the two to form a 3D solid object. Quick Reference Commands 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. SURFOFFSET Creates a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface. UCS Manages user coordinate systems. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. System Variables 3DOSMODE Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps. CULLINGOBJ Controls whether 3D subobjects that are hidden from view can be highlighted or selected. CULLINGOBJSELECTION Controls whether 3D objects that are hidden from view can be highlighted or selected. Create Procedural Surfaces | 1029 DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted. SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. Convert Objects to Procedural Surfaces Convert 3D solids, meshes, and 2D geometry to procedural surfaces. Use CONVTOSURFACE to convert any of the following objects into surfaces: ■ 2D solids ■ Meshes ■ Regions ■ Open, zero-width polylines with thickness ■ Lines with thickness ■ Arcs with thickness ■ Planar 3D faces To convert one or more objects to surfaces 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Convert to Surface. 2 Select the objects you want to convert and press Enter. 1030 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Quick Reference Commands CONVTOSURFACE Converts objects to 3D surfaces. Create NURBS Surfaces Create NURBS surfaces by enabling NURBS creation and using many of the same commands used to create procedural surfaces. You can also convert existing procedural surfaces into NURBS surfaces. See also: ■ Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves on page 966 ■ Create Surfaces from Other Surfaces on page 1020 ■ Edit NURBS Surfaces on page 1155 ■ Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves on page 1157 ■ Draw Splines on page 679 ■ Modify Splines on page 794 NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Splines) surfaces are part of the suite of 3D modeling objects that AutoCAD offers (in addition to 3D solids, procedural surfaces, and meshes). NURBS surfaces are based on Bezier curves or splines. Therefore, settings such as degree, fit points, control vertices, weights, and knot parameterization are important in defining a NURBS surface or curve. AutoCAD splines are optimized to create NURBS surfaces allowing you to control many of these options (see SPLINE and SPLINEDIT). The illustration below shows the control vertices that display when you select a NURBS surface or spline. Create NURBS Surfaces | 1031 Two Methods for Creating NURBS Surfaces There are two ways to create NURBS surfaces: ■ SURFACEMODELINGMODE system variable - Use any of the surface creation commands while this system variable is set to 1. ■ CONVTONURBS command - Convert any existing surfaces with this command. It is important to plan ahead with NURBS modeling, since NURBS surfaces cannot be converted back into procedural surfaces. To create a NURBS surface by lofting 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ NURBS Creation (if it is not already enabled). 2 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Loft. 3 Select the cross section profiles and press Enter. Select them in the order in which you want the new 3D object to pass through them. After the loft operation, the original objects are deleted or retained, depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable. To convert a solid into a NURBS surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Control Vertices panel ➤ Convert to NURBS. 2 Select a solid and press Enter. The object is converted into multiple NURBS surfaces (each face becomes a separate surface). 1032 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models NOTE To display the control vertices, click Surface tab ➤ Control Vertices panel ➤ Show CV. To convert a mesh object into a NURBS surface 1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Convert Mesh ➤ Convert to Surface. 2 Select a mesh object and press Enter. The object is converted to a procedural surface. 3 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ NURBS Creation. The object is converted to a NURBS surface. NOTE To display the control vertices, click Surface tab ➤ Control Vertices panel ➤ Show CV. Quick Reference Commands CONVTONURBS Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces. CVSHOW Displays the control vertices for specified NURBS surfaces or curves. EXTRUDE Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. LOFT Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. Create NURBS Surfaces | 1033 REVOLVE Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping an object around an axis. SPLINE Creates a smooth curve that passes through fit points or near control vertices. SPLINEDIT Edits a spline or spline-fit polyline. SURFBLEND Creates a continuous blend surface between two existing surfaces. SURFEXTEND Lengthens a surface by a specified distance. SURFFILLET Creates a filleted surface between two other surfaces. SURFNETWORK Creates a surface in the space between several curves in the U and V directions (including surface and solid edge subobjects). SURFOFFSET Creates a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface. SURFPATCH Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed loop. SWEEP Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject along a path. System Variables SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. Using the Spline tool to create NURBS Surfaces and Splines The spline tool is optimized to work with NURBS modeling 1034 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models See also: ■ Draw Splines on page 679 ■ Modify Splines on page 794 NURBS surfaces can be created from a number of 2D objects, including edge subobjects, polylines, and arcs. But the spline tool is the only object that has options that are compatible with creating NURBS surface. Not only do splines consists of Bezier arcs, but they also can be defined with both control vertices and fit points. The fit points and control vertices offer different editing options such as knot parameterization and degree options. See Moving Fit Points vs. Moving Control Vertices NURBS curves have both fit points and control vertices. The fit points lie on the line, and the control vertices lay outside the line. Use fit points to make a change to one small part of a curve; use control vertices to make changes that will affect the shape of the curve as a whole. Clamp Surfaces and Curves with Open and Closed Geometry NURBS surfaces and curves can have a clamp, closed, or open form. The form affects how the object deforms. ■ Open Curves and surfaces - have their start and end CVs in different positions - it doesn’t form a loop. If you snap the start and end CVs of an open curve to the same position, it’s still an open curve, because you can still drag these points away from one another. ■ Closed Curves and Surfaces - a loop with coinciding start and end CVs. Where they meet is called a seam. If you move one CV, the other moves with it. ■ Clamp Curve - is a closed loop with a seam that creates extra, unseen CVs. These unseen CVs can cause the shape to wrinkle and crease when it is reshaped. Quick Reference Commands SPLINE Creates a smooth curve that passes through fit points or near control vertices. Create NURBS Surfaces | 1035 SPLINEDIT Edits a spline or spline-fit polyline. System Variables SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. Create Associative Surfaces Associative surfaces automatically adjust to changes made to other, related objects. When surface associativity is on, surfaces are created with a relationship to the surface or profiles that created them. Associativity allows you to: ■ Reshape the generating profiles to automatically reshape the surface. ■ Work with a group of surfaces as if they were one object. Just as reshaping one face of a solid box adjusts the entire primitive, reshaping one surface or edge in a group of associated surfaces adjusts the entire group. ■ Use geometric constraints on the 2D profiles of a surface. ■ Assign mathematical expressions to derive properties of surfaces, such as height and radius. For example, specify that the height of an extruded surface be equal to one half the lengh of another object. As you add more objects and edit them, all these objects become related and create a chain of dependency. Editing one object can ripple through and affect all associated objects. It is important to understand the chain of associativity because moving or deleting one of the links in the chain can break the relationship between all the objects. NOTE To modify the shape of a surface that is generated from a curve or spline, you must select and modify the generating curve or spline, not the surface itself. If you modify the surface itself, you will lose associativity. 1036 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models When associativity is on, the DELOBJ system variable is ignored. If Surface Associativity and NURBS Creation are both on, surface are created as NURBS surfaces, not associative surfaces. Save time by planning your model ahead; you cannot go back and add associativity after the model has been created. Also, be careful not to accidentally break associativity by dragging objects away from the group. To create an associative surface ■ Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Surface Associativity. Any new procedural surfaces will be associative. NOTE NURBS creation overrides Surface Associativity. If Surface Associativity and NURBS Creation are both on, surface associativity will not work. To see what objects a surface is associated with 1 In a drawing, select an associative surface. 2 Open the properties palette, in Surface Associativity, select Show from the Show Associativity drop-down list. 3 Roll over the surface and nearby objects. The associated objects, such as generating curves or edge subobjects highlight as well as the surface itself. To turn associativity off for a particular surface 1 In a drawing, select an associative surface. 2 Open the properties palette, in Surface Associativity, select Non from the Maintain Associativity drop-down list. The surface maintains its associativity to other objects. But any new objects that are created will not be associated with this surface. It breaks the chain of associativity. To remove associativity from a surface 1 In a drawing, select an associative surface. 2 Open the properties palette, in Surface Associativity, select Remove from the Maintain Associativity drop-down list. Create Associative Surfaces | 1037 The surface becomes a generic surface. You can no longer change any or its properties in the properties palette and it loses its relationship with other objects. Quick Reference Commands BREP Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces. EXTRUDE Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object. JOIN Joins similar objects to form a single, unbroken object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. LOFT Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. PLANESURF Creates a planar surface. PROJECTGEOMETRY Projects points, lines, or curves onto a 3D solid or surface from different directions. REVOLVE Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping an object around an axis. SURFBLEND Creates a continuous blend surface between two existing surfaces. 1038 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models SURFNETWORK Creates a surface in the space between several curves in the U and V directions (including surface and solid edge subobjects). SURFOFFSET Creates a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface. SURFPATCH Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed loop. SWEEP Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject along a path. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. System Variables SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces to increase performance. Create Geometric Relationships between Associative Surfaces Use geometric constraints to constrain and restrict surfaces. And use mathematical expressions to derive surface properties. Use Geometric Constraints with Surface Profiles Just as with 2D drafting, geometric constraints can be used to restrict the movement of 3D surfaces. For example, you can specify that a surface remain fixed in a perpendicular or parallel location to another object. In the example below, an offset surface is locked in a parallel position to its original surface. Create Associative Surfaces | 1039 Constraints are applied to the 2D profile object used to create the surface, not the surface itself. Use selection cycling to be sure that you are selecting the profile curve and not the surface or the edge subobject. See Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints on page 810. Use Mathematical Expressions to Derive Surface Properties Dimensional constraints are user-defined expressions that are applied in the properties palette for that surface. For a complete list of operators and functions allowed in expressions, see Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager on page 842. The following table lists the surface types and their properties that accept expressions Type of Surface Surface properties that can be constrained. Blend Surface Bulge Magnitude Extend Surface Extension Distance Extruded Surface ■ Height ■ Taper 1040 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Type of Surface Surface properties that can be constrained. Fillet Surface Fillet Radius Loft Surface Bulge Magnitude Network Surface Bulge Magnitude Offset Surface Offset Distance Patch Surface Bulge Magnitude Revolve Surface Revolve Angle To create a parallel relationship between two surfaces 1 Enter dsettings and select the Selection Cycling tab. 2 Click Allow Selection Cycling to turn selection cycling on. 3 Enter geomconstraint. Enter pa to select the parallel option. 4 Select the first and second profile objects. Be careful not to select the surface or the edge subobject. If the surfaces were not already parallel, they are moved into a parallel location and the parallel constraint symbol appears. To add a user expression to specify the height of a surface 1 Right-click on a surface and select Properties. The properties palette displays. 2 In the Geometry section, enter an expression in the Height field. A symbol appears next to that field to indicate that a dimensional constraint is applied to this property. Create Associative Surfaces | 1041 Quick Reference Commands AUTOCONSTRAIN Applies geometric constraints to a selection set of objects based on orientation of the objects relative to one another. CONSTRAINTBAR Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. CONSTRAINTSETTINGS Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars. DCDISPLAY Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of objects. DELCONSTRAINT Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of objects. DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. GEOMCONSTRAINT Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. -PARAMETERS Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. 1042 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models PARAMETERSCLOSE Closes the Parameters Manager palette. TEXTEDIT Edits a dimensional constraint, dimension, or text object. System Variables CCONSTRAINTFORM Controls whether annotational or dynamic constraints are applied to objects. CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when you select geometrically constrained drawings. CONSTRAINTBARMODE Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object. CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints. DIMCONSTRAINTICON Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints. DYNCONSTRAINTMODE Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are selected. PARAMETERCOPYMODE Controls how constraints and referenced user parameters are handled when constrained objects are copied between drawings, Model space and layouts, and block definitions. PARAMETERSSTATUS Indicates whether the Parameters Manager is displayed or hidden. Create Associative Surfaces | 1043 SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. Create Meshes Create meshes from primitive forms or by filling between points on other objects. Overview of Creating Meshes Mesh tessellation provides enhanced capabilities for modeling object shapes in a more detailed way. Starting with AutoCAD 2010, the default mesh object type can be smoothed, creased, split, and refined. Although you can continue to create the legacy polyface and polygon mesh types, you can obtain more predictable results by converting to the newer mesh object type. Methods for Creating Mesh You can create mesh objects using the following methods: ■ Create mesh primitives. Create standard shapes, such as boxes, cones, cylinders, pyramids, spheres, wedges, and tori (MESH). ■ Create mesh from other objects. Create ruled, tabulated, revolved, or edge-defined mesh objects, whose boundaries are interpolated from other objects or points (RULESURF, TABSURF, REVSURF, EDGESURF). ■ Convert from other object types. Convert existing solid or surface models, including composite models, to mesh objects (MESHSMOOTH). 1044 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models You can also convert the legacy style of mesh to the new mesh object type. ■ Create custom meshes (legacy). Use 3DMESH to create polygon meshes, usually scripted with AutoLISP routines, to create open-ended mesh. Use PFACE to create mesh with multiple vertices defined by coordinates that you specify. Although you can continue to create legacy polygonal and polyface meshes, it is recommended that you convert to the enhanced mesh object type to obtain enhanced editing capabilities. About Tessellation Tessellation is a collection of planar shapes that tile a mesh object. The tessellation divisions, visible in unselected mesh objects, mark the edges of the editable mesh faces. (To see these divisions in the 3D Hidden or Conceptual visual styles, VSEDGES must be set to 1.) When you smooth and refine mesh objects, you increase the density of the tessellation (the number of subdivisions). ■ Smoothing. Increases how closely the mesh surface adheres to a rounded form. You can increase mesh smoothness levels for selected objects in increments or by changing the smoothness level in the Properties palette. Smoothness level 0 (zero) applies the lowest level of smoothing to a mesh object. Smoothness level 4 applies a high degree of smoothness. ■ Refinement. Quadruples the number of subdivisions in a selected mesh object or in a selected subobject, such as a face. Refinement also resets the current smoothness level to 0, so that the object can no longer be sharpened beyond that level. Because refinement greatly increases the density of a mesh, you might want to restrict this option to areas that require finely Overview of Creating Meshes | 1045 detailed modification. Refinement also helps you mold smaller sections with less effect on the overall shape of the model. While highly refined mesh gives you the ability to make detailed modifications, it also comes at a cost: it can decrease program performance. By maintaining maximum smoothness, face, and grid levels, you can help ensure that you do not create meshes that are too dense to modify effectively. (Use SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV, SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE, and SMOOTHMESHGRID.) Set Mesh Properties Before and After Creation You can set defaults that control a variety of mesh properties before and after you create the mesh objects. ■ Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. Sets the density of the tessellation (the number of subdivisions) per dimension for each type of mesh object you create. ■ Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box. Sets the default settings for 3D solid or surface objects that you convert to mesh. Options define how closely mesh faces adhere to the shape of the object and level of smoothness. You can also set the default to prefer the settings in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box for object conversions. ■ Properties palette. Modifies properties for both the mesh object and its subobjects after they are created. For a selected mesh object, you can modify the level of smoothness. For faces and edges, you can apply or remove creasing, and modify crease retention levels. ■ Level of smoothness. By default, the mesh primitive objects that you create have no smoothness. You can change this default with the Settings option 1046 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models of the MESH command. The modified smoothness value is maintained only during the current drawing session. See also: ■ Modify Mesh Objects on page 1167 To set the maximum smoothness level for mesh objects 1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshmaxlev. 2 Enter a value from 1 to 255. (Use lower numbers to prevent extremely dense meshes that might affect program performance.) To set the maximum number of faces for mesh objects 1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshmaxface. 2 Enter a value from 1 to 16,000,000. To control the display of the mesh facet grid 1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshgrid. 2 Set the smoothness level at which the mesh object displays the underlying facet grid: ■ 0 hides the display of the underlying facet grid. ■ 1 displays the facet grid for smoothness levels 0 and 1. ■ 2 or higher specifies the highest level of smoothness at which the facet grid is displayed. To change the default level of smoothness of new mesh primitive objects 1 At the Command prompt, enter mesh. Then enter se (SEttings). 2 Enter a smoothness value and press Enter. (A smoothness level of 5 or less is recommended.) 3 Press Esc to end the command or specify a mesh primitive type to create. The smoothness value is retained for the current drawing session. Overview of Creating Meshes | 1047 Quick Reference Commands 3DFACE Creates a three-sided or four-sided surface in 3D space. 3DMESH Creates a free-form polygon mesh. EDGESURF Creates a mesh between four contiguous edges or curves. MESH Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid, sphere, wedge, or torus. MESHOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box, which controls default settings for converting existing objects to mesh objects. MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation defaults for primitive mesh objects. MESHSMOOTH Converts 3D objects such as polygon meshes, surfaces, and solids to mesh objects. PFACE Creates a 3D polyface mesh vertex by vertex. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. REVSURF Creates a mesh by revolving a profile about an axis. RULESURF Creates a mesh that represents the surface between two lines or curves. TABSURF Creates a mesh from a line or curve that is swept along a straight path. 1048 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models System Variables SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV Sets the maximum smoothness level for mesh objects. SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE Sets the maximum number of faces permitted for mesh objects. SMOOTHMESHGRID Sets the maximum level of smoothness at which the underlying mesh facet grid is displayed on 3D mesh objects. VSEDGES Controls the types of edges that are displayed in the viewport. Create 3D Mesh Primitives Create mesh boxes, cones, cylinders, pyramids, spheres, wedges, and tori. Create a Mesh Box Create a rectangular or cubical mesh box. The base of the mesh box is drawn parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS (workplane). You can set defaults for the number of divisions for each dimension of new mesh boxes in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. You can also modify these settings and the level of smoothness as you create the mesh object. Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1049 Mesh Box Creation Options The Box option of the MESH command provides several methods for determining the size and rotation of the mesh boxes you create. ■ Create a cube. Use the Cube option to create a mesh box with sides of equal length. ■ Specify rotation. Use the Cube or Length option if you want to set the rotation of the box in the XY plane. ■ Start from the center point. Use the Center option to create a box using a specified center point. To create a mesh box based on two points and a height 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Box. 2 Specify the first corner of the base. 3 Specify the opposite corner of the base. 4 Specify the height. To create a mesh box based on length, width, and height 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Box. 2 Specify the first corner of the base. 3 At the Command prompt, enter l (Length). Specify the length of the base. 4 Specify the width of the base. 5 Specify the height. To create a mesh box based on a center point, corner of base, and height 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Box. 2 At the Command prompt, enter c (Center). Specify the center point of the base. 1050 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models 3 To set the location of the corner of the base, use one of the following methods: ■ To set the length and width simultaneously: Specify the location of one corner of the base. ■ To set the length and width separately: At the Command prompt, enter l (Length) and specify the length. Then specify the width. ■ Specify the height. To create a mesh cube 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Box. 2 Specify the first corner or enter c (Center) and specify the center point of the base. 3 At the Command prompt, enter c (Cube). Specify the length of the cube and a rotation angle. Quick Reference Commands MESH Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid, sphere, wedge, or torus. MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation defaults for primitive mesh objects. System Variables DIVMESHBOXHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions for the height of a mesh box along the Z axis. DIVMESHBOXLENGTH Sets the number of subdivisions for the length of a mesh box along the X axis. Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1051 DIVMESHBOXWIDTH Sets the number of subdivisions for the width of a mesh box along the Y axis. DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Create a Mesh Cone Create a pointed or frustum mesh cone with a circular or elliptical base. By default, the base of the mesh cone lies on the XY plane of the current UCS and the height of the cone is parallel to the Z axis. You can set the number of divisions for each dimension of new mesh cones in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. You can also modify these settings and the level of smoothness as you create the mesh object. Mesh Cone Creation Options The Cone option of the MESH command provides several methods for determining the size and rotation of the mesh cones you create. ■ Set the height and orientation. Use the Axis Endpoint option when you want to reorient the cone by placing the tip or axis endpoint anywhere in 3D space. ■ Create a frustum of a cone. Use the Top Radius option to create a frustum of a cone, which tapers to an elliptical or planar face. ■ Specify circumference and base plane. The 3P (Three Points) option defines the size and plane of the base of the cone anywhere in 3D space. ■ Create an elliptical base. Use the Elliptical option to create a cone base whose axes are different lengths. 1052 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models ■ Set the location to be tangent to two objects. Use the Ttr (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) option to define points on two objects. Depending on the radius distance, the new cone is located as near as possible to the tangent points you specify. You can set up tangency with circles, arcs, lines, and some 3D objects. The tangency points are projected onto the current UCS. The appearance of tangency is affected by the current level of smoothness. To create a mesh cone with a circular base 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cone. 2 Specify the center point of the base. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 4 Specify the height of the cone. To create a mesh cone with an elliptical base 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cone. 2 At the Command prompt, enter e (Elliptical). 3 Specify the start point of first axis. 4 Specify the endpoint of the first axis. 5 Specify the endpoint (length and rotation) of the second axis. 6 Specify the height of the cone. To create a frustum of a mesh cone 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cone. 2 Specify the center point of the base. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 4 At the Command prompt, enter t (Top radius). Specify the top radius. 5 Specify the height of the cone. Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1053 To create a mesh cone with the height and orientation specified by the axis endpoint 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cone. 2 Specify the center point of the base. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 4 At the Command prompt, enter a (Axis endpoint). Specify the endpoint and rotation of the cone. This endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. Quick Reference Commands MESH Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid, sphere, wedge, or torus. MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation defaults for primitive mesh objects. System Variables DIVMESHCONEAXIS Sets the number of subdivisions around the perimeter of the mesh cone base. DIVMESHCONEBASE Sets the number of subdivisions between the perimeter and the center point of the mesh cone base. DIVMESHCONEHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the point or top of the mesh cone. DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. 1054 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Create a Mesh Cylinder Create a mesh cylinder with a circular or elliptical base. By default, the base of the mesh cylinder lies on the XY plane of the current UCS. The height of the cylinder is parallel to the Z axis. You can set the number of divisions for each dimension of new mesh cylinders in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. You can also modify these settings and the level of smoothness as you create the mesh object. Mesh Cylinder Creation Options The Cylinder option of the MESH command provides several methods for determining the size and rotation of the mesh cylinders you create. ■ Set rotation. Use the Axis Endpoint option to set the height and rotation of the cylinder. The center point of the top plane of the cylinder is the axis endpoint, which can be located anywhere in 3D space. ■ Use three points to define the base. Use the 3P (Three Points) option to define the base of the cylinder. You can set three points anywhere in 3D space. ■ Create an elliptical base. Use the Elliptical option to create a cylinder base whose axes are different lengths. ■ Set the location to be tangent to two objects. Use the Ttr (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) option to define points on two objects. Depending on the radius distance, the new cylinder is located as near as possible to the tangent points you specify. You can set up tangency with circles, arcs, lines, and some 3D objects. The tangency points are projected onto the current UCS. The appearance of tangency is affected by the current level of smoothness. Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1055 To create a mesh cylinder with a circular base 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cylinder. 2 Specify the center point of the base. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 4 Specify the height of the cylinder. To create a mesh cylinder with an elliptical base 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cylinder. 2 At the Command prompt, enter e (Elliptical). 3 Specify the start point of the first axis. 4 Specify the endpoint of the first axis. 5 Specify the endpoint (length and rotation) of the second axis. 6 Specify the height of the cylinder. To create a mesh cylinder with the height and rotation specified (axis endpoint) 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Cylinder. 2 Specify the center point of the base. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 4 At the Command prompt, enter a (Axis endpoint). Specify the axis endpoint of the cylinder. This endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. 1056 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Quick Reference Commands MESH Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid, sphere, wedge, or torus. MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation defaults for primitive mesh objects. System Variables DIVMESHCYLAXIS Sets the number of subdivisions around the perimeter of the mesh cylinder base. DIVMESHCYLBASE Sets the number of radial subdivisions from the center of the mesh cylinder base to its perimeter. DIVMESHCYLHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the top of the mesh cylinder. DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Create a Mesh Pyramid Create a mesh pyramid with up to 32 sides. Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1057 Create a pyramid that tapers to a point, or create a frustum of a pyramid, which tapers to a planar face. You can set the number of divisions for each dimension of new mesh pyramids in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. You can also modify these settings and the level of smoothness as you create the mesh object. Mesh Pyramid Creation Options The Pyramid option of the MESH command provides several methods for determining the size and rotation of the mesh pyramids you create. ■ Set the number of sides. Use the Sides option to set the number of sides for the mesh pyramid. ■ Set the length of the edges. Use the Edges option to specify the dimension of the sides at the base. ■ Create a frustum of a pyramid. Use the Top Radius option to create a frustum, which tapers to a planar face. The frustum face is parallel to, and has the same number of sides as, the base. ■ Set the height and rotation of the pyramid. Use the Axis Endpoint option to specify the height and rotation of the pyramid. This endpoint is the top of the pyramid. The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. ■ Set the perimeter to be inscribed or circumscribed. Specify whether the pyramid base is drawn inside or outside of the radius. 1058 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models To create a mesh pyramid 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Pyramid. 2 At the Command prompt, enter s (Sides). Enter the number of sides to use. 3 Specify the center point of the base. 4 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 5 Specify the height of the pyramid. To create a frustum of a mesh pyramid 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Pyramid. 2 At the Command prompt, enter s (Sides). Enter the number of sides to use. 3 Specify the center point of the base. 4 Specify the radius or diameter of the base. 5 Enter t (Top radius). Specify the radius of the planar face at the top of the pyramid. Specify the height of the pyramid. Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1059 Quick Reference Commands MESH Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid, sphere, wedge, or torus. MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation defaults for primitive mesh objects. System Variables DIVMESHPYRBASE Sets the number of radial subdivisions between the center of the mesh pyramid base and its perimeter. DIVMESHPYRHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the top of the mesh pyramid. DIVMESHPYRLENGTH Sets the number of subdivisions along each dimension of a mesh pyramid base. DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Create a Mesh Sphere Create a mesh sphere using one of several methods. 1060 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models When you start with the center point, the central axis of the mesh sphere parallels the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS). You can set the number of divisions for each dimension of new mesh spheres in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. You can also modify these settings and the level of smoothness as you create the mesh object. Mesh Sphere Creation Options The Sphere option of the MESH command provides several methods for determining the size and rotation of the mesh spheres you create. ■ Specify three points to set the size and plane of the circumference or radius. Use the 3P (Three Points) option to define the size of the sphere anywhere in 3D space. The three points also define the plane of the circumference. ■ Specify two points to set the circumference or radius. Use the 2P (Two Points) option to define the size of the sphere anywhere in 3D space. The plane of the circumference matches the Z value of the first point. ■ Set the location to be tangent to two objects. Use the Ttr (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) option to define points on two objects. Depending on the radius distance, the sphere is located as near as possible to the tangent points you specify. You can set up tangency with circles, arcs, lines, and some 3D objects. The tangency points are projected onto the current UCS. The appearance of tangency is affected by the current level of smoothness. To create a mesh sphere 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Sphere. 2 Specify the center of the sphere. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the sphere. To create a mesh sphere defined by three points 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Sphere. 2 Specify the center of the sphere. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the sphere. Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1061 Quick Reference Commands MESH Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid, sphere, wedge, or torus. MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation defaults for primitive mesh objects. System Variables DIVMESHSPHEREAXIS Sets the number of radial subdivisions around the axis endpoint of the mesh sphere. DIVMESHSPHEREHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions between the two axis endpoints of the mesh sphere. DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Create a Mesh Wedge Create a mesh wedge with rectangular or cubical faces. The base of the wedge is drawn parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS with the sloped face opposite the first corner. The height of the wedge is parallel to the Z axis. 1062 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models You can set the number of divisions for each dimension of new mesh wedges in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. You can also modify these settings and the level of smoothness as you create the mesh object. Mesh Wedge Creation Options The Wedge option of the MESH command provides several methods for determining the size and rotation of the mesh wedges you create. ■ Create a wedge with sides of equal length. Use the Cube option. ■ Specify rotation. Use the Cube or Length option if you want to set the rotation of the mesh wedge in the XY plane. ■ Start from the center point. Use the Center Point option. To create a mesh wedge based on two points and a height 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Wedge. 2 Specify the first corner of the base. 3 Specify the opposite corner of the base. 4 Specify the height of the wedge. To create a mesh wedge based on length, width, and height 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Wedge. 2 Specify the first corner of the base. 3 At the Command prompt, enter l (Length). Specify the length of the base. 4 Specify the width of the base. 5 Specify the height of the wedge. To create a mesh wedge based on a center point, corner of base, and height 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Wedge. Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1063 2 At the Command prompt, enter c (Center). Specify the center point of the base. 3 To set the location of a corner of the base, use one of the following methods: ■ To set the length and width simultaneously: Specify the location of one corner of the base. ■ To set the length and width separately: At the Command prompt, enter l (Length) and specify the length. Then specify the width. 4 Specify the height of the wedge. To create a mesh wedge with equal length, width, and height 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Wedge. 2 Specify the first corner or enter c (Center) to set the center point of the base. 3 At the Command prompt, enter c (Cube). Specify the length of the wedge and a rotation angle. The length value sets both the width and height of the wedge. Quick Reference Commands MESH Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid, sphere, wedge, or torus. MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation defaults for primitive mesh objects. System Variables DIVMESHWEDGEBASE Sets the number of subdivisions between the midpoint of the perimeter of triangular dimension of the mesh wedge. 1064 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models DIVMESHWEDGEHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions for the height of the mesh wedge along the Z axis. DIVMESHWEDGELENGTH Sets the number of subdivisions for the length of a mesh wedge along the X axis. DIVMESHWEDGESLOPE Sets the number of subdivisions in the slope that extends from the apex of the wedge to the edge of the base. DIVMESHWEDGEWIDTH Sets the number of subdivisions for the width of the mesh wedge along the Y axis. DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Create a Mesh Torus Create a ring-shaped solid that resembles the inner tube of a tire. A mesh torus has two radius values. One value defines the tube. The other value defines the path, which is equivalent to the distance from the center of the torus to the center of the tube. By default, a torus is drawn parallel to and is bisected by the XY plane of the current UCS. You can set the number of divisions for each dimension of new mesh tori in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. You can also modify these settings and the level of smoothness as you create the mesh object. A mesh torus can be self-intersecting. A self-intersecting mesh torus has no center hole because the radius of the tube is greater than the radius of the torus. Create 3D Mesh Primitives | 1065 Torus Creation Options The Torus option of the MESH command provides several methods for determining the size and rotation of the mesh tori you create. ■ Set the size and plane of the circumference or radius. Use the 3P (Three Points) option to define the size of the mesh torus anywhere in 3D space. The three points also define the plane of the circumference. Use this option to rotate the mesh torus as you create it. ■ Set the circumference or radius. Use the 2P (Two Points) option to define the size of the mesh torus anywhere in 3D space. The plane of the circumference matches the Z value of the first point. ■ Set the location to be tangent to two objects. Use the Ttr (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) option to define points on two objects. Depending on the specified radius distance, the path of the torus is located as near as possible to the tangent points you specify. You can set up tangency with circles, arcs, lines, and some 3D objects. The tangency points are projected onto the current UCS. The appearance of tangency is affected by the current level of smoothness. To create a mesh torus 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Mesh Torus. 2 Specify the center of the torus. 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the overall path that is swept by the torus tube. 4 Specify the radius or diameter of the tube. Quick Reference Commands MESH Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid, sphere, wedge, or torus. 1066 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation defaults for primitive mesh objects. System Variables DIVMESHTORUSPATH Sets the number of subdivisions in the path that is swept by the profile of a mesh torus. DIVMESHTORUSSECTION Sets the number of subdivisions in the profile that sweeps the path of a mesh torus. DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Construct Meshes from Other Objects Create mesh forms by filling the space between other objects such as lines and arcs. You can use a variety of methods to create mesh objects whose edges are defined by other objects. The MESHTYPE system variable controls whether the new objects are valid mesh objects, or whether they are created using legacy polyface or polygon geometry. You can control whether the mesh is displayed as a wireframe, hidden, or conceptual image by changing the visual style (VISUALSTYLES). Types of Meshes Created from Other Objects You can create several types of meshes that are based on existing objects. ■ Ruled mesh. RULESURF creates a mesh that represents the ruled surface between two lines or curves. Construct Meshes from Other Objects | 1067 ■ Tabulated mesh. TABSURF creates a mesh that represents a general tabulated surface. The surface is defined by the extrusion of a line or curve (called a path curve) in a specified direction and distance (called a direction vector or path). ■ Revolved mesh. REVSURF creates a mesh that approximates a surface of revolution by rotating a profile about a specified axis. A profile can consist of lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, polylines, splines, closed polylines, polygons, closed splines, and donuts. ■ Edge-defined mesh. EDGESURF creates a mesh approximating a Coons surface patch mesh from four adjoining edges. A Coons surface patch mesh 1068 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models is a bicubic surface that is interpolated between four adjoining edges (which can be general space curves). Create a Ruled Mesh There are several methods for creating meshes. With RULESURF, you create a mesh between two lines or curves. Use two different objects to define the edges of the ruled mesh: lines, points, arcs, circles, ellipses, elliptical arcs, 2D polylines, 3D polylines, or splines. Both objects that are used as the “rails” of a ruled mesh must be either open or closed. You can pair a point object with either an open or a closed object. You can specify any two points on closed curves to complete the operation. For open curves, construction of the ruled mesh is based on the locations of the specified points on the curves. Construct Meshes from Other Objects | 1069 Create a Tabulated Mesh With the TABSURF command, you can create a mesh that represents a general tabulated surface defined by a path curve and a direction vector. The path curve can be a line, arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, 2D polyline, 3D polyline, or spline. The direction vector can be a line or an open 2D or 3D polyline. TABSURF creates the mesh as a series of parallel polygons running along a specified path. The original object and the direction vector must already be drawn, as shown in the following illustrations. Create a Revolved Mesh Use the REVSURF command to create a revolved mesh by rotating a profile of the object about an axis. REVSURF is useful for mesh forms with rotational symmetry. The profile is called a path curve. It can consist of any combination of lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, polylines, splines, closed polylines, polygons, closed splines, or donuts. 1070 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Create an Edge-Defined Mesh With the EDGESURF command, you can create a Coons surface patch mesh, as shown in the following illustration, from four objects called edges. Edges can be arcs, lines, polylines, splines, or elliptical arcs that form a closed loop and share endpoints. A Coons patch is a bicubic surface (one curve in the M direction and another in the N direction) interpolated between the four edges. To create a ruled mesh 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Ruled Surface. 2 Select an object to act as the first defining curve. 3 Select a second object as the second defining curve. Mesh segments are drawn between the defining curves. The number of segments equals the value set for SURFTAB1. 4 Erase the original curves if necessary. To create a tabulated mesh 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Tabulated Surface. 2 Specify an object to define the overall shape of the tabulated surface (the path curve). The object can be a line, arc, circle, ellipse, or a 2D or 3D polyline. 3 Specify an open line or polyline that defines the direction vector. The mesh is extended from the start point to the endpoint of the direction vector. 4 Erase the original objects if necessary. Construct Meshes from Other Objects | 1071 To create a revolved mesh 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Revolved Surface. 2 Specify an object to define the path curve. The path curve, which defines the N direction of the mesh, can be a line, arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, 2D polyline, 3D polyline, or spline. If you select a circle, closed ellipse, or closed polyline, the mesh is closed in the N direction. 3 Specify an object to define the axis of revolution. The direction vector can be a line or an open 2D or 3D polyline. If you choose a polyline, the vector sets the rotation axis from its first vertex to its last vertex. Any intermediate vertices are ignored. The axis of revolution determines the M direction of the mesh. 4 Specify the start angle. If you specify a nonzero start angle, the mesh is generated at a position offset from the path curve by that angle. 5 Specify the included angle. The included angle specifies how far the mesh extends around the axis of revolution. 6 Erase the original objects if necessary. To create an edge-defined Coons surface patch mesh 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Edge Surface. 2 Select four objects to define the four adjoining edges of the mesh patch. The objects can be arcs, lines, polylines, splines, or elliptical arcs that form a closed loop and share endpoints. The first edge you select determines the M direction of the mesh. 1072 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Quick Reference Commands EDGESURF Creates a mesh between four contiguous edges or curves. PEDIT Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. PFACE Creates a 3D polyface mesh vertex by vertex. REVSURF Creates a mesh by revolving a profile about an axis. RULESURF Creates a mesh that represents the surface between two lines or curves. TABSURF Creates a mesh from a line or curve that is swept along a straight path. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. System Variables FACETRATIO Controls the aspect ratio of faceting for cylindrical and conic solids. MESHTYPE Controls the type of mesh that is created by REVSURF, TABSURF, RULESURF and EDGESURF. PLINECONVERTMODE Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines. PFACEVMAX Sets the maximum number of vertices per face. Construct Meshes from Other Objects | 1073 SURFTAB1 Sets the number of tabulations to be generated for the RULESURF and TABSURF commands. SURFTAB2 Sets the mesh density in the N direction for the REVSURF and EDGESURF commands. SURFTYPE Controls the type of surface-fitting to be performed by the Smooth option of the PEDIT command. SURFU Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the M direction and the U isolines density on surface objects. SURFV Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the N direction and the V isolines density on surface objects. Create Meshes by Conversion Convert solids, surfaces, and legacy mesh types to mesh objects. You can use the MESHSMOOTH command to convert certain objects to mesh. Convert 3D solids, surfaces, and legacy mesh objects to the enhanced mesh object in order to take advantage of capabilities such as smoothing, refinement, creasing, and splitting. 1074 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Object Types That Can Be Converted You obtain the most predictable results when you convert primitive solid objects to mesh. That is, the resulting mesh adheres closely to the shape of the original solid model. You can also convert other types of objects, although the conversion results may differ from what you expect. These objects include swept surfaces and solids, legacy polygon and polyface mesh objects, regions, closed polylines, and objects created with 3DFACE. For these objects, you can often improve results by adjusting the conversion settings. Adjust Mesh Conversion Settings If the conversion does not work as expected, try changing the settings in the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box. For example, if the Smooth Mesh Optimized mesh type results in incorrect conversions, you can set the tessellation shape to be Triangle or Mostly Quads. You also can control the adherence to the original shape by setting the maximum distance offset, angles, aspect ratios, and edge lengths for new faces. The following example shows a 3D solid helix that has been converted to mesh using different tessellation settings. The optimized mesh version has been smoothed, but the other two conversions have no smoothness. Notice, however, that the mostly quads conversion with the lower tessellation values creates a mesh object that adheres most closely to the original version. Smoothing this object improves its appearance even more. Similarly, if you notice that a converted mesh object has a number of long, slivered faces (which can sometimes cause gaps), try decreasing the Maximum Edge Length for New Faces value. Create Meshes by Conversion | 1075 If you are converting primitive solid objects, this dialog box also offers the option of using the same default settings used to create primitive mesh objects. When you select conversion candidates directly from this dialog box, you can preview the results before you accept them. See also: ■ Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh To convert objects to mesh using defaults 1 Click Home tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Smooth Object. 2 Select an object such as a 3D solid or surface. (For a list of eligible objects, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.) The objects are converted to mesh using the settings in the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box. To modify conversion settings as you convert objects to mesh 1 Click Home tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ dialog box launcher. 2 In the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box, update the settings that you want to change. 3 Click Select Objects to Tessellate. 4 Select an object such as a 3D solid or surface and press Enter. (For a list of eligible objects, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.) 5 To display a preview of the converted object, click Preview. The updated object is displayed in the drawing area. 6 Do one of the following: ■ To adjust the settings, press Esc to display the dialog box again. Repeat steps 2 to 6. ■ To accept the conversion, press Enter. To modify mesh conversion settings 1 Click Home tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ dialog box launcher. 1076 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models 2 In the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box, update the settings that you want to change and click OK. Quick Reference Commands MESHOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box, which controls default settings for converting existing objects to mesh objects. MESHPRIMITIVEOPTIONS Displays the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box, which sets the tessellation defaults for primitive mesh objects. MESHSMOOTH Converts 3D objects such as polygon meshes, surfaces, and solids to mesh objects. System Variables FACETERDEVNORMAL Sets the maximum angle between the surface normal and contiguous mesh faces. FACETERDEVSURFACE Sets how closely the converted mesh object adheres to the original shape of the solid or surface. FACETERGRIDRATIO Sets the maximum aspect ratio for the mesh subdivisions that are created for solids and surfaces converted to mesh. FACETERMAXEDGELENGTH Sets the maximum length of edges for mesh objects that are created by conversion from solids and surfaces. FACETERMAXGRID Sets the maximum number of U and V grid lines for solids and surfaces converted to mesh. Create Meshes by Conversion | 1077 FACETERMESHTYPE Sets the type of mesh to be created. FACETERMINUGRID Sets the minimum number of U grid lines for solids and surfaces that are converted to mesh. FACETERMINVGRID Sets the minimum number of V grid lines for solids and surfaces that are converted to mesh. FACETERPRIMITIVEMODE Specifies whether smoothness settings for objects that are converted to mesh are derived from the Mesh Tessellation Options or the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. FACETERSMOOTHLEV Sets the default level of smoothness for objects that are converted to mesh. Create Custom Mesh (Legacy) Create custom polygon or polyface mesh by specifying vertices. Specify individual vertices when you create mesh using the 3DMESH, PFACE, and 3DFACE commands. Understand Legacy Mesh Construction The mesh density controls the number of facets in legacy polygonal and polyface meshes. Density is defined in terms of a matrix of M and N vertices, like a grid consisting of columns and rows. M and N specify the column and row position, respectively, of any given vertex. A mesh can be open or closed. If the start and end edges of the mesh do not touch, a mesh is open in a given direction, as shown in the following illustrations. 1078 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Create a Rectangular Mesh With the 3DMESH command, you can create polygon meshes that are open in both the M and N directions (like the X and Y axes of an XY plane). In most cases, you can use 3DMESH in conjunction with scripts or AutoLISP routines when you know the mesh points. As you create the mesh, you specify the size of the mesh in the M and N directions. The total number of vertices you specify for the mesh is equal to the M value times the N value. Create Custom Mesh (Legacy) | 1079 You can close the meshes with PEDIT. You can use 3DMESH to construct irregular meshes. Example: In the following example of text at the Command prompt, you enter the coordinate values for each vertex to create the mesh in the illustration. Command: 3dmesh Mesh M size: 4 Mesh N size: 3 Vertex (0, 0): 10,1, 3 Vertex (0, 1): 10, 5, 5 Vertex (0, 2): 10,10, 3 Vertex (1, 0): 15,1, 0 Vertex (1, 1): 15, 5, 0 Vertex (1, 2): 15,10, 0 Vertex (2, 0): 20,1, 0 Vertex (2, 1): 20, 5, -1 Vertex (2, 2): 20,10 ,0 Vertex (3, 0): 25,1, 0 Vertex (3, 1): 25, 5, 0 Vertex (3, 2): 25,10, 0 Create a Polyface Mesh The PFACE command produces a polyface (polygon) mesh, with each face capable of having numerous vertices. PFACE is typically used by applications rather than by direct user input. Creating a polyface mesh is like creating a rectangular mesh. To create a polyface mesh, you specify coordinates for its vertices. You then define each face by entering vertex numbers for all the vertices of that face. As you create 1080 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models the polyface mesh, you can set specific edges to be invisible, assign them to layers, or give them colors. To make the edge invisible, enter the vertex number as a negative value. For instance, to make the edge between vertices 5 and 7 invisible in the following illustration, you enter the following: Face 3, vertex 3: -7 In the illustration, face 1 is defined by vertices 1, 5, 6, and 2. Face 2 is defined by vertices 1, 4, 3, and 2. Face 3 is defined by vertices 1, 4, 7, and 5, and face 4 is defined by vertices 3, 4, 7, and 8. Create Polyface Mesh Vertex by Vertex With the 3DFACE command, you can create three-dimensional polyface mesh by specifying each vertex. You can control visibility of each mesh edge segment. If you select a 3DFACE object during some mesh smoothing operations (such as with MESHSMOOTHMORE), you are prompted to convert 3DFACE objects to mesh objects. Create a Predefined 3D Mesh The 3D command creates the following 3D shapes: boxes, cones, dishes, domes, meshes, pyramids, spheres, tori (donuts), and wedges. In the following illustrations, the numbers indicate points you specify to create the mesh. Create Custom Mesh (Legacy) | 1081 To view the objects you are creating with the 3D command more clearly, set a viewing direction with 3DORBIT, DVIEW, or VPOINT. To create a rectangular mesh 1 At the Command prompt, enter 3dmesh. 2 Specify the M size, using an integer from 2 through 256. 3 Specify the N size, using an integer from 2 through 256. 4 Specify the vertex points as prompted. The number of vertices equals the M value times the N value. Specifying the last vertex point completes the mesh. 1082 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Quick Reference Commands 3DFACE Creates a three-sided or four-sided surface in 3D space. 3DMESH Creates a free-form polygon mesh. PEDIT Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. PFACE Creates a 3D polyface mesh vertex by vertex. System Variables PFACEVMAX Sets the maximum number of vertices per face. Create Wireframe Models A wireframe model is an edge or skeletal representation of a real-world 3D object using lines and curves. You can specify a wireframe visual style to help you see the overall structure of 3D objects such as solids, surfaces, and meshes. In older drawings, you might also encounter wireframe models that were created using legacy methods. Create Wireframe Models | 1083 Wireframe models consist only of points, lines, and curves that describe the edges of the object. Because each object that makes up a wireframe model must be independently drawn and positioned, this type of modeling can be the most time-consuming. You can use a wireframe model to ■ View the model from any vantage point ■ Generate standard orthographic and auxiliary views automatically ■ Generate exploded and perspective views easily ■ Analyze spatial relationships, including the shortest distance between corners and edges, and checking for interferences ■ Reduce the number of prototypes required The ISOLINES system variable controls the number of tessellation lines used to visualize curved portions of the wireframe. The FACETRES system variable adjusts the smoothness of shaded and hidden-line objects. Methods for Creating Wireframe Models You can create wireframe models by positioning any 2D planar object anywhere in 3D space, using the following methods: ■ Use the XEDGES command to create wireframe geometry from regions, 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes. XEDGES extracts all the edges on the 1084 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models selected objects or subobjects. The extracted edges form a duplicate wireframe composed of 2D objects such as lines, circles, and 3D polylines. ■ Enter 3D coordinates that define the X, Y, and Z location of the object. ■ Set the default workplane (the XY plane of the UCS) on which to draw the object. ■ Move or copy the object to its proper 3D location after you create it. Wireframe modeling is a skill that requires practice and experience. The best way to learn how to create wireframe models is to begin with simple models before attempting models that are more complex. Tips for Working with Wireframe Models Creating 3D wireframe models can be more difficult and time-consuming than creating their 2D views. Here are some tips that will help you work more effectively: ■ Plan and organize your model so that you can turn off layers to reduce the visual complexity of the model. Color can help you differentiate between objects in various views. ■ Create construction geometry to define the basic envelope of the model. ■ Use multiple views, especially isometric views, to make visualizing the model and selecting objects easier. ■ Become adept at manipulating the UCS in 3D. The XY plane of the current UCS operates as a workplane to orient planar objects such as circles and arcs. The UCS also determines the plane of operation for trimming and extending, offsetting, and rotating objects. ■ Use object snaps and grid snap carefully to ensure the precision of your model. ■ Use coordinate filters to drop perpendiculars and easily locate points in 3D based on the location of points on other objects. To drop a perpendicular line from a 3D point down to the XY plane 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line. 2 Use an object snap to specify a point on an object that is not on the XY plane of the UCS. This location defines the first point of the line. Create Wireframe Models | 1085 3 Enter .xy and then enter @ at the Of prompt. This operation extracts the X and Y coordinate values from the first point. 4 Enter 0 to specify the Z value. The X and Y values extracted from the first point are combined with a new Z value (0) to finish the definition of the second point. 5 Press Enter to end the command. To create wireframe geometry by extracting edges 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Extract Edges. 2 Select one or more of the following objects: ■ 3D solids ■ Surfaces ■ Meshes ■ Regions ■ Edges (on 3D solids, surfaces, or meshes) ■ Faces (on 3D solids or meshes) 3 Press Enter. Objects such as lines, arcs, splines, or 3D polylines are created along the edges of the selected objects or subobjects. Quick Reference Commands UCS Manages user coordinate systems. XEDGES Creates wireframe geometry from the edges of a 3D solid, surface, mesh, region, or subobject. 1086 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models System Variables ELEVATION Stores the current elevation of new objects relative to the current UCS. FACETRES Adjusts the smoothness of shaded and rendered objects and objects with hidden lines removed. ISOLINES Specifies the number of contour lines per surface on objects. Add 3D Thickness to Objects Use the thickness property to give objects a 3D appearance. The 3D thickness of an object is the distance that object is extended, or thickened, above or below its location in space. Positive thickness extrudes upward in the positive Z direction; negative thickness extrudes downward (negative Z). Zero (0) thickness means that there is no 3D thickening of the object. The orientation of the UCS when the object was created determines the Z direction. Objects with a non-zero thickness can be shaded and can hide other objects behind them. The thickness property changes the appearance of the following types of objects: ■ 2D solids ■ Arcs ■ Circles ■ Lines Add 3D Thickness to Objects | 1087 ■ Polylines (including spline-fit polylines, rectangles, polygons, boundaries, and donuts) ■ Text (only if created as a single-line text object using an SHX font) ■ Traces ■ Points Modifying the thickness property of other types of objects does not affect their appearance. You can set the default thickness property for new objects you create by setting the THICKNESS system variable. For existing objects, change the thickness property on the Properties palette. The 3D thickness is applied uniformly to an object; a single object cannot have different thicknesses. You might need to change the 3D viewpoint to see the effect of thickness on an object. NOTE Although the THICKNESS variable sets an extruded thickness for new 2D objects, those objects continue to be 2D objects. The THICKEN command adds volume to a surface object, converting it to a 3D solid. See also: ■ Create Solids and Surfaces from Objects To set the 3D thickness of new objects 1 Click Format menu ➤ Thickness. 2 At the Command prompt, enter the value for the thickness distance. When new objects are created, they have the specified 3D thickness. To change the 3D thickness of existing objects 1 Select the objects whose 3D thickness you want to change. 2 Right-click one of the objects. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, select Thickness and enter a new value. The selected objects change to display the specified 3D thickness. 1088 | Chapter 24 Create 3D Models Quick Reference Commands ELEV Sets elevation and extrusion thickness of new objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. THICKEN Converts a surface into a 3D solid with a specified thickness. System Variables BACKZ Stores the back clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current viewport, in drawing units. FRONTZ Stores the front clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current viewport, in drawing units. THICKNESS Sets the current 3D thickness. VIEWMODE Stores the View mode for the current viewport. Add 3D Thickness to Objects | 1089 1090 Modify 3D Models 25 Change the appearance of a 3D model by manipulating both the object and its components. Overview of Modifying 3D Objects 3D modeling tools range from entering precise measurements in the Properties palette, to more free-form methods such as grip and gizmo editing. Some methods are specific to 3D solids, surfaces or meshes. Other methods are shared. Convert to Other Object Types In many cases, you can convert from one object type to another to take advantage of specific editing capabilities. For example you can convert selected surfaces, solids, and legacy mesh types to mesh objects so that you can take advantage of smoothing and modeling capabilities. 1091 Similarly, you can convert mesh to 3D solids and surfaces to accomplish some composite object modeling tasks that are available only for those objects. Conversion is often offered as a choice when you start activities that are available only for solids and surfaces. View Your Model from All Angles When you work with any 3D object, you can easily make changes that are not accurately reflected in the current view. To ensure that your modifications 1092 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models conform to your expectations, make sure you understand and use the following: ■ Manipulate the 3D workplane (UCS). To understand how your model is projected in 3D space, learn how to use the X, Y, and Z axes. See Specify Workplanes in 3D (UCS) on page 566. ■ Rotate the view to display the model from different viewpoints. Several navigation tools, including 3D Orbit and the ViewCube, are available to help you rotate around your workspace. See Use Viewing Tools on page 285. ■ Display multiple viewports. Set up two or more viewports with different viewing angles and visual styles. When you make a change in one viewport, you can see its impact from several viewpoints at the same time. See Display Multiple Views in Model Space on page 373. Use Gizmos to Modify Objects Use gizmos to move, rotate, or scale objects and subobjects in a 3D view. Overview of Using Gizmos Gizmos help you move, rotate, or scale a set of objects along a 3D axis or plane. There are three types of gizmos: ■ 3D Move gizmo. Relocates selected objects along an axis or plane. ■ 3D Rotate gizmo. Rotates selected objects about a specified axis. ■ 3D Scale gizmo. Scales selected objects along a specified plane or axis, or uniformly along all 3 axes. Use Gizmos to Modify Objects | 1093 By default, gizmos are displayed automatically when you select an object or subobject in a view that has a 3D visual style. Because they constrain modifications along specific planes or axes, gizmos help ensure more predictable results. You can specify which gizmos are displayed when an object is selected, or you can suppress their display. Quick Reference Commands 3DMOVE In a 3D view, displays the 3D Move gizmo to aid in moving 3D objects a specified distance in a specified direction. 3DROTATE In a 3D view, displays the 3D Rotate gizmo to aid in revolving 3D objects around a base point. 3DSCALE In a 3D view, displays the 3D Scale gizmo to aid in resizing 3D objects. System Variables DEFAULTGIZMO Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during subobject selection. GRIPSUBOBJMODE Controls whether grips are automatically made hot when subobjects are selected. GTAUTO Controls whether 3D gizmos are automatically displayed when you select objects before you start a command in a viewport with a 3D visual style. GTDEFAULT Controls whether the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale operation starts automatically when you start the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE command in a viewport with a 3D visual style. 1094 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models GTLOCATION Controls the initial location of the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo when you select objects before you start a command in a viewport with a 3D visual style. Use the Gizmos Gizmos help move, rotate, and scale 3D objects and subobjects. Display the Gizmos Gizmos are available only in 3D views that are set to use a 3D visual style such as 3D Hidden. You can set the gizmo to be displayed automatically when you select a 3D object or subobject. Gizmos are also displayed during the 3DMOVE, 3DROTATE, and 3DSCALE commands. If the visual style is set to 2D Wireframe, entering 3DMOVE, 3DROTATE, or 3DSCALE automatically converts the visual style to 3D Wireframe. By default, the gizmo is initially placed in the center of the selection set. However, you can relocate it anywhere in 3D space. The center box (or base grip) of the gizmo sets the base point for the modification. This behavior is equivalent to temporarily changing the position of the UCS as you move or rotate the selected objects. The axis handles on the gizmo constrain the movement or rotation to an axis or plane. For best results, use object snaps to locate the grip center box. Switch Between the Gizmos Whenever you select an object in a 3D view, the default gizmo is displayed. You can select a different default on the ribbon, or change the value of the the DEFAULTGIZMO system variable. You can also suppress the display of gizmos when objects are selected. Use the Gizmos | 1095 After the gizmo is active, you can also switch to a different type of gizmo. The switching behavior differs, depending on when you select the objects: ■ Select objects first. If a gizmo operation is in progress, you can press the Spacebar repeatedly to cycle through the other gizmo types. When you switch gizmos this way, the gizmo activity is constrained to the originally selected axis or plane. During a gizmo operation, you can also select a different gizmo type on the shortcut menu. ■ Run the command first. When you start the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale operation before selecting objects, the gizmo is placed at the center of the selection set. Use the Relocate Gizmo option on the shortcut menu to relocate the gizmo anywhere in 3D space. You can also choose a different type of gizmo on the shortcut menu. Change the Gizmo Settings The following settings affect the display of gizmos: ■ Default gizmo. The DEFAULTGIZMO system variable specifies which gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a view with a 3D visual style. You can turn off display of the gizmo. This setting is also available on the ribbon. ■ Default location. The GTLOCATION system variable sets the default location of the gizmo. The gizmo can be displayed at the center of the selection set (default), or it can be positioned at the 0,0,0 coordinates of the current UCS. ■ Automatic display. The GTAUTO system variable sets whether gizmos are displayed automatically whenever you select objects in a 3D view that is set to a 3D visual style (default). If you turn off this system variable, the grips are not displayed until the gizmos are active. ■ Conversion of move, rotate, and scale operations from 2D to 3D. Turn on the GTDEFAULT system variable to start the 3DMOVE, 3DROTATE, or 3DSCALE command automatically when the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE command is started in a 3D view. This system variable is turned off by default. ■ Active status of subobject grips. If you select a subobject on page 2183, the GRIPSUBOBJMODE system variable sets whether the subobject grips are active immediately. Setting subobject grips to be active upon selection helps you modify groups of mesh subobjects without selecting them again. 1096 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models To specify which 3D gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected ■ Click Home tab ➤ Subobject panel ➤ Move Gizmo, Rotate Gizmo, or Scale Gizmo. To suppress the display of the 3D gizmo when an object is selected ■ Click Home tab ➤ Subobject panel ➤ No Gizmo. To set the default location for gizmos 1 At the Command prompt, enter gtlocation. 2 Do one of the following: ■ Enter 1 to set the location at the geometric center of the selection set. ■ Enter 0 to set the location to overlap the UCS icon. 3 Press Enter. To relocate a gizmo 1 Right-click the center box (base grip) of the gizmo. Click Relocate Gizmo. 2 Click in the drawing area to specify a new location. To change the type of gizmo while moving, rotating, or scaling objects 1 Select the 3D objects that you want to move, rotate, or scale. ■ To modify the entire object, select the object. ■ To modify a subobject (face, edge, or vertex), press Ctrl+click the subobject. (You can limit the selection set by specifying a subobject selection filter on the shortcut menu.) 2 Hover the cursor over an axis handle on the gizmo until it turns yellow and the axis vector displays. Then click the axis handle. 3 Press the Spacebar to cycle through the gizmo types until the correct gizmo is displayed. When you change gizmos this way, the movement remains constrained to the selected axis. Use the Gizmos | 1097 NOTE You cannot use the Spacebar to change the type of gizmo when the 3DMOVE, 3DROTATE, or 3DSCALE command is active. Quick Reference Commands 3DMOVE In a 3D view, displays the 3D Move gizmo to aid in moving 3D objects a specified distance in a specified direction. 3DROTATE In a 3D view, displays the 3D Rotate gizmo to aid in revolving 3D objects around a base point. 3DSCALE In a 3D view, displays the 3D Scale gizmo to aid in resizing 3D objects. System Variables DEFAULTGIZMO Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during subobject selection. GRIPSUBOBJMODE Controls whether grips are automatically made hot when subobjects are selected. GTAUTO Controls whether 3D gizmos are automatically displayed when you select objects before you start a command in a viewport with a 3D visual style. GTDEFAULT Controls whether the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale operation starts automatically when you start the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE command in a viewport with a 3D visual style. GTLOCATION Controls the initial location of the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo when you select objects before you start a command in a viewport with a 3D visual style. 1098 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Move 3D Objects Move a selection set of objects and subobjects freely or constrain the movement to an axis or plane. To move 3D objects and subobjects, click and drag the gizmo anywhere in 3D space. This location (indicated by the center box [or base grip] of the gizmo) sets the base point for the movement and temporarily changes the position of the UCS while you move the selected objects. To move the objects freely, drag outside the gizmo or specify the axis or plane to which you will constrain the movement. Constrain the Movement to an Axis You can use the Move gizmo to constrain the movement to an axis. As the cursor hovers over an axis handle on the gizmo, a vector aligned with the axis is displayed, and the specified axis turns yellow. Click the axis handle. As you drag the cursor, movement of the selected objects and subobjects is constrained to the highlighted axis. You can click or enter a value to specify the distance of the move from the base point. If you enter a value, the movement direction of the object follows the initial direction of the cursor movement. Move 3D Objects | 1099 Constrain the Movement to a Plane You can use the Move gizmo to constrain the movement to a plane. Each plane is identified by a rectangle that extends from the respective axis handles. You can specify the plane of movement by moving the cursor over the rectangle. When the rectangle turns yellow, click it. As you drag the cursor, the selected objects and subobjects move only along the highlighted plane. Click or enter a value to specify the distance of the move from the base point. 1100 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models To move objects in 3D space along a specified axis 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move Gizmo. 2 Select the objects and subobjects you want to move using the following methods: ■ Press and hold Ctrl to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices). ■ Release Ctrl to select entire objects. NOTE If a subobject filter is active, you do not need to press Ctrl to select a subobject. To select the entire object, turn off the filter. 3 When you have selected all objects, press Enter. The Move gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected objects. 4 Move the cursor over an axis handle on the gizmo until it turns yellow and the vector is displayed. Then click the axis handle. 5 Click another location or enter a value to specify the distance of the move. To move objects in 3D space constrained to a specified plane 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move Gizmo. 2 Select the objects and subobjects you want to move using the following methods: ■ Press and hold Ctrl to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices). ■ Release Ctrl to select entire objects. NOTE If a subobject filter is active, you do not need to press Ctrl to select a subobject. To select the entire object, turn off the filter. 3 When you have selected all objects, press Enter. The Move gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected objects. 4 Move the cursor over the planar rectangle that intersects the axis handles that define the plane of constraint. When the rectangle turns yellow, click it. Move 3D Objects | 1101 5 Click a different location or enter a value to specify the distance of the move. Quick Reference Commands 3DMOVE In a 3D view, displays the 3D Move gizmo to aid in moving 3D objects a specified distance in a specified direction. System Variables DEFAULTGIZMO Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during subobject selection. Rotate 3D Objects Constrain the rotation of 3D objects and subobjects to an axis. After you select the objects and subobjects that you want to rotate, the gizmo is located at the center of the selection set. This location is indicated by the center box (or base grip) of the gizmo. It sets the base point for the movement and temporarily changes the position of the UCS while you rotate the selected objects. You then rotate the objects freely by dragging outside the gizmo. You can also specify an axis about which to constrain the rotation. If you want to realign the center of rotation, you can relocate the gizmo by using the Relocate Gizmo option on the shortcut menu. 1102 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Constrain the Rotation to an Axis You can constrain the rotation to a specified axis. As you move the cursor over the rotation paths on the 3D rotate gizmo, a vector line representing the axis of rotation is displayed. Specify an axis of rotation by clicking the rotation path when it turns yellow. When you drag the cursor, the selected objects and subobjects rotate about the base point along the specified axis. The gizmo displays the degree of rotation from the original position of the object as the object moves. You can click or enter a value to specify the angle of the rotation. To rotate objects in 3D space along a specified axis 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rotate Gizmo. 2 Select the objects and subobjects you want to rotate using the following methods: ■ Press and hold Ctrl to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices). ■ Release Ctrl to select entire objects. 3 When you have selected all objects, press Enter. The rotate gizmo is displayed attached to the cursor. 4 Click to place the rotate gizmo, specifying the base point for the move. Rotate 3D Objects | 1103 5 Hover the cursor over an axis path on the gizmo until it turns yellow and the vector that represents the axis of rotation is displayed. Click the path. 6 Click or enter a value to specify the angle of the rotation. Quick Reference Commands 3DROTATE In a 3D view, displays the 3D Rotate gizmo to aid in revolving 3D objects around a base point. System Variables DEFAULTGIZMO Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during subobject selection. Scale 3D Objects Change the size of 3D objects uniformly or along a specified axis or plane. After you select the objects and subobjects to scale, constrain the object scaling by clicking the gizmo axis, plane, or the portion of the gizmo between all three axes. NOTE Non-uniform scaling (along an axis or a plane) is only available for meshes, it is not available for solids and surfaces. Scale a 3D Object Along an Axis Constrain mesh object scaling to a specified axis. As you move the cursor over the axes on the 3D Scale gizmo, a vector line representing the axis of scale is displayed. Specify an axis of scale by clicking the axis when it turns yellow. 1104 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models When you drag the cursor, the selected objects and subobjects are resized along the specified axis. Click or enter a value to specify the scale from the selected base point. Scale a 3D Object Along a Plane Constrain the mesh object scaling to a specified plane. Each plane is identified by a bar that extends from the outer ends of the respective axis handles. Specify the plane of scale by moving the cursor over one of the bars. When the bar turns yellow, click it. Scale 3D Objects | 1105 As you drag the cursor, the selected objects and subobjects are scaled only along the highlighted plane. Click or enter a value to specify the scale from the selected base point. Scale a 3D Object Uniformly Scale solid, surface, and mesh objects uniformly along all axes. As you move the cursor toward the center point of the gizmo, a highlighted triangular area indicates that you can click to scale the selected objects and subobjects along all three axes. 1106 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models As you drag the cursor, the selected objects and subobjects are scaled uniformly. Click or enter a value to specify the scale from the selected base point. To scale a 3D object along a specified axis 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify ➤ Scale Gizmo. 2 Select the objects and subobjects you want to scale using the following methods: ■ Press and hold Ctrl to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices). ■ Release Ctrl to select entire objects. 3 When you have selected all objects, press Enter. The Scale gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected object or objects. 4 Specify a base point for the scale. 5 Hover the cursor over one of the axes of the gizmo until it turns yellow. Click the yellow axis. 6 Click or enter a value to specify the scale of the selected object. To scale a 3D object along a specified plane 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify ➤ Scale Gizmo. Scale 3D Objects | 1107 2 Select the objects and subobjects you want to scale using the following methods: ■ Press and hold Ctrl to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices). ■ Release Ctrl to select entire objects. 3 When you have selected all objects, press Enter. The Scale gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected object or objects. 4 Specify a base point for the scale. 5 Hover the cursor over one of the bars found between each of the axes of the gizmo until it turns yellow. Click the yellow bar. 6 Click or enter a value to specify the scale of the selected object. To scale a 3D object uniformly 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify ➤ Scale Gizmo. 2 Select the objects and subobjects you want to scale using the following methods: ■ Press and hold Ctrl to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices). ■ Release Ctrl to select entire objects. 3 When you have selected all objects, press Enter. The Scale gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected object or objects. 4 Specify a base point for the scale. 5 Hover the cursor over the triangular area closest to the center point of the gizmo until it turns yellow. Click the yellow area. 6 Click or enter a value to specify the scale of the selected object. Quick Reference Commands 3DSCALE In a 3D view, displays the 3D Scale gizmo to aid in resizing 3D objects. 1108 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models System Variables DEFAULTGIZMO Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during subobject selection. Use Grips to Modify Solids and Surfaces Use grips to change the shape and size of solids and surfaces. Use 3D Subobject Grips Select faces, edges, and vertices on 3D objects. A subobject is a face, edge or vertex of a solid, surface, or mesh object. Select Subobjects To select a face, edge, or vertex of a 3D object, press Ctrl as you select the object. (If you have set a subobject filter, you do not need to press Ctrl first.) Selected subobjects display different types of grips, depending on the subobject type. You can select one or more subobjects on any number of 3D objects. The selection set can include more than one type of subobject. Press Ctrl to select subobjects at the selection prompts of the MOVE, ROTATE, SCALE, and ERASE commands. Use Grips to Modify Solids and Surfaces | 1109 You can remove an item from the selection set by pressing the Shift key and selecting it again. Select Subobjects on Composite 3D Solids Press and hold Ctrl to select faces, edges, and vertices on composite solids. If the History property of the composite solid is set to Record, the first “pick” might select the history subobject. (The history subobject is the portion of the original object that was removed during the union, subtract, or intersect operation.) Continue to hold down Ctrl and pick again to select a face, edge, or vertex on the original form. If you set a subobject selection filter on page 1112, you can select the face, edge, or vertex by clicking it once. To select one or more faces, edges, or vertices on a 3D object 1 Press Ctrl+click a face, edge, or vertex. NOTE If a subobject selection filter is active, you do not need to press Ctrl before clicking a face, edge, or vertex. 2 Repeat step 1 until all subobjects are selected. To remove a subobject from a selection set ■ Press and hold Ctrl+Shift. Click a selected face, edge, or vertex. The grip, if displayed, changes from red to blue. 1110 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models NOTE If a subobject selection filter is active, you do not need to press Ctrl before clicking a face, edge, or vertex. To select a face, edge, or vertex on the history form of a composite solid 1 Click Home tab ➤ Subobject panel ➤ Edge, Vertex, or Face. 2 On the history form, click a face, edge, or vertex. NOTE If the Show History property for the history subobject is not turned on, you can display the history by pressing Ctrl as you move the cursor over the object. Quick Reference Commands DSETTINGS Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes, Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties. ERASE Removes objects from a drawing. MOVE Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction. ROTATE Rotates objects around a base point. SCALE Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the same after scaling. SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set. SOLIDEDIT Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects. Use 3D Subobject Grips | 1111 System Variables GRIPHOVER Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it. GRIPOBJLIMIT Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. GRIPSUBOBJMODE Controls whether grips are automatically made hot when subobjects are selected. LEGACYCTRLPICK Specifies the keys for selection cycling and the behavior for Ctrl+click. SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects Filter and select faces, edges, and vertices on 3D objects. A subobject is a face, edge or vertex of a solid, surface, or mesh object. Cycle Through Multiple Subobjects In 3D views, some objects or subobjects might be hidden behind others. You can press Ctrl+Spacebar to cycle through the hidden subobjects until the object you want to select is highlighted. For example, when you select faces on a box, the face in the foreground is detected first. To select a hidden face, press the Spacebar (with Ctrl still pressed). Release the Spacebar and click to select the face. 1112 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models For best results, make sure that Selection Cycling is turned on in the Selection Cycling Tab (Draft Settings Dialog Box). Or cycle through hidden subobjects by pressing Ctrl+Spacebar as you click until the subobject is selected. Turn on the Subobject Selection Filter Selecting a specific type of subobject can be difficult on complex objects, such as meshes. You can limit the selection to a face, edge, vertex, or history subobject by setting a subobject selection filter. When a subobject selection filter is on, you do not need to press Ctrl to select the face, edge, or vertex of a 3D model. To select the entire object, however, you need to turn off the filter. Stored in the SUBOBJSELECTIONMODEsystem variable, this filter can be changed from the shortcut menu or the ribbon. When a subobject filter is turned on, the following icons are displayed near the cursor: Vertex filtering is on Shift + F2 Edge filtering is on Shift + F3 Face filtering is on Shift + F4 History subobject filtering is on Shift + F5 Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects | 1113 Subobject filtering is off Shift + F1 To cycle through and select subobjects that are overlapping 1 Press and hold Ctrl as you press the Spacebar to cycle through the subobjects that are both visible and hidden. 2 If the subobject that you want to select is not highlighted during the cycle, move the cursor and repeat. 3 When the subobject is highlighted, release the Spacebar and click. The subobject is selected. To limit selection to a specific type of subobject 1 Click Home tab ➤ Subobject panel ➤ No Filter, Edge, Vertex, Face, or Solid History. 2 Click a 3D solid or mesh subobject. Only the subobject type that you specified can be selected. Quick Reference Commands ERASE Removes objects from a drawing. MOVE Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction. ROTATE Rotates objects around a base point. SCALE Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the same after scaling. SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set. 1114 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models SOLIDEDIT Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects. System Variables GRIPHOVER Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it. GRIPOBJLIMIT Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. GRIPSUBOBJMODE Controls whether grips are automatically made hot when subobjects are selected. LEGACYCTRLPICK Specifies the keys for selection cycling and the behavior for Ctrl+click. SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces Use grips to change the size and shape of some individual solids and surfaces. The method you use to manipulate the 3D solid or surface depends on the type of object and the method used to create it. NOTE For mesh objects, only the center grip is displayed. However you can edit mesh objects with the 3D Move, Rotate, or Scale gizmos. Primitive Solid Forms and Polysolids You can drag grips to change the shape and size of primitive solids and polysolids. For example, you can change the height and base radius of a cone Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces | 1115 without losing the overall cone shape. Drag the top radius grips to transform the cone to a flat-topped, frustum cone. Extruded Solids and Surfaces You can convert 2D objects to solids and surfaces with the EXTRUDE command. When selected, extruded solids and surfaces display grips on their profiles. A profile is the original outline that defines the shape of the extruded solid or surface. Drag profile grips to modify the overall shape of the object. If the extrusion was created along a sweep path, the path can be manipulated with grips. If a path was not used, you can modify the height of the object using a grip at the top of the extruded solid or surface. Swept Solids and Surfaces Swept solids and surfaces display grips on the swept profile as well as on the sweep path. You can drag these grips to modify the solid or surface. When you click and drag a grip on the profile, the changes are constrained to the plane of the profile curve. 1116 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Lofted Solids and Surfaces Depending on how a lofted solid or surface was created, the solid or surface displays grips on the following, defining lines or curves: ■ Cross section ■ Path Drag grips on any of the defining lines or curves to modify the shape. If the lofted object contains a path, you can only edit the portion of the path that is between the first and last cross sections. You cannot use grips to modify lofted solids or surfaces that are created with guide curves. Revolved Solids and Surfaces Revolved solids and surfaces display grips on the revolved profile at the start of the revolved solid or surface. You can use these grips to modify the profile of the solid of surface. A grip is also displayed at the axis of revolution endpoint. You can relocate the axis of revolution by dragging the grip to another location. Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces | 1117 See also: ■ Create Solids on page 983 ■ Create a Solid Cone on page 990 To relocate the axis of revolution for a revolved solid or surface 1 In a drawing, select a revolved solid or surface. 2 Select the grip on the axis of revolution. 3 Click in another location to relocate the axis of revolution. Quick Reference Commands EXTRUDE Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object. SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set. System Variables GRIPHOVER Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it. GRIPOBJLIMIT Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. GRIPSUBOBJMODE Controls whether grips are automatically made hot when subobjects are selected. 1118 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Modify 3D Subobjects Modify the shape of a 3D solid or surface by editing its subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices). Move, Rotate, and Scale 3D Subobjects Move, rotate, and scale individual subobjects on 3D solids and surfaces. Use the same methods to modify a face, edge, or vertex that you use to modify the entire object: ■ Drag grips ■ Use gizmos (3DMOVE, 3DROTATE, and 3DSCALE) ■ Enter object editing commands (MOVE, ROTATE, and SCALE) When you move, rotate, or scale a subobject, the subobject is modified in a way that maintains the integrity of the 3D solid or surface. For example, when you drag an edge to move it, the adjacent faces are adjusted so that they remain adjacent to the edge. Several results are possible when you modify a solid or surface. When you move, rotate, or scale subobjects, you can press Ctrl one or more times as you drag to cycle through modification options. The following illustration shows the modification options for moving a face. Modify 3D Subobjects | 1119 Move, Rotate, and Scale Subobjects on Composite Solids When you modify composite solids, the effect of the edits depends on the current setting of the History property. ■ To modify subobjects of each history component separately, the History property must be set to Record. ■ To modify subobjects of the combined composite solid as a whole, the History property must be set to None. Rules and Limitations When Moving, Rotating, and Scaling Subobjects You can only move, rotate, and scale subobjects on 3D solids if the operation maintains the integrity of the solid. The following rules and limitations apply to moving, rotating, and scaling subobjects: ■ When you use grips to modify subobjects, grips are not displayed on the subobjects that cannot be moved, rotated, or scaled. ■ In most cases, you can move, rotate, and scale both planar and non-planar faces. ■ You can only modify an edge that is a straight line and that has at least one planar adjacent face. The planes of the adjacent planar faces are adjusted to contain the modified edge. ■ You cannot move, rotate, or scale edges (or their vertices) that are imprinted inside faces. ■ You can only modify a vertex if it has at least one planar adjacent face. The planes of the adjacent planar faces are adjusted to contain the modified vertex. ■ When you drag a subobject, the final result might be different than the preview displayed during the modification. This result occurs when the solid geometry is adjusted in order to maintain its topology. In some cases, 1120 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models the modification is not possible because it changes the topology of the solid too severely. ■ If the modification causes spline surfaces to be extended, the operation is often unsuccessful. ■ You cannot move, rotate, or scale non-manifold edges (edges that are shared by more than two faces) or non-manifold vertices. Also, if some non-manifold edges or vertices are present near faces, edges, and vertices that you modify, the operation might not be possible. See also: ■ Modify Mesh Objects on page 1167 Quick Reference Commands 3DMOVE In a 3D view, displays the 3D Move gizmo to aid in moving 3D objects a specified distance in a specified direction. 3DROTATE In a 3D view, displays the 3D Rotate gizmo to aid in revolving 3D objects around a base point. 3DSCALE In a 3D view, displays the 3D Scale gizmo to aid in resizing 3D objects. MOVE Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction. ROTATE Rotates objects around a base point. SCALE Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the same after scaling. Move, Rotate, and Scale 3D Subobjects | 1121 Modify Faces on 3D Objects Modify individual faces on 3D objects using a variety of methods. Move, Rotate, and Scale Faces on 3D Solids and Surfaces Modify the location, rotation, and size of faces on a 3D solids and surfaces. cube with top face moved, rotated, and scaled Use the MOVE, ROTATE, and SCALE commands to modify faces just as you would with any other object. Press Ctrl+click to select a face on a solid. If you move, rotate, or scale a face on a 3D solid primitive, the solid primitive’s history is removed. The solid is no longer a true primitive and cannot be manipulated using grips or the Properties palette. Face Modification Options As you drag a face, press Ctrl to cycle through modification options. 1122 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models ■ Maintain shape of face, modify adjacent faces. When you move or rotate a face without pressing Ctrl, the shape and size of the face is maintained. However, the planes of adjacent faces might change. ■ Modify shape of face, retain edges. When you move or rotate a face and press and release Ctrl once while dragging, the size of the face is modified within the boundary, or footprint, of the adjacent faces. ■ Modify face, triangulate adjacent faces. When you move or rotate a face and press and release Ctrl twice while dragging, the size and shape of the face is maintained. (This behavior is the same as if you had not pressed Ctrl). However, the adjacent planar faces are triangulated (divided into two or more planar triangular faces), if necessary. If you press and release Ctrl a third time, the modification returns to the first option, as if you had not pressed Ctrl. Quick Reference Commands MOVE Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction. ROTATE Rotates objects around a base point. SCALE Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the same after scaling. Copy, Delete, and Color Faces on 3D Solids Copy, remove, or change the color of faces on 3D solid objects. Modify Faces on 3D Objects | 1123 Copy a Face You can duplicate the face of a 3D solid object using the copy option of the SOLIDEDIT command. The selected faces are copied as regions or bodies. Delete a Face If you specify two points, the first point is used as a base point and a single copy is placed relative to the base point. If you specify a single point and press Enter, the original selection point is used as a base point. The next point is the point of displacement. If a face is surrounded by coplanar faces, you can delete it using the following methods: ■ Select the face and press Delete. ■ Select the face and enter erase. ■ Use the Delete option of the SOLIDEDIT command. Color a Faces You can modify the color of a face on a 3D solid by selecting the face and then changing the Color property in the Properties palette. 1124 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models See also: ■ Modify Mesh Faces on page 1181 To copy a face on a solid object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Face Editing drop-down ➤ Copy Faces. 2 Select the face to copy. 3 Select additional faces or press Enter to copy. 4 Specify the base point for the copy. 5 Specify the second point of displacement and press Enter. NOTE Use EXTRUDE to extrude a copied face. To delete a face on a solid object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Face Editing drop-down ➤ Delete Faces. 2 Select the face to delete. (It must be surrounded by faces that share the same plane.) 3 Select additional faces or press Enter to delete. 4 Press Enter to complete the command. To change the color of a face on a solid object 1 Press and hold Ctrl as you click a face on a 3D solid. 2 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, under General, click the Color arrow and select a color from the list For additional color options, click Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box. Specify a color and click OK. Modify Faces on 3D Objects | 1125 Quick Reference Commands PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. SOLIDEDIT Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects. Modify Edges on 3D Objects You can select and modify edges on a 3D solid or surface. Move, Rotate, and Scale Edges Move, rotate, and scale the edges on 3D solids and surfaces using grips, gizmos, and commands. cubes with edges moved, rotated, and scaled You can use MOVE, ROTATE, and SCALE to modify edges on 3D solids and surfaces just as you can for any other object. Press and hold Ctrl to select the edge. If you move, rotate, or scale an edge on a 3D solid primitive, the history of the solid primitive is removed. The solid is no longer a true primitive and cannot be manipulated using grips and the Properties palette. Edges on regions can be selected, but do not display grips. These edges can also be moved, rotated, and scaled. 1126 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Edge Modification Options As you drag an edge, press Ctrl to cycle through modification options. ■ Maintain length of edge. When you move, rotate, or scale an edge without pressing Ctrl, the shared length of the edge and its vertices is maintained. However, the planes of the adjacent faces adjacent might be changed. ■ Change the length of the edge. When you move, rotate, or scale an edge and press and release Ctrl once while dragging, the edge is modified without its vertices. The surfaces of the adjacent faces are maintained, but the length of the modified edge might change. ■ Triangulate adjacent faces. When you move, rotate, or scale an edge and press and release Ctrl twice while dragging, the edge and its vertices are modified. (This behavior is the same as if you had not pressed Ctrl). However, if the adjacent faces are no longer planar, they are triangulated (divided into two or more planar triangular faces). If you press and release Ctrl a third time, the modification returns to the first option, as if you had not pressed Ctrl. Delete Edges You can also delete edges that completely divide two coplanar faces using one of the following methods: ■ Select the edge and press Delete. ■ Select the edge and enter the ERASE command. Modify Edges on 3D Objects | 1127 Fillet and Chamfer 3D Solids Add rounds and bevels to 3D solids using FILLETEDGE and CHAMFEREDGE. Use the fillet and chamfer grips to modify the fillet radius of the chamfer distance. The default radius is set by the FILLETRAD system variable. Color Edges You can modify the color of an edge on a 3D object by selecting the edge and changing the Color property in the Properties palette. Copy Edges You can copy individual edges on a 3D solid object. Edges are copied as lines, arcs, circles, ellipses, or splines. If you specify two points, the first point is used as a base point and a single copy is placed relative to the base point. If you specify a single point, and then press Enter, the original selection point is used as a base point. The next point is used as a point of displacement. See also: ■ Move, Rotate, and Scale 3D Subobjects on page 1119 ■ Use Gizmos to Modify Objects on page 1093 1128 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models ■ Modify Objects on page 727 ■ Move or Rotate Objects on page 742 ■ Resize or Reshape Objects on page 769 ■ Overview of Modifying Meshes on page 1168 To fillet a solid object 1 Click Solid tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ fill Edge. 2 Select the edge of the solid to fillet. 3 Specify the fillet radius. 4 Select additional edges or press Enter to fillet. To chamfer a 3D solid object 1 Click Solid tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Chamfer Edge. 2 Select the edge of the base surface to chamfer. One of two surfaces adjacent to the selected edge is highlighted. 3 Do one of the following: ■ To select a different surface, enter n (Next). ■ To use the current surface, press Enter. 4 Specify the base surface distance. The base surface distance is measured from the selected edge to a point on the base surface. The other surface distance is measured from the selected edge to a point on the adjacent surface. 5 Specify the location of the chamfer using one of the following options. ■ To specify an individual edge, select the edge. ■ To select all edges around the base surface, enter l (Loop). Specify an edge. 6 To complete the chamfer, press Enter. Modify Edges on 3D Objects | 1129 To modify a fillet or chamfer on a 3D solid 1 Press and hold Ctrl as you select a fillet or chamfer on a 3D solid. 2 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, modify the properties of the fillet or chamfer. To change the color of an edge on a solid object 1 Press and hold Ctrl as you click an edge on a 3D solid. 2 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, under General, click the Color arrow and select a color from the list For additional color options, click Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box. Specify a color and click OK. To copy an edge on a solid object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Edge Editing drop-down ➤ Copy Edges. 2 Press Ctrl+click the edge of the face to copy. 3 Select additional edges, if needed, and press Enter. 4 Specify the base point of the copied edges. 5 Specify the second point of displacement to indicate the location of the copied edges. 6 Press Enter to complete the command. Quick Reference Commands EDGE Changes the visibility of 3D face edges. CHAMFER Bevels the edges of objects. 1130 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models FILLET Rounds and fillets the edges of objects. MOVE Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. ROTATE Rotates objects around a base point. SCALE Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the same after scaling. SOLIDEDIT Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects. System Variables FILLETRAD3D Stores the current fillet radius for 3D objects. Modify Vertices on 3D Objects Move, rotate, scale, or drag the vertices of 3D solids and surfaces. wedge with two vertices moved Modify Vertices on 3D Objects | 1131 You can modify the form of a 3D solid or surface by modifying one or more vertices. Use grips and gizmos, or run the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE command. When you scale or rotate vertices, you must select two or more vertices to see a change in the object. Clicking and dragging a vertex “stretches” the 3D object. If you move, rotate, or scale one or more vertices on a 3D solid primitive, the solid primitive history is removed. The solid is no longer a true primitive and cannot be modified using grips and the Properties palette. Vertex Modification Options As you drag a vertex, press Ctrl to cycle through modification options. ■ Triangulate adjacent faces. When you move, rotate, or scale a vertex without pressing Ctrl, some adjacent planar faces may be triangulated (divided into two or more planar triangular faces). ■ Modify some adjacent faces without triangulation. When you move, rotate, or scale a vertex and press and release Ctrl once, some adjacent planar faces might be adjusted. If you press and release Ctrl a second time, the modification returns to the first option, as if you had not pressed Ctrl. Delete a Vertex You can delete a vertex that connects two parallel edges that are collinear and do not intersect on any other edges. See also: ■ Move, Rotate, and Scale 3D Subobjects on page 1119 1132 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models ■ Use Gizmos to Modify Objects on page 1093 ■ Modify Objects on page 727 ■ Overview of Modifying Meshes on page 1168 To move a vertex on a 3D object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Subobject panel ➤ Vertex. 2 Click a vertex on a 3D object. 3 Drag the vertex to the required location. To delete a vertex on a 3D object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Subobject panel ➤ Vertex. 2 Click a vertex that connects collinear edges are parallel and do not lie on any other edges. 3 Press Delete. Quick Reference Commands MOVE Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction. ROTATE Rotates objects around a base point. SCALE Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the same after scaling. SOLIDEDIT Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects. Modify Vertices on 3D Objects | 1133 Work with Complex 3D Solids and Surfaces Modify composite solids that are created by a union, subtract, intersect, fillet, or chamfer process. Display Original Forms of Composite Solids By default, 3D composite objects retain a history that displays an editable image of their original component forms. Retain the History of the Composite Components After you create a composite object, you can modify the shape of the new object by modifying a highlighted wireframe image of its original components. If the Show History property is Yes, wireframes of the original forms—including forms that have been removed—are displayed in a dimmed state. (The SHOWHIST system variable also controls this setting.) To retain a history of the original parts of composite solids, the History property must be set to Record (Properties Palette) when the composite operation occurs. (You can also use the SOLIDHIST system variable to set this property.) Display and Remove the History to Modify the Composite When you modify the composite object, you can display the history. Then use the grips on the history subobject to modify the object. For more information about using grips with composite solids, see Modify Composite Solids and Surfaces on page 1136. You can remove the history of a selected composite object by changing its History setting to None, or by entering the BREP command. After a history has been removed, you can no longer select and modify the original, removed, components of the solid. You can restart history retention for the solid by changing its History setting back to Record. 1134 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Removing a composite history is useful when you work with complex composite solids. After you create the initial complex form, set History to None to remove the history. Then reset the value to Record. With this process, you can create a complex composite object, and then reset it to serve as a base form for additional composite operations. To display the original components of a composite solid 1 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties. 2 In a drawing, select a 3D composite solid. 3 On the Properties palette, Solid History area, under Show History, select Yes. To remove the history of a solid object 1 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties. 2 In a drawing, select a 3D solid. 3 On the Properties palette, Solid History area, under History, select None. To set a 3D solid to record a history of its original forms 1 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties. 2 In a drawing, select a solid. 3 On the Properties palette, Solid History area, under History, select Record. Display Original Forms of Composite Solids | 1135 Quick Reference Commands BREP Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces. System Variables SHOWHIST Controls the Show History property for solids in a drawing. SOLIDHIST Controls the default history property setting for solid objects. Modify Composite Solids and Surfaces Modify the entire form of a composite 3D object or the original forms that make up the composite. You can move, scale, or rotate a selected composite object using grips or gizmos. Modify Original Components of Composites When the History property is set to Record, press the Ctrl key to display any original forms that were removed during a union, subtract, or intersect operation. If the original, removed form was a solid primitive, you can drag the displayed grips to change its shape and size. As a result, the composite object is modified. If the selected individual form does not contain its history, you can move, rotate, scale, or delete the form. 1136 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Modify Complex Composites A composite object might be made up of other composite objects. You can select the history images of composite objects by holding down the Ctrl key as you click the forms. (For best results, set the subobject selection filter to Solid History.) You can also change the size and shape of composite objects by clicking and dragging grips on individual faces, edges, and vertices. For more information, see Modify 3D Subobjects on page 1119. Separate Discrete Objects Combined with a Union If you have combined discrete 3D solids or surfaces using a union operation, you can separate them into their original components. (Use the Separate option of the SOLIDEDIT command.) To be separated, the composite objects cannot overlap or share a common area or volume. After separation, the individual solids retain their original layers and colors. All nested 3D solid objects are restored to their simplest forms. See also: ■ Edit Objects with Grips on page 729 ■ Overview of Modifying Meshes on page 1168 To select an individual solid that is part of a composite solid ■ Press Ctrl + click an individual solid that is part of a composite solid. To separate a 3D solid composite into individual solids 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Solid Editing drop-down ➤ Separate. 2 Select the 3D solid object. Modify Composite Solids and Surfaces | 1137 NOTE This operation only applies to non-intersecting objects that have been combined by union. 3 Press Enter to complete the command. Quick Reference Commands SOLIDEDIT Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects. System Variables LEGACYCTRLPICK Specifies the keys for selection cycling and the behavior for Ctrl+click. Shell and Remove Redundancies in 3D Objects Convert 3D solids to shells and remove redundant lines and edges. Shell 3D Solids Convert a 3D solid to a hollow wall, or shell. When you can convert a solid object to a shell, new faces are created by offsetting existing faces inside or outside their original positions. Continuously tangent faces are treated as a single face when they are offset. To create a 3D solid shell 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Solid Editing drop-down ➤ Shell. 1138 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models 2 Select the 3D solid object. 3 Select one or more faces to be excluded from shelling. 4 Press Enter. 5 Specify the shell offset value. A positive offset value creates a shell wall in a positive direction from the face. A negative value creates a shell wall in a negative direction from the face. 6 Press Enter to complete the command. Quick Reference Commands SOLIDEDIT Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects. Clean and Check 3D Solids Remove redundant faces, edges, and vertices from a 3D solid, and verify whether the 3D solid is valid. You can remove redundant edges or vertices that share the same surface or vertex definition. This operation merges adjacent faces and deletes all redundant edges, including imprinted and unused edges. True 3D solid objects have editable properties, volume, and mass that are not shared by objects created with thickness or closed surfaces. You can check whether an object is a valid 3D solid by verifying whether it is listed as “3D Solid” on the Properties palette. You can also use SOLIDEDIT to verify whether a solid object is a valid 3D solid object. Shell and Remove Redundancies in 3D Objects | 1139 To remove redundant lines from a 3D solid object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Solid Editing flyout ➤ Clean. 2 Select the 3D solid object. 3 Press Enter to complete the command. To validate a 3D solid object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Solid Editing flyout ➤ Check. 2 Select the 3D solid object. 3 Press Enter to complete the command. If the object is a valid 3D object, a message is displayed at the Command prompt. If it is not valid, you continue to be prompted to select a 3D solid. Quick Reference Commands SOLIDEDIT Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects. System Variables SOLIDCHECK Turns 3D solid validation on and off for the current session. Press or Pull Bounded Areas Create a positive or negative extrusion in the shape of a bounded area. 1140 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Press in or pull out bounded, or closed, areas to create 3D holes and positive extrusions. object formed using press and pull operations on an imprinted pyramid In combination with imprinted faces, you can form complex shapes using press or pull operations to create extrusions and notches. Methods for Press and Pull Modifications With the PRESSPULL command, you specify the area to be extruded, and then move the cursor or enter a value to specify the length of the extrusion. The result is a single 3D solid object, often with a composite shape. You can also press Ctrl+Shift+E to initiate a press or pull operation. To limit the type of objects that can act as boundaries, turn off the IMPLIEDFACE system variable. When the variable is off, only 3D faces and 3D solid faces can be extruded using Ctrl+Shift+E. (This variable does not affect the PRESSPULL command.) NOTE If you alternatively use EXTRUDE to extend an existing face on a 3D solid, a separate extruded object is created. Types of Objects That Can Be Pressed or Pulled You can press or pull several types of bounded areas, including closed objects, areas enclosed by coplanar geometry, the faces of 3D solids, and an imprinted area on the face of a 3D solid. For a complete list of objects that are eligible for a press or pull extrusion, see PRESSPULL. Press or Pull Bounded Areas | 1141 You cannot taper the pressed or pulled shape as you create it. However, you can achieve the same effect later by modifying the edges of the bounded area. To press or pull a bounded area 1 Press and hold Ctrl+Shift+E. 2 Click any area bounded by coplanar lines or edges. 3 Drag the mouse to press or pull the bounded area. 4 Click two points or enter a value to specify the height or depth of the extrusion. Quick Reference Commands EXTRUDE Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object. PRESSPULL Presses or pulls bounded areas. System Variables IMPLIEDFACE Controls the detection of implied faces. Add Edges and Faces to Solids Add editable faces to 3D solids and surfaces by imprinting other objects, such as arcs and circles. With the IMPRINT command, you can add a new face to a 3D solid by imprinting a coplanar object that overlaps the selected face. Imprinting provides additional edges that you can modify to reshape the solid object. For example, if a circle overlaps the face of a box, you can imprint the intersecting curves on the solid. 1142 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models You can delete or retain the original object as you imprint it. Objects that can be imprinted on 3D solids include arcs, circles, lines, 2D and 3D polylines, ellipses, splines, regions, bodies, and other 3D solids. Edit Imprinted Objects You can edit imprinted objects and subobjects in many of the same ways that you can edit other faces. For example, you can Ctrl+click to select a new edge and then drag to change its location. The following limitations exist for imprinted objects: ■ You can move the edges of the imprinted face only within the plane of a face. ■ You might be unable to move, rotate, or scale some subobjects. ■ Imprinted edges and faces might be lost when some subobjects are moved, rotated, or scaled. Subobjects with editing limitations include ■ Faces with imprinted edges or faces ■ Edges or vertices with adjacent faces that contain imprinted edges or faces To imprint a 3D solid object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Edge Editing drop-down ➤ Imprint. 2 Select the 3D solid object. 3 Select a co-planar object that you want to imprint. 4 Press Enter to retain the original objects, or enter y to delete them. 5 Select additional objects to imprint or press Enter. Add Edges and Faces to Solids | 1143 6 Press Enter to complete the command. Quick Reference Commands IMPRINT Imprints 2D geometry on a 3D solid or surface, creating additional edges on planar faces. Modify Properties of 3D Solid, Surface, and Mesh Modify 3D objects by changing their settings in the Properties palette. 3D objects, solids, surfaces, and mesh, and their subobjects can be modified in the properties palette. Modify Solid Objects by Changing Properties By changing settings in the Properties palette, you can modify basic size, height, and shape characteristics of primitive solids. For example, to change a four-sided pyramid that ends in a point to an eight-sided pyramid that ends in a planar surface (pyramid frustum), update the Top Radius and Sides properties. Set Whether to Retain Compound Object History With 3D solids that have been recombined to form compound objects, you can choose to retain the history subobject, which represents components that have been removed. The Properties palette controls the availability and display of these histories. See Work with Complex 3D Solids and Surfaces on page 1134. 1144 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Modify Surface Objects by Changing Properties Surface objects have additional properties that are not found in 3D solid or mesh objects. The properties differ depending on the type of surface (NURBS, blend, patch, network, offset, fillet, chamfer, extend, loft, extrude, sweep, planar, or revolve). Surface’s include the following information in the Properties palette: ■ Basic geometric information - Contains information such as radius for fillet surfaces, offset distance for offset surfaces, and taper angle for extruded surfaces. You can also enter mathematical expressions to control some of these properties. ■ Trimmed Edges/Surface - Tells you if the surface has any trimmed areas and on which edges. ■ Maintain Associativity - Displays whether surface is associative or not. Use this property to turn associativity off. ■ Show Associativity - Turns dependency highlighting on and off if the surface is associated with other surfaces. ■ Edge Continuity and Bulge Magnitude - Displays for surfaces that join other surfaces. ■ Wireframe Display and U/V Isolines - Turns the wireframe and U/V Isoline display on and off (for non-NURBS surfaces). ■ CV Hull Display and U/V Isoparms - Turns the CV Hull and U/V Isoparm display on and off (for NURBS surfaces). Modify Properties of 3D Solid, Surface, and Mesh | 1145 Modify Mesh Objects by Changing Properties Mesh objects have additional properties that control the level of smoothness and creases. Crease properties of face, edge, and vertex subobjects are also reflected in the Properties palette. ■ Level of Smoothness. Smooths or sharpens the edges of a mesh object. ■ Crease Type. Specifies the presence of a crease (or sharpened edge) and the effect of smoothing. Smoothing does not affect a crease with a value of Always. A crease set to By Level retains its sharpness until the mesh object is smoothed to the specified crease level. ■ Crease Level. When a crease is set to By Level, indicates the smoothing level at which the crease starts to lose its sharpness. 1146 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Modify 3D Subobject Properties In addition to solids, surfaces, and meshes, you can also use the properties palette to modify the properties of individual subobjects, such as faces, edges, and vertices. Different properties are available for different types of subobjects. In some cases, the application of properties can differ depending on the object type. For example, you can modify the properties of mesh faces, including their color. However, the color appearance of a mesh face might differ from the equivalent color on a 3D solid face. This difference occurs because changing the color of a face modifies the diffuse color of the face, but not the ambient color (which is derived from the mesh material property). To obtain a closer match between the color of 3D solid and mesh faces, you can add lights and turn off the default lighting (which disables ambient lighting). You can also try assigning a material that has the same ambient and diffuse color. For more information see Create Materials. To modify the contour of a lofted solid or surface by changing the surface normal settings (Properties palette) 1 In a drawing, select a lofted solid or surface that was created with cross sections. 2 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties. 3 On the Properties palette, Geometry area, change the Surface Normals setting. (For a description, see Modify Loft Settings.) To modify a mesh object in the Properties palette 1 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties. Modify Properties of 3D Solid, Surface, and Mesh | 1147 2 Click the mesh object to select it. 3 In the Properties palette, modify the properties you want to change. To modify a mesh face, edge, or vertex in the Properties palette 1 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties. 2 Press Ctrl+click the mesh face, edge, or vertex that you want to modify. NOTE If you cannot select a specific subobject, verify whether subobject selection filtering is turned on for a different subobject type. (Right-click in the drawing area and click Subobject Selection Filter.) 3 In the Properties palette, modify the properties you want to change. Quick Reference Commands PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables FILLETRAD Stores the current fillet radius for 2D objects. FILLETRAD3D Stores the current fillet radius for 3D objects. LOFTANG1 Sets the draft angle through the first cross section in a loft operation. LOFTANG2 Sets the draft angle through the last cross section in a loft operation. LOFTMAG1 Sets the magnitude of the draft angle through the first cross section in a loft operation. 1148 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models LOFTMAG2 Sets the magnitude of the draft angle through the last cross section in a loft operation. Modify Surfaces Reshape surfaces, and then analyze and rebuild the model if necessary to ensure quality and smoothness. Overview of Modifying Surfaces Fillet, extend, and trim surfaces or modify NURBS surfaces with control vertices. Procedural and NURBS surfaces can be edited with basic editing tools such as trimming, extending and filleting. NURBS surfaces can be modified with these tools as well, but they can also be reshaped by stretching control vertices. When your surface design is complete, use the surface analysis tools to ensure the quality of your model and to rebuild it if necessary. ■ Trim and Untrim Surfaces ■ Extend Surfaces Modify Surfaces | 1149 ■ Fillet Surfaces ■ Edit NURBS Surfaces 1150 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Trim and Untrim Surfaces Trim and untrim surfaces to meet the edges of other objects. An important step in the surface modeling workflow is trimming surfaces. You can trim a surface where it meets an intersecting object or you can project geometry onto a surface as a trimming edge. When a surface is trimmed, the removed surface areas can be replaced with SURFUNTRIM. NOTE SURFUNTRIM does not restore areas removed by the SURFAUTOTRIM system variable and PROJECTGEOMETRY. It only restores areas trimmed with SURFTRIM. The Properties palette indicates if the surface contains any trimmed edges. Projecting Geometry onto Surfaces, Solids, and Regions Similar to projecting a movie onto a screen, you can project geometry onto 3D solids, surfaces, and regions from different directions to create trimming edges. The PROJECTGEOMETRY command creates a duplicate curve on the object that you can move and edit. You can also trim against 2D curves that do not actually touch the surface, but that appear to intersect the object in the current view. Use the SURFACEAUTOTRIM system variable to automatically trim a surface when you project geometry onto it. Trim and Untrim Surfaces | 1151 Options for Projecting Geometry Project geometry from 3 different angles: the Z axis of the current UCS, the current view, or a path between two points. ■ Project to UCS - Projects the geometry along the positive or negative Z axis of the current UCS. ■ Project to View - Projects the geometry based on the current view. ■ Project to Two Points - Projects the geometry along a path between two points. To trim a surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Trim. 2 Select the surface and press Enter. 3 Select the cutting curves and press Enter. 4 Select the surface areas to remove and press Enter. The selected areas are removed. To untrim a surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Untrim. 2 Select a visible part of the surface and press Enter. The trimmed areas are replaced. NOTE When you trim a surface multiple times, you may lose some of the original trimming edges. In this case, some untrim actions may not be possible if the trimming edge has been lost. To automatically trim areas to projected curves 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Project Geometry panel ➤ Auto Trim. 2 Click Surface tab ➤ Project Geometry panel ➤ Project to View. 3 Select the curve to project onto the surface and press Enter. 4 Select a surface as the target and press enter. The area is automatically trimmed. 1152 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Quick Reference Commands 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. PROJECTGEOMETRY Projects points, lines, or curves onto a 3D solid or surface from different directions. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. SURFTRIM Trims portions of a surface where it meets another surface or type of geometry. SURFUNTRIM Replaces surface areas removed by the SURFTRIM command. VISUALSTYLES Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. System Variables 3DOSMODE Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps. SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. SURFACEAUTOTRIM Controls whether surfaces are automatically trimmed when you project geometry onto them. Extend a Surface Create a new surface by extending it to meet the edge of another object or by specifying an extension length. Extend a Surface | 1153 There are two types of extend surfaces: merge and append. The merge surface is a continuation of the surface with no seam. The append surface extends the surface by adding a second surface with a seam. Because it creates a seam, append surfaces have continuity and bulge magnitude on page 1016 properties. For both surface types, use the Properties palette to change the length or to derive the length from a mathematical expression. To create a new surface by extending a surface 1 Select a surface. 2 Right-click and select Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, under Geometry, change the desired settings. Quick Reference Commands PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. SURFEXTEND Lengthens a surface by a specified distance. Fillet a Surface Create a new transition surface that fillets an area between two existing surfaces or regions. Create a tangent surface between two surfaces or regions with a constant radius profile. The original surfaces will trim to meet the fillet surface. By default, the fillet surface uses the radius value set in the FILLETRAD3D system variable. Change the radius while you are creating the surface with the radius option or by dragging the fillet grip. Use the Properties palette to change the fillet radius or to derive the radius using a mathematical expression. To create a fillet surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Fillet. 2 Select the first and second surfaces. 1154 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models The fillet surface is created and the originating are surfaces automatically trimmed if necessary. Quick Reference Commands SURFFILLET Creates a filleted surface between two other surfaces. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables FILLETRAD3D Stores the current fillet radius for 3D objects. Edit NURBS Surfaces Change the shape of NURBS surfaces and curves by using the 3D Edit Bar or by editing control vertices. Use the Control Vertices Edit Bar (3DEDITBAR) to drag and reshape surfaces. A second way to edit NURBS surfaces is to drag and edit the control vertices directly. Hold the Shift key down to select multiple control vertices. Edit NURBS Surfaces | 1155 Use CVSHOW to display the control vertices for both NURBS surfaces and curves. Drag the control vertices to reshape the curve or surface; you can also add or delete control vertices in both the U and V directions. The typical surface modeling workflow is to: ■ Create a model that combines 3D solids, surfaces, and mesh objects. ■ Convert the model to procedural surfaces to take advantage of associative modeling. ■ Convert the procedural surfaces to NURBS surfaces with CONVTONURBS to take advantage of NURBS editing. ■ Check for imperfections and wrinkles with the surface analysis tools. ■ If necessary, rebuild the surfaces to restore smoothness with CVREBUILD. Quick Reference Commands 3DEDITBAR Reshapes, scales, and edits the tangency of NURBS surfaces. 1156 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models CONVTONURBS Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces. CVSHOW Displays the control vertices for specified NURBS surfaces or curves. CVADD Adds control vertices to NURBS surfaces and splines. CVHIDE Turns off the display of control vertices for all NURBS surfaces and curves. CVREBUILD Rebuilds the shape of NURBS surfaces and curves. CVREMOVE Removes control vertices from NURBS surfaces and curves. System Variables SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves Reconstruct NURBS surfaces and curves to a specified degree and number of control vertices. Editing a NURBS surface or curve can create discontinuity and wrinkles. Reconstruct the surface or curve by changing the degree and the number of control vertices. Rebuilding also allows you to delete the original geometry, and, for surfaces only, to replace trimmed areas. To rebuild a NURBS surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Control Vertices panel ➤ Rebuild. The Rebuild Surface dialog box displays. 2 Select the desired rebuild options and click OK. Edit NURBS Surfaces | 1157 Quick Reference Commands CONVTONURBS CVSHOW Displays the control vertices for specified NURBS surfaces or curves. CVADD Adds control vertices to NURBS surfaces and splines. CVHIDE Turns off the display of control vertices for all NURBS surfaces and curves. CVREBUILD Rebuilds the shape of NURBS surfaces and curves. CVREMOVE Removes control vertices from NURBS surfaces and curves. Analyze Surfaces Surface analysis tools check the continuity, curvature and draft angles of surfaces. Use the surface analysis tools to validate surfaces and curves before manufacturing. Analysis tools include: ■ Zebra Analysis on page 1162 - Analyzes surface continuity by projecting parallel lines onto the model. 1158 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models ■ Curvature Analysis on page 1165 - Evaluates areas of high and low surface curvature by displaying a color gradient. ■ Draft Analysis on page 1166 - Evaluates whether a model has adequate draft between a part and its mold. Analyze Surfaces | 1159 NOTE Analysis tools only work in the 3D visual styles; they will not work in 2D. Quick Reference Commands ANALYSISCURVATURE Displays a color gradient onto a surface to evaluate different aspects of its curvature. ANALYSISDRAFT Displays a color gradient onto a 3D model to evaluate whether there is adequate space between a part and its mold. ANALYSISOPTIONS Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis. ANALYSISZEBRA Projects stripes onto a 3D model to analyze surface continuity. 1160 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models System Variables VSACURVATUREHIGH Sets the value at which a surface displays as green during curvature analysis (ANALYSISCURVATURE). VSACURVATURELOW Sets the value at which a surface displays as blue during curvature analysis (ANALYSISCURVATURE). VSACURVATURETYPE Controls which type of curvature analysis is used with the (ANALYSISCURVATURE). VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH Sets the value at which a model displays as green during draft analysis (ANALYSISDRAFT). VSADRAFTANGLELOW Sets the value at which a model displays as blue during draft analysis (ANALYSISDRAFT). VSAZEBRACOLOR1 Sets the first color of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). VSAZEBRACOLOR2 Sets the second (contrasting) color of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). VSAZEBRADIRECTION Controls whether zebra stripes display horizontally, vertically, or at an angle during zebra analysis (ANALYSISBRA). VSAZEBRASIZE Controls the width of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). VSAZEBRATYPE Sets the type of zebra display when using zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). Analyze Surfaces | 1161 Analyze Surface Continuity with Zebra Analysis The zebra analysis tool projects stripes onto a surface so that you can inspect the continuity between surfaces. Surface continuity is a measure of how smoothly two surfaces flow into each other. A car hood, for example, can be composed of multiple small surfaces that appear to be one because of the smoothness of the surface continuity. NOTE Analysis tools only work in the 3D visual styles; they will not work in 2D. How to Interpret the Zebra Stripes In the seam where two surfaces meet, the way that the zebra stripes align and curve tells you a lot about the smoothness of the join. ■ G0 Position. The position of the surface edges is collocated; they touch. But the tangency and curvature do not match. The zebra stripes do not line up. ■ G1 Tangency. The position and tangency of surfaces is the same. This indicates G1 (G0 + G1 or position + tangency). The zebra stripes line up, but they veer away from one another at sharp curves. 1162 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models ■ G2 Curvature. The position, tangency, and curvature of the surface edges is the same. This indicates G2 (G0 + G1 + G2 or position + tangency + curvature). The stripes line up, but they do not veer away from each other at sharp curves (because they share the same curvature). This distinction is subtle and a little harder to discern from G1 continuity. To analyze surface continuity 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Zebra. 2 Select a surface and press Enter. The zebra stripes display. To turn off the zebra display 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options. Analyze Surfaces | 1163 2 Click the Clear Zebra Analysis button. The zebra stripes disappear. To change the zebra analysis options 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options. 2 In the Zebra tab of the Analysis Options dialog box, select the desired options and click OK. Quick Reference Commands ANALYSISOPTIONS Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis. ANALYSISZEBRA Projects stripes onto a 3D model to analyze surface continuity. System Variables VSAZEBRACOLOR1 Sets the first color of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). VSAZEBRACOLOR2 Sets the second (contrasting) color of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). VSAZEBRADIRECTION Controls whether zebra stripes display horizontally, vertically, or at an angle during zebra analysis (ANALYSISBRA). VSAZEBRASIZE Controls the width of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). VSAZEBRATYPE Sets the type of zebra display when using zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). 1164 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Analyze the Curvature of a NURBS Surface Displays a color gradient onto surfaces to evaluate areas of high, low and Gaussian curvature. The color gradient allows you to visualize Gaussian, minimum, maximum, and mean U and V surface curvature. Maximum curvature and a positive Gaussian value display as red, and minimum curvature and a negative Gaussian value display as blue. Positive Gaussian curvature means the surface is shaped like a bowl. Negative Gaussian curvature means the surface is shaped like a saddle as shown in this illustration. Mean curvature and a zero Gaussian value means the surface is flat in at least one direction (planes, cylinders, and cones have zero Gaussian curvature). The curvature analysis tool ensures that your model stays within a specified range. You can analyze the following on a point on a surface or curve: NOTE Analysis tools only work in the 3D visual styles; they will not work in 2D. To analyze the curvature of a surface 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Curvature. 2 Select a surface and press Enter. The curvature coloring display. To turn off the curvature color display 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options. 2 Click the Clear Curvature Analysis button. The curvature coloring disappears. To change the curvature analysis options 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options. 2 In the Curvature tab of the Analysis Options dialog box, select the desired options and click OK. Analyze Surfaces | 1165 Quick Reference Commands ANALYSISCURVATURE Displays a color gradient onto a surface to evaluate different aspects of its curvature. ANALYSISOPTIONS Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis. System Variables VSACURVATUREHIGH Sets the value at which a surface displays as green during curvature analysis (ANALYSISCURVATURE). VSACURVATURELOW Sets the value at which a surface displays as blue during curvature analysis (ANALYSISCURVATURE). VSACURVATURETYPE Controls which type of curvature analysis is used with the (ANALYSISCURVATURE). Use the Draft Analysis Tool Evaluates if a model has adequate space between a part and its mold. If you are creating shapes or parts that need to be molded, the draft analysis tool evaluates if their is adequate draft between a part and its mold (based on the pull direction). NOTE Analysis tools only work in the 3D visual styles; they will not work in 2D. To analyze the draft of a model 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Draft. 2 Select a model and press Enter. The draft analysis colors display. 1166 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models To turn off the draft color display 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options. 2 Click the Clear Draft Analysis button. The draft analysis colors disappears. To change the draft analysis options 1 Click Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options. 2 In the Draft Angle tab of the Analysis Options dialog box, select the desired options and click OK. Quick Reference Commands ANALYSISDRAFT Displays a color gradient onto a 3D model to evaluate whether there is adequate space between a part and its mold. ANALYSISOPTIONS Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis. System Variables VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH Sets the value at which a model displays as green during draft analysis (ANALYSISDRAFT). VSADRAFTANGLELOW Sets the value at which a model displays as blue during draft analysis (ANALYSISDRAFT). Modify Mesh Objects Model mesh objects by changing smoothing levels, refining specific areas, or adding creases. Modify Mesh Objects | 1167 Overview of Modifying Meshes Modeling mesh objects differs from modeling 3D solids and surfaces in some important ways. Mesh objects do not have the mass and volume properties of 3D solids. However, they do offer unique capabilities that enable you to design less angular, more rounded models. Mesh objects are easier to mold and reshape than their solid and surface counterparts. NOTE The capabilities described in this section apply only to mesh objects created in AutoCAD 2010 and later. They cannot be used with legacy polyface or polygon mesh. About Mesh Faces Mesh objects are composed of faces and facets. 1168 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Faces are non-overlapping units that—along with their edges and vertices—form the basic editable units of a mesh object. When you move, rotate, and scale individual mesh faces, surrounding faces are stretched and deformed in order to avoid introducing gaps. When gaps occur, you can often close them by smoothing the object or refining individual faces. About Mesh Facets Mesh faces have underlying structures, known as facets. The density of the facet grid corresponds to the smoothness of the mesh. As the smoothness level is increased, the density of the underlying facet grid also increases. When you want to confine detailed mesh editing to a smaller area, you can convert facets to editable faces by using refinement. Unlike faces, facets cannot be individually modified. However, you can make them more visible by modifying the VSLIGHTINGQUALITY system variable. About Mesh Modeling You can work with mesh objects in the following ways: ■ Add smoothness. Increase or decrease smoothness levels to round the overall shape of the model. The underlying density of the mesh facet grid increases as the mesh object smoothness level increases (MESHSMOOTHMORE, MESHSMOOTHLESS). ■ Refine the object to reset the baseline smoothness level. Refine a mesh object to convert the underlying facet grid to editable faces. Refinement Overview of Modifying Meshes | 1169 also resets the lowest level of smoothness that can be applied to the object (MESHREFINE). ■ Refine a face. Restrict the refinement to a specific mesh face. This method avoids resetting the smoothness baseline. ■ Crease an edge. Remove the smoothness from specified edges. You can also remove an existing crease (MESHCREASE). ■ Split or merge faces. Divide an existing face into separate components along a specified path. Merge two or more faces to create a single face (MESHSPLIT, MESHMERGE). ■ Collapse vertices. Alter the mesh model by collapsing the vertices of adjacent faces to a single point (MESHCOLLAPSE. ■ Spin edges. Spin the shared edge of adjacent triangular faces to alter the shapes and orientation of the faces (MESHSPIN). ■ Extrude a face. Extend a specified face by extruding it into 3D space. Unlike 3D solid extrusion, a mesh extrusion does not create a separate object (MESHEXTRUDE). ■ Repair holes. Close a gap between faces by selecting the surrounding edges. Holes in mesh objects can prevent you from converting a mesh object to a solid object (MESHCAP). Use Grip Editing with Mesh Grips, as described in Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces on page 1115, are not available with meshes. However, you can manipulate the entire mesh model or individual subobjects using the following methods: ■ Subobject selection and editing. Select faces, edges, and vertices the same way you select 3D solid subobjects. Press Ctrl and click the component. The subobject highlighting indicates what is selected. Press Shift and click again to remove the selection from a subobject. By turning on the Subobject Selection Filter, you can restrict selection to a specific subobject, which you can select without pressing Ctrl. See Use 3D Subobject Grips on page 1109. ■ Gizmo editing. When you select a mesh object or subobject, the 3D Move, Rotate, or Scale gizmo is displayed automatically. (You can set which gizmo is displayed by default.) Use these gizmos to modify the selection uniformly, or along a specified plane or axis. See Use Gizmos to Modify Objects on page 1093. 1170 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Because dense meshes can be difficult to work with, you can change settings to improve the display and behavior of grips. ■ Set the subobject selection filter to select only faces, edges, or vertices: Set the DEFAULTGIZMO system variable or use the shortcut menu. ■ Set whether a grip on a face, edge, or vertex is active immediately when you select the subobject: Set the GRIPSUBOBJMODE system variable. Quick Reference Commands MESHCAP Creates a mesh face that connects open edges. MESHCOLLAPSE Merges the vertices of selected mesh faces or edges. MESHCREASE Sharpens the edges of selected mesh subobjects. MESHEXTRUDE Extends a mesh face into 3D space. MESHMERGE Merges adjacent faces into a single face. MESHREFINE Multiplies the number of faces in selected mesh objects or faces. MESHSMOOTHLESS Decreases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level. MESHSMOOTHMORE Increases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level. MESHSPIN Spins the adjoining edge of two triangular mesh faces. MESHSPLIT Splits a mesh face into two faces. Overview of Modifying Meshes | 1171 MESHUNCREASE Removes the crease from selected mesh faces, edges, or vertices. System Variables DEFAULTGIZMO Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during subobject selection. GRIPSUBOBJMODE Controls whether grips are automatically made hot when subobjects are selected. VSLIGHTINGQUALITY Sets the lighting quality in the current viewport. Change Mesh Smoothness Levels Increase the roundness of mesh objects by increasing the smoothness levels. Mesh objects are made up of multiple subdivisions, or tessellations, which define the editable faces. Each face consists of underlying facets. When you increase smoothness, you increase the number of facets to provide a smoother, more rounded look. 1172 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Increase or Decrease Smoothness As you work, you can increase and decrease the level of smoothness. The differences are apparent both in the wireframe and conceptual visual styles and in the rendered output. The lowest level of smoothness, or baseline, is 0. By default, Level 0 has no smoothness. You can increase the smoothness of any mesh object up to the current limits. However, you cannot decrease the smoothness of a mesh object whose level of smoothness is zero. If you have added creases to a mesh object, the effect of smoothing differs, depending on the crease setting. The effect of creases added to mesh that has no smoothness (Level 0) is not apparent until the mesh is smoothed. As you edit an object using gizmos or grips, you might create gaps in the mesh object. One way to close the gap is to smooth the object or refine individual subobjects. Using hardware acceleration might also help resolve this problem. (For more information, see Graphics System.) Limit Mesh Density Mesh is created at the level of smoothness that you specify. The smoothness can range from None (0), to the default maximum (6), or to a level that you Change Mesh Smoothness Levels | 1173 specify. As an object is smoothed, the density of the mesh facet grid also increases. For best results, model mesh objects at lower smoothness levels and increase the smoothness only after modeling is complete. Dense meshes can result in subobjects that are difficult to select and edit. They can also affect performance. Therefore you might want to set limits that prevent the mesh from becoming too dense. ■ Maximum level of smoothness at which a grid is displayed (SMOOTHMESHGRID). Displays the effects of modeling without the complexity of the underlying facet grid. The default smoothness level is 3. The tessellation display becomes increasingly dense until the maximum level is exceeded. Beyond that level, the display reverts to the most basic level, even though the smoothing level can continue to increase. ■ Maximum number of faces in a drawing (SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE). Sets the maximum number of mesh faces that are permitted per mesh object. ■ Maximum level of smoothness (SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV). Sets the maximum smoothness level permitted for mesh objects. To increase the smoothness of a mesh object 1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Smooth More. 2 Select the mesh objects that you want to modify. The smoothness of each object that you select is increased one level. To decrease the smoothness of a mesh object 1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Smooth Less. 2 Select the mesh objects that you want to modify. The smoothness of each object that you select is decreased one level. To increase or decrease the smoothness of a mesh object (Properties palette) 1 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties. 2 Select the mesh objects that you want to modify. 1174 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models 3 In the Properties palette, Geometry area, Smoothness box, select a new smoothness level. To control the display of the mesh facet grid 1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshgrid. 2 Enter one of the following values: ■ 0 suppresses the display of the underlying mesh facet grid. ■ 1 displays the mesh facet grid only when the object has a level of smoothness of 0 or 1. ■ 2 and higher sets the highest level of smoothness at which the facet grid is displayed. To set the maximum smoothness level for mesh objects 1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshmaxlev. 2 Enter a value that represents the highest level of smoothness permissible for mesh objects. The recommended range is 1 - 5. To set the maximum number of mesh faces 1 At the Command prompt, enter smoothmeshmaxface. 2 Enter the maximum number of faces permitted for an object. You can set a value up to 16,000,000. Quick Reference Commands MESHSMOOTHLESS Decreases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level. MESHSMOOTHMORE Increases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Change Mesh Smoothness Levels | 1175 System Variables SMOOTHMESHGRID Sets the maximum level of smoothness at which the underlying mesh facet grid is displayed on 3D mesh objects. SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE Sets the maximum number of faces permitted for mesh objects. SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV Sets the maximum smoothness level for mesh objects. Refine Mesh Objects or Subobjects Refine a mesh object or subobject to convert underlying facets to editable faces. You can refine any mesh that has a level of smoothness of 1 or higher. Refine a Mesh Object and Reset the Baseline Refining an object increases the number of editable faces by converting the underlying facets to faces. The number of resulting faces depends on the current level of smoothness. Higher smoothness levels result in a higher number of faces after refinement. In addition to increasing the number of faces, refining a mesh object resets its level of smoothness back to the baseline. Therefore, an object might appear to be smoothed, but its smoothness level can still equal 0 (zero). 1176 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Refine a Mesh Face You can refine an entire mesh object as shown in the previous illustration, or select a specific face to refine. A refined face is subdivided into four faces and the surrounding faces are deformed slightly to accommodate the change. Refining a mesh face does not affect the overall smoothing level of the mesh object. Unlike a refined mesh object, refined faces can be refined again immediately. With mesh face refinement, you can target smaller areas for detailed modeling. How Refinement Affects Creases A crease that is set to Always retains its sharpness no matter how much you smooth or refine the object. However, the behavior is different when you assign a crease value. If you refine an object or edge that has a crease value, the assigned crease value is lowered by the value of the original level of smoothing. Suppose that you add a crease with a crease value of 4 and then refine a mesh whose level of smoothness is 2. The new crease value is 2. Refine Mesh Objects or Subobjects | 1177 If a crease is applied before an object is smoothed or refined, the effect is not apparent until after the object is smoothed or refined. To refine a mesh object 1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Refine Mesh. 2 Select the mesh object that you want to refine. (The object must have a smoothness level of 1 or higher.) The underlying mesh facets are converted to faces and the level of smoothness for the object is set to 0. Higher levels of smoothness result in a higher number of faces. To refine a mesh face 1 Set the subobject selection filter to select only faces: right-click anywhere in the drawing area. Click Subobject Selection Filter ➤ Face. 2 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Refine Mesh. 3 Click one or more mesh faces that you want to refine. Press Enter. (The object must have a smoothness level of 1 or higher.) Each face is subdivided into four new faces. Quick Reference Commands MESHREFINE Multiplies the number of faces in selected mesh objects or faces. Add Creases to Mesh Add creases to sharpen mesh edges. You can add creases to mesh objects that have a smoothing level of 1 or higher. 1178 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Add Creases to Different Subobjects The result of creasing differs, depending on what type of subobject you select. ■ Edge. The selected edge is sharpened. The adjacent faces are deformed to accommodate the new crease angle. ■ Face. The selected face is flattened and all edges that bound that face are sharpened. Adjacent faces are deformed to accommodate the new shape of the face. ■ Vertex. The point of the vertex and all intersecting edges are sharpened. Adjacent faces are deformed to accommodate the new vertex angle. Assign a Crease Value to the Edge As you apply a crease, you set a crease value that determines how the crease is affected by smoothing. A value of Always ensures that the crease is always retained, even when the mesh is repeatedly smoothed. Higher crease values ensure that the crease is retained through several smoothing processes. (During smoothing, the assigned crease value is decreased by the value of the original level of smoothing.) You can add a crease to mesh that has not been smoothed. However, the effect is not visible unless you smooth the object. Remove a Crease You can restore a crease to a smoothed state that corresponds to the smoothing level for the object. If you remove a crease that is adjacent to other creased subobjects, their contours are adjusted. Add Creases to Mesh | 1179 To add creases to a mesh object 1 (Optional) Specify the type of subobject to crease: right-click in the drawing area and click Subobject Selection Filter ➤ Face, Vertex, or Edge. 2 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Add Crease. 3 Select the mesh edges, faces, or vertices to crease. (If you have set a subobject selection filter, only one type of subobject can be selected.) To remove a subobject from the selection set, Shift+click the subobject. 4 Specify the crease value: ■ Always retains the crease at all levels of smoothness. ■ Values of 1 or higher sets the level of smoothness that starts to affect the crease. The specified subobjects are creased. A crease is not visible on objects that have not been smoothed (the level of smoothness = 0). To change the crease value of an existing mesh crease (Properties palette) 1 If the Properties palette is not displayed, select any object. Right-click the object to display the shortcut menu. Click Properties. 2 Press Ctrl+click the mesh subobject that you want to modify. NOTE If you cannot select a specific subobject, verify whether subobject selection filtering is turned on for a different subobject type. (Right-click in the drawing area and click Subobject Selection Filter.) 3 In the Properties palette, Crease area, Type box, change the crease value: ■ None removes the crease and sets the subobject to the current level of smoothness. ■ Always retains the crease at all levels of smoothness. ■ By Level sets the level of smoothness that starts to affect the crease. When this setting is selected, you can specify the crease level in the Level box. 1180 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models To remove an existing mesh crease 1 (Optional) Specify the type of subobject to modify: right-click in the drawing area and click Subobject Selection Filter ➤ Face, Vertex, or Edge. 2 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Remove Crease. 3 Press Ctrl+click the mesh subobjects to be modified and press Enter. You can also use window selection to specify multiple subobjects. Quick Reference Commands MESHCREASE Sharpens the edges of selected mesh subobjects. MESHUNCREASE Removes the crease from selected mesh faces, edges, or vertices. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Modify Mesh Faces Split, extrude, merge, collapse, or spin mesh faces to modify their shapes. Split a Mesh Face You can split a mesh face to make custom subdivisions. Use this method to prevent deforming a larger area for small modifications. Modify Mesh Faces | 1181 Because you specify the start point and end point of the split, this method also gives you control over the shape of the two new faces. Use the Vertex option to snap automatically to the vertices of the face. If you plan to split a face to create—and then spin the edge of—two triangular faces (MESHSPIN), use the Vertex option to ensure precision. Extrude Mesh Faces You can add definition to a 3D object by extruding a mesh face. Extruding other types of objects creates a separate 3D solid object. However extruding a mesh face extends, or deforms, the existing object and subdivides the extruded face. You can use the same methods for extrusion of the faces of 3D solids and meshes as you use for other types of objects. For example, you can specify an extrusion direction, a path, or a taper angle. However, when you extrude mesh faces, the MESHEXTRUDE command provides an option that sets whether adjacent faces are extruded individually or whether their shared edges remained joined. 1182 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models You cannot create joined extrusions for mesh faces in which only the vertices are shared. For more information about extrusion, see Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding on page 968. Reconfigure Adjacent Mesh Faces You can extend your editing options by reconfiguring adjacent faces. Several options are available: ■ Merge adjacent faces. Combine adjacent faces to form a single face. Merging works best with faces that are on the same plane. Although you can merge faces that wrap a corner, additional modifications to the resulting mesh object can have unexpected results. ■ Collapse the mesh vertices. Merge adjacent vertices of surrounding faces form a single point. The selected face is removed. Modify Mesh Faces | 1183 ■ Spin edges of triangular faces. Rotate an edge that is shared by two triangular faces. The shared edge spins to extend from the opposite vertices. This activity works best when the adjoined triangles form a rectangular, not a triangular, shape. See also: ■ Tips for Working with Mesh on page 1189 To split a mesh face 1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Split Face. 2 Click the mesh face that you want to split. 3 To snap to a vertex of the face, enter v (Vertex). 4 Click the location where you want to start the split. 5 Click a second location to end the split. The mesh face is split along the boundary you specified. Surrounding faces are adjusted. To extrude mesh faces 1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Extrude Face. 2 To review or change the extrusion method, press s (Setting) and set one of the following options: ■ To keep adjacent faces joined as you extend them, enter y (Yes). ■ To extend adjacent faces separately, enter n (No). 3 Click one or more mesh faces and press Enter. 1184 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models 4 Specify the amount of extrusion using one of the following methods: ■ (Single face extrusion only) Press Enter to set the extrusion dynamically. ■ Enter a value to indicate the height or depth of the extrusion and press Enter. The selected face is extruded. To merge mesh faces 1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Merge Face. 2 On a mesh object, select two or more mesh faces and press Enter. The selected faces are combined to form a single face. To collapse mesh faces 1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Mesh Edit drop-down ➤ Collapse Face or Edge. 2 Select a mesh face or edge. NOTE If you cannot select a face or edge, verify whether subobject selection filtering is turned on for a different subobject type. (Right-click the drawing area and click Subobject Selection Filter.) The vertices of the face or edge that you selected are collapsed to a single point. To spin the shared edge of triangular mesh faces 1 Click Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Mesh Edit drop-down ➤ Spin Triangle Face. 2 Select two triangular mesh faces that are adjacent to one another. The edge shared by the original triangles rotates, or spins, to connect two different vertices. Modify Mesh Faces | 1185 Quick Reference Commands MESHCOLLAPSE Merges the vertices of selected mesh faces or edges. MESHEXTRUDE Extends a mesh face into 3D space. MESHMERGE Merges adjacent faces into a single face. MESHSMOOTHLESS Decreases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level. MESHSMOOTHMORE Increases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level. MESHSPIN Spins the adjoining edge of two triangular mesh faces. MESHSPLIT Splits a mesh face into two faces. Create and Close Mesh Gaps Delete mesh faces or close gaps in mesh objects. Remove Mesh Faces You can press Delete or use the ERASE command to remove mesh faces. The removal leaves a gap in the mesh. ■ Deleting a face removes only the face. 1186 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models ■ Deleting an edge removes each adjacent face. ■ Deleting a vertex removes all faces that are shared by the vertex. If removal of a mesh face creates a gap, the mesh object is not “watertight.” It can be converted to a surface object, but not to a 3D solid object. Close Gaps in Mesh Objects If a mesh object is not watertight due to gaps, or holes, in the mesh, you can make it watertight by closing the holes. The cap, or new face, spans the boundary formed by the mesh edges that you specify (MESHCAP). Create and Close Mesh Gaps | 1187 This process works best when all edges are on the same plane. The edges you select as boundaries cannot be shared by two faces. For example, you cannot close the center hole in a mesh torus. NOTE You can sometimes close gaps in mesh by smoothing the object, by using MESHCOLLAPSE, or by splitting adjacent faces (MESHSPLIT). See also: ■ Tips for Working with Mesh on page 1189 To delete faces from a mesh object 1 Press Ctrl+click one of the following mesh subobject types: ■ To remove only that face, click the face. ■ To remove adjacent faces, click their shared edge. ■ To remove all faces that share a vertex, click the vertex. NOTE If you cannot select the subobject you want, verify whether subobject selection filtering is turned on for a different subobject type. (Right-click in the drawing area and click Subobject Selection Filter.) 2 Press Delete. NOTE You can also remove mesh faces with the ERASE command. To repair a hole in a mesh object 1 Click Mesh tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Close Hole. 2 Select contiguous edges to serve as the boundary for the mesh face that will span the gap. 1188 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Quick Reference Commands ERASE Removes objects from a drawing. MESHCAP Creates a mesh face that connects open edges. Tips for Working with Mesh Learn some best practices for working with mesh models. Mesh, with its enhanced modeling capabilities, offers a way to create more fluid, free-form designs. Keep these tips in mind as you work. Model mesh before you smooth it. Mesh modeling is a powerful way to design, but higher levels of smoothness increase complexity and can affect performance. You can work more efficiently if you complete editing operations such as gizmo editing, extrusion, and face splitting, on mesh objects that have not been smoothed. (That is, their level of smoothness is 0.) mesh sphere modeled by grip editing and extrusion, then smoothed You can quickly switch between the levels of smoothness in the Properties palette to get a preview of how your activities affect the smoothed object. Tips for Working with Mesh | 1189 Refine or split a face instead of refining the entire object. Refinement is a powerful way to subdivide faces. However, by increasing the number of faces, you add to the overall complexity of the model. In addition, refining an entire mesh object resets the base level of smoothness to 0. This change can result in a dense grid that can no longer be simplified. For best results, avoid refining the object, and refine or split only the individual faces that require more detailed modeling. mesh box, refined mesh box, and mesh box with one face refined Refining individual faces does not reset the level of smoothness for the object. Crease edges to help limit distortion when the object is smoothed. Creased edges can be set to maintain their sharpness, no matter how much the object is smoothed. You may also need to crease the edges in surrounding faces to obtain the result you want. extruded faces on mesh torus, creased and not creased 1190 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Creasing set to Always retains its sharpness after smoothing. If you set a crease value, the creased edge becomes smoother at the equivalent level of smoothness. Use gizmos to model faces, edges, and vertices. 3D Move, 3D Rotate, and 3D Scale gizmos can be used to modify entire mesh objects, or specific subobjects. For example, you can rotate and scale an individual face using the 3D Move, Rotate, and Scale gizmos. By constraining the modifications to a specified axis or plane, gizmos help you avoid unexpected results. The default gizmo is displayed whenever you select an object in a view that uses a 3D visual style. (You can also suppress this display.) Therefore, you do not have to explicitly start the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale command to initiate these activities. You just need to select an object. When a gizmo is selected, you can use the shortcut menu to switch to a different type of gizmo. Use subobject selection filters to narrow the available selection candidates. In a smoothed mesh, trying to select a specific subject can be difficult unless you turn on subobject selection (shortcut menu). By specifying that the selection set is limited to faces, edges, vertices, or even solid history subobjects, you can restrict which subobject type is available for selection. Tips for Working with Mesh | 1191 mesh faces selected when the face subobject selection filter is on A filter is especially valuable for selecting mesh vertices, which are not highlighted as you move the mouse over them. In order to select the entire mesh object, you need to turn off the subselection filters. Model by extruding faces. A key difference between gizmo editing and extrusion occurs in the way each face is modified. With gizmo editing, if you select and drag a set of faces, adjacent faces are stretched to accommodate the modification. When the object is smoothed, the adjacent faces adapt to the new location of the face. mesh faces extended using 3D Move gizmo Mesh extrusion, however, inserts additional faces to close the gap between the extruded face and its original surface. With mesh extrusion, you can set whether adjacent faces are extruded as a unit (joined) or separately (unjoined). 1192 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models mesh faces extruded, then smoothed If you are working on an object that has not been smoothed, try smoothing it periodically to see how the extrusion is affected by smoothing. Convert between mesh and 3D solids or surfaces. Mesh modeling is powerful, but it cannot do everything that solid modeling can do. If you need to edit mesh objects through intersection, subtraction, or union, you can convert mesh to 3D solid or surface objects. Similarly, if you need to apply creasing or smoothing to 3D solid or surface objects, you can convert those objects to mesh. Keep in mind that not all conversions retain complete fidelity to the shape of the original object. Avoid switching between object types more than once, if possible. If you notice that the conversion modifies the shape of the object in an unacceptable way, undo the conversion and try again with different settings. ■ The Mesh Tessellation Options Dialog Box (MESHOPTIONS) controls the smoothness and shape of the faces for 3D solids or surfaces that are converted to mesh. Although you can convert an object to mesh without opening this dialog box (MESHSMOOTH), you can more easily experiment with different conversion settings by launching the conversion operation from within the dialog box. ■ The SMOOTHMESHCONVERT system variable (also available on the ribbon) sets whether the mesh objects that you convert to 3D solids or surfaces are smoothed or faceted, and whether their co-planar faces are optimized (merged). Tips for Working with Mesh | 1193 You might have trouble converting some non-primitive mesh to solid objects due to the following problems: ■ Gaps in the mesh. If you notice gaps, you can sometimes close them by smoothing the object or by refining the faces that are adjacent to the gap. mesh torus that has been twisted using 3D Rotate at various smoothing levels You can also close holes by using MESHCAP. In some cases, you can also obtain better results by using hardware acceleration to improve your graphics system. ■ Intersecting mesh faces. Be especially careful not to create self-intersections as you move, rotate, or scale subobjects. (You create self-intersections when you cause one or more faces to cross, or intersect other faces in the same mesh model.) View the object from all viewpoints to ensure you create a viable model. 1194 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models mesh wedge with front faces dragged past the back faces Mesh objects that cannot be converted to solids can often be converted to surfaces instead. Avoid merging faces that wrap a corner When you merge faces, you can create a mesh configuration in which the merged face wraps a corner. If a resulting face has a vertex that has two edges and two faces, you cannot convert the mesh to a smooth 3D solid object. Tips for Working with Mesh | 1195 One way to resolve this problem is to convert the mesh to a faceted solid instead of a smooth solid. You might also be able to repair the problem by splitting the adjacent faces, starting at the shared vertex (MESHSPLIT). 1196 | Chapter 25 Modify 3D Models Create Sections and 2D Drawings from 3D Models 26 Create cross sections, cutting planes, and flattened views of 3D objects. Work with Sections Create cross sections of 3D models. Overview of Section Objects Create a section plane that can be modified and moved to achieve the cross section view that you need. With the SECTIONPLANE command, you can create one or more section objects and place them throughout a 3D model (3D solids, surfaces, or mesh). By activating live sectioning, you can then view transient cuts in the 3D model as you move the section object through it. The 3D objects themselves do not change. Set the Cross-Section with the Section Plane Indicator Section objects have a transparent section plane indicator that acts as a cutting plane. This plane can be moved through a 3D model that is composed of 3D solids, surfaces, or regions to obtain different section views. 1197 Store Properties in Section Lines The section plane contains a section line that stores section object properties. You can create multiple section objects to store different properties. For example, one section object can display a hatch pattern at the section plane intersection. Another section object can display a specific linetype for the boundary of the intersected area. Analyze the Model with Live Sectioning With live sectioning, you can dynamically analyze the interior details of 3D objects by moving and adjusting the section plane. You can specify whether to hide, or cut away, the portion of the model that is on the viewing side of the section plane indicator. 1198 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and 2D Drawings from 3D Models Save and Share Section Images After you create a sectional view, you can generate an accurate 2D or 3D block from the 3D model. These blocks can be analyzed or checked for clearances and interference conditions. They can also be dimensioned, or used as wireframe or rendered illustrations in documentation and presentation drawings. You can also save each section object as a tool on the tool palette. That way, you can avoid resetting properties each time you create a section object. Quick Reference Commands LIVESECTION Turns on live sectioning for a selected section object. SECTIONPLANE Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects. SECTIONPLANESETTINGS Sets display options for the selected section plane. SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK Saves selected section planes as 2D or 3D blocks. Create Section Objects Create cross sections to show interior details of 3D objects. With the SECTIONPLANE command, you create a section object that acts as a cutting plane through solids, surfaces, meshes, or regions. Then turn on live sectioning to move the section object through the 3D model to reveal its inner details in real time. You can align a section object using several methods. Align the Section Plane to a 3D Face One way to set the section plane is to click the face of an existing 3D object. (As you move the cursor, a dotted outline indicates the side of the plane to be selected.) The section plane is automatically aligned to the plane of the face you select. Create Section Objects | 1199 Section object aligned to face Create a Straight Cutting Plane Pick two points to create a straight cutting plane. Add a Jogged Segment The section plane can be a straight line or it can have multiple or jogged sections. For example, a section containing a jog is one that cuts away a pie slice-shaped wedge from a cylinder. Create a section line that has jogged segments by using the Draw Section option to pick multiple points throughout the 3D model. 1200 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and 2D Drawings from 3D Models Section object with jogged segment Create Orthographic Sections You can align section objects to a specified orthographic orientation of the current UCS, such as front, back, bottom, top, left, or right. Orthographic section planes are placed so that they pass through the center of the 3D extents of all 3D objects in the drawing. Create a Region to Represent the Cross Section With the SECTION command, you can create a 2D region object that represents a planar cross section through a 3D solid object. You do not have live sectioning capabilities when you use this legacy method to create cross sections. Create Section Objects | 1201 Define the plane of the cross section using one of the following methods: ■ Specify three points. ■ Specify a 2D object such as a circle, ellipse, arc, spline, or polyline. ■ Specify a view. ■ Specify the Z axis. ■ Specify the XY, YZ, or ZX plane. The new region that represents the cross-sectional plane is placed on the current layer. NOTE Before you apply hatching to the cross-sectional cutting plane, align the UCS with the cutting plane. To create a section object by selecting a face 1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Section Plane. 2 Click to select a face on your model. A section object is created on the plane of the selected face. 3 Click the section line to display its grips. 4 Select a grip to move the section plane through the 3D object. A section object is created in the Section Plane state. Live sectioning is turned on. 1202 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and 2D Drawings from 3D Models To create a section object by specifying two points 1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Section Plane. 2 Specify the first point of the section object. 3 Specify the endpoint. The section object is created between the two points. Live sectioning is turned off. To create a section object with jogged segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Section Plane. 2 At the Command prompt, enter d (Draw Section). 3 Specify the start point of the section object. 4 Specify a second point to create the first jogged segment. From this point, you cannot create segments that intersect. 5 Continue specifying segment endpoints, then press Enter. 6 Specify a point in the direction of the sectional cut. A section object with multiple segments is created in a Section Boundary state. Live sectioning is turned off. To create a section object on a preset orthographic plane 1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Section Plane. 2 At the Command prompt, enter o (Orthographic). 3 Select an alignment option. The new section object intersects the center point of the 3D extents of all 3D objects in the drawing. It is placed on the selected orthographic plane. Live sectioning is turned on. To create a region that represents the cross section of a 3D solid object 1 At the Command prompt, enter section. 2 Select the object to cross section. Create Section Objects | 1203 3 Specify three points to define the cross-sectional plane. Quick Reference Commands SECTIONPLANE Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects. SECTION Uses the intersection of a plane and solids, surfaces, or mesh to create a region. Modify a Section View After you create a section, adjust its display or modify its shape and location to change the represented section view. Add Jogs to a Section Add jogs, or angular segments, to existing section lines. You can create a section line that has multiple segments (jogs), using the Draw Section option of the SECTIONPLANE command. You can also add a jog to an existing section object using the Add Jog to Section option on the shortcut menu with SECTIONPLANEJOG. A jog that is added to an existing section object creates a segment that is perpendicular to the selected segment. Its viewpoint is oriented in the direction set by the Direction grip. The Nearest object snap is temporarily turned on to help you place the jogs on a section. You cannot add jogs to the side or back lines of the section object. 1204 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and 2D Drawings from 3D Models After adding jogs, you can reposition and resize the jogged sections by dragging the section object grips. To add jogs to a section 1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Jog. 2 On a section object, select the section line. 3 Move the cursor over the section line. 4 Select a point on the section line where you want to place a jog that is perpendicular to the selected segment. To create additional jogs, repeat the steps. NOTE You cannot create jogs that cause the line to intersect itself or close. Quick Reference Commands SECTIONPLANE Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects. SECTIONPLANEJOG Adds a jogged segment to a section object. Use Live Section to Adjust the Cross Section Use live sectioning to move a section object through the 3D model or region dynamically. What Is Live Sectioning? Live sectioning is an analytical tool for viewing cut geometry in a 3D solid, surface, or region. Modify a Section View | 1205 You can use live sectioning to analyze a model by moving the section object through the object. For example, sliding the section object through an engine assembly helps you visualize its internal components. You can use this method to create a cross section view that you can save or reuse. Turn on and Use Live Sectioning Live sectioning works with 3D objects and regions in model space. When live sectioning is activated, you can change the viewing planes by using grips to adjust the location of the section object or its segments. By turning on cutaway geometry, you can display the entire object that contains the section plane. This option (available on the shortcut menu) can only be turned on when section plane is active. Live sectioning is turned on or off automatically, depending on how you create the section object. For example, when you select a face to define the section plane, live sectioning is turned on. When you create sections using the Draw Section option of the SECTIONPLANE command, live sectioning is turned off. Live sectioning can be manually turned on or off after a section object is created. 1206 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and 2D Drawings from 3D Models A drawing can contain multiple section objects. However, live sectioning can only be active for one section object at a time. Suppose that your model has two sections objects: Section A and Section B. If Section A has live sectioning turned on and you activate live sectioning for Section B, live sectioning for Section A is automatically turned off. Turning off a section object layer does not turn off live sectioning. However, freezing the layer turns off live sectioning. To turn live sectioning on and off 1 Select a section object. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Live Section. To display cutaway geometry 1 Select a section object. 2 Right-click the section line. Click Show Cut-away Geometry to turn it on. The cut geometry is displayed according to the Foreground Line settings in the Section Settings dialog box. Quick Reference Commands LIVESECTION Turns on live sectioning for a selected section object. SECTIONPLANE Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects. SECTIONPLANESETTINGS Sets display options for the selected section plane. Use Grips to Modify Section Objects Section object grips help you move and resize the section object. Modify a Section View | 1207 Grips allow you to adjust the location, length, width, and height of the cutting area. ■ Base grip. Acts as the basepoint for moving, scaling, and rotating the section object. It is always adjacent to the Menu grip. ■ Second grip. Rotates the section object around the base grip. ■ Menu grip. Displays a menu of section object states, which control the display of visual information about the cutting plane. ■ Direction grip. Controls the viewing direction of the 2D section. To reverse the viewing direction of the section plane, click the Direction grip. ■ Arrow grip. (Section Boundary and Volume states only.) Modifies the section object by modifying the shape and position of the section plane. Only orthogonal movements in the direction of the arrow are permitted. ■ Segment end grips. (Section Boundary and Volume states only.) Stretches the vertices of the section plane. You cannot move segment end grips so that segments intersect. Segment end grips are displayed at the endpoints of jogged segments. You can select only one section object grip at a time. To adjust a section object using grips 1 In the drawing area, click the section plane. 1208 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and 2D Drawings from 3D Models Depending on the current section plane state, different grips are displayed. 2 Hover over the grip with the cursor until it turns red. Then drag the grip to a new location. 3 To adjust the height, width, or depth of a section plane, click the Menu grip and select Section Volume or Section Boundary. Quick Reference Commands SECTIONPLANE Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects. System Variables GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. Set Section Object States and Properties Set the display of the section object. Set Section Object States Section objects have the following display states: ■ Section Plane. The section line and transparent section plane indicator are displayed. The cutting plane extends infinitely in all directions. ■ Section Boundary. A 2D box shows the XY extents of the cutting plane. The cutting plane along the Z axis extends infinitely. Modify a Section View | 1209 ■ Section Volume. A 3D box shows the extents of the cutting plane in all directions. You can switch between object states by clicking the Menu grip that is displayed when you select the section object. Set Section Object Properties Section objects have properties like other AutoCAD objects. Properties are stored in the section line and can be accessed in the Properties palette. For each section object, you can change the name, layer, and linetype. You can also change the color and transparency of the section plane indicator (the cutting plane). To change the state of a section object by using the Menu grip 1 Select the section object to display its grips. 2 Click the Menu grip. 3 On the section state menu, click the state you want to display. The section display is updated to the selected state. To change the state of a section object (Properties palette) 1 Right-click the section object. Click Properties. 2 In the Properties palette, under Section Object, change the value for Type. The section display is updated to the selected state. To rename a section object 1 Right-click the section object. Click Properties. 2 In the Properties palette, under Section Object, in the Name box, enter a different name. To change the transparency and color of the section plane indicator 1 Right-click the section object. Click Properties. 2 In the Properties palette, under Section Object, in the Plane Transparency box, enter a value of 1-100. Entering 1 makes the section plane indicator opaque. 1210 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and 2D Drawings from 3D Models 3 In the Plane Color box, select a color. The section plane indicator is updated in the viewport. To change the height of the section plane indicator 1 Right-click the section object. Click Properties. 2 In the Properties palette, under Geometry, in the Top Plane box, change the value. This value changes the distance from the section line to the upper edge of the section plane. 3 In the Bottom Plane box, enter a value. This value changes the distance from the section line to the bottom edge of the section plane. The section plane indicator is updated in the viewport. To modify the live section display settings 1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Panel dialog box launcher. 2 Right-click the section object. Click Live Section Settings. 3 In the Section Settings Dialog Box, click Live Section Settings. 4 Modify the sections that you want to change and click OK. Quick Reference Commands PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. SECTIONPLANE Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects. SECTIONPLANESETTINGS Sets display options for the selected section plane. SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK Saves selected section planes as 2D or 3D blocks. Modify a Section View | 1211 Associate Section Objects with Views and Cameras Associate section objects with named views and cameras in the View Manager. When you activate a named view or camera that has an associated section object, live sectioning is turned on for that section object. For a 3D model with multiple section objects, you might want to associate a particular section object to a view or camera. Later, you can restore a saved sectional view or camera and activate live sectioning for the associated section object. For example, you can set up two section objects that cut through the 3D model in different directions. Section object A cuts the model along its width; Section object B cuts the model along its length. Perhaps you want to view the sectional cut that is perpendicular to your line of sight. By associating each section object with a view or camera, you can quickly switch between the two views and see the desired cross section. To associate a section object with a view or camera 1 Click View tab ➤ Views panel ➤ Named Views. 2 In the View Manager, in the left pane, under Model Views, select a named view or camera. 3 In the General section, in the Live Section drop-down list, select a section object by name. 4 Click OK. The section object is now associated with a named view or camera. When the named view or camera is restored, live sectioning is turned on for the associated section object. Quick Reference Commands SECTIONPLANE Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects. VIEW Saves and restores named views, camera views, layout views, and preset views. 1212 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and 2D Drawings from 3D Models Save and Publish Section Objects Save a section object as a block or tool, or publish it. Save Sections as Blocks, Drawings, or Tools Save the representation of the cross-sectional area where a section object intersects a 3D model as a block. Save Sections as Blocks or Drawings You can save the section objects you create as blocks. Working from the Generate Section / Elevation Dialog Box, you can choose the type of block that is created. For example, suppose your project requires 2D elevation drawings or 2D cross sections. The 2D Section / Elevation option creates an accurate block representation that is ready for dimensioning. To publish or render a cutaway of the 3D model, select the 3D Section option. 3D section geometry consists of mostly 3D solids and surfaces. However, profile outlines and hatch patterns consist of 2D lines. Save and Publish Section Objects | 1213 The display properties of 2D section/elevation blocks and 3D section blocks are controlled in the Section Settings dialog box. When you create section blocks, you have the following choices for how they are handled: ■ Insert the section blocks. At the time of creation, you can insert a 2D or 3D section block into the drawing or save it to an external file. A 2D section block is inserted on the XY plane of the current UCS, including section blocks that extend into 3D space. Inserted section blocks are initially unnamed. You can set the scale, rotation, and basepoint upon insertion. You can modify and rename them later by editing the block with BEDIT. ■ Export section blocks to a file. Save and name the new section objects so they can be inserted later. ■ Save section block components on separate layers. By default, section block components such as intersection boundary, intersection fill, background lines, cutaway geometry, and curve tangency lines are saved on Layer 0. However, you can separate the components of saved section blocks onto separate layers with a suffix or prefix that you specify. Assigning a suffix or prefix helps you organize the block components into layers that you can sort and identify quickly. The Layer properties lists in the Section Settings dialog box provide the opportunity to customize the layer names. ■ Specify whether to limit the section block to certain objects. The objects that are included in a section block vary, depending on which section object state is selected. You can also select specific objects to be included as you create the section block. Save Section Objects as Tools As with other objects, you can create tools from individual section objects and then access them in a tool palette when you need them. If each of several section objects has its own set of properties, you can save each section object as a tool. Later, you can quickly create new section objects that use the same settings. See also: ■ Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images on page 69 1214 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and 2D Drawings from 3D Models To save and insert a 2D or 3D section as a block 1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Create Block. 2 Select the section object. 3 In the Generate Section/Elevation dialog box, click 2D Section/Elevation or 3D Section. 4 In the expanded dialog box, select Include All Objects. 5 Under Destination, click Insert as New Block. 6 Click Create. 7 In the drawing area, specify an insertion point for the new block. An unnamed block is inserted consisting of 2D or 3D geometry. To save section block components on separate layers 1 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Create Block. 2 Click a section object. 3 In the Generate Section/Elevation dialog box, click 2D Section/Elevation or 3D Section. 4 In the expanded dialog box, click Section Settings. 5 In the Section Settings dialog box, in the list of properties, click the Layer box under the section component that you want to update. 6 In the expanded Layer list, specify the layer on which to place the section block component: ■ To set an existing layer name, click *ObjectByLayer* or the name of another layer. Go to step 7. ■ To create a descriptive label to be added to the block section layer names, click New Layer Name Settings. 7 In the New Layer Name dialog box, specify how the descriptive text will look: ■ Under Added Text Type, specify whether you want the descriptive text to be a prefix or a suffix. Save and Publish Section Objects | 1215 ■ Under Text Added to the Existing Layer Name, enter descriptive text to be added to the layer name. Click OK. 8 In the Section Settings dialog box, click OK. 9 In the Generate Section / Elevation dialog box, click Create. To save a section object tool as a tool palette tool 1 On a section object, select the section line. 2 Drag the section object to the position on the tool palette where you want to place the tool. The black line indicates the new location of the tool. 3 Release the mouse button. The section object is saved as a tool on the tool palette. Quick Reference Commands BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. SECTIONPLANE Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects. SECTIONPLANESETTINGS Sets display options for the selected section plane. SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK Saves selected section planes as 2D or 3D blocks. TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. 1216 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and 2D Drawings from 3D Models Publish Section Objects Control the visibility of section objects when you render, plot, or view them in the DWF file viewer. Render Section Objects With live sectioning turned on, all lines on a section object are rendered as 2D lines. The section plane indicator is rendered as a transparent material. Its degree of transparency is controlled in the Properties palette. If you want to render a 3D cutaway, save the cutaway section as a 3D block and render the block reference. Plot Section Objects When a section object is in a Section Boundary or Section Volume state, displayed lines cannot be plotted. The section plane indicator is plotted as if it were transparent. However, it does not have the same visual quality that it has when it is rendered. If you do not want to plot the section line, place the section object on a layer that is turned off. View Section Objects in the DWF file viewer When live sectioning is active for a section object, the 3D model is displayed in the DWF Viewer with the best possible visual quality. Geometry that is hidden by live sectioning is also hidden in the DWF Viewer. Display settings for live sections have the same appearance in the viewer as they have in the drawing. For example, dashed linetypes and hatch patterns assigned to intersected areas of a 3D model are retained in the DWF Viewer display. The section object is not visible in the DWF Viewer. Quick Reference Commands 3DDWF Creates a 3D DWF or 3D DWFx file of your 3D model and displays it in the DWF Viewer. Save and Publish Section Objects | 1217 PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. PUBLISH Publishes drawings to electronic sheet sets (DWF, DWFx, or PDF files) or plotters. RENDER Creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a 3D solid or surface model. SECTIONPLANE Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects. SECTIONPLANESETTINGS Sets display options for the selected section plane. SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK Saves selected section planes as 2D or 3D blocks. Create a Flattened View Create a flattened view of the 3D solids and regions in the current view. Create a Flatshot Object With the FLATSHOT command, you can create a flattened, 2D representation of the 3D model projected onto the XY plane. The resulting objects can be inserted as a block or saved as a separate drawing. The process is like taking a photograph of the entire 3D model and then laying the photograph flat. This feature is useful for creating technical illustrations. 1218 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and 2D Drawings from 3D Models The flatshot process works only in model space. Start by setting up the view you want, including orthographic or parallel views. All 3D objects in the model space viewport are captured. Therefore, be sure to place the objects you do not want captured on layers that are turned off or frozen. As you create the block, you can control how hidden lines are displayed by adjusting the Foreground and Obscured Lines settings in the Flatshot dialog box. For best results with mesh objects, clear the Show box under Obscured Lines so that hidden lines are not represented. Three-dimensional objects that have been sectioned are captured in their entirety, as if they had not been sectioned. NOTE To create profile images of 3D solids in paper space, use the SOLPROF command. Modify a Flatshot Block You can modify a flattened view that has been inserted as a block in the same way that you modify any other 2D block geometry. Create a Flattened View | 1219 To create a flattened 2D view of a 3D model 1 Set up the view of the 3D model. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Flatshot. 3 In the Flatshot dialog box, under Destination, click one of the options. 4 Change the color and linetype settings for Foreground and Obscured lines. 5 Click Create. 6 Specify an insertion point on the screen to place the block. Adjust the basepoint, scale, and rotation if necessary. A block is created consisting of 2D geometry that is projected onto the XY plane of the current UCS. Quick Reference Commands FLATSHOT Creates a 2D representation of all 3D objects based on the current view. SOLPROF Creates 2D profile images of 3D solids for display in a layout viewport. SOLDRAW Generates profiles and sections in layout viewports created with SOLVIEW. Content Reference to: SOLVIEW Creates orthographic views, layers, and layout viewports automatically for 3D solids. 1220 | Chapter 26 Create Sections and 2D Drawings from 3D Models Part 9: Annotate Drawings 1221 1222 Work with Annotations 27 When you annotate your drawings, you can use certain tools and properties to make working with annotations easier. Overview of Annotations Annotations are notes or other types of explanatory symbols or objects that are commonly used to add information to your drawing. Examples of annotations include ■ Notes and labels ■ Tables ■ Dimensions and tolerances ■ Hatches ■ Callouts ■ Blocks The types of objects that you use to create annotations include ■ Hatches ■ Text (single-line and multiline) ■ Tables ■ Dimensions ■ Tolerances ■ Leaders and multileaders 1223 ■ Blocks ■ Attributes Quick Reference Commands ATTDEF Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block. BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. MLEADERSTYLE Creates and modifies multileader styles. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. OBJECTSCALE Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. TEXT Creates a single-line text object. Scale Annotations You can automate the process of scaling annotations in various layout viewports and in model space. 1224 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations Overview of Scaling Annotations Objects that are commonly used to annotate drawings have a property called Annotative. This property allows you to automate the process of scaling annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the paper. Instead of creating multiple annotations at different sizes and on separate layers, you can turn on the annotative property by object or by style, and set the annotation scale for layout or model viewports. The annotation scale controls the size of the annotative objects relative to the model geometry in the drawing. The following objects are commonly used to annotate drawings and contain an annotative property: ■ Text ■ Dimensions ■ Hatches ■ Tolerances ■ Multileaders ■ Blocks ■ Attributes When the Annotative property for these objects is turned on (set to Yes), these objects are called annotative objects. You define a paper size for annotative objects. The annotation scale you set for layout viewports and model space determines the size of the annotative objects in those spaces. Save to Legacy Drawing File Format Set the system variable SAVEFIDELITY to 1 when you save a drawing that contains annotative objects to a legacy drawing file format (AutoCAD 2007 or earlier). This preserves the visual fidelity of the drawing when it is opened in a release earlier than AutoCAD 2008 by saving individual representations of each scale of each annotative object. The individual objects are saved to layers that are used to organize objects of the same scale. Setting SAVEFIDELITY to 0, when opening the drawing in AutoCAD 2008 or later release, results in improved performance. For more information about saving a drawing to a previous release, see Save a Drawing on page 197. Overview of Scaling Annotations | 1225 Workflow for Annotating Drawings The following steps represent a typical workflow for annotating a drawing so that your annotations will scale automatically. 1 Create annotative styles on page 1234. 2 In model space, set the annotation scale to the scale at which the annotations will be plotted or displayed on page 1227. 3 Create annotative objects using annotative styles on page 1234. If one or more annotative objects needs to be displayed at an additional scale, follow these steps. 1 Add the additional scale to the annotative objects on page 1253. 2 Set the annotation scale to the new scale on page 1228 (the annotative objects that support the new scale will be resized based on the annotation scale). 3 Reposition the annotative objects as needed for the new scale When you create your layouts, follow these steps. 1 Create a new layout on page 391 or make a layout current on page 399. 2 Create viewports on page 408. 3 Set the annotation scale for each viewport on page 1228. (For each viewport, the annotation scale and viewport scale should be the same). For more information about setting visibility for annotative objects, see Display Annotative Objects on page 1251. For more information about adding scales to annotative objects, see Add and Modify Scale Representations on page 1253. Quick Reference Commands OBJECTSCALE Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects. 1226 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations System Variables ANNOAUTOSCALE Updates annotative objects to support the annotation scale when the annotation scale is changed. CANNOSCALE Sets the name of the current annotation scale for the current space. CANNOSCALEVALUE Returns the value of the current annotation scale. MSLTSCALE Scales linetypes displayed on the model tab by the annotation scale. Set Annotation Scale is a setting that is saved with model space, layout viewports, and model views. When you add objects to your drawing, they support the current annotation scale and are scaled based on that scale setting and automatically displayed at the correct size in model space. Before you add annotative objects to your model, you set the annotation scale. Think about the eventual scale settings of the viewports in which the annotations will display. The annotation scale should be set to the same scale as the viewport in which the annotative objects will display in the layout (or the plot scale if plotting from model space). For example, if the annotative objects will display in a viewport that has a scale of 1:2, then you set the annotation scale to 1:2. When working on the model tab or when a viewport is selected, the current annotation scale is displayed on the application or drawing status bar. You can use the status bars to change the annotation scale. You can reset the annotation scale list to the default list of scales defined in the registry in the Default Scale List dialog box. You can use the ANNOAUTOSCALE system variable to update annotative objects to support the current scale automatically when the annotation scale is changed. ANNOAUTOSCALE is turned off by default to keep file size down and improve performance. When ANNOAUTOSCALE is off, this button is displayed this way on the right side of the drawing status bar or application status bar. Set Annotation Scale | 1227 Use the CANNOSCALE system variable to set a default annotation scale setting. You can reset the list of annotative scales in a drawing to the default list of either metric or imperial scales defined in the registry with the Default Scale dialog box. The unused scales in the drawing are purged and the customized list of scales from the registry are merged into the drawing See also: ■ Drawing Status Bar on page 52 To set the annotation scale while working on the Model tab 1 On the right side of the drawing or application status bar, click the arrow next to the displayed annotation scale. 2 Select a scale from the list. To set the annotation scale for a layout viewport 1 On a layout tab, select a viewport. 2 On the right side of the drawing or application status bar, click the arrow next to the displayed annotation scale. 3 Select a scale from the list. To set the default annotation scale 1 At the command prompt, enter cannoscale. 2 Enter a scale name. Press ENTER Quick Reference Commands OBJECTSCALE Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects. System Variables ANNOAUTOSCALE Updates annotative objects to support the annotation scale when the annotation scale is changed. 1228 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations CANNOSCALE Sets the name of the current annotation scale for the current space. CANNOSCALEVALUE Returns the value of the current annotation scale. MSLTSCALE Scales linetypes displayed on the model tab by the annotation scale. Create Annotative Objects Objects that are commonly used to annotate drawings have a property called Annotative. When the Annotative property for these objects is turned on (set to Yes), these objects are called annotative objects Overview of Creating Annotative Objects When you add annotations to your drawing, you can turn on the property for those objects. These annotative objects are scaled based on the current setting and are automatically displayed at the correct size Annotative objects are defined at a paper height and display at the size determined by the annotation scale. The following objects can be annotative (have an Annotative property): ■ Hatches ■ Text (single-line and multiline) ■ Dimensions ■ Tolerances ■ Leaders and multileaders (created with MLEADER) ■ Blocks ■ Attributes Create Annotative Objects | 1229 Many of the dialog boxes used to create these objects contain an Annotative check box where you can make the object annotative. You can also change existing objects to be annotative by changing the annotative property in the Properties palette. When you hover the cursor over an annotative object that supports one annotation scale, the cursor displays a more than one annotation scale, it displays a 1230 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations icon. When the object supports icon. Text, dimension, and multileader styles can also be annotative. Annotative styles create annotative objects. Visual Fidelity for Annotative Objects When working with objects, this option allows you to maintain visual fidelity for these objects when they are viewed in AutoCAD 2007 and earlier releases. Visual fidelity is controlled by the SAVEFIDELITY system variable. If you work primarily in model space, it is recommended that you turn off visual fidelity (set SAVEFIDELITY to 0). However, if you need to exchange drawings with other users, and layout fidelity is most important, then visual fidelity should be turned on (set SAVEFIDELITY to 1). NOTE The SAVEFIDELITY system variable does not affect saving a drawing to the AutoCAD 2010 drawing or DXF file formats. Annotative objects may have multiple . When visual fidelity is on, annotative objects are decomposed and scale representations are saved (in an ) to separate layers, which are named based on their original layer and appended with a number. If you explode the block in AutoCAD 2007 or earlier releases, and then open the drawing in AutoCAD 2008 or later releases, each scale representation becomes a separate annotative object, each with one annotation scale. It is not recommended that you edit or create objects on these layers when working with a drawing created in AutoCAD 2008 and later releases in AutoCAD 2007 and earlier releases. Create Annotative Objects | 1231 When this option is not selected, a single model space representation is displayed on the Model tab. More annotation objects may be displayed on the Model tab depending on the ANNOALLVISIBLE setting. Also, more objects may be displayed in paper space viewports at different sizes than in AutoCAD 2008 and later releases. For a procedure to set this option for annotative objects, see To save drawings with visual fidelity for annotative objects. See also: ■ Work with Annotative Styles on page 1233 Quick Reference Commands ATTDEF Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block. BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. MLEADERSTYLE Creates and modifies multileader styles. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. TEXT Creates a single-line text object. 1232 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations Work with Annotative Styles You can minimize the steps to annotate a drawing by using annotative styles. Annotative text, dimension, and multileader styles create objects. The dialog boxes used to define these objects contain an Annotative check box where you can make the styles annotative. Annotative styles display a special palette. icon before their names in dialog boxes and the Properties You should specify the Paper Height value for any annotative text styles you create. The Paper Height setting specifies the height of the text in paper space. NOTE If you’ve specified the Paper Height value for a dimension or multileader style, this setting overrides the text style Paper Height setting. If you redefine styles to be annotative or nonannotative, existing objects that reference those styles are not automatically updated to reflect the annotative property of the style or definition. Use the ANNOUPDATE command to update the existing objects to the current Annotative properties of the style. When you change the Style property of an existing object (whether it’s annotative or nonannotative), the object’s annotative properties will match that of the new style. If the style does not have a fixed height (the Height Create Annotative Objects | 1233 value is 0), the paper height of the object is calculated based on the object’s current height and the annotation scale. See also: ■ Work with Text Styles on page 1363 ■ Create Annotative Text on page 1235 ■ Use Dimension Styles on page 1424 ■ Create Annotative Dimensions and Tolerances on page 1239 ■ Work with Leader Styles on page 1346 ■ Create Annotative Leaders and Multileaders on page 1244 To create an annotative style ■ Follow the steps in one of the following procedures ■ To create a new annotative text style ■ To change an existing nonannotative text style to annotative ■ To create a new annotative dimension style ■ To change an existing dimension style to annotative ■ To create a new annotative multileader style ■ To change an existing multileader style to annotative To create annotative objects from annotative styles ■ Follow the steps in one of the following procedures ■ To create annotative single-line text ■ To create annotative multiline text ■ To create an annotative dimension ■ To create an annotative multileader 1234 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations Quick Reference Commands ANNOUPDATE Updates existing annotative objects to match the current properties of their styles. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. MLEADERSTYLE Creates and modifies multileader styles. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. Create Annotative Text Use text for notes and labels in your drawing. You create annotative text by using an annotative text style, which sets the height of the text on the paper. The current automatically determines the display size of the text in model space or paper space viewports. For example, you want text to display at a height of 3/16" on the paper, so you can define a text style to have a paper height of 3/16". When you add text to a viewport that has a scale of 1/2"=1'0", the current annotation scale, which is set to the same scale as the viewport’s, automatically scales the text to display appropriately at 4.5". You can also change existing nonannotative text to annotative by changing the text’s Annotative property to Yes. This applies to any text created through text styles or through the TEXT and MTEXT commands. You can set the orientation of annotative text objects to match the orientation of the paper. For more information about setting the orientation of annotative objects, see Set Orientation for Annotations on page 1256. See also: ■ Create Text on page 1300 ■ Work with Annotative Styles on page 1233 Create Annotative Objects | 1235 To create a new annotative text style 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style. 2 In the Text Style dialog box, click New. 3 In the New Text Style dialog box, enter a new style name. 4 Click OK. 5 In the Text Style dialog box, under Size, select Annotative. 6 In the Paper Text Height box, enter the height of the text as it will display on paper. 7 Click Apply. 8 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the current text style. 9 Click Close. To change an existing nonannotative text style to annotative 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style. 2 In the Text Style dialog box, Styles list, select a style. NOTE A icon next to a text style name indicates that the style is already annotative. 3 Under Size, select Annotative. 4 In the Paper Text Height box, enter the height of the text as it will display on paper. 5 Click Apply. 6 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the current text style. 7 Click Close. 1236 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations To create annotative single-line text 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style. 2 In the Text Style dialog box, Styles list, select an annotative text style. NOTE A annotative. icon next to a text style name indicates that the style is 3 Click Set Current to set this style as the current text style. 4 Click Close. 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Single Line Text. 6 Specify the insertion point for the first character. 7 Specify a text rotation angle. 8 Enter the text. To create annotative multiline text 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Multiline Text. 2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the multiline text object. The In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 3 Do one of the following: ■ On the Text Formatting toolbar, in the Text Style control, click the arrow and select an existing annotative text style from the list. ■ Click the Annotative button on the toolbar to create annotative multiline text. 4 Enter the text. 5 On the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK. Create Annotative Objects | 1237 To change existing multiline text to annotative or nonannotative 1 Double-click a multiline text object. The In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 2 Click the Annotative button on the toolbar to change existing multiline text to annotative or nonannotative. When the Annotative button is depressed, the text is annotative. When the button is not depressed, the text is nonannotative. 3 Click OK to save the changes. To change existing text (single-line or multiline) to be annotative or nonannotative 1 In the drawing, select a text object. 2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, under Text, click Annotative. 4 On the drop-down list, select Yes or No. To update text to reflect the current annotative properties of the text style 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style. 2 In the Text Style dialog box, Styles list, select the style used by the text that you want to update. NOTE A icon next to a text style name indicates that the style is already annotative. 3 Under Size, select Annotative. 4 In the Paper Text Height box, enter the height of the text as it will display on paper. 5 Click Apply. 6 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the current text style. 1238 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations 7 Click Close. 8 In the drawing, select all the text objects (text and mtext) that you want to update. 9 At the command prompt, enter annoupdate. To change the height of annotative text as it will display on the paper 1 In the drawing, select a text object. 2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, under Paper Text Height, enter a new value. Quick Reference Commands MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. TEXT Creates a single-line text object. Create Annotative Dimensions and Tolerances You can create dimensions for measurements in your drawing through annotative dimension styles. Annotative dimension styles create dimensions in which all the elements of the dimension, such as text, spacing, and arrows, scale uniformly by the . Create Annotative Objects | 1239 If you associate a dimension to an annotative object, the associativity of the dimension is lost. You can also change an existing nonannotative dimension to annotative by changing the dimension’s Annotative property to Yes. NOTE When the current dimension style is annotative, the value of DIMSCALE is automatically set to zero, and does not affect the dimension scale. You can also create annotative tolerances. Geometric tolerances show acceptable deviations of form, profile, orientation, location, and runout of a feature. See also: ■ Dimensions and Tolerances on page 1417 ■ Use Dimension Styles on page 1424 ■ Work with Annotative Styles on page 1233 To create a new annotative dimension style 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager dialog box, click New. 3 In the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, enter a new style name. 4 Select Annotative. 5 Click Continue. 1240 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations 6 In the New Dimension Style dialog box, select the appropriate tab and make changes to define the dimension style. 7 Click OK. 8 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the current dimension style. 9 Click Close. To change an existing dimension style to annotative 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager dialog box, Styles list, select a style. NOTE A icon next to a dimension style name indicates that the style is already annotative. 3 Click Modify. 4 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Scale for Dimension Features, select Annotative. 5 Click OK. 6 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the current dimension style. 7 Click Close. To create an annotative dimension 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager dialog box, Styles list, select an annotative dimension style. A icon next to a dimension style name indicates that the style is annotative. If an annotative style does not exist, you will need to create Create Annotative Objects | 1241 one first. For information on creating an annotative dimension style see, To create a new annotative dimension style. 3 Click Set Current. 4 Click Close. 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension drop-down list ➤ select a dimension type, or at the Command prompt, enter a dimension command. If the Select Annotation Scale dialog box is displayed, select the default scale you want to use for the new dimension object and click OK. 6 Place the dimension in the drawing area. 7 Select the new dimension and right-click. Click Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales. 8 In the Annotation Object Scale dialog box, click Add. 9 In the Add Scales to Object dialog box, select the object scales you want to assign to the dimension. Click OK. 10 In the Annotation Object Scale dialog box, click OK. To change an existing dimension to annotative or nonannotative 1 Select a dimension in a drawing. 2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, under Misc, click Annotative. 4 On the drop-down list, select Yes or No. To update dimensions to reflect the current annotative properties of the dimension style 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager dialog box, Styles list, select a style. 1242 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations NOTE A icon next to a dimension style name indicates that the style is already annotative. 3 Click Modify. 4 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Scale for Dimension Features, select Annotative. 5 Click OK. 6 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the current dimension style. 7 Click Close. 8 In the drawing, select all the dimensions that you want to update. 9 At the command prompt, enter annoupdate. To create an annotative tolerance 1 Follow the steps in To create geometric tolerances. 2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, under Misc, click Annotative. 4 On the drop-down list, select Yes or No. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. Create Annotative Objects | 1243 System Variables DIMANNO Creates a single-line text object. Create Annotative Leaders and Multileaders Leaders and multileader on page 2171 are used to add call outs to your drawings. You can create leaders through an annotative dimension style and multileaders through an annotative multileader style. When you create a leader, you create two separate objects: the leader and the text, block, or tolerance associated with the leader. When you create a multileader, you create a single object. If the multileader style is annotative, the associated text or tolerance will be annotative as well, regardless of the annotative setting of the text style or tolerance. NOTE It is recommended that you create non-annotative entities when creating a mleader content block. Blocks used in leaders and multileaders must be non-annotative. You can change the Annotative property of leaders and multileaders in the Properties palette. See also: ■ Create Leaders on page 1336 ■ Work with Leader Styles on page 1346 To create a new annotative multileader style 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Multileader Style. 2 In the Multileader Style Manager dialog box, click New. 3 In the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, enter a new style name, and select Annotative. 4 Click Continue. 1244 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations 5 In the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, select the appropriate tab and make changes to define the multileader style. 6 Click OK. 7 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the multileader style. 8 Click Close. To change an existing multileader style to annotative 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Multileader Style. 2 In the Multileader Style Manager dialog box, Styles list, select a style. NOTE A icon next to a multileader style name indicates that the style is already annotative. 3 Click Modify. 4 In the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, Leader Structure tab, under Scale, select Annotative. 5 Click OK. 6 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the multileader style. 7 Click Close. To create an annotative multileader 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Multileader Style. 2 In the Multileader Style Manager dialog box, Styles list, select an annotative multileader style. NOTE A is annotative. icon next to a multileader style name indicates that the style Create Annotative Objects | 1245 3 Click Set Current. 4 Click Close. 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Multileader. 6 Choose a point for the leader head. 7 Choose the last point for the leader. 8 Specify the text width. 9 Enter text. 10 On the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK. To change an existing leader or multileader to annotative or nonannotative 1 Select a leader or multileader in a drawing. 2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, under Misc, click Annotative. 4 On the drop-down list, select Yes or No. Quick Reference Commands MLEADERSTYLE Creates and modifies multileader styles. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. Create Annotative Blocks and Attributes If you want to use geometric objects to annotate your drawing, combine the objects into an annotative block definition. 1246 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations block definitions create annotative block references. Annotative block references and attributes initially support the current annotation scale at the time they are inserted. You should insert annotative block references with a unit factor of 1. You cannot change the Annotative property of individual block references. To set an annotative block’s paper size, you should define the block in paper space or on the Model tab with the set to 1:1. When creating and working with annotative blocks and annotative objects within blocks, the following points should be noted: ■ Nonannotative blocks can contain annotative objects, which are scaled by the block’s scale factor in addition to the annotation scale. ■ Annotative blocks cannot reside in annotative blocks. ■ Annotative block references are scaled uniformly by the current annotation scale as well as any user scale applied to the block reference. ■ Blocks that contain annotative objects should not be manually scaled. You can define annotative attributes for annotative and nonannotative blocks. Use annotative attributes with nonannotative blocks when you want the geometry in the block to display on the paper based on the scale of the viewport, but you want the attribute text to display at the Paper Height defined for the attribute. Create Annotative Objects | 1247 You can set the orientation of annotative blocks to match the orientation of the paper. For more information about setting the orientation of annotative objects, see Set Orientation for Annotations on page 1256. You can use the ANNOTATIVEDWG system variable to specify whether or not the entire drawing will behave as an annotative block when inserted into another drawing. The ANNOTATIVEDWG system variable becomes read-only if the drawing contains annotative objects. NOTE The INSUNITS setting is ignored when inserting blocks into a drawing. See also: ■ Work with Blocks on page 851 ■ Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) on page 875 To create an annotative block definition 1 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create. 2 In the Block Definition dialog box, enter a block name in the Name box. 3 Under Objects, select Convert to Block. 4 Click Select Objects. 5 Under Behavior, select Annotative. 6 Use your pointing device to select objects to be included in block definition. Press ENTER to complete object selection. 7 In the Block Definition dialog box, under Base Point, specify the block insertion point. 8 Click OK. To update existing block references to be annotative 1 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create. 2 In the Block Definition dialog box, Name box, click the arrow and select the name of the block you want to update to be annotative. 1248 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations 3 Under Behavior, select Annotative. 4 Click OK. The existing block references in the drawing are now annotative. To create an annotative attribute definition 1 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Define Attributes. 2 In the Attribute Definition dialog box, set the Attribute Modes and enter Tag information, Insertion Point and Text Settings. 3 Under Text Settings, select Annotative. 4 Click OK. 5 Specify the start point. 6 Press ENTER. Quick Reference Commands ATTDEF Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block. BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. System Variables ANNOTATIVEDWG Specifies whether or not the drawing will behave as an annotative block when inserted into another drawing. Create Annotative Hatches Use an annotative hatch to symbolically represent material such as sand, concrete, steel, earth, etc. Create Annotative Objects | 1249 An hatch is defined at a paper size. You can create individual annotative hatch objects as well as annotative hatch patterns. The hatch pattern definitions stored in the acad.pat file contain information that indicates whether the pattern is annotative or non-annotative. When the selected hatch pattern is annotative, the Annotative checkbox in the Hatch and Gradient dialog box should be selected. You can use the HPANNOTATIVE system variable to specify whether or notnew hatches are annotative. By default, new hatch objects are nonannotative. The orientation of annotative hatches always matches the orientation of the layout. See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Pattern Definitions in the Customization Guide To create an annotative hatch object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch. 2 At the command prompt, enter settings. 3 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, click Add: Select Objects. 4 Specify the object or objects you want to hatch. 1250 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations 5 Under Options, select Annotative. 6 Click OK. To change an existing hatch object to annotative 1 In model space, at the command prompt, enter cannoscale. 2 Enter the scale set for the viewport in which the hatch is displayed. 3 In the drawing, select the hatch. 4 In the Properties palette, under Pattern, click Annotative. 5 On the drop-down list, select Yes. Quick Reference Commands HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. System Variables HPANNOTATIVE Display Annotative Objects For model space or a layout viewport, you can display all the annotative objects or only those that support the current annotation scale. This reduces the need to use multiple layers to manage the visibility of your annotations. You use the Annotation Visibility button on the right side of the application or drawing status bar to choose the display setting for annotative objects. Annotation visibility is turned on by default. When annotation visibility is turned on, all annotative objects are displayed. When annotation visibility is turned off , only annotative objects for the current scale are displayed. Display Annotative Objects | 1251 In general, you should turn off annotation visibility, except when inspecting a drawing created by another person or when adding scales to existing annotative objects. Annotation visibility is also controlled by the ANNOALLVISIBLE system variable. In order for an annotative object to be visible, the layer the object is on must be turned on. If an object supports more than one annotation scale, the object will display at the current scale. When the MSLTSCALE system variable is set to 1 (default), linetypes displayed on the model tab are scaled by the annotation scale See also: ■ Drawing Status Bar on page 52 To display or hide annotative objects in a drawing ➤ On the drawing or application status bar, click the Annotation Visibility button. When the button is displayed, all annotative objects are displayed. When the button is displayed, only annotative objects that support the current annotation scale are displayed. Quick Reference System Variables ANNOALLVISIBLE Hides or displays annotative objects that do not support the current annotation scale. MSLTSCALE Scales linetypes displayed on the model tab by the annotation scale. 1252 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations SELECTIONANNODISPLAY Controls whether alternate scale representations are temporarily displayed in a dimmed state when an annotative object is selected. Add and Modify Scale Representations When you create an object in your drawing, it supports one : the annotation scale that was current when you created the object. You can update annotative objects to support additional annotation scales. When you update an annotative object to support additional scales, you add additional to the object. For example, if an annotative multileader supports two annotations scales, it has two scale representations. When you select an annotative object, grips are displayed on the scale representation that supports the current annotation scale. You can use these grips to manipulate the current scale representation. All other scale representations of the object are displayed in a dimmed state when the SELECTIONANNODISPLAY system variable is set to 1 (default). Use the ANNORESET command to reset the location of all scale representations for an annotative object to that of the current scale representation. Add and Modify Scale Representations | 1253 To add the current annotation scale to an annotative object 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales. 2 In a drawing, select one or more annotative objects. 3 Press ENTER. To delete the current annotation scale from an annotative object 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales. 2 In a drawing, select one or more annotative objects. 3 Press ENTER. To automatically update annotative objects to support the current annotation scale ■ On the drawing or application status bar, click the button displays as so it . To add an annotation scale to an annotative object 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales. 2 In the drawing area, select one or more annotative objects. 3 Press ENTER. 4 In the Annotative Object Scale dialog box, click Add. 5 In the Add Scales to Object dialog box, select one or more scales to add to the objects. (Press and hold the SHIFT key to select more than one scale.) 1254 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations 6 Click OK. 7 In the Annotative Object Scale dialog box, click OK. To delete an annotation scale from an annotative object 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales. 2 In the drawing area, select one or more annotative objects. 3 Press ENTER. 4 In the Annotative Object Scale dialog box, select one or more scales to delete from the objects. (Press and hold the SHIFT key to select more than one scale.). NOTE You cannot delete the 1:1 scale. 5 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands ANNORESET Resets the locations of all alternate scale representations of the selected annotative objects. OBJECTSCALE Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects. System Variables SELECTIONANNODISPLAY Controls whether alternate scale representations are temporarily displayed in a dimmed state when an annotative object is selected. Add and Modify Scale Representations | 1255 Set Orientation for Annotations blocks and text can be set so that their orientation matches the orientation of the layout. The orientation of annotative hatches always matches the orientation of the layout. Even if the view in the layout viewport is twisted or if the viewpoint is non-planar, the orientation of these objects in layout viewports will match the orientation of the layout. Annotative attributes in blocks match the paper orientation of the block. See also: ■ Work with Text Styles on page 1363 ■ Create Annotative Text on page 1235 ■ Create Annotative Blocks and Attributes on page 1246 ■ Create Annotative Hatches on page 1249 To match the layout’s orientation for an annotative text style 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style. 1256 | Chapter 27 Work with Annotations 2 In the Text Style dialog box, Styles list, select an annotative text style. NOTE A annotative. icon next to a text style name indicates that the style is 3 Under Size, select Match Text Orientation to Layout. 4 Click Apply. 5 Click Close. To match the layout’s orientation for an annotative block definition 1 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create. 2 In the Block Definition dialog box, under Name, select a block. 3 Under Behavior, select Annotative. 4 Under Behavior, select Match Block Orientation to Layout. 5 Click Close. To match the layout’s orientation for an existing annotative text object 1 In the drawing, select an annotative text object. 2 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style. 3 In the Text Style dialog box, under Size, select Match Orientation to Layout. Set Orientation for Annotations | 1257 1258 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 28 Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills on page 1259 Specify Hatch and Fill Areas on page 1267 Control the Appearance of Hatches on page 1272 Modify Hatches and Fills on page 1289 Create a Blank Area to Cover Objects on page 1295 Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Hatches and fills do not have to be bounded. In the following illustration, the concrete hatches are bounded, while the earth hatches are unbounded. 1259 By default, bounded hatches are associative, which means that the hatch object is associated with the hatch boundary objects, and changes to the boundary objects are automatically applied to the hatch. To maintain associativity, the boundary objects must continue to completely enclose the hatch. The alignment and orientation of a hatch pattern is determined by the current location and orientation of the user coordinate system, in addition to controls in the user interface. Moving or rotating the UCS is an alternate method for controlling hatch patterns. NOTE By default, a preview of the hatch displays as you move the cursor over enclosed areas. To improve the response time in large drawings, turn off the hatch preview feature with the HPQUICKPREVIEW system variable. Alternatively, solid-filled areas can be created using ■ 2D solids (SOLID) ■ Wide polylines (PLINE) ■ Donuts (DONUT) To drag hatch patterns into your drawing 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Content panel ➤ Design Center. 1260 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts NOTE This procedure describes how to use DesignCenter to drag hatch patterns into your drawing. You can also drag hatch patterns from a tool palette. 2 On the DesignCenter toolbar, click Search. 3 In the Search dialog box, do the following: ■ From the Look For drop-down list, select Hatch Pattern Files. ■ From the In drop-down list, select the drive where the program is installed. ■ Confirm that Search Subfolders is selected. ■ On the Hatch Pattern Files tab, in Search for the Name, enter * (asterisk). 4 Click Search Now. The default hatch pattern file is acad.pat or acadiso.pat. The search results may display the same file in different locations. NOTE For convenient access, you can add the PAT file to Favorites by selecting the file and clicking the Favorites button. A shortcut to the PAT file is displayed in the Favorites folder in DesignCenter folders list. 5 In the search results, double-click the filename to load the hatch patterns into the content area of DesignCenter. 6 (Optional) Right-click a pattern to display a shortcut menu with the following options: ■ HATCH. Opens the Hatch and Gradient dialog box. ■ Copy. Stores the hatch pattern on the Clipboard. ■ Create Tool Palette. Creates a new tool palette that contains the selected pattern. 7 From the content area of DesignCenter, drag a hatch pattern into an enclosed area in your drawing or onto a tool palette. NOTE If the hatch pattern scale is too large or small, an error message is displayed. You can adjust the scale for any hatch pattern by selecting it to display the Hatch Editor tab. If the ribbon is closed, use the Properties palette or HATCHEDIT. Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills | 1261 To hatch or fill areas (ribbon turned on) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch. 2 On the Properties panel, select one of the options from the Hatch Type drop-down list. 3 On the Pattern panel, click a hatch pattern or fill. 4 Specify a point inside each area to be hatched. 5 On the ribbon, make any adjustments as needed. On the Properties panel, you can change the hatch type and colors or modify the transparency level, angle, or scale for the hatch. 6 (Optional) Expand the Options panel, and select one of the draw order options from the bottom drop-down list. You can change the draw order of the hatch so that the hatch is displayed either behind or in front of the hatch boundary, or behind or in front of all other objects. 7 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the command. To hatch or fill areas (ribbon turned off) 1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar. 2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points. 3 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch, and press Enter. 4 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, select a pattern or Solid from the Pattern list. To see how the hatch pattern will look, click the Preview button. Press Esc when you finish previewing to return to the dialog box. 5 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, make adjustments, if necessary. To access additional options, click the More Options button at the bottom-right of the dialog box. 1262 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts 6 (Optional) From the Draw Order drop-down list, choose one of the options. You can change the draw order of the hatch so that the hatch is displayed either behind or in front of the hatch boundary, or behind or in front of all other objects. 7 Click OK to apply the hatch. To hatch selected objects (ribbon turned on) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch. 2 On the Boundaries panel, click Select. 3 Select the objects that you want to hatch. 4 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the command. To hatch selected objects (ribbon turned off) 1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar. 2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, under Boundaries, click Add: Select Objects. 3 Select the objects that you want to hatch and press Enter. 4 Click OK to apply the hatch. Quick Reference Commands ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. GRADIENT Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a gradient fill. Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills | 1263 HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. HATCHTOBACK Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other objects. MATCHPROP Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. UCS Manages user coordinate systems. System Variables GFANG Specifies the angle of a gradient fill. GFCLR1 Specifies the color for a one-color gradient fill or the first color for a two-color gradient fill. GFCLR2 Specifies the second color for a two-color gradient fill. GFCLRLUM Controls the tint or shade level in a one-color gradient fill. GFCLRSTATE Specifies whether a gradient fill uses one color or two colors. GFNAME Specifies the pattern of a gradient fill. 1264 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts GFSHIFT Specifies whether the pattern in a gradient fill is centered or is shifted up and to the left. HPANG Sets the angle for new hatch patterns. HPANNOTATIVE Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative. HPASSOC Controls whether hatches and fills are associative. HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR Controls the background color for hatch patterns. HPBOUND Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY. HPBOUNDRETAIN Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills. HPCOLOR Sets a default color for new hatches. HPDLGMODE Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch Edit dialog box. HPDOUBLE Specifies hatch pattern doubling for user-defined patterns. HPDRAWORDER Controls the draw order of hatches and fills. HPGAPTOL Treats a set of objects that almost enclose an area as a closed hatch boundary. HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills | 1265 HPISLANDDETECTION Controls how islands within the hatch boundary are treated. HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected. HPLAYER Specifies a default layer for new hatches and fills. HPMAXLINES Sets the maximum number of hatch lines that are generated in a hatch operation. HPNAME Sets the default hatch pattern name. HPOBJWARNING Sets the number of hatch boundary objects that can be selected before displaying a warning message. HPORIGIN Sets the hatch origin point for new hatch patterns relative to the current user coordinate system. HPORIGINMODE Controls how the default hatch origin point is determined. HPQUICKPREVIEW Controls whether to display a preview when specifying internal points for a hatch. HPSCALE Sets the hatch pattern scale factor. HPSEPARATE Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries. HPSPACE Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns. 1266 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts HPTRANSPARENCY Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills. MIRRHATCH Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection. Specify Hatch and Fill Areas Define boundaries for hatches and fills from existing objects or from specified boundary points. Use one of several methods to specify the 2D geometric boundaries of a hatch or fill. ■ Specify a point in an area that is enclosed by objects. ■ Select objects that enclose an area. ■ Specify boundary points using the -HATCH Draw option. ■ Drag a hatch into an enclosed area from a tool palette or DesignCenter. NOTE Enclosed areas can be hatched only if they are in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. Create Associative Hatches Associative hatches are automatically updated when their boundary objects are modified. Minor changes in the boundary of an associative hatch do not require erasing and re-creating the hatch. Specify Hatch and Fill Areas | 1267 Hatch associativity is turned on by default and is controlled by the HPASSOC system variable. You can also control hatch associativity using the following tools in the user interface: ■ Hatch and Gradient dialog box ■ Hatch Edit dialog box ■ Hatch panel on the ribbon ■ Properties palette Nonassociative hatches are not updated when their original boundary is changed. Hatch Enclosed Areas Within Boundaries Enclosed areas within hatch boundaries are called islands. There are four island detection styles available from the user interface: ■ Normal Island Detection ■ Outer Island Detection (recommended) ■ Ignore Island Detection ■ No Island Detection (legacy behavior that is similar to the Ignore style) Using Normal Island Detection, if you specify the internal Pick Point shown, islands remain unhatched and islands within islands are hatched. Using the same pick point, the results of the options are compared below. 1268 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts NOTE Text objects are treated as islands. If island detection is turned on, the result always leaves a rectangular space around the text. Include Objects in a Boundary Set When hatching a small area in a large, complex drawing, you can save time by selecting a smaller set of objects in the drawing to be used in determining the hatch boundary. Identify Gaps in Hatch Boundaries If the specified internal point is not within a fully enclosed area, red circles are displayed at the unconnected endpoints of the boundary to identify the gaps. The red circles remain displayed after you exit the HATCH command. They are removed when you specify another internal point for the hatch, or when you use the REDRAW, REGEN, or REGENALL commands. Specify Hatch and Fill Areas | 1269 To hatch an area whose boundary is not quite closed, do one of the following: ■ Locate the gaps and modify the boundary objects so they form a closed boundary. ■ Set the HPGAPTOL system variable to a value large enough to bridge the gaps. HPGAPTOL applies only to gaps between geometric objects that would meet if extended. NOTE By default, a preview of the hatch displays as you move the cursor over bounded areas. To improve the response time in large drawings, turn off the hatch preview feature with the HPQUICKPREVIEW system variable. See also: ■ Reshape a Hatch or Fill on page 1291 To define a boundary set in a complex drawing (ribbon turned on) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch. 2 Expand the Boundaries panel, and click the Select New Boundary Set button at the bottom-left of the expanded panel. 3 Select the objects to be considered for the hatch and press Enter. Selecting the objects with a crossing window is often the best method. 4 Specify a point inside each area that you want hatched. 5 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the command. To define a boundary set in a complex drawing (ribbon turned off) 1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar. 2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, click the More Options button at the bottom-right. 3 Under Boundary Set, click New. 4 Select the objects to be considered for the hatch and press Enter. 1270 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts Selecting the objects with a crossing window is often the best method. 5 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, click Add: Pick Points. 6 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch. 7 Click OK to apply the hatch. Quick Reference Commands HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. System Variables HPANG Sets the angle for new hatch patterns. HPASSOC Controls whether hatches and fills are associative. HPBOUND Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY. HPBOUNDRETAIN Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills. HPGAPTOL Treats a set of objects that almost enclose an area as a closed hatch boundary. HPISLANDDETECTION Controls how islands within the hatch boundary are treated. HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected. Specify Hatch and Fill Areas | 1271 HPQUICKPREVIEW Controls whether to display a preview when specifying internal points for a hatch. HPSEPARATE Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries. Control the Appearance of Hatches Specify a hatch pattern or fill, and control its alignment and scale. Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill Choose from three types of hatch patterns, and two types of fills. ■ Predefined hatch patterns. Choose from over 70 ANSI, ISO, and other industry-standard hatch patterns that are available. You can also use hatch patterns from hatch pattern libraries supplied by other companies. Hatch patterns are defined in the acad.pat text file. ■ User-defined hatch patterns. Define a hatch pattern that uses the current linetype with a specified spacing and angle. ■ Custom hatch patterns. Define a custom hatch pattern definition in a .pat file. ■ Solid fill. Fill an area with a solid color by choosing the SOLID predefined hatch. ■ Gradient fill. Fill an enclosed area with a color gradient. A gradient fill can be displayed as a tint (a color mixed with white), a shade (a color mixed with black), or a smooth transition between two colors. Gradients that mimic colors displayed on a cylinder, a sphere, or other shapes are available. NOTE You cannot use plot styles to control the plotted color of gradient fills. 1272 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts Assign a Background Color to Hatch Patterns Predefined, user defined, and custom hatch patterns, can be assigned a background fill color. The background fill color shares the same level of transparency as the pattern itself. See also: ■ Modify Hatch Properties on page 1289 ■ “Overview of Hatch Pattern Definitions” in the Customization Guide To create a hatch with a predefined hatch pattern (ribbon turned on) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch. 2 On the Properties panel, click Pattern from the Hatch Type drop-down list. 3 (Optional) On the Properties panel, click a color override from the Hatch Color drop-down list. Specify any other options as needed. 4 On the Pattern panel, click a hatch pattern. 5 Specify a point inside each area that you want hatched. 6 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the command. To create a hatch with a predefined hatch pattern (ribbon turned off) 1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar. 2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, Hatch tab, under Type and Pattern, click Predefined from the Type drop-down list. 3 Select a pattern from the Pattern drop-down list. 4 (Optional) Select a color override from the Color drop-down list. Specify any other options as needed. 5 Under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points. 6 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch and press Enter. Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill | 1273 7 Click OK to apply the hatch. To fill an area with a solid color (ribbon turned on) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch. 2 On the Properties panel, click Solid from the Hatch Type drop-down list, or click Solid on the Pattern panel. 3 (Optional) On the Properties panel, click a color override from the Hatch Color drop-down list. Specify any other options as needed. 4 Specify a point inside each area that you want to fill. 5 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the command. To fill an area with a solid color (ribbon turned off) 1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar. 2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, Hatch tab, under Type and Pattern, click Predefined from the Type drop-down list. 3 Click Solid from the Pattern drop-down list. 4 (Optional) Select a color override from the Color drop-down list. Specify any other options as needed. 5 Under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points. 6 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch and press Enter. 7 Click OK to apply the hatch. Quick Reference Commands GRADIENT Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a gradient fill. 1274 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. HATCHTOBACK Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other objects. MATCHPROP Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. UCS Manages user coordinate systems. System Variables GFANG Specifies the angle of a gradient fill. GFCLR1 Specifies the color for a one-color gradient fill or the first color for a two-color gradient fill. GFCLR2 Specifies the second color for a two-color gradient fill. GFCLRLUM Controls the tint or shade level in a one-color gradient fill. GFCLRSTATE Specifies whether a gradient fill uses one color or two colors. GFNAME Specifies the pattern of a gradient fill. Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill | 1275 GFSHIFT Specifies whether the pattern in a gradient fill is centered or is shifted up and to the left. HPANG Sets the angle for new hatch patterns. HPANNOTATIVE Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative. HPASSOC Controls whether hatches and fills are associative. HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR Controls the background color for hatch patterns. HPBOUND Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY. HPBOUNDRETAIN Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills. HPCOLOR Sets a default color for new hatches. HPDOUBLE Specifies hatch pattern doubling for user-defined patterns. HPDRAWORDER Controls the draw order of hatches and fills. HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. HPISLANDDETECTION Controls how islands within the hatch boundary are treated. HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected. 1276 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts HPLAYER Specifies a default layer for new hatches and fills. HPMAXLINES Sets the maximum number of hatch lines that are generated in a hatch operation. HPNAME Sets the default hatch pattern name. HPOBJWARNING Sets the number of hatch boundary objects that can be selected before displaying a warning message. HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. HPORIGIN Sets the hatch origin point for new hatch patterns relative to the current user coordinate system. HPORIGINMODE Controls how the default hatch origin point is determined. HPQUICKPREVIEW Controls whether to display a preview when specifying internal points for a hatch. HPSCALE Sets the hatch pattern scale factor. HPSEPARATE Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries. HPSPACE Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns. HPTRANSPARENCY Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills. Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill | 1277 MIRRHATCH Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns. Control the Hatch Origin Point Each hatch pattern is aligned with an origin point. Changing the origin point shifts the pattern. By default, hatch patterns are aligned with the origin point of the user coordinate system. However, sometimes you need to move the origin point of the hatch object. For example, if you create a brick pattern, you can start with a complete brick in the lower-left corner of the hatched area by specifying a new origin point. The hatch origin and its behavior depend on settings in the user interface that control the HPORIGIN, HPORIGINMODE, and HPINHERIT system variables. Alternatively, you can control hatch patterns by changing the location and orientation of the user coordinate system. See also: ■ Modify Hatch Alignment, Scale, and Rotation on page 1290 To specify the alignment of a hatch pattern (ribbon turned on) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch. 2 On the Properties panel, click Pattern from the Hatch Type drop-down list. 3 On the Pattern panel, click a hatch pattern. 4 On the Origin panel, click Set Origin, and specify a point in the drawing. The hatch pattern will be aligned to this point. 5 On the Properties panel, specify a hatch angle. 6 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch. 1278 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts 7 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the command. Alternatively, you can control the origin and rotation of a hatch pattern by changing the origin and rotation of the user coordinate system (UCS) before you create the hatch. To specify the alignment of a hatch pattern (ribbon turned off) 1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar. 2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, Hatch tab, under Type and Pattern, click Predefined from the Type drop-down list. 3 Select a hatch pattern from the Pattern drop-down list. 4 Under Hatch Origin, click Specified Origin and click Click to Set New Origin. Specify a point in the drawing. The hatch pattern will be aligned to this point. 5 Under Angle and Scale, specify a hatch angle to rotate the hatch pattern. 6 Under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points. 7 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch and press Enter. 8 Click OK to apply the hatch. Alternatively, you can control the origin and rotation of a hatch pattern by changing the origin and rotation of the user coordinate system (UCS) before you create the hatch. Quick Reference Commands HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. Control the Hatch Origin Point | 1279 PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. UCS Manages user coordinate systems. System Variables HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. HPORIGIN Sets the hatch origin point for new hatch patterns relative to the current user coordinate system. HPORIGINMODE Controls how the default hatch origin point is determined. HPQUICKPREVIEW Controls whether to display a preview when specifying internal points for a hatch. HPSCALE Sets the hatch pattern scale factor. HPSEPARATE Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries. HPSPACE Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns. Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns The scale of hatch patterns can be set individually, or it can be set automatically based on the scale of each layout viewport. ■ If you create hatch patterns exclusively for a single view or at a constant scale, you can set the current hatch scale manually in the interface or with the HPSCALE system variable. 1280 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts ■ If you work with layout viewports in different scales, you can apply scale factors automatically by making them annotative. This method is more efficient than creating duplicate hatch pattern objects with different scale factors. For more information about using annotative scaling, see Create Annotative Hatches on page 1249. NOTE To prevent accidental creation of an enormous number of hatch lines, the maximum number of hatch lines created in a single hatch operation is limited. This limit prevents memory and performance problems. However, you can change the maximum number of hatch lines with the HPMAXLINES system variable. See also: ■ Scale Annotations on page 1224 ■ Modify Hatch Alignment, Scale, and Rotation on page 1290 To set the scale of a hatch pattern (ribbon turned on) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch. 2 On the Properties panel, click Pattern from the Hatch Type drop-down list. 3 On the Pattern panel, click a hatch pattern. 4 On the Properties panel, enter a hatch pattern scale. 5 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch. 6 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the command. To set the scale of a hatch pattern (ribbon turned off) 1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar. 2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, Hatch tab, under Type and Pattern, click Predefined from the Type drop-down list. 3 Select a pattern from the Pattern drop-down list. Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns | 1281 4 Under Angle and Scale, enter a new scale value or click the drop-down arrow to display a list of scales. 5 Under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points. 6 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch and press Enter. 7 Click OK to apply the hatch. Quick Reference Commands HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. MATCHPROP Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables HPANNOTATIVE Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative. HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. HPMAXLINES Sets the maximum number of hatch lines that are generated in a hatch operation. HPOBJWARNING Sets the number of hatch boundary objects that can be selected before displaying a warning message. 1282 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. HPSCALE Sets the hatch pattern scale factor. HPSPACE Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns. Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills Control the default color, layer, and transparency of hatch objects separately from other objects. Hatch objects have an additional capability that is not available with other types of objects. You can specify which layer, color, and transparency settings will be automatically applied to each new hatch object, regardless of the current property settings. This can save you time. For example, you can specify that all new hatch objects are automatically created on a specified layer regardless of the current layer setting. NOTE If you do not want to override the current property settings, select Use Current for the hatch’s layer, color, and transparency settings. See also: ■ Modify Hatch Properties on page 1289 ■ Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed on page 545 To set a transparency override for new hatches (ribbon turned on) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch. 2 On the Properties panel, drag the Hatch Transparency slider or enter a value. 3 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch. 4 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the command. Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills | 1283 All new hatch objects will use this transparency value instead of the current transparency value used by all other objects. To set a transparency override for new hatches (ribbon turned off) 1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar. 2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, under Options, select Specify Value from the Transparency drop-down list. 3 Enter transparency value or drag the slider. 4 Under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points. 5 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch and press Enter. 6 Click OK to apply the hatch. All new hatch objects will use this transparency value instead of the current transparency value used by all other objects. Quick Reference Commands HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. HATCHTOBACK Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other objects. MATCHPROP Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. 1284 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts System Variables HPANNOTATIVE Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative. HPASSOC Controls whether hatches and fills are associative. HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR Controls the background color for hatch patterns. HPCOLOR Sets a default color for new hatches. HPDRAWORDER Controls the draw order of hatches and fills. HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. HPLAYER Specifies a default layer for new hatches and fills. HPSCALE Sets the hatch pattern scale factor. HPSEPARATE Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries. HPTRANSPARENCY Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills. MIRRHATCH Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns. Control the Display of Hatch Boundaries Hide or remove boundary objects to create hatches without borders. Control the Display of Hatch Boundaries | 1285 To create hatches that have no boundary objects, do one of the following: ■ Erase the boundary objects of an existing hatch. ■ Trim an existing hatch to objects that cross the edges of the hatch. After trimming, erase the objects. ■ Define hatch boundary points with the Draw option of the -HATCH command. To hide a hatch's boundary objects, assign the boundary objects to a different layer than the hatch object, and then turn off or freeze the layer of the boundary objects. This method maintains hatch associativity. See also: ■ Reshape a Hatch or Fill on page 1291 To create an unbounded hatch 1 At the Command prompt, enter -hatch. 2 Enter p to specify Properties. 3 Enter the name of the pattern. For example, enter earth to specify the EARTH pattern. 4 Specify the scale and angle for the hatch pattern. 5 Enter w to specify Draw Boundary. 6 Enter n to discard the polyline boundary once the hatch area has been defined. 7 Specify points to define the boundary. Enter c to close the polyline boundary. 1286 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts 8 Press Enter twice to create the hatch. Quick Reference Commands -HATCH conref to -Hatch blurb PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables HPANG Sets the angle for new hatch patterns. HPBOUNDRETAIN Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills. HPCOLOR Sets a default color for new hatches. HPDLGMODE Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch Edit dialog box. HPDOUBLE Specifies hatch pattern doubling for user-defined patterns. HPMAXLINES Sets the maximum number of hatch lines that are generated in a hatch operation. HPNAME Sets the default hatch pattern name. HPOBJWARNING Sets the number of hatch boundary objects that can be selected before displaying a warning message. Control the Display of Hatch Boundaries | 1287 HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. HPORIGIN Sets the hatch origin point for new hatch patterns relative to the current user coordinate system. HPORIGINMODE Controls how the default hatch origin point is determined. HPSCALE Sets the hatch pattern scale factor. HPSPACE Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns. HPTRANSPARENCY Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills. Control the Draw Order of Hatches and Fills Specify the draw order for a hatch object to control whether it is displayed behind or in front of the hatch boundary, or behind or in front of all other objects. This behavior is controlled by the HPDRAWORDER system variable. In drawings that contain many hatch objects, use the HATCHTOBACK command to display all hatch objects behind all other objects. Quick Reference Commands HATCHTOBACK Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other objects. 1288 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts System Variables HPDRAWORDER Controls the draw order of hatches and fills. Modify Hatches and Fills Modify hatch properties and boundaries, or re-create the boundaries hatch objects. Modify Hatch Properties Modify the properties of hatch objects directly or copy them from another hatch object. The following tools are available for modifying hatch properties: ■ Hatch panel controls. Display on the ribbon by selecting a hatch object. ■ Hatch Edit dialog box. Access the dialog box with HATCHEDIT. ■ Properties palette. ■ Hatch shortcut menu. Access the menu by right-clicking a hatch object. ■ Hatch dynamic menu. Access the menu by hovering over the control grip on a selected hatch. ■ Command line. Enter -HATCHEDIT. Copy the properties of one hatch to another using the following methods: ■ Inherit Properties button in the Hatch Edit dialog box. Copy all hatch-specific properties. ■ Match Properties command. Use MATCHPROP to copy general properties and hatch-specific properties, with the exception of the hatch origin. See also: ■ Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed on page 545 Modify Hatches and Fills | 1289 Quick Reference Commands HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. HATCHTOBACK Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other objects. MATCHPROP Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables HPDLGMODE Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch Edit dialog box. HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. Modify Hatch Alignment, Scale, and Rotation Shift, scale, or rotate hatch patterns to align them with existing objects. To shift a hatch pattern, relocate the origin point of the hatch object. The same tools in the user interface as listed in Modify Hatch Properties on page 1289 include options for specifying a new origin point, specifying a different rotation angle, and changing the scale of the hatch pattern. In some cases, it might be easier to move or rotate the user coordinate system to align with existing objects, and then recreate the hatch. To modify the properties of a hatch object 1 Select a hatch object. 1290 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts 2 Change the desired hatch settings from the Hatch Editor tab on the ribbon, the Modify menu, Modify toolbar, or enter hatchedit at the Command prompt. 3 In the user interface, a panel in the Hatch Editor tab, or the Hatch Edit dialog box, change the hatch settings or properties as needed. Quick Reference Commands HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. MATCHPROP Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables HPDLGMODE Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch Edit dialog box. HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. Reshape a Hatch or Fill Reshape an associative hatch by modifying the boundary objects. Reshape a nonassociative hatch by modifying the hatch object. Modify the Extents of Associative Hatches and Fills If you modify the boundary objects of an associative hatch, and the result maintains a closed boundary, the associated hatch object is automatically updated. If the changes result in an open boundary, the hatch loses its associativity with the boundary objects, and the hatch remains unchanged. Reshape a Hatch or Fill | 1291 When you select an associative hatch object, it displays a circular grip, called the control grip, at the center of the hatch extents. Hover over the control grip to display a shortcut menu with several hatch options, or right-click to display additional options. You can also change the hatch object by editing the grips of the associated boundary objects. To easily select all of the objects in a complex boundary, use the Display Boundary Objects option available from the ribbon or the Hatch Edit dialog box. If the boundary object is a polyline or spline, multi-functional grips are displayed. For more information, see Modify Objects with Multi-Functional Grips on page 735. Modify the Extents of Nonassociative Hatches and Fills When you select a nonassociative hatch, multi-functional grips are displayed on the hatch. Use these grips to modify the hatch extents and some several hatch properties. 1292 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts When you hover over a grip on a nonassociative hatch object, a grip menu displays several edit options based on the type of grip. For example, a linear segment grip has an option to convert the segment to an arc, or to add a vertex. NOTE For drastic changes, you can use TRIM to reduce the area covered by a hatch object, or EXPLODE to disassemble a hatch into its component objects. Quick Reference Commands EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. TRIM Trims objects to meet the edges of other objects. System Variables GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. Re-create the Boundary of a Hatch or Fill Create a new boundary object for a nonassociative or an unbounded hatch or fill. Use the Recreate Boundary option to generate a closed polyline or a region object around a selected hatch or fill. You can also specify that the new boundary object is associated with the hatch. Re-create the Boundary of a Hatch or Fill | 1293 To re-create the boundary object of a hatch or fill (ribbon turned on) 1 Select the hatch object. 2 On the ribbon, Boundaries panel, click Recreate Boundary. 3 At the prompt, specify the type of object to create as the new boundary, and whether to associate the boundary with the hatch. 4 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the command. To re-create the boundary object of a hatch or fill (ribbon turned off) 1 Start the Modify Hatch command from a menu or toolbar, or enter hatchedit at the Command prompt. 2 Select the hatch object. 3 In the Hatch Edit dialog box, under Boundaries, click Recreate Boundary. 4 Specify the type of object to create as the new boundary. 5 Specify whether to associate the boundary with the hatch object. 6 Click OK to apply the hatch. Quick Reference Commands HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. 1294 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts System Variables HPDLGMODE Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch Edit dialog box. HPBOUND Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY. HPBOUNDRETAIN Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills. HPSEPARATE Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries. Create a Blank Area to Cover Objects Create a polygonal area, called a wipeout to mask underlying objects with the current background color. A wipeout object covers existing objects with a blank area to make room for notes or to mask details. This area is defined by the wipeout frame, which you can turn on for editing, and turn off for plotting. Use the WIPEOUT command both for creating a wipeout object, and for controlling whether wipeout frames are displayed or hidden in the drawing. If a polyline is used to create a wipeout object, the polyline must be closed, contain line segments only, and have zero width. Use Wipeout Objects on a Layout You can create wipeout objects on a layout in paper space to mask objects in model space. However, in the Page Settings dialog box, under Plot Options, the Plot Paper Space Last option must be cleared before you plot to ensure that the wipeout object is plotted correctly. Create a Blank Area to Cover Objects | 1295 NOTE Because a wipeout object is similar to a raster image, it has the same requirements for plotting. You need a raster-capable plotter with either an ADI 4.3 raster-capable driver or the system printer driver. See also: ■ Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed on page 545 To cover existing objects with a blank area 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Markup panel ➤ Wipeout. 2 Specify points in a sequence that defines the perimeter of the area to be masked. 3 Press Enter to end the command. To turn all wipeout frames on or off 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Markup panel ➤ Wipeout. 2 At the prompt, enter f (Frames). 3 Enter on or off, and press Enter. Quick Reference Commands WIPEOUT Creates a wipeout object, and controls whether wipeout frames are displayed in the drawing. 1296 | Chapter 28 Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts Notes and Labels 29 You can create and modify several types of text, including text with leaders. You can control most text style settings by defining text styles. Overview of Notes and Labels You can create text in various ways. For short, simple entries, use single-line text. For longer entries with internal formatting, use multiline text (mtext). Although all entered text uses the current text style, which establishes the default font and format settings, you can use several methods to customize the text appearance. There are several tools that can change text scale and justification, find and replace text, and check for spelling errors. Text that is included in a dimension or tolerance is created using the dimensioning commands. You can also create multiline text with leaders. To create single-line text 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Single Line Text. 2 Specify the insertion point for the first character. If you press ENTER, the program locates the new text immediately below the last text object you created, if any. 3 Specify the height of the text. This prompt is displayed only if text height is set to 0 in the current text style. A rubber-band line is attached from the text insertion point to the cursor. Click to set the height of the text to the length of the rubber-band line. 4 Specify a text rotation angle. You can enter an angle value or use your pointing device. 1297 5 Enter the text. At the end of each line, press ENTER. Enter more text as needed. NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it. If you specify another point during this command, the cursor moves to that point, and you can continue typing. Every time you press ENTER or specify a point, a new text object is created. 6 Press ENTER on a blank line to end the command. To create multiline text 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. 2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the multiline text object. If the ribbon is active, the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab displays. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 3 To indent the first line of each paragraph, drag the first-line indent slider on the ruler. To indent the other lines of each paragraph, drag the paragraph slider. 4 To set tabs, click the ruler where you want a tab stop. 5 If you want to use a text style other than the default, on the ribbon, click the Annotate tab, Text panel. Select the desired text style from the drop-down list. 6 Enter text. NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it. 7 To override the current text style, select text as follows: ■ To select one or more letters, click and drag the pointing device over the characters. ■ To select a word, double-click the word. 1298 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels ■ To select a paragraph, triple-click the paragraph. 8 On the ribbon, make format changes as follows: ■ To change the font of the selected text, select a font from the list. ■ To change the height of the selected text, enter a new value in the Height box. NOTE The MText height value is reset to 0 if its default height is not modified during creation. ■ To format text in a TrueType font with boldface or italics, or to create underlined or overlined text for any font, click the corresponding button on the ribbon. SHX fonts do not support boldface or italics. ■ To apply color to selected text, choose a color from the Color list. Click Other to display the Select Color dialog box. 9 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close Text Editor. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. MLEADER Creates a multileader object. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. Overview of Notes and Labels | 1299 SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. TEXT Creates a single-line text object. System Variables DIMASZ Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrowheads. DIMLDRBLK Specifies the arrow type for leaders. Create Text You can create text using several methods, depending on your needs. Overview of Creating Text The text you add to your drawings conveys a variety of information. It may be a complex specification, title block information, a label, or even part of the drawing. Single-Line Text For short entries that do not require multiple fonts or lines, create single-line text. Single-line text is most convenient for labels. Multiline Text For long, complex entries, create multiline, or paragraph text. Multiline text consists of any number of text lines or paragraphs that fit within a width you specify; it can extend vertically to an indefinite length. Regardless of the number of lines, each set of paragraphs created in a single editing session forms a single object, which you can move, rotate, erase, copy, mirror, or scale. 1300 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels There are more editing options for multiline text than there are for single-line text. For example, you can apply underlining, fonts, color, and text height changes to individual characters, words, or phrases within a paragraph. Annotative Text Use text for notes and labels in your drawing. You create annotative text by using an annotative text style, which sets the height of the text on the paper. For more information about creating and working with an annotative text, see Create Annotative Text on page 1235. See also: ■ Scale Annotations on page 1224 To create single-line text 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Single Line Text. 2 Specify the insertion point for the first character. If you press ENTER, the program locates the new text immediately below the last text object you created, if any. 3 Specify the height of the text. This prompt is displayed only if text height is set to 0 in the current text style. A rubber-band line is attached from the text insertion point to the cursor. Click to set the height of the text to the length of the rubber-band line. 4 Specify a text rotation angle. You can enter an angle value or use your pointing device. 5 Enter the text. At the end of each line, press ENTER. Enter more text as needed. NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it. If you specify another point during this command, the cursor moves to that point, and you can continue typing. Every time you press ENTER or specify a point, a new text object is created. 6 Press ENTER on a blank line to end the command. Overview of Creating Text | 1301 To create multiline text 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. 2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the multiline text object. If the ribbon is active, the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab displays. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 3 To indent the first line of each paragraph, drag the first-line indent slider on the ruler. To indent the other lines of each paragraph, drag the paragraph slider. 4 To set tabs, click the ruler where you want a tab stop. 5 If you want to use a text style other than the default, on the ribbon, click the Annotate tab, Text panel. Select the desired text style from the drop-down list. 6 Enter text. NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it. 7 To override the current text style, select text as follows: ■ To select one or more letters, click and drag the pointing device over the characters. ■ To select a word, double-click the word. ■ To select a paragraph, triple-click the paragraph. 8 On the ribbon, make format changes as follows: ■ To change the font of the selected text, select a font from the list. ■ To change the height of the selected text, enter a new value in the Height box. NOTE The MText height value is reset to 0 if its default height is not modified during creation. 1302 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels ■ To format text in a TrueType font with boldface or italics, or to create underlined or overlined text for any font, click the corresponding button on the ribbon. SHX fonts do not support boldface or italics. ■ To apply color to selected text, choose a color from the Color list. Click Other to display the Select Color dialog box. 9 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close Text Editor. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. Quick Reference Commands MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. TEXT Creates a single-line text object. System Variables MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. TEXTED Specifies the user interface displayed for editing single-line text. TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. Overview of Creating Text | 1303 TEXTSIZE Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style. TEXTSTYLE Sets the name of the current text style. Create Single-Line Text You can use single-line text to create one or more lines of text, where each text line is an independent object that you can relocate, reformat, or otherwise modify. Use single-line text (TEXT) to create one or more lines of text, ending each line when you press ENTER. Each text line is an independent object that you can relocate, reformat, or otherwise modify. When you create single-line text, you assign a text style and set alignment. The text style sets the default characteristics of the text object. The alignment determines what part of the text character aligns with the insertion point. Use the TEXT command to enter the text in-place, or enter -text at the Command prompt to enter the text at the Command prompt. You can insert a field in single-line text. A field is text that is set up to display data that might change. When the field is updated, the latest value of the field is displayed. The text styles used for single-line text are the same as those used for multiline text. When you create text, you assign an existing style by entering its name at the Style prompt. If you need to apply formatting to individual words and characters, use multiline text instead of single-line text. You can also compress single-line text to fit between points that you specify. This option stretches or squeezes the text to fill the designated space. The TEXTED system variable specifies the user interface displayed for editing single-line text. Align Single-Line Text As you create text, you can align it. That is, you can justify it with one of the alignment options shown in the following illustrations. Left alignment is the default. To left-align text, do not enter an option at the Justify prompt. 1304 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels See also: ■ Use Fields in Text on page 1352 To create single-line text 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Single Line Text. 2 Specify the insertion point for the first character. If you press ENTER, the program locates the new text immediately below the last text object you created, if any. Create Single-Line Text | 1305 3 Specify the height of the text. This prompt is displayed only if text height is set to 0 in the current text style. A rubber-band line is attached from the text insertion point to the cursor. Click to set the height of the text to the length of the rubber-band line. 4 Specify a text rotation angle. You can enter an angle value or use your pointing device. 5 Enter the text. At the end of each line, press ENTER. Enter more text as needed. NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it. If you specify another point during this command, the cursor moves to that point, and you can continue typing. Every time you press ENTER or specify a point, a new text object is created. 6 Press ENTER on a blank line to end the command. To specify a text style when you create single-line text 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Single Line Text. 2 Enter s (Style). 3 At the Style Name prompt, enter an existing text style name. If you first want to see a list of text styles, enter ? and press ENTER twice. 4 Continue creating text. To align single-line text as you create it 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Single Line Text. 2 Enter j (Justify). 3 Enter an alignment option. For example, enter br to align text at its bottom-right corner. 4 Continue creating text. 1306 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels Quick Reference Commands QTEXT Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. TEXT Creates a single-line text object. System Variables FONTALT Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. FONTMAP Specifies the font mapping file to be used. MIRRTEXT Controls how MIRROR reflects text. QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. TEXTED Specifies the user interface displayed for editing single-line text. TEXTEVAL Controls how text strings entered with TEXT (using AutoLISP) or with -TEXT are evaluated. TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. Create Single-Line Text | 1307 TEXTSIZE Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style. TEXTSTYLE Sets the name of the current text style. Create Multiline Text A multiline text (mtext) object includes one or more paragraphs of text that can be manipulated as a single object. Overview of Multiline Text You can create a multiline text (mtext) object by entering or importing text. You can create one or more paragraphs of multiline text (mtext) in the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab (if the ribbon is active), or the In-Place Text Editor (or an alternative text editor, if the ribbon is not active) You can also use Command prompts. You can insert text from a file saved in ASCII or RTF format. Before entering or importing text, you specify opposite corners of a text bounding box that defines the width of the paragraphs in the multiline text object. The length of the multiline text object depends on the amount of text, not the length of the bounding box. You can use grips to move or rotate a multiline text object. NOTE Multiline text objects and imported text files are limited to 256 KB in size. The MTEXT ribbon contextual tab and In-Place Text Editor display the bounding box with a ruler at the top. If the ribbon is not active, the Text Formatting toolbar is also displayed. The editor is transparent so that, as you create text, you can see whether the text overlaps other objects. To turn off transparency while you work, select Opaque Background on the Options menu. You can also make the background of the finished multiline text object opaque and set its color. You can also insert fields in multiline text. A field is text that is set up to display data that might change. When the field is updated, the latest value of the field is displayed. 1308 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels Text Style Most characteristics of the text are controlled by the text style, which sets the default font and other options, such as line spacing, justification, and color. You can use the current text style or select a new one. The STANDARD text style is the default. Within the multiline text object, you can override the current text style by applying formatting such as underlining, boldface, and different fonts to individual characters. You can also create stacked text, such as fractions or geometric tolerances and insert special characters, including Unicode characters, for TrueType fonts. NOTE Not all SHX and TrueType text fonts support Unicode characters. Text Properties In the Properties palette, you can view and change the object properties of a multiline text object, including properties that apply specifically to text. ■ Justification determines where text is inserted with respect to the bounding box and sets the direction of text flow as text is entered. ■ Line space options control the amount of space between lines of text. ■ Width defines the width of the bounding box and therefore controls where the text wraps to a new line. ■ Background inserts an opaque background so that objects under the text are masked. To create multiline text 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. 2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the multiline text object. If the ribbon is active, the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab displays. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 3 To indent the first line of each paragraph, drag the first-line indent slider on the ruler. To indent the other lines of each paragraph, drag the paragraph slider. 4 To set tabs, click the ruler where you want a tab stop. Create Multiline Text | 1309 5 If you want to use a text style other than the default, on the ribbon, click the Annotate tab, Text panel. Select the desired text style from the drop-down list. 6 Enter text. NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it. 7 To override the current text style, select text as follows: ■ To select one or more letters, click and drag the pointing device over the characters. ■ To select a word, double-click the word. ■ To select a paragraph, triple-click the paragraph. 8 On the ribbon, make format changes as follows: ■ To change the font of the selected text, select a font from the list. ■ To change the height of the selected text, enter a new value in the Height box. NOTE The MText height value is reset to 0 if its default height is not modified during creation. ■ To format text in a TrueType font with boldface or italics, or to create underlined or overlined text for any font, click the corresponding button on the ribbon. SHX fonts do not support boldface or italics. ■ To apply color to selected text, choose a color from the Color list. Click Other to display the Select Color dialog box. 9 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close Text Editor. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. 1310 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels To insert symbols or special characters in multiline text 1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 2 On either the ribbon contextual tab or expanded toolbar, click Symbol. 3 Click one of the options on the menu, or click Other to display the Character Map dialog box. To access the Character Map dialog box, you must have charmap.exe ® ® installed. See Microsoft Windows Help for information about adding programs to your system. 4 In the Character Map dialog box, select a font. 5 Select a character, and use one of the following methods: ■ To insert a single character, drag the selected character into the editor. ■ To insert multiple characters, click Select to add each character to the Characters to Copy box. When you have all the characters you want, click Copy. Right-click in the editor. Click Paste. 6 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close Text Editor. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. To add an opaque background or fill to a multiline text object 1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 2 On the ribbon contextual tab, click Background Mask. In the editor, right-click. Click Background Mask. 3 In the Background Mask dialog box, select Use Background Mask. 4 Enter a value for Border Offset Factor. Create Multiline Text | 1311 The value is based on the text height. A factor of 1.0 exactly fits the multiline text object. A factor of 1.5 (the default) extends the background by 0.5 times the text height. 5 Under Fill Color, do one of the following: ■ Select the Use Drawing Background Color option. ■ Select a color for the background, or click Select Color to open the Select Color dialog box. 6 Click OK to return to the editor. 7 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close Text Editor. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. The opaque background is applied when you exit the editor. To change the Windows font smoothing setting to improve visibility of text in the Multiline Text editor 1 On the Windows desktop, right-click. Click Properties. 2 In the Display Properties dialog box, click the Appearance tab. 3 Click Effects. 4 In the Effects dialog box, click the Use the Following Method to Smooth Edges of Screen Fonts to clear the setting. 5 Click OK to exit the Effects dialog box. 6 Click OK to exit the Display Properties dialog box. Quick Reference Commands MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. 1312 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels QTEXT Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. System Variables MTEXTCOLUMN Sets the default column setting for an mtext object. MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. MTEXTFIXED Sets the display size and orientation of multiline text in a specified text editor. MTEXTTOOLBAR Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar. MTJIGSTRING Sets the content of the sample text displayed at the cursor location when the MTEXT command is started. QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. TEXTSIZE Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style. TEXTSTYLE Sets the name of the current text style. Create Multiline Text | 1313 Justify Multiline Text Justification of multiline text objects controls both text alignment and text flow relative to the text insertion point. Justification controls both text alignment and text flow relative to the text insertion point. Text is left-justified and right-justified with respect to the boundary rectangle that defines the text width. Text flows from the insertion point, which can be at the middle, the top, or the bottom of the resulting text object. There are nine justification settings for multiline text. If a single word is longer than the width of the paragraph, the word will extend beyond the paragraph boundary. To justify multiline text 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 1314 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels 2 Select the multiline text object. 3 On the Properties palette, select one of the Justification options. 4 Click outside the Properties palette. Quick Reference Commands PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Format Characters Within Multiline Text You can override the text style and apply different formatting to individual words and characters within multiline text. The format changes affect only the text you select; the current text style is not changed. You can specify a different font and text height and apply boldface, italics, underlining, overlining, and color. You can also set an obliquing angle, change the space between characters, and make characters wider or narrower. The Remove Formatting option on the menu of options resets the character attributes of selected text to the current text style and also resets the text color to the color of the mtext object. The text height setting specifies the height of capitalized text. For more information about how height is calculated, see MTEXT. See also: ■ Use an Alternate Text Editor on page 1391 To format characters in multiline text 1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 2 Select the text you want to format: ■ To select one or more letters, click and drag the pointing device over the characters. Create Multiline Text | 1315 ■ To select a word, double-click the word. ■ To select a paragraph, triple-click the paragraph. 3 On either the ribbon contextual tab or toolbar, make format changes as follows: ■ To change the font of the selected text, select a font from the list. ■ To change the height of the selected text, enter a new value in the Height box. ■ To format text in a TrueType font with boldface or italics, or to create underlined or overlined text for any font, click the corresponding button on the ribbon. SHX fonts do not support boldface or italics. ■ To apply color to selected text, select a color from the Color list. Click Other to display the Select Color dialog box. ■ To set an obliquing angle for the text, enter a value between -85 and 85. A positive value slants text to the right. A negative value slants text to the left. ■ To change letter spacing in the selected text, enter a new value. ■ To change the width of characters in the selected text, enter a new value. 4 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close Text Editor. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. 1316 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. System Variables TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTSTYLE Sets the name of the current text style. Create Lists in Multiline Text You can create bulleted lists, lettered or numbered lists, or simple outlines in multiline text. Lines of multiline text can be formatted as a list. When you add or delete an item, or move an item up or down a level, the list numbering automatically adjusts. You can remove and reapply list formatting with the same method as used in most text editors. Use Automatic List Formatting By default, list formatting is applied to all text that looks like a list. Text that meets all the following criteria is considered to be a list: ■ The line begins with one or more letters or numbers or a symbol. ■ The letters or numbers is followed by punctuation. ■ A space after the punctuation is created by pressing TAB. ■ The text following the space is ended by ENTER or SHIFT+ENTER. Create Multiline Text | 1317 NOTE If you do not want list formatting applied to all text that fits the criteria, clear the Allow Bullets and Lists option. (Right-click in the In-Place Text Editor, click Bullets and Lists, and clear Allow Bullets and Lists.) When Allow Bullets and Lists is not checked, you cannot create new formatted lists in the multiline text object. To create a list, use one of the following methods: ■ Apply list formatting to new or selected text. ■ Use Auto-list (on by default) and type the elements of a list. ■ With Auto-list off, type the elements of a list and close and reopen the editor to convert the text to a list. Apply List Formatting When you apply list formatting, you can specify bullets, uppercase or lowercase letters, or numbers. Default settings are used for the type of list you choose. Letters or numbers are followed by a period. Nested lists use a double bullet, letter, or number. Items are indented based on the tab stops on the ruler in the In-Place Text Editor. Use Auto-list to Type a List When Auto-list is on, you can create a list as you type. You can use letters, numbers, or symbols. For example, in the editor, enter \U+25CB, press TAB, and then enter some text. This creates a empty circle style bullet. Not all symbols are available from the character map for a particular text font. However, if you specify the Unicode text directly (\U+25CB in this case), you can always get the bullet format of your choice. NOTE Press TAB after you enter the Unicode text or symbol, or it will remain a separate character. You can also paste a symbol from the Character Map dialog box The following characters can be used as punctuation after the number or letter when you type a list but cannot be used as bullets: Character Description . Period 1318 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels Character Description : Colon ) Close parenthesis > Close angle bracket ] Close square bracket } Close curly bracket Paste a List from Another Document If you copy a nested bulleted list (a list within a list) from Microsoft Word and paste the list into multiline text, the bullets that are displayed as empty circles cannot be formatted like other bullets in multiline text. This is because Word uses the letter o instead of a bullet for nested bulleted lists. You can remove formatting from the nested list and reapply to change the bullets to double bullets. To format multiline text as a list 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. 2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the multiline text object. 3 To expand the Text Formatting toolbar, click Options button ➤ Show Options. 4 If you are converting multiline text to a list, select the paragraphs. NOTE List formatting is only available when the Allow Bullets and Lists option is checked (the default). 5 On the expanded toolbar, click Numbering, Bullets, or Uppercase Letters. ■ Numbering. Uses numbers with periods for the items in a list. ■ Bullets. Uses a bullet or other character for the items in a list. Create Multiline Text | 1319 ■ Uppercase Letters. Uses uppercase letters with periods for the items in a list. If the list has more items than the alphabet has letters, the sequence continues by using double letters. To use lowercase letters, right-click in the editor. Click Bullets and Lists ➤ Lettered ➤ Lowercase. 6 If you are creating new list items, enter the text. 7 To end the list, press ENTER to move to a new line. Click the button that you clicked to start the list. 8 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close Text Editor. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. To remove list formatting from multiline text 1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 2 Select the list items. 3 To expand the Text Formatting toolbar, click Options button ➤ Show Options. 4 On the expanded toolbar, click the active list button to make it inactive: Numbering, Bullets, or Uppercase Letters. NOTE If the list uses lowercase letters, click Uppercase Letters to convert the list to uppercase. Then click Uppercase Letters to make it inactive. 5 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close Text Editor. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. 1320 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels To create a lettered or numbered list in multiline text as you type 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. 2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the multiline text object. 3 To expand the Text Formatting toolbar, click Options button ➤ Show Options. 4 Click Bullets and Lists. Verify that Allow Auto-list and Allow Bullets and Lists are checked. 5 Enter a letter or a number and a period (or other punctuation). The following characters can be used as punctuation after letters and numbers: period (.), colon (:), close parenthesis ()), close angle bracket (>), close square bracket (]), and close curly bracket (}). 6 Press TAB. 7 Enter the text of the list item. Press ENTER to move to the next item, or press SHIFT+ENTER to add a plain paragraph before the next item. The item is automatically lettered or numbered in sequence. 8 Press ENTER twice to end the list. 9 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. ■ Click the Close Editor icon in the Multiline Text panel. To create a bulleted list in multiline text as you type 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. 2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the multiline text object. 3 In the Options panel, click the Options icon. Create Multiline Text | 1321 4 Click Bullets and Lists. Verify that Allow Auto-list and Allow Bullets and Lists are selected (tick mark). 5 Start a line of text by entering \U+2022 (the Unicode string for a bullet) or by selecting a bullet character or another symbol. NOTE The following characters cannot be used as bullets: period (.), colon (:), close parenthesis ()), close angle bracket (>), close square bracket (]), and close curly bracket (}). 6 Alternatively, click Options ➤ Symbol ➤ Other. The Character Map dialog box appears. 7 Double-click a symbol to copy it to the clipboard. 8 Close the Character Map dialog box. 9 Paste the symbol to the drawing, and press the up-arrow and End key to return the cursor to the same line. 10 Press TAB. 11 Enter the text of the list item. Press ENTER to move to the next item, or press SHIFT+ENTER to add a plain paragraph before the next item. The bullet character is automatically added to the next item. 12 Press ENTER twice to end the list. 13 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close Text Editor. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. To move a list item in multiline text down a level 1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 2 Place the cursor at the beginning of a list item and press TAB. The item moves down one level and begins a nested list. 1322 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels 3 Press ENTER to start the next item at the same level, or press SHIFT+TAB to move the item up a level. 4 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close Text Editor. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. To separate an existing list 1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 2 Select a sequence of list items or place the cursor at the beginning of the item where you want to start the new list. 3 Right-click in the editor. Click Bullets and Lists ➤ Restart. The selected items are renumbered as a separate sequence. If you select items in the middle of a list, unselected items below the selected items also become part of the new list. 4 To continue the original list below the new list, select the first item below the new list. 5 Right-click in the editor. Click Bullets and Lists ➤ Continue. The selected item and the items following it are renumbered to continue the previous list. 6 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ Click OK on the toolbar. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. Create Multiline Text | 1323 To convert the lists in a multiline text object to plain text 1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 2 Right-click in the editor. Click Bullets and Lists. Remove the check mark next to Allow Bullets and Lists. The plain text lists retain their bullets, numbers, or letters. If you add an item to the list, the number or letter sequence does not change. Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. Indent Multiline Text and Use Tabs You can control how paragraphs are indented in a multiline text (mtext) object. The ruler in the In-Place Text Editor shows the settings for the current paragraph. Tabs and indents that you set before you start to enter text apply to the whole multiline text object. To apply different tabs and indents to individual 1324 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels paragraphs, click in a single paragraph or select multiple paragraphs and then change the settings. Sliders on the ruler show indentation relative to the left side of the bounding box. The top slider indents the first line of the paragraph, and the bottom slider indents the other lines of the paragraph. The long tick marks on the ruler show the default tab stops. If you click the ruler to set your own tabs, the ruler displays a small, L-shaped marker at each custom tab stop. You can delete a custom tab stop by dragging the marker off the ruler. To create paragraphs with hanging indentation 1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 2 Select the paragraphs you want to indent. 3 On the ruler, slide the top indent marker to where you want the first line of the paragraphs to start. NOTE The ruler displays the tabs and indents that are set for the selected paragraphs or, if no text is selected, the paragraph where the cursor is located. The default tab stops are the long tick marks on the ruler. To set a custom tab stop, click the ruler where you want the tab stop. 4 Slide the bottom indent marker to where you want the other lines of the paragraphs to start. This step indents turnover lines in paragraphs that are more than one line long. 5 To change the indentation, select the paragraphs you want to change, click the ruler to set new tab stops, if needed, and move the indent markers. Create Multiline Text | 1325 6 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close Text Editor. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. Specify the Line Spacing Within Multiline Text Line spacing for multiline text is the distance between the baseline (bottom) of one line of text and the baseline of the next line of text. The line space factor applies to the entire multiline text object, not to selected lines. You can set the spacing increment to a multiple of single line spacing, or as an absolute distance. Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text characters. 1326 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels The default line space style, At Least, automatically increases line spacing to accommodate characters that are too large to fit the line spacing you set for the multiline text object. Use the other line space style, Exactly, to line up text in tables. To ensure that line spacing is identical in multiple multiline text objects, use Exactly and set the Line Space Factor to the same value in each multiline text object. NOTE Using Exactly can cause text in lines located above or below lines with large font characters to overlap the larger characters. To change the line spacing of multiline text 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 2 Select the multiline text object you want to edit. 3 In the Properties palette, for Line Space Style, select one of the following: ■ At Least. Adjusts lines of text automatically based on the height of the largest character in the line. More space is added between lines of text with taller characters. This is the default setting. ■ Exactly. Forces the line spacing to be the same size for all lines of text regardless of format differences such as font or text height. 4 Change the line spacing by entering a new value for either of the following options. The two line spacing options provide different ways to set the same thing: ■ Line Space Factor. Sets the line spacing to a multiple of single-line spacing. Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text characters. ■ Line Space Distance. Sets the line spacing to an absolute value measured in drawing units. Valid values must be between 0.0833 and 1.3333. NOTE After you exit the Properties palette, the value of the other line spacing option is updated to correspond with the line spacing value that you entered. Create Multiline Text | 1327 Quick Reference Commands PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables TSPACEFAC Controls the multiline text line-spacing distance measured as a factor of text height. TSPACETYPE Controls the type of line spacing used in multiline text. Create Stacked Characters Within Multiline Text Characters representing fractions and tolerances can be formatted to conform to several standards. Stacked text refers to the fraction and tolerance formats applied to characters within multiline text object and multileaders. 1328 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels You use special characters to indicate how selected text should be stacked. ■ Slash (/) stacks text vertically, separated by a horizontal line. ■ Pound sign (#) stacks text diagonally, separated by a diagonal line. ■ Carat (^) creates a tolerance stack, which is stacked vertically and not separated by a line. To stack characters manually within the In-Place Text Editor, select the text to be formatted, including the special stacking character, and click the Stack button on the Text Formatting toolbar. Stack Numeric and Tolerance Characters Automatically You can specify that numeric characters entered before and after a slash, pound sign, or carat will stack automatically. For example, if you enter 1#3 followed by a nonnumeric character or space, the AutoStack Properties dialog box is displayed by default, and you can change the settings in the AutoStack dialog box to specify your formatting preferences. The automatic stacking feature applies only to numeric characters immediately before and after the slash, pound sign, and carat. For tolerance stacking, the +, -, and decimal character also stack automatically. See also: ■ Use an Alternate Text Editor on page 1391 To create stacked text 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. 2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the multiline text object. 3 In either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab or In-Place Text Editor, set text style and other multiline text properties as needed. 4 Enter the text you want to stack separated by one of the following characters: ■ Slash (/) stacks text vertically, separated by a horizontal line. ■ Pound sign (#) stacks text diagonally, separated by a diagonal line. Create Multiline Text | 1329 ■ Carat (^) creates a tolerance stack, which is not separated by a line. If you enter numbers separated by stack characters and then enter a nonnumeric character or press SPACEBAR, the AutoStack Properties dialog box is displayed. 5 In the AutoStack Properties dialog box, you can choose to automatically stack numbers (not nonnumeric text) and to remove leading blanks. You can also specify whether the slash character creates a diagonal fraction or creates a vertical fraction. If you do not want to use AutoStack, click Cancel to exit the dialog box. 6 Select the text that you want to stack, and click the Stack button on the toolbar. 7 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ Click OK on the toolbar. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. To change stack properties 1 Double-click the multiline text object you want to edit. 2 In either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab (Formatting tab drop-down) or In-Place Text Editor, select the stacked text. 3 Right-click in the editor. Click Properties. 4 In the Stack Properties dialog box, change settings as needed. 5 To set properties for automatic stacking, click Autostack. 6 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ Click OK on the toolbar. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. To unstack text 1 Double-click the multiline text object you want to edit. 1330 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels 2 In either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab (Formatting tab drop-down) or In-Place Text Editor, select the stacked text. 3 Click Stack on the Text Formatting toolbar. 4 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ Click OK on the toolbar. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. Quick Reference Commands MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. System Variables TSTACKALIGN Controls the vertical alignment of stacked text. TSTACKSIZE Controls the percentage of stacked text fraction height relative to selected text's current height. Create and Edit Columns in Multiline Text You can create and edit multiple columns using the In-Place Text Editor column options and column grips. Multiple columns can be created and edited in either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab or In-Place Text Editor and through the grip editing mode. Editing columns using grips allows you the flexibility of seeing the changes as you make them. Columns follow a few rules. All columns have equal width and equal gutters. A gutter is the space between columns. The height of columns remains constant unless more text than the column can accommodate is added, or you manually move the editing grip to adjust the column height. Create and Edit Columns in Multiline Text | 1331 Editing Columns in the In-Place Text Editor When you are working with columns using either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab or In-Place Text Editor, the columns will be in a frame. If the Opaque background is turned on, the background covers each column, leaving gutter space blank. The ruler bar when applied, spans across all the columns, but the ruler is only active for the column that is selected as current. Adding text to a column with an arbitrary height will not increase the column height even if text is already filling the column. Text will flow into another column. You can also insert a column break to force text to start flowing into the next column. Anytime a column break is inserted, it is assumed that the current height of the column is fixed. To delete the break, highlight it and delete or or use the Backspace key right after the break. Editing Columns in the Property Palette You will be able to select Static or Dynamic columns, turn off columns and change column and gutter width through the Property Palette. Changing column width in the palette will exhibit results similar to changing width using grips. The palette is the only place that you can also change gutter setting. To create multiple columns in the In-Place Text Editor 1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 2 In the In-Place Text Editor, select a column option and suboption from columns list. You have a choice between Dynamic or Static columns. You have two suboptions with Dynamic Columns – Auto height or Manual height. Static Columns allows you to choose the number of columns. 1332 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels 3 Adjust the column height by moving the arrows located on the bottom left of the first column. NOTE The arrows on the ruler on the upper right side only adjust gutter width, not column width. To adjust columns using grips 1 Select an area outside the mtext object. The In-Place Text Editor toolbar will disappear. 2 Click once in the text area and grips will appear. Grips control the location of the mtext object, the gutter width, and vertical and horizontal movement of colmns. The following illustration demonstrates how grips are used with Dynamic Columns - Manual Height. The following illustration demonstrates how grips are used with Static Columns. Create and Edit Columns in Multiline Text | 1333 NOTE In general, grips only update the mtext object after the mouse button is released. Quick Reference Commands MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. System Variables MTEXTCOLUMN Sets the default column setting for an mtext object. Import Text from External Files You can insert TXT or RTF text files into your drawing by either importing the text or dragging a file icon from Windows Explorer. 1334 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels You can insert TXT or RTF text files created in word processors into your drawing by either importing the text or dragging a file icon from Windows Explorer. Importing TXT or RTF files from other sources gives you the most flexibility. For example, you can create a text file of standard notes that you include in drawings. The imported text becomes a multiline text object, which you can edit and reformat. Text imported from a TXT file inherits the current text style. Text imported from an RTF file inherits the current text style name, but retains its original fonts and format. Imported text files are limited to 256 KB and must have a file extension of .txt or .rtf. If you drag a text file into a drawing, text width is determined by line breaks and carriage returns in the original document. When you drag an RTF file into a drawing, the text is inserted as an OLE object. If you use the Clipboard to paste text from another application, the text becomes an OLE object. If you use the Clipboard to paste text from another file, the text is inserted as a block reference, and it retains its original text style. See also: ■ Import OLE Objects on page 1720 To import text files 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. 2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the multiline text object. 3 Right-click in the editor. Click Import Text. The size limit for an imported file is 256 KB. 4 In the Select File dialog box, double-click the file you want to import, or select the file. Click Open. The text is inserted at the cursor location. 5 Change the text as needed. 6 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ Click OK on the toolbar. Import Text from External Files | 1335 ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press Ctrl+Enter. To insert a text file using the drag-and-drop method 1 Open Windows Explorer, but make sure it does not fill the screen. 2 Display the folder that contains the TXT or RTF file you want. 3 Drag the TXT or RTF file icon onto the drawing. TXT files are inserted as multiline text objects using the current text style. RTF files are inserted as OLE objects. Quick Reference Commands MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. Create Leaders You can create, modify and add content to a leader object. Overview of Leader Objects A leader object is a line or a spline with an arrowhead at one end and a multiline text object or block at the other. In some cases, a short horizontal line, called a landing, connects text or blocks and feature control frames to the leader line. The landing and leader line are associated with the multiline text object or block, so when the landing is relocated, the content and leader line move along with it. 1336 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels When associative dimensioning is turned on and object snaps are used to locate the leader arrowhead, the leader is associated with the object to which the arrowhead is attached. If the object is relocated, the arrowhead is relocated, and the landing stretches accordingly. NOTE The leader object should not be confused with the leader line that is automatically generated as part of a dimension line. To create a leader with straight lines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader. 2 At the Command prompt, enter o to select options. 3 Enter l to specify leaders. 4 Enter t to specify the leader type. 5 Enter s to specify straight leaders. 6 In the drawing, click a start point for the leader head. 7 Click an end point for the leader. 8 Enter your MTEXT content. 9 On the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK. Overview of Leader Objects | 1337 Quick Reference Commands LEADER Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature. MLEADER Creates a multileader object. QLEADER Creates a leader and leader annotation. System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. DIMLDRBLK Specifies the arrow type for leaders. MLEADERSCALE Sets the overall scale factor applied to multileader objects. Create and Modify Leaders A leader object typically consists of an arrowhead, an optional horizontal landing, a leader line or curve, and either a multiline text object or block. You can create a leader line from any point or feature in a drawing and control its appearance as you draw. Leaders can be straight line segments or smooth spline curves. 1338 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels A multileader object, or MLEADER, comprises a leader and a note. It can be created arrowhead first, tail first, or content first. If a multileader style has been used, then the multileader can be created from that style Multileader objects can contain multiple leader lines, each of which can have one or more segments, so that one note can point to multiple objects in your drawing. You can modify the properties of leader segment in the Properties palette. Using the MLEADEREDIT command, you can add leaders to, or remove leaders from, an established multileader object. Annotative multileaders containing multiple leader segments can have different head points in each scale representation. Horizontal landings and arrowheads can have different sizes, and landing gaps can have different distances, depending on the scale representation. The appearance of the horizontal landing within a multileader, as well as the type of leader line (straight or spline) and number of leader segments will remain the same in all scale representations. For more information, see Create Annotative Leaders and Multileaders on page 1244. You can use grips to modify the look of a multileader. Using grips, you can lengthen or shorten a landing or leader line, or move the entire leader object. Create and Modify Leaders | 1339 Arrange Leaders Multileaders can be arranged to add order and consistency to your drawing. Multileader objects with blocks as content can be collected and attached to one landing line. Using the MLEADERCOLLECT command, multileaders can be collected horizontally, vertically, or within a specified area depending on your drawing needs. Multileader objects can be sorted evenly along a specified line. Using the MLEADERALIGN command, selected multileaders can be aligned and evenly spaced as specified. Associate Leaders with Objects When associative dimensioning is turned on (DIMASSOC), the leader arrowhead can be associated with a location on an object using an object snap. If the object is relocated, the arrowhead remains attached to the object and the leader line stretches, but the multiline text remains in place. See also: ■ Create Annotative Leaders and Multileaders on page 1244 1340 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels To create a leader with straight lines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader. 2 At the Command prompt, enter o to select options. 3 Enter l to specify leaders. 4 Enter t to specify the leader type. 5 Enter s to specify straight leaders. 6 In the drawing, click a start point for the leader head. 7 Click an end point for the leader. 8 Enter your MTEXT content. 9 On the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK. To create a leader attached to block content at an angle 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader Style. 2 In the Multileader Style Manager, click New. 3 In the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, specify a name for the new multileader style. 4 In the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, Leader Structure tab, under Landing Settings, uncheck Automatically Include Landing. 5 On the Content tab, next to Multileader Type, choose Block content. 6 Under Block Options, next to Attachment, choose one of the following: ■ Center Extents: Attaches the leader line to the center extent of the block content ■ Insertion Point: Attaches the leader line to the block content from any point you specify 7 Click OK. 8 In the Multileader Style Manager, click Close. Create and Modify Leaders | 1341 9 Do one of the following: ■ Create a multileader object ■ Apply the new multileader style to an existing multileader object To create a spline leader with text or a block 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader. 2 At the Command prompt, enter o to select options. 3 Enter l to specify leaders. 4 Enter t to specify the leader type. 5 Enter p to specify a spline leader. 6 In the drawing, click a start point for the leader head. 7 Click the end point for the leader. 8 Enter your MTEXT content. 9 In the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK. To edit leader text 1 Double-click the text you want to edit. If the ribbon is active, the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab is displayed. IF the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed for both single-line text and multiline text. The Text Formatting toolbar is not available for single-line text. 2 Edit the text. To create multiple leaders from the same annotation 1 Select the multileader. 1342 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels 2 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Add Leader. 3 Specify the endpoint for the new leader. To remove leaders from an annotation 1 Select the multileader. 2 On the Multileader toolbar, click Remove Leader. 3 Select the leader or leaders you want to remove. Press ENTER. To align and space leaders 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Align. 2 Select the multileaders to be aligned. Press ENTER. 3 Specify a starting point in the drawing to begin the alignment. The point you select is the position of the landing head. 4 If you want to change the spacing of the multileader objects, enter s and specify one of the following spacing methods: ■ Distribute. Spaces content evenly between two selected points. ■ Use Current. Uses the current spacing between multileaders. ■ Make Parallel. Places content so that each of the last line segments in the selected multileaders are parallel. 5 In the drawing click a point to end the alignment. To collect multiple notes to be attached to a single landing 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Collect. Multileader toolbar, click Collect Multileaders. On the 2 Select multileaders in the order you want them to be collected. The last multileader selected retains its landing. Press ENTER. Create and Modify Leaders | 1343 To create a landing line with multiple segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader Style. 2 In the Multileader Style Manager, click New to create a new multileader style. 3 In the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, specify a name for the new multileader style. 4 In the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, select the Leader Structure tab. 5 In the Constraints group box, select the Maximum Leader Points check box. In the box to the right, specify a maximum number of points to be prompted for upon creation of a new multileader. Click OK. 6 In the Multileader Style Manager, click Set Current to apply the new multileader style to new multileaders that you create. To change the properties of a multileader object 1 Press CTRL and select a segment of the leader line. 2 Right-click and then select Properties from the shortcut menu. 3 In the Properties palette, specify the properties of the segment. Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. MLEADER Creates a multileader object. MLEADERALIGN Aligns and spaces selected multileader objects. 1344 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels MLEADERCOLLECT Organizes selected multileaders that contain blocks into rows or columns, and displays the result with a single leader. MLEADEREDIT Adds leader lines to, or removes leader lines from, a multileader object. MLEADERSTYLE Creates and modifies multileader styles. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. DIMASZ Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrowheads. DIMCLRD Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines. DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. DIMLDRBLK Specifies the arrow type for leaders. DIMSCALE Sets the overall scale factor applied to dimensioning variables that specify sizes, distances, or offsets. DIMTAD Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line. DIMTXTDIRECTION Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text. Create and Modify Leaders | 1345 MLEADERSCALE Sets the overall scale factor applied to multileader objects. Work with Leader Styles The appearance of a leader is controlled by its multileader style. You can use the default multileader style, STANDARD, or create your own multileader styles. The multileader style can specify formatting for landing lines, leader lines, arrowheads, and content. For example, the STANDARD multileader style uses a straight leader line with a closed filled arrowhead and multiline text content. NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as either content or arrowheads in multileader objects. Once a multileader style has been defined, you can set it as the current multileader style to be used when the MLEADER command is invoked. To define a leader style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader Style. 2 In the Multileader Style Manager, click New. 3 In the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, specify a name for the new multileader style. 4 In the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, Leader Format tab, select or clear the following options: ■ Type. Determines the type of landing. You can choose a straight landing, spline landing, or no landing. ■ Color. Determines the color of the landing. ■ Linetype. Determines the linetype of the landing. ■ Lineweight. Determines the lineweight of the landing. 5 Specify a symbol and size for the multileader arrowhead. 6 On the Leader Structure tab, select or clear the following options: ■ Maximum Leader Points. Specifies a maximum number of points for the multileader landing line. 1346 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels ■ First and Second Segment Angles. Specifies the angle of the first and second points in the landing. ■ Landing - Keep Horizontal. Attaches a horizontal landing to the multileader content. ■ Set Landing Distance. Determines the fixed distance for the multileader landing line. 7 On the Content tab, specify either text or block content for the multileader. If the multileader object will contain text content, then select or clear the following options: ■ Default Text. Sets default text for the multileader content. A field can be inserted here. ■ Text Style. Specifies a predefined text style for the attribute text. Currently loaded text styles are displayed. ■ Text Angle. Specifies the rotation angle of the multileader text. ■ Text Color. Specifies the color of the multileader text. ■ Paper Height. Sets the height of the text as it will display in paper space. ■ Frame Text. Frames the multileader text content with a text box. ■ Attachment. Controls the attachment of the landing to the multileader text. ■ Landing Gap. Specifies the distance between the landing and the multileader text. If block content is specified, then select or clear the following options: ■ Source Block. Specifies the block used for multileader content. ■ Attachment. Specifies the way the block is attached to the multileader object. You can attach the block by specifying the extents, the insertion point, or the center point of the block. ■ Color. Specifies the color of the multileader block content. ByBlock is selected by default. 8 Click OK. Work with Leader Styles | 1347 To apply a leader style to an existing leader 1 Select the multileader to which you want to apply a new style. 2 On the ribbon, click the Annotate tab, Multileaders panel. Select the desired multileader style from the drop-down list. 3 To create a new style, click the Multileader Style icon. Quick Reference Commands MLEADERSTYLE Creates and modifies multileader styles. System Variables CMLEADERSTYLE Sets the name of the current multileader style. Add Content to a Leader Leaders can contain multiline text or blocks to label parts of your drawing. Leaders Containing Multiline Text Leaders can contain multiline text as content. Text can be inserted by default when creating a leader style. Text style, color, height, and alignment can be applied and modified in leader annotations. You can also offset a multiline text object by specifying a landing gap distance in the current leader style. You can create annotative multileaders with text as content. The text content will be scaled according to the specified scale representation. Width, justification, attachment, and rotation settings for text content can be different depending on the specified scale representation. Actual text content cannot change with the scale representation. There are several options for placing multiline text as content in a leader object. Top of top line 1348 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels Middle of top line Bottom of top line Underline top line Middle of text Middle of bottom line Bottom of bottom line Underline bottom line Underline all text Add Content to a Leader | 1349 Leaders Containing Blocks Multileaders can contain blocks as content by applying a multileader style that references a block in your drawing. NOTE Annotative Blocks cannot be used as either content or arrowheads in multileader objects. Blocks can be connected to a multileader by attaching the landing to a selected insertion point on the block. You can also connect a multileader to a center point on the selected block. You can create annotative multileaders with blocks as content. The block content will be scaled according to the specified scale representation. Any attributes within the block content will not change with the scale representation. Non-annotative multileader objects can be scaled using the MLEADERSCALE system variable. See also: ■ Use Fields in Text on page 1352 Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. MLEADER Creates a multileader object. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. 1350 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. QTEXT Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects. SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. TEXT Creates a single-line text object. System Variables DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. FONTALT Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. FONTMAP Specifies the font mapping file to be used. MLEADERSCALE Sets the overall scale factor applied to multileader objects. MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. Add Content to a Leader | 1351 TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. Use Fields in Text A field is updatable text that is set up to display data that may change during the life cycle of the drawing. When the field is updated, the latest value of the field is displayed. Insert Fields A field is text that contains instructions to display data that you expect to change during the life cycle of the drawing. When a field is updated, the latest data is displayed. For example, the value of the FileName field is the name of the file. If the file name changes, the new file name is displayed when the field is updated. Fields can be inserted in any kind of text (except tolerances), including text in table cells, attributes, and attribute definitions. When any text command is active, Insert Field is available on the shortcut menu. Some sheet set fields can be inserted as placeholders. For example, you can insert SheetNumberAndTitle as a placeholder. Later, when the layout is added to a sheet set, the placeholder field displays the correct sheet number and title. Block placeholder fields can be used in block attribute definitions while you're working in the Block Editor. A field for which no value is available displays hyphens (----). For example, the Author field, which is set in the Drawing Properties dialog box, may be blank. An invalid field displays pound signs (####). For example, the CurrentSheetName field, which is valid only in paper space, displays pound signs if it is placed in model space. Change the Appearance of a Field The field text uses the same text style as the text object in which it is inserted. By default, fields are displayed with a light gray background that is not plotted (FIELDDISPLAY system variable). Formatting options in the Field dialog box control the appearance of the text that is displayed. The options that are available depend on the type of field. For example, the format for date fields includes options for displaying the day 1352 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels of the week and the time, and the format for named object fields includes capitalization options. Edit a Field A field is part of a text object and it can be edited from a text editor. The easiest way to edit a field is to double click the text object that contains the field and then, to display the Field dialog box, double click the field. These operations are available on the shortcut menus as well. If you no longer want to update a field, you can preserve the value that is currently displayed by converting the field to text. The field expression, consisting of escape characters and a field code, is shown in the Field dialog box but cannot be edited. To insert a field in text 1 Double-click the text to display the appropriate text editing dialog box. 2 Place the cursor where you want the field text to appear and right-click. Click Insert Field. For keyboard access, press CTRL+F. 3 In the Field dialog box, in Field Category, select All or select a category. The fields in the selected category are displayed in the Field Names list. 4 In the Field Names list, select a field. The current value of most fields is displayed in a shaded text box to the right of Field Category. The current value of a date field is displayed in the Examples list. 5 Select a format and any other options. For example, when the NamedObject field is selected, you select a type (for example, layer or textstyle) and a name (for example, 0 for layer or STANDARD for textstyle). Field Expression displays the expression that underlies the field. The field expression cannot be edited, but you can learn how fields are constructed by viewing this area. 6 Click OK to insert the field. The field displays its current value in the text when the Field dialog box closes. Insert Fields | 1353 To insert a field in a table 1 Double-click inside a cell in a table to select it for editing. 2 Place the cursor where you want the field text to appear and right-click. Click Insert Field. 3 In the Field dialog box, select All or select a category. 4 In the Field Names list, select a field. The current value of the field is displayed in a shaded text box to the right of Field Category. 5 Select a format and any other option. 6 Click OK to insert the field. The field displays its current value when you move to the next cell. To use a field to display a property of an object 1 Double-click a text object to display the appropriate text editing dialog box. 2 Place the cursor where you want the field text to appear and right-click. Click Insert Field. 3 In the Field dialog box, in Field Category, select All. 4 In the Field Names list, select Object. 5 In Object Type, click the Select Object button, and select an object in the drawing. 6 In the Field dialog box, in Property, select the property whose value you want to display in the text. For example, the field could display the radius of a selected circle. 7 Select a format for the text. 8 Click OK. The current value for the object's property is displayed in the text. To insert a sheet set placeholder field 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Define Attributes. 1354 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels 2 In the Attribute Definition dialog box, under Mode, click Preset. Specify any text options. 3 Under Attribute, in the Tag box, enter a name for the field. 4 To the right of the Value box, click the Insert Field button. 5 In the Field dialog box, under Field Category, select SheetSet. 6 In the Field Names list, select SheetSetPlaceholder. 7 In Placeholder Type, select the type of field that you want. Temporary Value previews the placeholder field. 8 In Format, select a capitalization style for the placeholder field. When the field is updated, the same style is used for the value of the field. 9 (Optional) Click Associate Hyperlink if you want the field to serve as a hyperlink to a location. NOTE Associate Hyperlink is not available for the ViewportScale field. 10 Click OK to exit the Field dialog box. The placeholder field displays its name when the Field dialog box closes: for example, SheetNumber. Later, when the block is inserted from the Views List tab shortcut menu in the Sheet Set Manager, the field displays a value based on the sheet it is dragged to: for example, its sheet number. 11 Click OK in the Attribute Definition dialog box. Specify the location for the field text to appear near the geometry that you have created to use with the Sheet Set Manager as a callout block or a label block. 12 Create a block that includes the newly created attribute object along with the geometry for the block. To format a field value 1 Double-click a text object to display the appropriate text editing dialog box. 2 Double-click the field you want to format. The Field dialog box is displayed. If formatting is available for the field, the Field Format button is displayed. 3 Click Field Format. Insert Fields | 1355 In the Additional Format dialog box, the current value of the field is displayed. When you select an option, the result is displayed in Preview. 4 Enter a conversion factor to apply to the current value. For example, to convert inches to millimeters, enter 0.03937. 5 Enter any text that you want to precede or follow the field value. For example, enter mm for millimeters. 6 Select a decimal separator. Select None or Comma to group thousands. 7 Select an option for suppressing zeros: ■ Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal field values. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. ■ Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal field values. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. ■ 0 Feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches field value when the distance is less than one foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". ■ 0 Inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches field value when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'. 8 Click OK. In the Field dialog box, the field value is displayed in Preview with the formatting you specified. 9 Click OK. To edit a field 1 Double-click a text object to display the appropriate text editing dialog box. 2 Double-click the field that you want to edit. The Field dialog box is displayed. 3 Make any needed changes. 4 Click OK to exit the Field dialog box. 5 Exit the text editor. 1356 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels Quick Reference Commands FIELD Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes. FIND Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. TABLE Creates an empty table object. TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format. TABLESTYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles. UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. System Variables CTABLESTYLE Sets the name of the current table style. FIELDDISPLAY Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background. Insert Fields | 1357 FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated. Update Fields When a field is updated, it displays the latest value. You can update fields individually or update all fields in one or more selected text objects. You can also set fields to be updated automatically when the drawing is opened, saved, plotted, regenerated, or sent through ETRANSMIT. Settings on the User Preferences Tab (Options Dialog Box) control whether fields are updated automatically or on demand (FIELDEVAL system variable). The Date field cannot be updated automatically regardless of the setting of FIELDEVAL. NOTE When the DEMANDLOAD system variable is set to 2, fields cannot be updated until you use FIELD or UPDATEFIELD. Contextual Fields in Blocks and Xrefs Some fields are contextual; that is, their value is different depending on which space or layout they reside in. For example, because each layout can have a different page setup attached, the value displayed by the PlotOrientation field can be different in different layouts in the same drawing. List of contextual fields CurrentSheetCustom CurrentSheetTitle CurrentSheetDescription DeviceName CurrentSheetNumber PaperSize CurrentSheetNumberAndTitle PlotDate CurrentSheetSet PlotOrientation CurrentSheetSetCustom PlotScale CurrentSheetSetDescription PageSetupName CurrentSheetSubSet PlotStyleTable 1358 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels For compatibility with previous versions, contextual fields in blocks and xrefs are not updated when you insert them in a drawing; instead, the field displays the last cached value. Therefore, if you want to use a contextual field within a block, for example, a title block, you must insert the field as an attribute. For example, a title block can use the CurrentSheetNumber field as an attribute. When you insert the title block, the field displays the sheet number of the sheet on which the title block is inserted. Most fields are not contextual and are updated in blocks and xrefs. Fields in xrefs are updated based on the host file, not the source xref. These fields do not have to be placed in attributes. For example, a field that displays the sheet number of a particular sheet in a sheet set and that updates if that sheet number changes, is a property of the sheet set. When you create the field, you select the SheetSet field name, select the sheet set and the sheet that you want in the tree view, and then select the property SheetNumber for the field value to be displayed. This field displays the sheet number of that sheet, even if you put the field in a block and insert it in another drawing. If the sheet is removed from the sheet set, it no longer has a sheet number, and the field becomes invalid and displays pound signs. Some sheet set fields can be inserted as placeholders. For example, when you create your own callout blocks and label blocks, you can insert the SheetNumber field as a placeholder. Later, when the block is inserted from the Views List tab shortcut menu in the Sheet Set Manager, the field displays the sheet number of the drawing. Compatibility with Previous Releases When a drawing with fields is opened in AutoCAD 2004 or earlier, the fields are not updated; they display the value last displayed in the drawing before it was opened. If no changes are made to a field, it is updated normally when it is reopened in a release that supports fields. Fields are not available in the previous releases of AutoCAD LT. When a drawing with fields is opened in the previous releases of AutoCAD LT, the fields are evaluated based on the setting of the FIELDEVAL system variable in the drawing, but the FIELDEVAL system variable is not accessible. See also: ■ Work with AutoCAD Drawings in AutoCAD LT on page 1825 To update a field manually 1 Double-click text. Update Fields | 1359 2 Select the field to update and right-click. Click Update Field. To update multiple fields manually 1 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Update Fields . 2 At the Select Objects prompt, select the objects that contain the fields you want to update and press ENTER. All of the fields in the selected objects are updated. To update fields automatically 1 At the Command prompt, enter fieldeval. 2 Enter a bitcode that is the sum of any of the following values: ■ 0: Not updated ■ 1: Updated on open ■ 2: Updated on save ■ 4: Updated on plot ■ 8: Updated on use of ETRANSMIT ■ 16: Updated on regeneration For example, to update fields only when the file is opened, saved, or plotted, enter 7. Quick Reference Commands FIELD Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes. UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. 1360 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels System Variables FIELDDISPLAY Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background. FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated. Use Hyperlinks in Fields The Hyperlink field assigns a hyperlink to any piece of text. The hyperlink works the same way as a hyperlink attached to an object. When the cursor pauses over the text, a hyperlink cursor is displayed, along with a tooltip that describes the hyperlink. Hold down the CTRL key and click to follow the link. NOTE The Hyperlink field uses an absolute path to a file; the HYPERLINK command can create a hyperlink with a relative path. The fields that point to sheet and view titles and numbers can be assigned a hyperlink when they are created. When these items are changed or moved in the Sheet Set Manager, the hyperlinks associated with them still jump to the correct location. Hyperlinks in fields are converted from links to DWG files into links to DWF files when published to a multi-sheet DWF file format. To add a hyperlink field to text 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. 2 Place the cursor where you want the hyperlink text to appear. 3 Right-click in the editor. Click Insert Field. 4 In the Field dialog box, in Field Category, select Linked. 5 In Field Names, select Hyperlink, and click Hyperlink. 6 In the Insert Hyperlink dialog box, use one of the following methods to specify a location: ■ Under Type the File or Web Page Name, enter the path and name of the file that you want to associate with the hyperlink. Use Hyperlinks in Fields | 1361 ■ Under Browse For, click File, Web Page, or Target. Navigate to the location to which you want to link. Click Open or OK. 7 (Optional) In Text to Display, select the default text that is displayed, and enter the link text that you want to appear in the mtext object. 8 Click OK to close each dialog box. 9 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ Click OK on the toolbar. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. The hyperlink is displayed in the mtext object with the link text that you entered. Use CTRL+click to jump to the hyperlinked location. Quick Reference Commands FIELD Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes. FIND Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. 1362 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels TABLE Creates an empty table object. TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format. TABLESTYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles. UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. System Variables CTABLESTYLE Sets the name of the current table style. FIELDDISPLAY Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background. FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated. Work with Text Styles When you enter text into your drawing, the current text style determines the text font, size, angle, orientation, and other text characteristics. Overview of Text Styles All text in a drawing has a text style associated with it. When you enter text, the program uses the current text style. The current text style sets the font, size, obliquing angle, orientation, and other text characteristics. If you want to create text using a different text style, you can make another text style current. The table shows the settings for the STANDARD text style. The settings for the current text style are displayed at the Command prompts. You can use or modify the current text style or create and load a new text style. Once you've created a text style, you can modify its characteristics, change its name, or delete it when you no longer need it. Work with Text Styles | 1363 Create and Modify Text Styles Except for the default STANDARD text style, you must create any text style that you want to use. Text style names can be up to 255 characters long. They can contain letters, numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and hyphen (-). If you don't enter a text style name, the text styles are automatically named Stylen, where n is a number that starts at 1. You can modify an existing text style in the Text Style dialog box by changing the settings. You can also update existing text of that text style to reflect the changes. Certain style settings affect multiline and single-line text objects differently. For example, changing the Upside Down and Backwards options has no effect on multiline text objects. Changing Width Factor and Obliquing has no effect on single-line text. If you rename an existing text style, any text using the old name assumes the new text style name. You can remove unreferenced text styles from your drawing with PURGE or by deleting the text styles from the Text Styles dialog box. The STANDARD text style cannot be removed. Change Text Style When you change the text style of a multiline text object, the updated settings are applied to the entire object, and some formatting of individual characters might not be retained. The following table describes the effects of text style change on character formatting. Formatting Retained? Bold No Color Yes Font No Height No Italic No Stacking Yes 1364 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels Formatting Retained? Underlining Yes Annotative Text Styles Use text for notes and labels in your drawing. You create annotative text by using an annotative text style, which sets the height of the text on the paper. For more information about creating and working with an annotative text, see Create Annotative Text on page 1235. See also: ■ Scale Annotations on page 1224 To set the current text style ■ On the ribbon, click the Annotate tab ➤ Text panel. in the Text Style drop-down list, select a text style. Quick Reference Commands PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. System Variables FONTALT Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. FONTMAP Specifies the font mapping file to be used. TEXTSIZE Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style. Overview of Text Styles | 1365 TEXTSTYLE Sets the name of the current text style. Assign Text Fonts You can assign a text font as part of the text style definition. Several factors depend on the type of text you are working with. Overview of Assigning Text Fonts Fonts define the shapes of the text characters that make up each character set. You can use TrueType fonts in addition to compiled SHX fonts. A single font can be used by more than one text style. If your company has a standard font, you can modify other text style settings to create a set of text styles that use this standard font in different ways. The following illustration shows the same font used by different text styles that use different obliquing settings to define the slant of the text. You can assign a font to a text style by selecting a font file from the list in the Text Style dialog box. 1366 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels Quick Reference Commands STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. System Variables FONTALT Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. FONTMAP Specifies the font mapping file to be used. Use TrueType Fonts Several factors affect the display of TrueType fonts in a drawing. TrueType fonts always appear filled in your drawing; however, when you plot, the TEXTFILL system variable controls whether the fonts are filled. By default TEXTFILL is set to 1 to plot the filled-in fonts. The In-Place Text Editor can display only fonts that are recognized by Microsoft Windows. Because SHX fonts are not recognized by Windows, a TrueType equivalent is supplied in the In-Place Text Editor when you select an SHX or any other non-TrueType font for editing. See also: ■ Set Text Height on page 1373 To assign a TrueType font to a text style 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Panel Launcher button. 2 In the Text Style dialog box under Style Name, click New. 3 In the New Text Style dialog box, enter a style name for the new text style. Click OK. 4 Under Font Name, select a TrueType font from the list. TrueType fonts display a TrueType icon in front of their names. Assign Text Fonts | 1367 5 To update text of the current style in the drawing, click Apply. 6 Click Close. Quick Reference Commands QTEXT Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. System Variables QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. Use Text Fonts for International Work Several factors affect your choosing, entering, and displaying international text in a drawing. The program supports the Unicode character-encoding standard. An SHX font encoded using the Unicode standard font can contain many more characters than are defined in your system; therefore, to use a character not directly available from the keyboard, you can enter the escape sequence \U+nnnn, where nnnn represents the Unicode hexadecimal value for the character. Beginning with AutoCAD 2007, all SHX shape fonts are encoded with the Unicode standard with the exception of Big Fonts. When choosing a text font for international work, you can use either a TrueType Font or a Big Font. 1368 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels Asian Big Font SHX Files Asian alphabets contain thousands of non-ASCII characters. To support such text, the program provides a special type of shape definition known as a Big Font file. You can set a style to use both regular and Big Font files. Asian Language Big Fonts Included in the Product Font File Name Description @extfont2.shx Japanese vertical font (a few characters are rotated to work correctly in vertical text) bigfont.shx Japanese font, subset of characters chineset.shx Traditional Chinese font extfont.shx Japanese extended font, level 1 extfont2.shx Japanese extended font, level 2 gbcbig.shx Simplified Chinese font whgdtxt.shx Korean font whgtxt.shx Korean font whtgtxt.shx Korean font whtmtxt.shx Korean font When you specify fonts using -STYLE, the assumption is that the first name is the normal font and the second (separated by a comma) is the Big Font. If you enter only one name, it's assumed that it is the normal font and any associated Big Font is removed. By using leading or trailing commas when specifying the font file names, you can change one font without affecting the other, as shown in the following table. Specifying fonts and Big Fonts at the Command prompt Enter this ... To specify this ... [font name],[big font name] Both normal fonts and Big Fonts [font name], Only a normal font (Big Font unchanged) Assign Text Fonts | 1369 Specifying fonts and Big Fonts at the Command prompt Enter this ... To specify this ... ,[big font name] Only a Big Font (normal font unchanged) [font name] Only a normal font (Big Font, if any, removed) ENTER (null response) No change NOTE Long file names that contain commas as font file names are not accepted. The comma is interpreted as a separator for an SHX font-Big Font pair. See also: ■ Substitute Fonts on page 1371 To assign an Asian-language SHX font to a text style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Text Style. 2 In the Text Style dialog box, under Style Name, click New. 3 In the New Text Style dialog box, enter a style name for the new text style. Click OK. 4 Under Font Name, select the name of an SHX font file, and then select Use Big Font to select an Asian-language big font. When you select Use Big Font, the Font Style box changes to a Big Font Name box. Only SHX fonts are available for selection, and only Big Font names are shown in the Big Font box. 5 To see the effects on different characters, enter a text string in the sample text box that is located to the left of the Preview button. Click Preview. 6 To update text of the current style in the drawing, click Apply. 7 Click Close. 1370 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels Quick Reference Commands STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. Substitute Fonts A font used in a drawing but that is not currently available on your system is automatically substituted with another font. The program accommodates a font that is not currently on your system by substituting another font. Specify an Alternate Font If your drawing specifies a font that is not currently on your system, the font designated as your alternate font is automatically substituted. By default, the simplex.shx file is used. If you want to specify a different font, enter the alternate font file name by changing the FONTALT system variable. If you use a text style that uses a Big Font, you can map it to another font using the FONTALT system variable. This system variable uses a default font file pair: txt.shx and bigfont.shx. For more information, see Use Text Fonts for International Work on page 1368. ® In previous releases, you could display PostScript fonts in the drawing. Because later releases cannot display PostScript fonts, Autodesk has supplied TrueType font equivalents. These PostScript fonts are mapped to the equivalent TrueType fonts in a font mapping file. Additionally, when a TrueType font is not available, you can specify a different TrueType font, making sure that the fonts are similar to avoid text length or wrapping problems. If the default font does not support the characters you enter using the In-Place Text Editor (MTEXT command), an alternative font is substituted. CIF or MIF codes entered with the In-Place Text Editor or with the TEXT command are now automatically converted to display the actual characters. Edit the Font Mapping File A font mapping file is a list of text fonts and their substitutes. If a text font used in a drawing cannot be located, another text font is substituted for the missing font using a font mapping file. Assign Text Fonts | 1371 Each line in the font mapping file contains the name of a font file (with no file extension or path) followed by a semicolon (;) and the name of the substitute font file. The substitute file name includes a file extension such as .ttf. A font mapping file is an ordinary ASCII text file with a .fmp extension. The default font mapping file is acad.fmp for AutoCAD, and acadlt.fmp for AutoCAD LT. You can change the font assignments in a font mapping file using any ASCII text editor. For example, you could use the following entry in a font map file to specify that the timesnr.pfb font file be substituted with the times.ttf font file: timesnr;times.ttf The following table shows the font substitution rules used if a font file cannot be located when a drawing is opened. Font substitution File extension First mapping order Second mapping order Third mapping or- Fourth mapder ping order .ttf Use font mapping table Use font defined in text style Windows substitutes a similar font .shx Use font mapping table Use font defined in text style Use FONTALT .pfb Use font mapping table Use FONTALT Prompt for new font Prompt for new font Display Proxy Fonts For third-party or custom SHX fonts that have no TrueType equivalent, one of several different TrueType fonts called proxy fonts is substituted. In the In-Place Text Editor, proxy fonts look different from the fonts they represent to indicate that the proxy fonts are substitutions for the fonts used in the drawing. Custom SHX fonts do not appear in the Font list on either the Text Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab or the Text Formatting toolbar. If you want to format characters by assigning one of these fonts, first create a text style that uses the font and then apply that text style to the characters. To specify a font mapping file 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 1372 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels 2 On the Files tab, in the list, double-click Text Editor, Dictionary, and Font File Names. 3 Double-click Font Mapping File. The acad.fmp file is specified by default. 4 To change the font mapping file, double-click the arrow line to open the Select a File dialog box. Select a file and click Open. Click OK. 5 At the Command prompt, enter regen to convert existing text using the new font mappings. To specify a default alternate font 1 At the Command prompt, enter fontalt. 2 Enter the name of the font file you want to use as the alternative. Quick Reference Commands MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables FONTALT Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. FONTMAP Specifies the font mapping file to be used. Set Text Height Text height determines the size in drawing units of the letters in the font you are using. Set Text Height | 1373 The exception is TrueType fonts: the value usually represents the size of the uppercase letters. If you specify a fixed height as part of a text style, the Height prompt is bypassed when you create single-line text. When the height is set to 0 in the text style, you are prompted for the height each time you create single-line text. Set the value to 0 if you want to specify the height as you create text. TrueType Fonts For TrueType fonts, the value specified for text height represents the height of a capital letter plus an ascent area reserved for accent marks and other marks used in non-English languages. The relative portion of text height that is assigned to capital letters and ascent characters is determined by the font designer at the time the font is designed; consequently, it varies from font to font. In addition to the height of a capital letter and the ascent area that make up the text height specified by the user, TrueType fonts have a descent area for portions of characters that extend below the text insertion line, for example, y, j, p, g, and q. When you apply a text height override to all text in the editor, the entire multiline text object is scaled, including its width. To set text height in a text style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Text Style. 2 In the Text Style dialog box, select a style from the Style Name list. 3 Under Font, enter the text height (in drawing units) in the Height box. 4 To update existing text that uses this text style, click Apply. 5 Click Close. Quick Reference Commands STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. 1374 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels System Variables TEXTSIZE Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style. TEXTSTYLE Sets the name of the current text style. Set Text Obliquing Angle The obliquing angle determines the forward or backward slant of the text. The angle represents the offset from 90 degrees. Entering a value between -85 and 85 makes the text oblique. A positive obliquing angle slants text to the right. A negative obliquing angle slants text to the left. To set the obliquing angle in a text style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Text Style. 2 In the Text Style dialog box, select a text style from the Style Name list. 3 Under Effects, enter an angle between -85 and 85 in the Oblique Angle box. A positive value slants text to the right. A negative value slants text to the left. 4 To update existing text that uses this text style, click Apply. Set Text Obliquing Angle | 1375 5 Click Close. Quick Reference Commands STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. Set Horizontal or Vertical Text Orientation Text can be vertical or horizontal. Text can have a vertical orientation only if the associated font supports dual orientation. Lines of text are oriented to be vertical or horizontal. Text can have a vertical orientation only if the associated font supports dual orientation. You can create more than one line of vertical text. Each successive text line is drawn to the right of the preceding line. The normal rotation angle for vertical text is 270 degrees. NOTE Vertical orientation is not supported for TrueType fonts and symbols. Vertical Text for Asian Languages ■ SHX fonts. Text can be created with SHX fonts and Big Fonts for vertical display in the same way as for previous releases. For best results, use the single-line TEXT command, not MTEXT. You can select a vertical style in the Text Style dialog box. 1376 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels ■ TrueType fonts. You still select fonts starting with the @ sign, but now the text is automatically rotated 270 degrees. (In AutoCAD 2005 and earlier versions, you had to manually rotate this text.) Vertical cursor movement is now supported for vertical text. To set vertical orientation in a text style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Text Style. 2 In the Text Style dialog box, select a text style from the Style Name list. 3 Under Effects, select Vertical. 4 To update existing text that uses this text style, click Apply. 5 Click Close. Quick Reference Commands STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. Change Text You can change text content, formatting, and properties such as scale and justification. Overview of Changing Text Text, whether created with TEXT, MTEXT, or MLEADER can be modified like any other object. You can move, rotate, erase, and copy it. You can change text properties in the Properties palette. You can also edit the contents of existing text and create a mirror image of it. The MIRRTEXT system variable controls whether text is also reversed when you mirror objects in your drawing. The procedures for modifying text vary slightly, depending on how the text was created. Change Text | 1377 Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. FIND Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables MIRRTEXT Controls how MIRROR reflects text. TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. Change Single-Line Text You can change the contents, formatting and properties of single-line text. You can change single-line text with DDEDIT and PROPERTIES. Use DDEDIT when you need to change only the content of the text, not the formatting or properties of the text object. Use PROPERTIES when you want to change content, text style, location, orientation, size, justification, and other properties. Text objects also have grips for moving, scaling, and rotating. A text object has grips at the lower-left corner of the baseline and at the alignment point. 1378 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels The effect of a command depends on which grip you choose. To edit single-line text 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Object ➤ Text ➤ Edit. 2 Select a single-line text object. 3 In the in-place editor, enter the new text. 4 Press ENTER. 5 Select another text object to edit, or press ENTER to end the command. To modify properties of single-line text objects 1 Select a single-line text object. 2 Right-click the selected object. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, enter any new text, and then change formatting and other properties as needed. Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Change Single-Line Text | 1379 TEXT Creates a single-line text object. System Variables TEXTED TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. Change Multiline Text You can change the location and content of multiline text objects with the Properties palette, the In-Place Text Editor, and grips. After you create multiline text, you can use the Properties palette to change ■ Text style assignment ■ Justification ■ Width ■ Rotation ■ Line spacing In addition, you can use either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab (if the ribbon is active) or the In-Place Text Editor (if the ribbon is not active) to modify individual formatting, such as boldface and underlining, and to change the width of the multiline text object. Change Text Location You can use grips to move multiline text or to resize the line width. A multiline text object has grips at the four corners of the text boundary and, in some cases, at the justification point. If you use the Properties palette to move multiline text, you can edit content and change properties at the same time. 1380 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels Commands such as DIMLINEAR or LEADER create multiline text automatically without requiring that a bounding box be specified; these objects have only a single grip at the justification point. When you need to align or move multiline text objects, you can use the Node and Insertion object snaps for precision. If the OSNAPNODELEGACY system variable is set to 0, the Node object snap ignores multiline text. See also: ■ Work with Text Styles on page 1363 ■ Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text on page 540 To change multiline text 1 Select a multiline text object. 2 Right-click the selected object. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, enter any new text and change formatting and other settings as needed. To change the width of a multiline text object 1 Double-click the multiline text object. 2 In the In-Place Text Editor, use one of the following methods: ■ Move the cursor over the right end of the ruler until the cursor changes to a double arrow. As you drag to the right to stretch the ruler, a tooltip displays the width. Release to set a new width. ■ Right-click the bottom of the ruler. Click Set Mtext Width. In the dialog box, enter the width in drawing units. 3 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close Text Editor. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. Change Multiline Text | 1381 Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. FIND Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text. MTEDIT Edits multiline text. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. System Variables CENTERMT Controls how grips stretch multiline text that is centered horizontally. MIRRTEXT Controls how MIRROR reflects text. MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. OSNAPNODELEGACY Controls whether the Node object snap can be used to snap to multiline text objects. TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. 1382 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels Find and Replace Text You can easily find and replace text with the FIND command To search for and replace text, use FIND. Replacement is based on text content only; character formatting and text properties are not changed. When searching for text in a 3D environment, the viewport will temporarily change to a 2D viewport so that text isn’t blocked by 3D objects in your drawing. With FIND, you can use wild-card characters in your search. Character Definition # (Pound) Matches any numeric digit @ (At) Matches any alphabetic character . (Period) Matches any nonalphanumeric character * (Asterisk) Matches any string and can be used anywhere in the search string ? (Question mark) Matches any single character; for example, ?BC matches ABC, 3BC, and so on ~ (Tilde) Matches anything but the pattern; for example; ~*AB*matches all strings that don't contain AB [] Matches any one of the characters enclosed; for example, [AB]C matches AC and BC [~] Matches any character not enclosed; for example, [~AB]C matches XC but not AC [-] Specifies a range for a single character; for example, [A-G]C matches AC, BC, and so on to GC, but not HC ` (Reverse quote) Reads the next character literally; for example, `~AB matches ~AB To search for drawing files that contain a specific word or phrase, use the Search tool in Microsoft® Windows® . You can use the Search tool to find all textual data except text in tables and fields, and xrefs within drawing files. Find and Replace Text | 1383 To find specified text in a drawing 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Find Text. 2 In Find What, enter the text you want to find. 3 In Find Where, specify the parts of the drawing to search, or click the Select Objects button to select one or more text objects. 4 Click the Expand Find Options button to specify search options and text types for the specified text. 5 Click Find. 6 Use one of the following options to view the results of your search: ■ To list all results in a table, click the List Results check box. ■ To zoom to and highlight each result individually, leave the List Results check box unchecked. 7 Click Close. To replace text using the Find and Replace Dialog box 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Find Text. 2 In Find What, enter the text you want to find. 3 In Find Where, specify the parts of the drawing to search, or click the Select Objects button to select one or more text objects. 4 Click the Expand Find Options button to specify search options and text types for the specified text. 5 In Replace With, enter the text with which you want to replace the found text. 6 Click Find. 7 Use one of the following options to view the results of your search: ■ To list all results in a table, click the List Results check box. ■ To zoom to and highlight each result individually, leave the List Results check box unchecked. 1384 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels 8 Use one of the following methods to replace text: ■ To replace only the found instance of the text string, click Replace. ■ To replace all instances of the text in Find Text String, click Replace All. ■ If search results have been listed in a table using the List Results option, then you can select certain results in the list by pressing Click + CTRL. Alternately, you can select a range of results in the list by pressing Shift + Click. 9 Click Close. Change Text Scale and Justification Several commands are available for changing the scale of one or more text and attribute objects, or their insertion points, simultaneously without changing the location of the objects. You can change the scale of one or more text objects, attributes, and attribute definitions, or their insertion points, simultaneously without changing the location of the objects. Change the Scale of Multiple Text Objects A drawing may contain hundreds of text objects that need to be scaled, and it would be tedious to scale them individually. Use SCALETEXT to change the scale of one or more text objects such as text, multiline text, and attributes. You can specify a relative scale factor or an absolute text height, or you can scale selected text to match the height of existing text. Each text object is scaled using the same scale factor, and it maintains its current location. Convert Text Height Between Model Space and Paper Space The SPACETRANS command calculates equivalent lengths between model space units and paper space units. By using SPACETRANS transparently, you can provide commands with distance or length values relative to another space. For example, you may want to create a text object in model space that matches the height of other text in a layout. From model space, you could enter Command: text Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: 1,3 Specify height <0.375>: 'spacetrans Change Text Scale and Justification | 1385 >>Specify paper space distance <1.000>: 3/8 Resuming TEXT command Specify height <0.375>: 1.173 When the command is complete, a text object is created in model space with a height of 1.173, which appears as 3/8 when viewed from a layout. NOTE The SPACETRANS command is not available from the Model tab or in a perspective view. For more information about entering commands transparently, see Enter Commands on the Command Line on page 53. Change the Justification of Text Objects Without Changing Their Location Use JUSTIFYTEXT to redefine the insertion point of text without moving the text. For example, a table or schedule may contain text that is located correctly but each text object in the table should be right-justified instead of left-justified for future entries or modifications. To scale multiline text objects without changing their locations 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Scale. 2 Select one or more multiline text objects and press ENTER. 3 Specify one of the justification options or press ENTER to accept the existing text justifications. 4 Enter s and enter the scale factor to be applied to each mtxt object. Quick Reference Commands JUSTIFYTEXT Changes the justification point of selected text objects without changing their locations. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. 1386 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels SCALETEXT Enlarges or reduces selected text objects without changing their locations. SPACETRANS Calculates equivalent model space and paper space lengths in a layout. Check Spelling You can check the spelling of all text as it is entered in your drawing. You can also specify the specific language dictionary that is used and customize and manage multiple custom spelling dictionaries. You can check the spelling of all text objects in your drawing, including ■ Single and multiline text ■ Dimension text ■ Multileader text ■ Text within block attributes ■ Text within xrefs With Check Spelling, your drawing or the areas of your drawing’s text that you specify are searched for misspelled words. If a misspelled word is identified, the word is highlighted and the drawing area zooms to that word in a scale that is easy to read. Check Spelling As You Type By default, you can check spelling as you enter text in the In-Place Text Editor. Any word you enter is checked for spelling errors when it is completed. A word is considered completed when one of the following actions are taken: ■ Pressing SPACEBAR or ENTER ■ Moving the cursor to another position within the In-Place Text Editor. Check Spelling | 1387 Misspelled words are underlined with a red dotted line Any word not found in the current dictionary is underlined as misspelled. Spelling suggestions are displayed when you right-click the underlined word. Switch Dictionaries The Check Spelling feature contains several main dictionaries, which are available in different languages. You can also create any number of custom dictionaries and switch between them as needed. During a spelling check, the words in the drawing are matched to the words in the current main dictionary. Any words you add are stored in the custom dictionary that is current at the time of the spelling check. For example, you can add proper names so they are no longer identified as misspelled words. NOTE By default AutoCAD provides you with one sample custom dictionary that contains words such as AutoCAD and Autodesk. To check spelling in another language, change to a different main dictionary. You can change dictionaries in the Dictionaries dialog box or by specifying the dictionary name in the DCTMAIN or DCTCUST system variable. For a list of the main dictionary file names, see DCTMAIN. NOTE The filename for a custom dictionary cannot use any non-current code page characters in its name. If you are sharing a custom dictionary between different locals or languages do not use non-ASCII characters. Create and Edit Custom Dictionaries A custom dictionary is a list of spelling exceptions that you have identified. The files that contain them have a .cus file extension. You can use any ASCII text editor to add or delete words, or combine several dictionaries. 1388 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels To check spelling 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling. 2 Click an option of where you want to check. Click Start. If no misspelled words are found, a message is displayed. If a misspelling is found, the Check Spelling dialog box identifies the misspelled word. The word is highlighted and zoomed to in the drawing area. 3 Do one of the following: ■ To correct a word, select an alternate word from the Suggestions list or type a word in the Suggestions box. Click Change or Change All. ■ To leave a word unchanged, click Ignore or Ignore All. ■ To leave a word unchanged and add it to the dictionary, click Add to Dictionary. 4 Repeat step 3 for each misspelled word. Click Close to exit. NOTE Click Undo to reverse the preceding Check Spelling action or series of actions in the Check Spelling dialog box. To check spelling in a block attribute 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling. 2 In the Check Spelling dialog box, click Settings. 3 In the Check Spelling Settings dialog box, click Block Attributes. Click OK. 4 In the Check Spelling dialog box, click Start. 5 Do one of the following: ■ To correct a word, select an alternate word from the Suggestions list or type a word in the Suggestions box. Click Change or Change All. ■ To leave a word unchanged, click Ignore or Ignore All. ■ To leave a word unchanged and add it to the dictionary, click Add to Dictionary. 6 Repeat step 5 for each misspelled word. Click Close to exit. Check Spelling | 1389 To switch dictionaries while checking spelling 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling. 2 In the Check Spelling dialog box, click Dictionaries. 3 Do one of the following: ■ To change the main dictionary, select a dictionary from the Current Main Dictionary list. ■ To change the custom dictionary, select a dictionary under Current Custom Dictionary. 4 Click Close. To add a custom dictionary or word list 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling. 2 In the Check Spelling dialog box, click Dictionaries. 3 In the Dictionaries dialog box, in the Current Custom dictionary list, select Manage Custom Dictionaries. 4 In the Custom Dictionaries list, click Add and browse to the dictionary’s location. To create a new custom dictionary, click New and enter the dictionary’s name. The name must contain the .cus extension. 5 Click OK. The newly selected dictionary is highlighted as the current custom dictionary. 6 If you would like to import a word list into your custom dictionary, click Import. 7 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. 1390 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels System Variables DCTCUST Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary. DCTMAIN Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary. Use an Alternate Text Editor The default text editor is either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab (if the ribbon is active) or the In-Place Text Editor (if the ribbon is not active), but you can elect to use any alternate editor that saves files in ASCII format. Overview of Using an Alternate Text Editor You can use any text editor, such as Microsoft Notepad, that saves files in ASCII format. You can elect to use an alternate editor by specifying the editor with the MTEXTED system variable. If you use an alternate text editor for multiline text, you specify the properties of the multiline text object at the Command prompt first. Then the text editor opens for entering text. When you close the text editor, the text is inserted within the width limit you specified. If you use an alternate editor, you must enter special codes to apply formatting. To edit text using an alternate text editor, use the same format codes. To avoid losing format information when you make changes to the text, use the same text editor you used to create the text. Quick Reference Commands MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. Use an Alternate Text Editor | 1391 System Variables MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. Format Multiline Text in an Alternate Text Editor If you use an alternate text editor, you apply formatting by entering format codes. You can underline text, add a line over text, and create stacked text. You can also change color, font, and text height. You can change the spaces between text characters or increase the width of the characters themselves. To apply formatting, use the format codes shown in the following table. Format codes for paragraphs Format code Purpose Enter this … \0...\o Turns overline on and off Autodesk \OAutoCAD\o \L...\l Turns underline on and off Autodesk \LAutoCAD\l \~ Inserts a nonbreaking space Autodesk AutoCAD\~LT \\ Inserts a backslash Autodesk \\AutoCAD \{...\} Inserts an opening and closing brace Autodesk \{AutoCAD\} \Cvalue; Changes to the specified color Autodesk \C2;AutoCAD \File name; Changes to the specified font file Autodesk \Ftimes; AutoCAD 1392 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels To produce this … Format codes for paragraphs Format code Purpose Enter this … \Hvalue; Changes to the text height specified in drawing units Autodesk \H2;AutoCAD \Hvaluex; Changes the text height to a multiple of the current text height Autodesk \H3x;AutoCAD \S...^...; Stacks the subsequent text at the /, #, or ^ symbol 1.000\S+0.010^-0.000; \Tvalue; Adjusts the space between characters. Valid values range from a minimum of .75 to 4 times the original spacing between characters. \T2;Autodesk \Qangle; Changes obliquing angle \Q20;Autodesk \Wvalue; Changes width factor to produce wide text \W2;Autodesk \A Sets the alignment value; valid values: 0, 1, 2 (bottom, center, top) \A1;1\S1/2 \P Ends paragraph Autodesk\PAutoCAD To produce this … Braces can be nested up to eight levels deep. Format Multiline Text in an Alternate Text Editor | 1393 You can also use control codes to add special characters, such as tolerance or dimensioning symbols. See MTEXT. Example: Formatting Text in an Alternate Text Editor This example describes how the text in the following illustration was created. Each line below was entered in an alternate text editor: {{\H1.5x; Big text} \A2; over text\A1;/\A0; under text}\P {\A0;Baseline: 1 \S1/2;}\P {\A1;Center: 1 \S1/2;}\P {\A2;Topline: 1 \S1/2;}\P {Tolerances: \A1;1.000\H.75x;\S+0.010^-0.000;}\P {Architectural: 9-{\H.666x;\A2;11\A1;/\A0;16}\A2;"}\P To specify an alternate text editor 1 At the Command prompt, enter mtexted. 2 At the prompt do one of the following: ■ Enter the path and name of the executable file for the ASCII text editor that you want to use to create or edit multiline text. ■ Enter internal to restore the text editor. 1394 | Chapter 29 Notes and Labels To create multiline text in an alternate text editor 1 To specify a text editor, at the Command prompt, enter mtexted. Then enter the path of the editor you want to use. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. 3 Specify the first corner of the multiline text boundary rectangle. 4 Specify the opposite corner of the multiline text boundary rectangle. 5 In the text editor, enter the text. Enter \P to end a paragraph and start a new paragraph on the next line. (Be sure to capitalize the P.) 6 When your text entry is complete, save the changes and exit the text editor. Quick Reference Commands MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. Format Multiline Text in an Alternate Text Editor | 1395 1396 Tables 30 A table is a rectangular array of cells that contain annotation, primarily text but also blocks. Tables appear in many different forms on many of the sheets that make up drawing sets. In the AEC industry, tables are often referred to as “schedules” and contain information about the materials needed for the construction of the building being designed. In the manufacturing industry, they are often referred to as “BOM” (bills of materials). The table object creates a table of any size that can be used for any purpose, including as a list or index to a set of drawing sheets to be published. Create and Modify Tables A table is an object that contains data in rows and columns. A table object can be created from an empty table or table style. A table can also be linked to data in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. After the table has been created, you can click any gridline on the table to select it and then modify it by using the Properties palette or grips. 1397 When you change the height or width of the table, only the row on page 2179 or column on page 2156 adjacent to the grip you have selected will change. The table will maintain its height or width. To change the size of the table proportionally to the size of the row or column you are editing, press Ctrl while using a column grip. Break Tables into Multiple Parts A table with a large amount of data can be broken into primary and secondary table fragments. Use the table breaking grips found at the bottom of your table to make a table span multiple columns in your drawing or to manipulate the different table parts you have already created. Modify a Table Cell You can click inside a cell to select it. Grips are displayed in the middle of the cell borders. Click inside another cell to move selection to that cell. Drag the grips on a cell to make the cell and its column or row larger or smaller. NOTE When a cell is selected, press F2 to edit the cell text. 1398 | Chapter 30 Tables To select more than one cell, click and drag over several cells. You can also hold down Shift and click inside another cell to select those two cells and all the cells between them. When you click inside a table cell when the ribbon is active, the Table ribbon contextual tab is displayed. If the ribbon is not active, the Table toolbar is displayed. From here, you can ■ Edit rows and columns ■ Merge and unmerge cells ■ Alter the appearance of cell borders ■ Edit data formatting and alignment ■ Lock and unlock cells from editing ■ Insert blocks, fields, and formulas ■ Create and edit cell styles ■ Link the table to external data With a cell selected, you can also right-click and use the options on the shortcut menu to insert or delete columns and rows, combine adjacent cells, or make other changes. When cells are selected, you can use Ctrl+Y to repeat the last action. NOTE Using Ctrl+Y to repeat the last action only repeats actions executed through the shortcut menu, the Table ribbon contextual tab, or the Table toolbar. Add a Table to a Tool Palette When you add a table to a tool palette, the table properties (for example, table style and number of rows and columns) and the cell property overrides (for example, alignment and border lineweight) are stored in the tool definition. The text, block content, and character formatting are also stored in the tool definition. Customize Display of Column Letters and Row Numbers By default, the In-Place Text Editor displays column letters and row numbers when a table cell is selected for editing. Use the TABLEINDICATOR system variable to turn this display on and off. To set a new background color, select a table, right-click, and click Table Indicator Color on the shortcut menu. The Create and Modify Tables | 1399 text color, size, and style and the line color are controlled by the settings for column heads in the current table style. See also: ■ Add Text and Blocks to Tables on page 1407 To create a tool from a table in the current drawing 1 In the current drawing, select the table. 2 Using the right mouse button, drag the table to a tool palette and, without releasing the mouse button, move the cursor to the place on the tool palette where you want the tool. You can switch to a different tab by hovering over the tab for a few seconds. The black line indicates where the tool will be located. 3 Release the mouse button. NOTE All formatting, table properties, and cell properties are saved in the tool palette tool, as well as text and block content. Quick Reference FIELD Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes. FIND Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. 1400 | Chapter 30 Tables TABLE Creates an empty table object. TABLEDIT Edits text in a table cell. TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format. TABLESTYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles. UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. CTABLESTYLE Sets the name of the current table style. FIELDDISPLAY Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background. FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated. TABLETOOLBAR Controls the display of the Table toolbar. Link a Table to External Data A table can be linked to data in a Microsoft Excel (XLS, .XLSX, or CSV) file. You can link to an entire spreadsheet, individual row, column, cell, or cell range in Excel. NOTE Microsoft Excel must be installed to use Microsoft Excel data links. To link to the XLSX filetype, Microsoft Excel 2007 must be installed. You can bring data from Microsoft Excel into a table in the following three ways: ■ As formulas with supported data formats attached. ■ As calculated data from formulas calculated in Excel (supported data formats not attached). Link a Table to External Data | 1401 ■ As calculated data from formulas calculated in Excel (with data formats attached). A table that contains data links displays indicators around linked cells. If you hover your mouse cursor over the data link, information about the data link is displayed. If a linked spreadsheet has been changed, such as adding a row or column, the table in your drawing can be updated accordingly using the DATALINKUPDATEcommand. Likewise, if a change is made to a table in your drawing, then you can update the linked spreadsheet using the same command. 1402 | Chapter 30 Tables By default, a data link is locked from editing to prevent undesired changes to the linked spreadsheet. You can lock cells from data changes, format changes, or both. To unlock a data link, click Locking on either the Table ribbon contextual tab or the Table toolbar. See also: ■ Extract Data from Drawings and Spreadsheets on page 1833 To link to a table in an external spreadsheet 1 In your table, select the table cells to link. 2 On either the Table ribbon contextual tab or Table toolbar, click Link Cell. 3 In the Data Link Manager tree view, select Click to Create a New Excel Data Link. 4 In the Enter Data Link Name dialog box, enter a name for the data link. Click OK. 5 Click the [...] button to browse for the XLS or CSV file to link. 6 In the New Excel Data Link dialog box, do one of the following: ■ Select Link to a Named Range. Click OK. ■ Select Link to Range. Enter a valid range from the Excel spreadsheet (for example, A1:D17). Click OK. 7 Select the new data link in the Data Link Manager tree view. Click OK. To remove a link to an external spreadsheet 1 Click inside a cell within the data linked table to select the cell. 2 Right-click and click Data Links ➤ Detach Data Link. To set up a named range in Microsoft Excel 1 In Microsoft Excel, open the workbook or spreadsheet that you want to access. 2 Select a range of cells to function as a linked range. 3 In the Name Box, enter a name for the range of cells, then press Enter. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3, if desired, to specify additional linked ranges. Link a Table to External Data | 1403 5 On the File menu (Microsoft Excel), choose Save. To open an external spreadsheet from a data link 1 Select any cell in the linked table or range of linked cells. 2 Right-click and click Data Links ➤ Open Data Link File. Quick Reference DATALINK Displays the Data Link dialog box. DATALINKUPDATE Updates data to or from an established external data link. DATALINKNOTIFY Controls the notification for updated or missing data links. Work with Table Styles The appearance of the table is controlled by its table style. You can use the default table style, STANDARD, or create your own table styles. When you create a new table style, you can specify a starting table. A starting table is a table in your drawing that is used as an example for formatting the new table style. Once a table is selected, you can specify the structure and contents to copy from that table to the table style. Cell styles can be created and applied to a table style upon insertion of a new table. A table style can specify different cell styles in each type of row to display a different justification and appearance for the text and gridlines. These cell styles are specified upon insertion of a table. The STANDARD table style, for example, contains a cell style consisting of merged cells with text that is centered. This cell style, named Title, can be specified as the first row cell of the table. This creates a title row at the top of the new table. The table can read from top to bottom or from the bottom up. The number of columns and rows is almost unlimited. The border properties in a table’s cell style control the display of the gridlines that divide the table into cells. The borders of the title row, the column heads row, and the data rows can have different lineweight and color and can be 1404 | Chapter 30 Tables displayed or not displayed. The Cell Style preview image in the bottom right corner of the Table Style dialog box updates as you select border options. The appearance of text in the cells of the table is controlled by the text style that is specified in the current cell style. You can use any text style in the drawing or create a new one. You can also use DesignCenter to copy table styles from other drawings. You can define the data and formatting for any cell style within a table style. You can also overwrite the data and formatting for specific cells. For example, you could set the formatting for all column heading rows to display text in uppercase, and then select a single table cell to display text in lowercase. The type of data you display in a row and the formatting for that data type is controlled by the formatting options you select in the Table Cell Format dialog box. See also: ■ Work with Text Styles on page 1363 To define or modify a cell style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Table Style. 2 Select the table style that contains the cell style you want to modify, or click New to create a new table style. 3 In the Table Style dialog box, in the Cell Styles drop-down list, select a cell style to modify, or create a new cell style by clicking the button to the right of the drop-down list. 4 Click OK. To create a table style from an existing table 1 Click a gridline to select the table. 2 Right-click and click Table Style ➤ Save as New Table Style. To create a cell style from an existing cell 1 Click inside the cell to create a cell style from. 2 Right-click and click Cell Style ➤ Save as New Cell Style. Work with Table Styles | 1405 To apply a new table style to a table 1 Click a gridline to select the table. 2 Right-click and select Table Style. 3 On the Table Style flyout, select a table style from the list. The new table style is applied to the table. NOTE If the previous table style had a title row and the new one does not, the title text is placed in the first cell of the table, and the other cells in the first row are left blank. 4 Press Esc twice to remove selection. Quick Reference FIND Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. TABLE Creates an empty table object. TABLEDIT Edits text in a table cell. TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format. 1406 | Chapter 30 Tables TABLESTYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles. UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. CTABLESTYLE Sets the name of the current table style. FIELDDISPLAY Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background. FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated. Add Text and Blocks to Tables Table cell data can include text and multiple blocks. When a table is created, the first cell is highlighted, the Text Formatting toolbar is displayed, and you can begin entering text. The row height of the cell increases to accommodate the number of lines of text. To move to the next cell, press TAB, or use the arrow keys to move left, right, up, and down. You can quickly edit cell text by pressing F2 in a selected cell. When you insert a block into a table cell, either the block can be automatically fit to the size of the cell, or the cell can adjust to accommodate the size of the block. Blocks can be inserted from the Table toolbar, or from the shortcut menu. Multiple blocks can be inserted in a table cell. If there is more than one block in a table cell, use the Manage Cell Content dialog box to customize the way the cell content is displayed. Add Text and Blocks to Tables | 1407 Inside the cell, the arrow keys move the cursor. Use the Table toolbar and the shortcut menu to format text, import text, or make other changes to the text in the cell. See also: ■ Use Fields in Text on page 1352 ■ Create Multiline Text on page 1308 To define or modify data formats 1 In a table, click the table cells where you want to redefine data and formatting. 2 On the Table toolbar, click Data Format. 3 Choose a data type, format, and other options for the selected table cells. 4 Enter data in the selected table cells. The data type and format you chose determines how the data is displayed. 5 Click OK. To change the properties of cells in a table 1 Click inside the table cell you want to change. 1408 | Chapter 30 Tables Hold down Shift and click inside another cell to select those two cells and all the cells between them. 2 Use one of the following methods: ■ To change one or more properties, in the Properties palette, click the value you want to change and enter or select a new value. ■ To restore the default properties, right-click. Click Remove Property Overrides. To copy the properties of a cell to other cells 1 Click inside the table cell whose properties you want to copy. 2 (Optional) To view the current properties of the selected table cell, press Ctrl+1 to open the Properties palette. All the properties of the cell are copied except the cell type: text or block. 3 On the Table toolbar, click Match Cell. The cursor changes to a paintbrush. 4 To copy the properties to another table cell in the drawing, click inside the cell. 5 Right-click or press Esc to stop copying properties. To change the lineweight, linetype, or color of the borders of table cells 1 Click inside the table cell you want to change. Hold down Shift and click inside another cell to select those two cells and all the cells between them. 2 On the Table toolbar, click Cell Borders. 3 In the Cell Border Properties dialog box, select a lineweight, linetype and color. To specify a double line border, select Double Line. Use BYBLOCK to set the border properties to match the settings in the table style that has been applied to the table. 4 Click one of the border type buttons to specify which borders of the cell to modify, or select a border in the preview image. 5 Click OK. 6 Move the cursor outside the Properties palette, and press Esc to remove selection, or select another cell. Add Text and Blocks to Tables | 1409 To insert a block in a table cell 1 Select and right-click a cell. Click Insert ➤ Block. 2 In the Insert dialog box, select a block from the list of blocks in the drawing, or click Browse to find a block in another drawing. 3 Specify the following properties for the block: ■ Cell Alignment. Specifies alignment for the block in the table cell. The block is middle-, top-, or bottom-aligned with respect to the top and bottom borders of the cell. The block is center-, left-, or right-aligned with respect to the left and right borders of the cell. ■ Scale. Specifies the scale for the block reference. Enter a value or select AutoFit to scale the block to fit in the selected cell. ■ Rotation Angle. Specifies a rotation angle for the block. 4 Click OK. If the block has attributes attached, the Edit Attributes dialog box is displayed. To insert a field in a table cell 1 Double-click inside the table cell. 2 On the Table toolbar, click Insert Field, or press Ctrl+F. 3 In the Field dialog box, select a category in the Field Category list to display the field names in that category. 4 Select a field. 5 Select the format or other options available for that field. 6 Click OK. Quick Reference FIELD Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes. FIND Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text. 1410 | Chapter 30 Tables INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MATCHCELL Applies the properties of a selected table cell to other table cells. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. TABLE Creates an empty table object. TABLEDIT Edits text in a table cell. TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format. TABLESTYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles. UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. CTABLESTYLE Sets the name of the current table style. FIELDDISPLAY Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background. FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated. Add Text and Blocks to Tables | 1411 Use Formulas in Table Cells Table cells can contain formulas that do calculations using the values in other table cells. With a table cell selected, you can insert formulas from the Table toolbar as well as the shortcut menu. You can also open the In-Place Text Editor and enter a formula in a table cell manually. Insert a Formula In formulas, cells are referred to by their column letter and row number. For example, the cell at top left in the table is A1. Merged cells use the number of what would be the top-left cell. A range of cells is defined by the first and last cells, with a colon between them. For example, the range A5:C10 includes cells in rows 5 through 10 in columns A, B, and C. A formula must start with an equal sign (=). The formulas for sum, average, and count ignore empty cells and cells that do not resolve to a numeric value. Other formulas display an error (#) if any cell in the arithmetic expression is empty or contains nonnumeric data. Use the Cell option on the shortcut menu to select a cell in another table in the same drawing. When you have selected the cell, the In-Place Text Editor opens so you can enter the rest of the formula. You can also insert a formula using the Table toolbar. Copy a Formula When you copy a formula to another cell in the table, the range changes to reflect the new location. For example, if the formula in A10 sums A1 through A9, when you copy it to B10, the range of cells changes so that it sums B1 through B9. If you don't want a cell address to change when you copy and paste the formula, add a dollar sign ($) to the column or row part of the address. For example, if you enter $A10, the column stays the same and the row changes. If you enter $A$10, both column and row stay the same. Insert Data Automatically You can automatically increment data in adjacent cells within a table by using the AutoFill grip. For example, a table with a date column can have the dates automatically entered by entering the first necessary date and dragging the AutoFill grip. 1412 | Chapter 30 Tables Numbers will fill automatically by increments of 1 if one cell is selected and dragged. Similarly, dates will resolve by increments of one day if only one cell is selected. If two cells are manually filled with dates one week apart, the remaining cells are incremented by one week. See also: ■ Use Fields in Text on page 1352 To add a formula to table cells 1 Select the table cell where you want to place the formula by clicking inside it. The Table toolbar is displayed. 2 On the Table toolbar, click one of the following: ■ Insert Formula ➤ Average ■ Insert Formula ➤ Sum ■ Insert Formula ➤ Count ■ Insert Formula ➤ Cell 3 Follow the prompts. 4 Edit the formula, if necessary. 5 To save your changes and exit the editor, click in the drawing outside the editor. To manually enter a formula in a table cell 1 Double-click inside a table cell. The In-place Text Editor opens. 2 Enter a formula (a function or an arithmetic expression), as in the following examples: ■ =sum(a1:a25,b1). Sums the values in the first 25 rows of column A and the first row in column B. ■ =average(a100:d100). Calculates the average of the values in the first 4 columns in row 100. ■ =count(a1:m500). Displays the total number of cells in column A through column M in rows 1 through 100. Use Formulas in Table Cells | 1413 ■ =(a6+d6)/e1. Adds the values in A6 and D6 and divides the total by the value in E1. Use a colon to define a range of cells and a comma for individual cells. A formula must start with an equal sign (=) and can contain any of the following signs: plus (+), minus (-), times (*), divided by (/), exponent (^), and parentheses (). 3 To save your changes and exit the editor, click in the drawing outside the editor. The cell displays the result of the calculation. To change the background color of column letters and row numbers for tables 1 Click a grid line to select a table. 2 Right-click. Click Table Indicator Color. 3 In the Select Color dialog box, select a color. 4 Click OK. The text color, size, and style and the line color are controlled by the settings for column heads in the current table style. To insert a Formula field in a table cell 1 Click inside the table cell. 2 On the Table toolbar, click Insert Field. 3 In the Field dialog box, Field Category list, select Objects. 4 In Field Names, select Formula. 5 To enter a formula, do one of the following: ■ Click Average, Sum, or Count. The Field dialog box closes temporarily. To specify a range, click inside the first and the last cell. The result is appended to the formula. ■ Click Cell. The Field dialog box closes temporarily. Select a cell in a table in the drawing. The cell address is appended to the formula. 6 (Optional) Select a format and a decimal separator. 7 Click OK. 1414 | Chapter 30 Tables 8 To save your changes and exit the editor, click in the drawing outside the editor. The cell displays the result of the calculation. To automatically fill cells with incremented data 1 Double-click inside a table cell. 2 Enter a numeric value; for example, 1 or 01/01/2000. 3 Press the down arrow and enter the next desired numeric value. 4 On the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK. To change the format of the cell data, right-click the cell. Select Data Format. 5 Select the cell or cells from which you want to increment data from. 6 Click the grip in the lower right corner of the cell or cells. To change AutoFill options, right-click the AutoFill grip in the bottom right-hand corner of the selected cell range and select an AutoFill option. 7 Drag the grip through the cells you would like to automatically increment. A preview of the value for each cell will display to the right of the selected grip. Quick Reference FIELD Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. TABLE Creates an empty table object. TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format. TABLESTYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles. Use Formulas in Table Cells | 1415 UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. CTABLESTYLE Sets the name of the current table style. FIELDDISPLAY Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background. FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated. TABLEINDICATOR Controls the display of row numbers and column letters when the In-Place Text Editor is open for editing a table cell. 1416 | Chapter 30 Tables Dimensions and Tolerances 31 You can add measurements to your drawing with several dimensioning commands. Use dimension styles to format dimensions quickly and maintain industry or project dimensioning standards. Understand Basic Concepts of Dimensioning You can create several types of dimensions, and you can control their appearance by setting up dimension styles or by editing individual dimensions. Overview of Dimensioning Dimensioning is the process of adding measurement annotation to a drawing. You can create dimensions for a variety of object types in many orientations. The basic types of dimensioning are ■ Linear ■ Radial (radius, diameter and jogged) ■ Angular ■ Ordinate ■ Arc Length Linear dimensions can be horizontal, vertical, aligned, rotated, baseline, or continued (chained). Some examples are shown in the illustration. 1417 NOTE To simplify drawing organization and dimension scaling, it is recommended that you create dimensions on layouts rather than in model space. To create a dimension 1 Create a layer designated for dimensions and make it the current layer. 2 Near the bottom-left corner of the application window, click a layout tab. 3 Click Dimension menu. Click a dimension option. 4 Follow the Command prompts. Quick Reference Commands DIMANGULAR Creates an angular dimension. DIMARC Creates an arc length dimension. DIMBREAK Breaks or restores dimension and extension lines where they cross other objects. DIMDIAMETER Creates a diameter dimension for a circle or an arc. 1418 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances DIMEDIT Edits dimension text and extension lines. DIMBREAK Adds or removes inspection information for a selected dimension. DIMJOGGED Creates jogged dimensions for circles and arcs. DIMBREAK Adds or removes a jog line on a linear or aligned dimension. DIMLINEAR Creates a linear dimension. DIMORDINATE Creates ordinate dimensions. DIMRADIUS Creates a radius dimension for a circle or an arc. DIMREASSOCIATE Associates or reassociates selected dimensions to objects or points on objects. DIMBREAK Adjusts the spacing between linear dimensions or angular dimensions. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. DIMTEDIT Moves and rotates dimension text and relocates the dimension line. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. QDIM Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects. Overview of Dimensioning | 1419 System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. Parts of a Dimension Here is a list of the parts of a dimension along with their descriptions. Dimensions have several distinct elements: dimension text, dimension lines, arrowheads, and extension lines. Dimension text is a text string that usually indicates the measurement value. The text can also include prefixes, suffixes, and tolerances. A dimension line indicates the direction and extent of a dimension. For angular dimensions, the dimension line is an arc. Arrowheads, also called symbols of termination, are displayed at each end of the dimension line. You can specify different sizes and shapes for arrowheads or tick marks. Extension lines, also called projection lines or witness lines, extend from the feature to the dimension line. A center mark is a small cross that marks the center of a circle or arc. Centerlines are broken lines that mark the center of a circle or arc. 1420 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. Associative Dimensions Dimensions can be associative, nonassociative, or exploded. Associative dimensions adjust to changes in the geometric objects that they measure. Dimension associativity defines the relationship between geometric objects and the dimensions that give their distance and angles. There are three types of associativity between geometric objects and dimensions. ■ Associative dimensions. Automatically adjust their locations, orientations, and measurement values when the geometric objects associated with them are modified. Dimensions in a layout may be associated to objects in model space. The DIMASSOC system variable is set to 2. ■ Nonassociative dimensions. Selected and modified with the geometry they measure. Nonassociative dimensions do not change when the geometric objects they measure are modified. The dimension variable DIMASSOC is set to 1. ■ Exploded dimensions. Contain a collection of separate objects rather than a single dimension object. The DIMASSOC system variable is set to 0. You can determine whether a dimension is associative or nonassociative by selecting the dimension and doing one of the following: ■ Use the Properties palette to display the properties of the dimension. ■ Use the LIST command to display the properties of the dimension. Associative Dimensions | 1421 You can also use the Quick Select dialog box to filter the selection of associative or nonassociative dimensions. A dimension is considered associative even if only one end of the dimension is associated with a geometric object. The DIMREASSOCIATE command displays the associative and nonassociative elements of a dimension. Special Situations and Limitations You may need to use DIMREGEN to update associative dimensions after panning or zooming with a wheel mouse, after opening a drawing that was modified with an earlier release, or after opening a drawing with external references that have been modified. Although associative dimensions support most object types that you would expect to dimension, they do not support the following: ■ Hatches ■ Multiline objects ■ 2D solids ■ Objects with nonzero thickness ■ Images ■ DWF underlays When selecting objects to dimension, make sure that the objects that you select don't include a directly overlapping object that does not support associative dimensioning such as a 2D solid. Associativity is not maintained between a dimension and a block reference if the block is redefined. Associativity is not maintained between a dimension and a 3D solid if the shape of the 3D solid is modified. Dimensions created with QDIM are not associative but may be associated individually with DIMREASSOCIATE. For information about working with associative dimensions in combination with previous releases, see Save Drawings to Previous Drawing File Formats on page 1822. See also: ■ Change Dimension Associativity on page 1511 1422 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances To change the dimension associativity default 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, under Associative Dimensioning, select or clear Make New Dimensions Associative. 3 Do either or both of the following: ■ Click Apply to record the current Options settings in the system registry. ■ Click OK to record the current Options settings in the system registry and close the Options dialog box. All subsequently created dimensions in the drawing use the new setting. Unlike most other option settings, dimension associativity is saved in the drawing file rather than in the system registry. Quick Reference Commands DIMDISASSOCIATE Removes associativity from selected dimensions. DIMREASSOCIATE Associates or reassociates selected dimensions to objects or points on objects. DIMREGEN Updates the locations of all associative dimensions. EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. Associative Dimensions | 1423 System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. Use Dimension Styles You can control the appearance of dimensions by changing settings. For convenience and to help maintain dimensioning standards, you can store these settings in dimension styles. Overview of Dimension Styles A dimension style is a named collection of dimension settings that controls the appearance of dimensions, such as arrowhead style, text location, and lateral tolerances. You create dimension styles to specify the format of dimensions quickly, and to ensure that dimensions conform to industry or project standards. ■ When you create a dimension, it uses the settings of the current dimension style ■ If you change a setting in a dimension style, all dimensions in a drawing that use the style update automatically ■ You can create dimension substyles that, for specified types of dimensions, deviate from the current dimension style ■ If necessary, you can override a dimension style temporarily To set the current dimension style ■ On the Styles toolbar, in the Dimension Styles control, click the arrow and select a dimension style from the list. To create a dimension substyle 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 1424 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style from which you want to create a substyle. Click New. 3 In the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, select the type of dimension that will apply to the substyle from the Use For list. Click Continue. 4 In the New Dimension Style dialog box, select the appropriate tab and make changes to define the dimension substyle. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. Compare Dimension Styles and Variables You can view all the settings in a dimension style. Dimension styles used in externally referenced drawings are differentiated from those defined in your current drawing. You can list the dimension styles in the current drawing. You can also list all dimensioning system variables and their current status or only the variables affected by a dimension style. When you list the current status of all dimensioning system variables, any running overrides that apply to the current dimension style are listed. You can also list the differences between a named dimension style and the current dimension style. Use Externally Referenced Dimension Styles The program displays externally referenced dimension style names using the same syntax as for other externally dependent named objects. When you view externally referenced dimension styles using the Dimension Style Manager, the name of the xref displays in the Styles list as Xref:drawing name with each xref style appearing below the drawing name. For example, if the drawing file baseplat.dwg has a dimension style called FRACTIONAL-1, and you attach Compare Dimension Styles and Variables | 1425 baseplat.dwg as an xref to a new drawing, then the xref dimension style is displayed in the Styles list of the Dimension Style Manager as Xref:baseplat.dwg, and FRACTIONAL-1 appears under the drawing name. Externally referenced dimension styles can be examined, but they cannot be modified or made current. You can use an externally referenced dimension style as a template for creating a new dimension style in your current drawing. To list all dimension settings for the current dimension style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style from the Styles list. 3 Click Compare. The dimensioning system variables, their current settings, and a brief description are listed. Overrides are included. To list settings for an existing dimension style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, enter a dimension style name, or select a dimension whose dimension style you want to examine. 3 Click Compare. Affected variables, their settings, and a brief description of each are listed. Overrides are not included. To list dimension styles in the current drawing 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, under List, select All Styles or Style in Use. To compare dimension styles 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 1426 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style to compare from the Styles list. 3 Click Compare. The dimension style is compared to the current dimension style. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. Control Dimension Geometry You can control the appearance of dimension lines, extension lines, arrowheads, and center marks. Control Dimension Lines You can control dimension line properties including color, lineweight, and spacing. You can control several aspects of a dimension line. You can ■ Specify color and lineweight for visual effect and plotting ■ Suppress the dimension line or, if the dimension line is broken by text, one or both halves ■ Control the spacing between successive dimension lines in baseline dimensions Control Dimension Geometry | 1427 ■ Control the distance by which the dimension line extends beyond the extension lines for architectural tick (oblique stroke) arrowheads To modify the display of dimension lines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Lines tab, change the settings under Dimension Lines as needed. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. 1428 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances System Variables DIMCLRD Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines. DIMDLE Sets the distance the dimension line extends beyond the extension line when oblique strokes are drawn instead of arrowheads. DIMDLI Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions. DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. DIMLTYPE Sets the linetype of the dimension line. DIMLWD Assigns lineweight to dimension lines. DIMSD1 Controls suppression of the first dimension line and arrowhead. DIMSD2 Controls suppression of the second dimension line and arrowhead. DIMSOXD Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available inside the extension lines. DIMTOFL Controls whether a dimension line is drawn between the extension lines even when the text is placed outside. Control Extension Lines You can control extension line properties including color, lineweight, overshoot, and offset length. Control Dimension Geometry | 1429 You can ■ Specify color and lineweight for visual effect and plotting ■ Suppress one or both extension lines if they are unnecessary, or if there is not enough space ■ Specify how far beyond from the dimension line the extension line extends (overshoot) ■ Control the extension origin offset, the distance between the extension line origin, and the start of the extension line ■ Specify a fixed length for extension lines, as measured from the dimension line toward the extension line origin ■ Specify a noncontinuous linetype, typically used for centerlines ■ Modify the angle of the extension lines of a selected dimension to make them oblique 1430 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances Fixed-Length Extension Lines With the Dimension Style Manager, on the Lines tab, you can specify a dimension style that sets the total length of extension lines starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin point. The extension-line offset distance from the origin will never be less than the value specified by the DIMEXO system variable. See also: ■ Create Dimensions with Oblique Extension Lines on page 1471 To modify the display of extension lines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. Control Dimension Geometry | 1431 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Lines tab, under Extension Lines, change the settings as needed. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMCLRE Assigns colors to extension lines, center marks, and centerlines. DIMDLE Sets the distance the dimension line extends beyond the extension line when oblique strokes are drawn instead of arrowheads. DIMEXE Specifies how far to extend the extension line beyond the dimension line. DIMEXO Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin points. DIMFXL Sets the total length of the extension lines starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin. DIMFXLON Controls whether extension lines are set to a fixed length. DIMLTEX1 Sets the linetype of the first extension line. DIMLTEX2 Sets the linetype of the second extension line. 1432 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances DIMLWE Assigns lineweight to extension lines. DIMSE1 Suppresses display of the first extension line. DIMSE2 Suppresses display of the second extension line. Control Dimension Arrowheads You can control the arrowhead symbols in dimensions and leaders including their type, size, and visibility. You can choose from many standard types of arrowheads, or you can create your own arrowheads. Additionally, you can ■ Suppress the display of arrowheads, or use one arrowhead only ■ Apply a different type of arrowhead to each end of a dimension line ■ Control the size of arrowheads ■ Flip the direction of an arrowhead using the dimension shortcut menu NOTE Flipped arrowheads maintain their appearance in versions later than AutoCAD 2002. However, if you edit a drawing with flipped arrowheads in a release earlier than AutoCAD 2006, the arrowhead directions will revert to their original orientations. See also: ■ Customize Arrowheads on page 1435 To choose an arrowhead 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. Control Dimension Geometry | 1433 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Symbols and Arrows tab, under Arrowheads, select the arrowhead type for the first end of the dimension line. The second arrowhead is automatically set to the same type. 4 To set the second end of the dimension line to a different arrowhead type, select an arrowhead type from the Second list. 5 In the Size box, enter a size for the arrowhead. 6 Click OK. 7 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. To flip the direction of an arrowhead 1 At the Command prompt, select a single dimension object near the arrowhead that you want to flip. 2 Right-click. Click Flip Arrow. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMCLRD Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines. DIMDLE Sets the distance the dimension line extends beyond the extension line when oblique strokes are drawn instead of arrowheads. DIMSD1 Controls suppression of the first dimension line and arrowhead. DIMSD2 Controls suppression of the second dimension line and arrowhead. 1434 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances Customize Arrowheads You can create your own custom arrowheads. Arrowheads are stored as block definitions. To use your own arrowhead, provide the name of an existing block definition. For information about creating blocks, see Create Blocks Within a Drawing on page 865. NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders. Arrowhead sizing relies on the overall dimension scale factor. When you create a dimension, the block is inserted where the arrowheads would normally go. The object's X and Y scale factors are set to arrowhead size overall scale. The dimension line is trimmed by text gap x overall scale units at each end. To trim the dimension line, the rightmost block is inserted with a zero rotation angle for horizontal dimensioning. The leftmost block is rotated 180 degrees about its insertion point. NOTE The insertion point a block is defined with affects its placement as a custom arrowhead on a dimension or leader. For information on changing the insertion point of a block, see Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks on page 867. If you use paper-space scaling, the scale factor is computed before applying it to the arrowhead size value. To use your own arrowhead symbol 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Dimension Style Manager, Symbols and Arrows tab, under Arrowheads, select User Arrow from the First arrowhead list. 4 In the Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box, enter the name of your block. Click OK. 5 To choose a different custom arrowhead for the second arrowhead, repeat steps 3 and 4, choosing User Arrow from the Second arrowhead list (optional). 6 Click OK. Control Dimension Geometry | 1435 7 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. WBLOCK Writes objects or a block to a new drawing file. System Variables DIMASZ Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrowheads. DIMBLK Sets the arrowhead block displayed at the ends of dimension lines. DIMBLK1 Sets the arrowhead for the first end of the dimension line when DIMSAH is on. DIMBLK2 Sets the arrowhead for the second end of the dimension line when DIMSAH is on. DIMCLRD Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines. DIMDLE Sets the distance the dimension line extends beyond the extension line when oblique strokes are drawn instead of arrowheads. DIMSAH Controls the display of dimension line arrowhead blocks. 1436 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances DIMTSZ Specifies the size of oblique strokes drawn instead of arrowheads for linear, radius, and diameter dimensioning. Control Dimension Text You can control the placement of dimension text, arrowheads, and leader lines relative to the dimension and extension lines. Fit Dimension Text Within Extension Lines Dimension text and arrowheads usually appear between the extension lines when there is enough space. You can specify how these elements are placed when space is limited. Many factors, such as the size of extension line spacing and arrowhead size, influence how dimension text and arrowheads fit within the extension lines. In general, the best fit, given the available space, is applied. If possible, both text and arrowheads are accommodated between the extension lines, no matter what fit option you choose. When creating new dimensions, you can choose to place text by entering a coordinate or using the pointing device; this is known as user-defined text placement. Alternatively, the program can compute the text position for you. The options for automatic fitting of text and arrowheads are listed in the Dimension Style Manager, Fit tab. For example, you can specify that text and arrowheads be kept together. In this case, if there is not room for both between the extension lines, they are both placed outside. You can specify that if there is room for only text or arrowheads, then either text only or arrowheads only are placed between the extension lines. The following illustrations show how the program applies a "best fit" for arrowheads and text. Control Dimension Text | 1437 If there is no room for text between the extension lines, you can have a leader line created automatically. This is useful in cases where text outside the extension lines would interfere with other geometry, for example, in continued dimensions. Whether text is drawn to the right or the left of the leader is controlled by the horizontal justification setting on the Text tab of the Modify/New Dimension Style dialog box. Also, you can fit text and arrowheads by changing their size. Even if the arrowheads are outside the extension lines, you can have a line drawn between the extension lines. This is called forcing an internal line and is illustrated as follows. Fit Diameter Dimension Text You can draw several different diameter dimensions depending on text placement, horizontal settings on the Text tab, and whether you select the Draw Dim Line Between Ext Lines option on the Fit tab. 1438 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances To place text within extension lines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Fit Options, select an option. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. If there is enough room, text is fit between extension lines. To force an internal line and choose a fit option 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, Under Fine Tuning, select Always Draw Dim Line Between Ext Lines. 4 Under Fit Options, select an option. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. Control Dimension Text | 1439 System Variables DIMATFIT Determines how dimension text and arrows are arranged when space is not sufficient to place both within the extension lines. DIMJUST Controls the horizontal positioning of dimension text. DIMLWD Assigns lineweight to dimension lines. DIMTAD Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line. DIMTXTDIRECTION Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text. DIMTIH Controls the position of dimension text inside the extension lines for all dimension types except Ordinate. DIMTIX Draws text between extension lines. DIMTOFL Controls whether a dimension line is drawn between the extension lines even when the text is placed outside. DIMTOH Controls the position of dimension text outside the extension lines. DIMTVP Controls the vertical position of dimension text above or below the dimension line. DIMUPT Controls options for user-positioned text. 1440 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances Control the Location of Dimension Text You can locate dimension text manually and specify its alignment and orientation. The program comes with several justification settings that facilitate compliance with international standards, or you can choose your own location for the text. Many of the settings are interdependent. Example images in the Dimension Style Manager are updated dynamically to illustrate how text appears as you change the settings. Align Dimension Text Whether text is inside or outside the extension lines, you can choose whether it is aligned with the dimension line or remains horizontal. The following examples show two combinations of these options. The default alignment is horizontal dimension text, even for vertical dimensions. Control Dimension Text | 1441 Position Dimension Text Horizontally The position of the text along the dimension line in relation to the extension lines is referred to as text placement. To place text yourself when you create a dimension, use the Place Text Manually When Dimensioning option on the Fit tab of the Modify/New Dimension Style dialog box. Use the text placement options to automatically place text at the center of the dimension line, at either extension line, or over either extension line. First and second extension lines are defined by the order in which you specified the extension line origins when you created the dimension. For angular dimensions, the second extension line is counterclockwise from the first. In the following illustrations, 1 is the first extension line origin and 2 the second. If you place text manually, you can place the dimension text anywhere along the dimension line, inside or outside the extension lines, as you create the dimension. This option provides flexibility and is especially useful when space is limited. However, the horizontal alignment options provide better accuracy and consistency between dimensions. 1442 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances Position Dimension Text Vertically The position of the text relative to the dimension line is referred to as vertical text placement. Text can be placed above or below or centered within the dimension line. In the ANSI standards, centered text usually splits the dimension line. In the ISO standards, it is usually above or outside the dimension line. For example, ISO standards permit angular dimension text to appear in any of the ways shown. Other settings, such as Text Alignment, affect the vertical alignment of text. For example, if Horizontal Alignment is selected, text inside the extension lines and centered within the dimension line is horizontal, as shown in the leftmost illustration above. The text is horizontal even if the dimension line is not itself horizontal. To align text with the dimension line 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Text tab, under Text Alignment, select Aligned with Dimension Line. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Control Dimension Text | 1443 To place text at the second extension line 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Text tab, under Text Placement, select Over Ext Line 2 from the Horizontal list box. The example area reflects your selection. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. To place dimension text manually 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Fine Tuning, select Place Text Manually When Dimensioning. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. As you create dimensions, you can move the text along the dimension line. Use the pointing device or enter coordinates to specify the dimension line and text locations. To place text above the dimension line 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Text tab, under Text Placement, select Above from the Vertical list box. The example area reflects your selection. 1444 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. DIMTEDIT Moves and rotates dimension text and relocates the dimension line. System Variables DIMJUST Controls the horizontal positioning of dimension text. DIMTAD Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line. DIMTXTDIRECTION Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text. DIMTIH Controls the position of dimension text inside the extension lines for all dimension types except Ordinate. DIMTOH Controls the position of dimension text outside the extension lines. DIMTVP Controls the vertical position of dimension text above or below the dimension line. DIMUPT Controls options for user-positioned text. Control Dimension Text | 1445 Control the Appearance of Dimension Text You can include prefixes, suffixes, and user-supplied text in dimensions. You can also control the text style and formatting used in dimension text. The program supports a mixture of user-supplied text, prefixes and suffixes supplied by the dimension style, and generated measurements. For example, you could add a diameter symbol as a prefix to a measurement or add the abbreviation for a unit, such as mm, as a suffix. Text in this context refers to all dimension text, prefixes and suffixes, primary and alternate units, and lateral tolerances. Geometric tolerances are controlled independently. Dimension text is treated as a single string of text, which you create and format using your text editor. Control the Text Style in Dimensions The appearance of dimension text is governed by the text style selected in the Dimension Style Manager, Text tab. You can choose a text style while creating a dimension style and specify a text color and a height independent of the current text style's height setting. You can also specify the gap between base dimension text and the box that surrounds it. The text styles used for dimensions are the same text styles used by all text created in your drawing. For more information, see Work with Text Styles on page 1363. Supply User Text to Dimensions In addition to the prefixes and suffixes specified for primary and alternate units, you can supply your own text as you create a dimension. Because the prefix, suffix, and user-supplied text form a single text string, you can represent tolerance stacks and apply changes to font, text size, and other characteristics using the text editor. To add user text above and below the dimension line, use the separator symbol \X. Text that precedes this symbol is aligned with and above the dimension line. Text that follows the \X symbol is aligned with and below the dimension line. The space between the dimension line and the text is determined by the value you enter under Gap in the Annotation dialog box. Example: User Text in Dimensions In this example, the primary dimension measurement is 5.08, and the alternate dimension measurement is 2.00. The primary units have the suffix H7/h6, and the alternate units have the suffix inches. 1446 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances At the text prompt, while creating the dimension, you enter the following format string: <> H7/h6\XSee Note 26\P[ ] The angle brackets represent the primary units, and the square brackets represent the alternate units. The \X separates text above the dimension line from text below the dimension line. The \P is a paragraph break. The resulting text appears as follows: To control the text style in dimensions 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Text tab, under Text Appearance, select a text style. 4 If the current text style does not have a fixed height, enter the height of dimension text in the Text Height box. 5 Under Tolerances, enter a height for tolerance values in the Scaling for Height box. 6 In the Offset from Dim Line box, enter a value for the gap around base dimension text. 7 Select a color from the Text Color box. 8 Click OK 9 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Control Dimension Text | 1447 Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMCLRT Assigns colors to dimension text. DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. DIMTFAC Specifies a scale factor for the text height of fractions and tolerance values relative to the dimension text height, as set by DIMTXT. DIMTFILL Controls the background of dimension text. DIMTFILLCLR Sets the color for the text background in dimensions. DIMTXSTY Specifies the text style of the dimension. DIMTXT Specifies the height of dimension text, unless the current text style has a fixed height. DIMTXTDIRECTION Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text. Control Dimension Values The numeric values displayed in dimensions can appear in several formats. You can also control how numeric distances are represented. 1448 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances Control the Display of Dimension Units The numeric values of dimensions can be displayed as a single measurement or in two measurement systems. In either case, you can control details of how the numeric values are presented. The settings for primary units control the display of the dimension values, including the unit format, the numeric precision, and the decimal separator style. For example, you can enter the diameter symbol as a prefix, as shown in the illustration. Any prefix you specify replaces the prefixes normally used for diameter and radius dimensions (Diameter (unicode 2205 and R, respectively). These settings are available on the Primary Units tab of the Dimension Style Manager. Control the Display of Alternate Units You can create dimensions in two systems of measurement simultaneously. A common use of this feature is to add feet and inches dimensions to drawings created using metric units. The alternate units appear in square brackets ([ ]) in the dimension text. Alternate units cannot be applied to angular dimensions. If alternate-units dimensioning is on when you edit a linear dimension, the measurement is multiplied by an alternate scale value that you specify. This value represents the number of alternate units per current unit of measurement. The default value for imperial units is 25.4, which is the number of millimeters per inch. The default value for metric units is about 0.0394, which is the number of inches per millimeter. The number of decimal places is specified by the precision value for alternate units. For example, for imperial units, if the alternate scale setting is the default value, 25.4, and the alternate precision is 0.00, the dimension might look like the following figure. Control Dimension Values | 1449 To add and format primary units 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Primary Units tab, under Linear or Angular Dimensions, select a unit format and precision value for the primary units. 4 Under Linear Dimensions, enter any prefix and suffix for the displayed dimension. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. To add and format alternate units 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Alternate Units tab, select Display Alternate Units. 4 Under Alternate Units ■ Select a unit format from the list. ■ Select a precision value for the alternate units. 1450 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances ■ Enter any prefix and suffix for the displayed dimension, including a space character if you want a gap between the dimension and the prefix or suffix. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMALT Controls the display of alternate units in dimensions. DIMALTD Controls the number of decimal places in alternate units. DIMALTF Controls the multiplier for alternate units. DIMALTTD Sets the number of decimal places for the tolerance values in the alternate units of a dimension. DIMALTU Sets the units format for alternate units of all dimension substyles except Angular. DIMALTZ Controls the suppression of zeros for alternate unit dimension values. DIMAPOST Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the alternate dimension measurement for all types of dimensions except angular. Control Dimension Values | 1451 DIMAUNIT Sets the units format for angular dimensions. DIMDEC Sets the number of decimal places displayed for the primary units of a dimension. DIMDSEP Specifies a single-character decimal separator to use when creating dimensions whose unit format is decimal. DIMLFAC Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements. DIMLUNIT Sets units for all dimension types except Angular. DIMPOST Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the dimension measurement. DIMTDEC Sets the number of decimal places to display in tolerance values for the primary units in a dimension. Round Off Dimension Values You can round off the numeric values in dimensions and lateral tolerances. You can round off all dimension values except those for angular dimensions. For example, if you specify a round-off value of 0.25, all distances are rounded to the nearest 0.25 unit. The number of digits displayed after the decimal point depends on the precision set for primary and alternate units and lateral tolerance values. 1452 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances To round off dimension values 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Primary Units tab, under Linear Dimensions, enter the round-off value. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMRND Rounds all dimensioning distances to the specified value. Suppress Zeros in Dimensions You can suppress leading and trailing zeros in the numeric portion of dimension text. You can also specify the sub unit for the dimension distance. If you suppress leading zeros in decimal dimensions, 0.500 becomes .500. If you suppress trailing zeros, 0.500 becomes 0.5. You can suppress both leading and trailing zeros so that 0.5000 becomes .5 and 0.0000 becomes 0. For dimension distances less than one unit, you can set the dimension distance to display in sub units. If the distance is shown in m, you can set to display distances less than one m in cm or mm. The table shows the effect of selecting each option and provides examples of the architectural units style. If feet are included with a fractional inch, the Control Dimension Values | 1453 number of inches is indicated as zero, no matter which option you select. Thus, the dimension 4'-3/4" becomes 4'-0 3/4". Zero suppression for feet and inches Option Effect Examples No options selected Includes zero feet and zero inches 0'-0 1/2" 0'-6" 1'-0" 1'-0 3/4" 0 Inches selected Suppresses zero inches (includes zero feet) 0'-0 1/2" 0'-6" 1' 1'-0 3/4" 0 Feet selected Suppresses zero feet (includes zero inches) 1/2" 6" 1'-0" 1'-0 3/4" 0 Feet and 0 Inches selected Suppresses zero feet and zero inches 1/2" 6" 1' 1'-0 3/4" To suppress zeros in dimension values 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Primary Units tab or Alternate Units tab, under Zero Suppression, select from the following: ■ Sub-units factor: Suppresses leading zeros in decimal values. ■ Trailing. Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal values. ■ 0 Feet. Suppresses display of 0 feet in feet and inches values. ■ 0 Inches. Suppresses display of 0 inches in feet and inches values. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. 1454 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances To display dimension value in sub units 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Primary Units tab or Alternate Units tab, under Zero Suppression, select Leading. ■ Sub-units factor: Sets the number of sub units to a unit. It is used to display the dimension distance in a sub unit, for distances less than one unit. For example, enter 100 if the suffix is m and the sub-unit suffix is to display in cm. ■ Sub-units suffix: Includes a suffix to the dimension text sub unit. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, enter cm to for .96m to display as 96cm. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMALTTZ Controls suppression of zeros in tolerance values. DIMALTZ Controls the suppression of zeros for alternate unit dimension values. DIMAZIN Suppresses zeros for angular dimensions. DIMTZIN Controls the suppression of zeros in tolerance values. Control Dimension Values | 1455 DIMZIN Controls the suppression of zeros in the primary unit value. Display Lateral Tolerances Lateral tolerances are values indicating the amount a measured distance can vary. You can control whether lateral tolerances are displayed and you can choose from several styles of lateral tolerances. A lateral tolerance specifies the amount by which a dimension can vary. By specifying tolerances in manufacturing, you can control the degree of accuracy needed for a feature. A feature is some aspect of a part, such as a point, line, axis, or surface. You can apply tolerances directly to a dimension by appending the tolerances to the dimension text. These dimension tolerances indicate the largest and smallest permissible size of the dimension. You can also apply geometric tolerances, which indicate deviations of form, profile, orientation, location, and runout. Lateral tolerances can be specified from theoretically exact measurements. These are called basic dimensions and have a box drawn around them. If the dimension value can vary in both directions, the plus and minus values you supply are appended to the dimension value as deviation tolerances. If the deviation tolerance values are equal, they are displayed with a sign and they are known as symmetrical. Otherwise, the plus value goes above the minus value. If the tolerances are applied as limits, the program uses the plus and minus values you supply to calculate a maximum and minimum value. These values replace the dimension value. If you specify limits, the upper limit goes above the lower. 1456 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances Format Lateral Tolerances You can control the vertical placement of tolerance values relative to the main dimension text. Tolerances can align with the top, middle, or bottom of the dimension text. Along with vertical placement of tolerance values, you can also control the horizontal alignment of the upper and lower tolerance values.The upper and lower tolerance values can be aligned using either the operational symbols or decimal separators. You can also control zero suppression as you can with the primary and alternate units. Suppressing zeros in lateral tolerances has the same effect as suppressing them in the primary and alternate units. If you suppress leading zeros, 0.5 becomes .5, and if you suppress trailing zeros, 0.5000 becomes 0.5. Control Dimension Values | 1457 See also: ■ Add Geometric Tolerances on page 1513 To specify methods for lateral tolerances 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Tolerances tab, under Tolerance Format, select a method from the Method list, and then do one of the following: ■ If you select Limits, enter upper and lower tolerance deviation in the Upper Value and Lower Value boxes. ■ If you select Symmetrical tolerances, Lower Value is not available, because you need only one tolerance value. ■ If you select Basic, enter a value in Offset from Dim Line (on the Text tab) to represent the gap between the text and its enclosing box. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. To align and suppress zeros in tolerance values 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Tolerances tab, under Tolerance Format, select the alignment from the Vertical Position list. 4 To suppress zeros in primary or alternate units, under Zero Suppression, select Leading to suppress leading zeros. Select Trailing to suppress trailing zeros. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. 1458 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMALTTD Sets the number of decimal places for the tolerance values in the alternate units of a dimension. DIMALTTZ Controls suppression of zeros in tolerance values. DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. DIMLIM Generates dimension limits as the default text. DIMTDEC Sets the number of decimal places to display in tolerance values for the primary units in a dimension. DIMTFAC Specifies a scale factor for the text height of fractions and tolerance values relative to the dimension text height, as set by DIMTXT. DIMTM Sets the minimum (or lower) tolerance limit for dimension text when DIMTOL or DIMLIM is on. DIMTOL Appends tolerances to dimension text. DIMTP Sets the maximum (or upper) tolerance limit for dimension text when DIMTOL or DIMLIM is on. Control Dimension Values | 1459 DIMTZIN Controls the suppression of zeros in tolerance values. Control the Display of Fractions You can control the format of the fraction displayed in dimensions. You can set the fraction format in dimensions using the DIMFRAC system variable when the DIMLUNIT system variable is set to 4 (architecture) or 5 (fractional). The following illustration shows the different fraction formats available. These settings are available on the Primary Units tab of the Dimension Style Manager. To specify the fraction format 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Primary Units tab, under Linear dimensions, select one of the following from Fraction format: ■ Horizontal ■ Diagonal ■ Not Stacked 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. 1460 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMFRAC Sets the fraction format when DIMLUNIT is set to 4 (Architectural) or 5 (Fractional). DIMLUNIT Sets units for all dimension types except Angular. Set the Scale for Dimensions You can specify the size of dimensions in your drawing. How you set dimension size depends on the method you use to lay out and plot drawings. Dimension scale affects the size of the dimension geometry relative to the objects in the drawing. Dimension scale affects sizes, such as text height and arrowhead size, and offsets, such as the extension line origin offset. You should set these sizes and offsets to values that represent their actual plotted size. Dimension scale does not apply the overall scale factor to tolerances or measured lengths, coordinates, or angles. NOTE You can use annotative scaling to control the overall scale of dimensions displayed in layout viewports. When you create annotative dimensions, they are scaled based on the current annotation scale setting and automatically displayed at the correct size. Setting dimension scale depends on how you lay out your drawing. There are three methods used to create dimensions in a drawing layout: ■ Dimension in model space for plotting in model space. This is the traditional method used with single-view drawings. To create dimensions that are scaled correctly for plotting, set the DIMSCALE system variable to the inverse of the intended plot scale. For example, if the plot scale is 1/4, set DIMSCALE to 4. Set the Scale for Dimensions | 1461 ■ Dimension in model space for plotting in paper space. This was the preferred method for complex, multiple-view drawings prior to AutoCAD 2002. Use this method when the dimensions in a drawing need to be referenced by other drawings (xrefs) or when creating isometric dimensions in 3D isometric views. To prevent the dimensions in one layout viewport from being displayed in other layout viewports, create a dimensioning layer for each layout viewport that is frozen in all other layout viewports. To create dimensions that are scaled automatically for display in a paper space layout, set the DIMSCALE system variable to 0. ■ Dimension in layouts. This is the simplest dimensioning method. Dimensions are created in paper space by selecting model space objects or by specifying object snap locations on model space objects. By default, associativity between paper space dimensions and model space objects is maintained. No additional scaling is required for dimensions created in a paper space layout: DIMLFAC and DIMSCALE do not need to be changed from their default value of 1.0000. NOTE When you dimension model space objects in paper space using associative dimensions, dimension values for the display scale of each viewport are automatically adjusted. This adjustment is combined with the current setting for DIMLFAC and is reported by the LIST command as a dimension style override. For nonassociative dimensions, you must set DIMLFAC manually. See also: ■ Draw, Scale, and Annotate in Model Space on page 385 ■ Scale Views in Layout Viewports on page 410 ■ Scale Annotations on page 1224 To set the overall dimension scale 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Scale for Dimension Features, enter a value for the overall scale. 4 Click OK. 1462 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. To set the dimension scale for model space dimensions in layouts 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Scale for Dimension Features, select Scale Dimension to Layout (Paper space). 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. To set dimension scale for creating dimensions in a layout 1 Click a layout tab to switch to paper space. 2 To create dimensions in paper space with the correct model space dimension values, use object snap modes to snap to points in model space from paper space or select the objects directly. The DIMLFAC system variable can be changed if you need to convert the linear dimension values between the imperial and metric measurement systems. Quick Reference Commands DIMREGEN Updates the locations of all associative dimensions. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. Set the Scale for Dimensions | 1463 DIMLFAC Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements. DIMSCALE Sets the overall scale factor applied to dimensioning variables that specify sizes, distances, or offsets. Create Dimensions You can create all of the standard types of dimensions. Create Linear Dimensions You can create linear dimensions with horizontal, vertical, and aligned dimension lines. These linear dimensions can also be stacked, or they can be created end to end. Overview of Creating Linear Dimensions Linear dimensions can be horizontal, vertical, or aligned. With aligned dimensions, the dimension line is parallel to the line (imaginary or real) between the extension line origins. Baseline (or parallel) and continued (or chain) dimensions are series of consecutive dimensions that are based on a linear dimension. In all four illustrations, the extension line origins are designated explicitly at 1 and 2, respectively. The dimension line location is specified at 3. 1464 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances As you create linear dimensions, you can modify the content of the text, the angle of the text, or the angle of the dimension line. Quick Reference Commands DIMALIGNED Creates an aligned linear dimension. DIMBASELINE Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous or selected dimension. DIMCONTINUE Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created dimension. DIMEDIT Edits dimension text and extension lines. DIMLINEAR Creates a linear dimension. Create Linear Dimensions | 1465 DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. QDIM Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects. System Variables DIMDLI Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions. Create Horizontal and Vertical Dimensions You can create dimensions using only the horizontal or vertical components of the locations or objects that you specify. The program automatically applies a horizontal or vertical dimension according to the extension line origins that you specify or the location where you select an object; however, you can override this as you create the dimension by specifying that a dimension be horizontal or vertical. For example, in the following illustration, a horizontal dimension is drawn by default unless you specify a vertical one. To create a horizontal or vertical dimension 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Linear. 2 Press Enter to select the object to dimension, or specify the first and second extension line origins. 1466 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances 3 Before specifying the dimension line location, you can override the dimension direction and edit the text, the text angle, or the dimension line angle: ■ To rotate the extension lines, enter r (Rotated). Then enter the dimension line angle. ■ To edit the text, enter m (multiline text). In the In-place Text Editor, revise the text. Click OK. Editing within or overwriting the brackets (<>) changes or removes the dimension value calculated by the program. Adding text before or after the brackets appends text before or after the dimension value. ■ To rotate the text, enter a (Angle). Then enter the text angle. 4 Specify the dimension line location. Quick Reference Commands DIMLINEAR Creates a linear dimension. System Variables DIMEXO Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin points. Create Aligned Dimensions You can create dimensions that are parallel to the locations or objects that you specify. In aligned dimensions, the dimension line is parallel to the extension line origins. The illustration shows two examples of aligned dimensioning. The object is selected (1), and the location of the aligned dimension is specified (2). The extension lines are drawn automatically. Create Linear Dimensions | 1467 To create an aligned dimension 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Aligned. 2 Press Enter to select the object to dimension, or specify the first and second extension line origins. 3 Before specifying the dimension line location, you can edit the text or change the text angle. Editing within or overwriting the brackets (<>) changes or removes the dimension value calculated by the program. Adding text before or after the brackets appends text before or after the dimension value. ■ To edit the text using multiline text, enter m (multiline text). In the In-place Text Editor, revise the text. Click OK. ■ To edit the text using single-line text, enter t (Text). Revise the text at the Command prompt and press Enter. ■ To rotate the text, enter a (Angle). Then enter the text angle. 4 Specify the dimension line location. Quick Reference Commands DIMALIGNED Creates an aligned linear dimension. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. 1468 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances System Variables DIMEXO Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin points. Create Baseline and Continued Dimensions Baseline dimensions are multiple dimensions measured from the same baseline. Continued dimensions are multiple dimensions placed end to end. You must create a linear, aligned, or angular dimension before you create baseline or continued dimensions. You create baseline dimensions incrementally from the most recently created dimension in the current session. Both baseline and continued dimensions are measured from the previous extension line unless you specify another point as the point of origin. To create a baseline linear dimension 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Baseline. By default, the origin of the last linear dimension created is used as the first extension line for the new baseline dimension. You are prompted for the second dimension line. 2 Use an object snap to select the second extension line origin, or press Enter to select any dimension as the base dimension. The program automatically places the second dimension line at the distance specified by the Baseline Spacing option in the Dimension Style Manager, Lines tab. 3 Use an object snap to specify the next extension line origin. Create Linear Dimensions | 1469 4 Continue to select extension line origins as required. 5 Press Enter twice to end the command. To create a continued linear dimension 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Continue. The program uses the origin of the second extension line of the existing dimension as the first extension line origin. 2 Use object snaps to specify additional extension line origins. 3 Press Enter twice to end the command. Quick Reference Commands DIMBASELINE Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous or selected dimension. DIMCONTINUE Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created dimension. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMDLI Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions. Create Rotated Dimensions In rotated dimensions, the dimension line is placed at an angle to the extension line origins. The illustration shows an example of a rotated dimension. In the example, the angle specified for dimension rotation is equal to the angle of the slot. 1470 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances To create a rotated dimension 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Linear. 2 Press Enter to select the object to dimension or specify the first and second extension line origins. 3 To rotate the dimension line, enter r (Rotated). Then enter the dimension line angle. 4 Specify the dimension line location. Quick Reference Commands DIMALIGNED Creates an aligned linear dimension. DIMLINEAR Creates a linear dimension. Create Dimensions with Oblique Extension Lines You can create dimensions with extension lines that are not perpendicular to their dimension lines. Extension lines are created perpendicular to the dimension line. However, if the extension lines conflict with other objects in a drawing, you can change their angle after the dimension has been drawn. Create Linear Dimensions | 1471 New dimensions are not affected when you make an existing dimension oblique. To make extension lines oblique 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Oblique.. 2 Select the dimension. 3 Enter a value for the angle of obliqueness, or specify two points. Quick Reference Commands DIMEDIT Edits dimension text and extension lines. Create Radial Dimensions Radial dimensions measure the radii and diameters of arcs and circles with optional centerlines or a center mark. 1472 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances There are two types of radial dimensions: ■ DIMRADIUS measures the radius of an arc or circle, and displays the dimension text with the letter R in front of it. ■ DIMDIAMETER measures the diameter of an arc or circle, and displays the dimension text with the diameter symbol in front of it. For horizontal dimension text, if the angle of the radial dimension line is greater than 15 degrees from horizontal, a hook line, also called a dogleg or landing, one arrowhead long, is created next to the dimension text. Control Extension Lines When an arc is dimensioned, the radial or diametric dimension does not have to be positioned along the arc directly. If a dimension is positioned past the end of an arc, either an extension line will be drawn that follows the path of the arc being dimensioned or no extension line will be drawn. When the extension line is suppressed (off), the dimension line of the radial or diametric dimension is drawn through the center point of the arc instead of to the extension line. The DIMSE1 system variable controls whether or not a radial or diametric dimension will be drawn with an extension line when it is positioned off the end of an arc. When the display of the arc extension line is not suppressed, Create Radial Dimensions | 1473 a gap between the arc and arc extension line is made. The size of the gap drawn is controlled with the DIMEXO system variable. Control Centerlines and Center Marks Depending on your dimension style settings, center marks and lines generate automatically for diameter and radius dimensions. They are created only if the dimension line is placed outside the circle or arc. You can create centerlines and center marks directly with the DIMCENTER command. You can control the size and visibility of centerlines and center marks on the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Symbols and Arrows tab, under Center Marks. You can also access this setting with the DIMCEN system variable. The size of the centerline is the length of the centerline segment that extends outside the circle or arc. It is also the size of the gap between the center mark and the start of the centerline. The size of the center mark is the distance from the center of the circle or arc to the end of the center mark. 1474 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances Create Jogged Radius Dimensions With the DIMJOGGED command, you can create jogged radius dimensions, also called “foreshortened radius dimensions,” when the center of an arc or circle is located off the layout and cannot be displayed in its true location. The origin point of the dimension can be specified at a more convenient location called the center location override. You can control the default angle of the jog in the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Symbols and Arrows tab, under Radius Dimension Jog. Once a jogged radius dimension is created, you can modify the jog and the center location override by ■ Using grips to move the features Create Radial Dimensions | 1475 ■ Changing the locations of the features with the Properties palette ■ Using STRETCH NOTE Jogged radius dimensions can be viewed but not edited in versions previous to AutoCAD 2006. Also, if you make dramatic changes to the associated geometry, you may get unpredictable results for the jogged radius dimension. See also: ■ Fit Dimension Text Within Extension Lines on page 1437 To create a diameter dimension 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Diameter. 2 Select the arc or circle to dimension. 3 Enter options as needed: ■ To edit the dimension text content, enter t (Text) or m (multiline text). Editing within or overwriting the brackets (<>) changes or removes the dimension value. Adding text before or after the brackets appends text before or after the dimension value. ■ To change the dimension text angle, enter a (Angle). 4 Specify the leader line location. To create a radius dimension 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Radius. 2 Select an arc, circle, or polyline arc segment. 3 Enter options as needed: ■ To edit the dimension text content, enter t (Text) or m (multiline text). Editing within or overwriting the brackets (<>) changes or removes the dimension value. Adding text before or after the brackets appends text before or after the dimension value. ■ To edit the dimension text angle, enter a (Angle). 1476 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances 4 Specify the leader line location. To create a jogged radius dimension 1 Click Dimension menu ➤ Jogged. 2 Select an arc, circle, or polyline arc segment. 3 Specify a point for the dimension origin (the center location override). 4 Specify a point for the dimension line angle and the dimension text location. 5 Specify another point for the location of the dimension jog. To create centerlines automatically with radial dimensions 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Symbols and Arrows tab, under Center Marks, click Line. 4 In the Size box, enter the length of the centerline overshoot. Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. The example area in the dialog box displays the results of your changes. To create centerlines or center marks on an arc or circle 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Symbols and Arrows tab, under Center Marks, click Line. 4 In the Size box, enter the length of the centerline overshoot. Click OK. Create Radial Dimensions | 1477 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Center Mark. 7 Select an arc or a circle. To change the display arc extension line for radial or diametric dimensions 1 Select the radial or diametric dimension for which you want to suppress the arc extension line. 2 Right-click in the drawing. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, Lines & Arrows category, click Ext Line. 4 Click the arrow next to Ext Line, and select On or Off from the list. ■ Select On to display the arc extension line. ■ Select Off to suppress the display of the arc extension line. 5 Press Esc to deselect the selected dimension. Quick Reference Commands DIMCENTER Creates the center mark or the centerlines of circles and arcs. DIMDIAMETER Creates a diameter dimension for a circle or an arc. DIMJOGGED Creates jogged dimensions for circles and arcs. DIMRADIUS Creates a radius dimension for a circle or an arc. DIMSTYLE Stores the name of the current dimension style. 1478 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances QDIM Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects. System Variables DIMATFIT Determines how dimension text and arrows are arranged when space is not sufficient to place both within the extension lines. DIMCEN Controls drawing of circle or arc center marks and centerlines by the DIMCENTER, DIMDIAMETER, and DIMRADIUS commands. DIMEXO Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin points. DIMJOGANG Determines the angle of the transverse segment of the dimension line in a jogged radius dimension. DIMJUST Controls the horizontal positioning of dimension text. DIMSE1 Suppresses display of the first extension line. DIMTAD Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line. DIMTXTDIRECTION Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text. DIMTIH Controls the position of dimension text inside the extension lines for all dimension types except Ordinate. DIMTMOVE Sets dimension text movement rules. DIMTOFL Controls whether a dimension line is drawn between the extension lines even when the text is placed outside. Create Radial Dimensions | 1479 DIMTOH Controls the position of dimension text outside the extension lines. DIMUPT Controls options for user-positioned text. Create Angular Dimensions Angular dimensions measure the angle between two lines or three points. To measure the angle between two radii of a circle, you select the circle and specify the angle endpoints. With other objects, you select the objects and then specify the dimension location. You can also dimension an angle by specifying the angle vertex and endpoints. As you create the dimension, you can modify the text content and alignment before specifying the dimension line location. NOTE You can create baseline and continued angular dimensions relative to existing angular dimensions. Baseline and continued angular dimensions are limited to 180 degrees or less. To obtain baseline and continued angular dimensions larger than 180 degrees, use grip editing to stretch the location of the extension line of an existing baseline or continued dimension. Dimension Lines If you use two straight, nonparallel lines to specify an angle, the dimension line arc spans the angle between the two lines. If the dimension line arc does not meet one or both of the lines being dimensioned, The program draws one or two extension lines to intersect the dimension line arc. The arc is always less than 180 degrees. Dimension Circles and Arcs If you use an arc or a circle or three points to specify an angle, the program draws the dimension line arc between the extension lines. The extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line arc. 1480 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances The location that you specify for the dimension line arc determines the quadrant of the dimensioned angle. Dimension to a Quadrant Angular dimensions can measure a specific quadrant that is formed when dimensioning the angle between of the endpoints of a line or arc, center point of a circle, or two vertices. As an angular dimension is being created, there are four possible angles that can be measured. By specifying a quadrant it allows you to ensure that the correct angle is dimensioned. When placing an angular dimension after a quadrant has been specified, you can place the dimension text outside of the extension lines of the dimension. The dimension line is automatically extended. To create an angular dimension 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Angular. 2 Use one of the following methods: ■ To dimension a circle, select the circle at the first endpoint of the angle and then specify the second endpoint of the angle. ■ To dimension any other object, select the first line, and then select the second line. Create Angular Dimensions | 1481 3 Enter options as needed: ■ To edit the dimension text content, enter t (Text) or m (multiline text). Editing within or overwriting the brackets (<>) changes or removes the calculated dimension value. Adding text before or after the brackets appends text before or after the dimension value. ■ To edit the dimension text angle, enter a (Angle). ■ To confine the dimension to a quadrant, enter q (Quadrant) and specify the quadrant to measure. 4 Specify the dimension line arc location. Quick Reference Commands DIMANGULAR Creates an angular dimension. DIMBASELINE Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous or selected dimension. DIMCONTINUE Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created dimension. System Variables DIMADEC Controls the number of precision places displayed in angular dimensions. DIMAUNIT Sets the units format for angular dimensions. DIMDEC Sets the number of decimal places displayed for the primary units of a dimension. 1482 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances Create Ordinate Dimensions Ordinate dimensions measure the perpendicular distance from an origin point called the datum to a feature, such as a hole in a part. These dimensions prevent escalating errors by maintaining accurate offsets of the features from the datum. Ordinate dimensions consist of an X or Y value with a leader line. X-datum ordinate dimensions measure the distance of a feature from the datum along the X axis. Y-datum ordinate dimensions measure the distance along the Y axis. Locate the Datum The location and orientation of the current UCS determines the ordinate values. Before creating ordinate dimensions, you typically set the UCS origin to coincide with the datum. Create Ordinate Dimensions | 1483 Locate the Leader After you specify the feature location, you are prompted for the leader endpoint. By default, the leader endpoint that you specify automatically determines whether an X- or a Y-datum ordinate dimension is created. For example, you can create an X-datum ordinate dimension by specifying a location for the leader endpoint that is closer to vertical than horizontal. After creating an ordinate dimension, you can easily relocate the dimension leader and text using grip editing. The dimension text is always aligned with the ordinate leader line. To create ordinate dimensions 1 Click View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Origin. 2 At the Specify New Origin Point prompt, specify an origin point. The origin point specified is used to define the value assigned to the ordinate dimension. Typically, the origin point is defined on the model. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Ordinate. 4 If straight ordinate leaders are required, turn Ortho mode on. 5 At the Select Feature Location prompt, specify a point location. 6 Enter x (X Datum) or y (Y Datum). You can skip this step by making sure that the ordinate leader endpoint is close to vertical for an X datum or close to horizontal for a Y datum. 7 Specify the ordinate leader endpoint. 1484 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances Quick Reference Commands DIMORDINATE Creates ordinate dimensions. QDIM Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects. UCS Manages user coordinate systems. Create Arc Length Dimensions Arc length dimensions measure the distance along an arc or polyline arc segment. Typical uses of arc length dimensions include measuring the travel distance around a cam or indicating the length of a cable. To differentiate them from linear or angular dimensions, arc length dimensions display an arc symbol by default. The arc symbol, also called a hat or cap, is displayed either above the dimension text or preceding the dimension text. You can specify the placement style using the Dimension Style Manager. The placement style can be changed on the Symbols and Arrows tab of either the New Dimension Style dialog box or the Modify Dimension Style dialog box. The extension lines of an arc length dimension can be orthogonal or radial. Create Arc Length Dimensions | 1485 NOTE Orthogonal extension lines are displayed only when the included angle of the arc is less than 90 degrees. To create an arc length dimension 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Arc Length. 2 Select an arc or polyline arc segment. 3 Specify the dimension line location. Quick Reference Commands DIMARC Creates an arc length dimension. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables DIMARCSYM Controls display of the arc symbol in an arc length dimension. Modify Existing Dimensions You can modify all components of the existing dimension objects in a drawing either individually or by using dimension styles. 1486 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances Modify A Dimension Dimensions can be modified to include more information than just the values of the dimension. Dimensions can also be modified visually by using breaks and by adjusting the spacing between them. Overview of Modifying Demensions After you place a dimension, there are times when you need to modify the information that the dimension represents. You can add a jog line to a linear dimension to indicate that the dimension value does not represent the actual dimensioned value or add an inspection dimension to represent how often a dimension value of a manufactured part should be checked. At times you might want to modify a dimension to simply improve readability. You can make sure that the extension or dimension lines do not obscure any objects; you can adjust the placement of linear dimensions so they are evenly spaced. Dimension Jog JJog lines are used to represent a dimension value that does not display the actual measurement in a linear dimension. Typically, the actual measurement value of the dimension is smaller than the displayed value. The jog is made up of two parallel lines and a cross line that forms two 40-degree angles. The height of the jog is determined by the linear jog size value of the dimension style. Once you add a jog to a linear dimension, you can position it by using grips. To reposition the jog, select the dimension and then select the grip. Move the grip to another point along the dimension line. You can also adjust the height Modify A Dimension | 1487 of the jog symbol on a linear dimension on the Properties palette under Lines & Arrows. To add a jog to a linear dimension 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Jog Line. 2 Select a linear dimension. 3 Specify a point on the dimension line to place the jog. To add a jog to a linear dimension based on the midpoint of the selected dimension line 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Jog Line. 2 Select a linear dimension. 3 Press Enter to position the jog at the midpoint of the selected dimension line. To reposition a jog using grips 1 With no command active, select the linear dimension that has the jog you want to reposition. 2 Select the grip in the middle of the jog. The selected grip is highlighted, and the default grip mode, Stretch, is active. 3 Drag the crosshairs along the dimension line and click to reposition the jog. TIP If you want to place the jog along the dimension line without changing the position of the dimension line, turn Ortho mode on. To remove a jog 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Jog Line. 2 Enter r (Remove) and press Enter. 1488 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances 3 Select the linear dimension to remove the jog from. To modify the height of a jog using the Properties palette 1 With no command active, select the linear dimension with the jog whose height you want to change. 2 Right-click over the drawing window. Click Properties. 3 On the Properties palette, expand Lines & Arrows. 4 Select Jog Height Factor, and enter a new height for the jog. 5 Click outside the Properties palette. Press Esc. Quick Reference Commands DIMALIGNED Creates an aligned linear dimension. DIMBASELINE Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous or selected dimension. DIMCONTINUE Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created dimension. DIMJOGLINE Adds or removes a jog line on a linear or aligned dimension. DIMLINEAR Creates a linear dimension. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. QDIM Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects. Modify A Dimension | 1489 Inspection Dimension Inspection dimensions allow you to effectively communicate how frequently manufactured parts should be checked to ensure that the dimension value and tolerances of the parts are within the specified range. When working with parts that need to met a specific tolerance or dimension value before installing them into the final assembled product, you can use an inspection dimension to specify how often the part should be tested. You can add an inspection dimension to any type of dimension object; it is composed of a frame and text values. The frame for an inspection dimension is made up of two parallel lines and the end is round or square. The text values are separated by vertical lines. An inspection dimension can contain up to three different fields of information: inspection label, dimension value, and inspection rate. Inspection Dimension Fields Inspection Label Text used to identify individual inspection dimensions. The label is located in the leftmost section of the inspection dimension. Dimension Value Dimension value that is displayed is the same value before the inspection dimension is added. The dimension value can contain tolerances, text (both prefix and suffix), and the measured value. The dimension value is located in the center section of the inspection dimension. Inspection Rate Text used to communicate the frequency that the dimension value should be inspected, expressed as a percentage. The rate is located in the rightmost section of the inspection dimension. You can add inspection dimensions to any type of dimension. The current values of an inspection dimension are displayed on the Properties palette, under Misc. The values include the properties that are used to control the look of the frame, and the text for both the label and rate values. 1490 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances To create an inspection dimension 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Inspect. 2 In the Inspection Dimension dialog box, click Select Dimensions. The Inspection Dimension dialog box closes. You are prompted to select dimensions. 3 Select the dimension you want to make an inspection dimension. Press Enter to return to the dialog box. 4 Under the Shape section, specify the frame type. 5 Under the Label/Inspection rate section, specify the desired options. ■ Select the Label check box, and enter the desired label in the text box. ■ Select the Inspection Rate check box, and enter the desired rate in the text box. 6 Click OK. To modify an inspection dimension from the Inspection dialog box 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Inspect. 2 In the Inspection Dimension dialog box, click Select Dimensions. The Inspection Dimension dialog box closes. You are prompted to select dimensions. 3 Select the inspection dimension you want to modify. Press Enter to return to the dialog box. 4 Under the Shape section, make the desired changes to the frame type. 5 Under the Label/Inspection rate section, make the desired changes to the label and inspection rate. 6 Click OK. To remove an inspection dimension 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Inspect. Modify A Dimension | 1491 2 In the Inspection Dimension dialog box, click Select Dimensions. The Inspection Dimension dialog box closes. You are prompted to select dimensions. 3 Select the dimension you want to remove the inspection dimension from. Press Enter to return to the dialog box. 4 Click Remove Inspection. 5 Click OK. To modify an inspection dimension using the Properties palette 1 With no command active, select the inspection dimension you want to modify. 2 Right-click over the drawing window. Click Properties. 3 On the Properties palette, double-click the Misc caption of the pane to expand it. 4 Specify the new values for the Inspection shape, label, and rate. 5 Click outside the Properties palette. Press Esc. Quick Reference Commands DIMINSPECT Adds or removes inspection information for a selected dimension. Dimension Breaks With dimension breaks, you can keep the dimension, extension, or leader lines from appearing as if they are a part of the design. Dimension breaks can be added to a dimension or a multileader automatically or manually. The method that you choose to place dimension breaks depends on the number of objects that intersect a dimension or multileader. 1492 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances You can add dimension breaks to the following dimension and leader objects: ■ Linear dimensions (aligned and rotated) ■ Angular dimensions (2- and 3-point) ■ Radial dimensions (radius, diameter, and jogged) ■ Arc length dimensions ■ Ordinate dimensions ■ Multileaders (straight only) The following dimension and leader objects do not support dimension breaks: ■ Multileaders (spline only) ■ “Legacy” leaders (straight or spline) The following table explains the conditions where dimension breaks do not work or are not supported. Dimension Break Exceptions Condition Description No break in xrefs or blocks Dimension breaks on dimensions or multileaders in xrefs and blocks are not supported. However, the objects in an xref or block can be used as the cutting edges for dimension breaks on dimensions or multileaders that are not in an xref or block. No break on arrowhead and dimension text Dimension breaks cannot be placed on an arrowhead or the dimension text. If you want a break to appear at the dimension text, it is recommended to use the background Modify A Dimension | 1493 Dimension Break Exceptions Condition Description mask option. If the intersecting point of an object and the dimension are at the arrowhead or dimension text, the break will not be displayed until the intersecting object, or dimension or multileader are moved. No break on transspatial dimensions Automatic breaks are not supported for objects and dimensions or multileaders that are in different spaces. In order to break a dimension or multileader that is in a different space, you need to use the Manual option of the DIMBREAK command. You can move dimension breaks from dimensions or multileaders. When removing dimension breaks from a dimension or multileader, all dimension breaks are removed. If there are some dimension breaks that you don’t want to remove, you need to add them again. The following objects can be used as cutting edges when adding a dimension break: ■ Dimension ■ Leader ■ Line ■ Circle ■ Arc ■ Spline ■ Ellipse ■ Polyline ■ Text ■ Multiline text ■ Blocks but limited to the previously mentioned objects in this list ■ Xrefs but limited to the previously mentioned objects in this list 1494 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances Automatic Dimension Breaks To create an automatically placed dimension break, you select a dimension or multileader, and then use the Auto option of the DIMBREAK command. Automatic dimension breaks are updated any time the dimension or multileader, or intersecting objects are modified. You control the size of automatically placed dimension breaks on the Symbols and Arrows tab of the Dimension Style dialog box. The specified size is affected by the dimension break size, dimension scale, and current annotation scale for the current viewport. For more information about annotation scaling, see Scale Annotations on page 1224. Dimension Break Created by Selecting an Object Instead of placing a dimension break for each object that intersects a dimension or multileader, you can specify which of the intersecting objects to use. Dimension breaks that are added by selecting individual intersecting objects are updated any time the dimension or multileader, or intersecting objects are modified. Dimension Break Created by Picking Two Points You can place a dimension break by picking two points on the dimension, extension, or leader line to determine the size and placement of the break. Dimension breaks that are added manually by picking two points are not automatically updated if the dimension or multileader, or intersecting object is modified. So if a dimension or multileader with a manually added dimension break is moved or the intersecting object is modified, you might have to restore the dimension or multileader, and then add the dimension break again. The size of a dimension break that is created by picking two points is not affected by the current dimension scale or annotation scale value for the current viewport. To automatically create dimension breaks for each intersecting object 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break. 2 Select a dimension or multileader. 3 Enter a (Auto) and press Enter. Modify A Dimension | 1495 To create a single dimension break based on an intersecting object 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break. 2 Select a dimension or multileader. 3 Select an object that intersects the dimension or multileader. Press Enter. To create a manual dimension break 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break. 2 Select a dimension or multileader. 3 Enter m (Manual) and press Enter. 4 Specify the first point on the dimension, extension, or leader line for the dimension break. 5 Specify the second point along the dimension, extension, or leader line for the dimension break. To create dimension breaks for multiple dimensions or multileaders at one time 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break. 2 Enter m (Multiple) and press Enter. 3 Select the dimensions or multileaders to which to add the dimension breaks. 4 Enter a (Auto) and press Enter. To remove all dimension breaks from a dimension or multileader 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break. 2 Select a dimension or multileader. 3 Enter r (Remove) and press Enter. 1496 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances To remove all dimension breaks from multiple dimensions or multileaders 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break. 2 Enter m (Multiple), and press Enter. 3 Select the dimensions or multileaders from which to remove the dimension breaks, and press Enter. 4 Enter r (Remove), and press Enter. Quick Reference Commands DIMBREAK Breaks or restores dimension and extension lines where they cross other objects. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. Adjust Dimension Spacing You can automatically adjust existing parallel linear and angular dimensions in a drawing so they are equally spaced or aligned at the dimension line with each other. Parallel linear and angular dimensions can be created in a number of different ways in a drawing. With the DIMLINEAR and DIMANGULAR commands you can place one dimension at a time; you can use the DIMBASELINE and DIMCONTINUE commands to help place additional linear dimensions based on the previous linear dimension placed. The DIMBASELINE command uses the DIMDLI system variable to create equally spaced dimensions, but once the dimensions are placed, changing the value of the system variable has no affect on the spacing of dimensions. If you change the text size or adjust the scale for the dimensions, they remain in the original position which can cause problems with overlapping dimension lines and text. You can space linear and angular dimensions that overlap or are not equally spaced with the DIMSPACE command. The dimensions that are selected must Modify A Dimension | 1497 be linear or angular, of the same type (rotated or aligned), parallel or concentric to one another, and on the extension lines of each other. You can also align linear and angular dimensions by using a spacing value of 0. The following illustration shows parallel linear dimensions that are not equally spaced and then those that are equally spaced after using the DIMSPACE command. To equally space parallel linear and angular dimensions automatically 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Adjust Space. 2 Select the dimension that you want to use as the base dimension when equally spacing dimensions. 3 Select the next dimension to equally space. 4 Continue to select dimensions and then press Enter. 5 Enter a (Auto) and press Enter. To equally space parallel linear and angular dimensions based on a distance 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Adjust Space. 2 Select the dimension that you want to use as the base dimension when equally spacing dimensions. 3 Select the next dimension to equally space. 4 Continue to select dimensions and then press Enter. 5 Enter a spacing value and press Enter. 1498 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances To align parallel linear and angular dimensions 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Adjust Space. 2 Select the dimension that you want to use as the base dimension when equally spacing dimensions. 3 Select the next dimension to align. 4 Continue to select dimensions and then press Enter. 5 Enter 0 and press Enter. Quick Reference Commands DIMALIGNED Creates an aligned linear dimension. DIMANGULAR Creates an angular dimension. DIMBASELINE Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous or selected dimension. DIMCONTINUE Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created dimension. DIMLINEAR Creates a linear dimension. DIMSPACE Adjusts the spacing between linear dimensions or angular dimensions. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. QDIM Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects. Modify A Dimension | 1499 System Variables DIMDLI Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions. Apply a New Dimension Style to Existing Dimensions You can modify existing dimensions by applying a different dimension style. If you make changes to a dimension style, you can choose whether to update the dimensions associated with that dimension style. When you create a dimension, the current dimension style is associated with that dimension. The dimension retains this dimension style unless you apply a new dimension style to it or set up dimension style overrides. You can modify existing dimensions by applying a different dimension style. If you make changes to a dimension style, you can choose whether to update the dimensions associated with that dimension style. You can restore an existing dimension style or apply the current dimension style, including any dimension style overrides, to selected dimensions. To apply the current dimension style to existing dimensions 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Update. 2 Select the dimensions to update to the current dimension style. 3 Press Enter. To restore a dimension style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the dimension style to restore. Click Set Current. 3 Click Close. 1500 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances Alternate ■ On the Styles toolbar, click the arrow in the Dimension Styles control and select a dimension style. Quick Reference Commands DIMOVERRIDE Controls overrides of system variables used in selected dimensions. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables DIMCLRD Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines. Override a Dimension Style With dimension style overrides, you can temporarily change a dimensioning system variable without changing the current dimension style. A dimension style override is a change made to specific settings in the current dimension style. It is equivalent to changing a dimensioning system variable without changing the current dimension style. You can define dimension style overrides for individual dimensions, or for the current dimension style. ■ For individual dimensions, you may want to create overrides to suppress a dimension's extension lines or modify text and arrowhead placement so that they do not overlap drawing geometry without creating a different dimension style. ■ You can also set up overrides to the current dimension style. All dimensions you create in the style include the overrides until you delete the overrides, save the overrides to a new style, or set another style current. For example, Override a Dimension Style | 1501 if you choose Override in the Dimension Style Manager, and change the color of extension lines on the Lines tab, the current dimension style remains unchanged. However, the new value for color is stored in the DIMCLRE system variable. The next dimension you create will have extension lines in the new color. You can save the dimension style overrides as a new dimension style. Some dimension characteristics are common to a drawing or to a style of dimensioning and are therefore suited to be permanent dimension style settings. Others generally apply on an individual basis and can be applied more effectively as overrides. For example, a drawing usually uses a single type of arrowhead, so it makes sense to define the arrowhead type as part of the dimension style. Suppression of extension lines, however, usually applies in individual cases only and is more suited to a dimension style override. There are several ways to set up dimension style overrides. You can change options in the dialog boxes or change system variable settings at the Command prompt. You reverse the override by returning the changed settings to their original values. The overrides apply to the dimension you are creating and all subsequent dimensions created with that dimension style until you reverse the override or make another dimension style current. Example: Change a Dimension Style Override at the Command Prompt You can override the current dimension style while creating a dimension by entering the name of any dimensioning system variable at any prompt. In this example, the dimension line color is changed. The change affects subsequent dimensions you create until you reverse the override or make another dimension style current. Command: dimoverride Enter dimension variable name to override or [Clear overrides]: dimclrd Enter new value for dimension variable : 5 Enter dimension variable name to override: Enter another dimension variable name or press Enter Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter when you finish To set up dimension style overrides 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, under Styles, select the dimension style for which you want to create an override. Click Override. 1502 | Chapter 31 Dimensions and Tolerances 3 In the Override Current Style dialog box, make changes to the dimension style by clicking the appropriate tab. 4 Click OK to return to the Dimension Style Manager. The dimension style overrides are listed below the style they modify in the dimension style name list. 5 Click Close. To apply dimension style overrides 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, click Override. 3 In the Override Current Style dialog box, enter the style overrides. Click OK. The program displays